—

RELION® PROTECTION AND CONTROL

630 series
Technical Manual
 Document ID: 1MRS756508
Issued: 2019-02-25
Revision: F
Product version: 1.3

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

www.abb.com/relion
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure
would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to
personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity
applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that
all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data and
information via a network interface which should be connected to a secure network.
It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network
administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the necessary
measures (such as, but not limited to, installation of firewalls, application of
authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti virus programs, etc.)
to protect the product and the network, its system and interface included, against any
kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or
theft of data or information. ABB is not liable for any such damages and/or losses.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product
standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is
designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................43
This manual...................................................................................... 43
Intended audience............................................................................ 43
Product documentation.....................................................................44
Product documentation set..........................................................44
Document revision history........................................................... 44
Related documentation................................................................45
Symbols and conventions.................................................................45
Symbols.......................................................................................45
Document conventions................................................................ 45
Functions, codes and symbols.................................................... 46

Section 2 630 series overview........................................................51

Overview...........................................................................................51
Product series version history..................................................... 52
PCM600 and IED connectivity package version..........................52
Local HMI......................................................................................... 53
Display.........................................................................................53
LEDs............................................................................................56
Keypad........................................................................................ 56
Web HMI...........................................................................................56
Authorization.....................................................................................58
Communication.................................................................................58

Section 3 Basic functions............................................................... 61

General parameters..........................................................................61
Binary input.......................................................................................64
Binary input design...................................................................... 64
Binary input debounce filter......................................................... 64
Oscillation filter............................................................................ 65
RTD module..................................................................................... 65
Multipurpose analog inputs..........................................................65
Functionality........................................................................... 65
Operation principle................................................................. 66
RTD input connection.............................................................70
mA outputs.................................................................................. 72
Functionality........................................................................... 72
Operation princible................................................................. 72
Scaling output values............................................................. 73
Dead band supervision...........................................................73

630 series 1
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Supervision of analog outputs................................................ 74

Forcing Support......................................................................74
Blocking..................................................................................74
User defined names............................................................... 74
User authentication...........................................................................75
Functionality ............................................................................... 75
Operation principle...................................................................... 75
Authorization handling in the IED........................................... 75
Authority status ATHSTAT.......................................................... 76
Function block........................................................................ 76
Functionality........................................................................... 76
Operation principle ................................................................ 76
Signals....................................................................................77
Settings.................................................................................. 77
Local human-machine interface LHMI..............................................77
Local HMI screen behaviour........................................................77
Settings.................................................................................. 77
Local HMI signals........................................................................ 78
Function block........................................................................ 78
Signals....................................................................................78
Basic part for the LED indication module.................................... 78
Function block........................................................................ 78
Functionality .......................................................................... 79
Operation principle................................................................. 79
Signals....................................................................................87
Settings.................................................................................. 88
Display part for HMI function keys control module...................... 88
Function block........................................................................ 88
Functionality .......................................................................... 88
Operation principle ................................................................ 89
Signals....................................................................................90
Settings.................................................................................. 90
IED identifiers TERMINALID............................................................ 91
Functionality................................................................................ 91
Application................................................................................... 91
Customer-specific settings..................................................... 91
Settings........................................................................................92
Product information.......................................................................... 92
Functionality................................................................................ 92
Application................................................................................... 92
Factory defined settings......................................................... 92
Settings........................................................................................93
Primary system values PRIMVAL.....................................................93

2 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Functionality ............................................................................... 93
Application .................................................................................. 93
Settings........................................................................................93
Global phase base values BASEPH.................................................93
Functionality................................................................................ 93
Settings........................................................................................94
The principles for voltage settings given in pu.............................94
Technical revision history............................................................ 95
Global residual base values BASERES........................................... 95
Functionality................................................................................ 95
Settings........................................................................................96
Angle reference AISVBAS................................................................96
Functionality ............................................................................... 96
Settings........................................................................................96
Parameter setting group handling.................................................... 97
Functionality................................................................................ 97
Setting group handling SETGRPS.............................................. 97
Settings.................................................................................. 97
Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP..........................................97
Function block........................................................................ 97
Signals....................................................................................97
Settings.................................................................................. 98
Operation principle...................................................................... 98
Application................................................................................... 99
Signal matrix for analog inputs....................................................... 100
Functionality ............................................................................. 100
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_1...............................100
Function block...................................................................... 100
Signals..................................................................................100
Settings................................................................................ 101
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_2...............................104
Function block...................................................................... 104
Signals..................................................................................105
Settings................................................................................ 106
Operation principle ................................................................... 108
Application................................................................................. 113
Measured value expander block MVEXP....................................... 113
Function block........................................................................... 113
Functionality ............................................................................. 113
Operation principle ................................................................... 114
Application ................................................................................ 114
Signals.......................................................................................114
Settings......................................................................................115

630 series 3
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Fixed signals FXDSIGN..................................................................115

Function block........................................................................... 115
Functionality.............................................................................. 115
Operation principle.................................................................... 115
Application................................................................................. 116
Signals.......................................................................................116
Settings......................................................................................116
Pulse counter PCGGIO.................................................................. 116
Function block........................................................................... 116
Functionality.............................................................................. 117
Operation principle.................................................................... 117
Application................................................................................. 118
Signals.......................................................................................118
Settings......................................................................................119
Measured values....................................................................... 119
Monitored data...........................................................................119
Technical data........................................................................... 120
Event counter CNTGGIO................................................................120
Function block........................................................................... 120
Functionality.............................................................................. 120
Operation principle.................................................................... 120
Reporting..............................................................................121
Technical data........................................................................... 121
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation SLGGIO..................................................................... 121
Function block........................................................................... 121
Functionality.............................................................................. 122
Operation principle.................................................................... 122
Signals.......................................................................................123
Settings......................................................................................124
Monitored data...........................................................................124
Selector mini switch VSGGIO.........................................................124
Function block........................................................................... 124
Functionality.............................................................................. 125
Operation principle ................................................................... 125
Application................................................................................. 126
Signals.......................................................................................126
Settings......................................................................................127
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO............ 127
Function block........................................................................... 127
Functionality ............................................................................. 127
Operation principle.................................................................... 127
Signals.......................................................................................128

4 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................128
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO......................... 128
Function block........................................................................... 128
Functionality ............................................................................. 128
Operation principle ................................................................... 129
Signals.......................................................................................129
Settings......................................................................................129
Test mode functionality TESTMODE..............................................130
Function block........................................................................... 130
Functionality ............................................................................. 130
Operation principle.................................................................... 131
Application ................................................................................ 132
Signals.......................................................................................132
Settings......................................................................................132
Disturbance report DRRDRE..........................................................133
Function block........................................................................... 133
Functionality.............................................................................. 133
Operation principle.................................................................... 134
Disturbance information....................................................... 135
Indications............................................................................ 135
Event recorder......................................................................136
Event list...............................................................................136
Trip value recorder............................................................... 136
Disturbance recorder............................................................136
Time tagging.........................................................................136
Recording times................................................................... 136
Analog signals...................................................................... 137
Binary signals....................................................................... 139
Trigger signals......................................................................139
Post retrigger .......................................................................140
Application................................................................................. 140
Signals.......................................................................................142
Settings......................................................................................142
Monitored data...........................................................................142
Analog input signals A1RADR and A2RADR ........................... 143
Function block...................................................................... 143
Signals..................................................................................143
Settings................................................................................ 144
Technical revision history..................................................... 144
Analog input signals A3RADR and A4RADR............................ 145
Function block...................................................................... 145
Signals..................................................................................145
Settings................................................................................ 145

630 series 5
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Technical revision history..................................................... 146

Binary input signals BxRBDR.................................................... 146
Function block...................................................................... 146
Signals..................................................................................147
Settings................................................................................ 147
Technical revision history..................................................... 148
Technical data........................................................................... 148
Technical revision history.......................................................... 149
Indications...................................................................................... 149
Functionality.............................................................................. 149
Operation principle ................................................................... 149
Signals.......................................................................................150
Technical data........................................................................... 150
Event recorder................................................................................ 151
Functionality ............................................................................. 151
Operation principle ................................................................... 151
Signals.......................................................................................151
Technical data........................................................................... 152
Event list......................................................................................... 152
Functionality ............................................................................. 152
Operation principle ................................................................... 152
Signals.......................................................................................153
Technical data........................................................................... 153
Trip value recorder......................................................................... 153
Functionality ............................................................................. 153
Operation principle.................................................................... 153
Signals.......................................................................................154
Technical data........................................................................... 154
Disturbance recorder...................................................................... 154
Functionality.............................................................................. 154
Operation principle.................................................................... 155
Disturbance recorder memory and storage..........................156
Signals.......................................................................................157
Settings......................................................................................157
Technical data........................................................................... 157
Non-volatile memory.......................................................................157
Self supervision with internal event list...........................................158
Functionality.............................................................................. 158
Internal error signals INTERRSIG............................................. 158
Function block...................................................................... 158
Signals..................................................................................158
Settings................................................................................ 158
Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST...........................................158

6 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings................................................................................ 158
Operation principle.................................................................... 159
Internal signals..................................................................... 160
Run-time model.................................................................... 162
Application................................................................................. 163
Technical data........................................................................... 164
Time synchronization......................................................................164
Functionality.............................................................................. 164
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN...................................164
Settings................................................................................ 164
Time synchronization via SNTP................................................ 165
Settings................................................................................ 165
Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN.......................... 166
Settings................................................................................ 166
Time system, summer time ends DSTEND...............................167
Settings................................................................................ 167
Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE..............................................167
Settings................................................................................ 167
Time synchronization via IRIG-B............................................... 168
Settings................................................................................ 168
Operation principle.................................................................... 168
Real-time clock operation.....................................................169
Synchronization alternatives................................................ 170
Application ................................................................................ 172
Technical data........................................................................... 172
Denial of service............................................................................. 172
Functionality ............................................................................. 172
Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT...173
Function block...................................................................... 173
Signals..................................................................................173
Settings................................................................................ 173
Monitored data..................................................................... 173
Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1..174
Function block...................................................................... 174
Signals..................................................................................174
Settings................................................................................ 174
Monitored data..................................................................... 175
Operation principle ................................................................... 175
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol......................................... 175
Functionality ............................................................................. 175
Communication interfaces and protocols.................................. 176
Application................................................................................. 176
Horizontal communication via GOOSE................................ 178

630 series 7
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................180
Technical data........................................................................... 180
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.........................................................................181
Function block........................................................................... 181
Signals.......................................................................................182
Settings......................................................................................183
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV..........................................184
Function block........................................................................... 184
Signals.......................................................................................184
Settings......................................................................................185
GOOSE function block to receive a double point GOOSEDPRCV 186
Function block........................................................................... 186
Functionality.............................................................................. 186
Operation principle ................................................................... 186
Signals.......................................................................................186
Settings......................................................................................187
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV............................................................................. 187
Function block........................................................................... 187
Functionality ............................................................................. 187
Operation principle ................................................................... 187
Signals.......................................................................................188
Settings......................................................................................188
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV............................................................................. 189
Function block........................................................................... 189
Functionality ............................................................................. 189
Operation principle ................................................................... 189
Signals.......................................................................................189
Settings......................................................................................190
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV.............................................................................. 190
Function block........................................................................... 190
Functionality ............................................................................. 190
Operation principle ................................................................... 190
Signals.......................................................................................191
Settings......................................................................................191
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O function SPGGIO.............. 192
Function block........................................................................... 192
Functionality ............................................................................. 192
Operation principle ................................................................... 192
Application................................................................................. 192
Signals.......................................................................................192

8 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................192
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O function MVGGIO............. 193
Function block........................................................................... 193
Functionality.............................................................................. 193
Operation principle ................................................................... 193
Application................................................................................. 193
Signals.......................................................................................193
Settings......................................................................................194
Monitored data...........................................................................194
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol..................................... 195
Functionality.............................................................................. 195
Settings......................................................................................195
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD..................... 196
Function block........................................................................... 196
Functionality.............................................................................. 196
Signals.......................................................................................196
Settings......................................................................................196
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD....................... 197
Function block........................................................................... 197
Functionality.............................................................................. 197
Signals.......................................................................................197
Settings......................................................................................197
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD.................................................................................198
Function block........................................................................... 198
Functionality.............................................................................. 198
Signals.......................................................................................198
Settings......................................................................................199
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD.199
Function block........................................................................... 199
Functionality.............................................................................. 199
Signals.......................................................................................199
Settings......................................................................................200
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD.................................................................................200
Function block........................................................................... 200
Functionality.............................................................................. 200
Signals.......................................................................................201
Settings......................................................................................201
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS................................ 201
Function block........................................................................... 201
Functionality.............................................................................. 201
Signals.......................................................................................202
Settings......................................................................................202

630 series 9
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR...............................................................................203
Function block........................................................................... 203
Functionality.............................................................................. 203
Signals.......................................................................................203
Settings......................................................................................204
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR...........204
Function block........................................................................... 204
Functionality.............................................................................. 204
Signals.......................................................................................205
Settings......................................................................................205
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF................205
Function block........................................................................... 205
Functionality.............................................................................. 205
Signals.......................................................................................205
Settings......................................................................................206
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT................................................................................ 206
Function block........................................................................... 206
Functionality.............................................................................. 206
Signals.......................................................................................207
Settings......................................................................................208
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED....................................... 208
Function block........................................................................... 208
Functionality.............................................................................. 209
Signals.......................................................................................209
Settings......................................................................................209
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV...................209
Function block........................................................................... 209
Functionality.............................................................................. 210
Signals.......................................................................................210
Settings......................................................................................210
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF211
Function block........................................................................... 211
Functionality.............................................................................. 211
Signals.......................................................................................212
Settings......................................................................................212
Automation bits AUTOBITS............................................................213
Function block........................................................................... 213
Functionality ............................................................................. 213
Operation principle ................................................................... 213
Application................................................................................. 214
Signals.......................................................................................214
Settings......................................................................................215

10 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Configurable logic blocks................................................................215

Standard configurable logic blocks............................................215
OR function block................................................................. 216
Inverter function block INVERTER....................................... 218
PULSETIMER function block .............................................. 219
Controllable gate function block GATE................................ 219
Exclusive OR function block XOR........................................ 220
Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY.............................. 221
Timer function block TIMERSET.......................................... 222
AND function block ..............................................................223
Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY....................225
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY........... 226
Equality check for real signals EQR..................................... 227
Equality check for integer signals EQI..................................228
Greater than check for real signals GTR..............................228
Greater than check for integer signals GTI.......................... 229
Greater than or equal check for real signals GER................230
Greater than or equal check for integer signals GEI............ 230
Less than check for real signals LTR................................... 231
Less than check for integer signals LTI................................232
Less than or equal check for real signals LER..................... 233
Less than or equal check for integer signals LEI..................233
Not equal check for real signals NER...................................234
Not equal check for integer signals NEI .............................. 235
Configurable logic Q/T...............................................................235
ORQT function block ........................................................... 236
INVERTERQT function block .............................................. 237
Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT..........................237
XORQT function block..........................................................238
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT........................ 239
ANDQT function block .........................................................240
Set-reset function block SRMEMORYQT.............................241
Reset-set function block RSMEMORYQT ...........................242
INVALIDQT function block................................................... 243
Application................................................................................. 245
Technical data........................................................................... 245
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I...........................................246
Function block........................................................................... 246
Functionality ............................................................................. 246
Operation principle ................................................................... 246
Signals.......................................................................................247
Settings......................................................................................247
Monitored data...........................................................................247

630 series 11
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A........................................ 248

Function block........................................................................... 248
Functionality ............................................................................. 248
Operation principle ................................................................... 248
Signals.......................................................................................248
Settings......................................................................................249
Additional arithmetic and logic functions........................................ 249
Additional arithmetic and logic functions................................... 249
ADDI function block................................................................... 249
Function block...................................................................... 249
Functionality......................................................................... 250
Signals..................................................................................250
ADDR function block................................................................. 250
Function block...................................................................... 250
Functionality......................................................................... 250
Signals..................................................................................250
DIVI function block.....................................................................251
Function block...................................................................... 251
Functionality......................................................................... 251
Signals..................................................................................251
Technical revision history..................................................... 252
DIVR function block................................................................... 252
Function block...................................................................... 252
Functionality......................................................................... 252
Signals..................................................................................253
Technical revision history..................................................... 253
MULI function block................................................................... 253
Function block...................................................................... 253
Functionality......................................................................... 253
Signals..................................................................................254
MULR function block................................................................. 254
Function block...................................................................... 254
Functionality......................................................................... 254
Signals..................................................................................254
SUBI function block................................................................... 255
Function block...................................................................... 255
Functionality......................................................................... 255
Signals..................................................................................255
SUBR function block..................................................................255
Function block...................................................................... 255
Functionality......................................................................... 256
Signals..................................................................................256
ITOR function block................................................................... 256

12 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block...................................................................... 256

Functionality......................................................................... 256
Signals..................................................................................256
RTOI function block................................................................... 257
Function block...................................................................... 257
Functionality......................................................................... 257
Signals..................................................................................257
Technical revision history..................................................... 257
MINMAXR function block ..........................................................258
Function block...................................................................... 258
Functionality......................................................................... 258
Signals..................................................................................258
SWITCHI function block............................................................ 259
Function block...................................................................... 259
Functionality......................................................................... 259
Signals..................................................................................259
SWITCHR function block...........................................................260
Function block...................................................................... 260
Functionality......................................................................... 260
Signals..................................................................................260
ETHFRNT function block................................................................260
ETHLAN1 function block................................................................ 261
GATEWAY function block...............................................................261
SYSTEMTIME function block......................................................... 261
WEBSERVER function block..........................................................261

Section 4 Protection functions......................................................263

Three-phase current protection...................................................... 263
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection PHxPTOC263
Identification......................................................................... 263
Function block...................................................................... 263
Functionality......................................................................... 263
Operation principle............................................................... 264
Base values..........................................................................266
Measurement modes............................................................266
Timer characteristics............................................................ 267
Application............................................................................268
Signals..................................................................................273
Settings................................................................................ 275
Measured values.................................................................. 278
Monitored data..................................................................... 279
Technical data...................................................................... 281
Technical revision history..................................................... 281
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection DPHxPDOC.... 282

630 series 13
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Identification......................................................................... 282
Function block...................................................................... 282
Functionality......................................................................... 282
Operation principle .............................................................. 282
Base values..........................................................................287
Measuring modes.................................................................288
Directional overcurrent characteristics ................................ 288
Application............................................................................296
Signals..................................................................................298
Settings................................................................................ 300
Measured values.................................................................. 303
Monitored data..................................................................... 305
Technical data...................................................................... 307
Technical revision history..................................................... 308
Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection PHPVOC................ 308
Identification......................................................................... 308
Function block...................................................................... 309
Functionality......................................................................... 309
Operation principle............................................................... 309
Base values..........................................................................315
Application............................................................................315
Signals..................................................................................316
Settings................................................................................ 316
Measured values.................................................................. 318
Monitored data..................................................................... 319
Technical data...................................................................... 319
Technical revision history..................................................... 320
Three-phase thermal overload protection for overhead lines
and cables T1PTTR...................................................................320
Identification......................................................................... 320
Function block...................................................................... 320
Functionality......................................................................... 320
Operation principle............................................................... 321
Base values..........................................................................323
Application............................................................................324
Signals..................................................................................324
Settings................................................................................ 325
Measured values.................................................................. 326
Monitored data..................................................................... 326
Technical data...................................................................... 327
Technical revision history..................................................... 327
Three-phase thermal overload protection, two time constants
T2PTTR..................................................................................... 327
Identification......................................................................... 327

14 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block...................................................................... 327

Functionality......................................................................... 327
Operation principle............................................................... 328
Base values..........................................................................331
Application............................................................................331
Signals..................................................................................333
Settings................................................................................ 334
Measured values.................................................................. 335
Monitored data..................................................................... 335
Technical data...................................................................... 336
Technical revision history..................................................... 336
Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC........................................336
Identification......................................................................... 336
Function block...................................................................... 336
Functionality......................................................................... 337
Operation principle............................................................... 337
Base values..........................................................................338
Application............................................................................338
Signals..................................................................................339
Settings................................................................................ 339
Measured values.................................................................. 339
Monitored data..................................................................... 340
Technical data...................................................................... 340
Technical revision history..................................................... 340
Loss of load protection LOFLPTUC...........................................340
Identification......................................................................... 340
Function block...................................................................... 340
Functionality......................................................................... 341
Operation principle............................................................... 341
Base values..........................................................................342
Application............................................................................342
Signals..................................................................................343
Settings................................................................................ 343
Measured values.................................................................. 343
Monitored data..................................................................... 344
Technical data...................................................................... 344
Motor thermal overload protection MPTTR............................... 344
Identification......................................................................... 344
Function block...................................................................... 344
Functionality......................................................................... 345
Operation principle............................................................... 345
Base values..........................................................................352
Application............................................................................353

630 series 15
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Signals..................................................................................358
Settings................................................................................ 359
Measured values.................................................................. 360
Monitored data..................................................................... 360
Technical data...................................................................... 361
Technical revision history..................................................... 361
Motor startup supervision STTPMSU........................................ 361
Identification......................................................................... 361
Function block...................................................................... 361
Functionality......................................................................... 361
Operation principle............................................................... 362
Base values..........................................................................368
Application............................................................................368
Signals..................................................................................372
Settings................................................................................ 372
Measured values.................................................................. 373
Monitored data..................................................................... 374
Technical data...................................................................... 374
Technical revision history..................................................... 375
Earth-fault protection...................................................................... 375
Non-directional earth-fault protection EFxPTOC....................... 375
Identification......................................................................... 375
Function block...................................................................... 375
Functionality......................................................................... 375
Operation principle............................................................... 376
Base values..........................................................................378
Measurement modes............................................................378
Timer characteristics............................................................ 378
Application............................................................................380
Signals..................................................................................382
Settings................................................................................ 384
Measured values.................................................................. 387
Monitored data..................................................................... 388
Technical data...................................................................... 388
Technical revision history..................................................... 389
Directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF............................ 389
Identification......................................................................... 389
Function block...................................................................... 390
Functionality......................................................................... 390
Operation principle............................................................... 390
Directional earth-fault principles........................................... 394
Base values..........................................................................400
Timer characteristics............................................................ 400

16 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Measurement modes............................................................402
Directional earth-fault characteristics................................... 402
Application............................................................................410
Signals..................................................................................412
Settings................................................................................ 413
Measured values.................................................................. 417
Monitored data..................................................................... 418
Technical data...................................................................... 419
Technical revision history..................................................... 420
Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF............ 420
Identification......................................................................... 420
Function block...................................................................... 421
Functionality......................................................................... 421
Operation principle............................................................... 421
Base values..........................................................................425
Application............................................................................425
Signals..................................................................................427
Settings................................................................................ 428
Measured values.................................................................. 428
Monitored data..................................................................... 429
Technical data...................................................................... 429
Technical revision history..................................................... 429
Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM....................429
Identification......................................................................... 429
Function block...................................................................... 430
Functionality......................................................................... 430
Operation principle............................................................... 431
Neutral admittance characteristics....................................... 443
Base values..........................................................................449
Recorded data......................................................................449
Application............................................................................450
Signals..................................................................................455
Settings................................................................................ 456
Measured values.................................................................. 457
Monitored data..................................................................... 457
Technical data...................................................................... 460
Rotor earth-fault protection MREFPTOC...................................460
Identification......................................................................... 460
Function block...................................................................... 461
Functionality......................................................................... 461
Operation principle............................................................... 461
Base values..........................................................................462
Application............................................................................463

630 series 17
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Signals..................................................................................466
Settings................................................................................ 466
Measured values.................................................................. 467
Monitored data..................................................................... 467
Technical data...................................................................... 467
Harmonics based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC................ 467
Identification......................................................................... 467
Function block ..................................................................... 468
Functionality......................................................................... 468
Operation principle............................................................... 468
Base value............................................................................472
Application............................................................................473
Signals..................................................................................473
Settings................................................................................ 474
Measured values.................................................................. 475
Monitored data..................................................................... 475
Technical data...................................................................... 476
Wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE................................ 476
Identification......................................................................... 476
Function block...................................................................... 476
Functionality......................................................................... 476
Operation principle............................................................... 477
Timer characteristics............................................................ 481
Measuring modes.................................................................484
Base values..........................................................................484
Application............................................................................484
Signals..................................................................................487
Settings................................................................................ 487
Measured values.................................................................. 488
Monitored data..................................................................... 488
Technical data...................................................................... 489
Third harmonic-based stator earth-fault protection H3EFPSEF 489
Identification......................................................................... 489
Function block...................................................................... 490
Functionality......................................................................... 490
Operation principle............................................................... 490
Base values..........................................................................493
Application............................................................................493
Signals..................................................................................499
Settings................................................................................ 499
Measured values.................................................................. 500
Monitored data..................................................................... 500
Technical data...................................................................... 501

18 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Multi-frequency admittance-based earth-fault protection

MFADPSDE...............................................................................501
Identification......................................................................... 501
Function block...................................................................... 501
Functionality......................................................................... 502
Operation principle............................................................... 502
Application............................................................................520
Signals..................................................................................522
Settings................................................................................ 522
Measured values.................................................................. 523
Monitored data..................................................................... 524
Technical data...................................................................... 524
Differential protection......................................................................525
Transformer differential protection for two winding
transformers TR2PTDF............................................................. 525
Identification......................................................................... 525
Function block...................................................................... 525
Functionality......................................................................... 525
Operation principle............................................................... 526
Application............................................................................539
CT connections and transformation ratio correction.............552
Base values..........................................................................554
Signals..................................................................................555
Settings................................................................................ 556
Measured values.................................................................. 557
Monitored data..................................................................... 558
Technical data...................................................................... 560
Technical revision history..................................................... 560
Low impedance restricted earth-fault protection LREFPNDF....560
Identification......................................................................... 560
Function block...................................................................... 560
Functionality......................................................................... 561
Operation principle............................................................... 561
Base values..........................................................................564
Application............................................................................564
Signals..................................................................................568
Settings................................................................................ 568
Measured values.................................................................. 569
Monitored data..................................................................... 569
Technical data...................................................................... 570
Technical revision history..................................................... 570
High impedance restricted earth-fault protection HREFPDIF....570
Identification......................................................................... 570
Function block...................................................................... 570

630 series 19
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Functionality......................................................................... 571
Operation principle............................................................... 571
Base values..........................................................................572
Application............................................................................572
The measuring configuration................................................575
Recommendations for current transformers ........................575
Signals..................................................................................579
Settings................................................................................ 580
Measured values.................................................................. 580
Monitored data..................................................................... 580
Technical data...................................................................... 581
Technical revision history - HREFPDIF................................581
Stabilized differential protection for machines MPDIF...............581
Identification......................................................................... 581
Function block...................................................................... 581
Functionality......................................................................... 582
Operation principle............................................................... 582
Base values..........................................................................588
Application............................................................................588
Signals..................................................................................595
Settings................................................................................ 596
Measured values.................................................................. 596
Monitored data..................................................................... 597
Technical data...................................................................... 598
Technical revision history..................................................... 598
High-impedance or flux-balance based differential protection
for machines MHZPDIF............................................................. 598
Identification......................................................................... 598
Function block...................................................................... 599
Functionality......................................................................... 599
Operation principle............................................................... 599
Base values..........................................................................600
Application............................................................................600
Recommendations for current transformers.........................603
Example calculations for high-impedance differential
protection..............................................................................608
Signals..................................................................................611
Settings................................................................................ 611
Measured values.................................................................. 612
Monitored data..................................................................... 612
Technical data...................................................................... 613
Unbalance protection......................................................................613
Negative sequence current protection NSPTOC.......................613
Identification......................................................................... 613

20 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block...................................................................... 613

Functionality......................................................................... 613
Operation principle............................................................... 614
Base values..........................................................................616
Application............................................................................616
Signals..................................................................................616
Settings................................................................................ 617
Measured values.................................................................. 618
Monitored data..................................................................... 619
Technical data...................................................................... 619
Technical revision history..................................................... 620
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC..............................620
Identification......................................................................... 620
Function block...................................................................... 620
Functionality......................................................................... 620
Operation principle............................................................... 621
Base values..........................................................................622
Application............................................................................622
Signals..................................................................................623
Settings................................................................................ 624
Measured values.................................................................. 624
Monitored data..................................................................... 625
Technical data...................................................................... 625
Technical revision history..................................................... 625
Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC..................................... 625
Identification......................................................................... 625
Function block...................................................................... 626
Functionality......................................................................... 626
Operation principle............................................................... 626
Base values..........................................................................627
Application............................................................................627
Signals..................................................................................628
Settings................................................................................ 628
Measured Values................................................................. 628
Monitored data..................................................................... 629
Technical data...................................................................... 629
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for machines
MNSPTOC.................................................................................629
Identification......................................................................... 629
Function block...................................................................... 630
Functionality......................................................................... 630
Operation principle............................................................... 630
Base values..........................................................................631

630 series 21
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Timer characteristics............................................................ 631

Application............................................................................633
Signals..................................................................................634
Settings................................................................................ 635
Measured values.................................................................. 635
Monitored data..................................................................... 636
Technical data...................................................................... 636
Technical revision history..................................................... 636
Voltage protection...........................................................................637
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV.......................... 637
Identification......................................................................... 637
Function block...................................................................... 637
Functionality......................................................................... 637
Operation principle............................................................... 637
Base values..........................................................................642
Application............................................................................642
Signals..................................................................................643
Settings................................................................................ 643
Measured values.................................................................. 644
Monitored data..................................................................... 645
Technical data...................................................................... 645
Technical revision history..................................................... 646
Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV........................ 646
Identification......................................................................... 646
Function block...................................................................... 646
Functionality......................................................................... 646
Operation principle............................................................... 646
Base values..........................................................................651
Application............................................................................651
Signals..................................................................................652
Settings................................................................................ 652
Measured values.................................................................. 654
Monitored data..................................................................... 654
Technical data...................................................................... 655
Technical revision history..................................................... 655
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV..............................655
Identification......................................................................... 655
Function block...................................................................... 655
Functionality......................................................................... 656
Operation principle............................................................... 656
Base values..........................................................................657
Application............................................................................657
Signals..................................................................................658

22 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings................................................................................ 658
Measured values.................................................................. 659
Monitored data..................................................................... 659
Technical data...................................................................... 659
Positive sequence overvoltage protection PSPTOV................. 660
Identification......................................................................... 660
Function block...................................................................... 660
Functionality......................................................................... 660
Operation principle............................................................... 660
Base values..........................................................................661
Application............................................................................662
Signals..................................................................................662
Settings................................................................................ 663
Measured values.................................................................. 663
Monitored data..................................................................... 664
Negative sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV................664
Identification......................................................................... 664
Function block...................................................................... 665
Functionality......................................................................... 665
Operation principle............................................................... 665
Base values..........................................................................666
Application............................................................................666
Signals..................................................................................667
Settings................................................................................ 667
Measured values.................................................................. 668
Monitored data..................................................................... 668
Technical data...................................................................... 669
Positive sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV............... 669
Identification......................................................................... 669
Function block...................................................................... 669
Functionality......................................................................... 669
Operation principle............................................................... 670
Base values..........................................................................671
Application............................................................................671
Signals..................................................................................672
Settings................................................................................ 672
Measured values.................................................................. 673
Monitored data..................................................................... 673
Technical data...................................................................... 674
Overexitation protection OEPVPH.............................................674
Identification......................................................................... 674
Function block...................................................................... 674
Functionality......................................................................... 674

630 series 23
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Operation principle............................................................... 675

Base values..........................................................................678
Timer characteristics............................................................ 678
Application............................................................................683
Signals..................................................................................687
Settings................................................................................ 688
Measured values.................................................................. 689
Monitored data..................................................................... 689
Technical data...................................................................... 690
Technical revision history..................................................... 690
Voltage vector shift protection VVSPPAM.................................690
Identification......................................................................... 690
Function block...................................................................... 690
Functionality......................................................................... 691
Operation principle............................................................... 691
Base value............................................................................692
Application............................................................................693
Signals..................................................................................694
Settings................................................................................ 694
Measured values.................................................................. 695
Monitored data..................................................................... 696
Technical data...................................................................... 696
Low voltage ride through protection LVRTPTUV.......................696
Identification......................................................................... 696
Function block...................................................................... 696
Functionality......................................................................... 697
Operation principle............................................................... 697
Base value............................................................................701
Application............................................................................701
Signals..................................................................................702
Settings................................................................................ 702
Measured values.................................................................. 704
Monitored data..................................................................... 704
Technical data...................................................................... 705
Frequency protection......................................................................705
Overfrequency protection DAPTOF...........................................705
Identification......................................................................... 705
Function block...................................................................... 705
Functionality......................................................................... 705
Operation principle............................................................... 706
Application............................................................................707
Signals..................................................................................707
Settings................................................................................ 708

24 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Measured values.................................................................. 708

Monitored data..................................................................... 708
Technical data...................................................................... 709
Technical revision history..................................................... 709
Underfrequency protection DAPTUF.........................................709
Identification......................................................................... 709
Function block...................................................................... 709
Functionality......................................................................... 710
Operation principle............................................................... 710
Application............................................................................712
Signals..................................................................................713
Settings................................................................................ 713
Measured values.................................................................. 714
Monitored data..................................................................... 714
Technical data...................................................................... 714
Technical revision history..................................................... 715
Frequency gradient protection DAPFRC................................... 715
Identification......................................................................... 715
Function block...................................................................... 715
Functionality......................................................................... 715
Operation principle............................................................... 716
Application............................................................................717
Signals..................................................................................717
Settings................................................................................ 718
Measured values.................................................................. 718
Monitored data..................................................................... 719
Technical data...................................................................... 719
Technical revision history..................................................... 719
Load shedding LSHDPFRQ...................................................... 719
Identification......................................................................... 719
Function block...................................................................... 720
Functionality......................................................................... 720
Operation principle............................................................... 720
Application............................................................................726
Signals..................................................................................729
Settings................................................................................ 730
Measured values.................................................................. 730
Monitored data..................................................................... 731
Technical data...................................................................... 731
Technical revision history..................................................... 732
Impedance protection..................................................................... 732
Distance protection DSTPDIS................................................... 732
Identification......................................................................... 732

630 series 25
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block...................................................................... 733

Functionality......................................................................... 733
Operation principle............................................................... 736
Base values..........................................................................776
Recorded data......................................................................776
Application............................................................................778
Signals..................................................................................780
Settings................................................................................ 782
Measured values.................................................................. 790
Monitored data..................................................................... 792
Technical data...................................................................... 812
Technical revision history..................................................... 812
Three-phase underexitation protection UEXPDIS..................... 813
Identification......................................................................... 813
Function block...................................................................... 813
Functionality......................................................................... 813
Operation principle............................................................... 813
Base values..........................................................................816
Application............................................................................816
Signals..................................................................................819
Settings................................................................................ 820
Measured values.................................................................. 821
Monitored data..................................................................... 821
Technical data...................................................................... 822
Three-phase underimpedance protection UZPDIS................... 823
Identification......................................................................... 823
Function block...................................................................... 823
Functionality......................................................................... 823
Operation principle............................................................... 823
Base values..........................................................................826
Application............................................................................826
Signals..................................................................................831
Settings................................................................................ 831
Measured values.................................................................. 832
Monitored data..................................................................... 833
Technical data...................................................................... 833
Technical revision history..................................................... 833
Power protection.............................................................................834
Reverse power/directional overpower protection DOPPDPR....834
Identification......................................................................... 834
Function block...................................................................... 834
Functionality......................................................................... 834
Operation principle............................................................... 834

26 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Base values..........................................................................837
Application............................................................................838
Signals..................................................................................840
Settings................................................................................ 841
Measured values.................................................................. 841
Monitored data..................................................................... 842
Technical data...................................................................... 843
Technical revision history..................................................... 843
Underpower protection DUPPDPR............................................843
Identification......................................................................... 843
Function block...................................................................... 843
Functionality......................................................................... 844
Operation principle............................................................... 844
Base values..........................................................................847
Application............................................................................847
Signals..................................................................................848
Settings................................................................................ 848
Measured values.................................................................. 849
Monitored data..................................................................... 850
Technical data...................................................................... 850
Directional reactive power undervoltage protection (Q→& U<)
DQPTUV....................................................................................851
Identification......................................................................... 851
Function block...................................................................... 851
Functionality......................................................................... 851
Operation principle............................................................... 851
Base value............................................................................854
Application............................................................................854
Signals..................................................................................855
Settings................................................................................ 856
Measured values.................................................................. 856
Monitored data..................................................................... 857
Technical data...................................................................... 857
Multipurpose analog protection MAPGAPC................................... 857
Identification.............................................................................. 857
Function block........................................................................... 858
Functionality.............................................................................. 858
Operation principle.................................................................... 858
Application................................................................................. 859
Signals.......................................................................................860
Settings......................................................................................860
Measured values....................................................................... 861
Monitored data...........................................................................861

630 series 27
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Technical data........................................................................... 861

Technical revision history.......................................................... 861

Section 5 Protection related functions..........................................863

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR......................................... 863
Identification.............................................................................. 863
Function block........................................................................... 863
Functionality.............................................................................. 863
Operation principle.................................................................... 863
Base values............................................................................... 865
Application................................................................................. 865
Signals.......................................................................................866
Settings......................................................................................867
Measured values....................................................................... 867
Monitored data...........................................................................868
Technical data........................................................................... 868
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF.................................. 868
Identification.............................................................................. 868
Function block........................................................................... 868
Functionality.............................................................................. 869
Operation principle ................................................................... 869
Base values............................................................................... 876
Application................................................................................. 876
Signals.......................................................................................878
Settings......................................................................................879
Measured values....................................................................... 879
Monitored data...........................................................................880
Technical data........................................................................... 880
Technical revision history.......................................................... 880
Tripping logic TRPPTRC................................................................ 880
Identification.............................................................................. 880
Function block........................................................................... 881
Functionality.............................................................................. 881
Operation principle.................................................................... 881
Application................................................................................. 882
Signals.......................................................................................883
Settings......................................................................................884
Measured values....................................................................... 884
Monitored data...........................................................................884
Fault locator SCEFRFLO................................................................884
Identification.............................................................................. 884
Function block........................................................................... 885
Functionality.............................................................................. 885
Operation principle.................................................................... 885

28 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Fault type selection.............................................................. 886

Fault distance calculation..................................................... 887
Steady-state asymmetry and load compensation................ 893
Triggering the SCEFRFLO .................................................. 893
Result validity indicator for earth faults ................................896
ALARM output...................................................................... 897
Impedance settings.............................................................. 897
Base values............................................................................... 905
Recorded data........................................................................... 905
Application................................................................................. 906
Configuration............................................................................. 907
Signals.......................................................................................907
Settings......................................................................................908
Measured values....................................................................... 910
Monitored data...........................................................................910
Technical data........................................................................... 917
Technical revision history.......................................................... 917
Switch onto fault CVRSOF............................................................. 918
Identification.............................................................................. 918
Function block........................................................................... 918
Functionality.............................................................................. 918
Operation principle.................................................................... 918
Base values............................................................................... 921
Application................................................................................. 921
Signals.......................................................................................923
Settings......................................................................................923
Measured values....................................................................... 924
Monitored data...........................................................................924
Technical data........................................................................... 924
Technical revision history.......................................................... 925
Current reversal logic CRWPSCH..................................................925
Identification.............................................................................. 925
Function block........................................................................... 925
Functionality.............................................................................. 925
Operation principle.................................................................... 926
Base values............................................................................... 928
Application................................................................................. 928
Signals.......................................................................................930
Settings......................................................................................931
Measured values....................................................................... 932
Monitored data...........................................................................932
Technical data........................................................................... 933
Scheme communication logic DSOCPSCH................................... 933

630 series 29
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Identification.............................................................................. 933
Function block........................................................................... 933
Functionality.............................................................................. 933
Operation principle.................................................................... 934
Application................................................................................. 939
Signals.......................................................................................945
Settings......................................................................................946
Measured values....................................................................... 946
Monitored data...........................................................................947
Technical data........................................................................... 947
Local acceleration logic DSTPLAL................................................. 947
Identification.............................................................................. 947
Function block........................................................................... 947
Functionality.............................................................................. 948
Operation principle.................................................................... 948
Base values............................................................................... 951
Application................................................................................. 951
Signals.......................................................................................953
Settings......................................................................................953
Measured values....................................................................... 954
Monitored data...........................................................................954
Technical data........................................................................... 954
Communication logic for residual overcurrent RESCPSCH........... 955
Identification.............................................................................. 955
Function block........................................................................... 955
Functionality.............................................................................. 955
Operation principle.................................................................... 955
Application................................................................................. 961
Signals.......................................................................................967
Settings......................................................................................968
Measured values....................................................................... 968
Monitored data...........................................................................969
Technical data........................................................................... 969
Technical revision history.......................................................... 969
Current reversal and WEI logic for residual overcurrent
RCRWPSCH.................................................................................. 969
Identification.............................................................................. 969
Function block........................................................................... 970
Functionality.............................................................................. 970
Operation principle.................................................................... 970
Base values............................................................................... 973
Application................................................................................. 973
Signals.......................................................................................975

30 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................975
Measured values....................................................................... 976
Monitored data...........................................................................976
Technical data........................................................................... 977
Emergency start function ESMGAPC.............................................977
Identification.............................................................................. 977
Function block........................................................................... 977
Functionality.............................................................................. 977
Operation principle.................................................................... 977
Base values............................................................................... 978
Application................................................................................. 978
Signals.......................................................................................979
Settings......................................................................................979
Measured values....................................................................... 980
Monitored data...........................................................................980
Technical data........................................................................... 980

Section 6 Supervision functions................................................... 981

Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR..................................................981
Identification.............................................................................. 981
Function block........................................................................... 981
Functionality.............................................................................. 981
Operation principle.................................................................... 981
Application................................................................................. 982
Signals.......................................................................................986
Settings......................................................................................986
Measured values....................................................................... 986
Monitored data...........................................................................986
Technical data........................................................................... 987
Current circuit supervision CCRDIF............................................... 987
Identification.............................................................................. 987
Function block........................................................................... 987
Functionality.............................................................................. 987
Operation principle.................................................................... 987
Base values............................................................................... 989
Application................................................................................. 990
Signals.......................................................................................994
Settings......................................................................................994
Measured values....................................................................... 995
Monitored data...........................................................................995
Technical data........................................................................... 995
Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF............................................... 995
Identification.............................................................................. 995
Function block........................................................................... 996

630 series 31
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Functionality.............................................................................. 996
Operation principle.................................................................... 996
Base values............................................................................. 1000
Application............................................................................... 1000
Signals.....................................................................................1001
Settings....................................................................................1001
Monitored data.........................................................................1002
Technical data......................................................................... 1003
Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT....................................... 1003
Identification............................................................................ 1003
Function block......................................................................... 1003
Functionality............................................................................ 1003
Operation principle ................................................................. 1004
Application............................................................................... 1005
Signals.....................................................................................1006
Settings....................................................................................1006
Measured values..................................................................... 1007
Monitored Data........................................................................ 1007
Technical data......................................................................... 1007
Tap position TPOSSLTC.............................................................. 1007
Identification............................................................................ 1007
Function block......................................................................... 1008
Functionality............................................................................ 1008
Operation principle.................................................................. 1008
Application............................................................................... 1011
Signals.....................................................................................1012
Settings....................................................................................1012
Measured values..................................................................... 1012
Monitored data.........................................................................1013
Technical data......................................................................... 1013
Runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT................. 1013
Identification............................................................................ 1013
Function block......................................................................... 1013
Functionality............................................................................ 1014
Operation principle.................................................................. 1014
Application............................................................................... 1015
Signals.....................................................................................1015
Settings....................................................................................1016
Measured values..................................................................... 1016
Monitored data.........................................................................1017
Technical data......................................................................... 1017

Section 7 Condition monitoring functions................................... 1019

Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR................................1019

32 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Identification............................................................................ 1019
Function block......................................................................... 1019
Functionality............................................................................ 1019
Operation principle.................................................................. 1019
Circuit breaker status......................................................... 1020
Circuit breaker operation monitoring.................................. 1021
Breaker contact travel time.................................................1022
Operation counter...............................................................1023
Accumulation of Iyt..............................................................1024
Remaining life of the circuit breaker................................... 1025
Circuit breaker spring-charged indication...........................1027
Gas pressure supervision...................................................1027
Application............................................................................... 1028
Signals.....................................................................................1031
Settings....................................................................................1032
Measured values..................................................................... 1034
Monitored data.........................................................................1034
Technical data......................................................................... 1035
Technical revision history........................................................ 1036
Hot-spot and insulation ageing rate monitoring for transformers
HSARSPTR.................................................................................. 1036
Identification............................................................................ 1036
Function block......................................................................... 1036
Functionality............................................................................ 1036
Operation principle.................................................................. 1037
Base value...............................................................................1045
Application............................................................................... 1045
Signals.....................................................................................1048
Settings....................................................................................1049
Measured values..................................................................... 1050
Monitored data.........................................................................1051
Technical data......................................................................... 1051

Section 8 Measurement functions.............................................. 1053

Basic measurements.................................................................... 1053
Functions................................................................................. 1053
Measurement functionality.......................................................1054
Measurement function applications......................................... 1063
Three-phase current CMMXU................................................. 1064
Identification....................................................................... 1064
Function block.................................................................... 1064
Signals................................................................................1065
Settings.............................................................................. 1065
Monitored data................................................................... 1067

630 series 33
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Technical data.................................................................... 1067

Three-phase voltage VPHMMXU............................................ 1068
Identification....................................................................... 1068
Function block.................................................................... 1068
Signals................................................................................1068
Settings.............................................................................. 1069
Monitored data................................................................... 1070
Technical data.................................................................... 1071
Three-phase voltage VPPMMXU............................................ 1071
Identification....................................................................... 1071
Function block.................................................................... 1071
Signals................................................................................1071
Settings.............................................................................. 1072
Monitored data................................................................... 1073
Technical data.................................................................... 1074
Residual current RESCMMXU................................................ 1074
Identification....................................................................... 1074
Function block.................................................................... 1075
Signals................................................................................1075
Settings.............................................................................. 1075
Monitored data................................................................... 1076
Technical data.................................................................... 1076
Residual voltage RESVMMXU................................................ 1076
Identification....................................................................... 1076
Function block.................................................................... 1077
Signals................................................................................1077
Settings.............................................................................. 1077
Monitored data................................................................... 1078
Technical data.................................................................... 1079
Sequence current CSMSQI..................................................... 1079
Identification....................................................................... 1079
Function block.................................................................... 1079
Signals................................................................................1079
Settings.............................................................................. 1080
Monitored data................................................................... 1081
Technical data.................................................................... 1081
Technical revision history................................................... 1082
Sequence voltage VSMSQI.....................................................1082
Identification....................................................................... 1082
Function block.................................................................... 1082
Signals................................................................................1082
Settings.............................................................................. 1083
Monitored data................................................................... 1084

34 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Technical data.................................................................... 1084

Technical revision history................................................... 1084
Three-phase power PWRMMXU............................................. 1085
Identification....................................................................... 1085
Function block.................................................................... 1085
Base values........................................................................1085
Signals................................................................................1085
Settings.............................................................................. 1086
Monitored data................................................................... 1089
Technical data.................................................................... 1090
Energy monitoring EPDMMTR..................................................... 1090
Identification............................................................................ 1090
Function block......................................................................... 1090
Functionality............................................................................ 1090
Operation principle.................................................................. 1091
Application............................................................................... 1093
Signals.....................................................................................1094
Settings....................................................................................1095
Measured values..................................................................... 1096
Monitored data.........................................................................1096
Technical data......................................................................... 1098
Technical revision history........................................................ 1098

Section 9 Power quality measurement functions....................... 1099

Voltage unbalance VSQVUB........................................................1099
Identification............................................................................ 1099
Function block......................................................................... 1099
Functionality............................................................................ 1099
Operation principle.................................................................. 1099
Base values............................................................................. 1101
Application............................................................................... 1101
Signals.....................................................................................1102
Settings....................................................................................1103
Measured values..................................................................... 1103
Monitored data.........................................................................1104
Current harmonics CMHAI........................................................... 1104
Identification............................................................................ 1104
Function block......................................................................... 1105
Functionality............................................................................ 1105
Operation principle.................................................................. 1105
Distortion measurement..................................................... 1106
Average calculation 3 seconds...........................................1106
Harmonic distortion detector.............................................. 1106
Base values............................................................................. 1107

630 series 35
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Application............................................................................... 1107
Signals.....................................................................................1108
Settings....................................................................................1109
Measured values..................................................................... 1110
Monitored Data........................................................................ 1110
Voltage harmonics VPPMHAI and VPHMHAI.............................. 1115
Identification............................................................................ 1115
Function block......................................................................... 1116
Functionality............................................................................ 1116
Operation principle.................................................................. 1116
Distortion measurement..................................................... 1117
Average calculation 3 seconds...........................................1118
Harmonic distortion detector.............................................. 1118
Base values............................................................................. 1119
Application............................................................................... 1119
Signals.....................................................................................1120
Settings....................................................................................1121
Measured values..................................................................... 1123
Monitored Data........................................................................ 1124
Voltage variation PHQVVR...........................................................1134
Identification............................................................................ 1134
Function block......................................................................... 1135
Functionality............................................................................ 1135
Operation principle.................................................................. 1135
Variation detection..............................................................1136
Duration measurement.......................................................1137
Variation validation............................................................. 1138
Recorded data......................................................................... 1140
Base values............................................................................. 1141
Application............................................................................... 1142
Signals.....................................................................................1143
Settings....................................................................................1144
Measured values..................................................................... 1144
Monitored data.........................................................................1145
Technical data......................................................................... 1149

Section 10 Control functions........................................................ 1151

Apparatus control......................................................................... 1151
Introduction..............................................................................1151
Application............................................................................... 1151
Interaction between modules...................................................1153
Operation principle.................................................................. 1155
Local/remote switch LOCREM................................................ 1156
Identification....................................................................... 1156

36 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block.................................................................... 1156

Functionality....................................................................... 1156
Operation principle............................................................. 1157
Application..........................................................................1157
Signals................................................................................1157
Settings.............................................................................. 1157
Measured values................................................................ 1158
Bay control QCCBAY.............................................................. 1158
Identification....................................................................... 1158
Function block.................................................................... 1158
Functionality....................................................................... 1158
Operation principle............................................................. 1158
Application..........................................................................1159
Signals................................................................................1160
Measured values................................................................ 1160
Monitored data................................................................... 1160
Switch control GNRLCSWI......................................................1161
Identification....................................................................... 1161
Function block.................................................................... 1161
Functionality....................................................................... 1161
Operation principle............................................................. 1161
Application..........................................................................1165
Signals................................................................................1166
Settings.............................................................................. 1167
Measured values................................................................ 1168
Monitored data................................................................... 1168
Technical revision history................................................... 1168
Circuit breaker DAXCBR......................................................... 1169
Identification....................................................................... 1169
Function block.................................................................... 1169
Functionality....................................................................... 1169
Operation principle............................................................. 1169
Application..........................................................................1174
Signals................................................................................1175
Settings.............................................................................. 1176
Measured values................................................................ 1176
Monitored data................................................................... 1177
Technical revision history................................................... 1177
Circuit switch DAXSWI............................................................ 1177
Identification....................................................................... 1177
Function block.................................................................... 1178
Functionality....................................................................... 1178
Operation principle............................................................. 1178

630 series 37
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Application..........................................................................1182
Signals................................................................................1183
Settings.............................................................................. 1184
Measured values................................................................ 1184
Monitored data................................................................... 1185
Technical revision history................................................... 1185
Reservation.................................................................................. 1185
General principles of reservation.............................................1185
Interlocking................................................................................... 1188
General principles of interlocking............................................ 1188
Application............................................................................... 1190
Logical node for interlocking SCILO........................................ 1191
Identification....................................................................... 1191
Function block.................................................................... 1191
Functionality....................................................................... 1191
Operation principle............................................................. 1191
Application..........................................................................1192
Signals................................................................................1192
Position evaluation POS_EVAL...............................................1192
Identification....................................................................... 1192
Function block.................................................................... 1193
Functionality ...................................................................... 1193
Operation principle............................................................. 1193
Signals................................................................................1193
Settings.............................................................................. 1194
Synchrocheck SYNCRSYN.......................................................... 1194
Identification............................................................................ 1194
Function block......................................................................... 1194
Functionality............................................................................ 1195
Operation principle.................................................................. 1195
Base values............................................................................. 1206
Application............................................................................... 1206
Application Examples.............................................................. 1213
Signals.....................................................................................1215
Settings....................................................................................1217
Measured values..................................................................... 1219
Monitored data.........................................................................1220
Technical data......................................................................... 1222
Technical revision history........................................................ 1222
Auto-recloser DARREC................................................................ 1222
Identification............................................................................ 1222
Function block......................................................................... 1223
Functionality............................................................................ 1223

38 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Protection signal definition................................................. 1223

Zone coordination...............................................................1224
Master and slave scheme.................................................. 1224
Thermal overload blocking................................................. 1225
Operation principle.................................................................. 1225
Signal collection and delay logic........................................ 1226
Shot initiation......................................................................1230
Shot pointer controller........................................................ 1234
Reclose controller...............................................................1235
Sequence controller........................................................... 1236
Protection coordination controller.......................................1237
Circuit breaker controller.................................................... 1239
Application............................................................................... 1241
Shot initiation......................................................................1242
Sequence........................................................................... 1244
Configuration examples......................................................1245
Delayed initiation lines........................................................1248
Shot initiation from protection start signal.......................... 1250
Fast trip in Switch on to fault.............................................. 1250
Counters.................................................................................. 1251
Signals.....................................................................................1251
Settings....................................................................................1253
Measured values..................................................................... 1255
Monitored data.........................................................................1256
Technical data......................................................................... 1257
Technical revision history........................................................ 1258
Tap changer control with voltage regulator OLATCC...................1258
Identification............................................................................ 1258
Function block......................................................................... 1258
Functionality............................................................................ 1259
Operation principle.................................................................. 1259
Voltage and current measurements........................................ 1260
Tap changer position inputs.................................................... 1261
Operation mode selection........................................................1262
Manual voltage regulation....................................................... 1263
Automatic voltage regulation of single transformer................. 1264
Automatic voltage regulation of parallel transformers............. 1268
Master/Follower principle M/F............................................ 1269
Negative Reactance Principle NRP....................................1271
Minimizing Circulating Current principle MCC.................... 1272
Timer characteristics............................................................... 1275
Pulse control............................................................................1276
Blocking scheme..................................................................... 1277

630 series 39
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Alarm indication....................................................................... 1282

Base values............................................................................. 1283
Application............................................................................... 1283
Signals.....................................................................................1292
Settings....................................................................................1293
Measured values..................................................................... 1295
Monitored data.........................................................................1296
Technical data......................................................................... 1298

Section 11 General function block features................................. 1299

Definite time characteristics..........................................................1299
Definite time operation.............................................................1299
Current based inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)
characteristics...............................................................................1304
IDMT curves for overcurrent protection................................... 1304
Standard inverse-time characteristics................................ 1306
User-programmable inverse-time characteristics............... 1321
RI and RD-type inverse-time characteristics...................... 1321
Reset in inverse-time modes................................................... 1325
Inverse-timer freezing..............................................................1334
Voltage based inverse definite minimum time characteristics...... 1334
IDMT curves for overvoltage protection...................................1334
Standard inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage
protection............................................................................1337
User programmable inverse-time characteristics for
overvoltage protection........................................................ 1341
IDMT curve saturation of overvoltage protection................1342
IDMT curves for undervoltage protection................................ 1342
Standard inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage
protection............................................................................1343
User-programmable inverse-time characteristics for
undervoltage protection......................................................1345
IDMT curve saturation of undervoltage protection............. 1346
Measurement modes....................................................................1346
Generator startup and shutdown protection................................. 1348

Section 12 Requirements for measurement transformers............1351

Current transformers.................................................................... 1351
Current transformer requirements for overcurrent protection.. 1351
Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit
factor.................................................................................. 1351
Non-directional overcurrent protection............................... 1352
Example for non-directional overcurrent protection............1353

Section 13 IED physical connections........................................... 1355

40 630 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Protective earth connections........................................................ 1355

Inputs............................................................................................1357
Measuring inputs..................................................................... 1357
Auxiliary supply voltage input.................................................. 1358
Binary inputs............................................................................1359
RTD inputs...............................................................................1363
Outputs......................................................................................... 1365
Outputs for tripping and controlling .........................................1365
Outputs for signalling...............................................................1368
mA outputs.............................................................................. 1371
IRF...........................................................................................1371
Communication connections........................................................ 1372
Ethernet RJ-45 front connection..............................................1372
Ethernet connection for station communication ......................1373
Optical serial rear connection.................................................. 1373
Communication interfaces and protocols................................ 1373
Recommended third-party industrial Ethernet switches ......... 1373
Terminal diagrams........................................................................1374

Section 14 Technical data............................................................ 1381

Section 15 IED and functionality tests..........................................1387

Section 16 Applicable standards and regulations........................ 1391

Section 17 Glossary..................................................................... 1393

630 series 41
Technical Manual
42
1MRS756508 F Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning

personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and
commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,

protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the
protection relays. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic
knowledge in handling electronic equipment.

630 series 43
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRS756508 F
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

deinstallation & disposal

Decommissioning,
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering
Planning &

Installation

Operation
purchase
Quick start guide
Quick installation guide
Brochure
Product guide
Operation manual
Installation manual
Engineering manual
Technical manual
Application manual
Communication protocol manual
Point list manual
Commissioning manual
GUID-C8721A2B-EEB9-4880-A812-849E1A42B02C V1 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle

Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded

from the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/relion.

1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date Product series version History
A/2009-09-15 1.0 First release
B/2011-03-07 1.1 Content updated to correspond to the
product series version
C/2011-05-18 1.1 Content updated
D/2012-09-18 1.2 Content updated to correspond to the
product series version
E/2014-11-28 1.3 Content updated to correspond to the
product series version
F/2019-02-25 1.3 Content updated

44 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 1
Introduction

Download the latest documents from the ABB Web site

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

1.3.3 Related documentation

Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB Web
site http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

1.4 Symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of
a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand

that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,
comply fully with all warning and caution notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions

A particular convention may not be used in this manual.

630 series 45
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRS756508 F
Introduction

• Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
To navigate between the options, use and .
• Menu paths are presented in bold.
Select Main menu/Settings.
• WHMI menu names are presented in bold.
Click Information in the WHMI menu structure.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
To save the changes in nonvolatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• The ^ character in front of an input or output signal name in the function block
symbol given for a function, indicates that the user can set an own signal name in
PCM600.
• The * character after an input or output signal name in the function block symbol
given for a function, indicates that the signal must be connected to another
function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application
configuration.

1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols

Table 1: Functions included in the IEDs
Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI
Protection
Three-phase non-directional PHLPTOC 3I> 51P-1
overcurrent protection, low stage
Three-phase non-directional PHHPTOC 3I>> 51P-2
overcurrent protection, high stage
Three-phase non-directional PHIPTOC 3I>>> 50P/51P
overcurrent protection,
instantaneous stage
Voltage dependent overcurrent
protection PHPVOC I(U)> 51V
Three-phase directional DPHLPDOC 3I> -> 67-1
overcurrent protection, low stage
Three-phase directional DPHHPDOC 3I>> -> 67-2
overcurrent protection, high stage
Distance protection DSTPDIS Z< 21, 21P, 21N
Automatic switch-onto-fault logic CVRSOF SOTF SOTF
Fault locator SCEFRFLO FLOC 21FL
Autoreclosing DARREC O -> I 79
Non-directional earth-fault EFLPTOC I0> 51N-1
protection, low stage
Table continues on next page

46 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 1
Introduction

Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI

Non-directional earth-fault EFHPTOC I0>> 51N-2
protection, high stage
Non-directional earth-fault EFIPTOC I0>>> 50N/51N
protection, instantaneous stage
Directional earth-fault protection, DEFLPDEF I0> -> 67N-1
low stage
Directional earth-fault protection, DEFHPDEF I0>> -> 67N-2
high stage
Harmonics based earth-fault HAEFPTOC Io>HA 51NHA
protection
Transient/intermittent earth-fault INTRPTEF I0> -> IEF 67NIEF
protection
Admittance-based earth-fault EFPADM Yo> -> 21YN
protection
Multi-frequency admittance-based MFADPSDE I0> ->Y 67YN
earth-fault protection
Wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE Po> -> 32N
Stabilised restricted earth-fault
protection LREFPNDF dI0Lo> 87NL
Third harmonic based stator earth dUo(3H)>/
fault protection H3EFPSEF Uo(3H)< 27/59THD
High-impedance based restricted
earth-fault protection HREFPDIF dI0Hi> 87NH
Rotor earth-fault protection MREFPTOC Io>R 64R
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC I2/I1> 46PD
Negative-sequence overcurrent NSPTOC I2> 46
protection
Negative-sequence overcurrent
protection for machines MNSPTOC I2>G/M 46G/46M
Phase-reversal protection PREVPTOC I2>> 46R
Three-phase thermal overload T1PTTR 3Ith>F 49F
protection for feeder
Three-phase thermal overload
protection, two time constants T2PTTR 3Ith>T/G 49T/G
Three-phase thermal overload
protection for motors MPTTR 3Ith>M 49M
Motor startup supervision STTPMSU Is2t n< 48,66,14,51LR
Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC Ist> 51LR
Emergency start ESMGAPC ESTART ESTART
Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC 3I< 37
Three-phase current inrush INRPHAR 3I2f> 68
detection
Transformer differential protection
for two-winding transformers TR2PTDF 3dI>T 87T
High-impedance or flux-balance
based differential protection for
machines MHZPDIF 3dIHi>G/M 87GH/87MH
Table continues on next page

630 series 47
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRS756508 F
Introduction

Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI

Stabilized differential protection for
machines MPDIF 3dI>G/M 87G/87M
Three-phase overvoltage PHPTOV 3U> 59
protection
Three-phase undervoltage PHPTUV 3U< 27
protection
Positive-sequence overvoltage PSPTOV U1> 47O+
protection
Positive-sequence undervoltage PSPTUV U1< 47U+
protection
Negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV U2> 47O-
protection
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV U0> 59G
Directional reactive power DQPTUV Q>-->,3U< 32Q,27
undervoltage protection
Reverse power/directional DOPPDPR P> 32R/32O
overpower protection
Underpower protection DUPPDPR P< 32U
Frequency gradient protection DAPFRC df/dt> 81R
Overfrequency protection DAPTOF f> 81O
Underfrequency protection DAPTUF f< 81U
Load shedding LSHDPFRQ UFLS/R 81LSH
Low voltage ride through protection LVRTPTUV U<RT 27RT
function
Overexcitation protection OEPVPH U/f> 24
Voltage vector shift protection VVSPPAM VS 78V
Three-phase underexcitation
protection UEXPDIS X< 40
Three-phase underimpedance
protection UZPDIS Z< GT 21GT
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 3I>/I0>BF 51BF/51NBF
Tripping logic TRPPTRC I -> O 94
Multipurpose analog protection MAPGAPC MAP MAP
Protection-related functions
Local acceleration logic DSTPLAL LAL LAL
Communication logic for residual RESCPSCH CLN 85N
overcurrent
Scheme communication logic DSOCPSCH CL 85
Current reversal and WEI logic CRWPSCH CLCRW 85CRW
Current reversal and WEI logic for RCRWPSCH CLCRWN 85NCRW
residual overcurrent
Control
Bay control QCCBAY CBAY CBAY
Interlocking interface SCILO 3 3
Table continues on next page

48 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 1
Introduction

Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI

Circuit breaker/disconnector GNRLCSWI I <-> O CB/DC I <-> O CB/DC
control
Circuit breaker DAXCBR I <-> O CB I <-> O CB
Disconnector DAXSWI I <-> O DC I <-> O DC
Local/remote switch interface LOCREM R/L R/L
Synchrocheck SYNCRSYN SYNC 25
Tap changer control with voltage
regulator OLATCC COLTC 90V
Generic process I/O
Single point control (8 signals) SPC8GGIO - -
Double point indication DPGGIO - -
Single point indication SPGGIO - -
Generic measured value MVGGIO - -
Logic Rotating Switch for function SLGGIO - -
selection and LHMI presentation
Selector mini switch VSGGIO - -
Pulse counter for energy metering PCGGIO - -
Event counter CNTGGIO - -
Supervision and monitoring
Runtime counter for machines and MDSOPT OPTS OPTM
devices
Circuit breaker condition SSCBR CBCM CBCM
monitoring
Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF FUSEF 60
Current circuit supervision CCRDIF MCS 3I MCS 3I
Trip-circuit supervision TCSSCBR TCS TCM
Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT U<> U<>
Energy monitoring EPDMMTR E E
Measured value limit supervision MVEXP - -
Hot-spot and insulation ageing rate
monitoring for transformers HSARSPTR 3Ihp>T 26/49HS
Tap position indication TPOSSLTC TPOSM 84M
Power quality
Voltage variation PHQVVR PQMU PQMV
Voltage unbalance VSQVUB PQMUBU PQMUBV
Current harmonics CMHAI PQM3I PQM3I
Voltage harmonics (phase-to- VPPMHAI PQM3Upp PQM3Vpp
phase)
Voltage harmonics (phase-to- VPHMHAI PQM3Upe PQM3Vpg
earth)
Measurement
Three-phase current measurement CMMXU 3I 3I
Table continues on next page

630 series 49
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRS756508 F
Introduction

Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI

Three-phase voltage measurement VPHMMXU 3Upe 3Upe
(phase-to-earth)
Three-phase voltage measurement VPPMMXU 3Upp 3Upp
(phase-to-phase)
Residual current measurement RESCMMXU I0 I0
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU U0 U0
Power monitoring with P, Q, S, PWRMMXU PQf PQf
power factor, frequency
Sequence current measurement CSMSQI I1, I2 I1, I2
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI U1, U2 V1, V2
Analog channels 1-10 (samples) A1RADR ACH1 ACH1
Analog channels 11-20 (samples) A2RADR ACH2 ACH2
Analog channels 21-30 (calc. val.) A3RADR ACH3 ACH3
Analog channels 31-40 (calc. val.) A4RADR ACH4 ACH4
Binary channels 1-16 B1RBDR BCH1 BCH1
Binary channels 17 -32 B2RBDR BCH2 BCH2
Binary channels 33 -48 B3RBDR BCH3 BCH3
Binary channels 49 -64 B4RBDR BCH4 BCH4
Station communication (GOOSE)
Binary receive GOOSEBINRCV - -
Double point receive GOOSEDPRCV - -
Interlock receive GOOSEINTLKRCV - -
Integer receive GOOSEINTRCV - -
Measured value receive GOOSEMVRCV - -
Single point receive GOOSESPRCV - -

50 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 2
630 series overview

Section 2 630 series overview

2.1 Overview

630 series consists of IEDs for protection, control, measurement and supervision of
utility and industrial distribution substations, medium and large asynchronous motors
in industrial power systems, and transformers in utility and industry power
distribution networks.

630 series is a part of ABB’s Relion® product family. The 630 protection and control
product series is characterized by functional scalability and flexible configurability. It
also features necessary control functions for bay control in different applications.

The supported communication protocols including IEC 61850 offer seamless

connectivity to various station automation and SCADA systems.

630 series 51
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRS756508 F
630 series overview

2.1.1 Product series version history

Product series version Product series history
1.0 First release
1.1 • Support for IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• Analog GOOSE
• RTD module
• New analog input modules
• Additional arithmetic and logic function support
• Admittance-based earth-fault protection
• Wattmetric earth-fault protection
• Power quality functions
• Stabilized three-phase differential protection for motors and generators
• High-impedance/flux-balance-based differential protection for motors
and generators
• Synchronized motor protections
• Voltage control of transformers (single and parallel)
• Three-phase underimpedance protection
• Overexcitation protection

1.2 • REG630 generator protection and control

• Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection
• Underpower protection
• Third harmonic-based stator earth-fault protection

1.3 • Harmonics based earth-fault protection

• Directional reactive power undervoltage protection
• Multi-frequency admittance-based earth-fault protection
• Runtime counter for machines and devices
• AND and OR gates with 20 inputs
• Voltage vector shift protection
• Low voltage ride through protection
• Comparison functions
• Equality check for integer and real signals
• Greater than or equal check for integer and real signals
• Greater than check for integer and real signals
• Less than or equal check for integer and real signals
• Less than check for integer and real signals
• Not equal check for integer and real signals
• Hot-spot and insulation ageing rate monitoring for transformers

2.1.2 PCM600 and IED connectivity package version

• Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 Ver. 2.5 or later
• ABB REF630 Connectivity Package Ver. 1.3 or later
• ABB REG630 Connectivity Package Ver. 1.3 or later
• ABB REM630 Connectivity Package Ver. 1.3 or later
• ABB RET630 Connectivity Package Ver. 1.3 or later

Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web site

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation or directly with Update
Manager in PCM600.

52 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 2
630 series overview

2.2 Local HMI

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the protection relay. The
LHMI comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.

A071260 V3 EN

Figure 2: Example of the LHMI

2.2.1 Display
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240
pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view
depends on the character size and the view that is shown.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

630 series 53
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRS756508 F
630 series overview

A071258 V2 EN

Figure 3: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.

54 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 2
630 series overview

GUID-6828CE38-2B88-4BB5-8F29-27D2AC27CC18 V1 EN

Figure 4: Function button panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs.

GUID-3CBCBC36-EFCE-43A0-9D62-8D88AD6B6287 V1 EN

Figure 5: Alarm LED panel

The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that
depends on the label string length that the panel contains.

630 series 55
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRS756508 F
630 series overview

2.2.2 LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and
Trip.

There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related to
each three-color LED are divided into three pages. Altogether, the 15 physical three-
color LEDs can indicate 45 different alarms. The LEDs can be configured with
PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI, WHMI or PCM600.

2.2.3 Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. With the push-buttons you can control objects in the single-line
diagram, for example, circuit breakers or disconnectors The push-buttons are also
used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help and switch between local
and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.

GUID-FE571EAC-D3AF-4E26-8C01-197F21AA96CA V1 EN

Figure 6: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

2.3 Web HMI

The WHMI enables the user to access the IED via a web browser. The supported Web
browser versions are Internet Explorer 8.0, 9.0 and 10.0.

56 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 2
630 series overview

WHMI is disabled by default. To enable the WHMI, select Main

menu/Configuration/HMI/Web HMI/Operation via the LHMI.

WHMI offers several functions.

• Alarm indications and event lists

• System supervision
• Parameter settings
• Measurement display
• Disturbance records
• Phasor diagram

Viewing phasor diagram with WHMI requires downloading a SVG

Viewer plugin.

The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.

A071242 V3 EN

Figure 7: Example view of the WHMI

The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely.

• Locally by connecting the user's computer to the IED via the front
communication port.
• Remotely over LAN/WAN.

630 series 57
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRS756508 F
630 series overview

2.4 Authorization

At delivery, logging on to the IED is not required to be able to use the LHMI. The IED
user has full access to the IED as a SuperUser until users and passwords are created
with PCM600 and written into the IED.

The available user categories are predefined for LHMI and WHMI, each with
different rights.

Table 2: Available user categories

User category User rights
SystemOperator Control from LHMI, no bypass
ProtectionEngineer All settings
DesignEngineer Application configuration
UserAdministrator User and password administration

All changes in user management settings cause the IED to reboot.

2.5 Communication

The protection relay supports communication protocols IEC 61850-8-1, IEC

60870-5-103 and DNP3 over TCP/IP.

All operational information and controls are available through these protocols.
However, some communication functionality, for example, horizontal
communication (GOOSE) between the protection relays, is only enabled by the IEC
61850-8-1 communication protocol.

Disturbance files are accessed using the IEC 61850 or IEC 60870-5-103 protocols.
Disturbance files are also available to any Ethernet based application in the standard
COMTRADE format. The protection relay can send binary signals to other protection
relays (so called horizontal communication) using the IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE
(Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) profile. Binary GOOSE messaging can,
for example, be employed for protection and interlocking-based protection schemes.
The protection relay meets the GOOSE performance requirements for tripping
applications in distribution substations, as defined by the IEC 61850 standard.
Further, the protection relay supports the sending and receiving of analog values using

58 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 2
630 series overview

GOOSE messaging. Analog GOOSE messaging enables fast transfer of analog

measurement values over the station bus, thus facilitating for example sharing of RTD
input values, such as surrounding temperature values, to other relay applications. The
protection relay interoperates with other IEC 61850 compliant devices, tools and
systems and simultaneously reports events to five different clients on the IEC 61850
station bus. For a system using DNP3 over TCP/IP, events can be sent to four different
masters. For systems using IEC 60870-5-103, the protection relay can be connected to
one master in a station bus with star-topology.

All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated communication modules. The protection relay is connected to Ethernet-
based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (10/100BASE-TX) or the
fibre-optic multimode LC connector (100BASE-FX).

IEC 60870-5-103 is available from optical serial port where it is possible to use serial
glass fibre (ST connector) or serial plastic fibre (snap-in connector).

The protection relay supports the following time synchronization methods with a
timestamping resolution of 1 ms.

Ethernet communication based

• SNTP (simple network time protocol)
• DNP3

With special time synchronization wiring

• IRIG-B

IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication has a time-stamping resolution of 10 ms.

630 series 59
Technical Manual
60
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Section 3 Basic functions

3.1 General parameters

Table 3: Battery voltage setting available for each BIO and COM board.
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BatteryVoltage 24 - 250 V 1 110 Station battery voltage

Table 4: Binary input settings available for all binary inputs in BIO and COM boards.
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Threshold1 6 - 900 %UB 1 65 Threshold in percentage of station battery
voltage for input 1
DebounceTime1 0.01 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.01 Debounce time for input 1
OscillationCount1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Oscillation count for input 1
OscillationTime1 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 0.000 Oscillation time for input 1

Binary input settings are the same for each channel. The channel
numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

Table 5: RTD01_4AO output channel settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MinMaxRange1 0..20 mA - - 4..20 mA Min Max range of transducer value for
4..20 mA analog output 1
User Defined
MinPrimValue1 -1000000000.000 - - 0.001 4.000 Minimum primary value for analog output
1000000000.000 1
MaxPrimValue1 -1000000000.000 - - 0.001 20.000 Maximum primary value for analog output
1000000000.000 1

RTD output channel settings are the same for each channel. The
channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and
PCM600.

630 series 61
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 6: RTD01_4AO output channel settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UDefMinRangeCh1 -20.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 4.00 User defined minimum range for analog
output 1
UDefMaxRangeCh1 -20.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 20.00 User defined maximum range for analog
output 1
EnableDeadBand1 Off - - Off Enable dead band for analog output 1
On
DeadBandValue1 0.10 - 10.00 % 0.01 0.10 Dead band value for analog output 1

RTD output channel settings are the same for each channel. The
channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and
PCM600.

Table 7: RTD01_8AI input channel settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
InputMode1 Off - - Off Signal mode for analog input 1
Voltage
Current
Temp(RTD) 2Wire
Temp(RTD) 3Wire
Resistance 2 Wire
Resistance 3 Wire
InputType1 PT100 - - PT100 Temperature sensor type for analog input
PT250 1
NI100
NI120
CU10
MinMaxRange1 0..1(mA or V) - - 4..20 mA Min Max range of transducer value for
0..5(mA or V) analog input 1
1..5(mA or V)
0..10(mA or V)
-5..5(mA or V)
-10..10(mA or V)
2..10 V
0..20 mA
4..20 mA
-1..1 mA
-2.5..2.5 mA
-20..20 mA
0..100 Ohm
0..200 Ohm
0..500 Ohm
0..1000 Ohm
0..2000 Ohm
0..5000 Ohm
0.10000 Ohm
User Defined
MinPrimValue1 -1000000000.000 - - 0.001 4.000 Minimum primary value for analog input 1
1000000000.000
MaxPrimValue1 -1000000000.000 - - 0.001 20.000 Maximum primary value for analog input 1
1000000000.000

62 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

RTD input channel settings are the same for each channel. The
channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and
PCM600.

Table 8: RTD01_8AI input channel settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FilterTime1 0.4 s - - 5s Filter co-efficient time for analog input 1
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
EnableDeadBand1 Off - - Off Enable dead band for analog input 1
On
DeadBandValue1 0.10 - 10.00 % 0.01 0.10 Dead band value for analog input 1
UDefMinRange1 -25.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 4.00 User defined minimum range of
transducer value for analog input 1
UDefMaxRange1 -25.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 20.00 User defined maximum range of
transducer value for analog input 1
TolrncLLimitCh1 -4.0 - 0.0 % 0.1 0 Low tolerance limit for analog input 1
TolrncHLimitCh1 0.0 - 4.0 % 0.1 0 High tolerance limit for analog input 1
UDefUnitCh1 None - - None User defined unit for analog input 1
Current
Voltage
Resistance
Celsius temp

RTD input channel settings are the same for each channel. The
channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and
PCM600.

Table 9: TRM CT input channel settings

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ReversePolarity1 Yes - - No Reverse polarity of the current in channel
No 1
CTsec1 0.1 - 10.0 A 0.1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 400 Rated CT primary current

TRM CT input channel settings are the same for each channel. The
channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and
PCM600.

630 series 63
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 10: TRM VT input channel settings

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VTsec6 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim6 0.001 - 9999.999 kV 0.001 20 Rated VT primary voltage

TRM VT input channel settings are the same for each channel. The
channel numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and
PCM600.

3.2 Binary input

3.2.1 Binary input design

The design of all binary inputs enables burning off the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input. This is achieved with a high peak inrush current while
maintaining a low steady-state current. The design is used to make a reliable contact
with the external output contact. The short current pulse is intended for removing any
possible oxidation from the contact surface of the connected contact.

Use only DC power for the binary inputs. Use of AC power, including
full- or half-wave rectified AC power, may cause damage to the binary
input modules.

3.2.2 Binary input debounce filter

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond
when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced
binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime
value and the debounced input value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and
the debounced input value is low. The default setting of DebounceTime is 10 ms.

The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the
counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0
again.

Each binary input has a filter time parameter DebounceTimex, where x is the number
of the binary input of the module in question (for example DebounceTime1).

64 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.2.3 Oscillation filter

Binary input lines can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields
from, for example, nearby breakers. Floating input lines can result in binary inputs'
activity. These events are unwanted traffic in the system. An oscillation filter is used
to reduce the load from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.

Each debounced input signal change increments an oscillation counter. Every time the
oscillation time counter reaches the set OscillationTime, the oscillation counter is
checked and both the time counter and the oscillation counter are reset. If the counter
value is above the set OscillationCount value the signal is declared as oscillating. If
the value is below the set OscillationCount value, the signal is declared as valid again.
During counting of the oscillation time the status of the signal remains unchanged,
leading to a fixed delay in the status update, even if the signal has attained normal
status again.

Each binary input has an oscillation count parameter OscillationCountx and an

oscillation time parameter OscillationTimex, where x is the number of the binary input
of the module in question.

3.3 RTD module

The RTD module is a multipurpose input and analog output hardware with eight
multipurpose inputs and four mA outputs. Each of the multipurpose inputs (referred
as RTD inputs) is designed to support RTD temperature sensor, current, voltage or
resistance type of inputs. Each of the input channels can be configured as any one of
these input types. Each input can be linearly scaled for various applications, for
example, transformer tap changer position indication. Each input has an independent
limit value supervision and a dead band supervision function along with error signal
indication.

3.3.1 Multipurpose analog inputs

3.3.1.1 Functionality

All the inputs of the RTD module are independent channels with individual
protection, reference and isolation, making them galvanically isolated from the rest of
the module. However, the RTD inputs share a common ground. The RTD inputs are
designed to support four different types of inputs.

• Temperature (RTD), supports both 2-wire and 3-wire connections (-100.0°C...

+200.0°C).
• Current (-20...+20 mA).
• Voltage (-10...+10 V).
• Resistance, supports both 2-wire and 3-wire connections (0 Ω...10000 Ω).

630 series 65
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

The input channels can be configured as any one of the input types mentioned above.

3.3.1.2 Operation principle

Selection of input signal type

The RTD module has eight RTD input channels and carries scaled primary values,
quality and a time stamp. Each input channel has an associated error status channel
(AIx_ERR, where x is the input channel number) and one global error status input
(AI_ERROR). Each input channel can be configured for a particular type of input
signal like current, voltage, temperature or resistance using the setting InputMode.
The setting allows the Monitoring tool and LHMI to show appropriate quantity and
units. The default value is "Off".

When the InputMode setting is in one of the RTD modes (2-wire or 3-wire) the type
of temperature sensor can be selected using the setting parameter InputType. The
types of sensors available for the input module and the default selection are as shown
in the RTD module input channel settings table.

The error status associated with each input channel (AIx_ERR) is updated based on
the individual channel supervision and range check. This is done by checking the
status of the input values and quality bit received from the RTD hardware module. The
error status has a value of 0 for Input Valid, and a value of 1 for Data Quality Invalid/
out of range input values. The global error status for the input channels (AI_ERROR)
indicates failure of the input module.

The module has an additional eight service channels which provides non-scaled
secondary values (sensor values) along with the default units for the monitoring
purpose.

Selection of output value format

Primary scaled values

The RTD input component provides primary scaled values to the application
functions, which are also shown in the LHMI and Signal Monitoring tool with units.
The appropriate unit for an input channel is set by using the setting UDefUnitCh. The
available settings and the default value are as shown in RTD module input channel
settings table.

Secondary (Service) values

The input module provides secondary (service) values along with units for the purpose
of monitoring from the LHMI and Signal Monitoring tool.

User defined names

Each input channel can be assigned a user defined name using the Application
Configuration tool.

Input linear scaling

The scaling of current, voltage and resistance signals is based on the settings
MinMaxRange, MinPrimValue and MaxPrimValue. MinMaxRange setting

66 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

represents transducer ranges where as MinPrimValue and MaxPrimValue settings

represent the range of primary values.

MinPrimValue and MaxPrimValue is the range of primary values used as scaling

parameters.

The calculations of scaling values are shown in below.

1 2
GUID-F64A64C6-5849-4D4A-BF36-3DFE2D17275D V1 EN

Figure 8: Scaling factor calculation

1 MinRange (Secondary values)

2 MaxRange (Secondary values)
3 MinPrimValue (Primary values)
4 MaxPrimValue (Primary values)

The above four values are setting parameters.

Other assumptions considered:

1. Outputs vary in linear proportion to input values.
2. Sensor error binary output is signaled if input values are out of range of
MaxRange and MinRange.

Requirements for current (mA), typical values.

• MinMaxRange=0-20 mA, then let

630 series 67
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

• MinRange=0 mA
• MaxRange=20 mA
• MinPrimValue=0 A
• MaxPrimValue=1000 A

Let X=(MaxPrimValue-MinPrimValue)/(MaxRange-MinRange)

Then

Output=MinPrimValue+X·(Input-MinRange)

Example:

X=(1000000-0)/(20-0)=50000

If Input is 5 mA, Output=0+50000·(5-0)=250000 mA=250 A

Output=250 A when Input is 5 mA.

Requirements for voltage(V), typical values.

• MinMaxRange=0-10 V, then let

• MinRange=0 V
• MaxRange=10 V
• MinPrimValue=0 V
• MaxPrimValue=11000 V

Let X=(MaxPrimValue-MinPrimValue)/(MaxRange-MinRange)

Example:

X=(11000-0/(10-0)=1100

If Input is 6.3 V, Output=0+1100·(6.3-0)=6930 V=6.93 kV

Output=6.93 kV when Input is 6.3 V.

The MinMaxRange setting provides input range for different type of inputs. These are
standard values applicable to the input sensors. A user defined value can be used when
input range does not have any of the defined values.

The "User Defined" option provides the flexibility to adapt to different types of input
ranges. When "User Defined" option is selected, it is necessary to set the
UDefMinRange and UDefMaxRange values which are used for scaling factor
computation.

The scaling functionality is not applicable when the input channel is configured in
temperature modes (RTD 2-wire and RTD 3-wire).

68 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Dead band supervision

The dead band handling deals with primary values in the input system components.
The functionality decides percentage change in the input values that needs to be
reported to the application. That is, if the percentage change between the current
measured input values and the last reported values is greater than the setting
DeadBandValue (in %) of the Primary measured range, the current measurement is
reported to the application. Otherwise, the last reported measurement value is
continued to be made available for the application.

The Primary measured range is the difference between the settings Max value and Min
value.

 ABS ( new value − last reported value ) > ( % of DeadBandValue ⋅ Primary measured range )
Primary measured range = ABS ( MaxValue − MinValue )
GUID-C36E6F7A-6C14-426B-BA70-1041B14F73A7 V1 EN (Equation 1)

The range of the setting DeadBandValue and its default value are as shown in the RTD
module input channel settings table.

The dead band handling feature can be enabled using the setting EnableDeadBand. If
the feature is disabled, the input channel values are updated to application components
at the same rate as the RTD hardware input update frequency.

Channel supervision
If the measured values at any of the input channel falls below the setting
TolrncLLimitCh or rises above the setting TolrncHLimitCh for the selected input
signal range (MinMaxRange or user defined range parameters), either the transducer
or the wiring is considered to be faulty or the values are considered as out of range and
the channel-specific invalid signal is activated. The invalid signal is deactivated when
the transducer signal is received within the valid range. The range of the settings
TolrncLLimitCh and TolrncHLimitCh is as shown in the RTD module input channel
settings table.

As an example, when a channel MinMaxRange parameter is configured as "4-20 mA"

and set TolrncLLimitCh and TolrncHLimitCh are -1% and +1% respectively, the
active input is marked faulty/invalid if the measured value is below 3.84 mA or above
20.16 mA.

The operating ranges for the different type of inputs are as shown in the RTD module
input channel settings table. If the measured values are out of the specified range, the
RTD module freezes the value to the boundary values as specified in and set the
invalid flag.

The invalid flag set and reported by the RTD hardware is updated to applications
components accordingly.

Since MinMaxRange value is not valid for Temperature Input mode, the tolerance
range check is performed for the fixed range of values -40 to +200 °C. When a channel
is configured for measuring resistance 2-wire and resistance 3-wire the tolerance is
considered for values between 0 to 10000 ohms.

630 series 69
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Self supervision
The input samples from the RTD channel are validated by using an internally set
reference voltage. If the measured voltage deviates by 1.5% of the measurement range
of the input, the sample is discarded. If the faulty condition persists longer than the
setting FilterTime, the channel specific error signal AIx_ERR and the global error
signal AI_ERROR are set to TRUE to indicate a hardware fault. This would also serve
as a self supervision for the input channels. As the measured value settles down to
acceptable levels, the error signals are cleared. Refer to the RTD module input channel
settings table for various values that FilterTime can be set to along with its default
value.

3.3.1.3 RTD input connection

All eight RTD inputs are treated as analog input channels. RTD inputs can be used
with 2-wire or 3-wire connection with common ground. When using the 3-wire
connection, it is important that all three wires connecting the sensor are symmetrical,
that is, the wires are of same type and length. Consequently, the wire resistance is
automatically compensated.

3-wire connection RTD/resistance

Shunt G
mA
IN +
Temperature
Sensor/
+
Resistor IN - -
DIFF
GND

GUID-3CD4E961-8647-42CA-AF76-920E69E5EE15 V1 EN

Figure 9: Physical connection diagram for 3-wire RTD source

70 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

2-wire connection RTD/resistance

Shunt G
mA
IN +
Temperature
Sensor/
+
Resistor IN - -
DIFF
GND

GUID-4A3E0061-DFDF-4F03-98B7-2CE2779D6A4E V1 EN

Figure 10: Physical connection diagram for 2-wire RTD source

Current transducer connection

Shunt G
mA
IN +
+
IN - -
DIFF
GND

GUID-C06784EE-0A4F-47F1-9485-F1E3A83D248C V1 EN

Figure 11: Physical connection diagram for current source

630 series 71
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Current connection with grounding

GUID-7D5C90BF-C552-4785-8543-9F4F87DF80BC V1 EN

Figure 12: Physical connection diagram for current source with grounding

This mA input connection can be used when only floating or isolated mA sources are
connected.

Voltage transducer connection

Shunt G
mA
IN +
+
IN - -
DIFF
GND

GUID-649FA427-3F38-4364-991F-362B20CCAD57 V1 EN

Figure 13: Physical connection diagram for voltage source

3.3.2 mA outputs

3.3.2.1 Functionality

All the outputs channels support mA output in the scalable range -20 mA to +20 mA.

3.3.2.2 Operation princible

Four analog output channels are available which can be individually configured,
scaled or blocked by the user. The output components give the analog output status
readback value for the respective channels. These status values are also considered as
service values. Each output channel has associated readback analog output out-of-

72 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

range (too high impedance) error status channel (AOx_ERR). The Global Error status
for the output channels (AO_ERROR) indicates the failure of the output module and
the fail status information of the output channels.

3.3.2.3 Scaling output values

The scaling of the output values is achieved using the settings MinMaxRange,
MinPrimValue and MaxPrimValue. The settings MinPrimValue and MaxPrimValue
represent the range of primary values from the application for scaling the output.

Setting MinMaxRange is used to scale the output mA values.

If MinMaxRange is set to "User Defined", the UDefMinRangeCh and

UDefMaxRangeCh values are used for computing the scaling factor. These allow the
flexible output range to be set anywhere between -20 mA...+20 mA.

The range of values for the setting and its default value are as shown in the RTD
module input channel settings table.

Example: Let the scaling parameters be set to a primary range of 0 to 1000 A and
secondary sensor range setting to ""4...20 mA"". Then a 100 A output from the
application results in an output of 5.6 mA on the RTD module output side.

When using output forcing, the primary value scaling is fixed to

1000:1. If forcing is set to 5 A, it results in 5 mA to the mA output
channel.

3.3.2.4 Dead band supervision

The dead band handling deals with primary values in the output components. This
decides the percentage change in the output values that needs to be reported to the
application. That is, the Primary values from the application are compared with the
last reported value. If the difference exceeds the setting DeadBandValue (in %) of the
primary measured range, the actual value is passed to the RTD output hardware.

The Primary measured range is the difference between the settings Max value and Min
value.

 ABS ( new value − last reported value ) > ( % of DeadBandValue ⋅ Primary measured range )
Primary measured range = ABS ( MaxValue − MinValue )
GUID-C36E6F7A-6C14-426B-BA70-1041B14F73A7 V1 EN (Equation 2)

The range of the setting DeadBandValue and its default value are as shown in the RTD
module input channel settings table.

The dead band handling feature can be enabled using the setting EnableDeadBand. If
the feature is disabled, the output values are updated to application components at
same rate as RTD hard ware analog output update frequency.

630 series 73
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.3.2.5 Supervision of analog outputs

The RTD module hardware supports the sending of the read back value with a
determined repetition time and this is sent it to the application to monitor the status of
mA output channel. The supervision of mA output is supported in the hardware and
any fault detection can be reported to the application.

3.3.2.6 Forcing Support

Forcing of the RTD module output mA values is supported in the RTD output
component. This is possible only when the IED is in the test mode. When values are
forced from the LHMI, the values are treated as primary values which are scaled down
to secondary currents using the output scaling parameters. The module ensures that
the secondary output current values passed to the RTD hardware are within the range
of -20...20 mA.

When using output forcing the primary value scaling is fixed to

1000:1. If forcing is set to 5 A, it results in 5 mA to the mA output
channel.

Forcing feature can be tested only for configured output channels.

When mA current values are forced to non-configured output
channels, values are not passed to mA output channel HW circuitry.

3.3.2.7 Blocking

There is option to block the operation of output channels globally through the input
BLOCK or block each individual channels using the inputs AO1_BLK, AO2_BLK,
AO3_BLK and AO4_BLK.

Blocking signals are available as individual hardware channels and can be selected in
PCM600 using the Application Configuration tool (ACT) from Object types/
Hardware IO/ Binary Outputs.

3.3.2.8 User defined names

User defined names for the individual output channels can be assigned through the
Application Configuration tool.

74 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.4 User authentication

3.4.1 Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and PCM600 is implemented at both access points
to the IED.

• Local, through the LHMI

• Remote, through the communication ports

3.4.2 Operation principle

Different levels (or types) of users can access or operate different areas of the IED and
tools' functionality.
Table 11: Predefined user types
User type Access rights
SystemOperator Control from LHMI, no bypass, protection function
activation and deactivation
ProtectionEngineer All settings
DesignEngineer Application configuration (including SMT, GDE
and CMT)
UserAdministrator User and password administration for the IED

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management
within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI on the IED. There
are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on LHMI.

Use only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 in user names and passwords.

Include at least one user in the UserAdministrator group to be able to

write users created in PCM600 to the IED.

3.4.2.1 Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the IED User Management.

630 series 75
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Once a user is created and written to the IED, the user can perform a Log on using the
password assigned in the tool. The default user is Guest.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on displays a message box “No user
defined!”.

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, the IED returns to Guest state, in which
only reading is possible, after the timeout (set in Main menu/Configuration/HMI/
LHMI/Display Timeout) elapses. By factory default, the display timeout is set to 60
minutes.

If one or more users are created with the IED User Management and written to the
IED, the Log on window opens if a user attempts a Log on by pressing the Key push-
button or if the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected.

See the operation manual for more information on the logon

procedure.

After a successful Log on, the LHMI returns to the actual setting folder if, for example,
a password protected setting needs to be changed. If the Log on has failed, an "Error
Access Denied" message opens. If the user enters an incorrect password three times,
the user is blocked for ten minutes before a new attempt to log in can be performed.
The user is blocked from logging in from the LHMI, WHMI and PCM600. However,
other users are allowed to log in during this period.

3.4.3 Authority status ATHSTAT

3.4.3.1 Function block

ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON

IEC09000235_en_1.vsd
IEC09000235 V1 EN

Figure 14: Function block

3.4.3.2 Functionality

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block for user logon
activity.

3.4.3.3 Operation principle

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED
and the user authorization.

76 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

• The fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
• The fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated.

3.4.3.4 Signals
Table 12: ATHSTAT Output signals
Name Type Description
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on

3.4.3.5 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.5 Local human-machine interface LHMI

3.5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour

3.5.1.1 Settings
Table 13: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 10 - 120 Min 10 60 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen Main menu - - Main menu Default screen
Control
Events
Measurements
Disturbance
records
Monitoring
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance report
On
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line diagram
Yes
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes

630 series 77
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.5.2 Local HMI signals

3.5.2.1 Function block

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN

Figure 15: LHMICTRL function block

3.5.2.2 Signals
Table 14: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 15: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI
are cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not
active

3.5.3 Basic part for the LED indication module

3.5.3.1 Function block

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK

IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN

Figure 16: LEDGEN function block

78 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G

IEC09000322 V1 EN

Figure 17: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example, all 15 LED in each of group 1 - 3 has
a similar function block.

3.5.3.2 Functionality

The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx

(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs.
The input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The
input signal for each LED is selected individually using Signal Matrix or Application
Configuration. Each LED is controlled by a GRP1_LEDx function block, that
controls the color and the operating mode.

Each indication LED on LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.

3.5.3.3 Operation principle

Status LEDs
There are three status LEDs above the display in the front of the IED: green, yellow
and red.

The green LED has a fixed function, while the yellow and red LEDs are user
configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report is
created (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used to
indicate a trip command.

Indication LEDs

Operating modes
Collecting mode

• LEDs which are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated
continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable
when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode

• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs
and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs
defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S)
initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end

630 series 79
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum
time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset
• From LHMI
• The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is
positive-edge triggered, not level triggered. Acknowledge/reset via the
Clear button and menus on the LHMI.

• From function input

• The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input,
ACK_RST, to the function. This input can, for example, be configured to a
binary input operated from an external push button. The function is
positive-edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the
button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects
indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

• Automatic reset
• Only indications defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence
type 6 (LatchedReset-S)The can be automatically reset. When the LEDs
have automatically been reset, still persisting indications are indicated with
a steady light.

Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follow
the input signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is
not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only
working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and restarting
mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F
= Flash.

At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color
corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected sequence
diagrams.

80 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN

Figure 18: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input
signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 19: Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is
as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in
parallel is shown in Figure 20.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN

Figure 20: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.

Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the
signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets
a steady light.

630 series 81
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 21: Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

When a LED is acknowledged, all indications that appear before the indication with
higher priority has been reset, are acknowledged, independent of if the low priority
indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In Figure 22 it is shown the
sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment
has been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority signal is shown as
acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN

Figure 22: Operating sequence 3, 2 colors involved

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority acknowledges also low priority
indications, which are not visible according to Figure 23.

82 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN

Figure 23: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority

indication the high priority indication is shown as not acknowledged according to
Figure 24.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN

Figure 24: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.

Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation
of the input signal, the indication lights up with a steady light. The difference to
sequence 3 and 4 is that the indications that are still activated are not affected by the
reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset is executed, a new reading
and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other
LEDs in its operation.

630 series 83
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Activating
signal

LED

Reset

IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 25: Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED changes color according to
Figure 26.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN

Figure 26: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also, in this case indications that are still
activated are not affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge
of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals
is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of
LEDs set for other sequences.

Figure 27 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

84 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN

Figure 27: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance

Figure 28 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.

Disturbance Disturbance

tRestart tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 28: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

630 series 85
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Figure 29 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 29: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 30 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

86 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 30: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

3.5.3.4 Signals
Table 16: LEDGEN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

Table 17: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

Table 18: LEDGEN Output signals

Name Type Description
NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is
set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are
acknowledged

630 series 87
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.5.3.5 Settings
Table 19: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

Table 20: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI alarm
Follow-F group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green

3.5.4 Display part for HMI function keys control module

3.5.4.1 Function block

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1

IEC09000327 V1 EN

Figure 31: Function block

3.5.4.2 Functionality

LHMI has five function buttons, directly to the left of the display, that can be
configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button has an indication
LED that can be configured in the application configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control
a binary signal.

88 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.5.4.3 Operation principle

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled

from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output
status of the actual function block changes. These binary outputs can in turn be used
to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O
outputs etc.

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and

parameters that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and
parameters are normally set using the Parameter Setting tool.

Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.

Mode 0 (OFF)

This mode always gives the output the value 0 (FALSE). Changes on the IO attribute
are ignored.

Input value

Output value

IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN

Figure 32: Sequence diagram for Mode 0

Mode 1 (TOGGLE)

In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input has
been written. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block
executes. The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.

Input value

Output value

IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN

Figure 33: Sequence diagram for Mode 1

Mode 2 (PULSED)

630 series 89
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

In this mode the output is high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this time the
output returns to “0”. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it
being high and there is no output pulse.

Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the
edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is
zero; else the trigger edge is lost.

Input value

Output value
tpulse tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd
IEC09000332 V1 EN

Figure 34: Sequence diagram for Mode 2

Input function
All the inputs work in the same way. When the LHMI is configured so that a certain
function button is of type CONTROL, the corresponding input on this function block
becomes active, and lights up the yellow function button LED when high. This
functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off.

3.5.4.4 Signals
Table 21: FNKEYMD1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

Table 22: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name Type Description
FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

3.5.4.5 Settings
Table 23: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state

90 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 24: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut Main menu - - Main menu
Control
Events
Measurements
Disturbance
records
Monitoring

3.6 IED identifiers TERMINALID

3.6.1 Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual
IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

3.6.2 Application

3.6.2.1 Customer-specific settings

The customer-specific settings are used to give the IED a unique name and address.
The settings are used by a central control system to communicate with the IED. The
customer-specific identifiers are found in the LHMI or WHMI in Configuration/
System.

The settings can also be made from PCM600.

Use only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 in station, unit and object

names.

630 series 91
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.6.3 Settings
Table 25: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 18 - 1 AA0J0Q0A0 Technical key

3.7 Product information

3.7.1 Functionality
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven presets,
settings that are unchangeable but important.

• IEDProdType
• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

The settings are visible on the LHMI or WHMI, under Information/Product

identifiers.

They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).

3.7.2 Application

3.7.2.1 Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are useful for identifying a specific version and helpful
when maintaining, repairing, interchanging IEDs between different substation
automation systems and upgrading. The factory-made settings can not be changed by
the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the LHMI or WHMI
inInformation/Product identifiers.

• IEDProdType

92 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

• Describes the type of the IED. Example: REF630

• ProductDef
• Describes the release number from the production. Example: 1.1.0.A1
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 1.1.0
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

3.7.3 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.8 Primary system values PRIMVAL

3.8.1 Functionality
The rated system frequency and phasor rotation are set in Main menu/
Configuration/System in the LHMI and PCM600.

3.8.2 Application
The rated system frequency is set in Main menu/Configuration/System in the LHMI
and PCM600.

3.8.3 Settings
Table 26: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1

3.9 Global phase base values BASEPH

3.9.1 Functionality
Almost all the current, voltage and power setting values are given in per unit (p.u.)
values. The p.u. values are relational values to certain base values (given in A, kV,
kVA). The base values are separate setting parameters for an IED. The base values are

630 series 93
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

set independently of the used measurement device primary ratings. This allows for the
settings to be given in relation to the nominal current and voltage values of the
protected object, for example, if the measurement devices are oversized and their
primary ratings are higher than the nominal values of the protected object.

The phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase base values are defined in BASEPH. The global
settings related to BASEPH are located in Configuration/Analog inputs/Base
values/Phase Grp 1…3 in LHMI and Configuration/Analog inputs/Base values/
BASEPH :1…3 in PST.

The BASEPH (Phase Grp) is called phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase base value

group.

There are three groups (instances) of BASEPH (Phase Grp). As a default, all the
applicable functions in the IED are set to use the same group of the base values.
However, in each applicable function there is a selection (Base value Sel phase
advanced settings) where one of the three possible groups can be selected individually
for the function in question.

For example, all PHxPTOC functions use the first group Base value Sel phase =
"Phase Grp 1" as a default but two other groups "Phase Grp 2" are "Phase Grp 3" are
possible to select.

3.9.2 Settings
Table 27: BASEPH Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Voltage base Val PP 0.01 - 440.00 kV 0.01 20.00 Voltage base value, phase-to-phase
Current base Val Ph 1 - 9999 A 1 400 Current base value, phase
S base value 3Ph 0.05 - 1800000.00 kVA 0.05 13856.00 Three-phase power base value

3.9.3 The principles for voltage settings given in pu

The voltage base value in BASEPH is the phase-to-phase voltage. This means that in
voltage settings related to phase-to-phase voltage, 1.0 p.u. corresponds to 20.00 kV
(assuming the default value for the Voltage base Val PP setting). An example of this
kind of setting is DSTPDIS PP V Ph Sel GFC (the default value 0.8 pu corresponds to
0.8 x 20 kV = 16 kV ).

For the voltage settings that are related to the phase-to-earth voltage, the functions
contain internal scaling factor (0.5774). Therefore for the voltage settings related to
the phase-to-earth voltage, 1.0 results in a nominal phase-to-earth voltage of 11.55
kV, assuming the default value 20.00 kV for the Voltage base Val PP setting. An
example of this kind of setting is PSPTOV Start value (the default value 1.1 pu
corresponds to 1.1 x 0.5774 x 20 kV ≈12.7 kV ).

94 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

There are few functions for which the internal scaling is not done. In
these functions it can be selected whether phase-to-phase voltages or
phase-to-earth voltages are used, for example, the Voltage selection
setting in PHPTOV. This also means that the voltage settings in these
functions can be either related to the phase-to-phase voltage or to the
phase-to-earth voltage depending on the selection. In functions, for
example, PHPTOV, PHPTUV and SYNCRSYN, 1.0 p.u.
corresponds to 20.00 kV, assuming the default value for the Voltage
base Val PP setting regardless of the voltages used in the functions. If
the Voltage selection setting in PHPTOV is set to “phase-to-earth”
("1"), a value of 0.64 p.u. for Start value results in 12.8 kV (≈1.1 x
11.55 kV)

3.9.4 Technical revision history

Table 28: BASEPH technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Maximum setting value is changed from 6000 to
9999 for Current base value

3.10 Global residual base values BASERES

3.10.1 Functionality
Almost all the current, voltage and power setting values are given in per unit (p.u.)
values. The p.u. values are relational values to certain base values (given in A, kV,
kVA). The base values are separate setting parameters for an IED. The base values are
set independently of the used measurement device primary ratings. This allows for the
settings to be given in relation to the nominal current and voltage values of the
protected object, for example, if the measurement devices are oversized and their
primary ratings are higher than the nominal values of the protected object.

The residual base values are defined in BASERES. The global settings related to
BASERES are located in Configuration/Analog inputs/Base values/Residual Grp
1…3 in LHMI and Configuration/Analog inputs/Base values/BASERES :1…3 in
PST.

The BASERES (Residual Grp) is called residual base value group.

There are three groups (instances) of BASERES (Residual Grp). As a default, all the
applicable functions in the IED are set to use the same group of the base values.
However, in each applicable function there is a selection (Base value Sel Res
advanced settings) where one of the three possible groups can be selected individually
for the function in question.

630 series 95
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

For example, all EFxPTOC functions use the first group Base value Sel Res =
"Residual Grp 1"e) as default and two other groups "Residual Grp 2" or "Residual Grp
3" are possible to select.

3.10.2 Settings
Table 29: BASERES Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Voltage base Val Res 0.001 - 440.000 kV 0.001 11.547 Voltage base value, residual
Current base Val Res 1 - 6000 A 1 70 Current base value, residual
S base value Res 0.05 - 18000.00 kVA 0.01 808.29 Residual power base value

3.11 Angle reference AISVBAS

3.11.1 Functionality
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all
directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined properly. A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service
values reading. This analog channels phase angle is always fixed to zero degree and
all other angle information is shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.

The Reference channel is set under Main menu/Configuration/Analog inputs/

Reference channel in the LHMI and from IED Configuration/Basic IED functions/
Analog inputs/AISVBAS in PCM600 parameter setting tree.

3.11.2 Settings
Table 30: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseAngleRef TRM - Channel 1 - - TRM - Channel 1 Reference channel for phase angle
TRM - Channel 2 presentation
TRM - Channel 3
TRM - Channel 4
TRM - Channel 5
TRM - Channel 6
TRM - Channel 7
TRM - Channel 8
TRM - Channel 9
TRM - Channel 10

96 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.12 Parameter setting group handling

3.12.1 Functionality
The different groups of settings are used to optimize the IED operation for different
system conditions. By creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either
from the LHMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that
can cope with a variety of system scenarios.

3.12.2 Setting group handling SETGRPS

3.12.2.1 Settings
Table 31: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 ActiveSettingGroup
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
MaxNoSetGrp 1-4 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-4

3.12.3 Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP

3.12.3.1 Function block

ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
SETCHGD

IEC09000064_en_1.vsd
IEC09000064 V1 EN

Figure 35: Function block

3.12.3.2 Signals
Table 32: ACTVGRP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active

630 series 97
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 33: ACTVGRP Output signals

Name Type Description
GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active
SETCHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed

3.12.3.3 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.12.4 Operation principle

Parameter setting groups (ACTVGRP) function has four functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these
inputs changes the active setting group. Five functional output signals are available for
configuration purposes.

A setting group is selected by using the LHMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ACTVGRP function block.

Each input of the function block can be configured with PCM600 to connect to any of
the binary inputs in the IED.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if, for example, both group four and group
two are set to activate, group two is the one activated.

Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.

The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use
to switch between.

98 630 series
Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1

IOx-Bly1 ACTVGRP
Æ ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
Æ ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3
Æ ACTGRP3 GRP3
IOx-Bly4
Æ ACTGRP4 GRP4

SETCHGD

IEC09000063_en_1.vsd
IEC09000063 V1 EN

Figure 36: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes five output signals, for confirmation of which group
that is active.

3.12.5 Application
Four sets of settings are available to optimize the IED operation for different system
conditions. By creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the
LHMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope
with a variety of system scenarios.

Different conditions in networks with different voltage levels require highly adaptable
protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity
requirements. Protection units operate with a higher degree of availability, especially,
if the setting values of their parameters are continuously optimized according to the
conditions in the power system.

Operational departments can plan for different operating conditions in the primary
equipment. The protection engineer can prepare the necessary optimized and pre-
tested settings in advance for different protection functions. Four different groups of
setting parameters are available in the IED. Any of them can be activated through the
different programmable binary inputs by external or internal control signals.

630 series 99
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.13 Signal matrix for analog inputs

3.13.1 Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor
function, processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all
aspects of the analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency,
harmonic content, sequence components and so on. This information is used by the
respective functions in Application Configuration, for example, protection,
measurement or monitoring.

The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
or the Application Configuration tools.

3.13.2 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_1

3.13.2.1 Function block

GUID-40775762-FA60-459A-ABFA-199B4CF6AA5C V1 EN

Figure 37: Function block

3.13.2.2 Signals
Table 34: SMAI_20_1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for
DFT calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

100 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 35: SMAI_20_1 Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from
inputs 1-4
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are
connected

Table 36: SMAI_80_1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 80.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for
DFT calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

Table 37: SMAI_80_1 Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from
inputs 1-4

3.13.2.3 Settings

Only values 1-3 of the parameter GlobalBaseSel should normally be

used. The values 1-3 refer to the global base value groups Phase Grp
1, Phase Grp 2 and Phase Grp 3 correspondingly (BASEPH1,
BASEPH2 and BASEPH3 in PCM600). The selection affects the
actual limit for frequency calculation set by MinValFreqMeas which
by default is 10% of the Voltage base Val PP in the selected group.
The values 4-6 refer to Residual Grp 1, Residual Grp 2 and Residual
Grp 3 (BASERES1, BASERES2 and BASERES3 in PCM600)

630 series 101

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

correspondingly and they are typically not to be used in this

connection.

Table 38: SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel1) 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

1) Only values 1...3 should normally be used. The values 1...3 refer to the global base value groups Phase Grp 1, Phase Grp 2 and Phase Grp
3 correspondingly (BASEPH1, BASEPH2 and BASEPH3 in PCM600). The selection affects the actual limit for frequency calculation set by
MinValFreqMeas which by default is 10 percent of the Voltage base Val PP in the selected group. Values 4...6 refer to Residual Grp 1,
Residual Grp 2 and Residual Grp 3 (BASERES1, BASERES2 and BASERES3 in PCM600) correspondingly and they are typically not used
here.

Table 39: SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

102 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to

Current, the MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that
the minimum level for current amplitude is based on Voltage base Val
PP. For example, if Voltage base Val PP is 20000, the minimum
amplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000. This has practical affect
only if the current measuring SMAI is used as a frequency reference
for the adaptive DFT. This is not recommended, see the Setting
guidelines.

Table 40: SMAI_80_1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel1) 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

1) Only values 1...3 should normally be used. The values 1...3 refer to the global base value groups Phase Grp 1, Phase Grp 2 and Phase Grp
3 correspondingly (BASEPH1, BASEPH2 and BASEPH3 in PCM600). The selection affects the actual limit for frequency calculation set by
MinValFreqMeas which by default is 10 percent of the Voltage base Val PP in the selected group. Values 4...6 refer to Residual Grp 1,
Residual Grp 2 and Residual Grp 3 (BASERES1, BASERES2 and BASERES3 in PCM600) correspondingly and they are typically not used
here.

630 series 103

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 41: SMAI_80_1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to

Current, the MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that
the minimum level for current amplitude is based on Voltage base Val
PP. For example, if Voltage base Val PP is 20000, the minimum
amplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000. This has practical affect
only if the current measuring SMAI is used as a frequency reference
for the adaptive DFT. This is not recommended, see the Setting
guidelines.

3.13.3 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_2

3.13.3.1 Function block

SMAI_20_2
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP2L1 AI2
^GRP2L2 AI3
^GRP2L3 AI4
^GRP2N AIN

IEC09000138-2-en.vsd
IEC09000138 V2 EN

SMAI_80_2
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT
^GRP2L1
^GRP2L2
^GRP2L3
^GRP2N

IEC09000140-2-en.vsd
IEC09000140 V2 EN

Figure 38: Function block

Input and output signals on SMAI_20_2 to SMAI_20_12, and

SMAI_80_2 to SMAI_80_12, are the same except for input signals
GRPxL1 to GRPxN where x is equal to instance number (2 to 12).

104 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.13.3.2 Signals
Table 42: SMAI_20_2 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP2L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP2L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP2N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

Table 43: SMAI_20_2 Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from
inputs 1-4
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the first analog input
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the second analog input
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the third analog input
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Quantity connected to the fourth analog input
AIN GROUP SIGNAL Calculated residual quantity if inputs 1-3 are
connected

Table 44: SMAI_80_2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP2L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP2L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP2N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

Table 45: SMAI_80_2 Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Grouped three phase signal containing data from
inputs 1-4

630 series 105

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.13.3.3 Settings

Only values 1-3 of the parameter GlobalBaseSel should normally be

used. The values 1-3 refer to the global base value groups Phase Grp
1, Phase Grp 2 and Phase Grp 3 correspondingly (BASEPH1,
BASEPH2 and BASEPH3 in PCM600). The selection affects the
actual limit for frequency calculation set by MinValFreqMeas which
by default is 10% of the Voltage base Val PP in the selected group.
The values 4-6 refer to Residual Grp 1, Residual Grp 2 and Residual
Grp 3 (BASERES1, BASERES2 and BASERES3 in PCM600)
correspondingly and they are typically not to be used in this
connection.

Table 46: SMAI_20_2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel1) 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

1) Only values 1...3 should normally be used. The values 1...3 refer to the global base value groups Phase Grp 1, Phase Grp 2 and Phase Grp
3 correspondingly (BASEPH1, BASEPH2 and BASEPH3 in PCM600). The selection affects the actual limit for frequency calculation set by
MinValFreqMeas which by default is 10 percent of the Voltage base Val PP in the selected group. Values 4...6 refer to Residual Grp 1,
Residual Grp 2 and Residual Grp 3 (BASERES1, BASERES2 and BASERES3 in PCM600) correspondingly and they are typically not used
here.

Table 47: SMAI_20_2 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

106 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to

Current, the MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that
the minimum level for current amplitude is based on Voltage base Val
PP. For example, if Voltage base Val PP is 20000, the minimum
amplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000. This has practical affect
only if the current measuring SMAI is used as a frequency reference
for the adaptive DFT. This is not recommended, see the Setting
guidelines.

Table 48: SMAI_80_2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel1) 1-6 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

1) Only values 1...3 should normally be used. The values 1...3 refer to the global base value groups Phase Grp 1, Phase Grp 2 and Phase Grp
3 correspondingly (BASEPH1, BASEPH2 and BASEPH3 in PCM600). The selection affects the actual limit for frequency calculation set by
MinValFreqMeas which by default is 10 percent of the Voltage base Val PP in the selected group. Values 4...6 refer to Residual Grp 1,
Residual Grp 2 and Residual Grp 3 (BASERES1, BASERES2 and BASERES3 in PCM600) correspondingly and they are typically not used
here.

Table 49: SMAI_80_2 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

Even if the AnalogInputType setting of a SMAI block is set to

Current, the MinValFreqMeas setting is still visible. This means that
the minimum level for current amplitude is based on Voltage base Val
PP. For example, if Voltage base Val PP is 20000, the minimum
amplitude for current is 20000 * 10% = 2000. This has practical affect
630 series 107
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

only if the current measuring SMAI is used as a frequency reference

for the adaptive DFT. This is not recommended, see the Setting
guidelines.

3.13.4 Operation principle

Every SMAI can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value),
either voltage or current. The AnalogInputType setting should be set according to the
input connected. The signal received by SMAI is processed internally and in total 244
different electrical parameters are obtained for example RMS value, peak-to-peak,
frequency and so on. The activation of BLOCK input resets all outputs to “0”.

Two types of SMAI functions are available: SMAI_20 and SMAI_80.

SMAI_20 does all the calculation based on nominal 20 samples per line frequency
period, this gives a sample frequency of 1 kHz at 50 Hz nominal line frequency and 1.2
kHz at 60 Hz nominal line frequency. However, there are a few applications which
require a nominal 80 samples per line frequency period, giving the sample frequency
of 4 kHz at 50 Hz nominal line frequency and 4.8 kHz at 60 Hz nominal line frequency.
This is handled by the SMAI_80 function.

SMAI_20 function is available with three different task times, whereas SMAI_80
function is available with one task time.
Table 50: SMAI functions available in the 630 series
Product Available SMAI
REF630 12 instances of SMAI_20 function with task time of
10 ms and SMAI_80 function with task time of 5
ms.
REG630 12 instances of SMAI_20 with task time of 10 ms
and 3 ms.
REM630 12 instances of SMAI_20 with task time of 10 ms
and 5 ms.
RET630 12 instances of SMAI_20 with task time of 10 ms
and 3 ms.

The output signals AI1...AI4 in SMAI_20_x function block are direct outputs of the
connected input signals GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN. GRPxN is always
the neutral current. If GRPxN is not connected, the output AI4 is zero. The AIN output
is the calculated residual parameter, obtained as a sum of inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2
and GRPxL3 but is equal to output AI4 if GRPxN is connected. The outputs signal
AI1, AI2, AI3 and AIN are normally connected to the analog disturbance recorder.
When the setting AnalogInputType is set to "Current", the polarity of calculated
residual current at output AIN is inversed.

108 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

The SMAI function block always calculates the residual quantities in

case only the three phases (Ph-N) are connected (GRPxN input not
used).

Similarly, the output signal AI3P in the SMAI function block is a group output signal
containing all processed electrical information from inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2,
GRPxL3 and GRPxN. Applications with a few exceptions are always connected to
AI3P.

The input signal REVROT is used to reverse the phase order.

A few points need to be ensured for SMAI to process the analog signal correctly.
• It is not mandatory to connect all the inputs of SMAI function. However, it is very
important that same set of three phase analog signals should be connected to one
SMAI function.
• The sequence of input connected to SMAI function inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2,
GRPxL3 and GRPxN should normally represent phase A, phase B, phase C and
neutral currents respectively.
• It is possible to connect analog signals available as “Ph-N” or “Ph-Ph” to SMAI.
ConnectionType should be set according to the input connected.
• If the GRPxN input is not connected and all three phase-to-earth inputs are
connected, SMAI calculates the neutral input on its own and it is available at the
AI3P and AIN outputs. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to
“Ph-N”.
• If any two phase-to-earth inputs and neutral currents are connected, SMAI
calculates the remaining third phase-to-neutral input on its own and it is available
at the AI3P output. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to “Ph-
N”.
• If any two phase-to-phase inputs are connected, SMAI calculates the remaining
third phase-to-phase input on its own. It is necessary that the ConnectionType
should be set to “Ph-Ph”.
• All three inputs GRPxLx should be connected to SMAI for calculating sequence
components for ConnectionType set to “Ph-N”.
• At least two inputs GRPxLx should be connected to SMAI for calculating the
positive and negative sequence component for ConnectionType set to “Ph-Ph”.
Calculation of zero sequence requires GRPxN input to be connected.
• Negation setting inverts (reverse) the polarity of the analog input signal. It is
recommended that use of this setting is done with care, a mistake in setting may
lead to maloperation of directional functions.
• If AnalogInputType is set to "Current" and input GROUPxN is not connected, the
AIN output is internally negated. This way the calculated Io gives the same output
as would a measured Io from the core-balanced current transformer.
• If AnalogInputType is set to "Voltage" and input GROUPxN is not connected, the
AIN output is divided by 3. This way the calculated Uo gives the same output as
would a measured Uo from the VT open delta winding.

630 series 109

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Frequency adaptivity
SMAI function performs DFT calculations for obtaining various electrical
parameters. DFT uses some reference frequency for performing calculations. For
most of the cases, these calculations are done using a fixed DFT reference based on
system frequency. However, if the frequency of the network is expected to vary more
than 2 Hz from the nominal frequency, more accurate DFT results can be obtained if
the adaptive DFT is used. This means that the frequency of the network is tracked and
the DFT calculation is adapted according to that.

DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference need to be set appropriately for adaptive DFT

calculations.

DFTRefExtOut is valid only for the instance of function block SMAI_20_1 and
SMAI_80_1. It decides the reference block for external output SPFCOUT.

DFTReference decides the DFT reference for DFT calculations. DFTReference set to
"InternalDFTRef" uses fixed DFT reference based on the set system frequency.
DFTReference set to “DFTRefGrpX” uses DFT reference from the selected group
block, when own group selected adaptive DFT reference is used based on the
calculated signal frequency from own group. DFTReference set to “External DFT
Ref” uses reference based on input signal DFTSPFC.

Set DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference to default value

“InternalDFTRef” if no VT inputs are available. However, if it is
necessary to use frequency adaptive DFT (DFTReference set to other
than default, referring current measuring SMAI) when no voltages are
available, the MinValFreqMeas setting is still set in reference to
Voltage base Val PP (of the selected BASEPH group). This means
that the minimum level for the current amplitude is based on Voltage
base Val PP. For example, if Voltage base Val PP is 20000, the
resulting minimum amplitude for current is 20000 × 10% = 2000.

MinValFreqMeas is the minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of Voltage base Val PP (of the selected BASEPH
group).

The example shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference
selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the
actual application.

Consider an example of IED having ten analog channels 7I and 3U. Channels 1…3
dedicated for measuring phase side currents, channels 5…7 dedicated for measuring
neutral side currents and channels 8…10 dedicated for measuring phase side voltages.
Channel 4 is dedicated for measuring neutral current on phase side of the generator.

110 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

GUID-580BB25E-410B-45AA-A0CD-EA5579662BF8 V1 EN

Figure 39: Configuration of SMAI block

The generator IED should perform satisfactorily over a wide range of frequency.
SMAI blocks are configured such that the parameters are calculated using frequency
adaptive approach. If frequency is expected to vary beyond ±2 Hz from nominal fn, it
is advisable to use adaptive approach to avoid high measurement errors especially
with DFT measurement mode. It is also advisable to have common DFT reference for
both voltage and current SMAI blocks, whether it is “InternalDFTRef”, or
“ExternalDFTRef” or “DFTRefGrpx”.

The three phase group signals are connected to SMAI block as indicated in Figure 39.
Phase side currents are connected to SMAI_20_1, neutral side currents are connected
to SMAI_20_2 and voltages are connected to SMAI_20_3.

If the funtions in the IED operates at 3 ms , it is required that the analog

channels are also connected to SMAI block operating on 3 ms task
time, and the AI3P output of SMAI is connected to group input of such
functions.

Reference signal is required for frequency adaptivity and it is recommended that

voltage signal is taken as reference. As the voltage channels are connected to
SMAI_20_3, SMAI_20_3 needs to be selected in the configuration to control the
frequency tracking. In SMAI_20_3, either 3 ms task time or 10 ms task time is
considered for reference. For example, if SMAI_20_3 is working at 3 ms task time, the
setting DFTReference is set to “DFTRefGrp3” for SMAI_20_1/2/3 (3 ms). This
setting instructs SMAI block to consider the frequency available from SMAI_20_3
working on 3 ms task time for different parameter calculation.

630 series 111

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

The DFT calculation depends on how stable is the available reference

signal. Changing the reference signal might affect the measurement.

The same frequency information needs to be provided to SMAI working on 10 ms task

time. This is done by connecting output SPFCOUT of SMAI_20_1 (3 ms) to input
DFTSPFC of SMAI_20_1 (10 ms) and setting DFTRefExtOut of SMAI_20_1 (3 ms)
to “DFTRefGrp3”. This routes the frequency available at SMAI_20_3 (3 ms) at
SPFCOUT of SMAI_20_1 (10 ms) function.

In order to make all SMAI block working at 10 ms to adapt this reference frequency,
the setting DFTReference is set to “External DFT ref” for SMAI_20_1/2/3 (10 ms).

When DFTReference is set as “InternalDFTRef”, SMAI block will

consider frequency to be fixed as 50 Hz or 60 Hz.

All SMAI blocks up to the one which is measuring the voltage must be made available
in the configuration. For each SMAI both instances 1 and 2 must be included.
Therefore voltage is measured by SMAI_20_3 (which is used for DFT reference) and
the configuration includes SMAI_20_1/2/3 (3 ms) and SMAI_20_1/2/3 (10 ms). If
SMAI_20_2(3 ms) is not needed in the configuration it must still be included for
satisfactory operation.

The setting table as viewed in PCM600 is shown for the example.

GUID-A1F96D82-1BB6-4250-9805-1B177B43CF88 V1 EN

Figure 40: SMAI_20_1 settings

GUID-BD98A2F8-2371-4820-AE5A-6B7E7C5D3C14 V1 EN

Figure 41: SMAI_20_2 settings

112 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

GUID-9174A221-3787-44EE-BA6B-4E98FE2633A5 V1 EN

Figure 42: SMAI_20_3 settings

3.13.5 Application
Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor
function, processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all
aspects of the analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency,
harmonic content, sequence components and so on. This information is used by the
respective functions in Application Configuration, for example, protection,
measurement or monitoring.

The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
or the Application Configuration tools.

3.14 Measured value expander block MVEXP

3.14.1 Function block

MVEXP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

IEC09000215-1-en.vsd
IEC09000215 V1 EN

Figure 43: Function block

3.14.2 Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CMMXU, RESCMMXU,
RESVMMXU, VPHMMXU, VPPMMXU and PWRMMXU), current and voltage
sequence measurement functions (CSMSQI and VSMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic
communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are provided with measurement
supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable
limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value
expander block has been introduced to enable translating the integer output signal

630 series 113

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

from the measuring functions to five binary signals: below low-low limit, below low
limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be
used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

3.14.3 Operation principle

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CMMXU, RESCMMXU, RESVMMXU, VPHMMXU, VPPMMXU,
PWRMMXU, CSMSQI, VSMSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the
input integer value to five binary output signals.
Table 51: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Output Measured supervised value
below low-low between low‐ between low between high- above high-
limit low and low and high limit high and high high limit
limit limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

3.14.4 Application
The current and voltage measurement functions (CMMXU, RESCMMXU,
RESVMMXU, VPHMMXU, VPPMMXU and PWRMMXU), current and voltage
sequence measurement functions (CSMSQI and VSMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic
communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are provided with measurement
supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable
limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value
expander block (MVEXP) has been introduced to enable translating the integer output
signal from the measuring functions to five binary signals: below low-low limit,
below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals
can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

3.14.5 Signals
Table 52: MVEXP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

114 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 53: MVEXP Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

3.14.6 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.15 Fixed signals FXDSIGN

3.15.1 Function block

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

IEC09000037.vsd
IEC09000037 V1 EN

Figure 44: Function block

3.15.2 Functionality
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals
that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic.

3.15.3 Operation principle

The FXDSIGN function block has nine outputs.
• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value
• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1

630 series 115

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)

• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

3.15.4 Application
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals
that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic.

3.15.5 Signals
Table 54: FXDSIGN Output signals
Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

3.15.6 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.16 Pulse counter PCGGIO

3.16.1 Function block

PCGGIO
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL

GUID-A70F660E-B6C0-4F95-8CF5-E260CD2AFC17 V1 EN

Figure 45: Function block

116 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.16.2 Functionality
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the BIO (binary input/output) module
and read by the PCGGIO function. A scaled service value is available over the station
bus.

3.16.3 Operation principle

The registration of pulses is done according to setting of CountCriteria parameter on
one of the 9 binary input channels located on the BIO module. Pulse counter values are
sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.

The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter
values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All
active counters can also be read by IEC 61850.

Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental

counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit
format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range
0...+2147483647. The counter value is stored in semiretain memory.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality has
four options.

• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value can be done as a service value, that is, the value
frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database.
PCGGIO updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and
activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be time tagged,
and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value
was frozen by the function.

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to blocks, which are intended
to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the LHMI. As long as the BLOCK
signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to READ_VAL
performs readings according to the setting of parameter CountCriteria. The signal
must be a pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
binary input output module (BIO).

630 series 117

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each PCGGIO function block has four binary output signals that can be used for event
recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. These signals and
the SCAL_VAL signal are accessable over IEC 61850.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the binary input module, where the
pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up,
in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during
last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There
are two reasons why the counter is blocked.

• The BLOCK input is set

• The binary input module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time
and status information.

3.16.4 Application
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module (BIO), and
read by the PCGGIO function. The number of pulses in the counter is reported via the
station bus to the substation automation system or read via the station monitoring
system as a service value. When using IEC 61850-8-1, a scaled service value is
available over the station bus.

The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses from external energy
meters.

3.16.5 Signals
Table 55: PCGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

118 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 56: PCGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete
integration cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information

3.16.6 Settings
Table 57: PCGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from pulse
ReportEvents counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit
per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 1 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

3.16.7 Measured values

Table 58: PCGGIO Measured values
Name Type Default Description
ResetCounter BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value from LHMI

3.16.8 Monitored data

Table 59: PCGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Actual pulse counter
value
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time
and status information

630 series 119

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.16.9 Technical data

Table 60: Pulse counter PCGGIO technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Cycle time for report of counter (1–3600) s -
value

3.17 Event counter CNTGGIO

3.17.1 Function block

GUID-70FE6C09-DC4B-4B1B-B9B4-63C7115F752D V1 EN

Figure 46: Function block

3.17.2 Functionality
The event counter function CNTGGIO consists of six counters which are used for
storing the number of times each counter has been activated. It is also provided with
a common blocking function for all six counters to be used, for example, at testing.
Each counter can be set to "On" or "Off" separately with a parameter setting.

3.17.3 Operation principle

The event counter function has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of
the six counters respectively. The content of the counters is increased by one step for
each positive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count-up speed is 10
pulses per second. The maximum counter value is 10000. The counter stops at 10000
and no restart takes places, even if the count exceeds 10000.

A mechanism for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the
product to avoid the risk of the flash memory becoming worn out due to too many
writings. As a result, it can take a long time, up to one hour, before a new value is
stored in the flash memory. If a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before auxiliary
power interruption, it is lost. The CNTGGIO-stored values in the flash memory are,
however, not lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

The function block also has an input BLOCK. The activation of the BLOCK input
blocks all six counters. The inputs can be used for blocking the counters at testing, for
example.

120 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

All inputs are configured via PCM600.

3.17.3.1 Reporting

The content of the counters can be read in the LHMI.

Reset of counters can be performed in the LHMI and with a binary input.

Reading of the content and resetting of the counters can also be performed remotely
with PCM600 or, for example, MicroSCADA.

3.17.4 Technical data

Table 61: CNTGGIO Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-10000 -
Maximum count up speed 10 pulses/second -

3.18 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGGIO

3.18.1 Function block

SLGGIO
BLOCK P01
UP P02
DOWN P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
P28
P29
P30
P31
P32
SWPOSN

GUID-98C0B77F-F071-47FA-A663-A25D73CDCEC0 V1 EN

Figure 47: Function block

630 series 121

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.18.2 Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO) (or
the selector switch function block) is used to get a selector switch functionality similar
to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are
used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set
values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system
reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The logic selector switches eliminate
all these problems.

3.18.3 Operation principle

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
function has two operating inputs, UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the
UP input, the block activates the output next to the present activated output in
ascending order. If the present activated output is, for example, 3 and one operates the
UP input, the output 4 is activated. When a signal is received on the DOWN input, the
block activates the output next to the present activated output in descending order. If
the present activated output is, for example, 3 and one operates the DOWN input, the
output 2 is activated. Depending on the output settings, the output signals can be
steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, and in case of UP or DOWN operation, the
previously active output is deactivated. Also, depending on the settings, one can have
a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output
activation.

Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application

Configuration tool, there are other possibilities to set the wanted position directly
without activating the intermediate positions, either locally or remotely, using Select
before execute dialog box. The function operation can be blocked by activating the
BLOCK input. In this case, the present position is kept and further operation is
blocked. SLGGIO function block has also an integer value output that generates the
actual position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable. These
names appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead numbers.

SLGGIO function can be connected to Dynamic Text (32 Inputs),

Select Button (32 Inputs) and Indication Button (32 Inputs) display
symbols.

When the relay is set to the "Remote" mode through the QCCBAY
function, the UP and DOWN inputs of SLGGIO are to be given over
communication and the ACT inputs are disregarded.

122 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.18.4 Signals
Table 62: SLGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command

Table 63: SLGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
P02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
P03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
P04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
P05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
P06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
P07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
P08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
P09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
P10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
P11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
P12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
P13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
P14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
P15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
P25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
P26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
P27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
P28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
P29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
P30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
Table continues on next page

630 series 123

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Name Type Description

P31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
P32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position as integer value

3.18.5 Settings
Table 64: SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
Number of positions 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
Output type Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
Pulse time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration
Output time delay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Output time delay
Stop at extremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
Enabled

3.18.6 Monitored data

Table 65: SLGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position as integer
value

3.19 Selector mini switch VSGGIO

3.19.1 Function block

VSGGIO
BLOCK BLOCKED
IPOS1 POSITION
IPOS2 POS1
POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21

IEC09000340-1-en.vsd
IEC09000340 V1 EN

Figure 48: Function block

124 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.19.2 Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGGIO is a multipurpose function used for a variety of
applications, as a general purpose switch.

VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single-line
diagram on the LHMI.

3.19.3 Operation principle

Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for double purpose, in the same
way as switch controller (GNRLCSWI) functions are used.

• For indication on the single-line diagram. Position is received through the IPOS1
and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and
POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• For commands that are received via the LHMI and distributed in the
configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the LHMI when the single-line diagram is displayed and the object is
chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the LHMI when the single-line diagram is displayed and the object is
chosen.

It is important for indication in the single-line diagram that a symbol

is associated with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol is not
displayed on the screen. A symbol is created and configured in
Graphical Display Editor in PCM600.

Both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation, where a

combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the wanted result.

The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the
name of the string that is shown on the single-line diagram. The value of the strings are
set in Parameter Setting.
Table 66: Relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of the string that is shown on
the single-line diagram
IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value
0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11

630 series 125

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.19.4 Application
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function is a multipurpose function used in PCM600
for a variety of applications as a general purpose switch. VSGGIO can be used for both
to acquire an external switch position, through the IPOS1 and the IPOS2 inputs, and
to represent it through the single-line diagram symbols. It can also be used in the
configuration through the outputs POS1 and POS2 or it can be used to give switching
commands through the CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21 outputs.

The POSITION output is an integer output, showing the actual position as an integer
number 0–3.

An example where VSGGIO is configured to switch Autorecloser on–off from a

button symbol on the LHMI is shown in Figure 49. The I and O buttons on the LHMI
are normally used for on–off operations of the circuit breaker.

INVERTER
VSGGIO
INPUT OUT
IPOS1
IPOS2
DARREC
POS2 RECL_ON AR_ON

Pos1 = OFF
Pos2 = ON IEC09000618-1-en.vsd

IEC09000618 V1 EN

Figure 49: Controlling Autorecloser from LHMI through Selector mini switch

3.19.5 Signals
Table 67: VSGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

Table 68: VSGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is
blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
Table continues on next page

126 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Description

POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

3.19.6 Settings
Table 69: VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

3.20 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions

DPGGIO

3.20.1 Function block

DPGGIO
OPEN POSITION
CLOSE
VALID

IEC09000075_1_en.vsd

IEC09000075 V1 EN

Figure 50: Function block

3.20.2 Functionality
The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block is
used to send double indications to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is
especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.

3.20.3 Operation principle

Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
(DPGGIO) function block sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or
system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, PCM600 must be used

630 series 127

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this
information.

3.20.4 Signals
Table 70: DPGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

Table 71: DPGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

3.20.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.21 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO

3.21.1 Function block

GUID-132B75E8-C3F0-465F-9762-18716DF9FB32 V1 EN

Figure 51: Function block

3.21.2 Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) function block is a collection
of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE
(SCADA) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need extensive
command receiving functionality (for example, GNRLCSWI). In this way, simple
commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation.
Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by
other means, such as binary inputs and SPGGIO function blocks. The commands can
be pulsed or steady.

128 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.21.3 Operation principle

Upon sending a command from an allowed operator position (see LOCREM), one of
the 8 outputs is activated. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex, where x is the respective
output, determines if the signal is pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched
(steady). BLOCK blocks the operation of the function; if a command is sent, no output
activates.

For operation of SPC8GGIO the only usable operator position is

REMOTE.

3.21.4 Signals
Table 72: SPC8GGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 73: SPC8GGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output8

3.21.5 Settings
Table 74: SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
Latched1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output1 Pulse Time
Latched2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output2 Pulse Time
Table continues on next page

630 series 129

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Latched3 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 3
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output3 Pulse Time
Latched4 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 4
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output4 Pulse Time
Latched5 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 5
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output5 Pulse Time
Latched6 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 6
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output6 Pulse Time
Latched7 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 7
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output7 Pulse Time
Latched8 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output
Latched 8
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Output8 pulse time

3.22 Test mode functionality TESTMODE

3.22.1 Function block

TESTMODE
INPUT ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING
NOEVENT

GUID-C35CCC2C-B1A5-4626-8082-E5170FF4D6FB V1 EN

Figure 52: Function block

3.22.2 Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the protection
functions in the IED are automatically blocked. It is then possible to unblock every
function(s) individually from the LHMI to perform the required tests.

When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal
operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later
restored, the IED remains in TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked
or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing is done with the actually
set and configured values within the IED. No settings are changed to avoid mistakes.

130 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.22.3 Operation principle

IED functions can be tested in test mode. The IED can be set to test mode either by
activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE, or setting TestMode
to "On" in the LHMI.

When the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is
activated. The outputs of the function block TESTMODE show the cause of the Test
mode is set to "On" state, that is, input from configuration (OUTPUT output is
activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output is activated).

When the IED is in test mode, the yellow STARTLED flashes and all functions are
blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and
event signalling.

Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.

Most of the IED functions can be individually blocked by local HMI settings. To
enable blockings, the IED must be in test mode (output ACTIVE is activated). When
leaving the test mode and entering the normal mode, the blockings are disabled and
everything is set to normal operation. In the test mode, all testing can be done with the
actually set and configured values within the IED. If any setting values are changed
during the testing, they should be changed back to original values before entering the
normal mode.

The blocked functions are still blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings are not reset.

The blocking of a function concerns all the output signals from the actual function, so
no outputs are activated.

When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a parameter
that requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED re-enters
test mode and all functions are blocked, also the functions that were
unblocked before the change. During the re-entering to test mode, all
functions are temporarily unblocked for a short time, which may lead
to unwanted operations. This is only valid if the IED is put in TEST
mode by a binary input, not by LHMI.

The TESTMODE function block can be used to automatically block functions when
a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact
29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE
function block.

Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
maintenance test.

630 series 131

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.22.4 Application
The protection and control IEDs may have a complex configuration with many
included functions. To make the testing procedure easier, the IEDs include the feature
that allows individual blocking of a single-, several-, or all functions.

This means that it is possible to see when a function is activated or trips. It also enables
the user to follow the operation of several related functions to check correct
functionality and to check parts of the configuration, and so on.

3.22.5 Signals
Table 75: TESTMODE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Sets terminal in test mode when active

Table 76: TESTMODE Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Terminal in test mode when active
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Test input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during testmode

3.22.6 Settings
Table 77: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TestMode Off - - Off Test mode in operation (On) or not (Off)
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during testmode
On
CmdTestBit Off - - Off Command bit for test required or not
On during testmode

132 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.23 Disturbance report DRRDRE

3.23.1 Function block

DRRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

IEC09000347-1-en.vsd
IEC09000347 V1 EN

Figure 53: Function block

3.23.2 Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.

Disturbance report DRRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a
maximum of 40 analog and 64 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions.

• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AxRADR or BxRBDR

function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start
of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time are included in the recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer.
The LHMI is used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files
may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

630 series 133

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.23.3 Operation principle

Disturbance report DRRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.
• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder

Figure 54 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Event list, Event recorder and Indications uses information from the
binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder uses analog information
from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRRDRE
acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.

AxRADR Disturbance Report

RDRE
Analog signals
Trip Value Rec

Disturbance
BxRBDR Recorder

Binary signals

Event List

Event Recorder

Indications

IEC09000136-2-en.vsdx

IEC09000136 V2 EN

Figure 54: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function
is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and
so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash

134 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power.
Each report gets an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist. Trip Event Disturbance

Indications Event list
information values recordings recording

en05000161.vsd
IEC05000161 V1 EN

Figure 55: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one.
The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling
frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. In a 50 Hz
system it is possible to record 100 where the maximum recording time is 3.4 seconds.
The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (Event list, Event
recorder, Indications and Trip value recorder).

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time reduces the number of
recordings to less than 100.

3.23.3.1 Disturbance information

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the LHMI.

To acquire a complete disturbance report, use a PC and either the PCM600

Disturbance Handling tool or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to
IED front port, or remotely via a station bus.

3.23.3.2 Indications

Indications is a list of signals that are activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged). See the section about indications for detailed
information.

630 series 135

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.23.3.3 Event recorder

The event recorder can contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events which have
occurred during a disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or
PCM600. See the event recorder section for detailed information.

3.23.3.4 Event list

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when the selected binary signals change state.
The oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals can be presented via LHMI, WHMI
or PCM600. See the event list section for detailed information.

3.23.3.5 Trip value recorder

The recorded trip values include the phasors of the selected analog signals before the
fault and during the fault. See the trip value recorder section for detailed information.

3.23.3.6 Disturbance recorder

The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and
after the fault. See the disturbance recorder section for detailed information.

3.23.3.7 Time tagging

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report

3.23.3.8 Recording times

Disturbance report DRRDRE records information about a disturbance during a

settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder, event recorder and indication function register disturbance data
and events during tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = Pre-trigger time + tFault + Post-trigger time or Pre-trigger time + Recording time limit,
depending on which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

136 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Trig point
Recording time limit

Pre-trigger time Post-trigger time

1 2 3

IEC09000708-1-en.vsd
IEC09000708 V1 EN

Figure 56: Recording times definition

Pre-trigger time, Pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of the
1 trigger. Use the setting Pre-trigger time to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by Recording time
limit the limit time).
Post-trigger Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
time, 3 activated triggers are reset. Use the setting Post-trigger time to set this time.
Recording time Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
limit triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a
recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use
the setting Recording time limit to set this time.

3.23.3.9 Analog signals

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the disturbance recorder and
triggering of the disturbance report function. Of those signals, 20 are reserved for
external analog signals from analog input modules via preprocessing function blocks
(SMAI). The last 20 channels can be connected to internally calculated analog signals
available as function block output signals (phase differential currents, bias currents
and so on).

630 series 137

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

SMAI A1RADR
GRPNAME AI3P A2RADR
AI1NAME AI1 GRPINPUT1
External analog
AI2NAME AI2 GRPINPUT2
signals
AI3NAME AI3 GRPINPUT3
AI4NAME AI4 GRPINPUT4
AIN GRPINPUT5
GRPINPUT6
...

A3RADR
A4RADR
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
Internal analog signals INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26

...

INPUT30

GUID-ECD1F42C-23E5-4B0A-953A-CC6D9FDA1C27 V1 EN

Figure 57: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals are acquired, filtered and skewed, and after configuration
available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function
block. The information is saved at the disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or
1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the
specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate,
th disturbance recorder uses the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is
available.

Application Configuration tool is used for analog configuration of the disturbance

report.

The SMAI function block calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the
three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information
available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-
output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the corresponding
information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the SMAI function
block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation Ch = "On" means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation Ch, and
triggers even if operation is set to "Off". Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

If Operation Ch = "Off", no waveform (samples) are recorded and reported in graph.

However, the trip value, pre-fault and fault value are recorded and reported. The input
channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

138 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

If Operation Ch = "On", waveform (samples) is recorded and reported in graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

3.23.3.10 Binary signals

Up to 64 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The

signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal
is selected to be recorded in two occasions.

• Corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• Signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 64 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation
Ch = "Off"). A binary signal can be selected to activate the yellow (START) and red
(TRIP) LED on the LHMI: Set LED = "Off/Start/Trip/Start and Trip".

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers.
The indications are also selected from these 64 signals with LHMI: Show
indication="Show/Hide".

3.23.3.11 Trigger signals

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which
runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete
disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled,
there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. It is important to choose the
right signals as trigger conditions.

There are three different trigger types.

• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the LHMI, WHMI, PCM600 or
via station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal
is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing.

Binary signal trigger

Any binary signal state, that is, logic one or a logic zero, can be selected to generate
a trigger ( Trigger level = "Trig on 0/Trig on 1"). When a binary signal is selected to
generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal is not listed in the indications
list of the disturbance report.

630 series 139

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Analog signal trigger

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, whether they are recorded in the
disturbance recorder or not. The settings are Over trigger Ch, Under trigger Ch, Over
Trg Lev Ch and Under Trg Lev Ch.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average
value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger
is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the
range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600.

3.23.3.12 Post retrigger

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all the signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However,
under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault
recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (Post-retrig

= "On") during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording starts and,
during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (Post-retrig = "Off"), a new recording does not
start until the post-fault (Post-trigger time or Recording time limit) period is
terminated. If a new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the
proceeding recording, a new complete recording is started.

Disturbance report function can handle at maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance

recordings.

3.23.4 Application
To get fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/
or in the secondary system, it is important to gather information on fault currents,
voltages and events. It is also important to have a continuous event-logging to enable
monitoring in an overview perspective. These tasks are accomplished by the
disturbance report function DRRDRE. The function provides a better understanding
of the power system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during
and after a disturbance.

140 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

The analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to
explain a disturbance, in changing IED setting plan, to improve existing equipment,
and so on. This information can also be used when planning for and designing new
installations, that is, a disturbance recording can be a part of functional analysis.

Disturbance report DRRDRE is always included in the IED. It acquires sampled data
of all the selected analog and binary signals connected to the function blocks.
• Maximum 20 external analog signals
• 20 internal derived analog signals
• 64 binary signals

Disturbance report function is a common name for several functions, such as

indications, event recorder, event list, trip value recorder and disturbance recorder.

Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility as far as

configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity are
concerned. Thus, disturbance report is not dependent on the operation of protective
functions, and it can record disturbances that are not discovered by protective
functions. Disturbance report can be used as an advanced stand-alone disturbance
recorder.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED. The same applies to all events
which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. LHMI can be used to get information
about the recordings, and the disturbance report files can be uploaded in the PCM600
using the disturbance handling tool, for report reading or further analysis (using
WaveWin, that can be found on the PCM600 installation CD). The user can also
upload disturbance report files using MMS (over IEC 61850-8-1) clients.

If the IED is connected to a station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), the disturbance recorder
(record made and fault number) and the fault locator information are available as
GOOSE or report control data.

The analog output data from the load shedding function block for example, sheddable
load, load mismatch and so on, is connected to the A4ARDR function block for
recording the changes in the output data during a specified time period. This recording
is initaiated by a binary trigger connected to one of the BxRBDR components. A pre-
trigger time (max value = 3 s) and a post-trigger time (max value = 10 s) can be
configured and the changes during the configured period of time is recorded. These
changes can be viewed using the Disturbance Recording Viewing tool. Apart from
generating the disturbance records , BxRBDR can be used for creating process events
and for configuring the start and trip LED on the LHMI overlay. Binary output from
the load shedding function block can be connected to the BxRBDR block to generate
the process events.

Presently the disturbance recorder does not support calculated analog

values or sample values from an application thread that has a SMAI
function configured for 80 samples/cycle.

630 series 141

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.23.5 Signals
Table 78: DRRDRE Output signals
Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

3.23.6 Settings
Table 79: DRRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
Pre-trigger time 0.05 - 3.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
Post-trigger time 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
Recording time limit 0.5 - 8.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
Post-retrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
On
Max Num records 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
Reference channel 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
Operation mode test Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On

3.23.7 Monitored data

Table 80: DRRDRE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Disturbance report
1=TRUE function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Disturbance recording
1=TRUE started
RECMADE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Disturbance recording
1=TRUE made
CLEARED BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - All disturbances in the
1=TRUE disturbance report
cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - More than 80% of
1=TRUE memory used
Memory used INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
Table continues on next page

142 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Under Lev Trg Ch 1 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Under level trig for analog
1=TRUE channel 1 activated
Over Lev Trg Ch 1 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Over level trig for analog
1=TRUE channel 1 activated
Fault number INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

Monitored data values are the same for each channel. The channel
numbers are shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

3.23.8 Analog input signals A1RADR and A2RADR

3.23.8.1 Function block

A1RADR
^GRPINPUT1
^GRPINPUT2
^GRPINPUT3
^GRPINPUT4
^GRPINPUT5
^GRPINPUT6
^GRPINPUT7
^GRPINPUT8
^GRPINPUT9
^GRPINPUT10

IEC09000349-1-en.vsd
IEC09000349 V1 EN

Figure 58: Function block, analog inputs

3.23.8.2 Signals

The input signal tables for A1RADR and A2RADR are similar except for the
GRPINPUT number.

• A1RADR, GRPINPUT1 - GRPINPUT10

• A2RADR, GRPINPUT11 - GRPINPUT20

Table 81: A1RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL

Values are the same for each input signal. The channel numbers are
shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

630 series 143

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.23.8.3 Settings

Setting tables for A1RADR and A2RADR are similar except for channel numbers.

• A1RADR, channel01 - channel10

• A2RADR, channel11 - channel20

Table 82: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Ch 1 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Function type Ch 1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 1
(IEC-60870-5-103)
Information Num Ch 1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 1
(IEC-60870-5-103)

Table 83: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Nominal value Ch 1 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
Under trigger Ch 1 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 1 (on) or not (off)
Under Trg Lev Ch 1 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
Over trigger Ch 1 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel 1
On (on) or not (off)
Over Trg Lev Ch 1 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal

Settings are the same for each channel. The channel numbers are
shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

3.23.8.4 Technical revision history

Table 84: A1RADR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added IEC 60870-5-103 support

Table 85: A2RADR technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Added IEC 60870-5-103 support

144 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.23.9 Analog input signals A3RADR and A4RADR

3.23.9.1 Function block

GUID-88FD658F-1A11-4704-B152-F9E0C16C873B V1 EN

Figure 59: A3RADR function block, derived analog inputs

3.23.9.2 Signals

Input signal tables for A3RADR and A4RADR are similar except for the GRPINPUT
number.

• A3RADR, INPUT21 - INPUT30

• A4RADR, INPUT31 - INPUT40

Table 86: A3RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT21 REAL 0.0 Analog channel 21

3.23.9.3 Settings

Setting tables for A3RADR and A4RADR are similar except for the channel numbers.

• A3RADR, channel 21 - channel 30

• A4RADR, channel 31 - channel 40

Table 87: A3RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Ch 21 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Function type Ch 21 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for analog channel 21
(IEC-60870-5-103)
Information Num Ch21 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for analog channel 21
(IEC-60870-5-103)

630 series 145

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 88: A3RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Nominal value Ch 21 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 21
Under trigger Ch 21 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog channel
On 21 (on) or not (off)
Under Trg Lev Ch 21 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 21
in % of signal
Over trigger Ch 21 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 21 (on) or not (off)
Over Trg Lev Ch 21 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 21 in
% of signal

3.23.9.4 Technical revision history

Table 89: A3RADR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added IEC 60870-5-103 support
Changed the recorder so that calculated values
from configuration can be recorded instead of
sample values from physical channels (similar to
A4RADR)

Table 90: A4RADR technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Added IEC 60870-5-103 support

3.23.10 Binary input signals BxRBDR

3.23.10.1 Function block

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC09000352-1-en.vsd
IEC09000352 V1 EN

Figure 60: Function block, binary inputs

146 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.23.10.2 Signals

Input signal tables for B1RBDR - B4RBDR are all similar except for the INPUT
number.

• B1RBDR, INPUT1 - INPUT16

• B2RBDR, INPUT17 - INPUT32
• B3RBDR, INPUT33 - INPUT48
• B4RBDR, INPUT49 - INPUT64

Table 91: B1RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1

Values are the same for each input signal. The channel numbers are
shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

3.23.10.3 Settings
Table 92: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Trigger operation 1 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Set LED 1 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Function type Ch 1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Information Num Ch 1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 93: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Trigger level 1 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
Show indication 1 Hide - - Hide Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show

Settings are the same for each channel. The channel numbers are
shown after the parameter name in LHMI and PCM600.

630 series 147

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Setting tables for B1RBDR - B4RBDR are all similar except for the binary channel
numbers.

• B1RBDR, channel1 - channel16

• B2RBDR, channel17 - channel32
• B3RBDR, channel33 - channel48
• B4RBDR, channel49 - channel64

3.23.10.4 Technical revision history

Table 94: B1RBDR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added IEC 60870-5-103 support

Table 95: B2RBDR technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Added IEC 60870-5-103 support

Table 96: B3RBDR technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Added IEC 60870-5-103 support

Table 97: B4RBDR technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Added IEC 60870-5-103 support

3.23.11 Technical data

Table 98: DRRDRE technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pre-fault time (0.05–3.00) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–8.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See time synchronization
technical data
Maximum number of analog inputs 20 + 20 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 64 -
Maximum number of phasors in the 30 -
Trip Value recorder per recording
Table continues on next page

148 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Function Range or value Accuracy

Maximum number of indications in a 64 -
disturbance report
Maximum number of events in the 150 -
Event recording per recording
Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out -
Event list
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s 340 seconds (100 recordings) at -
recording time and maximum number 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
of channels, typical value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

3.23.12 Technical revision history

Table 99: DRRDRE technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Internal improvements

3.24 Indications

3.24.1 Functionality
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/
or in the secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals that
have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short
perspective to get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way.

There are three LEDs on the LHMI (Ready, Start and Trip), which display status
information about the IED.

The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance report function that have changed status during a disturbance.

The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the
IED and the user may use the LHMI to get the information.

3.24.2 Operation principle

The LED indications display various information.
• Ready LED

630 series 149

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

• Steady light: In service

• Flashing light: Internal fail
• Dark: No power supply
• Start LED
• Function controlled by Set LED n setting in disturbance report function.
• Trip LED
• Function controlled by Set LED n setting in disturbance report function.

Indication list
The possible indication signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance
report function and disturbance recorder.

The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording
period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic
one or state changes from logic one to logic zero are not visible in the indications list.
Signals are not time tagged. There are some requirements that must be fulfilled so that
the signals are recorded in the indications list.

• Signal must be connected to binary input BxRBDR function block

• DRRDRE parameter Operation must be set "On"
• DRRDRE must be trigged (binary or analog)
• Input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.

Indications are selected with the indication mask (Set LED n) when setting the binary
inputs.

The name of the binary signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-
defined name assigned at theIED configuration. The same name is used in disturbance
recorder function, indications and event recorder function.

3.24.3 Signals
The indications function logs the same binary input signals as the disturbance report
function.

3.24.4 Technical data

Table 100: Indications DRRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications 64
presented for single disturbance
Maximum number of recorded 100
disturbances

150 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.25 Event recorder

3.25.1 Functionality
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during
disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (for
example corrective actions) and in the long term (for example functional analysis).

The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the disturbance
report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.

The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The information can be uploaded to the PCM600 and further analyzed using the
Disturbance Handling tool.

The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record

(Comtrade file).

3.25.2 Operation principle

When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event
recorder logs every status change in the 64 selected binary signals. The events can be
generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal
signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels
are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total
recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and stored in the disturbance report
flash memory at the end of each recording.

In case of overlapping recordings, when PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal appears
during the post-fault time, events are saved in both recording files.

The binary input signal name appearing in the event recording is the user-defined
name assigned during the IED configuration. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function, indications and event recorder function.

The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and managed
via the LHMI or PCM600.

Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user accesses the
IED simultaneously.

3.25.3 Signals
The event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the disturbance
report function.

630 series 151

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.25.4 Technical data

Table 101: Event recorder DRRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of 150
events in disturbance
report
Maximum number of 100
disturbance reports
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing

3.26 Event list

3.26.1 Functionality
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview
perspective, and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.

The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the disturbance report
function. The list can contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.

The event list information is available in the IED, and is reported to higher control
systems via the station bus together with other logged events in the IED. The LHMI
can be used to view the event list.

To view the events occurring while the event list is displayed in the
LHMI, the list has to be closed and reopened.

3.26.2 Operation principle

When a binary signal connected to the disturbance report function changes status, the
event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in chronological
order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and
binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new
event arrives.

The list can be configured to show the oldest or the newest events first with a setting
on the LHMI.

The event list function runs continuously, whereas the event recorder function is
active only during a disturbance.

152 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

The binary signal name that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name
assigned during the IED configuration. The same name is used in the disturbance
recorder function , indications and the event recorder function.

The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information.

3.26.3 Signals
The event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the disturbance
report function.

3.26.4 Technical data

Table 102: Event list DRRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of 1000
events in the list
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing

3.27 Trip value recorder

3.27.1 Functionality
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for
the disturbance evaluation.

The trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals
connected to the disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle
before and during the fault for each analog input signal.

The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the
IED.

The information may be uploaded to the PCM600 and further analyzed using the
Disturbance Handling tool.

The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).

3.27.2 Operation principle

Trip value recorder calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault amplitudes as well
as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The DRRDRE parameter
Reference channel points out which input signal is used as the angle reference.

630 series 153

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

When the disturbance report function is triggered, the sample for the fault interception
is searched for by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The
channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest
number.

When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the
complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The
estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using
the RLS method. The calculation starts a few samples after the fault sample and uses
samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles, depending on the shape of the signals.

If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used
as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one
cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-
fault and fault values.

The name of the analog signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the
user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function.

The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information
(LMBRFLO) and managed in PCM600 or via the LHMI.

3.27.3 Signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR or
A2RADR (not A3RADR and A4RADR).

3.27.4 Technical data

Table 103: Trip value recorder DRRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of 20
analog inputs
Maximum number of 100
disturbance reports

3.28 Disturbance recorder

3.28.1 Functionality
The disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information
about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding the system
behavior and the related primary and secondary equipment during and after a
disturbance. Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short

154 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

perspective (for example corrective actions) and long perspective (for example
functional analysis).

The disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from the selected analog- and binary
signals connected to the disturbance report function (maximum 40 analog and 64
binary signals). The binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder
function.

The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation
of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection
functions.

The disturbance recorder information for the last 100 disturbances are saved in the
IED.The list of recordings can be viewed via LHMI.

For report reading or further analysis, the disturbance recording information can be
uploaded in PCM600 using the Disturbance Handling tool (using WaveWin, that can
be found on the PCM600 installation CD).

3.28.2 Operation principle

Disturbance recording is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The
binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals
generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input
channels from the TRMthrough SMAI and some internally derived analog signals.

Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a

cyclic buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data
is being overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer
is determined by the set pre-fault recording time.

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the
data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as
the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault
time and it can be set in the disturbance report.

The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,
intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten. Up to the last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.

The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance
recording. A recording can be trigged by manual start, binary input and/or from analog
inputs (over-/underlevel trig).

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for
all functions within the disturbance report functionality.

630 series 155

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.28.2.1 Disturbance recorder memory and storage

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recording's total

recording time. Long recording time reduces the number of
recordings to less than 100.

When a recording is completed, a post-recording process starts.

• Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
• Add relevant data to be used by PCM600
• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.

The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided
into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).

The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the
disturbance, that is, information from the disturbance report sub-functions. PCM600
use this information and present the recording in a user-friendly way.

General

• Station name, object name and unit name

• Date and time for the trig of the disturbance
• Record number
• Sampling rate
• Time synchronization source
• Recording times
• Activated trig signal
• Active setting group

Analog

• Signal names for selected analog channels

• Information, for example trig on analog inputs
• Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating
• Over- or Undertrig: level and operation
• Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig
• CT direction

Binary

• Signal names
• Status of binary input signals

156 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

The mandatory configuration file contains information needed to interpret the data
file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency, and channel
info.

The mandatory data file contains values for each input channel for each sample in the
record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number and time stamp
for each set of samples.

3.28.3 Signals
See the disturbance report for input and output signals.

3.28.4 Settings
See the disturbance report for settings.

3.28.5 Technical data

Table 104: DRRDRE technical data
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of 40
analog inputs
Maximum number of 64
binary inputs
Maximum number of 100
disturbance reports
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz
time and maximum number of channels, typical 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz
value)

3.29 Non-volatile memory

In addition to the setting values, the IED can store some data in the non-volatile
memory.
• Configuration
• Trip lock-out
• Events
• Disturbance records
• CB conditioning monitoring values
• Thermal loading
• Number of auto-reclosure shots and starts/trips of the protection stages (only
REF630)
• Function key & alarm LED states
• Protection function recorded data

630 series 157

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.30 Self supervision with internal event list

3.30.1 Functionality
The Self supervision with internal event list (INTERRSIG and SELFSUPEVLST)
function reacts to internal system events generated by the different built-in self-
supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list.

3.30.2 Internal error signals INTERRSIG

3.30.2.1 Function block

INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK

IEC09000334-2-en.vsd
IEC09000334 V2 EN

Figure 61: Function block

3.30.2.2 Signals
Table 105: INTERRSIG Output signals
Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block

3.30.2.3 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.30.3 Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST

3.30.3.1 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

158 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.30.4 Operation principle

The self-supervision operates continuously.

• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The SELFSUPEVLST function status can be monitored from the LHMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the LHMI the present information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under
Monitoring/Internal Events or Monitoring/IED Status. The information from the
self-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600.

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm

contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This output relay is
activated (no fault) and deactivated (fault) by the Internal Fail signal, see Figure 62.
Also the software watchdog timeout and the undervoltage detection of the PSM
deactivates the relay.

Power supply fault Power supply Fault

module

Watchdog I/O nodes

TX overflow
Master resp. Fault
Supply fault AND
ReBoot I/O
INTERNAL
FAIL

Internal Fail (CPU) Fault

CEM

I/O nodes = BIO

xxxx = Inverted signal

IEC09000390-1-en.vsd
IEC09000390 V1 EN

Figure 62: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free contact

630 series 159

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

LIODEV FAIL
>1
LIODEV STOPPED S e.g.BIO1- ERROR
R
LIODEV STARTED

>1

WDOG STARVED SW Watchdog Error >1 Internal Fail

RTE FATAL ERROR Runtime Exec Error

FTF FATAL ERROR File System Error >1

RTE APP FAILED S

Runtime App Error
R
RTE ALL APPS OK

GENTS RTC ERROR

S
Real Time Clock Error
GENTS RTC OK R

IEC 61850 NOT READY S

IEC 61850 Error
R >1 Internal Warning
IEC 61850 READY DNP 3 Error

DNP 3 STARTUP
ERROR S
DNP 3 READY R

GENTS SYNC ERROR S

>1 Time Synch Error
GENTS TIME RESET
R
GENTS SYNC OK

SETTINGS CHANGED Setting groups changed

SETTINGS CHANGED Settings changed

GUID-A07923DE-321F-4CEA-A064-530F9FF6DAB3 V1 EN

Figure 63: Self supervision, function block internal signals

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
INTERRSIG function block are sent as events to the station level of the control
system. The signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to
binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for
other functions if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in
Signal Matrix. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time
synchronization block INTERSIG.

3.30.4.1 Internal signals

SELFSUPEVLST function provides several status signals, that describe the IED
condition. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are
also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.

• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 106.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 107.

160 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 108.

Table 106: SELFSUPEVLST standard internal signals
Name of signal Description
Internal Fail Internal fail status
Internal Warning Internal warning status
Real Time Clock Error Real time clock status
Time Synch Error Time synchronization status
Runtime App Error Runtime application error status
Runtime Exec Error Runtime execution error status
IEC61850 Error IEC 61850 error status
SW Watchdog Error SW watchdog error status
Setting(s) Changed Setting(s) changed
Setting Group(s) Changed Setting group(s) changed
File System Error Fault tolerant file system status
DNP3 Error DNP3 error status

Table 107: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description
PSM PSM-Error Power supply module error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformator module error status
COM COM-Error Communication module error status
BIO BIO-Error Binary input/output module error status
AIM AIM-Error Analog input module error status
RTD RTD-Error Resistance temperature detector / mA-output
module error status

Table 108: Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal Reasons for activation
Internal Fail This signal is active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; Real Time Clock Error, Runtime App
Error, Runtime Exec Error, SW Watchdog Error, File System
Error
Internal Warning This signal is active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; IEC 61850 Error, DNP3 Error
Real Time Clock Error This signal is active if there is a hardware error with the real
time clock.
Time Synch Error This signal is active when the source of the time
synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make
a time reset.
Runtime Exec Error This signal is active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some
actions with the application threads. The actions can be
loading of settings or parameters for components, changing
of setting groups, loading or unloading of application threads.
Table continues on next page

630 series 161

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Name of signal Reasons for activation

IEC61850 Error This signal is active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed in
some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup,
for example.
SW Watchdog Error This signal is activated when the IED has been under too
heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.
Runtime App Error This signal is active if one or more of the application threads
are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states
can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example.
Setting(s) Changed This signal generates an internal event to the internal event
list if any setting(s) is changed.
Setting Group(s) Changed This signal generates an internal event to the Internal Event
List if any setting group(s) is changed.
File System Error This signal is active if both the working file and the backup file
are corrupted and cannot be recovered.
DNP3 Error This signal is active when DNP3 detects any configuration
error during startup.

3.30.4.2 Run-time model

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure
64.

ADx
ADx_Low
x1

u1

x2

ADx
ADx_High Controller
x1

u1

x2

IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN

Figure 64: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal
conditions where the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An
alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it
improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.

162 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller

function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input
signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects. First is the
validation part that checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.
Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals is sent to the CPU, that is the
signal that has the most suitable signal level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higher
ADx_HI.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of
the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU is
informed and an alarm is given for A/D converter failure.

The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

3.30.5 Application
The protection and control IEDs have many functions included. Self supervision with
internal event list (SELFSUPEVLST) and internal error signals (INTERRSIG)
function provides supervision of the IED. The fault signals make it easier to analyze
and locate a fault.

Both hardware and software supervision is included and possible faults can be
indicated through a hardware contact on the power supply module and/or through the
software communication.

Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory
functions supervise the status of the various modules in the IED and, in case of failure,
a corresponding event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a
corresponding event is generated.

Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated
when the status changes for the built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order) or
external time synchronization (in operation/out of order). Events are also generated
whenever any setting in the IED is changed.

The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The
list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it
is full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list can be cleared via the LHMI.

The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during
commissioning and fault tracing.

The list of internal events can be found in the LHMI, WHMI or PCM600.

The list can be cleared via the LHMI or WHMI menu Clear/Clear internal event
list.

630 series 163

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.30.6 Technical data

Table 109: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size

3.31 Time synchronization

3.31.1 Functionality
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of
absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it
possible to compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station
automation system.

Do not use the MicroSCADA OPC server as a time synchronization

source.

3.31.2 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN

3.31.2.1 Settings
Table 110: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SNTP
DNP
IEC60870-5-103
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SNTP
IRIG-B
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IED as synchronization master
SNTP-Server

Coarse time synchronization is used to set the time on the very first message and if any
message has an offset of more than ten seconds. If no FineSyncSource is given, the
CoarseSyncSrc is used to synchronize the time.

Fine time synchronization is used to set the time on the first message after a time reset
or if the source may always set the fine time, and the source gives a large offset
towards the IED time. After this, the time is used to synchronize the time after a spike
filter, that is, if the source glitches momentarily or there is a momentary error, this is

164 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

neglected. The only fine synchronization source that may always set the time is IRIG-
B.

It is not recommended to use SNTP as both fine and coarse synchronization source, as
some clocks sometimes send out a bad message. For example, Arbiter clocks
sometimes send out a "zero-time message", which if SNTP is set as coarse
synchronization source (with or without SNTP as fine synchronization source) leads
to a jump to "2036-02-07 06:28" and back.

3.31.3 Time synchronization via SNTP

3.31.3.1 Settings
Table 111: SNTP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address

630 series 165

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.31.4 Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN

3.31.4.1 Settings
Table 112: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 00:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
00:30 time starts
1:00
1:30
...
48:00

166 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.31.5 Time system, summer time ends DSTEND

3.31.5.1 Settings
Table 113: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay 00:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
00:30 time ends
1:00
1:30
...
48:00

3.31.6 Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE

3.31.6.1 Settings
Table 114: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoHalfHourUTC -24 - 24 - 1 0 Number of half-hours from UTC

630 series 167

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.31.7 Time synchronization via IRIG-B

3.31.7.1 Settings
Table 115: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

3.31.8 Operation principle

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock and the time
the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the
time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to
compensate for them.

External Time tagging and general synchronization

synchronization
sources Commu Protection
Events
Off - nication and control
functions
SNTP
IRIG-B Time-
regulator
DNP SW- time
IEC60870-5-103

IEC09000210-2-en.vsd
IEC09000210 V2 EN

Figure 65: Design of time system (clock synchronization)

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure.

A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower
levels.

168 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 66: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of
synchronization with different maximum errors. This gives the function the
possibility to choose the source with the best quality and to adjust its internal clock
after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined in three ways.
• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message
• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function

3.31.8.1 Real-time clock operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time
clock that provides 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the
time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the
time is lost completely.

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance SNTP and IRIG-B) gives
an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is set to
the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things happens with
each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as “fine”.

• If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, from its
origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used

630 series 169

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

directly for synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the
synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500
milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe
state and the clock is set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the
threshold, the clock is adjusted with 10 000 ppm until the offset is removed. With
an adjustment of 10 000 ppm, it takes 50 seconds to remove an offset of 500
milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the
time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and
only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

Rate accuracy
In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for
a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is
constant. Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive
time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally,
the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but
if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

3.31.8.2 Synchronization alternatives

Two main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The

synchronization message is applied either via any of the communication ports of the
IED as a telegram message including date and time or via IRIG-B.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an
IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a
reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate
properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The
SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary
inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP time server.

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or
at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable

170 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.

Synchronization via IRIG-B

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating
if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.

To receive IRIG-B there are one dedicated connector for the IRIG-B port. IRIG-B 00x
messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, where x (in 00x) means a number
in the range of 1-7.

If the x in 00x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of

the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and
year information has to come from the tool or LHMI.

The IRIG-B input also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-
zone.

It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B
module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages.

Synchronization via DNP

The DNP3 communication can be the source for the coarse time synchronization,
while the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy.

See the communication protocol manual for a detailed description of

the DNP3 protocol.

Synchronization via IEC60870-5-103

The IEC60870-5-103 communication can be the source for the coarse time
synchronization, while the fine tuning of the time synchronization needs a source with
higher accuracy.

See the communication protocol manual for a detailed description of

the IEC60870-5-103 protocol.

630 series 171

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.31.9 Application
Time synchronization is used to achieve a common time base for the IEDs in a
protection and control system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data
between all IEDs in the system possible.

Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances are an excellent help when

evaluating faults. Without time synchronization, only the events within the IED can
be compared to one another. With time synchronization, events and disturbances
within the entire station, and even between line ends, can be compared at evaluation.

In the IED, the internal time can be synchronized from a number of sources.
• SNTP
• IRIG-B
• DNP
• IEC60870-5-103

Do not use the MicroSCADA OPC server as a time synchronization

source.

3.31.10 Technical data

Table 116: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse ± 1.0 ms typically
synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement ± 1.0 ms typically
values

3.32 Denial of service

3.32.1 Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) are designed to limit
overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication
facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device.
All inbound network traffic is quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be
controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning
equipment connected to the network.

172 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.32.2 Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT

3.32.2.1 Function block

DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000133-1-en.vsd
IEC09000133 V1 EN

Figure 67: Function block

3.32.2.2 Signals
Table 117: DOSFRNT Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

3.32.2.3 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.32.2.4 Monitored data

Table 118: DOSFRNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
1=Normal
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
Table continues on next page

630 series 173

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets discarded

3.32.3 Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1

3.32.3.1 Function block

DOSLAN1
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000134-1-en.vsd
IEC09000134 V1 EN

Figure 68: Function block

3.32.3.2 Signals
Table 119: DOSLAN1 Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

3.32.3.3 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

174 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.32.3.4 Monitored data

Table 120: DOSLAN1 Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
1=Normal
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets discarded

3.32.4 Operation principle

The denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) measures the IED
communication load and, if necessary, limit it to avoid compromising the IEDs
control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has three
outputs.
• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status
• WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
• ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

3.33 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

3.33.1 Functionality
IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows IEDs from different vendors to exchange information
and simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer communication according to
GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.

630 series 175

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

The event system has a rate limiter to reduce CPU load. Each channel has a quota of
10 events/second. If the quota is exceeded the event channel is blocked until the event
changes is below the quota.

3.33.2 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 121: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-TX Glass fibre (ST Plastic fibre (snap-
100BASE-FX LC
RJ-45 connector) in connector)
IEC 61850–8–1 ● ● - -
DNP3 ● ● - -
IEC 60870-5-103 - - ● ●
● = Supported

3.33.3 Application
The IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol allows vertical communication to HSI
clients. It allows horizontal communication between two or more IEDs from one or
several vendors to exchange information, and to use it in the performance of their
functions and for correct co-operation.

GOOSE, which is part of the IEC 61850–8–1 standard, allows the IEDs to
communicate state and control information amongst themselves, using a publish-
subscribe mechanism. When detecting an event, the IED(s) use a multi-cast
transmission to notify the devices that have registered to receive the data. An IED can
report its status by publishing a GOOSE message. It can also request a control action
to be directed at any device in the network.

IEC 61850–8–1 specifies only the interface to the substation LAN. The LAN itself is
left to the system integrator.

176 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Engineering
Station HSI
Workstation Gateway
Base System
SMS
CC

Printer

IED IED IED IED IED IED IED IED IED

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

KIOSK 1 KIOSK 2 KIOSK 3

IEC09000135_en.v
sd
IEC09000135 V1 EN

Figure 69: Example of a communication system with IEC 61850–8–1

Station HSI
MicroSCADA
Gateway

GOOSE

IED IED IED IED IED

A A A A A

Control Protection Control and protection Control Protection

en05000734.vsd
IEC05000734 V1 EN

Figure 70: Example of a broadcasted GOOSE message, peer-to-peer

communication

630 series 177

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.33.3.1 Horizontal communication via GOOSE

GOOSE messages are sent in horizontal communication between the IEDs. The
information, which is exchanged, is used for station wide interlocking, breaker failure
protection, busbar voltage selection and so on.

The simplified principle is shown in Figure 71. When IED1 has decided to transmit the
data set it forces a transmission via the station bus. All other IEDs receive the data set,
but only those who have this data set in their address list takes it and keeps it in an input
container. It is defined, that the receiving IED takes the content of the received data set
and makes it available for the application configuration.

Stationbus

IED1 IED2 IED3

DA1
DO1
DA2
IED1 DO1/DA1 IED1 DO1/DA1
IED1 DO1/DA2 IED1 DO1/DA2 DA1
DO3
IED1 DO2/DA1 IED1 DO2/DA1 DA2
IED1 DO2/DA2 IED1 DO2/DA2 SMT
IED1 DO3/DA1 IED1 DO3/DA1 DA1
IED1 DO3/DA2 IED1 DO3/DA2 DO2
DA2

Receive-FB

FBa FBb FBc

PLC Program

IEC08000145.vsd
IEC08000145 V1 EN

Figure 71: SMT: GOOSE principle and signal routing with Signal Matrix

Special function blocks take the data set and present it via the function block as output
signals for application functions in the application configuration. Different GOOSE
receive function blocks are available for the specific tasks.

Signal Matrix links the different data object attributes (for example stVal or
magnitude) to the output signal to make it available for functions in the application
configuration. When a matrix cell array is marked red the IEC 61850-8-1 data attribute
type does not fit together, even if the GOOSE receive function block is the partner.
Signal Matrix checks this on the content of the received data set.

178 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

IEC08000174.vsd
IEC08000174 V1 EN

Figure 72: SMT: GOOSE marshalling with Signal Matrix

GOOSE receive function blocks extract process information, received by the data set,
into single attribute information that can be used within the application configuration.
Crosses in the SMT matrix connect received values to the respective function block
signal in Signal Matrix.

The corresponding quality attribute is automatically connected by

Signal Matrix. This quality attribute is available in Application
Configuration, through the outputs of the available GOOSE function
blocks.

630 series 179

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

IEC08000171_1_en.vsd

IEC08000171 V1 EN

Figure 73: SMT: GOOSE receive function block with converted signals

3.33.4 Settings
Table 122: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

3.33.5 Technical data

Table 123: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 608–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Table continues on next page

180 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Function Value
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–19200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s

3.34 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for

interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV

3.34.1 Function block

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL

IEC09000099_1_en.vsd
IEC09000099 V1 EN

Figure 74: Function block

630 series 181

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.34.2 Signals
Table 124: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

Table 125: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
Table continues on next page

182 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Description

APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COM_VAL BOOLEAN Receive communication status is valid

3.34.3 Settings
Table 126: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

630 series 183

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.35 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

3.35.1 Function block

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ^OUT1
OUT1VAL
^OUT2
OUT2VAL
^OUT3
OUT3VAL
^OUT4
OUT4VAL
^OUT5
OUT5VAL
^OUT6
OUT6VAL
^OUT7
OUT7VAL
^OUT8
OUT8VAL
^OUT9
OUT9VAL
^OUT10
OUT10VAL
^OUT11
OUT11VAL
^OUT12
OUT12VAL
^OUT13
OUT13VAL
^OUT14
OUT14VAL
^OUT15
OUT15VAL
^OUT16
OUT16VAL

IEC09000236_en.vsd
IEC09000236 V1 EN

Figure 75: Function block

3.35.2 Signals
Table 127: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

Table 128: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
OUT1VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
OUT2VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
Table continues on next page

184 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Description

OUT3VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
OUT4VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
OUT5VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
OUT6VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
OUT7VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
OUT8VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
OUT9VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
OUT10VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
OUT11VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
OUT12VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
OUT13VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
OUT14VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
OUT15VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
OUT16VAL BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16

3.35.3 Settings
Table 129: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

630 series 185

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.36 GOOSE function block to receive a double point

GOOSEDPRCV

3.36.1 Function block

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN

Figure 76: Function block

3.36.2 Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

3.36.3 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output is HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output becomes LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in Signal Matrix by

means of a cross to receive the double point values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD, the DATAVALID
output is HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA, the
DATAVALID output is LOW.

3.36.4 Signals
Table 130: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

186 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 131: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

3.36.5 Settings
Table 132: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

3.37 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

3.37.1 Function block

GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN

Figure 77: Function block

3.37.2 Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

3.37.3 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output is HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output becomes LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

630 series 187

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in Signal Matrix by

means of a cross to receive the integer values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD, the DATAVALID
output is HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA, the
DATAVALID output is LOW.

3.37.4 Signals
Table 133: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 134: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

3.37.5 Settings
Table 135: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

188 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.38 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV

3.38.1 Function block

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN

Figure 78: Function block

3.38.2 Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

3.38.3 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output is HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output becomes LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in Signal Matrix by

means of a cross to receive the float values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD, the DATAVALID
output is HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA, the
DATAVALID output is LOW.

3.38.4 Signals
Table 136: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

630 series 189

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 137: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

3.38.5 Settings
Table 138: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

3.39 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV

3.39.1 Function block

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN

Figure 79: Function block

3.39.2 Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

3.39.3 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output is HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output becomes LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

190 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in Signal Matrix by

means of a cross to receive the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted

to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD, the DATAVALID
output is HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA, the
DATAVALID output is LOW.

3.39.4 Signals
Table 139: GOOSESPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 140: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

3.39.5 Settings
Table 141: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

630 series 191

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.40 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O function

SPGGIO

3.40.1 Function block

SPGGIO
BLOCK
^IN

IEC09000237_en_1.vsd
IEC09000237 V1 EN

Figure 80: Function block

3.40.2 Functionality
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) is used to send one single
logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

3.40.3 Operation principle

Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions
(SPGGIO) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system
that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which
function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

3.40.4 Application
IEC 61850-8-1 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) function is used to
send one single logical output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It has
one visible input, that should be connected in ACT.

3.40.5 Signals
Table 142: SPGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

3.40.6 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

192 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.41 IEC 61850 generic communication I/O function

MVGGIO

3.41.1 Function block

MVGGIO
BLOCK ^VALUE
^IN RANGE

IEC09000239-2-en.vsd
IEC09000239 V2 EN

Figure 81: Function block

3.41.2 Functionality
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send
the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

3.41.3 Operation principle

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the IEC61850 generic communication I/
O functions (MVGGIO) give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as
output values. In the same time, it sends over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other IEC
61850 clients in the substation.

3.41.4 Application
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send
the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

3.41.5 Signals
Table 143: MVGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value

630 series 193

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 144: MVGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

3.41.6 Settings
Table 145: MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)

3.41.7 Monitored data

Table 146: MVGGIO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband
value
RANGE INTEGER 1=High - Range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal

194 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.42 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

3.42.1 Functionality
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data
transfer rate up to 19200 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and
a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.

For the 630 series vendor-specific IEC 60870-5-103 implementation,

see the communication protocol manual.

3.42.2 Settings
Table 147: IEC60870-5-103 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
SlaveAddress 1 - 31 - 1 1 Slave address
BaudRate 9600 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
19200 Bd
RevPolarity Off - - On Invert polarity
On
CycMeasRepTime 1.0 - 1800.0 s 0.1 5.0 Cyclic reporting time of measurments
MasterTimeDomain UTC - - UTC Master time domain
Local
Local with DST
TimeSyncMode IEDTime - - IEDTime Time synchronization mode
LinMastTime
IEDTimeSkew
EvalTimeAccuracy 5ms - - 5ms Evaluate time accuracy for invalid time
10ms
20ms
40ms
Off
EventRepMode SeqOfEvent - - SeqOfEvent Event reporting mode
HiPriSpont

630 series 195

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.43 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD

3.43.1 Function block

I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT

IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN

Figure 82: Function block

3.43.2 Functionality
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output
signals.

3.43.3 Signals
Table 148: I103CMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 149: I103CMD Output signals

Name Type Description
16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, block of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential
protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection

3.43.4 Settings
Table 150: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

196 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.44 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD

3.44.1 Function block

I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN

Figure 83: Function block

3.44.2 Functionality
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions.

3.44.3 Signals
Table 151: I103IEDCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 152: I103IEDCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26, activate setting group 4

3.44.4 Settings
Table 153: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 255 Function type (1-255)

630 series 197

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.45 Function commands user defined for IEC

60870-5-103 I103USRCMD

3.45.1 Function block

I103USRCMD
BLOCK ^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8

IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN

Figure 84: Function block

3.45.2 Functionality
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output
signals. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
the private range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.

3.45.3 Signals
Table 154: I103USRCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 155: I103USRCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

198 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.45.4 Settings
Table 156: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for output 2 (1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for output 3 (1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for output 4 (1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for output 5 (1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for output 6 (1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for output 7 (1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for output 8 (1-255)

3.46 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD

3.46.1 Function block

I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON

IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN

Figure 85: Function block

3.46.2 Functionality
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103.
The function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to
implement double-point command schemes.

3.46.3 Signals
Table 157: I103GENCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command

630 series 199

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 158: I103GENCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON

3.46.4 Settings
Table 159: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 127 - 1 1 Function type (1-127)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 32 - 239 - 1 32 Information number for command output
(32-239)

3.47 IED commands with position and select for IEC

60870-5-103 I103POSCMD

3.47.1 Function block

I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT

IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN

Figure 86: Function block

3.47.2 Functionality
I103POSCMD is used for controllable switching devices. It has double-point position
indicators that are getting the position value as an integer (POSITION output of the
GNRLCSWI function block) and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN;
2=CLOSE).The standard does not define the use of values 0 and 3 . However, when
connected to a switching device, these values are transmitted.

The BLOCK input blocks only the signals in monitoring direction (the position
information), not the commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used to
indicate that the monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-before-operate
type of control)

200 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.47.3 Signals
Table 160: I103POSCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object

3.47.4 Settings
Table 161: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Fucntion type (1-255)
InfNo 160 - 196 - 4 160 Information number for command output
(1-255)

3.48 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS

3.48.1 Function block

I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F

IEC10000287-1-en.vsd
IEC10000287 V1 EN

Figure 87: Function block

3.48.2 Functionality
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.

The measured values come from the corresponding MMXU function block and are
depending on the function block settings. The event reporting interval is set by the
CycMeasRepTime parameter of the IEC 60870-5-103 communication settings.

630 series 201

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Input signals of the IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS block should be connected to the
corresponding outputs of the MMXU application functions. Depending on the
connected input signals, the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol automatically selects the
proper ASDU Meas 3 or Meas 9 to be used as Class 2 data.

3.48.3 Signals
Table 162: I103MEAS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L2
IL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L3
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L2
UL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L3
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage UN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency

3.48.4 Settings
Table 163: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIL2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L2
MaxIL3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L3
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L2
MaxUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L3
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVA 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Maximum system frequency

202 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Maximum value corresponds to the value 4096 on the master side.

3.49 Measurands user defined signals for IEC

60870-5-103 I103MEASUSR

3.49.1 Function block

I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9

IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN

Figure 88: Function block

3.49.2 Functionality
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block
in the private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.

If I103MEASUSR is used to report angles, they are in radians.

3.49.3 Signals
Table 164: I103MEASUSR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9

630 series 203

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.49.4 Settings
Table 165: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 25 Function type (1-255)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 1
MaxMeasur2 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 2
MaxMeasur3 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 3
MaxMeasur4 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 4
MaxMeasur5 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 5
MaxMeasur6 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 6
MaxMeasur7 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 7
MaxMeasur8 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 8
MaxMeasur9 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on input
10000000000.00 9

3.50 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103

I103AR

3.50.1 Function block

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_UNSU

GUID-DE0A1065-4170-4F25-B74B-6CE24F42CC8D V1 EN

Figure 89: Function block

3.50.2 Functionality
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

204 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.50.3 Signals
Table 166: I103AR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-
recloser
130_UNSU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing

3.50.4 Settings
Table 167: I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

3.51 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103

I103EF

3.51.1 Function block

I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV

IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN

Figure 90: Function block

3.51.2 Functionality
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information
number parameter is defined for each output signal.

3.51.3 Signals
Table 168: I103EF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

630 series 205

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.51.4 Settings
Table 169: I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 160 Function type (1-255)

3.52 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

3.52.1 Function block

I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
83_ZONE6
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC
IEC10000291-2-en.vsdx

IEC10000291 V2 EN

Figure 91: Function block

3.52.2 Functionality
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example, 68_TRGEN

206 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

represents the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the
general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.

The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.

3.52.3 Signals
Table 170: I103FLTPROT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase L3
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 80, zone 3
81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 81, zone 4
82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 82, zone 5
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system
phase L1
87_MTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87, trip measuring system
phase L2
88_MTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88, trip measuring system
phase L3
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system
neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
Table continues on next page

630 series 207

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Name Type Default Description

92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-
CALCMADE)

ARINPROG

Input signal ARINPROG shall be connected to the autorecloser output signal

ACTIVE, which indicates that the reclosing is started and the sequence is ongoing.
The purpose of the ARINPROGRESS input is to establish the base time for the
relative timestamps. While ARINPROGRESS is asserted, a new fault does not reset
the base for the relative time reported for trip indications, and all timestamps will be
relative to last fault with ARINPROGRESS deasserted.

FLTLOC

Input signal FLTLOC shall be connected to the fault locator output signal
CALCMADE, the trigger to send the 73_SCL value.

3.52.4 Settings
Table 171: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 128 Function type (1-255)

3.53 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED

3.53.1 Function block

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4

GUID-26FA1D91-FD53-46B3-834C-6639F625EE02 V1 EN

Figure 92: Function block

208 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.53.2 Functionality
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined
for each input signal.

3.53.3 Signals
Table 172: I103IED Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

3.53.4 Settings
Table 173: I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

3.54 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103

I103SUPERV

3.54.1 Function block

I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL

IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN

Figure 93: Function block

630 series 209

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.54.2 Functionality
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications
in monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

3.54.3 Signals
Table 174: I103SUPERV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of
U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up
protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm

3.54.4 Settings
Table 175: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

210 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.55 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

3.55.1 Function block

I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
RT_START

IEC10000294-3-en.vsdx

IEC10000294 V3 EN

Figure 94: Function block

3.55.2 Functionality
I103USRDEF is a function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block
in the private range, and the information number parameter for each input signal.

I103USRDEF can be mapped to the INF that are not supported directly by specific
function blocks, for example, INF17, INF18, INF20 or INF35. After connecting the
appropriate signals to the I103USRDEF inputs, the user must also set the InfNo_x
values in the settings

GUID-391D4145-B7E6-4174-B3F7-753ADDA4D06F V1 EN

Figure 95: I103USRDEF example settings

630 series 211

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.55.3 Signals
Table 176: I103USRDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8

3.55.4 Settings
Table 177: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 5 Function type (1-255)
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for binary input 2
(1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for binary input 3
(1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for binary input 4
(1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for binary input 5
(1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for binary input 6
(1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for binary input 7
(1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for binary input 8
(1-255)

212 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.56 Automation bits AUTOBITS

3.56.1 Function block

AUTOBITS
BLOCK CMDBIT1
CMDBIT2
CMDBIT3
CMDBIT4
CMDBIT5
CMDBIT6
CMDBIT7
CMDBIT8
CMDBIT9
CMDBIT10
CMDBIT11
CMDBIT12
CMDBIT13
CMDBIT14
CMDBIT15
CMDBIT16
CMDBIT17
CMDBIT18
CMDBIT19
CMDBIT20
CMDBIT21
CMDBIT22
CMDBIT23
CMDBIT24
CMDBIT25
CMDBIT26
CMDBIT27
CMDBIT28
CMDBIT29
CMDBIT30
CMDBIT31
CMDBIT32

IEC09000345-1-en.vsd
IEC09000345 V1 EN

Figure 96: Function block

3.56.2 Functionality
The Automation bits function (AUTOBITS) is used to configure the DNP3 protocol
command handling.

3.56.3 Operation principle

Automation bits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time.
To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off,
pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters are regarded
appropriate. For example, pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 gives 5
positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

630 series 213

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

There is a BLOCK input signal, which disabled the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: "On/Off "does. Upon activation of the BLOCK input,
all 32 CMDBITxx outputs are set to “0”. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the
function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all
the 32 CMDBITxx outputs are set by the DNP3 master again, momentarily.

For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, see the DNP3

communication protocol manual.

3.56.4 Application
The AUTOBITS function block (or the automation bits function block) is used within
PCM600 in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the
DNP3 protocol.

See the communication protocol manual for a detailed description of

the DNP3 protocol.

3.56.5 Signals
Table 178: AUTOBITS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 179: AUTOBITS Output signals

Name Type Description
CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
Table continues on next page

214 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Description

CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32

3.56.6 Settings
Table 180: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

3.57 Configurable logic blocks

3.57.1 Standard configurable logic blocks

A number of logic blocks and timers are available to be used to adapt the configuration
to the specific application needs.

• OR

• INVERTER inverts the input signal

• PULSETIMER can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of

operation of outputs

630 series 215

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

• GATE is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from the input to
the output or not, depending on a setting

• XOR

• LOOPDELAY used to delay the output signal one execution cycle

• TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input
signal; the timer has a settable time delay

• AND

• SRMEMORY is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the state
before the interruption, or be reset. Set input has priority.

• RSMEMORY is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the state
before the interruption, or be reset. Reset input has priority.

3.57.1.1 OR function block

Function block

IEC09000288 V2 EN

Figure 97: Function block

Functionality
OR and OR20 are used to form general combinatorial expressions with Boolean
variables.

216 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

The default value in all input is logical FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the
required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.

OR has six inputs and OR20 has 20 inputs. The output OUT has a default value FALSE
initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function has been put in the wrong
execution order.

Connect at least one output to another function block or to a variable

for the function to execute correctly.

Signals
Table 181: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

Table 182: OR20 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Input 17
Table continues on next page

630 series 217

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Name Type Default Description

INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Input 20

Table 183: OR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Table 184: OR20 Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.57.1.2 Inverter function block INVERTER

Function block
INVERTER
INPUT OUT

IEC09000287-1-en.vsd
IEC09000287 V1 EN

Figure 98: Function block

Signals
Table 185: INVERTER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 186: INVERTER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

218 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.57.1.3 PULSETIMER function block

Function block
PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT

IEC09000291-1-en.vsd
IEC09000291 V1 EN

Figure 99: Function block

Functionality
The pulse function can be used, for example for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length.

Signals
Table 187: PULSETIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 188: PULSETIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
Table 189: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

3.57.1.4 Controllable gate function block GATE

Function block
GATE
INPUT OUT

IEC09000295-1-en.vsd
IEC09000295 V1 EN

Figure 100: Function block

Functionality
The GATE function block is used for controlling if a signal should pass from the input
to the output or not, depending on setting.

630 series 219

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Signals
Table 190: GATE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 191: GATE Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
Table 192: GATE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

3.57.1.5 Exclusive OR function block XOR

Function block
XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000292-1-en.vsd
IEC09000292 V1 EN

Figure 101: Function block

Functionality
The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with
Boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the
same.

Signals
Table 193: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

220 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 194: XOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.57.1.6 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY

Function block
LOOPDELAY
INPUT OUT

IEC09000296-1-en.vsd
IEC09000296 V1 EN

Figure 102: Function block

Functionality
The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the
output signal one execution cycle.

Signals
Table 195: LOOPDELAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 196: LOOPDELAY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal, signal is delayed one execution
cycle

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

630 series 221

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.57.1.7 Timer function block TIMERSET

Function block
TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC09000290-1-en.vsd
IEC09000290 V1 EN

Figure 103: Function block

Functionality
The function block TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to
the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay, t.

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

t
IEC08000289-2-en.vsd

IEC08000289 V2 EN

Figure 104: TIMERSET Status diagram

Signals
Table 197: TIMERSET Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 198: TIMERSET Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

222 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Settings
Table 199: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

3.57.1.8 AND function block

Function block

IEC09000289 V2 EN

Figure 105: Function block

Functionality
AND and AND20 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean
variables.

The default value in all input is logical TRUE, which makes it possible to use only the
required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.

AND has four inputs and AND20 has 20 inputs. The output OUT has a default value
FALSE initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function has been put in the
wrong execution order.

Connect at least one output to another function block or to a variable

for the function to execute correctly.

630 series 223

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Signals
Table 200: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

Table 201: AND20 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 1 Input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 1 Input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 1 Input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 1 Input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 1 Input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 1 Input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 1 Input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 1 Input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 1 Input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 1 Input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 1 Input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 1 Input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 1 Input 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 1 Input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 1 Input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 1 Input 20

Table 202: AND Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

224 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 203: AND20 Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.57.1.9 Set-reset memory function block SRMEMORY

Function block
SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000293-1-en.vsd
IEC09000293 V1 EN

Figure 106: Function block

Functionality
The Set-Reset function SRMEMORY is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset
an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a
power interruption returns the state it had before or if it is reset. For a Set-Reset flip-
flop, SET input has higher priority over RESET input.

Table 204: Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRMEMORY) function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
0 0 0 1

Signals
Table 205: SRMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

630 series 225

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 206: SRMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
Table 207: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

3.57.1.10 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

Function block
RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN

Figure 107: Function block

Functionality
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if
the flip-flop after a power interruption returns the state it had before or if it is reset. For
a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.

Table 208: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

Signals
Table 209: RSMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

226 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 210: RSMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
Table 211: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

3.57.1.11 Equality check for real signals EQR

Function block

GUID-CEC42A91-7C03-4B2D-BFE6-4DB5EAD63988 V1 EN

Figure 108: Function block

Functionality
The EQR function block compares the real inputs REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 and
activates the binary output OUTPUT, if REAL_IN1 is equal to REAL_IN2.

If REAL_IN1 == REAL_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 212: EQR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
REAL_IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
REAL_IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

Table 213: EQR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

630 series 227

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.57.1.12 Equality check for integer signals EQI

Function block

GUID-1E4DCAB8-7969-4E57-A65C-A26406C58649 V1 EN

Figure 109: Function block

Functionality
The EQI function compares the integer inputs INT_IN1 and INT_IN2 and activates
the binary output OUTPUT, if INT_IN1 is equal to INT_IN2.

If INT_IN1 = INT_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 214: EQI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT_IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
INT_IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

Table 215: EQI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

3.57.1.13 Greater than check for real signals GTR

Function block

GUID-C815667D-B570-4DCD-9E85-359853EBC0FA V1 EN

Figure 110: Function block

Functionality
The function compares the real inputs REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 and activates the
binary output OUTPUT, if REAL_IN1 is greater than REAL_IN2.

228 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

If REAL_IN1 > REAL_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 216: GTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
REAL_IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
REAL_IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

Table 217: GTR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

3.57.1.14 Greater than check for integer signals GTI

Function block

GUID-618CF33F-802B-47F4-9AB2-5CE2AA4B3131 V1 EN

Figure 111: Function block

Functionality
The function compares the integer inputs INT_IN1 and INT_IN2 and activates the
binary output OUTPUT, if INT_IN1 is greater than INT_IN2.

If INT_IN1 > INT_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 218: GTI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT_IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
INT_IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

630 series 229

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 219: GTI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

3.57.1.15 Greater than or equal check for real signals GER

Function block

GUID-1D90C1E8-5B94-427A-A19D-69BABBCB34A7 V1 EN

Figure 112: Function block

Functionality
The function compares the real inputs REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 and activates the
binary output OUTPUT, if REAL_IN1 is greater than or equal to REAL_IN2.

If REAL_IN1 ≥ REAL_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 220: GER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
REAL_IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
REAL_IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

Table 221: GER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

3.57.1.16 Greater than or equal check for integer signals GEI

Function block

GUID-4D68CEF6-6160-4D41-8F56-2C87D7B15FDD V1 EN

Figure 113: Function block

230 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Functionality
The function compares the integer inputs INT_IN1 and INT_IN2 and activates the
binary output OUTPUT, if INT_IN1 is greater than or equal to INT_IN2.

If INT_IN1 ≥ INT_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 222: GEI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT_IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
INT_IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

Table 223: GEI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

3.57.1.17 Less than check for real signals LTR

Function block

GUID-853AED74-6085-4A2C-AA93-8890593A483C V1 EN

Figure 114: Function block

Functionality
The function compares the real inputs REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 and activates the
binary output OUTPUT, if REAL_IN1 is less than REAL_IN2.

If REAL_IN1 < REAL_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

630 series 231

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Signals
Table 224: LTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
REAL_IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
REAL_IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

Table 225: LTR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

3.57.1.18 Less than check for integer signals LTI

Function block

GUID-35D9C6D8-FEAF-4B35-8FCD-8A00AE8E1FBA V1 EN

Figure 115: Function block

Functionality
The function compares the integer inputs INT_IN1 and INT_IN2 and activates the
binary output OUTPUT, if INT_IN1 is less than INT_IN2.

If INT_IN1 < INT_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 226: LTI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT_IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
INT_IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

Table 227: LTI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

232 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.57.1.19 Less than or equal check for real signals LER

Function block

GUID-B38B55AC-0F56-4913-B12D-79A5008B21A2 V1 EN

Figure 116: Function block

Functionality
The function compares the real inputs REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 and activates the
binary output OUTPUT, if REAL_IN1 is less than or equal to REAL_IN2.

If REAL_IN1 ≤ REAL_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 228: LER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
REAL_IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
REAL_IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

Table 229: LER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

3.57.1.20 Less than or equal check for integer signals LEI

Function block

GUID-94643564-E98F-4CA2-A6F0-3A277253E011 V1 EN

Figure 117: Function block

Functionality
The function compares the integer inputs INT_IN1 and INT_IN2 and activates the
binary output OUTPUT, if INT_IN1 is less than or equal to INT_IN2.

630 series 233

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

If INT_IN1 ≤ INT_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 230: LEI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT_IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
INT_IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

Table 231: LEI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

3.57.1.21 Not equal check for real signals NER

Function block

GUID-78EF1BC5-7202-42CF-8EFC-7D1A9E7DDB1D V1 EN

Figure 118: Function block

Functionality
The function compares the real inputs REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 and activates the
binary output OUTPUT, if REAL_IN1 not equal to REAL_IN2.

If REAL_IN1 ≠ REAL_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 232: NER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
REAL_IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
REAL_IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

234 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 233: NER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

3.57.1.22 Not equal check for integer signals NEI

Function block

GUID-10E96EE1-8BCF-47AA-AD2F-BDA97D2B332F V1 EN

Figure 119: Function block

Functionality
The function compares the integer inputs INT_IN1 and INT_IN2 and activates the
binary output OUTPUT, if INT_IN1 is not equal to INT_IN2.

If INT_IN1 ≠ INT_IN2, OUTPUT = 1, else OUTPUT = 0.

Logic function blocks do not have the hysteresis feature. Oscillating

outputs should be avoided when comparing analog signals that have
very closely varying values.

Signals
Table 234: NEI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT_IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
INT_IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

Table 235: NEI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT BOOLEAN Binary output

3.57.2 Configurable logic Q/T

A number of logic blocks and timers with the capability to propagate timestamp and
quality of the input signals are available. The function blocks assist the user to adapt
the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.

630 series 235

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.57.2.1 ORQT function block

Function block
ORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN

Figure 120: Function block

Functionality
ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions with
Boolean variables. ORQT function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.

Signals
Table 236: ORQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

Table 237: ORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

236 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.57.2.2 INVERTERQT function block

Function block
INVERTERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN

Figure 121: Function block

Signals
Table 238: INVERTERQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 239: INVERTERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.57.2.3 Pulse timer function block PULSTIMERQT

Function block
PULSETIMERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000304-1-en.vsd
IEC09000304 V1 EN

Figure 122: Function block

Functionality
Pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse
extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer has a settable length
and also propagates quality and time.

When the input goes to 1 the output is 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t.
Then return to 0.

When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated.

The supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the
output. A change of these bits does not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

630 series 237

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Signals
Table 240: PULSETIMERQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 241: PULSETIMERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
Table 242: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

3.57.2.4 XORQT function block

Function block
XORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN

Figure 123: Function block

Functionality
The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory
expressions with Boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two outputs.
One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different
and 0 if they are equal.

Signals
Table 243: XORQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

238 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 244: XORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.57.2.5 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT

Function block
TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC09000303-1-en.vsd
IEC09000303 V1 EN

Figure 124: Function block

Functionality
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has pick-up and drop-out delayed
outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).

When the output changes value the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported “quality” state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the
output. A change of these bits does not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

Input
tdelay
On

Off
tdelay

t
IEC08000289-2-en.vsd

IEC08000289 V2 EN

Figure 125: TIMERSETQT function

630 series 239

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Signals
Table 245: TIMERSETQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 246: TIMERSETQT Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

Settings
Table 247: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

3.57.2.6 ANDQT function block

Function block
ANDQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN

Figure 126: Function block

Functionality
ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean
variables. ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs.

Default value on all four inputs is logical 1 which makes it possible to use only the
required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output OUT has an
initial default value 0, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function has been put
in the wrong execution order.

240 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Signals
Table 248: ANDQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

Table 249: ANDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.57.2.7 Set-reset function block SRMEMORYQT

Function block
SRMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000301-1-en.vsd
IEC09000301 V1 EN

Figure 127: Function block

Functionality
The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop
after a power interruption returns to its previous state or if it is reset. SRMEMORYQT
propagates quality and time as well as value.
Table 250: SRMEMORYQT functionality
SET RESET OUT NOUT
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
0 0 0 1

If Memory parameter is "On", the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

630 series 241

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Signals
Table 251: SRMEMORYQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 252: SRMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
Table 253: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

3.57.2.8 Reset-set function block RSMEMORYQT

Function block
RSMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000302-1-en.vsd
IEC09000302 V1 EN

Figure 128: Function block

Functionality
The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or
set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function block has
two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after
a power interruption returns to its previous state or if it is reset.
Table 254: RSMEMORYQT functionality
SET RESET OUT NOUT
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 1 0 1
0 0 0 1

242 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Signals
Table 255: RSMEMORYQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 256: RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

Settings
Table 257: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

3.57.2.9 INVALIDQT function block

Function block
INVALIDQT
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4 OUTPUT4
INPUT5 OUTPUT5
INPUT6 OUTPUT6
INPUT7 OUTPUT7
INPUT8 OUTPUT8
INPUT9 OUTPUT9
INPUT10 OUTPUT10
INPUT11 OUTPUT11
INPUT12 OUTPUT12
INPUT13 OUTPUT13
INPUT14 OUTPUT14
INPUT15 OUTPUT15
INPUT16 OUTPUT16
VALID

IEC09000305-1-en.vsd
IEC09000305 V1 EN

Figure 129: Function block

Functionality
INVALIDQT is a function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a VALID
input.

630 series 243

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid bit is set, all
outputs' invalid quality bit is set. The timestamp of an output is set to the latest
timestamp of INPUT and VALID input.

Signals
Table 258: INVALIDQT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 16
VALID BOOLEAN 1 Inputs are valid or not

Table 259: INVALIDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Indication output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Indication output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Indication output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Indication output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Indication output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Indication output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Indication output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Indication output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Indication output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Indication output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Indication output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13
Table continues on next page

244 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Description

OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.57.3 Application
A set of standard logic blocks, like AND or OR, and timers are available for adapting
the IED configuration to the specific application needs. Additional logic blocks that
have the capability to propagate timestamp and quality beside the normal logical
function are also available. Those blocks have a designation including the letters QT,
for example, ANDQT or ORQT.

3.57.4 Technical data

Table 260: Configurable logic blocks
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Accuracy
fast medium normal value
AND 60 60 160 - -
B16I 5 5 - - -
GATE 10 10 20 - -
IB16A 5 5 - - -
INVERTER 30 30 80 - -
ITOR 10 10 10 - -
LOOPDELAY 10 10 20 - -
MINMAXR 5 10 5 - -
OR 60 60 160 - -
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
90000.000) s
RSMEMORY 10 10 20 - -
RTOI 10 10 10
SRMEMORY 10 10 20 - -
SWITCHI 10 10 10 - -
SWITCHR 10 10 10 - -
TIMERSET 10 10 20 (0.000– ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
90000.000) s
XOR 10 10 20 - -

630 series 245

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 261: Configurable logic Q/T

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or value Accuracy
medium normal
ANDQT 20 100 - -
INVALIDQT 6 6 - -
INVERTERQT 20 100 - -
ORQT 20 100 - -
PULSETIMERQT 10 30 (0.000-90000.0 ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
00) s
RSMEMORYQT 10 30 - -
SRMEMORYQT 10 30 - -
TIMERSETQT 10 30 (0.000-90000.0 ± 0.5% ± 25 ms
00) s
XORQT 10 30 - -

3.58 Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I

3.58.1 Function block

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC09000035-1-en.vsd

IEC09000035 V1 EN

Figure 130: Function block

3.58.2 Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16
binary (logical) signals into an integer.

3.58.3 Operation principle

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16
binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK input freezes the output at the last
value.

246 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.58.4 Signals
Table 262: B16I Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 263: B16I Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

3.58.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.58.6 Monitored data

Table 264: B16I Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

630 series 247

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.59 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A

3.59.1 Function block

IB16A
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC09000036-1-en.vsd

IEC09000036 V1 EN

Figure 131: Function block

3.59.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.

3.59.3 Operation principle

Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16A function is designed for receiving the
integer input locally. The BLOCK input freezes the logical outputs at the last value.

3.59.4 Signals
Table 265: IB16A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input

Table 266: IB16A Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
Table continues on next page

248 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Description

OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

3.59.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

3.60 Additional arithmetic and logic functions

3.60.1 Additional arithmetic and logic functions

The additional arithmetic or logic functions are used in the ACT level as a connection
between function blocks.

The available arithmetic functions are integer addition, integer division, integer
multiplication, integer subtraction, real addition, real division, real multiplication,
real subtraction, integer to real conversion, real to integer conversion and ten input real
minimum or maximum functionalities.

The available logic functions are two-input integer switch and two-input real switch
functionalities.

3.60.2 ADDI function block

3.60.2.1 Function block

GUID-C7C029E0-7214-4A90-BE19-806DF678D510 V1 EN

Figure 132: Function block

630 series 249

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.60.2.2 Functionality

ADDI integer adding block adds the integer inputs INT_IN1 and INT_IN2
together. ADDI executes the equation:
INT _ OUT = INT _ IN1 + INT _ IN 2
GUID-2572C1EA-50AF-4C6D-B2EF-99F3BD78DCCF V1 EN (Equation 3)

3.60.2.3 Signals
Table 267: ADDI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT_IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
INT_IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

Table 268: ADDI Output signals

Name Type Description
INT_OUT INTEGER Integer output

3.60.3 ADDR function block

3.60.3.1 Function block

GUID-7D1CAD31-BE10-49C1-BB23-87E53304EB01 V1 EN

Figure 133: Function block

3.60.3.2 Functionality

ADDR real adding block adds the real inputs REAL_IN1 and REAL_IN2 together.
ADDR executes the equation:
REAL _ OUT = REAL _ IN1 + REAL _ IN 2
GUID-6E181221-5580-4964-8D65-A4319CF5E804 V1 EN (Equation 4)

3.60.3.3 Signals
Table 269: ADDR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
REAL_IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
REAL_IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

250 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 270: ADDR Output signals

Name Type Description
REAL_OUT REAL Real output

3.60.4 DIVI function block

3.60.4.1 Function block

GUID-B761969D-C7F8-4D25-B6AE-FEBA6F9A112C V1 EN

Figure 134: Function block

3.60.4.2 Functionality

DIVI integer division block divides the INT_IN1 input by INT_IN2. The output of
the division, the module of division INT_OUT_MOD and the validity of integer
division in case of division by zero INT_VALID.

DIVI executes two equations

INT _ IN1
INT _ OUT =
INT _ IN 2
GUID-7834309B-7558-4D99-9D0C-68FEC275B5A3 V1 EN (Equation 5)

 INT _ IN1 
INT _ OUT _ MOD = MOD  
 INT _ IN 2 
GUID-39E9D90A-2266-4FF1-AF18-3BB2BF892A23 V1 EN (Equation 6)

Table 271: INT_VALID behavior

Input INT_IN2 Output INT_VALID
Zero FALSE
Lower or higher than zero TRUE

3.60.4.3 Signals
Table 272: DIVI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT_IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
INT_IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

630 series 251

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

Table 273: DIVI Output signals

Name Type Description
INT_OUT INTEGER Integer output
INT_VALID BOOLEAN Integer output validity
INT_OUT_MOD INTEGER Integer output division modulo

3.60.4.4 Technical revision history

Table 274: DIVI technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Inputs INT_IN1, INT_IN2 and outputs INT_OUT,
INT_VALID and INT_OUT_MOD are made visible
in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) of PCM600.

3.60.5 DIVR function block

3.60.5.1 Function block

GUID-6B1B85CC-3125-4429-88D9-11EBA237F658 V1 EN

Figure 135: Function block

3.60.5.2 Functionality

DIVR real division block divides the REAL_IN1 input by REAL_IN2. The outputs
are the division and the division validity in case of division by zero REAL_VALID.

DIVR executes an equation

REAL _ IN1
REAL _ OUT =
REAL _ IN 2
GUID-14B9E785-FDB8-410A-BB65-3ABE49A09DA5 V1 EN (Equation 7)

Table 275: REAL_VALID behavior

Input REAL_IN2 Output REAL_VALID
Zero FALSE
Lower or higher than zero TRUE

252 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.60.5.3 Signals
Table 276: DIVR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
REAL_IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
REAL_IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

Table 277: DIVR Output signals

Name Type Description
REAL_OUT REAL Real output
REAL_VALID BOOLEAN Real output validity

3.60.5.4 Technical revision history

Table 278: DIVR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Inputs REAL_IN1, REAL_IN2 and outputs
REAL_OUT and REAL_VALID are made visible in
the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) of PCM600.

3.60.6 MULI function block

3.60.6.1 Function block

GUID-D0EA1F48-3533-45D9-8BFF-7A256919D23A V1 EN

Figure 136: Function block

3.60.6.2 Functionality

MULI integer multiplication block multiplies the integer input INT_IN1 with the
INT_IN2 integer input.

MULI executes the equation

INT _ OUT = INT _ IN1 ⋅ INT _ IN 2
GUID-87381AFB-2C81-4904-B026-7F7235346A3F V1 EN (Equation 8)

630 series 253

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.60.6.3 Signals
Table 279: MULI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT_IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
INT_IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

Table 280: MULI Output signals

Name Type Description
INT_OUT INTEGER Integer output

3.60.7 MULR function block

3.60.7.1 Function block

GUID-4FA9C990-EB79-4DAA-BCD5-B970683162E7 V1 EN

Figure 137: Function block

3.60.7.2 Functionality

MULR real multiplication block multiplies the real input REAL_IN1 with the real
input REAL_IN2.

MULR executes the equation:

REAL _ OUT = REAL _ IN1 ⋅ REAL _ IN 2
GUID-2351068B-A88E-40B6-A66C-C519A593321D V1 EN (Equation 9)

3.60.7.3 Signals
Table 281: MULR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
REAL_IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
REAL_IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

Table 282: MULR Output signals

Name Type Description
REAL_OUT REAL Real output

254 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.60.8 SUBI function block

3.60.8.1 Function block

GUID-6B9207E6-88BA-43C0-9017-E8BD5C25FE2B V1 EN

Figure 138: Function block

3.60.8.2 Functionality

SUBI integer subtracting block subtracts the integer input INT_IN2 from the
INT_IN1 integer input.

SUBI executes the equation:

INT _ OUT = INT _ IN1 − INT _ IN 2
GUID-1289EF1B-D197-46B3-8F54-5FE151ECC5E3 V1 EN (Equation 10)

3.60.8.3 Signals
Table 283: SUBI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT_IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
INT_IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

Table 284: SUBI Output signals

Name Type Description
INT_OUT INTEGER Integer output

3.60.9 SUBR function block

3.60.9.1 Function block

GUID-1594E7C3-491A-4F11-8250-7EBF5E67E476 V1 EN

Figure 139: Function block

630 series 255

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.60.9.2 Functionality

SUBR real subtracting block subtracts the real input REAL_IN2 from the real input
REAL_IN1.

SUBR executes the equation:

REAL _ OUT = REAL _ IN1 − REAL _ IN 2
GUID-2BD26A2C-31AA-4660-ABC3-5675589E9E54 V1 EN (Equation 11)

3.60.9.3 Signals
Table 285: SUBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
REAL_IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
REAL_IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

Table 286: SUBR Output signals

Name Type Description
REAL_OUT REAL Real output

3.60.10 ITOR function block

3.60.10.1 Function block

GUID-E281071A-813C-4060-B076-4C79C412DEC4 V1 EN

Figure 140: Function block

3.60.10.2 Functionality

ITOR integer to real conversion block converts the integer input IN to the real value
output OUT.

3.60.10.3 Signals
Table 287: ITOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN INTEGER 0 Integer input

256 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 288: ITOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT REAL Real outpout

3.60.11 RTOI function block

3.60.11.1 Function block

GUID-4BBB4336-8318-4330-B65D-C49411F71BAB V1 EN

Figure 141: Function block

3.60.11.2 Functionality

RTOI real to integer conversion block converts the real input IN to the integer value
output OUT with the validity information OUT_VAL as the real value can exceed the
integer size.
Table 289: RTOI OUT_VAL logic
Value of OUT_VAL Description
TRUE Integer conversion valid
FALSE Absolute real input size exceeds the maximum
integer size

3.60.11.3 Signals
Table 290: RTOI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INT REAL 0.0 Real input

Table 291: RTOI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Integer output
OUT_VAL BOOLEAN Output conversion validity

3.60.11.4 Technical revision history

Table 292: RTOI technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Input IN and outputs OUT and OUT_VAL are made
visible in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) of PCM600.

630 series 257

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.60.12 MINMAXR function block

3.60.12.1 Function block

GUID-C32ADA8A-F602-4C1C-BBCB-A7D491B94301 V1 EN

Figure 142: Function block

3.60.12.2 Functionality

MINMAXR minimum and maximum value selector from the real input signals finds
the minimum and maximum value from the ten inputs and gives the quantities of these
to the outputs MIN and MAX as well as the channel number that has the absolute
minimum and maximum values MIN_IN_CH and MAX_IN_CH. When using less
than ten inputs, the last connected input should be connected to all the rest open inputs
for correct operation.

3.60.12.3 Signals
Table 293: MINMAXR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 REAL 0.0 input channel1
IN2 REAL 0.0 input channel2
IN3 REAL 0.0 input channel3
IN4 REAL 0.0 input channel4
IN5 REAL 0.0 input channel5
IN6 REAL 0.0 input channel6
IN7 REAL 0.0 input channel7
IN8 REAL 0.0 input channel8
IN9 REAL 0.0 input channel9
IN10 REAL 0.0 input channel10

258 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

Table 294: MINMAXR Output signals

Name Type Description
MIN REAL Minimum value of the inputs
MAX REAL Maximum value of the inputs
MIN_IN_CH INTEGER Channel number having the minimum value
MAX_IN_CH INTEGER Channel number having the maximum value

3.60.13 SWITCHI function block

3.60.13.1 Function block

GUID-657E28F9-4646-4574-AEC2-50B022C17B93 V1 EN

Figure 143: Function block

3.60.13.2 Functionality

SWITCHI integer switching block, operated by the CTL_SW input, selects the output
OUT between the inputs IN1 and IN2.

Table 295: SWITCHI output logic

CTL_SW OUT
FALSE IN2
TRUE IN1

3.60.13.3 Signals
Table 296: SWITCHI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTL_SW BOOLEAN 1 Control Switch
IN1 INTEGER 0 Integer input 1
IN2 INTEGER 0 Integer input 2

Table 297: SWITCHI Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Integer switch output

630 series 259

Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRS756508 F
Basic functions

3.60.14 SWITCHR function block

3.60.14.1 Function block

GUID-63F5ED57-E6C4-40A2-821A-4814E1554663 V1 EN

Figure 144: Function block

3.60.14.2 Functionality

SWITCHR real switching block, operated by the CTL_SW input, selects the output
value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs.
CTL_SW OUT
FALSE IN2
TRUE IN1

3.60.14.3 Signals
Table 298: SWITCHR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTL_SW BOOLEAN 1 Control Switch
IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

Table 299: SWITCHR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT REAL Real switch output

3.61 ETHFRNT function block

Table 300: ETHFRNT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.0.254 IP-Address
Address
IPMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 IP-Mask
Address

260 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 3
Basic functions

3.62 ETHLAN1 function block

Table 301: ETHLAN1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.2.10 IP-Address
Address
IPMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 IP-Mask
Address

3.63 GATEWAY function block

Table 302: GATEWAY Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GWAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Gateway address
Address

3.64 SYSTEMTIME function block

Table 303: SYSTEMTIME Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SystemTime - 2008-01-01 System time
00:00:00

3.65 WEBSERVER function block

Table 304: WEBSERVER Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Write mode Writing disabled - - Writing disabled Writing of settings enabled
Writing enabled
Session timeout 2 - 60 Min 1 3 Session timeout

630 series 261

Technical Manual
262
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Section 4 Protection functions

4.1 Three-phase current protection

4.1.1 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection

PHxPTOC

4.1.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase non-directional PHLPTOC 3I> 51P-1
overcurrent protection - Low stage
Three-phase non-directional PHHPTOC 3I>> 51P-2
overcurrent protection - High stage
Three-phase non-directional PHIPTOC 3I>>> 50P/51P
overcurrent protection - Instantaneous
stage

4.1.1.2 Function block

A070990 V1 EN

Figure 145: Function block

4.1.1.3 Functionality

The three-phase overcurrent protection PHxPTOC is used as one-phase, two-phase or

three-phase non-directional overcurrent and short-circuit protection for feeders.

The function starts when the current exceeds the set limit. The operate time
characteristics for low stage PHLPTOC and high stage PHHPTOC can be selected to
be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).The
instantaneous stage PHIPTOC always operates with the DT characteristic.

630 series 263

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when
the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer
characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection can be described

by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

A070996 V1 EN

Figure 146: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector reports the exceeding of
the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start value
setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.

Do not set the multiplier setting Start value Mult higher than
necessary. If the value is too high, the function may not operate at all
during an inrush followed by a fault, no matter how severe the fault is.

The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.

264 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

A070554 V1 EN

Figure 147: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated

Phase selection logic

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects
the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If the phase
information matches the Num of start phases setting, the phase selection logic
activates the timer module.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The ST_A, ST_B and ST_C
outputs are used to indicate which phases are started. Depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT.
When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode
or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is
activated. The OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C outputs are used to indicate which phases
are operated.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B,
Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate
delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the timer in
the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset
curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, the reset
timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When the IDMT curves are

630 series 265

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or
"Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the
reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time
setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current
during the drop-off situation. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer
has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the
drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but always
at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For more
information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section
in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.1.1.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.1.1.6 Measurement modes

The function operates on four alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT",

"Peak-to-Peak" and "P-to-P + backup". The measurement mode is selected with the
setting Measurement mode.

266 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 305: Measurement modes supported by PHxPTOC stages

Measurement Supported measurement modes
mode PHLPTOC PHHPTOC PHIPTOC
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x
P-to-P + backup x

For a detailed description of the measurement modes, see the General

function block features section in this manual.

4.1.1.7 Timer characteristics

PHxPTOC supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the timer
characteristics with the Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings. When
the DT characteristic is selected, it is only affected by the Operate delay time and Reset
delay time settings.

The IED provides 16 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special
characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a
user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
The user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type
values "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is identical in both
cases.

The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages:
Table 306: Timer characteristics supported by different stages
Operating curve type Supported by
PHLPTOC PHHPTOC
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse x x
(2) ANSI Very Inverse x
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse x x
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse x
(5) ANSI Definite Time x x
(6) Long Time Extremely x
Inverse
(7) Long Time Very Inverse x
(8) Long Time Inverse x
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x x
(10) IEC Very Inverse x x
Table continues on next page

630 series 267

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Operating curve type Supported by

PHLPTOC PHHPTOC
(11) IEC Inverse x
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x x
(13) IEC Short Time Inverse x
(14) IEC Long Time Inverse x
(15) IEC Definite Time x x
(17) User programmable x x
(18) RI type x
(19) RD type x

PHIPTOC supports only definite time characteristic.

For a detailed description of timers, see the General function block

features section in this manual.

Table 307: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages

Reset curve type Supported by
PHLPTOC PHHPTOC Note
(1) Immediate x x Available for all operate
time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all operate
time curves
(3) Inverse reset x x Available only for ANSI
and user
programmable curves

The Type of reset curve setting does not apply to PHIPTOC or when
the DT operation is selected. The reset is purely defined by the Reset
delay time setting.

4.1.1.8 Application

PHxPTOC is used in several applications in the power system. The applications

include but are not limited to:

268 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

• Selective overcurrent and short-circuit protection of feeders in distribution and

subtransmission systems
• Backup overcurrent and short-circuit protection of power transformers and
generators
• Overcurrent and short-circuit protection of various devices connected to the
power system, for example shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and motors
• General backup protection

PHxPTOC is used for single-phase, two-phase and three-phase non-directional

overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Typically, overcurrent protection is used for
clearing two and three-phase short circuits. Therefore, the user can choose how many
phases, at minimum, must have currents above the start level for the function to
operate. When the number of start-phase settings is set to "1 out of 3", the operation
of PHxPTOC is enabled with the presence of high current in one-phase.

When the setting is "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3", single-phase faults are
not detected. The setting "3 out of 3" requires the fault to be present in
all three phases.

Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time
delays. PHxPTOC consists of three protection stages:
• Low PHLPTOC
• High PHHPTOC
• Instantaneous PHIPTOC.

PHLPTOC is used for overcurrent protection. The function contains several types of
time-delay characteristics. PHHPTOC and PHIPTOC are used for fast clearance of
very high overcurrent situations.

Transformer and busbar overcurrent protection with reverse blocking

principle
By implementing a full set of overcurrent protection stages and blocking channels
between the protection stages of the incoming feeders, bus-tie and outgoing feeders,
it is possible to speed up the operation of overcurrent protection in the busbar and
transformer LV-side faults without impairing the selectivity. Also, the security degree
of busbar protection is increased, because there is now a dedicated, selective and fast
busbar protection functionality which is based on the blockable overcurrent protection
principle. The additional time selective stages on the transformer HV and LV-sides
provide increased security degree of backup protection for the transformer, busbar and
also for the outgoing feeders.

Depending on the overcurrent stage in question, the selectivity of the scheme in Figure
148 is based on the operating current, operating time or blockings between successive
overcurrent stages. With blocking channels, the operating time of the protection can
be drastically shortened if compared to the simple time selective protection. In
addition to the busbar protection, this blocking principle is applicable for the

630 series 269

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

protection of transformer LV terminals and short lines. The functionality and

performance of the proposed overcurrent protections can be summarized as seen in the
table.
Table 308: Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcurrent protection.
DT = definite time, IDMT = inverse definite minimum time
O/C-stage Operating char. Selectivity mode Operation speed Sensitivity
HV/3I> DT/IDMT time selective low very high
HV/3I>> DT blockable/time high/low high
selective
HV/3I>>> DT current selective very high low
LV/3I> DT/IDMT time selective low very high
LV/3I>> DT time selective low high
LV/3I>>> DT blockable high high

In case the bus-tie breaker is open, the operating time of the blockable overcurrent
protection is approximately 100 ms (relaying time). When the bus-tie breaker is
closed, that is, the fault current flows to the faulted section of the busbar from two
directions, the operation time becomes as follows: first the bus-tie relay unit trips the
tie breaker in the above 100 ms, which reduces the fault current to a half. After this the
incoming feeder relay unit of the faulted bus section trips the breaker in approximately
250 ms (relaying time), which becomes the total fault clearing time in this case.

A070980 V2 EN

Figure 148: Numerical overcurrent protection functionality for a typical sub-

transmission/distribution substation (feeder protection not shown).
Blocking output = digital output signal from the start of a protection
stage, Blocking in = digital input signal to block the operation of a
protection stage

270 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The operating times of the time selective stages are very short, because the grading
margins between successive protection stages can be kept short. This is mainly due to
the advanced measuring principle allowing a certain degree of CT saturation, good
operating accuracy and short retardation times of the numerical units. So, for example,
a grading margin of 150 ms in the DT mode of operation can be used, provided that the
circuit breaker interrupting time is shorter than 60 ms.

The sensitivity and speed of the current-selective stages become as good as possible
due to the fact that the transient overreach is practically zero. Also, the effects of
switching inrush currents on the setting values can be reduced by using the IED logic,
which recognizes the transformer energizing inrush current and blocks the operation
or multiplies the current start value setting of the selected overcurrent stage with a
predefined multiplier setting.

Finally, a dependable trip of the overcurrent protection is secured by both a proper

selection of the settings and an adequate ability of the measuring transformers to
reproduce the fault current. This is important in order to maintain selectivity and also
for the protection to operate without additional time delays. For additional
information about available measuring modes and current transformer requirements,
see the General function block features section in this manual.

Radial outgoing feeder overcurrent protection

The basic requirements for feeder overcurrent protection are adequate sensitivity and
operation speed taking into account the minimum and maximum fault current levels
along the protected line, selectivity requirements, inrush currents and the thermal and
mechanical withstand of the lines to be protected.

In many cases the above requirements can be best fulfilled by using multiple-stage
overcurrent units. Figure 149 shows an example of this. A brief coordination study has
been carried out between the incoming and outgoing feeders.

The protection scheme is implemented with three-stage numerical overcurrent

protection, where the low-set stage PHLPTOC operates in IDMT-mode and the two
higher stages PHHPTOC and PHIPTOC in DT-mode. Also the thermal withstand of
the line types along the feeder and maximum expected inrush currents of the feeders
are shown. Faults occurring near the station where the fault current levels are the
highest are cleared rapidly by the instantaneous stage in order to minimize the effects
of severe short circuit faults. The influence of the inrush current is taken into
consideration by connecting the inrush current detector to the start value multiplying
input of the instantaneous stage. By this way the start value is multiplied with a
predefined setting during the inrush situation and nuisance tripping can be avoided.

630 series 271

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

A070982 V1 EN

Figure 149: Functionality of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection

The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time selective
operation characteristics. All the points mentioned earlier, required to define the
overcurrent protection parameters, can be expressed simultaneously in a coordination
plan. In Figure 150, the coordination plan shows an example of operation
characteristics in the LV-side incoming feeder and radial outgoing feeder.

272 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

A070984 V2 EN

Figure 150: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent

protection

For the short circuit protection of motors, the start value is typically set
1.5 times higher than the motor startup current.

4.1.1.9 Signals
Table 309: PHLPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - 3-phase current group
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 310: PHHPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - 3-phase current group
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

630 series 273

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 311: PHIPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - 3-phase current group
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 312: PHLPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operated phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operated phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operated phase C
START BOOLEAN Started signal
ST_A BOOLEAN Started phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Started phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Started phase C

Table 313: PHHPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operated phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operated phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operated phase C
START BOOLEAN Started signal
ST_A BOOLEAN Started phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Started phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Started phase C

Table 314: PHIPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operated phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operated phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operated phase C
START BOOLEAN Started signal
Table continues on next page

274 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Description

ST_A BOOLEAN Started phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Started phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Started phase C

4.1.1.10 Settings
Table 315: PHLPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05 - 5.00 pu 0.01 0.05 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Operate delay time 0.04 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.04 Operate delay time

Table 316: PHLPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset

Table 317: PHLPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Num of start phases 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2 out of 3 activation
3 out of 3

630 series 275

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 318: PHLPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Measurement mode RMS - - DFT Selects used current measurement mode
DFT
Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

Table 319: PHHPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.10 - 40.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
Operate delay time 0.02 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.02 Operate delay time

Table 320: PHHPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset

276 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 321: PHHPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Num of start phases 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2 out of 3 activation
3 out of 3

Table 322: PHHPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Measurement mode RMS - - DFT Selects used current measurement mode
DFT
Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 0.020 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

Table 323: PHIPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.10 - 40.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Operate delay time 0.02 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.02 Operate delay time

Table 324: PHIPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Num of start phases 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2 out of 3 activation
3 out of 3

630 series 277

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 325: PHIPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

4.1.1.11 Measured values

Table 326: PHLPTOC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase C
I_RMS_A REAL 0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase C
I_PTOP_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase A
I_PTOP_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase B
I_PTOP_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 327: PHHPTOC Measured values

Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase C
I_RMS_A REAL 0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase C
I_PTOP_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase A
I_PTOP_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase B
I_PTOP_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase C
I_PEAK_A REAL 0 Current peak magnitude phase A
I_PEAK_B REAL 0 Current peak magnitude phase B
I_PEAK_C REAL 0 Current peak magnitude phase C
Table continues on next page

278 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 328: PHIPTOC Measured values

Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase C
I_RMS_A REAL 0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase C
I_PTOP_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase A
I_PTOP_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase B
I_PTOP_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase C
I_PEAK_A REAL 0 Current peak magnitude phase A
I_PEAK_B REAL 0 Current peak magnitude phase B
I_PEAK_C REAL 0 Current peak magnitude phase C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

4.1.1.12 Monitored data

Table 329: PHLPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase A
1=TRUE
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase B
1=TRUE
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase C
1=TRUE
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase A
1=TRUE
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase B
1=TRUE
Table continues on next page

630 series 279

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

ST_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase C
1=TRUE
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time
INVAL_CRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Invalid curve parameters
1=TRUE

Table 330: PHHPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase A
1=TRUE
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase B
1=TRUE
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase C
1=TRUE
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase A
1=TRUE
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase B
1=TRUE
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase C
1=TRUE
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time
INVAL_CRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Invalid curve parameters
1=TRUE

Table 331: PHIPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase A
1=TRUE
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase B
1=TRUE
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase C
1=TRUE
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase A
1=TRUE
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase B
1=TRUE
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase C
1=TRUE
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

280 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.1.13 Technical data

Table 332: PHxPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

PHLPTOC ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

PHHPTOC ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 × In

and (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 × In)
PHIPTOC ±5.0% of the set value
(at currents in the range of 10…40 × In)

Start time 1)2) PHIPTOC:

IFault = 2 × set Start Typically 17 ms (±5 ms)
value
IFault = 10 × set Start Typically 10 ms (±5 ms)
value
PHHPTOC:
IFault = 2 × set Start Typically 19 ms (±5 ms)
value
PHLPTOC:
IFault = 2 × set Start Typically 23 ms (±15 ms)
value
Reset time <45 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <30 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression
P-to-P+backup: No suppression

1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, fault current
in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5...20

4.1.1.14 Technical revision history

Table 333: PHHPTOC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting

Table 334: PHLPTOC technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting.

630 series 281

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.1.2 Three-phase directional overcurrent protection DPHxPDOC

4.1.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHLPDOC 3I> -> 67-1
protection - Low stage
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHHPDOC 3I>> -> 67-2
protection - High stage

4.1.2.2 Function block

GUID-F1375979-D1D3-426B-A327-70BD5869B7EB V1 EN

Figure 151: Function block

4.1.2.3 Functionality

The three-phase overcurrent protection DPHxPDOC is used as one-phase, two-phase

or three-phase directional overcurrent and short-circuit protection for feeders.

DPHxPDOC starts up when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and
directional criterion is fulfilled. The operate time characteristics for low stage
DPHLPDOC and high stage DPHHPDOC can be selected to be either definite time
(DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).

In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when
the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer
characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

282 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The operation of directional overcurrent protection can be described using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-021E1EE5-3286-4E88-9F94-521609D77F1D V2 EN

Figure 152: Functional module diagram

Directional calculation
The directional calculation compares the current phasors to the polarizing phasor. A
suitable polarization quantity can be selected from the different polarization
quantities, which are the positive sequence voltage, negative sequence voltage, self-
polarizing (faulted) voltage and cross-polarizing voltages (healthy voltages). The
polarizing method is defined with the Pol quantity setting.
Table 335: Polarizing quantities
Polarizing quantity Description
Pos. seq. volt Positive sequence voltage
Neg. seq. volt Negative sequence voltage
Self pol Self polarization
Cross pol Cross polarization

The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting. The user
can select either "Non-directional", "Forward" or "Reverse" operation. By setting the
value of Allow Non Dir to "Allowed", the non-directional operation is allowed when
the directional information is invalid.

630 series 283

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The Characteristic angle setting is used to turn the directional characteristic. The
value of Characteristic angle should be chosen in such a way that all the faults in the
operating direction are seen in the operating zone and all the faults in the opposite
direction are seen in the non-operating zone. The value of Characteristic angle
depends on the network configuration.

Reliable operation requires both the operating and polarizing quantities to exceed
certain minimum amplitude levels. The minimum amplitude level for the operating
quantity (current) is set with the Min operate current setting. The minimum amplitude
level for the polarizing quantity (voltage) is set with the Min operate voltage setting.
If the amplitude level of the operating quantity or polarizing quantity is below the set
level, the direction information of the corresponding phase is set to "Unknown".

The polarizing quantity validity can remain valid even if the amplitude of the
polarizing quantity falls below the value of the Min operate voltage setting. In this
case, the directional information is provided by a special memory function for a time
defined with the Voltage Mem time setting.

DPHxPDOC is provided with a memory function to secure a reliable and correct

directional IED operation in case of a close short circuit or an earth fault characterized
by an extremely low voltage. At sudden loss of the polarization quantity, the angle
difference is calculated on the basis of a fictive voltage. The fictive voltage is
calculated using the polarizing quantity measured before the fault occurred. The
memory function enables the function to operate up to a maximum of three seconds
after a total loss of voltage. This time can be set with the Voltage Mem time setting.

The value for the Min operate voltage setting should be carefully
selected since the accuracy in low signal levels is strongly affected by
the measuring device accuracy.

When the voltage of one or more phases falls below Min operate voltage at a close
fault, the corresponding phase-related fictive voltage is used to determine the phase
angle. The measured voltage is applied again as soon as the voltage rises above Min
operate voltage. The fictive voltage is also discarded if the measured voltage stays
below Min operate voltage for longer than Voltage Mem time or if the fault current
disappears while the fictive voltage is in use. When the voltage is below Min operate
voltage and hysteresis and the fictive voltage is unusable, the fault direction cannot be
determined. The fictive voltage can be unusable for three reasons:
• The fictive voltage is discarded after Voltage Mem time
• The phase angle cannot be reliably measured before the fault situation.
• When the used Pol quantity setting is "Neg. seq. volt.", the measured negative-
sequence voltage before the fault is often too low for the fictive voltage function.

284 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-718D61B4-DAD0-4F43-8108-86F7B44E7E2D V1 EN

Figure 153: Operating zones at minimum magnitude levels

Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector reports the exceeding of
the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start value
setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.

Do not set the multiplier setting Start value Mult higher than
necessary. If the value is too high, the function may not operate at all
during an inrush followed by a fault, no matter how severe the fault is.

The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.

630 series 285

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

A070554 V1 EN

Figure 154: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated

Phase selection logic

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector and the directional calculation, the
phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current
exceeds the setting. If the phase information matches the Num of start phases setting,
the phase selection logic activates the timer module.

The phase selection logic provides also information about phase specific fault
directions. The FLT_DIR_A output indicates the direction of the fault in phase A.
Similarly, the FLT_DIR_B output indicates the direction of the fault in phase B. The
direction of the fault in phase C is indicated by the FLT_DIR_C output. The general
fault direction information is provided by the FAULT_DIR output.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The ST_A, ST_B and ST_C
outputs are used to indicate which phases are started. When the operation timer has
reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value
defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is activated. The OPR_A,
OPR_B and OPR_C outputs are used to indicate which phases are operated.

DPHxPDOC can be blocked from BLOCK, the binary input. Activation of BLOCK
input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The start signals from the
function can be blocked from BLK_ST, the binary input. The operate signals from the
function can be blocked from BLK_OPR, the binary input. The operation timer

286 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

counting can be frozen to the prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input
signal.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B,
Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate
delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the timer in
the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset
curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, the reset
timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When the IDMT curves are
selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or
"Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the
reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time
setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current
during the drop-off situation. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer
has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the
drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but always
at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For more
information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section
in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The angle values available at the input monitor data view are in
radians.

4.1.2.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The

630 series 287

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.1.2.6 Measuring modes

The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: “RMS”, “DFT” and
“Peak-to-Peak” . The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode
setting.
Table 336: Measurement modes supported by DPHxPDOC stages
Measurement mode Supported measurement modes
DPHLPDOC DPHHPDOC
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x

4.1.2.7 Directional overcurrent characteristics

The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area is
limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse
operation area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings.

The sector limits are always given as positive degree values.

In the forward operation area, the Max forward angle setting gives the
counterclockwise sector and the Min forward angle setting gives the corresponding
clockwise sector, measured from the Characteristic angle setting.

In the backward operation area, the Max reverse angle setting gives the
counterclockwise sector and the Min reverse angle setting gives the corresponding
clockwise sector, a measurement from the Characteristic angle setting that has been
rotated 180 degrees.

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) is set positive if the operating current lags the
polarizing quantity and negative if the operating current leads the polarizing quantity.

288 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-CD0B7D5A-1F1A-47E6-AF2A-F6F898645640 V2 EN

Figure 155: Configurable operating sectors

Table 337: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view
Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C
The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined sectors, 0 = unknown
or the direction cannot be defined due too low
amplitude
The ANGLE_X is in the forward sector 1 = forward
The ANGLE_X is in the reverse sector 2 = backward
(The ANGLE_X is in both forward and reverse 3 = both
sectors, that is, when the sectors are overlapping)

Table 338: Momentary phase combined direction value for monitored data view
Criterion for phase combined direction information The value for DIRECTION
The direction information (DIR_X) for all phases is 0 = unknown
unknown
The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 1 = forward
phase is forward, none being in reverse
The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 2 = backward
phase is reverse, none being in forward
The direction information (DIR_X) for some phase 3 = both
is forward and for some phase is reverse

630 series 289

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

FAULT_DIR gives the detected direction of the fault during fault situations, that is,
when the START output is active.

Self-polarizing as polarizing method

Table 339: Equations for calculating angle difference for self-polarizing method
Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference
phases current polarizing
voltage
A IA UA ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U A ) - ϕ ( I A ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-60308BBA-07F8-4FB4-A9E8-3850325E368C V2 EN

B IB UB ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U B ) - ϕ ( I B ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-9AF57A77-F9C6-46B7-B056-AC7542EBF449 V2 EN

C IC UC ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U C ) - ϕ ( I C ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-51FEBD95-672C-440F-A678-DD01ABB2D018 V2 EN

A-B IA - IB UAB ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U AB ) - ϕ ( I A - I B ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-7DA1116D-86C0-4D7F-AA19-DCF32C530C4C V2 EN

B-C IB - IC UBC ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U BC ) - ϕ ( I B - I C ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-3E9788CA-D2FC-4FC4-8F9E-1466F3775826 V2 EN

C-A IC - IA UCA ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U CA ) - ϕ ( I C - I A ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-EFD80F78-4B26-46B6-A5A6-CCA6B7E20C6E V2 EN

In an example case of the phasors in a single-phase earth fault where the faulted phase
is phase A, the angle difference between the polarizing quantity UA and operating
quantity IA is marked as φ. In the self-polarization method, there is no need to rotate
the polarizing quantity.

GUID-C648173C-D8BB-4F37-8634-5D4DC7D366FF V1 EN

Figure 156: Single-phase earth fault, phase A

290 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

In an example case of a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between

phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity UBC
and operating quantity IB - IC in the self-polarizing method.

GUID-65CFEC0E-0367-44FB-A116-057DD29FEB79 V1 EN

Figure 157: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C

Cross-polarizing as polarizing quantity

Table 340: Equations for calculating angle difference for cross-polarizing method
Faulte Used Used Angle difference
d fault polarizing
phase current voltage
s
A IA UBC
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U BC ) - ϕ ( I A ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-4F0D1491-3679-4B1F-99F7-3704BC15EF9D V3 EN

B IB UCA
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U CA ) - ϕ ( I B ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-F5252292-E132-41A7-9F6D-C2A3958EE6AD V3 EN

C IC UAB
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U AB ) - ϕ ( I C ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-84D97257-BAEC-4264-9D93-EC2DF853EAE1 V3 EN

A-B IA - IB UBC -
UCA ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U BC - U CA ) - ϕ ( I A - I B ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-AFB15C3F-B9BB-47A2-80E9-796AA1165409 V2 EN

B-C IB - IC UCA -
UAB ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U CA - U AB ) - ϕ ( I B - I C ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-C698D9CA-9139-40F2-9097-007B6B14D053 V2 EN

C-A IC - IA UAB -
UBC ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U AB - U BC ) - ϕ ( I C - I A ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-838ECE7D-8B1C-466F-8166-E8FE16D28AAD V2 EN

The angle difference between the polarizing quantity UBC and operating quantity IA is
marked as φ in an example of the phasors in a single-phase earth fault where the

630 series 291

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

faulted phase is phase A. The polarizing quantity is rotated with 90 degrees. The
characteristic angle is assumed to be ~ 0 degrees.

GUID-6C7D1317-89C4-44BE-A1EB-69BC75863474 V1 EN

Figure 158: Single-phase earth fault, phase A

In an example of the phasors in a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is

between the phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing
quantity UAB and operating quantity IB - IC marked as φ.

292 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-C2EC2EF1-8A84-4A32-818C-6D7620EA9969 V1 EN

Figure 159: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C

The equations are valid when network rotating direction is counter-

clockwise, that is, ABC. If the network rotating direction is reversed,
180 degrees is added to the calculated angle difference. This is done
automatically with a system parameter Phase rotation.

Negative sequence voltage as polarizing quantity

When the negative voltage is used as the polarizing quantity, the angle difference
between the operating and polarizing quantity is calculated with the same formula for
all fault types:

ANGLE _ X = ϕ (−U 2 ) − ϕ ( I 2 ) − ϕ RCA

GUID-470263DD-C1D7-4E59-B011-24D8D35BD52A V3 EN (Equation 12)

630 series 293

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

This means that the actuating polarizing quantity is -U2.

UA
IA
UA

IA U
2
I2

UCA UAB IC
IB
IC IB
U2
I2
UC UB
UC UBC UB

A B
GUID-027DD4B9-5844-4C46-BA9C-54784F2300D3 V2 EN

Figure 160: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phases A-N, and two-phase
short circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing quantity
is the negative-sequence voltage -U2

Positive sequence voltage as polarizing quantity

Table 341: Equations for calculating angle difference for positive-sequence quantity polarizing
method
Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference
phases current polarizing
voltage
A IA U1 ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I A ) − ϕ RCA
GUID-4C933201-2290-4AA3-97A3-670A40CC4114 V4 EN

B IB U1
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I B ) − ϕ RCA − 120o
GUID-648D061C-6F5F-4372-B120-0F02B42E9809 V4 EN

C IC U1
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I C ) − ϕ RCA + 120o
GUID-355EF014-D8D0-467E-A952-1D1602244C9F V4 EN

A-B IA - IB U1
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I A − I B ) − ϕ RCA + 30o
GUID-B07C3B0A-358E-480F-A059-CC5F3E6839B1 V3 EN

B-C IB - IC U1
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I B − I C ) − ϕ RCA − 90o
GUID-4597F122-99A6-46F6-A38C-81232C985BC9 V3 EN

C-A IC - IA U1
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I C − I A ) − ϕ RCA + 150o
GUID-9892503C-2233-4BC5-8C54-BCF005E20A08 V3 EN

294 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

UA
IA U1
U1
UA
-90°
IA
IB - Ic
-IC
IB
IB IC
IC

UC UB
UC UB

A B
GUID-1937EA60-4285-44A7-8A7D-52D7B66FC5A6 V3 EN

Figure 161: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phase A to ground, and a two-
phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the
polarizing quantity is the positive-sequence voltage U1

Network rotation direction

Typically, the network rotating direction is counter-clockwise and defined as "ABC".
If the network rotating direction is reversed, meaning clockwise, that is, "ACB", the
equations for calculating the angle difference needs to be changed. The network
rotating direction is defined with a system parameter Phase rotation. The change in
the network rotating direction affects the phase-to-phase voltages polarization
method where the calculated angle difference needs to be rotated 180 degrees. Also,
when the sequence components are used, which are, the positive sequence voltage or
negative sequence voltage components, the calculation of the components are
affected but the angle difference calculation remains the same. When the phase-to-
ground voltages are used as the polarizing method, the network rotating direction
change has no effect on the direction calculation.

The network rotating direction is set in the IED using the parameter in
the HMI menu: Configuration/System/Phase rotation. The default
parameter value is "ABC".

630 series 295

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

NETWORK ROTATION ABC NETWORK ROTATION ACB

UA UA
IA IA

UCA UAB UAB UCA

IB IC

IC IB
UC UBC UB UB UBC UC
GUID-BF32C1D4-ECB5-4E96-A27A-05C637D32C86 V2 EN

Figure 162: Examples of network rotating direction

4.1.2.8 Application

DPHxPDOC is used as short-circuit protection in three-phase distribution or sub

transmission networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz.

In radial networks, phase overcurrent IEDs are often sufficient for the short circuit
protection of lines, transformers and other equipment. The current-time characteristic
should be chosen according to the common practice in the network. It is recommended
to use the same current-time characteristic for all overcurrent IEDs in the network.
This includes the overcurrent protection of transformers and other equipment.

The phase overcurrent protection can also be used in closed ring systems as short
circuit protection. Because the setting of a phase overcurrent protection system in
closed ring networks can be complicated, a large number of fault current calculations
are needed. There are situations with no possibility to have the selectivity with a
protection system based on overcurrent IEDs in a closed ring system.

In some applications, the possibility of obtaining the selectivity can be improved

significantly if DPHxPDOC is used. This can also be done in the closed ring networks
and radial networks with the generation connected to the remote in the system thus
giving fault current infeed in reverse direction. Directional overcurrent IEDs are also
used to have a selective protection scheme, for example in case of parallel distribution
lines or power transformers fed by the same single source. In ring connected supply
feeders between substations or feeders with two feeding sources, DPHxPDOC is also
used.

Parallel lines or transformers

When the lines are connected in parallel and if a fault occurs in one of the lines, it is
practical to have DPHxPDOC to detect the direction of the fault. Otherwise, there is

296 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

a risk that the fault situation in one part of the feeding system can de-energize the
whole system connected to the LV side.

GUID-1A2BD0AD-B217-46F4-A6B4-6FC6E6256EB3 V2 EN

Figure 163: Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional IEDs

DPHxPDOC can be used for parallel operating transformer applications. In these

applications, there is a possibility that the fault current can also be fed from the LV-
side up to the HV-side. Therefore, the transformer is also equipped with directional
overcurrent protection.

GUID-74662396-1BAD-4AC2-ADB6-F4A8B3341860 V2 EN

Figure 164: Overcurrent protection of parallel operating transformers

Closed ring network topology

The closed ring network topology is used in applications where electricity distribution
for the consumers is secured during network fault situations. The power is fed at least
from two directions which means that the current direction can be varied. The time
grading between the network level stages is challenging without unnecessary delays
in the time settings. In this case, it is practical to use the directional overcurrent IEDs
to achieve a selective protection scheme. Directional overcurrent functions can be
used in closed ring applications. The arrows define the operating direction of the

630 series 297

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

directional functionality. The double arrows define the non-directional functionality

where faults can be detected in both directions.

GUID-276A9D62-BD74-4335-8F20-EC1731B58889 V1 EN

Figure 165: Closed ring network topology where feeding lines are protected with
directional overcurrent IEDs

4.1.2.9 Signals
Table 342: DPHLPDOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - 3-phase current group
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - 3-phase voltage group
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

298 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 343: DPHHPDOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - 3-phase current group
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - 3-phase voltage group
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 344: DPHLPDOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operated phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operated phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operated phase C
START BOOLEAN Started signal
ST_A BOOLEAN Started phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Started phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Started phase C
FAULT_DIR INTEGER Detected fault direction, general
FLT_DIR_A INTEGER Detected fault direction, phase A
FLT_DIR_B INTEGER Detected fault direction, phase B
FLT_DIR_C INTEGER Detected fault direction, phase C

Table 345: DPHHPDOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operated phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operated phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operated phase C
START BOOLEAN Started signal
ST_A BOOLEAN Started phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Started phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Started phase C
FAULT_DIR INTEGER Detected fault direction, general
FLT_DIR_A INTEGER Detected fault direction, phase A
FLT_DIR_B INTEGER Detected fault direction, phase B
FLT_DIR_C INTEGER Detected fault direction, phase C

630 series 299

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.1.2.10 Settings
Table 346: DPHLPDOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode
Forward
Reverse
Start value 0.05 - 5.00 pu 0.01 0.05 Start value
Characteristic angle -179 - 180 Deg 1 0 Characteristic angle
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Operate delay time 0.04 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.04 Operate delay time

Table 347: DPHLPDOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pol quantity Pos. seq. volt. - - Cross Pol Reference quantity used to determine
Self pol fault direction
Neg. seq. volt.
Cross Pol
Max forward angle 45 - 135 Deg 5 90 Maximum phase angle in forward
direction
Min forward angle 45 - 135 Deg 5 90 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Max reverse angle 45 - 135 Deg 5 90 Maximum phase angle in reverse
direction
Min reverse angle 45 - 135 Deg 5 90 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset

300 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 348: DPHLPDOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Num of start phases 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2 out of 3 activation
3 out of 3

Table 349: DPHLPDOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Measurement mode RMS - - DFT Selects used current measurement mode
DFT
Peak-to-Peak
Min operate current 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current to allow
directional criteria
Min operate voltage 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage to allow
directional criteria
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Voltage Mem time 0 - 3000 ms 1 40 Voltage memory time
Allow Non Dir Not allowed - - Not allowed Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir
Allowed info is invalid

Table 350: DPHHPDOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode
Forward
Reverse
Start value 0.10 - 40.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Start value
Characteristic angle -179 - 180 Deg 1 0 Characteristic angle
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Table continues on next page

630 series 301

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
Operate delay time 0.04 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.04 Operate delay time

Table 351: DPHHPDOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pol quantity Pos. seq. volt. - - Cross Pol Reference quantity used to determine
Self pol fault direction
Neg. seq. volt.
Cross Pol
Max forward angle 45 - 135 Deg 5 90 Maximum phase angle in forward
direction
Min forward angle 45 - 135 Deg 5 90 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Max reverse angle 45 - 135 Deg 5 90 Maximum phase angle in reverse
direction
Min reverse angle 45 - 135 Deg 5 90 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset

Table 352: DPHHPDOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Num of start phases 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2 out of 3 activation
3 out of 3

Table 353: DPHHPDOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Measurement mode RMS - - DFT Selects used current measurement mode
DFT
Peak-to-Peak
Min operate current 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current to allow
directional criteria
Min operate voltage 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage to allow
directional criteria
Table continues on next page

302 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Voltage Mem time 0 - 3000 ms 1 40 Voltage memory time
Allow Non Dir Not allowed - - Not allowed Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir
Allowed info is invalid

4.1.2.11 Measured values

Table 354: DPHLPDOC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase C
I_ANGL_A REAL 0 Current phase angle phase A
I_ANGL_B REAL 0 Current phase angle phase B
I_ANGL_C REAL 0 Current phase angle phase C
I_RMS_A REAL 0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase C
I_PTOP_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase A
I_PTOP_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase B
I_PTOP_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase C
I2_AMPL REAL 0 Negative phase sequence current amplitude
I2_ANGL REAL 0 Negative phase sequence current angle
U_AMPL_A REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-ground voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_B REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-ground voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_C REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-ground voltage amplitude
U_ANGL_A REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-ground voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_B REAL 0 Polarizing phase-toground voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_C REAL 0 Polarizing phase-toground voltage phase angle
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
Table continues on next page

630 series 303

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

U_AMPL_CA REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
U_ANGL_AB REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_BC REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_CA REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage phase angle
U1_AMPL REAL 0 Polarizing positive sequence voltage amplitude
U1_ANGL REAL 0 Polarizing positive sequence voltage phase angle
U2_AMPL REAL 0 Polarizing negative sequence voltage amplitude
U2_ANGL REAL 0 Polarizing negative sequence voltage phase angle
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 355: DPHHPDOC Measured values

Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase C
I_ANGL_A REAL 0 Current phase angle phase A
I_ANGL_B REAL 0 Current phase angle phase B
I_ANGL_C REAL 0 Current phase angle phase C
I_RMS_A REAL 0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase C
I_PTOP_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase A
I_PTOP_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase B
I_PTOP_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase C
I_PEAK_A REAL 0 Current peak magnitude phase A
I_PEAK_B REAL 0 Current peak magnitude phase B
I_PEAK_C REAL 0 Current peak magnitude phase C
I2_AMPL REAL 0 Negative phase sequence current amplitude
I2_ANGL REAL 0 Negative phase sequence current angle
U_AMPL_A REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-ground voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_B REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-ground voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_C REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-ground voltage amplitude
U_ANGL_A REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-ground voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_B REAL 0 Polarizing phase-toground voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_C REAL 0 Polarizing phase-toground voltage phase angle
Table continues on next page

304 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

U_AMPL_AB REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
U_ANGL_AB REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_BC REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_CA REAL 0 Polarizing phase-to-phase voltage phase angle
U1_AMPL REAL 0 Polarizing positive sequence voltage amplitude
U1_ANGL REAL 0 Polarizing positive sequence voltage phase angle
U2_AMPL REAL 0 Polarizing negative sequence voltage amplitude
U2_ANGL REAL 0 Polarizing negative sequence voltage phase angle
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

4.1.2.12 Monitored data

Table 356: DPHLPDOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase A
1=TRUE
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase B
1=TRUE
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase C
1=TRUE
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase A
1=TRUE
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase B
1=TRUE
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase C
1=TRUE
FLT_DIR_A INTEGER 3=Both - Detected fault direction,
0=Unknown phase A
1=Forward
2=Backward
FLT_DIR_B INTEGER 3=Both - Detected fault direction,
0=Unknown phase B
1=Forward
2=Backward
FLT_DIR_C INTEGER 3=Both - Detected fault direction,
0=Unknown phase C
1=Forward
2=Backward
Table continues on next page

630 series 305

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

DIRECTION INTEGER 3=Both - Direction information,
0=Unknown general
1=Forward
2=Backward
DIR_A INTEGER 3=Both - Direction information,
0=Unknown phase A
1=Forward
2=Backward
DIR_B INTEGER 3=Both - Direction information,
0=Unknown phase B
1=Forward
2=Backward
DIR_C INTEGER 3=Both - Direction information,
0=Unknown phase C
1=Forward
2=Backward
ANGLE_A REAL - deg Calculated angle
difference, phase A
ANGLE_B REAL - deg Calculated angle
difference, phase B
ANGLE_C REAL - deg Calculated angle
difference, phase C
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time
INVAL_CRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Invalid curve parameters
1=TRUE

Table 357: DPHHPDOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase A
1=TRUE
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase B
1=TRUE
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase C
1=TRUE
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase A
1=TRUE
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase B
1=TRUE
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase C
1=TRUE
FLT_DIR_A INTEGER 3=Both - Detected fault direction,
0=Unknown phase A
1=Forward
2=Backward
FLT_DIR_B INTEGER 3=Both - Detected fault direction,
0=Unknown phase B
1=Forward
2=Backward
Table continues on next page

306 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

FLT_DIR_C INTEGER 3=Both - Detected fault direction,
0=Unknown phase C
1=Forward
2=Backward
DIRECTION INTEGER 3=Both - Direction information,
0=Unknown general
1=Forward
2=Backward
DIR_A INTEGER 3=Both - Direction information,
0=Unknown phase A
1=Forward
2=Backward
DIR_B INTEGER 3=Both - Direction information,
0=Unknown phase B
1=Forward
2=Backward
DIR_C INTEGER 3=Both - Direction information,
0=Unknown phase C
1=Forward
2=Backward
ANGLE_A REAL - deg Calculated angle
difference, phase A
ANGLE_B REAL - deg Calculated angle
difference, phase B
ANGLE_C REAL - deg Calculated angle
difference, phase C
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time
INVAL_CRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Invalid curve parameters
1=TRUE

4.1.2.13 Technical data

Table 358: DPHxPDOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

DPHLPDOC Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un
Phase angle:
±2°
DPHHPDOC Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In (at currents in
the range of 0.1…10 × In)
±5.0% of the set value (at currents in the range of
10…40 × In)
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un
Phase angle:
±2°
Table continues on next page

630 series 307

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Characteristic Value
Start time1)2) IFault = 2.0 × set Start Typically 24 ms (±15 ms)
value
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms3)
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression
P-to-P+backup: No suppression

1) Measurement mode = default (depends of stage), current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, fault current
in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5...20

4.1.2.14 Technical revision history

Table 359: DPHHPDOC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting

Table 360: DPHLPDOC technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting

4.1.3 Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection PHPVOC

4.1.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage-dependent overcurrent PHPVOC I(U)> 51V
protection

308 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.3.2 Function block

PHPVOC
I3P OPERATE
U3P OPR_A
BLOCK OPR_B
BLK_OPR OPR_C
BLK_ST START
FR_TIMER ST_A
ENA_MULT ST_B
ENA_LOW_LIM ST_C

GUID-0913D431-E1AD-49F5-AA2B-C768509AEA48 V1 EN

Figure 166: Function block

4.1.3.3 Functionality

The voltage-dependent overcurrent protection function PHPVOC is used for single-

phase, two-phase or three-phase voltage-dependent time overcurrent protection of
generators against overcurrent and short circuit conditions.

PHPVOC starts when the input phase current exceeds a limit which is dynamically
calculated based on the measured terminal voltages. The operating characteristics can
be selected to be either inverse definite minimum time IDMT or definite time DT.

PHPVOC contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of PHPVOC can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 309

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

I_A
OPERATE
I_B Phase Timer
I3P Level OPR_A
I_C selection
detector t OPR_B
logic
ENA_MULT OPR_C

U_AB
START
U_BC Effective t
U3P ST_A
U_CA start value
ST_B
calculator
ENA_LOW_LIM ST_C

BLOCK
BLK_OPR
BLK_ST
FR_TIMER

GUID-84895960-777E-4074-9A9C-F448EC1859AF V1 EN

Figure 167: Functional module diagram

Effective start value calculator

The normal starting current above which the overcurrent protection starts is set
through the Start value setting. The effective start value of the current may need to be
changed during certain conditions like magnetizing inrush or when the terminal
voltages drop due to a fault. Hence, the effective start value calculator module
dynamically calculates the effective start value above which the overcurrent
protection starts.

Four methods of calculating the effective start value are provided in PHPVOC. These
can be chosen with the Control mode setting to be either "Voltage control", "Input
control", "Volt & Input Ctrl" or "No Volt dependency" mode.

The calculated effective start value per phase, EFF_ST_VAL_A, EFF_ST_VAL_B,

EFF_ST_VAL_C, is available in the monitored data view and is used by the level
detector module.

All three phase-to-phase voltages should be available for the function

to operate properly.

Voltage control mode

In the voltage control mode, the effective start value is calculated based on the
magnitude of input voltages U_AB, U_BC and U_CA. The voltage dependency is
phase sensitive, which means that the magnitude of one input voltage controls the start
value of only the corresponding phase, that is, the magnitude of voltage inputs U_AB,
U_BC and U_CA independently control the current start values of phases A, B and C
respectively.

Two voltage control characteristics, voltage step and voltage slope, can be achieved
with the Voltage high limit and Voltage low limit settings.

310 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The voltage step characteristic is achieved with the Voltage high limit setting being
equal to the Voltage low limit setting. The effective start value is calculated based on
the equations.

If U < Voltage high limit :

Effective start value = Sttart value low

GUID-F9CE3CBD-A7DA-4009-AE6A-B717E5646969 V1 EN (Equation 13)

If U ≥ Voltage high limit :

Effective start value = Starrt value

GUID-FBC17FA1-EF07-4458-9E39-F3412625CF0E V1 EN (Equation 14)

Here U represents the measured input voltage. This voltage step characteristic is
graphically represented.

Effective
start value

Start value

Start value low

Voltage high limit = U

Voltage low limit
GUID-76A0B2B9-65AD-43E8-B53F-FB8BF91176A2 V1 EN

Figure 168: Effective start value for voltage step characteristic

The voltage slope characteristic is achieved by assigning different values to Voltage

high limit and Voltage low limit. The effective start value calculation is based on the
equations.

If U < Voltage low limit :

Effective start value = Sta
art value low

GUID-2CCB4AD5-F14A-403C-82AF-986D4D043B29 V1 EN (Equation 15)

630 series 311

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

If Voltage low limit ≤ U < Voltage high limit :

 Start value − Start valuelow  
Effective start value = Start value −   × (Voltagehighlimit − U)
 Voltagehighlimit − Voltagelow limit  
GUID-75B914AC-7E3A-40EF-961D-BFA28818A6D2 V1 EN (Equation 16)

If U ≥ Voltage high limit :

Effective start value = Startt value

GUID-C7193472-743B-460D-8770-B7C603FA142B V1 EN (Equation 17)

Here U represents the measured input voltage. The voltage slope characteristic is
graphically represented.

Starting
current

Start value

Start value low

Voltage Voltage
low limit high limit
U
GUID-250F64D5-57FF-402F-9184-DE9F0D890A07 V1 EN

Figure 169: Effective start value or voltage slope characteristic

To achieve the voltage slope characteristics, Voltage high limit must

always be set to a value greater than Voltage low limit.
If Voltage high limit is lesser than Voltage low limit,the voltage step
characteristic is active with Voltage low limit being the cutoff value.

The value of the setting Start value should always be greater than the
setting Start value low. Otherwise, Start value low is used as the
effective start value.

312 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

External input control mode

The external input control mode is used to enable voltage control from an external
application. If Control mode is set to the "Input Control" mode, the effective start
value for all phases is influenced by the status of the binary input ENA_LOW_LIM.
If ENA _ LOW _ LIM isTRUE :
Effective start value = Start value low
GUID-68DEBF0C-1052-41D3-9803-7F474B47D11D V1 EN (Equation 18)

If ENA _ LOW _ LIM is FALSE :

Effective start value = Start value
GUID-9D97D450-733B-46E1-A32A-F2FCC502FC2A V1 EN (Equation 19)

Voltage and input control mode

If Control mode is set to "Voltage and input Ctrl", both the "Voltage control" and
"Input control" modes are used. However, the input control functionality is dominant
over the voltage control mode when ENA_LOW_LIM is active.

No voltage dependency mode

When Control mode is set to "No Volt dependency", the effective start value has no
voltage dependency and the function acts as a normal time overcurrent function with
effective start value being equal to the Start value setting.

Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the calculated effective start
value. If the measured value exceeds the calculated effective start value, the level
detector reports the exceeding value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT
input is active, the effective start value is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.

Do not set the multiplier Start value Mult setting higher than
necessary. If the value is too high, the function may not operate at all
during an inrush followed by a fault, no matter how severe the fault is.

The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
INRPHAR is connected to the ENA_MULT input.

Phase selection logic

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects
the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If the phase
information matches the Num of start phases setting, the phase selection logic
activates the timer module.

Timer
Once activated, the Timer module activates the START output. The output signals
ST_A, ST_B and ST_C are used to indicate which of the phases are started.

630 series 313

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics
are according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of
Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time
curve, the OPERATE output is activated. The outputs OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C are
used to indicate which of the phases are operated.

When the user programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time
characteristics are defined by the settings Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B,
Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operating
delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the timer in
the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset
curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, the reset
timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When the IDMT curves are
selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or
"Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the
reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time
setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current
during the drop-off situation. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer
has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the
drop-off situation.

The Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum desired operating time for
IDMT operation. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

Though the Time multiplier and Minimum operate time settings are
common for different IDMT curves, the operating time essentially
depends upon the type of IDMT curve chosen.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. This output is
available in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK is used to completely block the module. Activating the
BLOCK input deactivates all binary outputs and resets the internal timers. The binary
input BLK_ST is used to block the activation of the START signal. The binary input
BLK_OPR is used to block the OPERATE signal. The operation timer counting can be
frozen on the prevailing value by activation of the FR_TIMER input.

314 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.3.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.1.3.6 Application

The voltage-dependent overcurrent protection is used as a backup protection for the

generators and system from damage due to the phase faults which are not cleared by
primary protection and associated breakers.

In case of a short circuit, the sustained fault current of the generator, determined by the
machine synchronous reactance, could be well below the full-load current. Also, if the
generator excitation power is fed from the generator terminals, a voltage drop due to
a short circuit also leads to low fault current. Hence, the primary protection, like
normal overcurrent protection, might not detect this kind of fault situation. In some
cases, the automatic voltage regulator AVR can help maintain high fault currents by
controlling the generator excitation system. But if the AVR is out of service or if there
is an internal fault in the operation of AVR, the low fault currents can go unnoticed and
therefore a voltage-depended overcurrent protection should be used for backup.

Two voltage control characteristics, voltage step and voltage slope, are available in
PHPVOC. The choice is made based on the system conditions and the level of
protection to be provided.

The voltage step characteristic is applied to generators used in industrial systems.

Under closeup fault conditions when the generator terminal voltages drop below the
settable threshold value, a new start value of the current well below the normal load
current is selected. The control voltage setting should be such that PHPVOC does not
trip under the highest loading conditions to which the system can be subjected.
Choosing too high a value for the control voltage may allow an undesired operation of
the function during wide-area disturbances. When the terminal voltage of the
generator is above the control voltage value, normal start value is used. This ensures
that PHPVOC does not operate during normal overloads when the generator terminal
voltages are maintained near the normal levels.

Voltage slope characteristic is often used as an alternative to impedance protection on

small to medium (5-150 MVA) size generators to provide backup to the differential
protection. Other applications of the voltage slope characteristic protection exist in
networks to provide better coordination and fault detection than plain overcurrent
protection. The voltage slope method provides an improved sensitivity of overcurrent
operation by making the overcurrent start value proportional to the terminal voltage.
The current start value varies correspondingly with the generator terminal voltages
between the set voltage high limit and voltage low limit, thus ensuring the operation
of PHPVOC despite of the drop in fault current value.

630 series 315

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The operation of PHPVOC should be time-graded with respect to the main protection
scheme to ensure that PHPVOC does not operate before the main protection.

4.1.3.7 Signals
Table 361: PHPVOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer count
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier
ENA_LOW_LIM BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for voltage dependent lower start
value

Table 362: PHPVOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate signal for phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate signal for phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate signal for phase C
START BOOLEAN Started
ST_A BOOLEAN Start signal for phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Start signal for phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Start signal for phase C

4.1.3.8 Settings
Table 363: PHPVOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05 - 5.00 pu 0.01 0.05 Start value
Start value low 0.05 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.05 Lower start value based on voltage control
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Voltage high limit 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 1.00 Voltage high limit for voltage control
Voltage low limit 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 1.00 Voltage low limit for voltage control
Table continues on next page

316 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC / ANSI curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Operate delay time 0.04 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.04 Operate delay time

Table 364: PHPVOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset

Table 365: PHPVOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On
Num of start phases 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2 out of 3 activation
3 out of 3

Table 366: PHPVOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Measurement mode RMS - - DFT Current measurement mode
DFT
Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Table continues on next page

630 series 317

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Control mode Voltage control - - Voltage control Type of control
Input control
Voltage & Input Ctrl
No Volt
dependency
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 0.04 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.04 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

4.1.3.9 Measured values

Table 367: PHPVOC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Current amptitude (DFT) phase 1
I_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Current amptitude (DFT) phase 2
I_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Current amptitude (DFT) phase 3
I_RMS_A REAL 0.0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase 1
I_RMS_B REAL 0.0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase 2
I_RMS_C REAL 0.0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase 3
I_PTOP_A REAL 0.0 Current amptitude (PTOP) phase 1
I_PTOP_B REAL 0.0 Current amptitude (PTOP) phase 2
I_PTOP_C REAL 0.0 Current amptitude (PTOP) phase 3
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.0 Voltage amplitude (DFT) phase to phase AB
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0.0 Voltage amplitude (DFT) phase to phase BC
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0.0 Voltage amplitude (DFT) phase to phase CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer count
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier
ENA_LOW_LIM BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for voltage dependent lower start
value

318 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.3.10 Monitored data

Table 368: PHPVOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for phase
1=TRUE A
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for phase
1=TRUE B
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for phase
1=TRUE C
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal for phase A
1=TRUE
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal for phase B
1=TRUE
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal for phase C
1=TRUE
EFF_ST_VAL_A REAL - A Effective start value for
phase A
EFF_ST_VAL_B REAL - A Effective start value for
phase B
EFF_ST_VAL_C REAL - A Effective start value for
phase C
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration

4.1.3.11 Technical data

Table 369: PHPVOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time 1)2) Typically 20 ms (±10 ms)

Reset time <45 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the set value of ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Measurement mode = default, current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, fault current in one phase with
nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements.
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact.

630 series 319

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.1.3.12 Technical revision history

Table 370: PHPVOC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Internal improvements

4.1.4 Three-phase thermal overload protection for overhead lines

and cables T1PTTR

4.1.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase thermal overload T1PTTR 3lth> 49F
protection for overhead lines and cables

4.1.4.2 Function block

A070658 V3 EN

Figure 170: Function block

4.1.4.3 Functionality

The increased utilization of power systems closer to the thermal limits has generated
a need for a thermal overload function also for power lines.

A thermal overload is in some cases not detected by other protection functions, and the
introduction of the thermal overload function T1PTTR allows the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.

An alarm level gives an early warning to allow operators to take action before the line
trips. The early warning is based on the three-phase current measuring function using
a thermal model with first order thermal loss with the settable time constant. If the
temperature rise continues the function will operate based on the thermal model of the
line.

Re-energizing of the line after the thermal overload operation can be inhibited during
the time the cooling of the line is in progress. The cooling of the line is estimated by
the thermal model.

320 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of three-phase thermal protection can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

I_A
Max START
I_B Temperature
I3P current
I_C estimator OPERATE
selector
Thermal
ALARM
counter
ENA_MULT BLK_CLOSE
AMB_TEMP
SENSFLT
BLOCK
BLK_OPR
A080008 V2 EN

Figure 171: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Max current selector

The max current selector of the function continuously checks the highest measured
TRMS phase current value. The selector reports the highest value to the temperature
estimator.

Temperature estimator
The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents
according to the expression:

2
 I 
Θ final =  ⋅ Tref
 I ref 
 
A070780 V2 EN (Equation 20)

I the largest phase current

Iref set Current reference

Tref set Temperature rise

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature rise estimation,
and the ambient temperature value used in the calculation is also available in the
monitored data as TEMP_AMB in degrees. If the final temperature estimation is larger
than the set Maximum temperature, the START output is activated.

630 series 321

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Current reference and Temperature rise setting values are used in the final
temperature estimation together with the ambient temperature. It is suggested to set
these values to the maximum steady state current allowed for the line or cable under
emergency operation for a few hours per years. Current values with the corresponding
conductor temperatures are given in cable manuals. These values are given for
conditions such as ground temperatures, ambient air temperature, the way of cable
laying and ground thermal resistivity.

Thermal counter
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

 ∆t 
−
(
Θn = Θn −1 + Θ final − Θn −1 ⋅  1 − e τ

) 

 
A070781 V2 EN (Equation 21)

Θn calculated present temperature

Θn-1 calculated temperature at previous time step

Θfinal calculated final temperature with actual current

Δt time step between calculation of actual temperature

t thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable), set Time constant

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be given a constant value. The calculated component
temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure.

When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level Alarm value, the output
signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level
Maximum temperature, the OPERATE output is activated. The OPERATE signal pulse
length is fixed to 100 ms

There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current.
This is only calculated if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation
temperature. The value is available in the monitored data view as T_OPERATE in
minutes.

 Θ final − Θoperate 
toperate = −τ ⋅ ln  
 Θ final − Θn 
 
A070782 V2 EN (Equation 22)

Caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout to

reconnect the tripped circuit after operating. The lockout output BLK_CLOSE is
activated at the same time when the OPERATE output is activated and is not reset until
the device temperature has cooled down below the set value of the Reclose
temperature setting. The time to lockout release T_ENA_CLOSE is also calculated

322 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

and is available in the monitored data view in minutes. The Maximum temperature
value must be set at least two degrees above the set value of Reclose temperature.

The time to lockout release is calculated, that is, the calculation of the cooling time to
a set value. The calculated temperature can be reset to its initial value (the Initial
temperature setting) via a control parameter that is located under the clear menu. This
is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated false
temperature level.

 Θ final −Θlockout _ release 

tlockout _ release = −τ ⋅ ln  
 Θ final − Θn 
 

A070783 V3 EN (Equation 23)

Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature.

In some applications, the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This
is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting
the Current multiplier parameter to the number of parallel lines (cables), the actual
current on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option, the
ENA_MULT input must be activated.

The validity of operation of the RTD sensor is obtained from the SENFLT input. In
case of any errors or malfunctioning in the RTD output, T1PTTR takes the temperature
value from the Env temperature Set setting.

By setting the Sensor available setting to “Yes,” the external sensor is enabled to
measure the ambient temperature. When Sensor available is set to “No,” the Env
temperature Set setting is used to define the ambient temperature.

The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the Initial
temperature setting parameter. This is done in case the IED is powered up, the
function is turned "Off" and back "On" or reset through the Clear menu. The
temperature is also stored in the nonvolatile memory and restored in case the IED is
restarted.

The thermal time constant of the protected circuit is given in minutes with the Time
constant setting. Please see cable manufacturers manuals for further details.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_OPR can be used to block the operate signals.

4.1.4.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

630 series 323

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.1.4.6 Application

The lines and cables in the power system are constructed for a certain maximum load
current level. If the current exceeds this level, the losses will be higher than expected.
As a consequence, the temperature of the conductors will increase. If the temperature
of the lines and cables reaches too high values, it can cause a risk of damages by, for
example, the following ways:
• The sag of overhead lines can reach an unacceptable value.
• If the temperature of conductors, for example aluminium conductors, becomes
too high, the material will be destroyed.
• In cables the insulation can be damaged as a consequence of overtemperature,
and therefore phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults can occur.

In stressed situations in the power system, the lines and cables may be required to be
overloaded for a limited time. This should be done without any risk for the above-
mentioned risks.

The thermal overload protection provides information that makes temporary

overloading of cables and lines possible. The thermal overload protection estimates
the conductor temperature continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal
model of the line/cable that is based on the current measurement.

If the temperature of the protected object reaches a set warning level, a signal is given
to the operator. This enables actions in the power system to be done before dangerous
temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the maximum
allowed temperature value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected line.

4.1.4.7 Signals
Table 371: T1PTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
AMB_TEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate output
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

324 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 372: T1PTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator. To inhibit reclose

4.1.4.8 Settings
Table 373: T1PTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Alarm value 20.0 - 150.0 Deg 0.1 80.0 Temperature level for start (alarm)
Env temperature Set -50 - 100 Deg 1 40 Ambient temperature used when Sensor
available is set to Off
Maximum temperature 20.0 - 200.0 Deg 0.1 90.0 Temperature level for operate
Reclose temperature 20.0 - 150.0 Deg 0.1 70.0 Temperature for reset of block reclose
after operate
Temperature rise 0.0 - 200.0 Deg 0.1 75.0 End temperature rise above ambient
Time constant 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.

Table 374: T1PTTR Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Current reference 0.05 - 4.00 pu 0.01 1.00 The load current leading to Temperature
raise temperature
Current multiplier 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for parallel lines

Table 375: T1PTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Sensor available No - - No External temperature sensor available
Yes

Table 376: T1PTTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Initial temperature -50.0 - 100.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

630 series 325

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.1.4.9 Measured values

Table 377: T1PTTR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase C
AMB_TEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate output
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

4.1.4.10 Monitored data

Table 378: T1PTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal
1=TRUE
T_OPERATE INTEGER - Minutes Estimated time to
operate
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal
1=TRUE
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal
1=TRUE
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Thermal overload
1=TRUE indicator to inhibit
reclose
T_ENA_CLOSE INTEGER - - Estimated time to
reset of block
reclose
TEMP REAL - - Calculated
temperature of
the device
TEMP_AMB REAL - - Ambient
temperature used
in the calculations
TEMP_RL REAL - - Temperature
relative to operate
temperature

326 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.4.11 Technical data

Table 379: T1PTTR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

Current measurement: ±0.5% of the set value or

±0.002 × In (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00
× In)

Operate time accuracy1) ±2.0% or ±0.50 s

1) Overload current > 1.2 × Operate level temperature, Current reference > 0.50 pu

4.1.4.12 Technical revision history

Table 380: T1PTTR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Output TEMP_RL is added
Internal improvements

4.1.5 Three-phase thermal overload protection, two time constants

T2PTTR

4.1.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase thermal overload T2PTTR 3Ith>T/G 49T/G
protection, two time constants

4.1.5.2 Function block

GUID-3BBE6F98-B838-4323-A7AF-05DC53B68F4A V1 EN

Figure 172: Function block

4.1.5.3 Functionality

The three-phase thermal overload, two time constant protection function T2PTTR
protects the transformer mainly from short-time overloads. The transformer is

630 series 327

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

protected from long-time overloads with the oil temperature detector included in its
equipment.

The alarm signal gives an early warning to allow the operators to take action before the
transformer trips. The early warning is based on the three-phase current measuring
function using a thermal model with two settable time constants. If the temperature
rise continues, T2PTTR operates based on the thermal model of the transformer.

After a thermal overload operation, the re-energizing of the transformer is inhibited

during the transformer cooling time. The transformer cooling is estimated with a
thermal model.

4.1.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of three-phase thermal overload, two time constant protection can be
described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the
next sections.

GUID-AFAF9BF2-9F2B-4626-BF07-7D41BF61801F V1 EN

Figure 173: Functional module diagram. I_A, I_B and I_C represent phase
currents.

Max current selector

The max current selector of the function continuously checks the highest measured
TRMS phase current value. The selector reports the highest value to the thermal
counter.

Temperature estimator
The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents
according to the expression:

328 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

2
 I 
Θ final =  ⋅ Tref
 I ref 
 
GUID-06DE6459-E94A-4FC7-8357-CA58988CEE97 V2 EN (Equation 24)

I highest measured phase current

Iref the set value of the Current reference setting

Tref the set value of the Temperature rise setting (temperature rise (°C) with the steady-state current Iref

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature rise estimation,
and the ambient temperature value used in the calculation is also available in the
monitored data as TEMP_AMB in degrees. If the total value of temperature is higher
than the set operating temperature level, the START output is activated.

The Current reference setting is a steady-state current that gives the steady-state end
temperature value Temperature rise. It gives a setting value corresponding to the rated
power of the transformer.

The Temperature rise setting is used when the value of the reference temperature rise
corresponds to the Current reference value. The temperature values with the
corresponding transformer load currents are usually given by transformer
manufacturers.

Thermal counter
T2PTTR applies the thermal model of two time constants for temperature
measurement. The temperature rise in degrees Celsius (°C) is calculated from the
highest of the three-phase currents according to the expression:

  
2   −  
∆t
 
2   −
∆t 
I  ⋅  1 − e τ 1  + (1 − p ) ⋅  I
∆Θ =  p *   * Tref  ⋅ Tref  ⋅ 1 − e τ 2 
  I ref       I ref    
           
GUID-27A879A9-AF94-4BC3-BAA1-501189F6DE0C V2 EN (Equation 25)

ΔΘ calculated temperature rise (°C) in transformer

I measured phase current with the highest TRMS value
Iref the set value of the Current reference setting (rated current of the protected object)
Tref the set value of the Temperature rise setting (temperature rise setting (°C) with the steady-state
current Iref)

p the set value of the p-factor setting (weighting factor for the short time constant)
Δt time step between the calculation of the actual temperature
t1 the set value of the Short time constant setting (the short heating / cooling time constant)

t2 the set value of the Long time constant setting (the long heating / cooling time constant)

The warming and cooling following the two time-constant thermal curve is a
characteristic of transformers. The thermal time constants of the protected

630 series 329

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

transformer are given in seconds with the Short time constant and Long time constant
settings. The Short time constant setting describes the warming of the transformer
with respect to windings. The Long time constant setting describes the warming of the
transformer with respect to the oil. Using the two time-constant model, the IED is able
to follow both fast and slow changes in the temperature of the protected object.

The p-factor setting is the weighting factor between Short time constant τ1 and Long
time constant τ2. The higher the value of the p-factor setting, the larger is the share of
the steep part of the heating curve. When p=1, only Short-time constant is used. When
p = 0, only Long time constant is used.

GUID-E040FFF4-7FE3-4736-8E5F-D96DB1F1B16B V1 EN

Figure 174: Effect of the Weighting factor p factor and the difference between the
two time constants and one time constant models

The actual temperature of the transformer is calculated by adding the ambient

temperature to the calculated temperature.

Θ = ∆Θ + Θ amb
GUID-77E49346-66D2-4CAB-A764-E81D6F382E74 V2 EN (Equation 26)

Θ temperature in transformer (°C)

ΔΘ calculated temperature rise (°C) in transformer
Θamb set Env temperature Set

The validity of operation of the RTD sensor is obtained from the SENFLT input. In
case of any errors or malfunctioning in the RTD output, T2PTTR takes the
temperature value from the Env temperature Set setting.

330 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

By setting the Sensor available setting to "Yes," the external sensor is enabled to
measure the ambient temperature. When Sensor available is set to "No," the Env
temperature Set setting is used to define the ambient temperature.

The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the Initial
temperature setting. This is done when the IED is powered up, the function is turned
off and back on or it is reset through the Clear menu or through the RESET input. The
temperature is stored in a nonvolatile memory and restored if the IED is restarted.

The Max temperature setting defines the maximum temperature of the transformer in
degrees Celsius (°C). The value of the Max temperature setting is usually given by
transformer manufacturers. The actual alarm, operating and lockout temperatures for
T2PTTR are given as a percentage value of the Max temperature setting.

When the transformer temperature reaches the alarm level defined with the Alarm
temperature setting, the ALARM output signal is set. When the transformer
temperature reaches the trip level value defined with the Operate temperature setting,
the OPERATE output is activated. The OPERATE output is deactivated when the value
of the measured current falls below 10 percent of the Current Reference value or the
calculated temperature value falls below Operate temperature.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current.
T_OPERATE is only calculated if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature. The value is available in the monitored data view.

After operating, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit due to the
thermal overload protection function. The BLK_CLOSE lockout output is activated
when the device temperature is above the Reclose temperature lockout release
temperature setting value. The time to lockout release T_ENA_CLOSE is also
calculated. The value is available in the monitored data view.

4.1.5.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.1.5.6 Application

The transformers in a power system are constructed for a certain maximum load
current level. If the current exceeds this level, the losses are higher than expected. This
results in a rise in transformer temperature. If the temperature rise is too high, the
equipment is damaged:

630 series 331

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

• Insulation within the transformer ages faster, which in turn increases the risk of
internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults.
• Possible hotspots forming within the transformer degrade the quality of the
transformer oil.

During stressed situations in power systems, it is required to overload the transformers

for a limited time without any risks. The thermal overload protection provides
information and makes temporary overloading of transformers possible.

The permissible load level of a power transformer is highly dependent on the

transformer cooling system. The two main principles are:
• ONAN: The air is naturally circulated to the coolers without fans, and the oil is
naturally circulated without pumps.
• OFAF: The coolers have fans to force air for cooling, and pumps to force the
circulation of the transformer oil.

The protection has several parameter sets located in the setting groups, for example
one for a non-forced cooling and one for a forced cooling situation. Both the
permissive steady-state loading level as well as the thermal time constant are
influenced by the transformer cooling system. The active setting group can be
changed by a parameter, or through a binary input if the binary input is enabled for it.
This feature can be used for transformers where forced cooling is taken out of
operation or extra cooling is switched on. The parameters can also be changed when
a fan or pump fails to operate.

The thermal overload protection continuously estimates the internal heat content, that
is, the temperature of the transformer. This estimation is made by using a thermal
model of the transformer which is based on the current measurement.

If the heat content of the protected transformer reaches the set alarm level, a signal is
given to the operator. This enables the action that needs to be taken in the power
systems before the temperature reaches a high value. If the temperature continues to
rise to the trip value, the protection initiates the trip of the protected transformer.

After the trip, the transformer needs to cool down to a temperature level where the
transformer can be taken into service again. T2PTTR continues to estimate the heat
content of the transformer during this cooling period using a set cooling time constant.
The energizing of the transformer is blocked until the heat content is reduced to the set
level.

The thermal curve of two time constants is typical for a transformer. The thermal time
constants of the protected transformer are given in seconds with the Short time
constant and Long time constant settings. If the manufacturer does not state any other
value, the Long time constant can be set to 4920 s (82 minutes) for a distribution
transformer and 7260 s (121 minutes) for a supply transformer. The corresponding
Short time constants are 306 s (5.1 minutes) and 456 s (7.6 minutes).

332 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

If the manufacturer of the power transformer has stated only one, that is, single time
constant, it can be converted to two time constants. The single time constant is also
used by itself if the p-factor setting is set to zero and the time constant value is set to
the value of the Long time constant setting. The thermal image corresponds to the one
time constant model in that case.
Table 381: Conversion table between one and two time constants
Single time constant Short time constant (min) Long time constant (min) p-factor
(min)
10 1.1 17 0.4
15 1.6 25 0.4
20 2.1 33 0.4
25 2.6 41 0.4
30 3.1 49 0.4
35 3.6 58 0.4
40 4.1 60 0.4
45 4.8 75 0.4
50 5.1 82 0.4
55 5.6 90 0.4
60 6.1 98 0.4
65 6.7 107 0.4
70 7.2 115 0.4
75 7.8 124 0.4

The default Max temperature setting is 105°C. This value is chosen since even though
the IEC 60076-7 standard recommends 98°C as the maximum allowable temperature
in long-time loading, the standard also states that a transformer can withstand the
emergency loading for weeks or even months, which may produce the winding
temperature of 140°C. Therefore, 105°C is a safe maximum temperature value for a
transformer if the Max temperature setting value is not given by the transformer
manufacturer.

4.1.5.7 Signals
Table 382: T2PTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
AMB_TEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate output
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

630 series 333

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 383: T2PTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal
START BOOLEAN Signal indicating current that will raise temperature
above operate level if prolonged
ALARM BOOLEAN The calculated temperature is over Alarm level
Temperature limit
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator. To inhibite reclose.

4.1.5.8 Settings
Table 384: T2PTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Temperature rise 0.0 - 200.0 Deg 0.1 78.0 Temperature reference for thermal model
Env temperature Set -50.0 - 100.0 Deg 0.1 40.0 Ambient temperature used when Sensor
available is set to Off
Max temperature 0.0 - 200.0 Deg 0.1 105.0 Maximum temperature allowed for the
transformer
Alarm temperature 40.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 90.0 Alarm temperature, percent value
Operate tempetature 80.0 - 120.0 % 0.1 100.0 Operate temperature, percent value
Reclose temperature 40.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 60.0 Reclose temperature after operate,
percent value
Weighting factor p 0.00 - 1.00 - 0.01 0.40 Weighting factor of the short time constant
Short time constant 60 - 60000 s 1 450 Short time constant in seconds
Long time constant 60 - 60000 s 1 7200 Long time constant in seconds

Table 385: T2PTTR Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Current reference 0.05 - 4.00 pu 0.01 1.00 The load current leading to Temperature
rise temperature

Table 386: T2PTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On
Sensor available No - - No External temperature sensor availiable
Yes

334 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 387: T2PTTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Initial temperature 0.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Initial temperature, percent value

4.1.5.9 Measured values

Table 388: T2PTTR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase C
AMB_TEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate output
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

4.1.5.10 Monitored data

Table 389: T2PTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal
1=TRUE
T_OPERATE INTEGER - s Estimated time to operate
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal indicating current
1=TRUE that will raise
temperature above
operate level if prolonged
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - The calculated
1=TRUE temperature is over
Alarm level Temperature
limit
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Thermal overload
1=TRUE indicator. To inhibite
reclose.
T_ENA_CLOSE INTEGER - s Estimated time to
deactivate BLK_CLOSE
in seconds
Table continues on next page

630 series 335

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

TEMP REAL - - The calculated
temperature of the
protected object
TEMP_AMB REAL - - Ambient temperature
used in the calculations
TEMP_RL REAL - - The calculated
temperature of the
protected object relative
to the operate level

4.1.5.11 Technical data

Table 390: T2PTTR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or

±0.002 × In (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00
× In)

Operate time accuracy1) ±2.0% or ±1000 ms

1) Overload current > 1.2 × Operate level temperature, Current reference > 0.50 pu

4.1.5.12 Technical revision history

Table 391: T2PTTR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Change in function IEC 60617 and ANSI symbol

4.1.6 Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC

4.1.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC Ist> 51LR

4.1.6.2 Function block

GUID-41BFFE63-0330-4C85-B43E-E63A80CC2859 V1 EN

Figure 175: Function block

336 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.6.3 Functionality

The motor load jam protection JAMPTOC is used for protecting the motor in stall or
mechanical jam situations during the running state.

When the motor is started, a separate function is used for the startup protection, and
JAMPTOC is normally blocked during the startup period. When the motor has passed
the starting phase, JAMPTOC monitors the magnitude of phase currents. The function
starts when the measured current exceeds the breakdown torque level, that is, above
the set limit. The operation characteristic is definite time.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.6.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the motor load jam protection can be described with a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-2CA97EA5-09E4-40FE-8F99-ED9251BC50C0 V1 EN

Figure 176: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared to the set Start value. The TRMS values
of the phase currents are considered for the level detection. The timer module is
enabled if at least two of the measured phase currents exceed the set Start value.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output and runs until the Operate delay
time setting value has elapsed. The time characteristics is according to DT. When the
operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time, the OPERATE output
is activated.

When the timer has elapsed but the motor stall condition still exists, the OPERATE
output remains active until the phase currents values drop below the Start value, that
is, until the stall condition persists. If the drop-off situation occurs while the operating
time is still counting, the reset timer is activated. If the drop-off time exceeds the set
Reset delay time, the operating timer is reset.

630 series 337

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The blocking functionality contains three binary inputs. The BLOCK input blocks the
operation of the whole function, and the timers are reset. The BLOCK input can be used
to block the protection during a motor start.

The activation of the BLK_ST and BLK_OPR inputs blocks the starting and operating
outputs respectively.

4.1.6.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.1.6.6 Application

The motor protection during stall is primarily needed to protect the motor from
excessive temperature rise, as the motor draws large currents during the stall phase.
This condition causes a temperature rise in the stator windings. Due to reduced speed,
the temperature also rises in the rotor. The rotor temperature rise is more critical when
the motor stops.

The physical and dielectric insulations of the system deteriorate with age and the
deterioration is accelerated by the temperature increase. Insulation life is related to the
time interval during which the insulation is maintained at a given temperature.

An induction motor stalls when the load torque value exceeds the breakdown torque
value, causing the speed to decrease to zero or to some stable operating point well
below the rated speed. This occurs, for example, when the applied shaft load is
suddenly increased and is greater than the producing motor torque due to the bearing
failures. This condition develops a motor current almost equal to the value of the
locked-rotor current.

JAMPTOC is designed to protect the motor in stall or mechanical jam situations

during the running state. To provide a good and reliable protection for motors in a stall
situation, the temperature effects on the motor have to be kept within the allowed
limits.

338 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.6.7 Signals
Table 392: JAMPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - 3-phase current group
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs

Table 393: JAMPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started signal

4.1.6.8 Settings
Table 394: JAMPTOC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Start value 0.10 - 10.00 pu 0.01 2.50 Start value
Operate delay time 0.10 - 120.00 s 0.01 2.00 Operate delay time

Table 395: JAMPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Reset delay time

4.1.6.9 Measured values

Table 396: JAMPTOC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_A REAL 0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs

630 series 339

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.1.6.10 Monitored data

Table 397: JAMPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

4.1.6.11 Technical data

Table 398: JAMPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Start time1)2) IFault = 2.0 × set Start Typically 25 ms (±15ms)

value
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

1) Current before = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.1.6.12 Technical revision history

Table 399: JAMPTOC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Change in function ANSI symbol

4.1.7 Loss of load protection LOFLPTUC

4.1.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Loss of load protection LOFLPTUC 3I< 37

4.1.7.2 Function block

GUID-1FDE7A5A-269B-4956-966C-F6FFC8A8C047 V1 EN

Figure 177: Function block

340 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.7.3 Functionality

The loss of load protection LOFLPTUC is used to detect a sudden load loss which is
considered as a fault condition.

LOFLPTUC starts when the current is less than the set limit. It operates with the
definite time (DT) characteristics, which means that the function operates after a
predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.7.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of loss of load protection can be described by using a module diagram.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-7D506CAB-76F4-48BB-85BA-FAEFBED33926 V1 EN

Figure 178: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector 1
This module compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the set Start value high
setting. If all the phase current values are less than the set Start value high value, the
loss of load condition is detected and an enable signal is sent to the timer. This signal
is disabled after one or several phase currents have exceeded the set Start value high
value of the element.

Level detector 2
This is a low-current detection module, which monitors the de-energized condition of
the motor. It compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the set Start value low
setting. If any of the phase current values is less than the set Start value low, a signal
is sent to block the operation of the timer.

630 series 341

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset
delay time, the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The BLOCK signal blocks the operation of the function and resets the timer.

4.1.7.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.1.7.6 Application

When a motor runs with a load connected, it draws a current equal to a value between
the no-load value and the rated current of the motor. The minimum load current can
be determined by studying the characteristics of the connected load. When the current
drawn by the motor is less than the minimum load current drawn, it can be inferred that
the motor is either disconnected from the load or the coupling mechanism is faulty. If
the motor is allowed to run in this condition, it may aggravate the fault in the coupling
mechanism or harm the personnel handling the machine. Therefore, the motor has to
be disconnected from the power supply as soon as the above condition is detected.

LOFLPTUC detects the condition by monitoring the current values and helps
disconnect the motor from the power supply instantaneously or after a delay according
to the requirement.

When the motor is at standstill, the current will be zero and it is not recommended to
activate the trip during this time. The minimum current drawn by the motor when it is
connected to the power supply is the no load current, that is, the higher start value
current. If the current drawn is below the lower start value current, the motor is
disconnected from the power supply. LOFLPTUC detects this condition and
interprets that the motor is de-energized and disables the function to prevent
unnecessary trip events.

342 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.7.7 Signals
Table 400: LOFLPTUC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers.

Table 401: LOFLPTUC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Loss of load protection operated
START BOOLEAN Loss of load protection started

4.1.7.8 Settings
Table 402: LOFLPTUC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value high 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.50 Current setting/Start value high
Start value low 0.01 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Current setting/Start value low
Operate delay time 0.40 - 600.00 s 0.01 2.00 Operate time delay

Table 403: LOFLPTUC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On / Off
On

Table 404: LOFLPTUC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay to reset

4.1.7.9 Measured values

Table 405: LOFLPTUC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_A REAL 0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 Current amptitude (RMS) phase C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers.

630 series 343

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.1.7.10 Monitored data

Table 406: LOFLPTUC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Loss of load protection
1=TRUE operated
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Loss of load protection
1=TRUE started
START_DUR REAL - % start time / operate time
(in %)

4.1.7.11 Technical data

Table 407: LOFLPTUC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Start time1) Typically <330 ms

Reset time <40 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

1) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.1.8 Motor thermal overload protection MPTTR

4.1.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase thermal overload MPTTR 3Ith>M 49M
protection for motors

4.1.8.2 Function block

GUID-ACB38A3C-9AEE-46B0-ACD0-EB7919C527A5 V2 EN

Figure 179: Function block

344 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.8.3 Functionality

The motor thermal overload protection function MPTTR protects the electric motors
from overheating. MPTTR models the thermal behavior of motor on the basis of the
measured load current and disconnects the motor when the thermal content reaches
100 percent. The thermal overload conditions are the most often encountered
abnormal conditions in industrial motor applications. The thermal overload
conditions are typically the result of an abnormal rise in the motor running current,
which produces an increase in the thermal dissipation of the motor and temperature or
reduces cooling. MPTTR prevents an electric motor from drawing excessive current
and overheating, which causes the premature insulation failures of the windings and,
in worst cases, burning out of the motors.

4.1.8.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the motor thermal overload protection function can be described
using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

GUID-BFBC82F2-3365-41A0-A362-9D1F6E1EED39 V3 EN

Figure 180: Functional module diagram

Max current selector

The maximum current selector of the function continuously checks the highest
measured TRMS phase current value. The selector reports the highest value to the
temperature estimator.

Internal FLC calculator

Full load current (FLC) of the motor is defined by the manufacturer at an ambient
temperature of 40°C. Special considerations are required with an application where
the ambient temperature of a motor exceeds or remains below 40°C. A motor
operating at a higher temperature, even if at or below rated load, can subject the motor
windings to excessive temperature similar to that resulting from overload operation at
normal ambient temperature. The motor rating has to be appropriately reduced for

630 series 345

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

operation in such high ambient temperatures. Similarly, when the ambient

temperature is considerably lower than the nominal 40°C, the motor can be slightly
overloaded. For calculating thermal level it is better that the FLC values are scaled for
different temperatures. The scaled currents are known as internal FLC. An internal
FLC is calculated based on the ambient temperature shown in the table. The Env
temperature mode setting defines whether the thermal level calculations are based on
FLC or internal FLC.

When the value of the Env temperature mode setting is set to the "FLC Only" mode,
no internal FLC is calculated. Instead, the FLC given in the data sheet of the
manufacturer is used. When the value of the Env temperature mode setting is set to the
"Set Amb Temp" mode, the internal FLC is calculated based on the ambient
temperature taken as an input through the Env temperature Set setting. When the Env
temperature mode setting is on the "Use RTD" mode, the internal FLC is calculated
from temperature data available through resistance temperature detectors (RTDs)
using the AMB_TEMP input.

Table 408: Modification of internal FLC

Ambient Temperature Tamb Internal FLC
<20°C FLC x 1.09
20 to <40°C FLC x (1.18 - Tamb x 0.09/20)

40°C FLC
>40 to 65°C FLC x (1 –[(Tamb -40)/100])

>65°C FLC x 0.75

The validity of operation of the RTD sensor is obtained from the SENFLT input. In
case of any errors or malfunctioning in the RTD output, the function takes the value
of temperature available from the Env temperature Set setting for calculating the
internal FLC. The ambient temperature is used for calculating thermal level and it is
available in the output data view on the LHMI from the TEMP_AMB output in degrees.
The activation of the BLOCK input does not affect the TEMP_AMB output.

Thermal level calculator

The heating of the motor is determined by the square value of the load current.
However, in case of unbalanced phase currents, the negative-sequence current also
causes additional heating. This is taken into account by means of the Negative Seq
factor setting.

The thermal load is calculated based on different situations or operations and it also
depends on the phase current level. The equations used for the heating calculations
are:

 I  2  I2  
2
θ B =  
 k × I r 
+ K ×
2 
 k × I r
  × 1− e
 
−t /τ
(
× p% )
 
GUID-526B455A-67DD-46E7-813D-A64EC619F6D7 V2 EN (Equation 27)

346 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

 I  2  I2  
2
θ A =   + K2 × 
 k × I r  
  × 1− e
k × Ir  
(
−t /τ
)
× 100%
 
GUID-9C893D3E-7CAF-4EA6-B92D-C914288D7CFC V2 EN (Equation 28)

I TRMS value of the measured max of phase currents

Ir set rated current, FLC or internal FLC

I2 measured negative sequence current

k set value of Overload factor

K2 set value of Negative Seq factor

p set value of Weighting factor

t time constant

The equation θB is used when the values of all the phase currents are below the
overload limit, that is, k x Ir. The equation θA is used when the value of any one of the
phase currents exceeds the overload limit.

During overload condition, the thermal level calculator calculates the value of θB in
background, and when the overload ends the thermal level is brought linearly from θA
to θB with a speed of 1.66 percent per second. For the motor at standstill, that is, when
the current is below the value of 0.12 x Ir, the cooling is expressed as:

−t
θ = θ02 × e τ
GUID-2C640EA9-DF69-42A9-A6A8-3CD20AEC76BD V2 EN (Equation 29)

θ02 initial thermal level when cooling begins

GUID-A19F9DF2-2F04-401F-AE7A-6CE55F88EB1D V2 EN

Figure 181: Thermal behavior

630 series 347

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The required overload factor and negative sequence current heating effect factor are
set by the values of the Overload factor and Negative Seq factor settings.

In order to accurately calculate the motor thermal condition, different time constants
are used in the above equations. These time constants are employed based on different
motor running conditions, for example starting, normal or stop, and are set through the
Time constant start, Time constant normal and Time constant stop settings. Only one
time constant is valid at a time.
Table 409: Time constant and the respective phase current values
Time constant (tau) in use Phase current
Time constant start Any current whose value is over 2.5 x Ir

Time constant normal Any current whose value is over 0.12 x Ir and all
currents are below 2.5 x Ir

Time constant stop All the currents whose values are below 0.12 x Ir

The Weighting factor p setting determines the ratio of the thermal increase of the two
curves θA and θB.

The thermal level at the power-up of the IED is defined by the Initial thermal Val
setting.

The activation of the RESET binary input resets the value of the calculated thermal
level to the Initial thermal Val setting.

The calculated thermal level, the THERM_LEVEL output, is available in the output
data view on the LHMI. The activation of the BLOCK input does not affect the
calculated thermal level.

The thermal level at the beginning of the startup condition of a motor and at the end
of the startup condition is available in the output data view at the THERMLEV_ST and
THERMLEV_END outputs respectively. The activation of the BLOCK input does not
have any effect on these outputs.

Alarm and tripping logic

The module generates alarm, restart inhibit and tripping signals.

When the thermal level exceeds the set value of the Alarm thermal value setting, the
ALARM output is activated. Sometimes a condition arises when it becomes necessary
to inhibit the restarting of a motor, for example in case of some extreme starting
condition like long starting time. If the thermal content exceeds the set value of the
Restart thermal val setting, the BLK_RESTART output is activated. The time for the
next possible motor startup is available in the monitored data view from the
T_ENARESTART output. The T_ENARESTART output estimates the time for the
BLK_RESTART deactivation considering as if the motor is stopped. When the
thermal content reaches 100 percent, the OPERATE output is activated. The

348 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

OPERATE output is deactivated when the value of the measured current falls below 12
percent of the rated current or the thermal content drops below 100 percent.

On the rising edge of the emergency start signal START_EMERG, the thermal level is
set to a value below the thermal restart inhibit level. This allows at least one motor
startup, even though the thermal level has exceeded the restart inhibit level.

When the thermal content reaches 100 percent, the OPERATE output is activated.

The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the ALARM, BLK_RESTART and
OPERATE outputs.

630 series 349

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Tau [s]

3840

1920

960

640

480

320

160

80

GUID-F3D1E6D3-86E9-4C0A-BD43-350003A07292 V1 EN

Figure 182: Trip curves when no prior load and p=20...100 %. Overload factor =
1.05.

350 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Tau [s]

3840

1920

80 160 320 480 640 960

GUID-44A67C51-E35D-4335-BDBD-5CD0D3F41EF1 V1 EN

Figure 183: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=100 %, Overload factor =
1.05.

630 series 351

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Tau [s]

3840

1920

960

640

480

320

80 160

GUID-5CB18A7C-54FC-4836-9049-0CE926F35ADF V1 EN

Figure 184: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=50 %. Overload factor = 1.05.

4.1.8.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The

352 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.1.8.6 Application

MPTTR is intended to limit the motor thermal level to predetermined values during
the abnormal motor operating conditions. This prevents a premature motor insulation
failure.

The abnormal conditions result in overheating and include overload, stalling, failure
to start, high ambient temperature, restricted motor ventilation, reduced speed
operation, frequent starting or jogging, high or low line voltage or frequency,
mechanical failure of the driven load, improper installation and unbalanced line
voltage or single phasing. The protection of insulation failure by the implementation
of current sensing cannot detect some of these conditions, such as restricted
ventilation. Similarly, the protection by sensing temperature alone can be inadequate
in cases like frequent starting or jogging. The thermal overload protection addresses
these deficiencies to a larger extent by deploying a motor thermal model based on load
current.

The thermal load is calculated using the true RMS phase value and negative sequence
value of the current. The heating up of the motor is determined by the square value of
the load current. However, while calculating the thermal level, the rated current
should be re-rated or de-rated depending on the value of the ambient temperature.
Apart from current, the rate at which motor heats up or cools is governed by the time
constant of the motor. There are two thermal curves: one which characterizes short-
time and long-time overloads used for tripping and another which is used for the
thermal condition of the motor.

The calculation of thermal load is based on different situations or operations and also
depends on the value of phase current level. The equations used for the heating up
calculations are:

 I  2  I2  
2

θB =   + K2 × 
 k × I r  
  × 1− e
k × Ir  
−t /τ
(
× p%)
 
GUID-526B455A-67DD-46E7-813D-A64EC619F6D7 V2 EN (Equation 30)

 I  2  I2  
2

θA =   + K2 × 
 k × I r  
  × 1− e
k × Ir  
−t /τ
( )
× 100%
 
GUID-9C893D3E-7CAF-4EA6-B92D-C914288D7CFC V2 EN (Equation 31)

630 series 353

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

I The true RMS value of the measured max of phase currents

In motor rated current (FLC or internal FLC)
I2 measured negative sequence current
k set value of Overload factor
K2 set value of Negative Seq factor
p set value of Weighting factor
t time constant

The equation θB is used when the values of all the phase currents are below the
overload limit, that is, k x In, whereas the equation θA is used when the value of any
of the phase currents exceeds the overload limit.

During overload condition, the function calculates the θB in background when the
overload that ends the thermal level is brought linearly from θA to θB with a speed of
1.66 percent per second. For a motor at standstill the cooling can be expressed as:
−t
θ = θ02 ×e τ
GUID-2C640EA9-DF69-42A9-A6A8-3CD20AEC76BD V2 EN (Equation 32)

θ02 initial thermal level when cooling begins

GUID-A19F9DF2-2F04-401F-AE7A-6CE55F88EB1D V2 EN

Figure 185: Thermal behavior

Setting the weighting factor

There are two thermal curves: one which characterizes the short-time loads and long-
time overloads and which is also used for tripping and another which is used for

354 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

monitoring the thermal condition of the motor. The value of the Weighting factor p
setting determines the ratio of the thermal increase of the two curves.

When the Weighting factor p setting is 100 percent, a pure single time constant
thermal unit is produced which is used for application with the cables. As presented in
Figure 186, the hot curve with the value of Weighting factor p being 100 percent only
allows an operate time which is about 10 percent of that with no prior load. For
example, when the set time constant is 640 seconds, the operate time with the prior
load 1 x FLC (full Load Current) and overload factor 1.05 is only 2 seconds, even if
the motor could withstand at least 5 to 6 seconds. To allow the use of the full capacity
of the motor, a lower value of Weighting factor p should be used.

Normally, an approximate value of half of the thermal capacity is used when the motor
is running at full load. Thus by setting Weighting factor p to 50 percent, the IED
notifies a 45 to 50 percent thermal capacity use at full load.

For direct-on-line started motors with hot spot tendencies, the value of Weighting
factor p is typically set to 50 percent, which will properly distinguish between short-
time thermal stress and long-time thermal history. After a short period of thermal
stress, for example a motor startup, the thermal level starts to decrease quite sharply,
simulating the leveling out of the hot spots. Consequently, the probability of
successive allowed startups increases.

When protecting the objects without hot spot tendencies, for example motors started
with soft starters, and cables, the value of Weighting factor p is set to 100 percent. With
the value of Weighting factor p set to 100 percent, the thermal level decreases slowly
after a heavy load condition. This makes the protection suitable for applications where
no hot spots are expected. Only in special cases where the thermal overload protection
is required to follow the characteristics of the object to be protected more closely and
the thermal capacity of the object is very well known, a value between 50 and 100
percent is required.

For motor applications where, for example, two hot starts are allowed instead of three
cold starts, the value of the setting Weighting factor p being 40 percent has proven to
be useful. Setting the value of Weighting factor p significantly below 50 percent
should be handled carefully as there is a possibility to overload the protected object as
a thermal unit might allow too many hot starts or the thermal history of the motor has
not been taken into account sufficiently.

630 series 355

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

t/s
4000

3000

2000

1000

500

400

300

200

100

50

40

Cold
30
curve

20

10

20
5

4 50

75
2

p
[%]
1.05
100
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 I/Iq
GUID-B6F9E655-4FFC-4B06-841A-68DADE785BF2 V1 EN

Figure 186: The influence of Weighting factor p at prior load 1xFLC, timeconstant
= 640 sec, and Overload factor = 1.05

356 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Setting the overload factor

The value of Overload factor defines the highest permissible continuous load. The
recommended value is 1.05.

Setting the negative sequence factor

During the unbalance condition, the symmetry of the stator currents is disturbed and
a counter-rotating negative sequence component current is set up. An increased stator
current causes additional heating in the stator and the negative sequence component
current excessive heating in the rotor. Also mechanical problems like rotor vibration
can occur.

The most common cause of unbalance for three-phase motors is the loss of phase
resulting in an open fuse, connector or conductor. Often mechanical problems can be
more severe than the heating effects and therefore a separate unbalance protection is
used.

Unbalances in other connected loads in the same busbar can also affect the motor. A
voltage unbalance typically produces 5 to 7 times higher current unbalance. Because
the thermal overload protection is based on the highest TRMS value of the phase
current, the additional heating in stator winding is automatically taken into account.
For more accurate thermal modeling, the Negative Seq factor setting is used for taking
account of the rotor heating effect.
RR 2
Negative Seq factor =
RR1
GUID-EA5AD510-A3CA-47FB-91F0-75D7272B654E V1 EN (Equation 33)

RR2 rotor negative sequence resistance

RR1 rotor positive sequence resistance

A conservative estimate for the setting can be calculated:

175
Negative Seq factor = 2
I LR
GUID-13CE37C5-295F-41D4-8159-400FA377C84C V1 EN

ILR locked rotor current (multiple of set Rated current). The same as the startup current at the beginning
of the motor startup.

For example, if the rated current of a motor is 230 A, startup current is 5.7 x Ir,

175
Negative Seq factor = = 5.4
5.7 2
GUID-DF682702-E6B1-4814-8B2E-31C28F3A03DF V1 EN

630 series 357

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Setting the thermal restart level

The restart disable level can be calculated as follows:
 startup time of the motor 
θ = 100% −  × 100% + margin 
i  operate time when no prior load 

GUID-5B3B714D-8C58-4C5D-910D-A23852BC8B15 V2 EN (Equation 34)

For example, the motor startup time is 11 seconds, start-up current 6 x rated and Time
constant start is set for 800 seconds. Using the trip curve with no prior load, the
operation time at 6 x rated current is 25 seconds, one motor startup uses 11/25 ≈ 45
percent of the thermal capacity of the motor. Therefore, the restart disable level must
be set to below 100 percent - 45 percent = 55 percent, for example to 50 percent (100
percent - (45 percent + margin), where margin is 5 percent).

Setting the thermal alarm level

Tripping due to high overload is avoided by reducing the load of the motor on a prior
alarm.

The value of the prior alarm level is set to a level which allows the use of the full
thermal capacity of the motor without causing a trip due to a long overload time.
Generally, the prior alarm level is set to a value of 80 to 90 percent of the trip level.

4.1.8.7 Signals
Table 410: MPTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
AMB_TEMP REAL 0.0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal to block the function
START_EMERG BOOLEAN 0 Signal for indicating the need for emergency start
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of thermal load

Table 411: MPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal when thermal load exceeds operate
setting
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal when thermal load exceeds alarm
setting
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator, to inhibit restart
THERM_LEVEL REAL Calculated thermal level of the device
TEMP_AMB REAL Ambient temperature used in calculations
THERMLEV_ST REAL Thermal level at beginning of motor startup
THERMLEV_END REAL Thermal level at the end of motor startup situation

358 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.8.8 Settings
Table 412: MPTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Env temperature mode FLC Only - - FLC Only Mode of measuring ambient temperature
Use RTD
Set Amb Temp
Env temperature Set -20.0 - 70.0 Deg 0.1 40.0 Setting for ambient environment
temperature
Alarm thermal value 50.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 95.0 Thermal level above which function gives
an alarm
Restart thermal Val 20.0 - 80.0 % 0.1 40.0 Thermal level above which function
inhibits motor restarting
Overload factor 1.00 - 1.20 - 0.01 1.05 Overload factor (k)
Weighting factor p 20.0 - 100.0 - 0.1 50.0 Weighting factor (p)
Time constant normal 80 - 4000 s 1 320 Motor time constant during the normal
operation of motor
Time constant start 80 - 4000 s 1 320 Motor time constant during the start of
motor
Time constant stop 80 - 60000 s 1 500 Motor time constant during the standstill
condition of motor

Table 413: MPTTR Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negative Seq factor 0.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 0.0 Heating effect factor for negative
sequence current

Table 414: MPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

Table 415: MPTTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Initial thermal Val 0.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 74.0 Thermal level at power up

630 series 359

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.1.8.9 Measured values

Table 416: MPTTR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_A REAL 0.0 True RMS motor current for phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0.0 True RMS motor current for phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0.0 True RMS motor current for phase C
I2_AMPL REAL 0.0 Negative sequence current of the motor
AMB_TEMP REAL 0.0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal to block the function
START_EMERG BOOLEAN 0 Signal for indicating the need for emergency start
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of thermal load

4.1.8.10 Monitored data

Table 417: MPTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal when
1=TRUE thermal load exceeds
operate setting
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal when
1=TRUE thermal load exceeds
alarm setting
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Thermal overload
1=TRUE indicator, to inhibit restart
T_ENARESTART INTEGER - s Estimated time to reset of
block restart
THERM_LEVEL REAL - - Calculated thermal level
of the device
TEMP_AMB REAL - - Ambient temperature
used in calculations
THERMLEV_ST REAL - - Thermal level at
beginning of motor
startup
THERMLEV_END REAL - - Thermal level at the end
of motor startup situation

360 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.8.11 Technical data

Table 418: MPTTR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

Current measurement:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
(at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × In)

Operate time accuracy1) ±2.0% or ±0.050 s

1) Overload current > 1.2 × Operate level temperature

4.1.8.12 Technical revision history

Table 419: MPTTR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Minimum setting value changed from 8000 to
60000 for Time constant stop setting

4.1.9 Motor startup supervision STTPMSU

4.1.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Motor startup supervision STTPMSU Is2t n< 48,66,14,51LR

4.1.9.2 Function block

GUID-3C371BA6-923D-4B7C-A328-5A4B1B350D27 V1 EN

Figure 187: Function block

4.1.9.3 Functionality

The motor startup supervision function STTPMSU is designed for protection against
excessive starting time and locked rotor conditions of the motor during starting. For
a good and reliable operation of the motor, the thermal stress during the motor starting
is maintained within the allowed limits.

630 series 361

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The starting of the motor is supervised by monitoring the TRMS magnitude of all the
phase currents or by monitoring the status of the circuit breaker connected to the
motor.

During the startup period of the motor, STTPMSU calculates the integral of the I²t
value. If the calculated value exceeds the set value, the operate signal is activated.

STTPMSU has the provision to check the locked rotor condition of the motor using the
speed switch, which means checking if the rotor is able to rotate or not. This feature
operates after a predefined operating time.

STTPMSU also protects the motor from an excessive number of startups. Upon
exceeding the specified number of startups within certain duration, STTPMSU blocks
further starts. The restart of the motor is also inhibited after each start and continues
to be inhibited for a set duration. When the lock of start of motor is enabled,
STTPMSU gives the time remaining until the restart of the motor.

STTPMSU contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.9.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the motor startup supervision function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-06FE0DD3-07D9-4C3F-B8C3-39782E7EAD18 V1 EN

Figure 188: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

362 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Startup supervisor
This module detects the starting of the motor. The starting and stalling motor
conditions are detected in four different modes of operation. This is done through the
Operation mode setting.

When the Operation mode setting is operated in the "IIt" mode, the function calculates
the value of the thermal stress of the motor during the startup condition. In this mode,
the startup condition is detected by monitoring the TRMS currents.

The Operation mode setting in the "IIt, CB" mode enables the function to calculate the
value of the thermal stress when a startup is monitored in addition to the CB_CLOSED
input.

In the "IIt & stall" mode, the function calculates the thermal stress of the motor during
the startup condition. In this mode, the startup condition is detected by monitoring the
TRMS currents. In the "IIt & stall" mode, the function also checks for motor stalling
by monitoring the speed switch.

In the "IIt & stall, CB" mode, the function calculates the thermal stresses of the motor
during the startup condition. The startup condition is monitored in addition to the
circuit breaker status. In the "IIt & stall, CB" mode, the function also checks for motor
stalling by monitoring the speed switch.

When the trueRMS value of current is used for startup supervision in the "IIt" and "IIt
& stall" modes, the module initially recognizes the de-energized condition of the
motor when the values of all three phase currents are less than 0.1 pu for 100 ms. If the
value of any of the phase currents rises after the de-energized condition from 0.1 pu
to a value equal or greater than Start detection A within 50 ms after energization, the
MOT_START output signal is activated indicating that the motor startup is in progress.
The MOT_START output remains active until the values of all three phase currents
drop below 0.9 × Start detection A and remain below that level for a time period of Str
over delay time, that is, until the startup situation is over.

630 series 363

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-4475BDFB-57AE-4BFD-9EE7-AE7672F7206E V2 EN

Figure 189: Functionality of the startup supervision in the "IIt and IIt&stall" mode

In case of the "IIt, CB" or "IIt & stall, CB" modes, the function initially recognizes the
de-energized condition of the motor when the value of all three phase currents is below
the value of the 0.1 pu setting for 100 ms. The beginning of the motor startup is
recognized when CB is closed, that is, when the CB_CLOSED input is activated and
at least one phase current value exceeds the 0.1 pu setting.

In normal practice, these two events do not take place at the same instant. The CB main
contact is closed first, in which case the phase current value rises above 0.1 pu and
after some delay the CB auxiliary contact gives the information of the CB_CLOSED
input. In some cases, the CB_CLOSED input can be active but the value of current may
not be greater than the value of the Motor standstill A setting. To allow both
possibilities, a time slot of 200 milliseconds is provided for current and the
CB_CLOSED input. If both events occur during this time, the motor startup is
recognized.

The motor startup ends either within the value of the Str over delay time setting from
the beginning of the startup or the opening of CB, that is, when the CB_CLOSED input
is deactivated during the Str over delay time. The operation of the MOT_START output
signal in this operation mode is as shown in Figure 190.

This CB mode can be used in soft-started or slip ring motors for protection against a
large starting current, that is, a problem in starting and so on.

364 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-DDAD7B3F-28BE-4573-BE79-FBB488A22ECA V1 EN

GUID-1470A4DB-310F-46BC-B775-843EAB8BA836 V1 EN

Figure 190: Functionality of the startup supervision in the "IIt, CB" and "IIt and
stall, CB" modes

The Str over delay time setting has different purposes in different modes of operation.
• In the "IIt" or "IIt & stall" modes, the aim of this setting is to check for the
completion of the motor startup period. The purpose of this time delay setting is
to allow for short interruptions in the current without changing the state of the

630 series 365

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

MOT_START output. In this mode of operation, the value of the setting is in the
range of around 100 milliseconds.
• In the "IIt, CB" or "IIt & stall, CB" modes, the purpose of this setting is to check
for the life of the protection scheme after the CB_CLOSED input has been
activated. Based on the values of the phase currents, the completion of the startup
period cannot be judged. In this mode of operation, the value of the time delay
setting can even be as high as within the range of seconds, for example around 30
seconds.

The BLOCK input signal is used to block the operation of the MOT_START output. The
activation of the BLOCK input signal deactivates the MOT_START output.

Thermal stress calculator

Because of the high current surges during the startup period, thermal stress is imposed
on the rotor. With less air circulation in the ventilation of the rotor before it reaches its
full speed, the situation becomes worse. Consequently, a long startup causes a rapid
heating of the rotor.

This module calculates the thermal stress developed in the motor during startup. The
heat developed during the starting can be calculated with the formula.
t
W = Rs ∫ is2 ( t ) dt
0
GUID-7A92209F-7451-415B-8C3D-276A6ED4A44B V1 EN (Equation 35)

Rs combined rotor and stator resistance

is starting current of the motor

t starting time of the motor

This equation is normally represented as the integral of I²t. It is a commonly used

method in protective relays to protect the motor from thermal stress during starting.

The advantage of this method over the traditional definite time overcurrent protection
is that when the motor is started with a reduced voltage as in the star-delta starting
method, the starting current is lower. This allows more starting time for the motor
since the module is monitoring the integral of I²t.

The module calculates the accumulated heat continuously and compares it to the
limiting value obtained from the product of the square of the values of the Motor start-
up A and Motor start-up time settings. When the calculated value of the thermal stress
exceeds this limit, the OPR_IIT output is activated.

The module also measures the time START_TIME required by the motor to attain the
rated speed and the relative thermal stress IIT_RL. The values are available in the
monitored data view.

366 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The BLOCK input is used to reset the operation of thermal stress calculator. The
activation of the BLK_OPR input signal blocks the operation of the OPR_IIT output.

Stall protection
This module is activated only when the selected Operation mode setting value is "IIt
& stall" or "IIt & stall, CB".

The startup current is specific to each motor and depends on the startup method used,
like direct on-line, autotransformer and rotor resistance insertion.

The startup time is dependent of the load connected to the motor.

Based on the motor characteristics supplied by the manufacturer, this module is

required if the stalling time is shorter than or too close to the starting time. In such
cases, a speed switch must be used to indicate whether a motor is accelerating during
startup or not.

At motor standstill, the STALL_IND input is active. It indicates that the rotor is not
rotating. When the motor is started, at certain revolution the deactivation of the
STALL_IND by the speed switch that indicates the rotor is rotating. If the input is not
deactivated within Lock rotor time, the OPR_STALL output is activated.

The module calculates the duration of the motor in stalling condition, the STALL_RL
output indicating the percent ratio of the start situation and the set value of Lock rotor
time. The value is available in the monitored data view.

The BLK_OPR input signal is used to block the operation of the OPR_STALL output.
The activation of the BLOCK input resets the operation timer.

Cumulative startup protection

This module protects the motor from an excessive number of startups.

Whenever the motor is started, the latest value of START_TIME is added to the
existing value of T_ST_CNT and the updated cumulative startup time is available at
T_ST_CNT. If the value of T_ST_CNT is greater than the value of Cumulative time
Lim, the LOCK_START output is activated and lockout condition for the restart of
motor is enabled during the time the output is active. The LOCK_START output
remains high until the T_ST_CNT value reduces to a value less than the value of
Cumulative time Lim. The start time counter reduces at the rate of the value of Counter
Red rate.

The LOCK_START output becomes activated at the start of MOT_START. The output
remains active for a period of Restart inhibit time.

630 series 367

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-200BC4CB-8B33-4616-B014-AFCC99ED9224 V2 EN

Figure 191: Time delay for cumulative start

This module also protects the motor from consecutive startups. When the
LOCK_START output is active, T_RST_ENA shows the possible time for next restart.
The value of T_RST_ENA is calculated by the difference of Restart inhibit time and
the elapsed time from the instant LOCK_START is enabled.

When the ST_EMERG_ENA emergency start is set high, the value of the cumulative
startup time counter is set less than the value of the Cumulative time Lim time limit.
This disables LOCK_START and in turn makes the restart of the motor possible.

This module also calculates the total number of startups occurred, START_CNT.

The calculated values of T_RST_ENA, T_ST_CNT and START_CNT are available in

the monitored data view.

The BLK_LK_ST input signal is used to block the operation of the LOCK_START
output. The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the LOCK_START output for
consecutive start condition.

4.1.9.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.1.9.6 Application

When a motor is started, it draws a current well in excess of the motor's full load rating
throughout the period it takes for the motor to run up to the rated speed. The motor

368 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

starting current decreases as the motor speed increases and the value of current
remains close to the rotor locked value for most of the acceleration period.

The full voltage starting or the direct-on-line starting method is used out of the many
methods used for starting the induction motor. If there is either an electrical or
mechanical constraint, this starting method is not suitable. The full voltage starting
produces the highest starting torque. A high starting torque is generally required to
start a high-inertia load to limit the acceleration time. In this method, full voltage is
applied to the motor when the switch is in the "On" position. This method of starting
results in a large initial current surge, which is typically four to eight times that of the
full-load current drawn by the motor. If a star-delta starter is used, the value of the line
current will only be about one-third of the direct-on-line starting current.

GUID-F4C17D13-48CA-480A-BBE5-DFD7D6316DB8 V1 EN

Figure 192: Typical motor starting and capability curves

The startup supervision of a motor is an important function because of the higher

thermal stress developed during starting. During the startup, the current surge imposes
a thermal strain on the rotor. This is exaggerated as the air flow for cooling is less
because the fans do not rotate in their full speed. Moreover, the difference of speed
between the rotating magnetic field and the rotor during the startup time induces a high
magnitude of slip current in the rotor at frequencies higher than when the motor is at
full speed. The skin effect is stronger at higher frequencies and all these factors
increase the losses and the generated heat. This is worse when the rotor is locked.

The starting current for slip-ring motors is less than the full load current and therefore
it is advisable to use the circuit breaker in the closed position to indicate the starting
for such type of motors.

The starting times vary depending on motor design and load-torque characteristics.
The time taken may vary from less than two seconds to more than 60 seconds. The
starting time is determined for each application.

630 series 369

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

When the permissible stall time is less than the starting time of the motor, the stalling
protection is used and the value of the time delay setting should be set slightly less than
the permissible stall time. The speed switch on the motor shaft must be used for
detecting whether the motor begins to accelerate or not. However, if the safe stall time
is longer than the startup time of the motor, the speed switch is not required.

The failure of a motor to accelerate or to reach its full nominal speed in an acceptable
time when the stator is energized is caused by several types of abnormal conditions,
including a mechanical failure of the motor or load bearings, low supply voltage, open
circuit in one phase of a three-phase voltage supply or too high starting voltage. All
these abnormal conditions result in overheating.

Repeated starts increase the temperature to a high value in the stator or rotor windings,
or both, unless enough time is allowed for the heat to dissipate. To ensure a safe
operation it is necessary to provide a fixed-time interval between starts or limit the
number of starts within a period of time. This is why the motor manufacturers have
restrictions on how many starts are allowed in a defined time interval. This function
does not allow starting of the motor if the number of starts exceeds the set level in the
register that calculates them. This insures that the thermal effects on the motor for
consecutive starts stay within permissible levels.

For example, the motor manufacturer may state that three starts at the maximum are
allowed within 4 hours and the startup situation time is 60 seconds. By initiating three
successive starts we reach the situation as illustrated. As a result, the value of the
register adds up to a total of 180 seconds. Right after the third start has been initiated,
the output lock of start of motor is activated and the fourth start will not be allowed,
provided the time limit has been set to 121 seconds.

Furthermore, a maximum of three starts in 4 hours means that the value of the register
should reach the set start time counter limit within 4 hours to allow a new start.
Accordingly, the start time counter reduction should be 60 seconds in 4 hours and
should thus be set to 60 s / 4 h = 15 s / h.

370 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-6E9B7247-9009-4302-A79B-B326009ECC7A V2 EN

Figure 193: Typical motor-starting and capability curves

Setting of Cumulative time Lim

Cumulative time Lim is calculated by

∑ tsi = (n − 1) × t + margin
GUID-0214B677-48D0-4DD4-BD1E-67BA9FD3C345 V1 EN (Equation 36)

n specified maximum allowed number of motor startups

t startup time of the motor (in seconds)
margin safety margin (~10...20 percent)

Setting of Counter Red rate

Counter Red rate is calculated by

t
∆ ∑ ts =
treset
GUID-E7C44256-0F67-4D70-9B54-1C5042A151AF V1 EN (Equation 37)

t specified start time of the motor in seconds

treset duration during which the maximum number of motor startups stated by the manufacturer can be
made; time in hours

630 series 371

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.1.9.7 Signals
Table 420: STTPMSU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for three phase current signals
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate signals
BLK_LK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Blocks lock out condition for restart of motor
CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Input signal showing the status of motor circuit
breaker
STALL_IND BOOLEAN 0 Input signal for showing the motor is not stalling
ST_EMERG_ENA BOOLEAN 0 Enable emergency start to disable lock of start of
motor

Table 421: STTPMSU Output signals

Name Type Description
OPR_IIT BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for thermal stress.
OPR_STALL BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for stalling protection.
MOT_START BOOLEAN Signal to show that motor startup is in progress
LOCK_START BOOLEAN Lock out condition for restart of motor.

4.1.9.8 Settings
Table 422: STTPMSU Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Motor start-up A 1.0 - 10.0 pu 0.1 2.0 Motor starting current
Motor start-up time 0.3 - 80.0 s 0.1 5.0 Motor starting time
Lock rotor time 2.0 - 120.0 s 1.0 10.0 Permitted stalling time

Table 423: STTPMSU Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start detection A 0.1 - 10.0 pu 0.1 1.5 Current value for detecting starting of
motor.

372 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 424: STTPMSU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On/Off
On
Operation mode IIt - - IIt Motor start-up operation mode
IIt, CB
IIt & stall
IIt & stall, CB
Emg start Red rate 0.00 - 100.00 % 0.01 20.00 Start time reduction factor when
emergency start is On
Counter Red rate 2.0 - 250.0 s/h 0.1 60.0 Start time counter reduction rate
Cumulative time Lim 1.000 - 500.000 s 0.001 10.000 Cumulative time based restart inhibit limit
Restart inhibit time 0 - 250 Min 1 30 Time delay between consecutive startups
Str over delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay to check for completion of
motor startup period

Table 425: STTPMSU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3

4.1.9.9 Measured values

Table 426: STTPMSU Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_A REAL 0.0 TrueRMS value of A-phase currrent
I_RMS_B REAL 0.0 TrueRMS value of B-phase current
I_RMS_C REAL 0.0 TrueRMS value of C-phase current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all operate signals
BLK_LK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Blocks lock out condition for restart of motor
CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Input signal showing the status of motor circuit
breaker
STALL_IND BOOLEAN 0 Input signal for showing the motor is not stalling
ST_EMERG_ENA BOOLEAN 0 Enable emergency start to disable lock of start of
motor

630 series 373

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.1.9.10 Monitored data

Table 427: STTPMSU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_IIT BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate/trip signal for
1=TRUE thermal stress.
OPR_STALL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate/trip signal for
1=TRUE stalling protection.
MOT_START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal to show that motor
1=TRUE startup is in progress
LOCK_START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Lock out condition for
1=TRUE restart of motor.
START_CNT INTEGER - - Number of motor start-
ups occurred
START_TIME REAL - s Measured motor latest
startup time in sec
T_ST_CNT REAL - s Cumulated start-up time
in sec
T_RST_ENA INTEGER - - Time left for restart when
lockstart is enabled in
minutes
IIT_RL REAL - % Thermal stress relative to
set maximum thermal
stress
STALL_RL REAL - % Start time relative to the
operate time for stall
condition

4.1.9.11 Technical data

Table 428: STTPMSU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Start time1)2) IFault = 1.1 × set Start Typically 25 ms (± 15ms)

detection A
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.90

1) Current before = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, overcurrent in one phase

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

374 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.9.12 Technical revision history

Table 429: STTPMSU technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Change in ANSI symbol
C Added feature to reset startup counter from clear
menu

4.2 Earth-fault protection

4.2.1 Non-directional earth-fault protection EFxPTOC

4.2.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Non-directional earth-fault protection - EFLPTOC Io> 51N-1
Low stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection - EFHPTOC Io>> 51N-2
High stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection - EFIPTOC Io>>> 50N/51N
Instantaneous stage

4.2.1.2 Function block

A070988 V1 EN

Figure 194: Function block

4.2.1.3 Functionality

The earth-fault function EFxPTOC is used as non-directional earth-fault protection

for feeders.

The function starts and operates when the residual current exceeds the set limit. The
operate time characteristic for low stage EFLPTOC and high stage EFHPTOC can be
selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). The
instantaneous stage EFIPTOC always operates with the DT characteristic.

630 series 375

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when
the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer
characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.2.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of non-directional earth-fault protection can be described by using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A070994 V1 EN

Figure 195: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector
If the measured residual current is configured to be available for the protection
function it will be used as operating quantity. Otherwise the internally calculated
residual current is used, see more details from the SMAI function. The operating
quantity is compared to the set Start value. If the measured value exceeds the set Start
value, the level detector sends an enable-signal to the timer module. If the ENA_MULT
input is active, the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.

Do not set the multiplier setting Start value Mult higher than
necessary. If the value is too high, the function may not operate at all
during an inrush followed by a fault, no matter how severe the fault is.

The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT.
When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode

376 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is
activated.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B,
Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate
delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the timer in
the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset
curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, the reset
timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When the IDMT curves are
selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or
"Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the
reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time
setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current
during the drop-off situation. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer
has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the
drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but always
at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For more
information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section
in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

630 series 377

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.1.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the residual current or voltage-related
settings, for example, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3". One
of the groups to be used with the "Base value Sel Res" setting must be selected.

4.2.1.6 Measurement modes

The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and
"Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode
setting.
Table 430: Measurement modes supported by EFxPTOC stages
Measurement Supported measurement modes
mode EFLPTOC EFHPTOC EFIPTOC
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x x

For a detailed description of the measurement modes, see the General

function block features section in this manual.

4.2.1.7 Timer characteristics

EFxPTOC supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the timer
characteristics with the Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings. When
the DT characteristic is selected, it is only affected by the Operate delay time and Reset
delay time settings.

The IED provides 16 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special
characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a
user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
The user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type
values "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is identical in both
cases.

The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages:

378 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 431: Timer characteristics supported by different stages

Operating curve type Supported by
EFLPTOC EFHPTOC
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse x x
(2) ANSI Very Inverse x
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse x x
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse x
(5) ANSI Definite Time x x
(6) Long Time Extremely x
Inverse
(7) Long Time Very Inverse x
(8) Long Time Inverse x
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x x
(10) IEC Very Inverse x x
(11) IEC Inverse x
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x x
(13) IEC Short Time Inverse x
(14) IEC Long Time Inverse x
(15) IEC Definite Time x x
(17) User programmable x x
curve
(18) RI type x
(19) RD type x

EFIPTOC supports only definite time characteristics.

For a detailed description of timers, see the General function block

features section in this manual.

Table 432: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages

Reset curve type Supported by
EFLPTOC EFHPTOC Note
(1) Immediate x x Available for all operate
time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all operate
time curves
(3) Inverse reset x x Available only for ANSI
and user
programmable curves

630 series 379

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The Type of reset curve setting does not apply to EFIPTOC or when
the DT operation is selected. The reset is purely defined by the Reset
delay time setting.

4.2.1.8 Application

EFxPTOC is designed for protection and clearance of earth faults in distribution and
sub-transmission networks where the neutral point is isolated or earthed via a
resonance coil or through low resistance. It also applies to solidly earthed networks
and earth-fault protection of different equipment connected to the power systems,
such as shunt capacitor bank or shunt reactors and for backup earth-fault protection of
power transformers.

Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time
delays. EFxPTOC consists of three different protection stages:
• Low (EFLPTOC)
• High (EFHPTOC)
• Instantaneous (EFIPTOC).

EFLPTOC contains several types of time-delay characteristics. EFHPTOC and

EFIPTOC are used for fast clearance of serious earth faults.

Note the following when using the earth-fault function for the protection of
transformers. When a power transformer is energized, an inrush current flows through
the earthed star-point of all the transformers connected to the bus. This can cause the
earth-fault function to operate. The operation can be avoided by using blocking from
inrush detection or by setting longer operation time.

380 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-9239F574-77CD-4797-97DC-17AA437C74E5 V1 EN

Figure 196: Path of inrush currents through earthed star-points of transformers

When the residual connection of the three phase CTs is used, an unwanted operation
of the earth-fault protection IED sometimes occur during the motor startup. The
reason for the unwanted IED operation typically happens due to the CT partial
saturation during the motor startup. The CT saturation is caused by the DC component
of the asymmetrical startup current. To avoid this problem a suitable stabilizing
resistor can be connected in series with the earth-fault current input of the protection
IED. The stabilizing resistor forces the current, fed by a non-saturated current
transformer, to flow through the secondary circuit of a saturated current transformer.

Figure 197 shows the connection principle when the earth-fault current is measured
through the residual connection of the three-phase CTs. The purpose of the voltage
dependent resistor is to limit the voltage of the secondary circuit to a safe level.

630 series 381

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-A75844B1-E021-44F8-97EA-986DCBBF5A6A V1 EN

Figure 197: Connection principle of the earth-fault current when measured

through the residual connection of the three-phase CTs

4.2.1.9 Signals
Table 433: EFLPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 434: EFHPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

382 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 435: EFIPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 436: EFLPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started

Table 437: EFHPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started

Table 438: EFIPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started

630 series 383

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.1.10 Settings
Table 439: EFLPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010 - 5.000 pu 0.005 0.010 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Operate delay time 0.04 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.04 Operate delay time

Table 440: EFLPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset

Table 441: EFLPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 442: EFLPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Measurement mode RMS - - DFT Selects used measurement mode
DFT
Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Table continues on next page

384 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

Table 443: EFHPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.10 - 40.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
Operate delay time 0.02 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.02 Operate delay time

Table 444: EFHPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset

Table 445: EFHPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

630 series 385

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 446: EFHPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Measurement mode RMS - - DFT Selects used measurement mode
DFT
Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 0.020 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

Table 447: EFIPTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.10 - 40.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Operate delay time 0.02 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.02 Operate delay time

Table 448: EFIPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 449: EFIPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

386 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.1.11 Measured values

Table 450: EFLPTOC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (DFT)
I_RMS_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (RMS)
I_PTOP_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (PTOP)
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 451: EFHPTOC Measured values

Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (DFT)
I_RMS_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (RMS)
I_PTOP_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (PTOP)
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 452: EFIPTOC Measured values

Name Type Default Description
I0_PTOP REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (PTOP)
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier

630 series 387

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.1.12 Monitored data

Table 453: EFLPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time
INVAL_CRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Invalid curve parameters
1=TRUE

Table 454: EFHPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time
INVAL_CRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Invalid curve parameters
1=TRUE

Table 455: EFIPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

4.2.1.13 Technical data

Table 456: EFxPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

EFLPTOC ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.001 × In

EFHPTOC ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 × In

and (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 × In)
EFIPTOC ±5.0% of the set value
(at currents in the range of 10…40 × In)

Table continues on next page

388 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Characteristic Value
Start time 1)2) EFIPTOC: Typically 12 ms (±5 ms)
IFault = 2 × set Start
value
EFHPTOC: Typically 19 ms (±5 ms)
IFault = 2 × set Start
value
EFLPTOC: Typically 23 ms (±15 ms)
IFault = 2 × set Start
value
Reset time <45 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <30 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression

1) Operate curve type = IEC definite time, Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current
before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, earth-fault current with nominal frequency injected from random phase
angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5...20

4.2.1.14 Technical revision history

Table 457: EFLPTOC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting

Table 458: EFHPTOC technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting

4.2.2 Directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF

4.2.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional earth-fault protection - Low DEFLPDEF Io>-> 67N-1
stage
Directional earth-fault protection - High DEFHPDEF Io>>-> 67N-2
stage

630 series 389

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.2.2 Function block

A070992 V1 EN

Figure 198: Function block

4.2.2.3 Functionality

The earth-fault function DEFxPDEF is used as directional earth-fault protection for

feeders.

The function starts and operates when the operating quantity (current) and polarizing
quantity (voltage) exceed the set limits and the angle between them is inside the set
operating sector. The operate time characteristic for low stage (DEFLPDEF) and high
stage (DEFHPDEF) can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT).

In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when
the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer
characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.2.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of directional earth-fault protection can be described using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

390 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

A071000 V1 EN

Figure 199: Functional module diagram. Group signals I3P and U3P are used for
feeding the necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector
The polarizing quantity can be selected with the setting Pol quantity. The selectable
options are ""Zero seq. volt."" and ""Neg. seq. volt."". The option ""Zero seq. volt.""
refers to the measured residual voltage if the measured residual voltage is configured
to be available for the protection function. Otherwise it refers to the internally
calculated residual voltage, see the SMAI function for more details. The magnitude of
the operating quantity is compared to the set Start value and the magnitude of the
polarizing quantity is compared to the set Voltage start value. If both limits are
exceeded, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer module. When the
Enable voltage limit setting is set to "No", Voltage start value has no effect and the
level detection is purely based on the operating quantity. If the ENA_MULT input is
active, the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.

Typically, the ENA_MULT input is connected to the inrush detection function

INRHPAR. In case of inrush, INRPHAR activates the ENA_MULT input, which
multiplies Start value by the Start value Mult setting.

Directional calculation
The directional calculation module monitors the angle between the polarizing
quantity and operating quantity. Depending on the Pol quantity setting, the polarizing
quantity can be the residual voltage or the negative sequence voltage. When the angle
is in the operation sector, the module sends the enabling signal to the timer module.

The minimum signal level which allows the directional operation can be set with the
Min operate current and Min operate voltage settings.

If Pol quantity is set to "Zero seq. volt", the residual current and residual voltage are
used for directional calculation.

If Pol quantity is set to "Neg. seq. volt", the negative sequence current and negative
sequence voltage are used for directional calculation.

630 series 391

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

A convention is used in the phasor diagrams representing the operation of

DEFxPDEF; the polarity of the polarizing quantity (Uo or U2) is reversed, that is, the
polarizing quantity in the phasor diagrams is either -Uo or -U2. Reversing is done by
switching the polarity of the residual current measuring channel. Similarly the
polarity of the calculated Io and I2 is also switched.

For defining the operation sector, five modes are available through the Operation
mode setting.
Table 459: Operation modes
Operation mode Description
Phase angle The operating sectors for forward and reverse are
defined with the settings Min forward angle, Max
forward angle, Min reverse angle and Max reverse
angle.
IoSin The operating sectors are defined as "forward"
when |Io| × sin (ANGLE) has a positive value and
"reverse" when the value is negative. ANGLE is
the angle difference between -Uo and Io.
IoCos As "IoSin" mode. Only cosine is used for
calculating the operation current.
Phase angle 80 The sector maximum values are frozen to 80
degrees respectively. Only Min forward angle and
Min reverse angle are settable.
Phase angle 88 The sector maximum values are frozen to 88
degrees. Otherwise as "Phase angle 80" mode.

Polarizing quantity selection "Neg. seq. volt." is available only in the

"Phase angle" operation mode.

The directionality of the operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting.
The user can select either "Non-directional", "Forward" or "Reverse" operation. The
operation criterion is selected with the Operation mode setting. By setting Allow Non
Dir to "True", non-directional operation is allowed when the directionality
information is invalid, that is, when the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is less
than the value of the Min operate voltage setting.

If the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "True", the magnitude of the
polarizing quantity is checked even if Directional mode is set to "Non-
directional" or Allow Non Dir to "True".

The Characteristic angle setting is used in the "Phase angle" mode to adjust the
operation according to the method of neutral point earthing so that in an isolated
network the Characteristic angle (φRCA) = -90° and in a compensated network φRCA
= 0°. In addition, the characteristic angle can be changed via the control signal
RCA_CTL. RCA_CTL affects the Characteristic angle setting.

392 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The Correction angle setting can be used to improve selectivity when there are
inaccuracies due to measurement transformers. The setting decreases the operation
sector. The correction can only be used with the "IoCos" or "IoSin" modes.

The polarity of the polarizing quantity can be reversed by setting the Pol reversal to
"True", which turns the polarizing quantity by 180 degrees.

For definitions of different directional earth-fault characteristics, see

the Directional earth-fault characteristics section in this manual.

The directional calculation module calculates several values which are presented in
the monitored data.
Table 460: Monitored data values
Monitored data values Description
FAULT_DIR The detected direction of fault during fault
situations, that is, when START output is active.

DIRECTION The momentary operating direction indication

output.
ANGLE Also called operating angle, shows the angle
difference between the polarizing quantity (Uo,
U2) and operating quantity (Io, I2).

ANGLE_RCA The angle difference between the operating angle

and Characteristic angle, that is, ANGLE_RCA =
ANGLE – Characteristic angle.
I_OPER The current that is used for fault detection. If the
Operation mode setting is "Phase angle", "Phase
angle 80" or "Phase angle 88", I_OPER is the
measured or calculated residual current. If the
Operation mode setting is "IoSin", I_OPER is
calculated as follows I_OPER = Io × sin(ANGLE).
If the Operation mode setting is "IoCos", I_OPER
is calculated as follows I_OPER = Io ×
cos(ANGLE).

Monitored data values are accessible on the LHMI or through tools via
communications.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT.
When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode
or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is
activated.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B,
Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

630 series 393

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate
delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the timer in
the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset
curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, the reset
timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When the IDMT curves are
selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or
"Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the
reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time
setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current
during the drop-off situation. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer
has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the
drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but always
at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For more
information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section
in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

The angle values available at the input monitor data view are in
radians.

4.2.2.5 Directional earth-fault principles

In many cases it is difficult to achieve selective earth-fault protection based on the

magnitude of residual current only. To obtain a selective earth-fault protection

394 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

scheme, it is necessary to take the phase angle of Io into account. This is done by
comparing the phase angle of the operating and polarizing quantity.

Relay characteristic angle

The Characteristic angle, also known as Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA), Relay
Base Angle or Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), is used in the "Phase angle" mode to
turn the directional characteristic, if the expected fault current angle does not coincide
with the polarizing quantity to produce the maximum torque. That is, RCA is the angle
between the maximum torque line and polarizing quantity. If the polarizing quantity
is in phase with the maximum torque line, RCA is 0 degrees. The angle is positive if
operating current lags the polarizing quantity and negative if it leads the polarizing
quantity.

Example 1.

The "Phase angle" mode is selected, compensated network (φRCA = 0 deg)

=> Characteristic angle = 0 deg

GUID-829C6CEB-19F0-4730-AC98-C5528C35A297 V2 EN

Figure 200: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=0 degrees in a

compensated network

Example 2.

The "Phase angle" mode is selected, solidly earthed network (φRCA = +60 deg)

630 series 395

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

=> Characteristic angle = +60 deg

GUID-D72D678C-9C87-4830-BB85-FE00F5EA39C2 V2 EN

Figure 201: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=+60 degrees in a

solidly earthed network

Example 3.

The "Phase angle" mode is selected, isolated network (φRCA = -90 deg)

=> Characteristic angle = -90 deg

396 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-67BE307E-576A-44A9-B615-2A3B184A410D V2 EN

Figure 202: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=–90 degrees in an

isolated network

Directional earth-fault protection in an isolated neutral network

In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral
point and earth. The only connection is through the phase-to-earth capacitances (C0)
of phases and leakage resistances (R0). This means that the residual current is mainly
capacitive and has a phase shift of –90 degrees compared to the polarizing voltage.
Consequently, the relay characteristic angle (RCA) should be set to -90 degrees and
the operation criteria to "IoSin" or "Phase angle". The width of the operating sector in
the phase angle criteria can be selected with the settings Min forward angle, Max
forward angle, Min reverse angle or Max reverse angle. Figure 203 illustrates a
simplified equivalent circuit for an unearthed network with an earth fault in phase C.

For definitions of different directional earth-fault characteristics, see

Directional earth-fault principles.

630 series 397

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

A070441 V1 EN

Figure 203: Earth-fault situation in an isolated network

Directional earth-fault protection in a compensated network

In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive resonance coil
current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the reactive current
measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the operation
of the relays. In this case, the selectivity is based on the measurement of the active
current component. The magnitude of this component is often small and must be
increased by means of a parallel resistor in the compensation equipment. When
measuring the resistive part of the residual current, the relay characteristic angle
(RCA) should be set to 0 degrees and the operation criteria to "IoSin" or "Phase angle".
Figure 204 illustrates a simplified equivalent circuit for a compensated network with
an earth fault in phase C.

A070444 V2 EN

Figure 204: Earth-fault situation in a compensated network

The Petersen coil or the earthing resistor may be temporarily out of operation. To keep
the protection scheme selective, it is necessary to update the characteristic angle
setting accordingly. This can be done with an auxiliary input in the relay which
receives a signal from an auxiliary switch of the disconnector of the Petersen coil in

398 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

compensated networks. As a result the characteristic angle is set automatically to suit

the earthing method used. The RCA_CTL input can be used to change the operation
criteria as described in Table 461 and Table 462:
Table 461: Relay characteristic angle control in Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) operation criteria
Operation mode setting: RCA_CTL = FALSE RCA_CTL = TRUE
Iosin Actual operation mode: Iosin Actual operation mode: Iocos
Iocos Actual operation mode: Iocos Actual operation mode: Iosin

Table 462: Characteristic angle control in phase angle operation mode

Characteristic RCA_CTL = FALSE RCA_CTL = TRUE
angle setting
-90° φRCA = -90° φRCA = 0°

0° φRCA = 0° φRCA = -90°

Use of the extended phase angle characteristic

The traditional method of adapting the directional earth-fault protection function to
the prevailing neutral earthing conditions is done with the Characteristic angle
setting. In an unearthed network, Characteristic angle is set to -90 degrees and in a
compensated network Characteristic angle is set to 0 degrees. In case the earthing
method of the network is temporarily changed from compensated to unearthed due to
the disconnection of the arc suppression coil, the Characteristic angle setting should
be modified correspondingly. This can be done using the setting groups or the
RCA_CTL input. Alternatively, the operating sector of the directional earth-fault
protection function can be extended to cover the operating sectors of both neutral
earthing principles. Such characteristic is valid for both unearthed and compensated
network and does not require any modification in case the neutral earthing changes
temporarily from the unearthed to compensated network or vice versa.

The extended phase angle characteristic is created by entering a value of over 90

degrees for the Min forward angle setting; a typical value is 170 degrees (Min reverse
angle in case Directional mode is set to "Reverse"). The Max forward angle setting
should be set to cover the possible measurement inaccuracies of current and voltage
transformers; a typical value is 80 degrees (Max reverse angle in case Directional
mode is set to "Reverse").

630 series 399

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

A070443 V3 EN

Figure 205: Extended operation area in directional earth-fault protection

4.2.2.6 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (p.u). These p.u. values
are relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA.
The IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-
related settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3".
Similarly, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3" are supported for
the residual current or voltage-related settings. One of the groups to be used with the
Base value Sel phase or Base value Sel Res settings must be selected.

4.2.2.7 Timer characteristics

DEFxPDEF supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the timer
characteristics with the Operating curve type setting.

The IED provides 16 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special
characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a
user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
The user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type

400 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

values "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is identical in both
cases.

The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages:
Table 463: Timer characteristics supported by different stages
Operating curve type Supported by
DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse x x
(2) ANSI Very Inverse x
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse x x
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse x
(5) ANSI Definite Time x x
(6) Long Time Extremely x
Inverse
(7) Long Time Very Inverse x
(8) Long Time Inverse x
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x
(10) IEC Very Inverse x
(11) IEC Inverse x
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x
(13) IEC Short Time Inverse x
(14) IEC Long Time Inverse x
(15) IEC Definite Time x x
(17) User programmable x x
curve
(18) RI type x
(19) RD type x

For a detailed description of the timers, see the General function block
features section in this manual.

Table 464: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages

Reset curve type Supported by
DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF Note
(1) Immediate x x Available for all operate
time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all operate
time curves
(3) Inverse reset x x Available only for ANSI
and user
programmable curves

630 series 401

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.2.8 Measurement modes

The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and
"Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode
setting.
Table 465: Measurement modes supported by DEFxPDEF stages
Measurement mode Supported measurement modes
DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x

For a detailed description of the measurement modes, see the General

function block features section in this manual.

4.2.2.9 Directional earth-fault characteristics

Phase angle characteristic

The operation criterion phase angle is selected with the Operation mode setting using
the value "Phase angle".

When the phase angle criterion is used, the function indicates with the DIRECTION
output whether the operating quantity is within the forward or reverse operation sector
or within the non-directional sector.

The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area is
limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse
operation area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings.

The sector limits are always given as positive degree values.

In the forward operation area, the Max forward angle setting gives the clockwise
sector and the Min forward angle setting correspondingly the counterclockwise
sector, measured from the Characteristic angle setting.

In the reverse operation area, the Max reverse angle setting gives the clockwise sector
and the Min reverse angle setting correspondingly the counterclockwise sector,
measured from the complement of the Characteristic angle setting (180 degrees phase
shift) .

The relay characteristic angle (RCA) is set to positive if the operating current lags the
polarizing quantity. It is set to negative if it leads the polarizing quantity.

402 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-92004AD5-05AA-4306-9574-9ED8D51524B4 V2 EN

Figure 206: Configurable operating sectors in phase angle characteristic

Table 466: Momentary operating direction

Fault direction The value for DIRECTION
Angle between the polarizing and operating 0 = unknown
quantity is not in any of the defined sectors.
Angle between the polarizing and operating 1= forward
quantity is in the forward sector.
Angle between the polarizing and operating 2 = backward
quantity is in the reverse sector.
Angle between the polarizing and operating 3 = both
quantity is in both the forward and the reverse
sectors, that is, the sectors are overlapping.

If the Allow Non Dir setting is "False", the directional operation (forward, reverse) is
not allowed when the measured polarizing or operating quantities are invalid, that is,
their magnitude is below the set minimum values. The minimum values can be defined
with the settings Min operate current and Min operate voltage. In case of low
magnitudes, the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs are set to 0 = unknown,
except when the Allow non dir setting is "True". In that case, the function is allowed

630 series 403

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

to operate in the directional mode as non-directional, since the directional information

is invalid.

Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) criteria

A more modern approach to directional protection is the active or reactive current
measurement. The operating characteristic of the directional operation depends on the
earthing principle of the network. The Iosin(φ) characteristics is used in an isolated
network, measuring the reactive component of the fault current caused by the earth
capacitance. The Iocos(φ) characteristics is used in a compensated network,
measuring the active component of the fault current.

The operation criteria Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) are selected with the Operation mode
setting using the values "IoSin" or "IoCos" respectively.

The angle correction setting can be used to improve selectivity. The setting decreases
the operation sector. The correction can only be used with the Iosin(φ) or Iocos(φ)
criterion. The RCA_CTL input is used to change the Io characteristic:

Table 467: Relay characteristic angle control in the IoSin and IoCos operation criteria
Operation mode: RCA_CTL = "False" RCA_CTL = "True"
IoSin Actual operation criterion: Actual operation criterion:
Iosin(φ) Iocos(φ)
IoCos Actual operation criterion: Actual operation criterion:
Iocos(φ) Iosin(φ)

When the Iosin(φ) or Iocos(φ) criterion is used, the component indicates a forward- or
reverse-type fault through the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs, in which 1
equals a forward fault and 2 equals a reverse fault. Directional operation is not allowed
(the Allow non dir setting is "False") when the measured polarizing or operating
quantities are not valid, that is, when their magnitude is below the set minimum
values. The minimum values can be defined with the Min operate current and Min
operate voltage settings. In case of low magnitude, the FAULT_DIR and
DIRECTION outputs are set to 0 = unknown, except when the Allow non dir setting
is "True". In that case, the function is allowed to operate in the directional mode as
non-directional, since the directional information is invalid.

The calculated Iosin(φ) or Iocos(φ) current used in direction determination can be read
through the I_OPER monitored data. The value can be passed directly to a decisive
element, which provides the final start and operate signals.

The I_OPER monitored data gives an absolute value of the calculated

current.

The following examples show the characteristics of the different operation criteria:

Example 1.

404 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Iosin(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault

=> FAULT_DIR = 1

GUID-560EFC3C-34BF-4852-BF8C-E3A2A7750275 V2 EN

Figure 207: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in forward fault

The operating sector is limited by Angle correction, that is, the operating sector is 180
degrees - 2*(Angle correction).

Example 2.

Iosin(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault

=> FAULT_DIR = 2

630 series 405

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-10A890BE-8C81-45B2-9299-77DD764171E1 V2 EN

Figure 208: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in reverse fault

Example 3.

Iocos(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault

=> FAULT_DIR = 1

GUID-11E40C1F-6245-4532-9199-2E2F1D9B45E4 V2 EN

Figure 209: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in forward fault

Example 4.

406 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Iocos(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault

=> FAULT_DIR = 2

GUID-54ACB854-F11D-4AF2-8BDB-69E5F6C13EF1 V2 EN

Figure 210: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in reverse fault

Phase angle 80
The operation criterion phase angle 80 is selected with the Operation mode setting by
using the value "Phase angle 80".

Phase angle 80 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the
following differences:
• The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they
have a fixed value of 80 degrees
• The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded.

The sector rounding is used for cancelling the CT measurement errors at low current
amplitudes. When the current amplitude falls below three percent of the nominal
current, the sector is reduced to 70 degrees at the fixed sector side. This makes the
protection more selective, which means that the phase angle measurement errors do
not cause faulty operation.

There is no sector rounding on the other side of the sector.

630 series 407

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-EFC9438D-9169-4733-9BE9-6B343F37001A V2 EN

Figure 211: Operating characteristic for phase angle 80

Io / % of In

10
Min forward angle 80 deg
9
8
7
6
Operating zone
4
3 3% of In
2 70 deg
Non- 1 1% of In
operating
zone -90 -75 -60 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90
GUID-49D23ADF-4DA0-4F7A-8020-757F32928E60 V2 EN

Figure 212: Phase angle 80 amplitude

Phase angle 88
The operation criterion phase angle 88 is selected with the Operation mode setting
using the value "Phase angle 88".

408 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Phase angle 88 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the
following differences:
• The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they
have a fixed value of 88 degrees
• The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded.

Sector rounding in the phase angle 88 consists of three parts:

• If the current amplitude is between 1...20 percent of the nominal current, the
sector limit increases linearly from 73 degrees to 85 degrees
• If the current amplitude is between 20...100 percent of the nominal current, the
sector limit increases linearly from 85 degrees to 88 degrees
• If the current amplitude is more than 100 percent of the nominal current, the
sector limit is 88 degrees.

There is no sector rounding on the other side of the sector.

GUID-0F0560B7-943E-4CED-A4B8-A561BAE08956 V2 EN

Figure 213: Operating characteristic for phase angle 88

630 series 409

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Io / % of In
88 deg
100 100% of In
Min forward angle
90
80
70

50
40
30 85 deg
20 20% of In
10 73 deg
1% of In
-90 -75 -60 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90
GUID-F9F1619D-E1B5-4650-A5CB-B62A7F6B0A90 V2 EN

Figure 214: Phase angle 88 amplitude

4.2.2.10 Application

The directional earth-fault protection (DEFxPDEF) is designed for protection and

clearance of earth faults and for earth-fault protection of different equipment
connected to the power systems, such as shunt capacitor banks or shunt reactors, and
for backup earth-fault protection of power transformers.

Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time
delays. DEFxPDEF consists of two different stages:
• low (DEFLPDEF)
• high (DEFHPDEF)

DEFLPDEF contains several types of time delay characteristics. DEFHPDEF is used

for fast clearance of serious earth faults.

The protection can be based on the phase angle criterion with extended operating
sector. It can also be based on measuring either the reactive part Iosin(φ) or the active
part Iocos(φ) of the residual current. In isolated networks or in networks with high
impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is significantly smaller than the
short-circuit currents. In addition, the magnitude of the fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.

The function uses the residual current components Iocos(φ) or Iosin(φ) according to
the earthing method, where φ is the angle between the residual current and the
reference residual voltage (-Uo). In compensated networks, the phase angle criterion
with extended operating sector can also be used. When the relay characteristic angle
RCA is 0 degrees, the negative quadrant of the operation sector can be extended with
the Min forward angle setting. The operation sector can be set between 0 and -180
degrees, so that the total operation sector is from +90 to -180 degrees. In other words,

410 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

the sector can be up to 270 degrees wide. This allows the protection settings to stay the
same when the resonance coil is disconnected from between the neutral point and
earth.

System neutral earthing is meant to protect personnel and equipment and to reduce
interference for example in telecommunication systems. The neutral earthing sets
challenges for protection systems, especially for earth-fault protection.

In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral

point and earth. The only connection is through the line-to-earth capacitances (C0) of
phases and leakage resistances (R0). This means that the residual current is mainly
capacitive and has –90 degrees phase shift compared to the residual voltage (-Uo). The
characteristic angle is -90 degrees.

In resonance-earthed networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive

resonance coil current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the
reactive current measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would
disturb the operation of the relays. In this case, the selectivity is based on the
measurement of the active current component. This means that the residual current is
mainly resistive and has zero phase shift compared to the residual voltage (-Uo) and
the characteristic angle is 0 degrees. Often the magnitude of this component is small,
and must be increased by means of a parallel resistor in the compensation equipment.

In networks where the neutral point is earthed through low resistance, the
characteristic angle is also 0 degrees (for phase angle). Alternatively, Iocos(φ)
operation can be used.

In solidly earthed networks, the Characteristic angle is typically set to +60 degrees for
the phase angle. Alternatively, Iosin(φ) operation can be used with a reversal
polarizing quantity. The polarizing quantity can be rotated 180 degrees by setting the
Pol reversal parameter to "True" or by switching the polarity of the residual voltage
measurement wires. Although the Iosin(φ) operation can be used in solidly earthed
networks, the phase angle is recommended.

Connection of measuring transformers in directional earth fault

applications
The residual current Io can be measured with a core balance current transformer or the
residual connection of the phase current signals. If the neutral of the network is either
isolated or earthed with high impedance, a core balance current transformer is
recommended to be used in earth-fault protection. To ensure sufficient accuracy of
residual current measurements and consequently the selectivity of the scheme, the
core balance current transformers should have a transformation ratio of at least 70:1.
Lower transformation ratios such as 50:1 or 50:5 are not recommended.

Attention should be paid to make sure the measuring transformers are connected
correctly so that DEFxPDEF is able to detect the fault current direction without
failure. As directional earth fault uses residual current and residual voltage (-Uo), the
poles of the measuring transformers must match each other and also the fault current
direction. Also the earthing of the cable sheath must be taken into notice when using

630 series 411

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

core balance current transformers. The following figure describes how measuring
transformers can be connected to the IED.

A070697 V2 EN

Figure 215: Connection of measuring transformers

4.2.2.11 Signals
Table 468: DEFLPDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 Relay characteristic angle control

412 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 469: DEFHPDEF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 Relay characteristic angle control

Table 470: DEFLPDEF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started
FAULT_DIR INTEGER Detected fault direction

Table 471: DEFHPDEF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started
FAULT_DIR INTEGER Detected fault direction

4.2.2.12 Settings
Table 472: DEFLPDEF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode
Forward
Reverse
Start value 0.010 - 5.000 pu 0.005 0.010 Start value
Voltage start value 0.010 - 1.000 pu 0.001 0.010 Voltage start value
Characteristic angle -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Characteristic angle
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Table continues on next page

630 series 413

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Operate delay time 0.06 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.06 Operate delay time

Table 473: DEFLPDEF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation mode Phase angle - - Phase angle Operating quantity used to determine fault
IoSin direction
IoCos
Phase angle 80
Phase angle 88
Pol quantity Zero seq. volt. - - Zero seq. volt. Polarizing quantity
Neg. seq. volt.
Max forward angle 0 - 180 Deg 1 88 Maximum phase angle in forward
direction
Min forward angle 0 - 180 Deg 1 88 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Max reverse angle 0 - 180 Deg 1 88 Maximum phase angle in reverse
direction
Min reverse angle 0 - 180 Deg 1 88 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset
Enable voltage limit No - - Yes Enable voltage limit
Yes

Table 474: DEFLPDEF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

414 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 475: DEFLPDEF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Measurement mode RMS - - DFT Selects used measurement mode
DFT
Peak-to-Peak
Correction angle 0.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle correction
Min operate current 0.005 - 1.000 pu 0.001 0.005 Minimum operating current
Min operate voltage 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 0.060 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Allow Non Dir Not allowed - - Not allowed Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir
Allowed info is invalid
Pol reversal No - - No Rotate polarizing quantity
Yes

Table 476: DEFHPDEF Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode
Forward
Reverse
Start value 0.10 - 40.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Start value
Voltage start value 0.010 - 1.000 pu 0.001 0.010 Voltage start value
Characteristic angle -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Characteristic angle
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
Operate delay time 0.06 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.06 Operate delay time

630 series 415

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 477: DEFHPDEF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation mode Phase angle - - Phase angle Operating quantity used to determine fault
IoSin direction
IoCos
Phase angle 80
Phase angle 88
Pol quantity Zero seq. volt. - - Zero seq. volt. Polarizing quantity
Neg. seq. volt.
Max forward angle 0 - 180 Deg 1 88 Maximum phase angle in forward
direction
Min forward angle 0 - 180 Deg 1 88 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Max reverse angle 0 - 180 Deg 1 88 Maximum phase angle in reverse
direction
Min reverse angle 0 - 180 Deg 1 88 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset
Enable voltage limit No - - Yes Enable voltage limit
Yes

Table 478: DEFHPDEF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 479: DEFHPDEF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Measurement mode RMS - - DFT Selects used measurement mode
DFT
Peak-to-Peak
Correction angle 0.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle correction
Min operate current 0.005 - 1.000 pu 0.001 0.005 Minimum operating current
Min operate voltage 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Table continues on next page

416 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 0.060 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Allow Non Dir Not allowed - - Not allowed Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir
Allowed info is invalid
Pol reversal No - - No Rotate polarizing quantity
Yes

4.2.2.13 Measured values

Table 480: DEFLPDEF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (DFT)
I_ANGL_RES REAL 0 Residual current phase angle
I_RMS_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (RMS)
I_PTOP_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (PTOP)
I2_AMPL REAL 0 Negative sequence current amplitude (DFT)
I2_ANGL REAL 0 Negative sequence current phase angle
U_AMPL_RES REAL 0 Residual voltage amplitude (DFT)
U_ANGL_RES REAL 0 Residual voltage phase angle
U2_AMPL REAL 0 Negative sequence voltage amplitude (DFT)
U2_ANGL REAL 0 Negative sequence voltage phase angle
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 Relay characteristic angle control

Table 481: DEFHPDEF Measured values

Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (DFT)
I_ANGL_RES REAL 0 Residual current phase angle
I_RMS_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (RMS)
I_PTOP_RES REAL 0 Residual current amplitude (PTOP)
I2_AMPL REAL 0 Negative sequence current amplitude (DFT)
I2_ANGL REAL 0 Negative sequence current phase angle
Table continues on next page

630 series 417

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

U_AMPL_RES REAL 0 Residual voltage amplitude (DFT)
U_ANGL_RES REAL 0 Residual voltage phase angle
U2_AMPL REAL 0 Negative sequence voltage amplitude (DFT)
U2_ANGL REAL 0 Negative sequence voltage phase angle
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable signal for current multiplier
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 Relay characteristic angle control

4.2.2.14 Monitored data

Table 482: DEFLPDEF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
FAULT_DIR INTEGER 3=Both - Detected fault direction
0=Unknown
1=Forward
2=Backward
DIRECTION INTEGER 3=Both - Direction information
0=Unknown
1=Forward
2=Backward
ANGLE_RCA REAL - deg Angle between operating
angle and characteristic
angle
ANGLE REAL - deg Angle between polarizing
and operating quantity
I_OPER REAL - A Calculated operating
current
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time
INVAL_CRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Invalid curve parameters
1=TRUE

418 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 483: DEFHPDEF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
FAULT_DIR INTEGER 3=Both - Detected fault direction
0=Unknown
1=Forward
2=Backward
DIRECTION INTEGER 3=Both - Direction information
0=Unknown
1=Forward
2=Backward
ANGLE_RCA REAL - deg Angle between operating
angle and characteristic
angle
ANGLE REAL - deg Angle between polarizing
and operating quantity
I_OPER REAL - A Calculated operating
current
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time
INVAL_CRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Invalid curve parameters
1=TRUE

4.2.2.15 Technical data

Table 484: DEFxPDEF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

DEFLPDEF Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
Voltage
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un
Phase angle: ±2°
DEFHPDEF Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
(at currents in the range of 0.1…10 × In)
±5.0% of the set value
(at currents in the range of 10…40 × In)
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un
Phase angle: ±2°

Start time 1)2) DEFHPDEF and Typically 54 ms (±15 ms)

DEFLPTDEF:
IFault = 2 × set Start
value
Reset time Typically 40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Table continues on next page

630 series 419

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Characteristic Value
Retardation time <30 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression

1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, earth-fault
current with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5 to 20

4.2.2.16 Technical revision history

Table 485: DEFLPDEF technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B The setting Voltage start value is set in reference
to Voltage base Val PP, if Pol quantity is set to
“Neg. seq. volt" (previously it was Voltage base
Val Res).
C Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting

Table 486: DEFHPDEF technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B The setting Voltage start value is set in reference
to Voltage base Val PP, if Pol quantity is set to
“Neg. seq. volt" (previously it was Voltage base
Val Res).
C Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting

4.2.3 Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF

4.2.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Transient/intermittent earth-fault INTRPTEF Io> ->IEF 67NIEF
protection

420 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.3.2 Function block

A070664 V2 EN

Figure 216: Function block

The INTRPTEF function block should always be connected to SMAI

with 80 samples per cycle.

4.2.3.3 Functionality

The transient/intermittent measuring earth-fault protection INTRPTEF is a function

designed for the protection and clearance of permanent and intermittent earth faults in
distribution and sub-transmission networks. Fault detection is done from the residual
current and residual voltage signals by monitoring the transients.

4.2.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of transient/intermittent earth-fault protection can be described by

using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

GUID-7A54CD1C-5E46-447B-B308-B23B45147FF3 V2 EN

Figure 217: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

630 series 421

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Level detector
The Level detector module is used only when selected Operation mode is "Transient
EF". The module compares the measured residual voltage to the set Voltage start
value. If the measured value exceeds the set Voltage start value, the module reports the
exceeding of the value to the Fault indication logic.

Transient detector
The transient detection is supervised with a settable current threshold. With a special
filtering technique, the setting Min operate current is based on the fundamental
frequency current. This setting should be set based on the value of the parallel resistor
of the coil, with security margin. For example, if the resistive current of the parallel
resistor is 10 A, a value of 0.7 × 10 A = 7 A could be used. The same setting is
applicable in case the coil is disconnected and the network becomes unearthed.
Generally, a smaller value should be used and it must never exceed the value of the
parallel resistor to allow operation of the faulted feeder.

Fault indication logic

Depending on the set Operation mode, INTRPTEF has two independent modes for
detecting earth faults. The "Transient EF" mode is intended to detect all kinds of earth
faults. The "Intermittent EF" mode is dedicated for detecting intermittent earth faults
in cable networks.

To satisfy the sensitivity requirements, the basic earth-fault protection

(based on fundamental frequency phasors) should always be used in
parallel with INTRPTEF function.

The Fault indication logic module determines the direction of the fault. The fault
direction determination is secured by multi-frequency neutral admittance
measurement and special filtering techniques. This enables fault direction
determination which is not sensitive to disturbances in measured Io and Uo signals, for
example, switching transients.

When the setting value "Forward" is used, the protection operates when the fault is in
the protected feeder. When the setting value "Reverse" is used, the protection operates
when the fault is outside the protected feeder (in the background network). If the
direction has no importance, the value "Non-directional" can be selected. The
detected fault direction FAULT_DIR is available as output or in the monitored data
view.

In the "Transient EF" mode, when the start transient of the fault is detected and the Uo
level exceeds the set Voltage start value, Timer 1 is activated. Timer 1 is kept activated
until the Uo level exceeds the set value or in case of a drop-off, the drop-off duration
is shorter than the set Reset delay time.

In the "Intermittent EF" mode, when the start transient of the fault is detected and the
Uo level exceeds the set Voltage start value, Timer 1 is activated. When a required
amount of intermittent earth-fault transients set with the Peak counter limit setting are

422 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

detected without the function being reset (depends on the drop-off time set with the
Reset delay time setting), Timer 1 is activated. The START output is kept activated as
long as transients are occurring during the drop-off time Reset delay time.

Timer 1
The time characteristic is according to DT. In the "Transient EF" mode, the OPERATE
output is activated after Operate delay time if the residual voltage exceeds the set
Voltage start value. The Reset delay time starts to elapse when residual voltage falls
below Voltage start value. If there is no OPERATE activation, for example, the fault
disappears momentarily, START stays activated until the Reset delay time elapses.
After OPERATE activation, START and OPERATE signals are reset as soon as Uo
falls below Voltage start Value.

GUID-97ED7245-6CCD-4928-9875-88FA50785F22 V1 EN

Figure 218: Example of INTRPTEF operation in ”Transient EF” mode in the faulty
feeder

In the "Intermittent EF" mode, the OPERATE output is activated when the following
conditions are fulfilled.
• The number of transients that have been detected exceeds the Peak counter limit
setting
• The timer has reached the time set in the Operate delay time setting
• One additional transient is detected during the drop-off cycle

630 series 423

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient (peak). In case there
is no OPERATE activation, for example, the fault disappears momentarily. START
stays activated until the Reset delay time elapses, that is, reset takes place if time
between transients is more than Reset delay time. After OPERATE activation, a fixed
pulse length of 100 ms for OPERATE is given, whereas START is reset after Reset
delay time elapses.

GUID-1D23AD43-EA14-46F2-85A5-7D6952A04F1A V1 EN

Figure 219: Example of INTRPTEF operation in ”Intermittent EF” mode in the

faulty feeder, Peak counter limit = 3

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets Timer 1. The binary input BLK_ST can
be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be used to block the
operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the prevailing value
by activating the FR_TIMER input.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

424 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Timer 2
If the function is used in the directional mode and an opposite direction transient is
detected, the BLK_EF output is activated for the fixed delay time of 25 ms. If the
START output is activated when the BLK_EF output is active, the BLK_EF output is
deactivated. Activation of BLOCK input deactivates the output BLK_EF and resets
Timer 2.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.2.3.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the residual current or voltage-related
settings, for example, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3". One
of the groups to be used with the "Base value Sel Res" setting must be selected.

4.2.3.6 Application

INTRPTEF is an earth-fault function dedicated to operate in intermittent and

permanent earth faults occurring in distribution and sub-transmission networks. Fault
detection is done from the residual current and residual voltage signals by monitoring
the transients with predefined criteria. As the function has a dedicated purpose for the
fault types, fast detection and clearance of the faults can be achieved.

Intermittent earth fault

Intermittent earth fault is a special type of fault that is encountered especially in
compensated networks with underground cables. A typical reason for this type of fault
is the deterioration of cable insulation either due to mechanical stress or due to
insulation material aging process where water or moisture gradually penetrates the
cable insulation. This eventually reduces the voltage withstand of the insulation,
leading to a series of cable insulation breakdowns. The fault is initiated as the phase-
to-earth voltage exceeds the reduced insulation level of the fault point and mostly
extinguishes itself as the fault current drops to zero for the first time, as shown in
Figure 220. As a result, very short transients, that is, rapid changes in the form of
spikes in residual current (Io) and in residual voltage (Uo), can be repeatedly
measured. Typically, the fault resistance in case of an intermittent earth fault is only
a few ohms.

630 series 425

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Residual current Io and residual voltage Uo

COMP. COIL
Iov
Re (Healthy
K Feeder)
0.1

Residual Voltage x 10 (kV)

FEEDER FEEDER MEAS

2
Residual Current (kA)
INCOMER
0

Uo
Ictot Ioj Iov -0.1 Uo
Pulse width
400 - 800 s
Fault -0.2
Point UUtres R Ioj
tres f Pulse interval
(Faulty 5 - 300 ms
Feeder)
-0.3
Peak value
~0.1 ... 5 kA

GUID-415078AD-21B3-4103-9622-712BB88F274A V2 EN

Figure 220: Typical intermittent earth-fault characteristics

Earth-fault transients
In general, earth faults generate transients in currents and voltages. There are several
factors that affect the magnitude and frequency of these transients, such as the fault
moment on the voltage wave, fault location, fault resistance and the parameters of the
feeders and the supplying transformers. In the fault initiation, the voltage of the faulty
phase decreases and the corresponding capacitance is discharged to earth (→
discharge transients). At the same time, the voltages of the healthy phases increase and
the related capacitances are charged (→ charge transient).

If the fault is permanent (non-transient) in nature, only the initial fault transient in
current and voltage can be measured, whereas the intermittent fault creates repetitive
transients.

426 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-CC4ADDEA-EE11-4011-B184-F873473EBA9F V1 EN

Figure 221: Example of earth-fault transients, including discharge and charge

transient components, when a permanent fault occurs in a 20 kV
network in phase C

4.2.3.7 Signals
Table 487: INTRPTEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block of start signal
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze operation timer

Table 488: INTRPTEF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
FAULT_DIR INTEGER Detected fault direction
BLK_EF BOOLEAN Block signal for EF to indicate opposite direction
peaks

630 series 427

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.3.8 Settings
Table 489: INTRPTEF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode (Non-
Forward directional,Forward,Reverse)
Reverse
Voltage start value 0.05 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.20 Voltage start value for transient EF
Operate delay time 0.04 - 1200.00 s 0.01 0.50 Operate delay time

Table 490: INTRPTEF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Operation mode Intermittent EF - - Intermittent EF Operation criteria
Transient EF
Min operate current 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current for transient
detector

Table 491: INTRPTEF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Peak counter limit 2 - 20 - 1 2 Min requirement for peak counter before
start in IEF mode
Pol reversal 0-1 - 1 0 Rotate polarizing quantity
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Reset delay time
Block EF reset time 0.025 - 1.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time of the BLK_EF output

4.2.3.9 Measured values

Table 492: INTRPTEF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip signal
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block of start signal
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze operation timer

428 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.3.10 Monitored data

Table 493: INTRPTEF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal
1=TRUE
FAULT_DIR INTEGER 0=Unknown - Detected fault direction
1=Forward
2=Backward
BLK_EF BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Block signal for EF to
1=TRUE indicate opposite
direction peaks
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

4.2.3.11 Technical data

Table 494: INTRPTEF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy (Uo criteria with transient At the frequency f = fn
protection)
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Uo
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5

4.2.3.12 Technical revision history

Table 495: INTRPTEF technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Setting name changed from Ground start value to
Voltage start value
C Min operate current and Pol reversal settings are
added. The minimum setting value changed from
0.005 to 0.05 and default setting value changed
from 0.005 to 0.20 for Voltage start value setting.

4.2.4 Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM

4.2.4.1 Identification
Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM Yo>-> 21YN

630 series 429

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.4.2 Function block

GUID-D0EF6621-9FAB-4950-9F06-A617BC8AED6C V2 EN

Figure 222: Function block

4.2.4.3 Functionality

The admittance-based earth-fault protection function EFPADM provides a selective

earth-fault protection function for high-resistance earthed, unearthed and
compensated networks. It can be applied for the protection of overhead lines as well
as with underground cables. It can be used as an alternative solution to traditional
residual current-based earth-fault protection functions, such as the IoCos mode in
DEFxPDEF. Main advantages of EFPADM include a versatile applicability, good
sensitivity and easy setting principles.

EFPADM is based on evaluating the neutral admittance of the network, that is, the
quotient:
Yo = Io / −Uo
GUID-F8BBC6A4-47BB-4FCB-A2E0-87FD46073AAF V1 EN (Equation 38)

The measured admittance is compared to the admittance characteristic boundaries in

the admittance plane. The supported characteristics include overadmittance,
oversusceptance, overconductance or any combination of the three. The directionality
of the oversusceptance and overconductance criteria can be defined as forward,
reverse or non-directional, and the boundary lines can be tilted if required by the
application. This allows the optimization of the shape of the admittance characteristics
for any given application.

EFPADM supports two calculation algorithms for admittance. The admittance

calculation can be set to include or exclude the prefault zero-sequence values of the
network. Furthermore, the calculated admittance is recorded at the time of the trip and
it can be monitored for post-fault analysis purposes.

To ensure the security of the protection, the admittance calculation is supervised by a

residual overvoltage condition which releases the admittance protection during a fault
condition. Alternatively, the release signal can be provided by an external binary
signal.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

430 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the admittance-based earth-fault protection can be described using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-25147744-FFCB-46DA-AAA9-421C7C437D8F V2 EN

Figure 223: Functional module diagram

Neutral admittance calculation

The function can operate on the measured or calculated residual quantities. The
residual current is automatically calculated from the phase quantities if the measured
residual quantities are not available.

When the residual voltage exceeds the set threshold Voltage start value, an earth fault
is detected and the neutral admittance calculation is released.

To ensure a sufficient accuracy for the Io and Uo measurements, it is required that the
residual voltage exceeds the value set by Min operate voltage. If the admittance
calculation mode is "Delta", the minimum change in the residual voltage due to a fault
must be 0.01 pu to enable the operation. Similarly, the residual current must exceed
the value set by Min operate current.

The polarity of the polarizing quantity Uo can be changed, that is,

rotated by 180 degrees, by setting the Pol reversal parameter to "True"
or by switching the polarity of the residual voltage measurement
wires.

630 series 431

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

As an alternative for the internal residual overvoltage-based start condition, the

neutral admittance protection can also be externally released by utilizing the
RELEASE input.

When Admittance Clc mode is set to "Delta", the external logic used must be able to
give RELEASE in less than 0.1 s. Otherwise the collected pre-fault values are
overwritten with fault time values. If it is slower, Admittance Clc mode must be set to
“Normal”.

Neutral admittance is calculated as the quotient between the residual current and
residual voltage (polarity reversed) fundamental frequency phasors. The Admittance
Clc mode setting defines the calculation mode:

Admittance Clc mode = "Normal"

Io fault
Yo =
−Uo fault
GUID-B1E03EA1-E958-43F3-8A28-2D268138DE36 V1 EN (Equation 39)

Admittance Clc mode = "Delta"

Io fault − Io prefault ∆ Io
Yo = =
−(Uo fault − Uo prefault ) − ∆Uo
GUID-B0611FF1-46FD-4E81-A11D-4721F0AF7BF8 V1 EN (Equation 40)

Yo Calculated neutral admittance [Siemens]

Iofault Residual current during the fault [Amperes]

Uofault Residual voltage during the fault [Volts]

Ioprefault Prefault residual current [Amperes]

Uoprefault Prefault residual voltage [Volts]

ΔIo Change in the residual current due to fault [Amperes]

ΔUo Change in the residual voltage due to fault [Volts]

Traditionally, admittance calculation is done with the calculation mode "Normal",

that is, with the current and voltage values directly measured during the fault. As an
alternative, by selecting the calculation mode "Delta", the prefault zero-sequence
asymmetry of the network can be removed from the admittance calculation.
Theoretically, this makes the admittance calculation totally immune to fault
resistance, that is, the estimated admittance value is not affected by fault resistance.
Utilization of the change in Uo and Io due to a fault in the admittance calculation also
mitigates the effects of the VT and CT measurement errors, thus improving the
measuring accuracy, the sensitivity and the selectivity of the protection.

Calculation mode "Delta" is recommended in case a high sensitivity

of the protection is required, if the network has a high degree of
asymmetry during the healthy state or if the residual current

432 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

measurement is based on sum connection, that is, the Holmgren

connection.

Neutral admittance calculation produces the following values during forward and
reverse faults:

Fault in reverse direction, that is, outside the protected feeder:

Yo = −Y Fdtot
GUID-B6E3F720-1F9F-4C11-A5DC-722838E8CCDA V1 EN (Equation 41)

I eFd
≈ −j⋅
U ph
GUID-19AA418B-9A0A-4CEE-8772-0CD3F595E63F V1 EN (Equation 42)

YFdtot Sum of the phase-to-earth admittances (YFdA, YFdB, YFdC) of the protected feeder

IeFd Magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is
zero ohm
Uph Magnitude of the nominal phase-to-earth voltage of the system

Equation 41 shows that in case of outside faults, the measured admittance equals the
admittance of the protected feeder with a negative sign. The measured admittance is
dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the measured admittance is due to the
leakage losses of the feeder. Theoretically, the measured admittance is located in the
third quadrant in the admittance plane close to the im(Yo) axis, see Figure 224.

The result of Equation 41 is valid regardless of the neutral earthing

method. In compensated networks the compensation degree does not
affect the result. This enables a straightforward setting principle for
the neutral admittance protection: admittance characteristic is set to
cover the value Yo = –YFdtot with a suitable margin.

Due to inaccuracies in voltage and current measurement, the small

real part of the calculated neutral admittance may appear as positive,
which brings the measured admittance in the fourth quadrant in the
admittance plane. This should be considered when setting the
admittance characteristic.

630 series 433

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Io
A B C
Protected feeder

EA
~ YFd
EB

EC
~
~ Background network
Rn
Uo
Lcc Reverse
Rcc Fault
YBg

(IeTot - IeFd) IeFd

Im(Yo)

Re(Yo)
Reverse fault:
Yo ≈ -j*IeFd/Uph

GUID-B852BF65-9C03-49F2-8FA9-E958EB37FF13 V1 EN

Figure 224: Admittance calculation during a reverse fault

RCC Resistance of the parallel resistor

LCC Inductance of the compensation coil

Rn Resistance of the neutral earthing resistor

YFd Phase-to-earth admittance of the protected feeder

YBg Phase-to-earth admittance of the background network

For example, in a 15 kV compensated network with the magnitude of the earth-fault

current in the protected feeder being 10 A (Rf = 0 ohm), the theoretical value for the
measured admittance during an earth fault in the reverse direction, that is, outside the
protected feeder, can be calculated:

I eFd 10 A
Yo ≈ − j ⋅ = −j⋅ = − j ⋅ 1.15 milliSiemens
U ph 15 3kV
GUID-E2A45F20-9821-436E-94F1-F0BFCB78A1E3 V1 EN (Equation 43)

434 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The result is valid regardless of the neutral earthing method.

In this case, the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to leakage losses of
the protected feeder. As they are typically very small, the resistive part is close to zero.
Due to inaccuracies in the voltage and current measurement, the small real part of the
apparent neutral admittance may appear positive. This should be considered in the
setting of the admittance characteristic.

Fault in the forward direction, that is, inside the protected feeder:

Unearthed network:

Yo = Y Bgtot
GUID-5F1D2145-3C0F-4F8F-9E17-5B88C1822566 V1 EN (Equation 44)

I −I 
≈ j ⋅  eTot eFd 
 U ph 
 
GUID-0B7C9BA9-B41B-4825-9C1B-F8F36640B693 V1 EN (Equation 45)

Compensated network:

Yo = Y Bgtot + Y CC
GUID-F3810944-D0E1-4C9A-A99B-8409F4D3CF05 V1 EN (Equation 46)

I Rcc + j ⋅ ( I eTot ⋅ (1 − K ) − I eFd )

≈
U ph
GUID-208EA80C-62B6-46E0-8A5B-DC425F0FE122 V1 EN (Equation 47)

High-resistance earthed network:

Yo = Y Bgtot + Y Rn
GUID-F91DA4E4-F439-4BFA-AA0D-5839B1574946 V1 EN (Equation 48)

I Rn + j ⋅ ( I eTot − I eFd )
≈
U ph
GUID-CAA0C492-20CF-406C-80AC-8301375AB454 V1 EN (Equation 49)

YBgtot Sum of the phase-to-earth admittances (YBgA, YBgB, YBgC) of the background network

YCC Admittance of the earthing arrangement (compensation coil and parallel resistor)

IRcc Rated current of the parallel resistor

IeFd Magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is zero ohm

IeTot Magnitude of the uncompensated earth-fault current of the network when Rf is zero ohm

K Compensation degree, K = 1 full resonance, K<1 undercompensated, K>1 overcompensated

IRn Rated current of the neutral earthing resistor

Equation 44 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in unearthed
networks, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background network.

630 series 435

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The admittance is dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the measured
admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network. Theoretically, the
measured admittance is located in the first quadrant in the admittance plane, close to
the im(Yo) axis, see Figure 225.

Equation 46 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in compensated
networks, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background network
and the coil including the parallel resistor. Basically, the compensation degree
determines the imaginary part of the measured admittance and the resistive part is due
to the parallel resistor of the coil and the leakage losses of the background network and
the losses of the coil. Theoretically, the measured admittance is located in the first or
fourth quadrant in the admittance plane, depending on the compensation degree, see
Figure 225.

Before the parallel resistor is connected, the resistive part of the

measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background
network and the losses of the coil. As they are typically small, the
resistive part may not be sufficiently large to secure the discrimination
of the fault and its direction based on the measured conductance. This
and the rating and the operation logic of the parallel resistor should be
considered when setting the admittance characteristic in compensated
networks.

Equation 48 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in high-resistance
earthed systems, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background
network and the neutral earthing resistor. Basically, the imaginary part of the
measured admittance is due to the phase-to-earth capacitances of the background
network, and the resistive part is due to the neutral earthing resistor and the leakage
losses of the background network. Theoretically, the measured admittance is located
in the first quadrant in the admittance plane, see Figure 225.

436 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Io
A B C
Protected feeder
Forward
Fault
EA
~ YFd
EB

EC
~
IeFd IeTot
~ Background network
Rn
Uo
Lcc
Rcc
YBg (IeTot - IeFd)

Forward fault,
high resistance earthed network:
Yo ≈ (IRn+j*(IeTot-IeFd))/Uph
Im(Yo)

Forward fault,
unearthed network:
Yo ≈ j*(IeTot-IeFd)/Uph
Under-comp. (K<1)

Re(Yo)
Resonance (K=1)
Reverse fault:
Yo ≈ -j*IeFd/Uph
Over-comp. (K>1)

Forward fault, compensated network:

Yo ≈ (Ircc + j*(IeTot*(1-K) - IeFd))/Uph
GUID-5DB19698-38F9-433E-954F-4EBDBA5B63BD V1 EN

Figure 225: Admittance calculation during a forward fault

When the network is fully compensated in compensated networks,

theoretically during a forward fault the imaginary part of the measured
admittance equals the susceptance of the protected feeder with a
negative sign. The discrimination between a forward and reverse fault
must therefore be based on the real part of the measured admittance,
that is, conductance. Thus, the best selectivity is achieved when the

630 series 437

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

compensated network is operated either in the undercompensated or

overcompensated mode.

For example, in a 15 kV compensated network, the magnitude of the earth fault current
of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 ohm) and the magnitude of the network is 100
A (Rf = 0 ohm). During an earth fault, a 15 A resistor is connected in parallel to the coil
after a 1.0 second delay. Compensation degree is overcompensated, K = 1.1.

During an earth fault in the forward direction, that is, inside the protected feeder, the
theoretical value for the measured admittance after the connection of the parallel
resistor can be calculated:

I Rcc + j ⋅ ( I eTot ⋅ (1 − K ) − I eFd )

Yo ≈
U ph
15 A + j ⋅ (100 A ⋅ (1 − 1.1) − 10 A)
= ≈ (1.73 − j ⋅ 2.31) milliSiemens
15kV 3
GUID-8763BA04-22DC-4B93-B52D-1E8FD44A68B9 V1 EN (Equation 50)

Before the parallel resistor is connected, the resistive part of the measured admittance
is due to the leakage losses of the background network and the losses of the coil. As
they are typically small, the resistive part may not be sufficiently large to secure the
discrimination of the fault and its direction based on the measured conductance. This
and the rating and the operation logic of the parallel resistor should be considered
when setting the admittance characteristic.

The calculated admittance values are available for post-fault analysis purposes as the
outputs COND_RES (real part of the calculated neutral admittance) and SUS_RES
(imaginary part of the calculated neutral admittance). The unit of admittance is
milliSiemens (mS).

When a high sensitivity of the protection is required, the residual

current should be measured with a cable/ring core CT, that is, the
Ferranti CT. Also the use of the sensitive Io input should be
considered. The residual voltage measurement should be done with an
open delta connection of the three single pole-insulated voltage
transformers.

Operation characteristic
After the admittance calculation is released, the calculated neutral admittance is
compared to the admittance characteristic boundaries in the admittance plane. If the
calculated neutral admittance Yo moves outside the characteristic, the enabling signal
is sent to the timer.

EFPADM supports a wide range of different characteristics to achieve the maximum

flexibility and sensitivity in different applications. The basic characteristic shape is
selected with the Operation mode and Directional mode settings. Operation mode
defines which operation criterion or criteria are enabled and Directional mode defines

438 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

if the forward, reverse or non-directional boundary lines for that particular operation
mode are activated. The detected fault direction information is provided by the
FAULT_DIR output during the start situation.

Table 496: Operation criteria

Operation mode Description
Yo Admittance criterion
Bo Susceptance criterion
Go Conductance criterion
Yo, Go Admittance criterion combined with the
conductance criterion
Yo, Bo Admittance criterion combined with the
susceptance criterion
Go, Bo Conductance criterion combined with the
susceptance criterion
Yo, Go, Bo Admittance criterion combined with the
conductance and susceptance criterion

The options for the Directional mode setting are "Non-directional", "Forward" and
"Reverse".

Figure 226, Figure 227 and Figure 228 illustrate the admittance characteristics
supported by EFPADM and the settings relevant to that particular characteristic. The
most typical characteristics are highlighted and explained in details in the chapter
Neutral admittance characteristics. Operation is achieved when the calculated neutral
admittance Yo moves outside the characteristic (the operation area is marked with
gray).

The settings defining the admittance characteristics are given in

milliSiemens (mS). The conversion equation for the admittance from
secondary to primary is:
niCT
Y pri = Ysec ⋅
nuVT
GUID-2F4EAEF7-0D92-477F-8D4C-00C7BEDE04CB V1 EN (Equation 51)

niCT CT ratio for the residual current Io

nuVT VT ratio for the residual voltage Uo

Example: Admittance setting in the secondary is 5.00 milliSiemens.

The CT ratio is 100/1 A and the VT ratio is 11547/100 V. The
admittance setting in the primary can be calculated.

630 series 439

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

100 1A
Y pri = 5.00 milliSiemens ⋅ = 4.33 milliSiemens
11547 100V
GUID-9CFD2291-9894-4D04-9499-DF38F1F64D59 V1 EN

GUID-FD8DAB15-CA27-40B0-9A43-FCF0881DB21E V2 EN

Figure 226: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when

Directional mode = "Non-directional"

440 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-7EDB14B9-64B4-449C-9290-70A4CC2D588F V2 EN

Figure 227: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when

Directional mode = "Forward"

630 series 441

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-C847609F-E261-4265-A1D9-3C449F8672A1 V2 EN

Figure 228: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when

Directional mode = "Reverse"

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with the Operate
delay time setting, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set
with the Reset delay time setting, the operation timer resets and the START output is

442 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

deactivated. The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which
indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The
value is available in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK is used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK
input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input BLK_ST is
used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR is used to block the
operating signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the prevailing value
by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.2.4.5 Neutral admittance characteristics

The applied characteristic should always be set to cover the total admittance of the
protected feeder with a suitable margin. However, more detailed setting value
selection principles depend on the characteristic in question.

The settings defining the admittance characteristics are given in

millisiemens.

The sign of the admittance characteristic settings should be

considered based on the location of characteristic boundary in the
admittance plane. All forward-settings are given with positive sign
and reverse-settings with negative sign.

All characteristics have a relative hysteresis for the boundary line(s). The hysteresis
decreases characteristics and increases the operating area when neutral admittance
enters the operating area. In case of overadmittance characteristic, the hysteresis
affects the circle radius and not the midpoint.

The monitored data CONFLICT is set to indicate setting conflicts in operation modes
when a non-directional susceptance or conductance criterion is used. The forward and
reverse boundary settings should be set so that the forward setting is always larger than
the reverse setting and that there is space between them.

Overadmittance characteristic
The overadmittance criterion is enabled with the setting Operation mode set to "Yo".
The characteristic is a circle with the radius defined with the Circle radius setting. For
the sake of application flexibility, the midpoint of the circle can be moved away from
the origin with the Circle conductance and Circle susceptance settings. Default values
for Circle conductance and Circle susceptance are 0.0 mS, that is, the characteristic
is an origin-centered circle.

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the circle.

The overadmittance criterion is typically applied in unearthed networks, but it can also
be used in compensated networks, especially if the circle is set off from the origin.

630 series 443

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-AD789221-4073-4587-8E82-CD9BBD672AE0 V2 EN

Figure 229: Overadmittance characteristic. Left figure: classical origin-centered

admittance circle. Right figure: admittance circle is set off from the
origin.

Non-directional overconductance characteristic

The non-directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode
setting set to "Go" and Directional mode to "Non-directional". The characteristic is
defined with two overconductance boundary lines with the Conductance forward and
Conductance reverse settings. For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary
lines can be tilted by the angle defined with the Conductance tilt Ang setting. By
default, the tilt angle is zero degrees, that is, the boundary line is a vertical line in the
admittance plane. A positive tilt value rotates the boundary line counterclockwise
from the vertical axis.

In case of non-directional conductance criterion, the Conductance reverse setting

must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward. If this rule is not followed,
a conflict situation is declared in the monitored data CONFLICT.

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over either of the
boundary lines.

The non-directional overconductance criterion is applicable in high-

resistance earthed and compensated networks. It must not be applied
in unearthed networks.

444 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-F5487D41-6B8E-4A7A-ABD3-EBF7254ADC4C V2 EN

Figure 230: Non-directional overconductance characteristic. Left figure: classical

non-directional overconductance criterion. Middle figure:
characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure:
characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle.

Forward directional overconductance characteristic

The forward directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation
mode setting set to "Go" and Directional mode set to "Forward". The characteristic is
defined by one overconductance boundary line with the Conductance forward setting.
For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary line can be tilted with the angle
defined with the Conductance tilt Ang setting. By default, the tilt angle is zero degrees,
that is, the boundary line is a vertical line in the admittance plane. A positive tilt value
rotates the boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis.

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over the boundary line.

The forward directional overconductance criterion is applicable in

high-resistance earthed and compensated networks. It must not be
applied in unearthed networks.

GUID-43F312AA-874A-4CE7-ABFE-D76BA70B7A5D V2 EN

Figure 231: Forward directional overconductance characteristic. Left figure:

classical forward directional overconductance criterion. Middle
figure: characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure:
characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle.

630 series 445

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic

The forward directional oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode
setting set to "Bo" and Directional mode to "Forward". The characteristic is defined
by one oversusceptance boundary line with the Susceptance forward setting. For the
sake of application flexibility, the boundary line can be tilted by the angle defined with
the Susceptance tilt Ang setting. By default, the tilt angle is zero degrees, that is, the
boundary line is a horizontal line in the admittance plane. A positive tilt value rotates
the boundary line counterclockwise from the horizontal axis

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over the boundary line.

The forward directional oversusceptance criterion is applicable in

unearthed networks. It must not be applied in compensated networks.

GUID-43B0F2F9-38CE-4F94-8381-0F20A0668AB1 V2 EN

Figure 232: Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic. Left figure:

classical forward directional oversusceptance criterion. Middle
figure: characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure:
characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle.

Combined overadmittance and overconductance characteristic

The combined overadmittance and overconductance criterion is enabled with the
Operation mode setting set to "Yo, Go" and Directional mode to "Non-directional".
The characteristic is a combination of a circle with the radius defined with the Circle
radius setting and two overconductance boundary lines with the settings Conductance
forward and Conductance reverse. For the sake of application flexibility, the midpoint
of the circle can be moved from the origin with the Circle conductance and Circle
susceptance settings. Also the boundary lines can be tilted by the angle defined with
the Conductance tilt Ang setting. By default, the Circle conductance and Circle
susceptance are 0.0 mS and Conductance tilt Ang equals zero degrees, that is, the
characteristic is a combination of an origin-centered circle with two vertical
overconductance boundary lines. A positive tilt value for the Conductance tilt Ang
setting rotates boundary lines counterclockwise from the vertical axis.

In case of the non-directional conductance criterion, the Conductance reverse setting

must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward. If this rule is not followed,

446 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

a conflict situation is declared in the monitored data CONFLICT. If this rule is not
followed, a conflict situation is declared in the monitored data CONFLICT.

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the

characteristic.

The combined overadmittance and overconductance criterion is applicable in

unearthed, high-resistance earthed and compensated networks or in systems where the
system earthing may temporarily change during normal operation from compensated
network to unearthed system.

Compared to the overadmittance criterion, the combined characteristic improves

sensitivity in high-resistance earthed and compensated networks. Compared to the
non-directional overconductance criterion, the combined characteristic enables the
protection to be applied also in unearthed systems.

GUID-7AE09721-1428-4392-9142-A6D39FD4C287 V2 EN

Figure 233: Combined overadmittance and overconductance characteristic. Left

figure: classical origin-centered admittance circle combined with two
overconductance boundary lines. Right figure: admittance circle is
set off from the origin.

Combined overconductance and oversusceptance characteristic

The combined overconductance and oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the
Operation mode setting set to "Go, Bo".

By setting Directional mode to "Forward", the characteristic is a combination of two

boundary lines with the settings Conductance forward and Susceptance forward. See
Figure 234.

By setting Directional mode to "Non-directional", the characteristic is a combination

of four boundary lines with the settings Conductance forward, Conductance reverse,
Susceptance forward and Susceptance reverse. See Figure 235.

630 series 447

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary lines can be tilted by the angle
defined with the Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings. By default,
the tilt angles are zero degrees, that is, the boundary lines are straight lines in the
admittance plane. A positive Conductance tilt Ang value rotates the overconductance
boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis. A positive Susceptance tilt
Ang value rotates the oversusceptance boundary line counterclockwise from the
horizontal axis.

In case of the non-directional conductance and susceptance criteria, the Conductance

reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward and the
Susceptance reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Susceptance forward.
If this rule is not followed, a conflict situation is declared in the monitored data
CONFLICT.

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the

characteristic.

The combined overconductance and oversusceptance criterion is applicable in high-

resistance earthed, unearthed and compensated networks or in the systems where the
system earthing may temporarily change during normal operation from compensated
to unearthed system.

GUID-1A21391B-A053-432B-8A44-7D2BF714C52D V2 EN

Figure 234: Combined forward directional overconductance and forward

directional oversusceptance characteristic. Left figure: the
Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings equal zero
degrees. Right figure: the setting Conductance tilt Ang > 0 degrees
and the setting Susceptance tilt Ang < 0 degrees.

448 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-0A34B498-4FDB-44B3-A539-BAE8F10ABDF0 V2 EN

Figure 235: Combined non-directional overconductance and non-directional

oversusceptance characteristic

The non-directional overconductance and non-directional

oversusceptance characteristic provides a good sensitivity and
selectivity when the characteristic is set to cover the total admittance
of the protected feeder with a proper margin.

4.2.4.6 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the residual current or voltage-related
settings, for example, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3". One
of the groups to be used with the "Base value Sel Res" setting must be selected.

4.2.4.7 Recorded data

The required information for a later fault analysis is recorded when the recording
function of EFPADM is triggered. The triggering occurs at the moment of a trip or a
falling edge of the start signal.

630 series 449

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 497: EFPADM recorded data

Parameter name Description
n Recording time Recording date and time
n FAULT_DIR Detected fault direction
n COND_RES (Go) Real part of neutral admittance
n SUS_RES (Bo) Imaginary part of neutral admittance
n I_AMPL_RES Pre Flt Magnitude of prefault residual current
n I_ANGL_RES Pre Flt Angle of prefault residual current
n U_AMPL_RES Pre Flt Magnitude of prefault residual voltage
n U_ANGL_RES Pre Flt Angle of prefault residual voltage
n I_AMPL_RES fault Magnitude of fault state residual current
n I_ANGL_RES fault Angle of fault state residual current
n U_AMPL_RES fault Magnitude of fault state residual voltage
n U_ANGL_RES fault Angle of fault state residual voltage
n START_DUR Ratio of started time / operation time

The triggering moment of the recorded data is stored in the n Recording time
parameter. The n COND_RES (Go) and n SUS_RES (Bo) parameters are the real and
imaginary components of the neutral admittance calculation used in the operation
characteristics functionality. The direction of the fault determined by the operation
characteristics is indicated with the n FAULT_DIR parameter ("Unknown",
"Forward", "Backward" or "Both").

The prefault residual current and voltage values can be read from the n I_AMPL_RES
Pre Flt, n I_ANGL_RES Pre Flt, n U_AMPL_RES Pre Flt and n U_ANGL_RES Pre
Flt parameters. The corresponding fault state current and voltage values can be found
in the parameters n I_AMPL_RES fault, n I_ANGL_RES fault, n U_AMPL_RES fault
and n U_ANGL_RES fault. The start duration value is stored in the n START_DUR
parameter.

When Admittance Clc mode is set to "Normal", the prefault values are not collected.

There are a total of three sets of recorded data which are saved in the data banks 1, 2
and 3. The data bank 1 holds the most recent recorded data and the older data are
moved to the following banks (1->2 and 2->3) when triggering occurs. When all three
banks have data and a new triggering occurs, the latest data are placed into bank 1 and
the data in bank 3 become overwritten by the data from bank 2.

The activation of the RESET binary input resets all recorded data banks.

4.2.4.8 Application

Neutral admittance protection provides a selective earth-fault protection function for

high-resistance earthed, unearthed and compensated networks. It can be applied for

450 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

the protection of overhead lines as well as with underground cables. It can be used as
an alternative solution to traditional residual current-based earth-fault protection
functions, for example the IoCos mode in DEFxPDEF. Main advantages of EFPADM
include versatile applicability, good sensitivity and easy setting principles.

As a start condition for the neutral admittance protection, the residual overvoltage
condition is used. When the residual voltage exceeds the set threshold Voltage start
value, an earth fault is detected and the neutral admittance calculation is released. In
order to guarantee a high security of protection, that is, avoid false starts, the Voltage
start value setting must be set above the highest possible value of Uo during normal
operation with a proper margin. It should consider all possible operation conditions
and configuration changes in the network. In unearthed systems, the healthy-state Uo
is typically less than 1% × Uph (Uph = nominal phase-to-earth voltage). In
compensated networks, the healthy-state Uo may reach values even up to 30% × Uph
if the network includes large parts of overheadlines without a phase transposition.
Generally, the highest Uo is achieved when the compensation coil is tuned to the full
resonance and when the parallel resistor of the coil is not connected.

The residual overvoltage-based start condition for the admittance protection enables
a multistage protection principle. For example, one instance of EFPADM could be
used for alarming to detect faults with a high fault resistance using a relatively low
value for the Voltage start value setting. Another instance of EFPADM could then be
set to trip with a lower sensitivity by selecting a higher value of the Voltage start value
setting than in the alarming instance (stage).

To apply the neutral admittance protection, at least the following network data are
required:

• System earthing method

• Maximum value for Uo during the healthy state
• Maximum earth-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance Rf
is zero ohm
• Maximum uncompensated earth-fault current of the system (Rf = 0 Ω)
• Rated current of the parallel resistor of the coil (active current forcing scheme) in
the case of a compensated neutral network
• Rated current of the neutral earthing resistor in the case of a high-resistance
earthed system
• Knowledge of the magnitude of Uo as a function of the fault resistance to verify
the sensitivity of the protection in terms of fault resistance

Figure 236 shows the influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage magnitude
in unearthed and compensated networks. Such information should be available to
verify the correct Voltage start value setting, which helps to fulfil the requirements for
the sensitivity of the protection in terms of fault resistance.

630 series 451

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Unearthed Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under-Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 Rf = 500 ohm 80 80
Rf = 2500 ohm

Residual voltage (%)

Residual voltage (%)

Residual voltage (%)

70 70 70
Rf = 5000 ohm
60 Rf = 10000 ohm 60 60
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm
GUID-2F3654EF-9700-4FB7-B73C-85F7ED5D8EEF V1 EN

Figure 236: Influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage magnitude in 10

kV unearthed and compensated networks. The leakage resistance is
assumed to be 30 times larger than the absolute value of the
capacitive reactance of the network. Parallel resistor of the
compensation coil is assumed to be disconnected.

Unearthed Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under-Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 Rf = 500 ohm 80 80
Residual voltage (%)

Residual voltage (%)

Residual voltage (%)

70 Rf = 2500 ohm 70 70
60 Rf = 5000 ohm 60 60
Rf = 10000 ohm
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100
Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm
GUID-3880FB01-5C89-4E19-A529-805208382BB1 V1 EN

Figure 237: Influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage magnitude in 15

kV unearthed and compensated networks. The leakage resistance is
assumed to be 30 times larger than the absolute value of the
capacitive reactance of the network. Parallel resistor of the
compensation coil is assumed to be disconnected.

Unearthed Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under-Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 Rf = 500 ohm 80 80
Residual voltage (%)
Residual voltage (%)

Residual voltage (%)

70 Rf = 2500 ohm 70 70
60 Rf = 5000 ohm 60 60
50 Rf = 10000 ohm 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm
GUID-6321328D-6C17-4155-A2DF-7E1C47A44D53 V1 EN

Figure 238: Influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage magnitude in 20

kV unearthed and compensated networks. The leakage resistance is
assumed to be 30 times larger than the absolute value of the
capacitive reactance of the network. Parallel resistor of the
compensation coil is assumed to be disconnected.

452 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Example
In a 15 kV, 50 Hz compensated network, the maximum value for Uo during the
healthy state is 10% × Uph. Maximum earth-fault current of the system is 100 A. The
maximum earth fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω). The applied
active current forcing scheme uses a 15 A resistor, which is connected in parallel to the
coil during the fault after a 1.0 second delay.

Solution: As a start condition for the neutral admittance protection, the internal
residual overvoltage condition of EFPADM is used. The Voltage start value setting
must be set above the maximum healthy-state Uo of 10% × Uph with a suitable
margin.

Voltage start value = 0.15 pu

According to Figure 237, this selection ensures at least a sensitivity corresponding to

a 2000 ohm fault resistance when the compensation degree varies between 80% and
120%. The greatest sensitivity is achieved when the compensation degree is close to
full resonance.

An earth-fault current of 10 A can be converted into admittance.

10 A
Y Fdtot = ≈ j ⋅ 1.15 mS
15kV 3
GUID-3631BAB9-7D65-4591-A3D6-834687D0E03C V2 EN

A parallel resistor current of 15 A can be converted into admittance.

15 A
Gcc = ≈ 1.73 mS
15kV 3
GUID-4B7A18DE-68CB-42B2-BF02-115F0ECC03D9 V2 EN

According to Equation 41, during an outside fault EFPADM measures the following
admittance:

Yo = −Y Fdtot ≈ − j ⋅1.15 mS
GUID-AD02E209-1740-4930-8E28-AB85637CEF0D V2 EN

According to Equation 46, during an inside fault EFPADM measures the admittance
after the connection of the parallel resistor:

Yo = Y Bgtot + Y CC ≈ (1.73 + j ⋅ B ) mS
GUID-28AF4976-1872-48A1-ACC7-7CC3B51CD9D8 V2 EN

Where the imaginary part of the admittance, B, depends on the tuning of the coil
(compensation degree).

The admittance characteristic is selected to be the combined overconductance and

oversusceptance characteristic with four boundary lines:

Operation mode = "Go, Bo"

630 series 453

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Directional mode = "Non-directional"

The admittance characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected
feeder with a proper margin, see Figure 239. Different setting groups can be used to
allow adaptation of protection settings to different feeder and network configurations.

Conductance forward

This setting should be set based on the parallel resistor value of the coil. It must be set
to a lower value than the conductance of the parallel resistor, in order to enable
dependable operation. The selected value should move the boundary line from origin
to include some margin for the admittance operation point due to CT/VTerrors, when
fault is located outside the feeder.

Conductance forward: 15 A/(15 kV/sqrt(3)) × 0.2 = +0.35 mS corresponding to 3.0 A

(at 15 kV). The selected value provides margin considering also the effect of CT/VT
errors in case of outside faults. In case of smaller rated value of the parallel resistor,
for example, 5 A (at 15 kV), the recommended security margin should be larger, for
example 0.7, so that sufficient margin for CT/VT errors can be achieved.

Susceptance forward

This setting should be based on the minimum operate current of 1 A.

Susceptance forward: 1 A/(15 kV/sqrt(3)) = 0.1 mS

Susceptance reverse

This setting should be set based on the value of the maximum earth-fault current
produced by the feeder (considering possible feeder topology changes) with a security
margin. This ensures that the admittance operating point stays inside the "Box"
characteristics during outside fault. The recommended security margin should not be
lower than 1.5.

Susceptance reverse: - (10 A × 1.5/(15 kV/sqrt(3)) = -1.73 mS

Conductance reverse

This setting is used to complete the non-directional characteristics by closing the

"Box" characteristic. In order to keep the shape of the characteristic reasonable and to
allow sufficient margin for the admittance operating point during outside fault, it is
recommended to use the same value as for setting Susceptance reverse.

Conductance reverse = -1.73 mS

454 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-AE9BB46E-B927-43F6-881A-A96D3410268D V2 EN

Figure 239: Admittances of the example

4.2.4.9 Signals
Table 498: EFPADM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset)
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timer
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 External trigger signal to release neutral
admittance protection
RESET BOOLEAN 0 External reset signal to reset recorded data

Table 499: EFPADM Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Time delayed operate-signal
START BOOLEAN General start-signal
FAULT_DIR INTEGER Detected fault direction
COND_RES REAL Real part of calculated neutral admittance
SUS_RES REAL Imaginary part of calculated neutral admittance

630 series 455

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.4.10 Settings
Table 500: EFPADM Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation mode Yo - - Yo Selection of characteristic mode
Go
Bo
Yo, Go
Yo, Bo
Go, Bo
Yo, Go, Bo
Directional mode Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode
Forward
Reverse
Voltage start value 0.01 - 2.00 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage start value
Circle conductance -500.00 - 500.00 mS 0.01 0.00 Admittance circle midpoint, real part
Circle susceptance -500.00 - 500.00 mS 0.01 0.00 Admittance circle midpoint, imaginary part
Circle radius 0.05 - 500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Admittance circle radius
Conductance forward -500.00 - 500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Conductance threshold in forward
direction
Conductance reverse -500.00 - 500.00 mS 0.01 -1.00 Conductance threshold in reverse
direction
Susceptance forward -500.00 - 500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Susceptance threshold in forward
direction
Susceptance reverse -500.00 - 500.00 mS 0.01 -1.00 Susceptance threshold in reverse
direction
Operate delay time 0.06 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.60 Operate delay time

Table 501: EFPADM Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Conductance tilt Ang -30 - 30 Deg 1 0 Tilt angle of conductance boundary line,
positive value rotates anti clock-wise from
vertical axis
Susceptance tilt Ang -30 - 30 Deg 1 0 Tilt angle of susceptance boundary line,
positive value rotates anti clock-wise from
horizontal axis

Table 502: EFPADM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

456 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 503: EFPADM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Admittance Clc mode Normal - - Normal Admittance calculation mode
Delta
Min operate current 0.005 - 1.000 pu 0.001 0.005 Minimum operating current
Min operate voltage 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.04 Reset delay time
Pol reversal No - - No Rotate polarizing quantity
Yes

4.2.4.11 Measured values

Table 504: EFPADM Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_RES REAL 0.0 Amplitude of the residual current
I_ANGL_RES REAL 0.0 Angle of the residual current
U_AMPL_RES REAL 0.0 Amplitude of the residual voltage
U_ANGL_RES REAL 0.0 Angle of the residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset)
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timer
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 External trigger signal to release neutral
admittance protection
RESET BOOLEAN 0 External reset signal to reset recorded data

4.2.4.12 Monitored data

Table 505: EFPADM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Time delayed operate-
1=TRUE signal
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - General start-signal
1=TRUE
FAULT_DIR INTEGER 3=Both - Detected fault direction
0=Unknown
1=Forward
2=Backward
CONFLICT INTEGER 3=Both - Overlaping admittance
0=No conflict boundary line settings
1=Conductance
2=Susceptance
Table continues on next page

630 series 457

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

COND_RES REAL - - Real part of calculated
neutral admittance
SUS_RES REAL - - Imaginary part of
calculated neutral
admittance
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time
1 Recording time GROUP - - Record data of bank 1 for
SIGNAL fault time stamp
1 FAULT_DIR INTEGER 3=Both - Record data of bank 1 for
0=Unknown detected fault direction
1=Forward
2=Backward
1 COND_RES (Go) REAL - - Record data of bank 1 for
real part of neutral
admittance
1 SUS_RES (Bo) REAL - - Record data of bank 1 for
imaginary part of neutral
admittance
1 I_AMPL_RES Pre REAL - A Record data of bank 1 for
Flt magnitude of pre-fault
residual current
1 I_ANGL_RES Pre REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
Flt angle of pre-fault residual
current
1 U_AMPL_RES Pre REAL - kV Record data of bank 1 for
Flt magnitude of pre-fault
residual voltage
1 U_ANGL_RES Pre REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
Flt angle of pre-fault residual
voltage
1 I_AMPL_RES fault REAL - A Record data of bank 1 for
magnitude of fault-state
residual current
1 I_ANGL_RES fault REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
angle of fault-state
residual current
1 U_AMPL_RES fault REAL - kV Record data of bank 1 for
magnitude of fault-state
residual voltage
1 U_ANGL_RES fault REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
angle of fault-state
residual voltage
1 START_DUR REAL - % Record data of bank 1 for
ratio of started time /
operate time
2 Recording time GROUP - - Record data of bank 2 for
SIGNAL fault time stamp
2 FAULT_DIR INTEGER 3=Both - Record data of bank 2 for
0=Unknown detected fault direction
1=Forward
2=Backward
Table continues on next page

458 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 COND_RES (Go) REAL - - Record data of bank 2 for
real part of neutral
admittance
2 SUS_RES (Bo) REAL - - Record data of bank 2 for
imaginary part of neutral
admittance
2 I_AMPL_RES Pre REAL - A Record data of bank 2 for
Flt magnitude of pre-fault
residual current
2 I_ANGL_RES Pre REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
Flt angle of pre-fault residual
current
2 U_AMPL_RES Pre REAL - kV Record data of bank 2 for
Flt magnitude of pre-fault
residual voltage
2 U_ANGL_RES Pre REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
Flt angle of pre-fault residual
voltage
2 I_AMPL_RES fault REAL - A Record data of bank 2 for
magnitude of fault-state
residual current
2 I_ANGL_RES fault REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
angle of fault-state
residual current
2 U_AMPL_RES fault REAL - kV Record data of bank 2 for
magnitude of fault-state
residual voltage
2 U_ANGL_RES fault REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
angle of fault-state
residual voltage
2 START_DUR REAL - % Record data of bank 2 for
ratio of started time /
operate time
3 Recording time GROUP - - Record data of bank 3 for
SIGNAL fault time stamp
3 FAULT_DIR INTEGER 3=Both - Record data of bank 3 for
0=Unknown detected fault direction
1=Forward
2=Backward
3 COND_RES (Go) REAL - - Record data of bank 3 for
real part of neutral
admittance
3 SUS_RES (Bo) REAL - - Record data of bank 3 for
real part of neutral
admittance
3 I_AMPL_RES Pre REAL - A Record data of bank 3 for
Flt magnitude of pre-fault
residual current
3 I_ANGL_RES Pre REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
Flt angle of pre-fault residual
current
Table continues on next page

630 series 459

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3 U_AMPL_RES Pre REAL - kV Record data of bank 3 for
Flt magnitude of pre-fault
residual voltage
3 U_ANGL_RES Pre REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
Flt angle of pre-fault residual
voltage
3 I_AMPL_RES fault REAL - A Record data of bank 3 for
magnitude of fault-state
residual current
3 I_ANGL_RES fault REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
angle of fault-state
residual current
3 U_AMPL_RES fault REAL - kV Record data of bank 3 for
magnitude of fault-state
residual voltage
3 U_ANGL_RES fault REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
angle of fault-state
residual voltage
3 START_DUR REAL - % Record data of bank 3 for
ratio of started time /
operate time

4.2.4.13 Technical data

Table 506: EFPADM Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy1) At the frequency f = fn

±1.0% or ±0.01 mS (in range of 0.5...100 mS )

Start time2) Typically 65 ms (±15 ms)

Reset time <50 ms

Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics -50dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Io varied during the test. Uo = 1.0 × Un = phase to earth voltage during earth-fault in compensated or
unearthed network.
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact. Results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements.

4.2.5 Rotor earth-fault protection MREFPTOC

4.2.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE
identification
Rotor earth-fault protection MREFPTOC Io>R 64R

460 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.5.2 Function block

GUID-54E746C0-FC28-40A4-B4B8-19D24C6E85FB V1 EN

Figure 240: Function block

4.2.5.3 Functionality

The rotor earth-fault protection function MREFPTOC is used to detect an earth fault
in the rotor circuit of synchronous machines. MREFPTOC is used with the injection
device REK510, which requires a secured 58, 100 or 230 V AC 50/60 Hz input source
and injects a 100 V AC voltage via its coupling capacitors to the rotor circuit towards
earth.

MREFPTOC consists of independent alarm and operating stages. The operating time
characteristic is according to definite time (DT) for both stages.

MREFPTOC contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and

resets timers.

4.2.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the rotor earth-fault protection function can be described using a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

Timer 1
OPERATE
Io Level
I3P
detector 1
START

BLOCK
Timer 2
Level
ALARM
detector 2

GUID-DF6DB7C8-5AD5-4A6C-93AD-30B9C980EAF4 V1 EN

Figure 241: Functional module diagram

Level detector 1
The measured rotor earth-fault current (DFT value) is compared to the Operate start
value setting. If the measured value exceeds that of the Operate start value setting,
level detector 1 sends a signal to start the timer 1 module.

630 series 461

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Level detector 2
The measured rotor earth-fault current (DFT value) is compared to the set Alarm start
value. If the measured value exceeds that of the Alarm start value setting, level
detector 2 sends a signal to start the timer 2 module.

For MREFPTOC, the earth-fault current is the current that flows due
to the voltage injected by the injection device in the rotor circuit when
an earth fault arises.

A considerable amount of harmonics, mainly 3rd and 6th, can occur in

the excitation current under normal no-fault conditions, especially
with the thyristor excitation and rotating diode rectifier systems.
MREFPTOC uses DFT value calculation to filter DC and harmonic
components which could otherwise give out false alarms or trips.

Timer 1
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The timer characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay
time in the DT mode, the OPERATE output is activated. If a drop-off situation occurs,
that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operating delay is exceeded, the timer
reset state is activated. The reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets the internal timers.

Timer 2
Once activated, the timer activates the alarm timer. The timer characteristic is
according to DT. When the alarm timer has reached the value set by Alarm delay time
in the DT mode, the ALARM output is activated. If a drop-off situation occurs, that is,
a fault suddenly disappears before the alarm delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is
activated. The reset time depends on the Alm Reset delay time setting.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets the internal timers.

4.2.5.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the residual current or voltage-related
settings, for example, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3". One
of the groups to be used with the "Base value Sel Res" setting must be selected.

462 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.5.6 Application

The rotor circuit of synchronous machines is normally isolated from the earth. The
rotor circuit can be exposed to an abnormal mechanical or thermal stress due to, for
example, vibrations, overcurrent and choked cooling medium flow. This can result in
the breakdown of the insulation between the field winding and the rotor iron at the
point exposed to excessive stress. If the isolation resistance is decreased significantly,
this can be seen as an earth fault. For generators with slip rings, the rotor insulation
resistance is sometimes reduced due to the accumulated carbon dust layer produced by
the carbon brushes. As the circuit has a high impedance to earth, a single earth fault
does not lead to any immediate damage because the fault current is small due to a low
voltage. There is, however, a risk that a second earth fault appears, creating a rotor
winding interturn fault and causing severe magnetic imbalance and heavy rotor
vibrations that soon lead to a severe damage.

Therefore, it is essential that any occurrence of an insulation failure is detected and

that the machine is disconnected as soon as possible. Normally, the device is tripped
after a short time delay.

A 50/60 Hz voltage is injected via the injection device REK 510 to the rotor field
winding circuit of the synchronous machine as shown in Figure 242. The injected
voltage is 100 V AC via the coupling capacitors. A coupling capacitor prevents a DC
current leakage through the injection device.

1 T1 I1 6 L+
0V
C1
SM
7 ~
2 C2 L-
58V CE RE
8
T2
3 I2 Rm
11
100V ALARM
Io>R OPERATE
12
4
230V
REK 510 IED
GUID-959646C8-FC8C-4691-B262-613D87B81A2C V1 EN

Figure 242: Principle of the rotor earth-fault protection with the current injection
device

This auxiliary AC voltage forms a small charging current I1 to flow via the coupling
capacitors, resistances of the brushes and the leakage capacitance between the field
circuit and earth. The field-to-earth capacitance CE affects the level of the resulting
current to an extent which is a few milliamperes during normal no-fault operating
conditions.

If an earth fault arises in the rotor field circuit, this current increases and can reach a
level of 130 mA at a fully developed earth fault (fault resistance RE = 0, one coupling
capacitor C1 = 2μF is used). The integrated current transformer of the injection device

630 series 463

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

REK 510 then amplifies this current with the ratio of 1:10 to a measurable level.
MREFPTOC is used to measure this current.

An example of the measured curves with various field-to-earth leakage capacitance

values is given in Figure 243.

It is recommended that the alarm and operation stages of MREFPTOC are both used.
The alarm stage for giving an indication for weakly developed earth faults with a start
value setting corresponds to a 10 kΩ fault resistance with a 10-second delay. The
operation stage for a protection against fully developed earth faults with a start value
setting corresponds to a 1-2 kΩ fault resistance with a 0.5-second delay.

The current setting values corresponding to the required operating

fault resistances can be tested by connecting an adjustable fault-
simulating resistor between the excitation winding poles and the
earth. Whether only one of the coupling capacitors or both should be
used in a parallel connection should be determined on a case-by-case
basis, taking into consideration the consequences of a possibly
excessive current at a direct earth fault.

464 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-92E515E2-DC29-4D68-A80E-FF85C009C76C V1 EN

Figure 243: Measured current as a function of the rotor earth-fault resistance with
various field-to-earth capacitance values with the measuring circuit
resistance Rm = 3.0Ω, fn = 50 Hz. Only one coupling capacitor is
used.

630 series 465

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.5.7 Signals
Table 507: MREFPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs

Table 508: MREFPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal

4.2.5.8 Settings
Table 509: MREFPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Alarm start value 0.010 - 2.000 pu 0.001 0.010 Alarm start value for rotor earth fault
current
Operate start value 0.010 - 2.000 pu 0.001 0.010 Operate start value for rotor earth fault
current
Alarm delay time 0.04 - 200.00 s 0.01 10.00 Alarm delay time
Operate delay time 0.04 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.50 Operate delay time

Table 510: MREFPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 511: MREFPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 2 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Alm reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Alarm reset delay time
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Reset delay time

466 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.5.9 Measured values

Table 512: MREFPTOC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_MREF REAL 0.0 Rotor earth fault current amplitude (DFT)
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs

4.2.5.10 Monitored data

Table 513: MREFPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal
1=TRUE

4.2.5.11 Technical data

Table 514: MREFPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Start time1)2) Typically 25 ms (±15 ms)

Reset time <50 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <50 ms
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz, earth-fault current with nominal frequency injected from
random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.2.6 Harmonics based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC

4.2.6.1 Identification
Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Harmonics based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC Io>HA 51NHA

630 series 467

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.6.2 Function block

GUID-4D5478F0-DCE7-413C-BA37-A8384633BF47 V1 EN

Figure 244: Function block

4.2.6.3 Functionality

Harmonics based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC is used instead of traditional

earth-fault protection in networks where a fundamental frequency component of the
earth-fault current is low due to compensation.

By default, HAEFPTOC is used in standalone mode. Substation-wide application can

be achieved using horizontal communication where the detection of a faulty feeder is
done by comparing the harmonic earth-fault current measurements.

The function starts when the harmonic content of the earth-fault current exceeds the
set limit. The operation time characteristic is either definite time (DT) or inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT). If the horizontal communication is used for the
exchange of current values between the IEDs, the function operates according to the
DT characteristic.

HAEFPTOC contains a blocking functionality to block function outputs, timer or the

function itself.

4.2.6.4 Operation principle

The Operation setting is used to enable or disable the function. When "On" is selected,
the function is enabled and when "Off" is selected, the function is disabled.

The operation of the harmonic earth-fault protection can be described using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

468 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-AF92B100-C68C-449B-BD21-4D0C29533CE9 V1 EN

Figure 245: Functional module diagram

Harmonic calculation
This module feeds the measured residual current to the high-pass filter. The frequency
range is limited to start from twice the fundamental frequency of the network (for
example, in a 50 Hz network the cutoff frequency is 100 Hz), that is, summing the
harmonic components of the network from the second harmonic. The output of the
filter, later referred to as the harmonic current, is fed to the Level detector and Current
comparison modules.

The harmonic current I_HARM_RES is available in the monitored data view. The
value is also sent over horizontal communication to the other IEDs on the parallel
feeders configured in the protection scheme.

630 series 469

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

1.0

Normalized output

0.5

0
0 f 2f
F requency

GUID-EA9399C1-DEF9-4DD0-AC4D-DCB80400F116 V1 EN

Figure 246: High-pass filter

Level detector
The harmonic current is compared to the Start value setting. If the value exceeds the
value of the Start value setting, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer
module.

Current comparison
The maximum of the harmonic currents reported by other parallel feeders in the
substation, that is, in the same busbar, is fed to the function through the I_REF_RES
input. If the locally measured harmonic current is higher than I_REF_RES, the
enabling signal is sent to the timer.

If the locally measured harmonic current is lower than I_REF_RES, the fault is not
in the feeder. The detected situation blocks the timer internally. Simultaneously, the
BLKD_I_REF output is activated.

The module also supervises the communication channel validity through

I_REF_VALID input which is reported to the timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Functionality and the time
characteristics depend on the selected value of the Enable reference use setting.

470 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The Enable reference use setting forces the function to use the DT
characteristics where the operating time is set with the Minimum
operate time setting.

If the communication fails for some reason, the function switches to use the Operation
curve type setting. If DT is selected, Operate delay time is used. If the IDMT curve is
selected, the time characteristics are according to the selected curve and the Minimum
operate time setting is used for restricting a too fast operation time.

In case of a communication failure, the start duration may change substantially

depending on the settings.

When the programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics
are defined with the Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C,
Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E parameters.
Table 515: Values of the Enable reference use setting
Enable reference use Functionality
Standalone In the standalone mode,
depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the
time characteristics are
according to DT or IDMT. When
the operation timer has reached
the value of the Operate delay
time setting in the DT mode or
the value defined by the inverse
time curve, the OPERATE output
is activated.
Reference use Communication valid While using horizontal
communication, the function is
forced to use the DT
characteristics. When the
operation timer has reached the
value of the Minimum operate
time setting and simultaneously
the enabling signal from the
Current comparison module is
active, the OPERATE signal is
activated
Communication invalid Function operates as in the
standalone mode.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate
delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of timer in the
reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset
curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, the reset
timer runs until the value of the Reset delay time setting is exceeded. When the IDMT
curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def
time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate
reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset
delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on
the current during the drop-off situation.

630 series 471

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or the

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the
drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operation and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operation
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used. Enable
reference use set to "Yes" forces the function to use the DT characteristics where the
operating time is set with the Minimum operate time setting.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always
at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. More
information can be found in the IDMT curves for overcurrent
protection.

Timer calculates the start duration value "START_DUR", which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

When the function input BLOCK is activated, it forces the sent

harmonic current analog GOOSE data quality to “operatorBlocked”.
At the receiving end IED, the analog GOOSE harmonic current is
forced to zero.
The activation of other block inputs BLK_OPR, BLK_ST and
FR_TIMER, does not cause sent analog GOOSE data quality change.
At the receiving end IED, the analog GOOSE harmonic current is
reported as it is measured at the sending end IED.

4.2.6.5 Base value

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (p.u.). These p.u. values
are related to certain base values, for example, the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the residual current or voltage-related
settings, for example “Residual Grp 1”, “Residual Grp 2” and “Residual Grp 3”. One
of the groups should be selected to use with the Base value Sel Res settings.

472 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.6.6 Application

During an earth fault, HAEFPTOC calculates the maximum harmonic current for the
protected feeder. The value is sent over an analog GOOSE to other IEDs of the busbar
in the substation. At the configuration level, all values received over the analog
GOOSE are compared through the MAX function to find the maximum value. The
maximum value is sent back to HAEFPTOC as the I_REF_RES input. The operation
of HAEFPTOC is allowed in case I_REF_RES is lower than the locally measured
harmonic current. If I_REF_RES exceeds the locally measured harmonics current,
the operation of HAEFPTOC is blocked.

GUID-A4157895-4784-4988-BA34-B89981D67D3A V1 EN

Figure 247: Protection scheme based on the analog GOOSE communication

with three analog GOOSE receivers

4.2.6.7 Signals
Table 516: HAEFPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
I_REF_RES REAL 0.0 Reference current
I_REF_VALID BOOLEAN 1 Reference input validity
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset)
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block of start signal
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers

630 series 473

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 517: HAEFPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
BLKD_I_REF BOOLEAN Current comparison status indicator blocked/not
blocked
I_HARM_RES REAL Calculated harmonics current

4.2.6.8 Settings
Table 518: HAEFPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Enable reference use No - - No Enable using current reference from other
Yes IED's instead of stand-alone
Start value 0.05 - 5.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Current threshold value
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset
Operate delay time 0.10 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.60 Operate delay time
Minimum operate time 0.10 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.50 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
and reference use

Table 519: HAEFPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On

474 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 520: HAEFPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

4.2.6.9 Measured values

Table 521: HAEFPTOC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_REF_RES REAL 0.0 Reference current
I_REF_VALID BOOLEAN 1 Reference input validity
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset)
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block of start signal
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers

4.2.6.10 Monitored data

Table 522: HAEFPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal
1=TRUE
BLKD_I_REF BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Current comparison
1=TRUE status indicator
blocked/not blocked
I_HARM_RES REAL - A Calculated harmonics
current
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of operate time

630 series 475

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.6.11 Technical data

Table 523: HAEFPTOC technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn
±5% of the set value or ±0.004 × In

Start time 1)2) Typically 83 ms

Reset time <40 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

Operate time accuracy in IDMT mode 3) ±5.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

Suppression of harmonics -80 dB at f = fn

-3 dB at f = 11 × fn

1) Fundamental frequency current = 1.0 × In. Harmonics current before fault = 0.0 × In, harmonics fault
current 2.0 × Start value. Results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurement.
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 2...20

4.2.7 Wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE

4.2.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Wattmetric earth-fault protection WPWDE Po>-> 32N

4.2.7.2 Function block

GUID-99E2503A-C202-4367-8FBE-C6027A21DB78 V1 EN

Figure 248: Function block

4.2.7.3 Functionality

The wattmetric earth-fault protection function WPWDE can be used to detect earth
faults in networks with a high-impedance earthing, unearthed networks or
compensated networks (Peterson coil-earthed networks). It can be used as an
alternative solution to the traditional residual current-based earth-fault protection

476 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

functions, for example, the IoCos mode in the directional earth-fault protection
function DEFxPDEF.

The function measures the earth-fault power IoUoCosφ and gives an operating signal
when the residual current, residual voltage and earth-fault power exceed the set limits
and the angle between the residual current and residual voltage (φ) is inside the set
operating region, that is, forward or backward region. The operating time
characteristic can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or a special wattmetric-
type inverse definite minimum type (wattmetric type IDMT).

The wattmetric earth-fault protection is very sensitive to current transformer errors

and it is recommended that a core balance CT is used for measuring the residual
current.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.2.7.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the wattmetric earth-fault protection function can be described with
a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

FAULT_DIR
I0 Timer
I3P
Directional Level
OPERATE
U0 calculation detector t
U3P

RCA_CTL

Residual t
power START
calculation

BLOCK
BLK_OPR
BLK_ST
FR_TIMER
GUID-134FC6D3-50C1-4667-A438-F3BB41E8A8D4 V1 EN

Figure 249: Functional module diagram

Directional calculation
The directional calculation module monitors the angle between the operating quantity
(residual current) and polarizing quantity (residual voltage). When the angle after
considering the Characteristic angle setting is in the operation section, the module
sends an enable signal to the level detector. The directional operation is selected with
the Directional mode setting. Either the "Forward" or "Reverse" operation mode can
be selected. The direction of fault is calculated based on the phase angle difference

630 series 477

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

between the operating quantity and polarizing quantity, the value (ANGLE) is
available through the monitored data view.

The polarizing quantity for a directional earth fault is shifted by 180˚

and hence it is represented as –Uo in the phasor diagrams.

If the angle difference lies between -90˚ to 0˚ or 0˚ to +90˚, a forward direction fault
is considered. If the phase angle difference lies within -90˚ to -180˚ or +90˚ to +180˚,
a reverse direction fault is detected. Thus, the normal width of a sector is 180˚.

GUID-2A90B4D8-02B0-495C-A86E-559A09AE70DC V1 EN

Figure 250: Definition of the relay characteristic angle

The phase angle difference is calculated based on the Characteristic angle setting
(also known as Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) or Relay Base Angle (RBA) or
Maximum Torque Angle (MTA)). The Characteristic angle setting is done based on
the method of earthing employed in the network. For example, in case of an unearthed
network, the Characteristic angle setting is set to -90˚, in case of a compensated
network, the Characteristic angle setting is set to 0˚. In general, Characteristic angle
is selected so that is close to the expected fault angle value, which results maximum
sensitivity. Characteristic angle can be set anywhere between -179˚ to +180˚. Thus
the effective phase angle (Φ) for calculating the residual power considering the
characteristic angle is
φ = ( ∠(−Uo) − ∠Io − Characteristic angle )
GUID-D538B6BE-5A4E-4D96-850E-A8555FC57C4A V1 EN (Equation 52)

478 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

In addition, the characteristic angle can be changed via the control signal RCA_CTL.
The RCA_CTL input is used in the compensated networks where the compensation
coil sometimes is temporarily disconnected. When the coil is disconnected, the
compensated network becomes isolated and the Characteristic angle setting must be
changed. This can be done automatically with the RCA_CTL input, which results in
the addition of -90˚ in the Characteristic angle setting.

The value (ANGLE_RCA) is available in the monitored data view.

-Uo (Polarizing quantity)

Forward area Backward area

RCA = -90˚

Maximum torque line

Io (Operating quantity) Minimum

operate current

Forward area Backward area

GUID-001A8AA8-0C40-4580-A502-048A296EF6F2 V1 EN

Figure 251: Definition of relay characteristic angle, RCA = -90˚ in an isolated

network

Characteristic angle should be set to a positive value if the operating

signal lags the polarizing signal and to a negative value if the
operating signal leads the polarizing signal.

Type of network Characteristic angle recommended

Compensated network 0˚
Unearthed network -90˚

In unearthed networks, when the characteristic angle is -90˚, the

measured residual power is reactive (varmetric power).

630 series 479

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The fault direction is also indicated by the integer output FAULT_DIR (also available
in the monitored data view), which indicates 0 if a fault is not detected, 1 for faults in
the forward direction and 2 for faults in the backward direction.

The direction of the fault is detected only when the correct angle calculation can be
made. If the magnitude of the operating quantity or polarizing quantity is not high
enough, the direction calculation is not reliable. Hence, the magnitude of the operating
quantity is compared to the Min operate current setting and the magnitude of the
polarizing quantity is compared to Min operate voltage, and if both the operating
quantity and polarizing quantity are higher than their respective limit, a valid angle is
calculated and the residual power calculation module is enabled.

The Correction angle setting can be used to improve the selectivity when there are
inaccuracies due to the measurement transformer. The setting decreases the operation
sector. The Correction angle setting should be done carefully as the phase angle error
of the measurement transformer varies with the connected burden as well as with the
magnitude of the actual primary current that is being measured. An example of how
Correction angle alters the operating region is as shown:

Maximum torque line

forward direction (RCA = 0˚)
-Uo (Polarizing quantity)

Io (Operating quantity)

Forward Forward
Zero torque line area area

Correction angle Correction angle

Minimum
operate current
Backward Backward
area area

GUID-300A4B7E-173B-4C04-9C9A-6AC1B6FCAF9B V1 EN

Figure 252: Definition of correction angle

The polarity of the polarizing quantity can be changed (rotated by

180˚) by setting Pol reversal to "True" or by switching the polarity of
the residual voltage measurement wires.

480 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Residual power calculation

The residual power calculation module calculates the magnitude of residual power
Io·Uo·CosΦ. Angle Φ is the angle between the operating quantity and polarizing
quantity, compensated with a characteristic angle. The angle value is received from
the directional calculation module. The directional calculation module enables the
residual power calculation only if the minimum signal levels for both operating
quantity and polarizing quantity are exceeded. However, if the angle calculation is not
valid, the calculated residual power is zero. Residual power (RES_POWER) is
calculated continuously and it is available in the monitored data view.

Level detector
The level detector compares the magnitudes of the measured operating quantity,
polarizing quantity and calculated residual power to the set Current start value,
Voltage start value and Res power start value respectively. When all three quantities
exceed the limits, the level detector enables the timer module.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
wattmetric IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay
time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated. If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly
disappears before the operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The
reset time is identical for both DT or wattmeter IDMT. The reset time depends on the
Reset delay time setting.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the START signal. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the OPERATE signal. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.2.7.5 Timer characteristics

In the wattmetric IDMT mode, the OPERATE output is activated based on the timer
characteristics:

630 series 481

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

k * Pref
t [s ] =
Pcal
GUID-FEA556F2-175E-4BDD-BD0F-52E9F5499CA8 V3 EN (Equation 53)

t[s] operation time in seconds

k set value of Time multiplier
Pref set value of Reference power

Pcal calculated residual power

482 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-83FAE3CA-CF48-4841-BCAB-65F2967E04FC V1 EN

Figure 253: Operation time curves for wattmetric IDMT for Sref set at 0.15 xPn

630 series 483

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.7.6 Measuring modes

The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and
"Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode
setting.

4.2.7.7 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the residual current or voltage-related
settings, for example, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3". One
of the groups to be used with the "Base value Sel Res" setting must be selected.

4.2.7.8 Application

The wattmetric method is one of the commonly used directional methods for detecting
the earth faults especially in compensated networks. The protection uses the residual
power component IoUoCosφ (φ is the angle between the polarizing quantity and
operating quantity compensated with a relay characteristic angle).

-Uo (Polarizing quantity)

Io (Operating quantity)

Forward
area

Zero torque line

(RCA = 0˚)
Minimum
operate current
Backward
area

Uo

GUID-1766F465-7164-4FC2-9245-CFCBB08E3633 V1 EN

Figure 254: Characteristics of wattmetric protection

In a fully compensated radial network with two outgoing feeders, the earth-fault
currents depend mostly on the system earth capacitances (C0) of the lines and the
compensation coil (L). If the coil is tuned exactly to the system capacitance, the fault
current has only a resistive component. This is due to the resistances of the coil and
distribution lines together with the system leakage resistances (R0). Often a resistor
(RL) in parallel with the coil is used for increasing the fault current.

484 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

When a single phase-to-earth fault occurs, the capacitance of the faulty phase is
bypassed and the system becomes unsymmetrical. The fault current is composed of
the currents flowing through the earth capacitances of two healthy phases. The
protection relay in the healthy feeder tracks only the capacitive current flowing
through its earth capacitances. The capacitive current of the complete network (sum
of all feeders) is compensated with the coil. An undercompensated network where the
coil current IL = ICtot - ICfd (ICtot is the total earth-fault current of the network and ICfd
is the earth-fault current of the healthy feeder) is as shown:

A B C ΣI01

- U0

C0 R0

ΣI01

ICfd

ΣI02

L RL - U0
U0
IL
Ictot = Ief ΣI02

GUID-908FF1EF-2E56-4717-8EA2-895805681E60 V1 EN

Figure 255: Typical radial compensated network employed with wattmetric

protection

The wattmetric function is activated when the residual active power component
exceeds the set limit. However, to ensure a selective operation it is also required that
the residual current and residual voltage also exceed the set limit.

The sensitivity of the wattmetric method is determined by the magnitude of the

residual voltage, which in turn is determined by the fault resistance and maximum
healthy-state residual voltage. The threshold value of the residual voltage must be set
above the maximum healthy-state residual voltage value with a proper margin. When
the fault resistance values are high, there is a reduction in the residual voltage, which
reduces the active residual power.

It is highly recommended that core balance CTs are used for measuring Io when using
the wattmetric method. When a low transformation ratio is used, the CT can suffer
accuracy problems and even a distorted secondary current waveform with some core
balance CTs. Therefore, to ensure a sufficient accuracy of the residual current
measurement and consequently a better selectivity of the scheme, the core balance
current transformer should preferably have a transformation ratio of at least 70:1.
Lower transformation ratios such as 50:1 or 50:5 are not recommended, unless the
phase displacement errors and CT amplitude are checked first.

630 series 485

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

It is not recommended to use the directional wattmetric protection in case of a ring or

meshed system as the wattmetric requires a radial power flow to operate.

The relay characteristic angle needs to be set based on the system earthing. In an
unearthed network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances
between the phase conductors and earth, the characteristic angle is chosen as -90º.

In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and inductive resonance coil
current compensate each other, meaning that the fault current is mainly resistive and
has zero phase shift compared to the residual voltage. In such networks, the
characteristic angle is chosen as 0º. Often the magnitude of active component is small
and must be increased by means of a parallel resistor in a compensation coil. In
networks where the neutral point is earthed through a low resistance, the characteristic
angle is always 0º.

As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the earth-fault protection is achieved with time coordination.

Use of wattmetric protection gives a possibility to use the dedicated inverse definite
minimum time characteristics. This is applicable in large high-impedance earthed
networks with a large capacitive earth-fault current.

In a network employing a low-impedance earthed system, a medium-size neutral point

resistor is used. Such a resistor gives a resistive earth-fault current component of about
200 - 400 A for an excessive earth fault. In such a system, the directional residual
power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by the inverse time
power characteristics.

Along with the wattmetric protection, it is recommended that the normal non-
directional residual current function and non-directional residual voltage function are
also used (can be with definite or inverse time delay). The non-directional residual
current function compares the residual current without checking any phase angles and
gives a quick protection under cross-country faults. The start value setting for this
non-directional current function should be higher than the setting for all single-phase
earth faults with a short IDMT time delay. This is an alternative to the distance
protection with the phase preference logic. The zero-sequence current for cross-
country faults flowing through the feeder is high compared to the zero-sequence
current of the single-phase earth fault. Under this condition, the core balance CT tends
to be saturated as it is not designed for a large zero-sequence current which results in
an inaccurate measurement. Hence, the phase currents are used to calculate the
residual current. Non-directional residual voltage function with a long timer setting
acts as a backup protection.

Due to the residual connection of the three-phase CTs and the open delta connection
of the three-phase VTs, the third harmonic currents and voltages of each phase add up
and pollute the residual current and voltage measurements. The DFT measuring mode
is used to enable a sensitive setting.

486 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.7.9 Signals
Table 524: WPWDE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 Relay characteristic angle control

Table 525: WPWDE Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started
FAULT_DIR INTEGER Detected fault direction

4.2.7.10 Settings
Table 526: WPWDE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode Forward - - Forward Directional mode
Reverse
Current start value 0.01 - 5.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Start value for residual current
Voltage start value 0.010 - 1.000 pu 0.001 0.010 Start value for residual voltage
Power start value 0.003 - 1.000 pu 0.001 0.003 Start value for residual active power
Reference power 0.050 - 1.000 pu 0.001 0.150 Reference value of residual power for
Wattmetric IDMT curves
Characteristic angle -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Characteristic angle
Time multiplier 0.05 - 2.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for Wattmetric IDMT
curves
Operating curve type ANSI Def. Time - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
IEC Def. Time
WattMetric IDMT
Operate delay time 0.06 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.06 Operate delay time for definite time

Table 527: WPWDE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

630 series 487

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 528: WPWDE Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Measurement mode RMS - - DFT Selects used current measurement mode
DFT
Peak-to-Peak
Correction angle 0.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 2.0 Angle correction
Min operate current 0.010 - 5.000 pu 0.001 0.010 Minimum operate residual current for
deciding fault direction
Min operate voltage 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operate residual voltage for
deciding fault direction
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time
Pol reversal No - - No Rotate polarizing quantity
Yes

4.2.7.11 Measured values

Table 529: WPWDE Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_RES REAL 0.0 Residual current amplitude (RMS)
I_AMPL_RES REAL 0.0 Residual current amplitude (DFT)
I_ANGL_RES REAL 0.0 Residual current phase angle
I_PTOP_RES REAL 0.0 Residual current amplitude (PTOP)
U_AMPL_RES REAL 0.0 Residual voltage amplitude (DFT)
U_ANGL_RES REAL 0.0 Residual voltage phase angle
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 Relay characteristic angle control

4.2.7.12 Monitored data

Table 530: WPWDE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
FAULT_DIR INTEGER 0=Unknown - Detected fault direction
1=Forward
2=Backward
Table continues on next page

488 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

DIRECTION INTEGER 0=Unknown - Direction information
1=Forward
2=Backward
ANGLE_RCA REAL - deg Angle between operating
angle and characteristic
angle
ANGLE REAL - deg Angle between polarizing
and operating quantity
RES_POWER REAL - MW Calculated residual
active power
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

4.2.7.13 Technical data

Table 531: WPWDE Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±3.0% of the set value or ±0.002 × Sn

Start time1)2) Typically 65 ms (±15 ms)

Reset time <45 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Io varied during the test. Uo = 1.0 × Un = phase to earth voltage during earth-fault in compensated or
un-earthed network. The residual power value before fault = 0.0 pu, fn = 50 Hz, results based on
statistical distribution of 1000 measurements.
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact.

4.2.8 Third harmonic-based stator earth-fault protection

H3EFPSEF

4.2.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Third harmonic-based stator earth-fault H3EFPSEF dUo(3H)>/ 27/59THD
protection Uo(3H)<

630 series 489

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.8.2 Function block

GUID-76E9BDE1-B1D5-48B4-A961-49B6FFFB92F3 V1 EN

Figure 256: Function block

4.2.8.3 Functionality

The third harmonic-based stator earth-fault protection H3EFPSEF is used to detect

stator earth fault at the neutral point and at least up to 15-20% from the neutral point
along the stator winding. H3EFPSEF compares the third harmonic voltages produced
by the generator itself at both neutral and terminal side of the generator for detecting
earth fault.

H3EFPSEF provides two alternative protection methods:

• Differential of the third harmonic component measured both at generator neutral
and terminal side.
• Neutral side third harmonic undervoltage.

H3EFPSEF operates with the definite time DT characteristics.

H3EFPSEF contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and

reset timers.

4.2.8.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the third harmonic-based stator earth-fault protection function can be
described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the
next sections.
U_3H_A
Timer
U_3H_B 3rd OPERATE
Differential Level
U3P1 U_3H_C harmonic t
calculation detector
U_3H_RES calculation START

INT_BLKD
U_3H_N
U3P2
Bias
calculation
GCB_CLOSED

BLOCK
GUID-E98215CB-2106-48DD-B8A9-F8138148180E V1 EN

Figure 257: Functional module diagram

490 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Third harmonic calculation (terminal side)

This module calculates the magnitude and phase angle of the third harmonic voltage
at the generator terminal Ū 3H_T. Calculation of the third harmonic voltage depends on
the availability of terminal side voltage and is specified by the Voltage selection
setting.

• Voltage selection setting is set to "No voltage" if phase-to-earth voltages are not
available at the terminal side. Even in a situation where only phase-to-phase
voltages are available, Voltage selection is set to "No Voltage" because phase-to-
phase voltages do not contain a third harmonic component. With Voltage
selection set to "No Voltage", third harmonic-based earth-fault protection is
based on third harmonic neutral side undervoltage protection.
• Voltage selection setting is set to "Measured ResU" if the terminal side voltage is
fed from an open delta voltage connection of the voltage transformer. In this case,
the terminal side third harmonic voltage Ū3H_T is same as the measured open delta
voltage Ū3H_RES. This is the recommended option for calculating the terminal
side third harmonic voltage.

U 3H _ T = U 3H _ RES
GUID-E451385D-DBAA-404B-B8D5-0B32B695C369 V1 EN (Equation 54)
• Voltage selection setting is set to "Calculated ResU" if all three phase-to-earth
voltages are available. In this case, the terminal side third harmonic voltage is
calculated as a vector average of the third harmonic voltage of all three phases.
1
U 3H _ T = × (U 3H _ A + U 3H _ B + U 3H _ C )
3
GUID-DD1325B6-68FA-4D27-82A7-908C17BD95D1 V1 EN (Equation 55)
• If only one phase-to-earth voltage is available, the Voltage selection setting is set
to the respective phase, that is, "Phase A" or "Phase B" or "Phase C" based on the
available phase. In this case, the magnitude of the terminal side third harmonic
voltage is assumed to be equal to the third harmonic voltage of the phase
available.

U 3H _ T = U 3H _ A or U 3H _ B or U 3H _ C
GUID-088166F6-9C5D-43AC-BDD2-3870B361EEF6 V1 EN (Equation 56)

The function is internally blocked if the magnitude of calculated Ū3H_T is lower than
the set Voltage block value, this also activates the INT_BLKD output.

Differential calculation
The amplitude of the third harmonic differential voltage can be calculated

630 series 491

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

UD3H = U 3H _ T + U 3H _ N
GUID-4E7C16C5-D21A-47E2-BFF6-4B2F2B9354CA V1 EN (Equation 57)
where:

UD3H Magnitude of the third harmonic differential voltage

Ū3H_T Neutral side third harmonic voltage phasor

Ū3H_N Terminal side third harmonic voltage phasor

The magnitude of the third harmonic differential voltage UD_3H and the phase angle
difference between the terminal side and neutral side third harmonic voltage
U_3HANGL_T_N are available in the monitored data view.

Bias calculation
The amplitude of the third harmonic bias voltage can be calculated

UB3H = Beta × U 3H_N

GUID-085908D2-C47B-4581-AD04-7C1F08CD7A07 V1 EN (Equation 58)
where:

UB3H Magnitude of the third harmonic bias voltage

Beta Setting to achieve the required degree of security under healthy conditions
Ū3H_N Neutral side third harmonic voltage phasor

The above third harmonic bias voltage calculation is valid under all operating
conditions if there is no generator circuit breaker between generator and transformer.
But if the generator circuit breaker is used, it is needed to reduce the sensitivity of the
protection when it is open. The use of the generator circuit breaker is defined by
Generator CB used setting set to "Yes" and the open position is sensed when the
binary input GCB_CLOSED available is FALSE.

With the generator breaker in the open position, function desensitizes the protection
by multiplying the value of the Beta setting with the set constant CB open factor
setting.

UB3H = CB open factor × Beta × U 3H _ N

GUID-D9D21AB5-F5CC-4B5E-9420-E25AE1F793F0 V1 EN (Equation 59)

Neutral side third harmonic voltage is measured via a voltage transformer between the
generator neutral point and the earth. The magnitude of the third harmonic biased
voltage UB_3H is available in the monitored data view.

Level detector
In the third harmonic differential method, the level detector compares the third
harmonic differential voltage with the third harmonic bias voltage. If the differential

492 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

voltage exceeds the biased voltage, the module sends an enabling signal to start the
timer.

If the terminal voltage is not available, that is, Voltage selection is set to "No voltage"
the module compares the neutral side third harmonic voltage U_3H_N to the set
Voltage N 3.H Lim.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The Timer characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset
delay time, the operation timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration START_DUR value, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers.

4.2.8.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (p.u). These p.u. values
are relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA.
The IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-
related settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3".
Similarly, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3" are supported for
the residual current or voltage-related settings. One of the groups to be used with the
Base value Sel phase or Base value Sel Res settings must be selected.

4.2.8.6 Application

Mechanical and thermal stress deteriorates stator winding insulation, which can
eventually cause an earth fault between the winding and stator core.

The fault current magnitude in case of stator earth fault depends on the grounding
type. Common practice in most countries is to earth the generator neutral side through
a resistor. The resistor is selected such as to limit the maximum earth fault current in
the range of 5-10A.

The same can be done by connecting a single phase voltage transformer between the
neutral side and earth, and with an equivalent resistor on the secondary side of the
transformer.

In a normal operating condition, that is, when there is no earth fault, the residual
voltage is close to zero with no zero-sequence current flowing in the generator. When
a phase-to-earth fault occurs, the residual voltage increases and the current flows
through the neutral. The simplest way to protect the stator winding against an earth

630 series 493

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

fault is by providing residual overvoltage protection (or residual/neutral overcurrent

protection). However, at best these simple schemes can protect only 95% of the stator
winding, leaving 5% of the neutral end unprotected. This is because the voltage
generated in the faulted winding decreases as the fault point becomes closer to the
neutral point and it is not enough to drive the protection. Under certain unfavorable
conditions, the blind zone may extend up to 20% from the neutral point.

An earth fault close to the neutral point is not dangerous, but an undetected fault may
develop into an interturn fault or phase-to-phase fault. Also an undetected earth fault
near the neutral point is bypassing the high-impedance grounding, and then another
earth fault at the terminal results in a catastrophic situation.

Therefore, it is important to extend the protection to full 100%. The third harmonic
voltage-based protection is one such protection which provides effective protection
during an earth fault at the neutral point, and at least in the range up to 15 - 20% from
the neutral point along the stator winding.

To achieve a complete stator earth fault protection, two protection functions should
always run in parallel
• Fundamental frequency-based residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV
• Third harmonic voltage-based protection H3EFPSEF.

Stator winding
x E 3H (1-x)E 3H Generator CB Step-up unit Circuit breaker

Neutral Terminal
side side

RN Rf

Fault at distance ‘x’

from generator neutral

x 1- x

ROVPTOV protection

H3EFPSEF
protection
GUID-397285CE-487D-45FF-962D-02557B0D225A V1 EN

Figure 258: Complete stator earth fault protection

Third harmonic voltage-based differential protection

The voltage generated by a generator is not a perfect sinusoidal wave but contains
triplen harmonics voltages. These triplen harmonics appear in each phase with the
same magnitude and angle, due to which they do not sum to zero and thus also appear
in the neutral side of the generator as a zero-sequence quantity. Among all the triplen
harmonics voltages generated, the third harmonic voltage has the highest magnitude
with the magnitude varying between 1% and 10% of the terminal voltage, depending
on the generator design philosophy. However, for a particular generator the

494 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

magnitude of third harmonics on the neutral side and terminal side depends also on the
active power generated.

U3H_T

Full load

No load

Neutral Terminal
No load

Full load Normal operation

U3H_T
U3H_N
Full load

No load

Neutral Terminal

Fault at neutral

U3H_T
U3H_N

Neutral Terminal

No load

Full load Fault at terminal

U3H_N
GUID-601418D4-5B95-467D-A7A9-A261ACC48820 V1 EN

Figure 259: Typical example of the third-harmonic voltage measured at the

generator neutral and terminals under different conditions

The operating equation of the protection

U 3H _ T + U 3H _ N − Beta × U 3H _ N = 0
GUID-C16450FB-CBA6-42E0-BFFA-3520B733F587 V1 EN (Equation 60)

The third harmonic voltages Ū3H_T and Ū3H_N are the phasor with its real and
imaginary parts. Ū3H_T is approximately in the opposite direction to that of the Ū3H_N,

630 series 495

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

however the actual no-fault angle between those two phasors depends on the type of
generator earthing. For example, the angle is about 145 degrees for a high-resistance-
earthed unit generator.

The equation defines the "operate" and "restrain" regions of the protection. The third
harmonic differential protection operates according to the equation:

U 3H _ T + U 3H _ N ≥ Beta × U 3H _ N
GUID-060191A3-CFA5-4B6F-89CD-594C4981BF94 V1 EN (Equation 61)

Ū3H_N Neutral side third harmonic voltage phasor

Ū3H_T Terminal side third harmonic voltage phasor

Beta Setting to achieve a required degree of security under healthy conditions

|Ū3H_T+Ū3H_N| Magnitude of the third harmonic differential voltage

Beta·|Ū3H_N| Magnitude of the third harmonic bias (restrain) voltage

Factor Beta, which is a setting, can be determined from the condition.

GUID-FC8D093D-EE12-4725-BFC2-C54D6BB1EB60 V1 EN (Equation 62)

Where K is the security factor, for example K = 1.5. Equation 61 must be satisfied in
the normal, healthy condition of the protected generator, with a high enough value for
K, so that no unwanted operation of the protection should be expected, no matter what
the load is on the generator.

To assure a reliable functioning of the protection, it is necessary that

the generator produces third harmonic voltage which is at least 1% of
the generator rated voltage.

There may be situations that the VTs on the terminal side are connected between
phase-to-phase. Phase-to-phase voltages do not contain a third harmonic component
and hence the above differential protection cannot work. In such case, the Voltage
selection setting is set to "No Voltage" and H3EFPSEF operates as a simple neutral
side third harmonic undervoltage protection.

When H3EFPSEF is reduced to work as only a third harmonic neutral

point undervoltage protection, it is necessary to block the function
during startup and shutdown of generator and also when there is no
sufficient voltage.

496 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Calculating Beta value

The setting Beta gives the proportion of the third harmonic voltage in the neutral point
of the generator to be used as bias quantity. Beta must be set so that there is no risk of
trip during the normal, non-faulted operation of the generator. If Beta is set high, this
limits the portion of the stator winding covered by the protection. In most cases, the
default setting 3.00 gives an acceptable sensitivity for an earth fault near the neutral
point of the stator winding. However, to assure the best performance, measurements
during the normal operation of the generator are to be made during commissioning.

1. The value of the Beta setting must be set to 1.00.

2. Loading of the generator is done at 5 to 10 different load points and the third
harmonic differential and bias voltage are measured. Both quantities can be
obtained from the monitored data view of the function.
3. A graph indicating differential and bias voltages as a functions of the load on the
generator must be plotted.
4. Based on the graph, such value of the Beta setting must be selected that the bias
voltage, even in the worst condition, is at least 30% to 50% higher than the
differential voltage.

The angle between the third harmonic voltage phasors Ū3H_T and Ū3H_N is 150°, and
with the Beta setting value "1.0", protection guarantees a stability margin of 25%. This
requires the value of Beta to be increased so as to increase the stability of protection.
The recommended value of the Beta setting is at least 1.2.

Magnitude of
3rd Harmonic
voltage in
secondary volts Beta × U 3H_N
8
K =
U 3H_T + U 3H_N
If beta = 1.00 then
Security factor K: 1.00 × 1.5
K = = 1.25
1.2 Bias voltage
If Beta = 1.00, bias voltage
6 is same as U3H_N

4
Differential voltage

2 1.5

Stability margin is 25%.

These should be atleast
1.2 30-50%.
Beta = 1.2 recommended

25 50 75 100
% Generator load
GUID-CB81AF5A-268F-487C-B1A5-60AF12FBEE66 V1 EN

Figure 260: Typical example of variation of the bias voltage and differential
voltage with a change in the active generated load (the angle
between the third harmonic terminal and neutral voltage is 150°)

630 series 497

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Calculating CB Open factor

One of the factors, though not major, governing the magnitude of the generated third
harmonic voltage is the generator terminal capacitance. If there is no generator
breaker, the capacitive coupling to earth is the same under all operating conditions.
However, the generator breaker normally exists between the protected generator and
its power transformer.
Stator winding
x E3 H (1-x) E 3H Generator CB Step-up unit Circuit breaker

Neutral Terminal
side x (1-x) side

Rf
3*C g/2 3*C t
3*C g/2
Fault at distance ‘x’
from generator neutral

C N = 3*C g/2
CT = 3*C g/2 + 3*C t
or
CT = 3*C g/2
Note:
C g = Phase capacitance of the generator stator winding
C t = Total external phase capacitance of the system as seen from the generator.
C N = Phase-to-earth lumped capacitance of the generator stator winding between the earth-fault location
and the generator neutral
C T = Phase-to-earth lumped capacitance of the generator stator winding between the generator terminal and
earth-fault location
GUID-78B53A8D-F20B-4FE8-9C79-9544E3BFAE68 V1 EN

Figure 261: Capacitance seen at generator terminal and neutral side.

When there is a generator breaker, the capacitive coupling to earth differs between the
operating conditions when the generator is running with the generator breaker open
(before synchronization) and with the circuit breaker closed.

With the generator breaker open, the total capacitance is smaller compared to normal
operating conditions. This means that the neutral side third harmonic voltage is
reduced compared to the normal operating condition. Therefore, there is a need to
reduce the sensitivity of the protection. When generator breaker is open, H3EFPSEF
desensitizes the protection by multiplying the Beta setting with a set constant CB open
factor setting.

U 3H _ T + U 3H _ N ≥ CB open factor × Beta × U 3H _ N

GUID-BE81F259-32F3-4253-BB5F-B586044915A7 V1 EN (Equation 63)

The CB Open factor setting is obtained during commissioning.

498 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

1. For a particular value of Beta the third harmonic neutral voltage is measured with
the generator in the no-load condition and the circuit breaker in the closed
position.
2. With the same condition, the third harmonic neutral voltage with the circuit
breaker in the open position is measured.
3. CB Open factor should be set equal to the ratio of the third harmonic neutral
voltage measured with the circuit breaker in the closed position to that in the open.

4.2.8.7 Signals
Table 532: H3EFPSEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs terminal side
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Group signal for voltage input neutral side
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
GCB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Generator CB in closed position

Table 533: H3EFPSEF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start
INT_BLKD BOOLEAN Protection internally blocked

4.2.8.8 Settings
Table 534: H3EFPSEF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Beta 0.50 - 10.00 - 0.01 3.00 Portion of neutral side 3rd harmonic used
as bias
Voltage N 3.H Lim 0.005 - 0.200 - 0.001 0.010 Start value for 3rd harmonic residual
undervoltage protection
Operate delay time 0.08 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.08 Operate delay time

Table 535: H3EFPSEF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Voltage selection No Voltage - - Measured ResU Type of voltage connection available at
Measured ResU generator terminal
Calculated ResU
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
CB open factor 1.00 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplication factor for Beta when CB is in
open condition

630 series 499

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 536: H3EFPSEF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On

Table 537: H3EFPSEF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Generator CB used No - - Yes Defines if generator circuit breaker exists
Yes
Voltage block value 0.010 - 0.100 xUn 0.001 0.010 Low level blocking for 3rd harmonic
differential protection.
Reset delay time 0.02 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Reset delay time

4.2.8.9 Measured values

Table 538: H3EFPSEF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
GCB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Generator CB in closed position

4.2.8.10 Monitored data

Table 539: H3EFPSEF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start
1=TRUE
INT_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Protection internally
1=TRUE blocked
UD_3H_AMPL REAL - kV Third harmonic
differential voltage
amplitude
UB_3H_AMPL REAL - kV Third harmonic bias
voltage amplitude
U_3H_T_AMPL REAL - kV Terminal side third
harmonic voltage
amplitude
Table continues on next page

500 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

U_3H_N_AMPL REAL - kV Neutral side third
harmonic voltage
amplitude
U_3HANGL_T_N REAL - deg Phase angle btw 3rd
harmonic terminal and
neutral voltage
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration

4.2.8.11 Technical data

Table 540: H3EFPSEF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn
±5% of the set value or ±0.004 × Un

Start time 1)2) Typically 23 ms (±15 ms)

Reset time <45 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms

1) fn= 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.2.9 Multi-frequency admittance-based earth-fault protection

MFADPSDE

4.2.9.1 Identification
Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE
identification identification identification
Multi-frequency admittance-based MFADPSDE I0> –>Y 67YN
earth-fault protection

4.2.9.2 Function block

GUID-BE43881D-976C-4FC3-8985-52E3BFAA1BCC V1 EN

Figure 262: Function block

630 series 501

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.9.3 Functionality

The multi-frequency admittance-based earth-fault protection MFADPSDE provides

selective directional earth-fault protection for high-impedance earthed networks, that
is, for compensated, unearthed and high resistance earthed systems. It can be applied
for the earth-fault protection of overhead lines and underground cables.

The operation of MFADPSDE is based on multi-frequency neutral admittance

measurement, utilizing cumulative phasor summing technique. This concept provides
extremely secure, dependable and selective earth-fault protection also in cases where
the residual quantities are highly distorted and contain non-fundamental frequency
components.

The sensitivity that can be achieved is comparable with traditional fundamental

frequency based methods such as IoCos/IoSin (DEFxPTOC), Watt/Varmetric
(WPWDE) and neutral admittance (EFPADM).

Besides faults with dominantly fundamental frequency content, MFADPSDE is also

capable in detecting transient, intermittent and restriking earth faults. MFADPSDE
can be used as an alternative solution to transient or intermittent function INTRPTEF.

MFADPSDE supports fault direction indication both in operate and non-operate

direction, which may be utilized during fault location process. Further, the inbuilt
transient detector may be used to identify restriking or intermittent earth faults, and
discriminate them from permanent/continuous earth faults.

The operation characteristic is defined by a tilted operation sector, which is

universally valid for unearthed and compensated networks.

The operating time characteristic is according to the definite time (DT).

MFADPSDE contains a blocking functionality to block function outputs, timers or the

function itself.

4.2.9.4 Operation principle

The Operation setting is used to enable or disable the function. When "On" is selected,
the function is enabled and when "Off" is selected, the function is disabled.

The operation of multi-frequency admittance-based earth-fault protection

MFADPSDE can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the following sections.

502 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-10AB79C5-655E-4A89-AEC2-4D6411EBB7AA V1 EN

Figure 263: Functional module diagram

General Fault Criterion

The General Fault Criterion (GFC) module monitors the presence of earth-fault in the
network and it is based on the value of the fundamental frequency zero-sequence
voltage defined as the vector sum of fundamental frequency phase voltage phasors
divided by three.
1
U 0 = U 1A + U B1 + U C1 / 3
( )
GUID-DB58E2BC-A313-4488-94F4-E1585A4683AD V1 EN (Equation 64)

1
When the magnitude of U o exceeds setting Voltage start value, an earth-fault is
detected. The GFC module reports the exceeded value to the Fault direction
determination module and Operation logic. The reporting is referenced as General
Fault Criterion release.

The setting Voltage start value defines the basic sensitivity of the MFADPSDE
function. To avoid unselective start or operation, Voltage start value must always be
set to a value which exceeds the maximum healthy-state zero-sequence voltage value,
taking into consideration of possible network topology changes, compensation coil
and parallel resistor switching status and compensation degree variations.

As an alternative for internal residual zero-sequence overvoltage based start-

condition, MFADPSDE function can also be externally released by utilizing the
RELEASE input. In this case, the external release signal overrides the Voltage start
value setting and sets the internal limit to minimum value.

630 series 503

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Multi-frequency admittance calculation

Multi-frequency admittance calculation module calculates neutral admittances
utilising fundamental frequency and the 2nd, 3rd, 5th, 7th and 9th harmonic
components of residual current and zero-sequence voltage. The following
admittances are calculated, if the magnitude of a particular harmonic in residual
current and zero-sequence voltage are measurable by the IED.

Fundamental frequency admittance (conductance and susceptance)

3 ⋅ I 01
Y01 = = Go1 + j ⋅ Bo1
−U 1
0
GUID-6A9B593D-07C2-4DA2-8AD2-F81D02B182B1 V1 EN (Equation 65)

Harmonic susceptance

 3 ⋅ I 0n 
Im Y0n  = Im   = j ⋅ Bon
 
 −U 0 
n

GUID-D6E26C28-A639-440B-A11D-9286466BB3AE V1 EN (Equation 66)

where n = 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9

Y01 is the fundamental frequency neutral admittance phasor

I 01 is the fundamental frequency zero-sequence current phasor

(= ( I 1A + I B1 + I C1 ) / 3)

U 01 is the fundamental frequency zero-sequence voltage phasor

(= (U 1A + U B1 + U C1 ) / 3)

1
Go1 is the fundamental frequency conductance, Re Y0 ( )
1
Bo1 is the fundamental frequency susceptance, Im Y0
( )
Y0n is the nth harmonic frequency neutral admittance phasor

I 0n is the nth harmonic frequency zero-sequence current phasor

U 0n is the nth harmonic frequency zero-sequence voltage phasor

n
Bon is the nth harmonic frequency susceptance, Im Y0
( )

504 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

For fault direction determination, the fundamental frequency admittance and

harmonic susceptances are summed together in phasor format. The result is the sum
admittance phasor defined as below.

 9

Y osum = Re Y01  + j ⋅ Im Y01 + ∑ Y0n  = Go1 + j ⋅ Bosum
   n =2 
GUID-41F81DC3-4785-458B-A78F-8008A3C4C98E V1 EN (Equation 67)

The polarity of the polarizing quantity (residual voltage) can be

changed (rotated by 180 degrees) by setting the Pol reversal
parameter to "True" or by switching the polarity of the residual
voltage measurement wires.

Fault direction determination

If an earth-fault is detected by the GFC module, the fault direction is evaluated based
on the calculated sum admittance phasor Y osum obtained from the Multi-frequency
admittance calculation module. To obtain dependable and secure fault direction
determination regardless of the fault type (transient, intermittent, restriking,
permanent, high or low ohmic), the fault direction is calculated using a special
filtering algorithm, Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) technique. This filtering
method is advantageous during transient, intermittent and restriking earth-faults with
dominantly non-sinusoidal or transient content. It is equally valid during continuous
(stable) earth-faults.

The concept of CPS is illustrated in Figure 264. It is the result of adding values of the
measured sum admittance phasors together in phasor format in chronological order
during the fault. Using the discrete sum admittance phasors Y osum in different time

instants (t1...t5), the corresponding accumulated sum admittance phasor Y osum _ CPS is
calculated. This phasor is used as directional phasor in determining the direction of the
fault.

Y osum _ CPS (t1 ) = Y osum (t1 )

GUID-E8F3689F-C281-4EBD-88D4-96486A7446E7 V1 EN (Equation 68)

Y osum _ CPS (t2 ) = Y osum (t1 ) + Y osum (t2 )

GUID-D70036B2-7F42-4C0B-AC16-D3597F8EC99B V1 EN (Equation 69)

Y osum _ CPS (t3 ) = Y osum (t1 ) + Y osum (t2 ) + Y osum (t3 )

GUID-C100E4A8-8D46-42A8-AD7E-A96A8E0B37C2 V1 EN (Equation 70)

Y osum _ CPS (t4 ) = Y osum (t1 ) + Y osum (t2 ) + Y osum (t3 ) + Y osum (t4 )
GUID-CC119D19-EE47-432F-9335-E439B429029C V1 EN (Equation 71)

630 series 505

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Y osum _ CPS (t5 ) = Y osum (t1 ) + Y osum (t2 ) + Y osum (t3 ) + Y osum (t4 ) + Y osum (t5 )
GUID-266C7919-1553-4A33-B70E-7444EBB98BE9 V1 EN (Equation 72)

GUID-E5CC06B9-CE69-4DB3-9FB2-FD4B3EA4CBCA V1 EN

Figure 264: Principle of Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS)

The advantage of the CPS technique is that it provides a stable directional phasor
quantity regardless of the fact that individual phasors can vary in magnitude and phase
angle in time due to a non-stable fault type such as restriking or intermittent earth-
fault. This is also true for harmonic components included in the sum admittance
phasor. Harmonics have typically a highly fluctuating character.

The advantage of harmonic components is that they provide more distinctive

directional determination in compensated networks than the fundamental frequency
component. This comes from the fact that for the higher frequencies, the
compensation coil appears as very high impedance and the harmonics are not affected
by compensation coil and degree of compensation. When harmonics are present, they
cause the sum admittance phasor to behave as in case of an unearthed network, where
directional phasors point in fully opposite directions in the faulty and healthy feeder.

The direction of the MFADPSDE function is defined with setting Directional mode as
“Forward” or “Reverse”. The operation characteristic is defined by tilted operation
sector as illustrated in Figure 265. The characteristic provides universal applicability,
that is, it is valid both in compensated and unearthed networks, also if the
compensation coil is temporarily switched off. The tilt of the operation sector is
defined with setting Tilt angle to compensate the measurement errors of residual
current and voltage transformers. The typical setting value of 5 degrees is
recommended, but it should always reflect the actual maximum expected
measurement errors.

In case of unearthed network operation, adequate tilt angle must be

allowed to ensure dependable operation of MFADPSDE.

506 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

In Figure 265, phasors 1...4 demonstrate the behavior of the directional phasor in
different network fault conditions.
• Phasor 1 depicts the direction of accumulated sum admittance phasor in case of
earth-fault outside the protected feeder (assuming that the admittance of the
protected feeder is dominantly capacitive). The result is valid regardless of the
fault type (low ohmic, high(er) ohmic, permanent, intermittent or restriking). In
case harmonic components are present in the fault quantities, they would turn the
phasor align to the negative Im(Yo) axis.
• Phasor 2 depicts the direction of accumulated sum admittance phasor in case of
earth-fault inside the protected feeder when the network is unearthed. The result
is also valid in compensated networks when there are harmonic components
present in the fault quantities (typically low ohmic permanent or intermittent or
restriking fault). In this case, the result is valid regardless of network’s actual
compensation degree. Harmonics would turn the phasor align to the positive
Im(Yo) axis.
• Phasors 3 and 4 depict the direction of accumulated sum admittance phasor in
case of higher-ohmic earth-fault in the protected feeder without harmonics in the
fault quantities when the network is compensated. As there are no harmonic
components present, the phase angle of the accumulated phasor is determined by
the compensation degree of the network. With high degree of overcompensation,
the phasor turns towards the negative Im(Yo) axis (as phasor 4).

630 series 507

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-32DBB5F7-67E7-4AD0-85D3-3E23AFA99031 V1 EN

Figure 265: Directional characteristic of MFADPSDE

The residual current is recommended to be measured with accurate

core balance current transformer to minimize the measurement errors,
especially phase displacement. This is especially important, when
high sensitivity of protection is targeted.

The characteristic Tilt angle should reflect the measurement errors,

that is, the larger the measurement errors, the larger the Tilt angle
setting should be. Typical setting value of 5 degrees is recommended.

The detected fault direction is available as output FAULT_DIR or in the monitored

data view as parameter DIRECTION.

508 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

To adapt the fault direction determination to possible fault direction change during the
fault, for example, during manual fault location process, a cyclic accumulation of sum
admittance phasors is conducted. The duration of this directional evaluation cycle is
1.2 · Reset delay time (minimum of 600 ms). If the fault direction based on the cyclic
phasor accumulation is opposite to the function direction output for Reset delay time
or 500 ms (minimum of 500 ms), the function is reset and fault direction calculation
of MFADPSDE is restarted.

In case the earth-fault protection is alarming, the function MFADPSDE includes also
a RESET input, which can be utilised to externally re-trigger the fault direction
determination, if re-evaluation of fault direction during a persistent earth-fault is
required. It is also recommended to connect the start-signal of non-directional earth-
fault protection (EFxPTOC), set to operate in case of a cross-country fault, to RESET
input of MFADPSDE to reset phasor accumulation during a cross-country fault.
MFADPSDE is then able to adapt to possible fault direction change more rapidly, if
single phase earth-fault still persists in the system after the other faulty feeder has been
tripped (cross-country fault has been transformed back to a single phase earth-fault).

The direction of the MFADPSDE function is supervised by a settable current

magnitude threshold. The operate current used in the magnitude supervision is
measured with a special filtering method, which provides very stable residual current
estimate regardless of the fault type. This stabilized current estimate is the result from
fundamental frequency admittance calculation utilizing the CPS technique. The
stabilized current value is obtained (after conversion) from the corresponding
admittance value by multiplying it with the system nominal phase-to-earth voltage
value, which is entered as a base value for the residual voltage (Ubaseres). The
equations for calculating the stabilized values of the fundamental frequency
admittance and the corresponding current are given below.

3 ⋅ I 01 CPS
Yo1 stab = = Re Yo1 stab  + j ⋅ Im Yo1 stab  = Gost
1 1
ab + j ⋅ Bostab
−U 1    
0 CPS
GUID-F46BE1C8-5998-4834-A831-D9F022902758 V1 EN (Equation 73)

I o1 stab = (Gostab
1
+ j ⋅ Bostab
1
) ⋅ U baseres = I oCosstab
1
+ j ⋅ I oSinsta
1
b
GUID-7EBB101E-BB04-4478-BA5C-75E6582B7DB3 V1 EN (Equation 74)

Yo1 stab is the stabilized fundamental frequency admittance estimate, which is result
from fundamental frequency admittance calculation utilizing the Cumulative Phasor
Summing (CPS) technique.

I 01 CPS is the fundamental frequency zero-sequence current phasor calculated utilizing

the Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) technique.

U 01 CPS is the fundamental frequency zero-sequence voltage phasor calculated

utilizing the Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) technique.

630 series 509

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Go1stab is the real-part of stabilized fundamental frequency conductance estimate.

Bo1stab is the imaginary part of stabilized fundamental frequency susceptance estimate.

I o1 stab is the stabilized fundamental frequency residual current estimate, which is

obtained (after conversion) from the corresponding admittance value by multiplying
it with the system nominal phase-to-earth voltage value.

I o1 Cosstab is the real-part of stabilized fundamental frequency residual current estimate.

I o1 Sinstab is the imaginary-part of stabilized fundamental frequency residual current

estimate.

The main advantage of the filtering method is that due to the admittance calculation,
the resulting current value does not depend on the value of fault resistance, that is, the
estimated current magnitude equals the value that would be measured during a solid
earth-fault (Rf = 0 Ω). Another advantage of the method is that it is capable of
estimating correct current magnitude also during intermittent or restriking faults.

The setting Min Fwd Op current defines the minimum operate current in case the
operation direction is set forward. The setting Min Rev Op current defines the
minimum operate current in case the operation direction is set to reverse.

With previously described special filtering technique, the settings Min Fwd Op
current and Min Rev Op current are based on fundamental frequency residual current
values.

Setting Operating quantity defines whether the current magnitude supervision is

based on either the “Adaptive” or “Amplitude” methods.

When “Adaptive” is selected, the method adapts the principle of magnitude

supervision automatically to the system earthing condition. In case the phase angle of
accumulated sum admittance phasor is greater than 45 degrees, the set minimum
1
operate current threshold is compared to the amplitude of I o stab (see Figure 266). In
case the phase angle of accumulated sum admittance phasor is below 45 degrees, the
set minimum operate current threshold is compared to the resistive component of
I o1 stab . This automatic adaptation of the magnitude supervision enables secure and
dependable directional determination in compensated networks, and it is also valid
when the network is unearthed (compensation coil is switched off).

In case operation direction is set to reverse, the resistive and amplitude sectors are
mirrored in the operation characteristics.

When “Amplitude” is selected, the set minimum operate current threshold is

1
compared to the amplitude of I o stab . This selection can be used in unearthed networks.

510 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

In compensated networks, setting Operating quantity should be set to

“Adaptive”. This enables secure and dependable directional
determination on compensated networks and it is also valid when
compensation coil is switched off and network becomes unearthed.

GUID-3C8B0069-869D-4EF6-8D34-313573621A5F V1 EN

Figure 266: Illustration of amplitude and resistive current sectors if Operating

quantity is set “Adaptive” and Directional mode is set “Forward”

The setting rules for current thresholds are given below.

In case the “Adaptive” operating quantity is selected, the setting Min Fwd Op current
(Min Rev Op current) should be set to value:

[ pu ] < p ⋅ IRtot
GUID-E474F5BD-773E-48A8-B246-8ADD662117A4 V1 EN

630 series 511

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

IRtot is the total resistive earth-fault current of the network corresponding to the
resistive current of the parallel resistor of the coil and the natural losses of the system
(typically in order of 1...5 % of the total capacitive earth-fault current of the network).

p = security factor = 0.5…0.7

This setting should be set based on the total resistive earth-fault current of the network
including the parallel resistor of the coil and the network losses. It must be set to a
value which is lower than total resistive earth-fault current in order to enable
dependable operation.

For example, if the resistive current of the parallel resistor is 10 A (at primary voltage
level), then a value of 0.5 · 10 A = 5 A could be used. The same setting is also
applicable in case the coil is disconnected and the network becomes unearthed (as in
1
this case this setting is compared to the amplitude of I o stab ). The selected setting value
must never exceed the ampere value of the parallel resistor in order to allow operation
in the faulty feeder. In case of smaller ampere value of the parallel resistor, for
example 5 A, the recommended security factor should be larger, for example 0.7, so
that sufficient margin for CT and VT errors can be achieved.

In case the “Amplitude” operating quantity is selected, the setting should be selected
based on the capacitive earth-fault current values produced by the background
network in case of a solid earth-fault with a security margin.

The main task of the current magnitude supervision module is to

secure the correct directional determination of an earth-fault, so that
only the faulty feeder is disconnected or alarmed. Therefore, the
threshold values should be selected carefully and not set too high as
this can inhibit the disconnection of the faulty feeder.

The residual current should be measured with accurate core balance

current transformer to minimize the measurement errors, especially
phase displacement.

Transient detector
The Transient detector module is used for detecting transients in the residual current
and zero-sequence voltage signals. Whenever transient is detected, this is indicated
with the PEAK_IND output. When the number of detected transients equals or
exceeds the Peak counter limit setting (without the function being reset, depending on
the drop-off time set with the Reset delay time setting), INTR_EF output is activated.
This indicates detection of restriking or intermittent earth-fault in the network.
Transient detector affects the operation of MFADPSDE (START and OPERATE
outputs) when operation mode is “Intermittent EF”. For other operation modes,
(“General EF”, “Alarming EF”), PEAK_IND and INTR_EF outputs can be used for

512 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

monitoring purposes. The operation of the Transient detector is illustrated in Figure

267.

Several factors affect the magnitude and frequency of fault transients,

such as the fault inception angle on the voltage wave, fault location,
fault resistance and the parameters of the feeders and the supplying
transformers. If the fault is permanent (non-transient) in nature, the
initial fault transient in current and voltage can be measured, whereas
the intermittent fault creates repetitive transients. The practical
sensitivity of transient detection is limited to approximately few
hundreds of ohms of fault resistance. Therefore the application of
transient detection is limited to low ohmic earth-faults.

GUID-DF4E30CC-22A7-4D87-B9D6-2AF32BB40683 V1 EN

Figure 267: Example of operation of Transient detector: indication of detected

transient by PEAK_IND output and detection of restriking or
intermittent earth-fault by INTR_EF output (setting Peak counter limit
= 3)

Operation logic
MFADPSDE supports three operation modes selected with setting Operation mode:
“General EF”, “Alarming EF” and “Intermittent EF”.

630 series 513

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Operation mode “General EF” is applicable in all kinds of earth-faults in unearthed

and compensated networks. It is intended to detect all kinds of earth-faults regardless
of their type (transient, intermittent or restriking, permanent, high or low ohmic). The
setting Voltage start value defines the basic sensitivity of the MFADPSDE function.

In “General EF” mode, the operate timer is started in the following conditions.
• Earth-fault is detected by the General Fault Criterion (GFC)
• Fault direction equals Directional mode setting
• Estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual current exceeds set
minimum operate current level (forward direction Min Fwd Op current and
reverse direction Min Rev Op current)

The START output is activated once Start delay time has elapsed. OPERATE output is
activated once Operate delay time has elapsed and the above three conditions are
valid. Reset timer is started if any of the above three conditions is not valid. In case
fault is transient and self-extinguishes, START output stays activated until the elapse
of reset timer (setting Reset delay time). After OPERATE output activation, START
and OPERATE outputs are reset immediately, if any of the above three conditions is
not valid. The start duration value START_DUR, available in the monitored data
view, indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time.
The start duration value START_DUR available in the monitored data view, indicates
the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time.

In case detection of temporary earth-faults is not desired, the

activation of START output can be delayed with setting Start delay
time. The same setting can be also used to avoid restarting of the
function during long lasting post-fault oscillations, if time constant of
post-fault oscillations is very long (network losses and damping is
low).

To keep the operate timer activated between current spikes during

intermittent or restriking earth-fault, the Reset delay time should be set
to a value exceeding the maximum expected time interval between
fault spikes (obtained at full resonance condition). Recommended
value is at least 300 ms.

514 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-9AE2600B-6DA1-49FC-95BC-16EDA77382FD V1 EN

Figure 268: Operation in “General EF” mode

Operation mode “Alarming EF” is applicable in all kinds of earth-faults in unearthed

and compensated networks, where fault detection is only alarming. It is intended to
detect all kinds of earth-faults regardless of their type (transient, intermittent or
restriking, permanent, high or low ohmic). The setting Voltage start value defines the
basic sensitivity of the MFADPSDE function. In “Alarming EF” mode, the operate
timer is started during the following conditions.
• Earth-fault is detected by the GFC
• Fault direction equals Directional mode setting
• Estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual current exceeds set
minimum operate current level (forward direction Min Fwd Op current and
reverse direction Min Rev Op current)

The START output is activated once Start delay time has elapsed. OPERATE output is
not valid in the “Alarming EF” mode. Reset timer is started if any of the above three

630 series 515

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

conditions are not valid. In case the fault is transient and self-extinguishes, START
output stays activated until the elapse of reset timer (setting Reset delay time).

In case detection of temporary earth-faults is not desired, the

activation of START output can be delayed with setting Start delay
time.

To keep the operate timer activated between current spikes during

intermittent or restriking earth-fault, the Reset delay time should be set
to a value exceeding the maximum expected time interval between
fault spikes (obtained at full resonance condition). The recommended
value is at least 300 ms.

516 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-BA65D6FF-6FFB-48F6-8D31-588BBA003101 V1 EN

Figure 269: Operation in Alarming EF mode

Operation mode “Intermittent EF” is dedicated for detecting restriking or intermittent

earth-faults. For operation, a required number of intermittent earth-fault transients set
with the Peak counter limit setting must be detected. Therefore, transient faults or
permanent faults with only initial fault ignition transient are not detected in
“Intermittent EF” mode. The application of “Intermittent EF” mode is limited to low
ohmic intermittent or restriking earth-faults.

In the “Intermittent EF” mode, the operate timer is started when following conditions
are met.

630 series 517

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

• Transient is detected by the Transient detector (indicated with PEAK_IND

output)
• Earth-fault is detected by the GFC at time of transient
• Fault direction equals Directional mode setting
• Estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual current exceeds set
minimum operate current level (forward direction Min Fwd Op current and
reverse direction Min Rev Op current)

When a required number of intermittent earth-fault transients set with the Peak
counter limit setting are detected without the function being reset (depends on the
drop-off time set with the Reset delay time setting), the START output is activated. The
INTR_EF output is activated to indicate the fault type is intermittent or restriking
earth-fault. The operate timer is kept activated as long as transients occur during the
drop-off time defined by setting Reset delay time.

The OPERATE output is activated when Operate delay time has elapsed, required
number of transients has been detected, earth-fault is detected by the GFC, fault
direction matches the Directional mode setting and estimated stabilized fundamental
frequency residual current exceeds set Minimum operate current setting.

The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient. Function is reset if
time between current peaks is more that Reset delay time or if the General Fault
Criterion release is reset. After OPERATE output activation, START and OPERATE
outputs are reset immediately at the falling edge of General Fault Criterion release,
that is, when zero-sequence voltage falls below Voltage start value. This should be
considered if “Intermittent EF" mode is applied in case earth-faults are only alarmed
to avoid repetitive start and operate events.

To keep the operate timer activated between current spikes during

intermittent or restriking earth-fault, Reset delay time should be set to
a value exceeding the maximum expected time interval between
(obtained at full resonance condition). The recommended value is at
least 300 ms.

518 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-0191DF34-1A3A-427C-9B69-8BBF77F79DB1 V1 EN

Figure 270: Operation in “Intermittent EF” mode, Peak counter limit = 3

The binary input BLOCK is used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK
input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input BLK_ST is
used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR is used to block the
operating signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the prevailing value
by activating the FR_TIMER input.

Timer
If the detected fault direction is opposite to the set directional mode and GFC release
is active, BLK_EF output is activated once Start delay time has elapsed. Reset timer
is activated at the falling edge of General Fault Criterion release, that is, when zero-
sequence voltage falls below Voltage start value. BLK_EF is reset once the reset delay
time elapses. Activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the BLK_EF output and
resets Timer.

630 series 519

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-1087865B-31F1-4D43-A3AC-6FC500A617D3 V1 EN

Figure 271: Activation of BLK_EF output (indication that fault is located opposite
to the set operate direction)

Base values
In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example, the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the residual current or voltage-related
settings, for example, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3". One
of the groups to be used with the Base value Sel Res setting must be selected.

4.2.9.5 Application

MFADPSDE provides selective directional earth-fault protection for high-impedance

earthed networks, that is, for compensated, unearthed and high resistance earthed
systems. It can be applied for the earth-fault protection of overhead lines and
underground cables.

520 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The operation of MFADPSDE is based on multi-frequency neutral admittance

measurement utilizing cumulative phasor summing technique. This concept provides
extremely secure, dependable and selective earth-fault protection also in cases where
the residual quantities are highly distorted and contain non-fundamental frequency
components. MFADPSDE is well-suited for compensated networks where
measurement signals may have such characteristics, for example, during intermittent
earth-faults.

MFADPSDE is capable of operating with both low ohmic and higher ohmic earth
faults, where the sensitivity limit is defined with residual overvoltage condition. This
allows earth faults with several kilohms of fault resistance to be detected in a
symmetrical system. The sensitivity that can be achieved is comparable with
traditional fundamental frequency based methods such as the IoCos/IoSin
(DEFxPTOC), Watt/Varmetric (WPWDE) and neutral admittance (EFPADM).

Besides faults with dominantly fundamental frequency content, MFADPSDE is also

capable in detecting transient, intermittent or restriking earth faults. MFADPSDE can
be used as an alternative solution to transient or intermittent function INTRPTEF.

MFADPSDE supports Fault direction indication in operate and non-operate direction

which may be utilized during fault location process. The inbuilt ransient detector can
be used to identify restriking or intermittent earth faults, and discriminate them from
permanent or continuous earth-faults.

The direction of MFADPSDE can be set as forward or reverse. The operation

characteristic is defined by a tilted operation sector, which is universally valid both in
unearthed and compensated networks. The tilt of the operation sector should be
selected based on the measurement errors of the applied residual current and voltage
measurement transformers.

The operating time characteristic is according to the definite time (DT).

The function contains a blocking functionality to block function outputs, timers or the
function itself.

MFADPSDE supports both tripping and alarming mode of operation. For alarming
earth-fault protection application, the function contains a dedicated operation mode.

MFADPSDE provides reliability and sensitivity of protection with a single function.

This enables simpler implementation of protection schemes as separate fault type
dedicated earth-fault functions and coordination between them are not necessarily
required. Other advantages of MFADPSDE includes versatile applicability, good
selectivity, good sensitivity and easy setting principles.

One instance (stage) of MFADPSDE function is available.

630 series 521

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.9.6 Signals
Table 541: MFADPSDE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block of start signal
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze operation timer
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 External trigger signal to release protection
RESET BOOLEAN 0 External reset for directional calculation

Table 542: MFADPSDE Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
FAULT_DIR INTEGER Detected fault direction
BLK_EF BOOLEAN Block signal for EF to indicate opposite fault
direction
INTR_EF BOOLEAN Intermittent earth-fault indication
PEAK_IND BOOLEAN Current transient detection indication

4.2.9.7 Settings
Table 543: MFADPSDE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode Forward - - Forward Directional mode
Reverse
Voltage start value 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage start value
Operate delay time 0.06 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.5 Operate delay time

Table 544: MFADPSDE Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operating quantity Adaptive - - Adaptive Operating quantity selection
Amplitude

522 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 545: MFADPSDE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On
Operation mode Intermittent EF - - General EF Operation mode
General EF
Alarming EF

Table 546: MFADPSDE Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Min Fwd Op current 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operate current forward
direction
Min Rev Op current 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.01 Minimum operate current reverse
direction
Tilt angle 2.0 - 20.0 Deg 0.1 5.0 Characteristic tilt angle
Peak counter limit 3 - 20 - 1 3 Peak counter limit for restriking EF
detection
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.5 Reset delay time
Start delay time 0.030 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Start delay time
Pol reversal No - - No Rotate polarizing quantity
Yes

4.2.9.8 Measured values

Table 547: MFADPSDE Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block of start signal
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze operation timer
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 External trigger signal to release protection
RESET BOOLEAN 0 External reset for directional calculation

630 series 523

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.2.9.9 Monitored data

Table 548: MFADPSDE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal
1=TRUE
FAULT_DIR INTEGER 0=Unknown - Detected fault direction
1=Forward
2=Backward
3=Both
BLK_EF BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Block signal for EF to
1=TRUE indicate opposite fault
direction
INTR_EF BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Intermittent earth-fault
1=TRUE indication
PEAK_IND BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Current transient
1=TRUE detection indication
DIRECTION INTEGER 0=Unknown - Direction information
1=Forward
2=Backward
3=Both
ANGLE REAL - deg Angle between polarizing
and operating quantity
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

4.2.9.10 Technical data

Table 549: MFADPSDE technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time 1) Typically 50 ms (±10 ms)

Reset time <40 ms

Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

1) Includes the delay of the signal output contact. Results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements.

524 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.3 Differential protection

4.3.1 Transformer differential protection for two winding

transformers TR2PTDF

4.3.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Transformer differential protection for TR2PTDF 3dI>T 87T
two winding transformers

4.3.1.2 Function block

GUID-D47B83D3-6980-42E8-A283-8DAE8D5A3A26 V1 EN

Figure 272: Function block

4.3.1.3 Functionality

The transformer differential protection TR2PTDF is designed to protect two-winding

transformers and generator-transformer blocks. TR2PTDF includes low biased and
high instantaneous stages.

The biased low stage provides a fast clearance of faults while remaining stable with
high currents passing through the protected zone increasing errors on current
measuring. The second harmonic restraint, together with the waveform based
algorithms, ensures that the low stage does not operate due to the transformer inrush
currents. The fifth harmonic restraint ensures that the low stage does not operate on
apparent differential current caused by a harmless transformer over-excitation.

The instantaneous high stage provides a very fast clearance of severe faults with a high
differential current regardless of their harmonics.

630 series 525

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The setting characteristic can be set more sensitive with the aid of tap changer position
compensation. The correction of transformation ratio due to the changes in tap
position is done automatically based on the tap changer status information provided to
the function through input.

4.3.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of transformer differential protection can be described by using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-4107A323-08ED-4FDF-9C8D-DA0AC8AE3E84 V1 EN

Figure 273: Functional module diagram. Group signals I3P1 and I3P2 are used
for feeding the necessary analog signals to the function. I_x1 and
I_x2 represent the phase currents of winding 1 and winding 2.

Differential calculation
TR2PTDF operates phase-wise on a difference of incoming and outgoing currents.
The positive direction of the currents is towards the protected object.

526 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

IW1 IW 2

Winding 1 Winding 2
(usually HV) (usually LV)
GUID-DABAB343-214F-4A86-ADC8-BFD8E64B25A7 V3 EN

Figure 274: Positive direction of the currents

Id = I W 1 + I W 2
GUID-0B35503B-CA7D-4598-A1E4-59C9AA66012D V2 EN (Equation 75)

In a normal situation, no fault occurs in the area protected by TR2PTDF. Then the
currents I W1 and I W 2 are equal and the differential current Id is zero. In practice,
however, the differential current deviates from zero in normal situations. In the power
transformer protection, the differential current is caused by CT inaccuracies,
variations in tap changer position (if not compensated), transformer no-load current
and instantaneous transformer inrush currents. An increase in the load current causes
the differential current, caused by the CT inaccuracies and the tap changer position, to
grow at the same percentage rate.

In a biased differential IED in normal operation or during external faults, the higher
the load current is the higher is the differential current required for tripping. When an
internal fault occurs, the currents on both sides of the protected object are flowing into
it. This causes the biasing current to be considerably smaller, which makes the
operation more sensitive during internal faults.

IW1 − IW 2
Ib =
2
GUID-1403DDDA-D840-4746-A925-F426AC7A8608 V2 EN (Equation 76)

If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current or if the phase angle
between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero (in a normal
situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has most certainly occurred in
the area protected by the differential IED. Then the operation value set for the
instantaneous stage is automatically halved and the internal blocking signals of the
biased stage are inhibited.

The values displayed on the monitored data view for windings

current, bias current and differential current are per unit.

Transformer vector group matching

The phase difference of the winding 1 and winding 2 currents that is caused by the
vector group of the power transformer is numerically compensated. The matching of
the phase difference is based on the phase shifting and the numerical delta connection
inside the IED. The Winding 2 type parameter determines the connections of the phase

630 series 527

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

windings on the low voltage side (”Y”, ”YN”, ”D”, ”Z”, ”ZN”). Similarly, the
Winding 1 type parameter determines the connection on winding 1
(”Y”, ”YN”, ”D”, ”Z”, ”ZN”).

The vector group matching can be implemented either on both, winding 1 and winding
2, or only on winding 1 or winding 2, at intervals of 30° with the Clock number setting.

When the vector group matching is Yy0 and the CT connection type is according to
"Type 2", the phase angle of the phase currents connected to the IED does not change.
When the vector group matching is Yy6, the phase currents are turned 180° in the IED.

Example 1
Vector group matching of a Ynd11-connected power transformer on winding 1, CT
connection type according to type 1. The Winding 1 type setting is ”YN”, Winding 2
type is ”D” and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is compensated internally by
giving winding 1 internal compensation value +30° and winding 2 internal
compensation value 0°:

I L1 − I L 2
I L1mHV =
3
I L 2 − I L3
I L 2 mHV =
3
I L 3 − I L1
I L 3mHV =
3
GUID-633921A4-D973-4BD2-BFDF-E9FF73C3B9E3 V1 EN (Equation 77)

Example 2
But if vector group is Yd11 and CT connection type is according to type 1, the
compensation is a little different. The Winding 1 type setting is ”Y”, Winding 2 type is
“D” and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is compensated internally by giving
winding 1 internal compensation value 0° and winding 2 internal compensation value
-30°;

I L1 − I L3
I L1mLV =
3
I L 2 − I L1
I L 2 mLV =
3
I L3 − I L 2
I L3mLV =
3
GUID-41089920-D9BF-4574-96FB-0B1F48019391 V1 EN (Equation 78)

The "Y" side currents stay untouched, while the "d" side currents are compensated to
match the currents actually flowing in the windings.

In this example there is no neutral current on either side of the transformer (assuming
there are no earthing transformers installed). In the previous example, however, the

528 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

matching is done differently to have the winding 1 neutral current compensated at the
same time.

Zero-sequence component elimination

If Clock number is "Clk Num 2", "Clk Num 4", "Clk Num 8" or "Clk Num 10", the
vector group matching is always done on both, winding 1 and winding 2. The
combination results in the correct compensation. In this case the zero-sequence
component is always removed from both sides automatically. The Zro A elimination
parameter cannot change this.

If Clock number is "Clk Num 1", "Clk Num 5", "Clk Num 7" or "Clk Num 11", the
vector group matching is done on one side only. A possible zero-sequence component
of the phase currents at earth faults occurring outside the protection area is eliminated
in the numerically implemented delta connection before the differential current and
the biasing current are calculated. This is why the vector group matching is almost
always made on the star connected side of the "Ynd" and "Dyn" connected
transformers.

If Clock number is "Clk Num 0" or "Clk Num 6", the zero-sequence component of the
phase currents is not eliminated automatically on either side. Therefore, the zero-
sequence component on the star connected side that is earthed at its star point has to
be eliminated by using the Zro A elimination parameter.

The same parameter has to be used to eliminate the zero-sequence component if there
is, for example, an earthing transformer on the delta-connected side of the "Ynd"
power transformer in the area to be protected. In this case, the vector group matching
is normally made on the side of the star connection. On the side of the delta
connection, the elimination of the zero-sequence component has to be separately
selected.

By using the Zro A elimination parameter, the zero-sequence component of the phase
currents is calculated and reduced for each phase current:

1
(
I L1m = I L1 − x I L1 + I L 2 + I L3
3
)
1
(
I L 2 m = I L 2 − x I L1 + I L 2 + I L3
3
)
1
(
I L3m = I L3 − x I L1 + I L 2 + I L3
3
)
GUID-398EDAFF-4A32-4C39-AD75-1F6D19B8FF48 V1 EN (Equation 79)

In many cases with the earthed neutral of a "wye" winding, it is

possible to make the compensation so that a zero-sequence
component of the phase currents is automatically eliminated. For
example, in a case of a "Ynd" transformer, the compensation is made
on the winding 1 side to automatically eliminate the zero-sequence
component of the phase currents on that side (and the "d" side does not
have them). In those cases, explicit elimination is not needed.

630 series 529

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Compensation of tap changer position

The position of the tap changer used for voltage control can be compensated and the
position information is provided for the protection function through the tap position
indication function TPOSSLTC1.

Typically, the tap changer is located within the high voltage winding, that is, winding
1, of the power transformer. The Tapped winding parameter specifies whether the tap
changer is connected to the high voltage side winding or the low voltage side winding.
This parameter is also used to enable and disable the automatic adaptation to the tap
changer position. The possible values are "Not in use", "Winding 1", "Winding 2".

The Tap nominal parameter tells the number of the tap, which results in the nominal
voltage (and current). When the current tap position deviates from this value, the input
current values on the side where the tap changer resides are scaled to match the
currents on the other side.

A correct scaling is determined by the number of steps and the direction of the
deviation from the nominal tap and the percentage change in voltage resulting from a
deviation of one tap step. The percentage value is set using the Step of tap parameter.

The operating range of the tap changer is defined by the Min winding tap and Max
winding tap parameters. The Min winding tap parameter tells the tap position number
resulting in the minimum effective number of winding turns on the side of the
transformer where the tap changer is connected. Correspondingly, the Max winding
tap parameter tells the tap position number resulting in the maximum effective
number of winding turns.

The Min winding tap and Max winding tap parameters help the tap position
compensation algorithm know in which direction the compensation is being made.
This ensures also that if the current tap position information is corrupted for some
reason, the automatic tap changer position adaptation does not try to adapt to any
unrealistic position values.

GUID-317C68F8-A517-458A-A5D0-32FCE6C5F547 V1 EN

Figure 275: Simplified presentation of the high voltage and medium voltage
windings with demonstration of the Max winding tap, Min winding tap
and Tap nominal parameters

530 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The position value in the TAP_POS input is valid if the value of the TAP_POS_IV
input is “FALSE.” When the value of the TAP_POS_IV input is “TRUE,” the
position information in TAP_POS is not used but the last value before TAP_POS_IV
changed to “TRUE” is used instead. In addition, the minimum sensitivity of the biased
stage, set by the Low operate value setting, is automatically desensitized with the total
range of the tap position correction. The new acting low operate value is
Desensitized Low operate value = Low operate value + ABS ( MaxWinding tap − Min winding tap ) × Step of tap
GUID-2E5AD399-D8DD-4F64-A194-7540D55DB8ED V3 EN (Equation 80)

Second harmonic blocking

The transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when energizing the transformer
after a period of de-energization. The inrush current can be many times the rated
current and the halving time can be up to several seconds. To the differential
protection, the inrush current represents a differential current, which would cause the
differential protection to operate almost always when the transformer is connected to
the network. Typically, the inrush current contains a large amount of second
harmonics.

Blocking the operation of the TR2PTDF biased low stage at a magnetizing inrush
current is based on the ratio of the amplitudes of the second harmonic digitally filtered
from the differential current and the fundamental frequency (Id2f /Id1f).

The blocking also prevents unwanted operation at the recovery and sympathetic
magnetizing inrushes. At the recovery inrush, the magnetizing current of the
transformer to be protected increases momentarily when the voltage returns to normal
after the clearance of a fault outside the protected area. The sympathetic inrush is
caused by the energization of another transformer running in parallel with the
protected transformer already connected to the network.

The ratio of the second harmonic to a fundamental component can vary considerably
between the phases. Especially when the delta compensation is done for a Ynd1
connected transformer and the two phases of the inrush currents are otherwise equal
but opposite in phase angle, the subtraction of the phases in a delta compensation
results in a very small second harmonic component.

Some measures have to be taken in order to avoid the false tripping of a phase having
too low a ratio of the second harmonic to the fundamental component. One way could
be to always block all the phases when the second harmonic blocking conditions are
fulfilled in at least one phase. The other way is to calculate the weighted ratios of the
second harmonic to the fundamental component for each phase using the original
ratios of the phases. The latter option is used here. The second harmonic ratios
I_2H_RAT_x are given in monitored data.

The ratio to be used for second harmonic blocking is, therefore, calculated as a
weighted average on the basis of the ratios calculated from the differential currents of
the three phases. The ratio of the concerned phase is of most weight compared to the
ratios of the other two phases. In this IED, if the weighting factors are four, one and
one, four is the factor of the phase concerned. The operation of the biased stage on the

630 series 531

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

concerned phase is blocked if the weighted ratio of that phase is above the set blocking
limit Start value 2.H and if blocking is enabled through the Restraint mode parameter.

Using separate blocking for the individual phases and weighted averages calculated
for the separate phases provides a blocking scheme that is stable at the connection
inrush currents.

If the peak value of the differential current is very high, the limit for the second
harmonic blocking is desensitized (in the phase in question) by increasing it
proportionally to the peak value of the differential current.

The connection of the power transformer against a fault inside the protected area does
not delay the operation of the tripping, because in such a situation the blocking based
on the second harmonic of the differential current is prevented by a separate algorithm
based on a different waveform and a different rate of change of the normal inrush
current and the inrush current containing the fault current. The algorithm does not
eliminate the blocking at inrush currents, unless there is a fault in the protected area.

The feature can also be enabled and disabled with the Harmonic deblock 2.H
parameter.

Fifth harmonic blocking

The inhibition of TR2PTDF operation in the situations of overexcitation is based on
the ratio of the fifth harmonic and the fundamental component of the differential
current (Id5f/Id1f). The ratio is calculated separately for each phase without weighting
the factors. If the ratio exceeds the setting value of Start value 5.H and if blocking is
enabled through the Restraint mode parameter, the operation of the biased stage of
TR2PTDF in the concerned phase is blocked.

At dangerous levels of overvoltage, which can cause damage to the transformer, the
blocking can be automatically eliminated. If the ratio of the fifth harmonic and the
fundamental component of the differential current exceeds the Stop value 5.H
parameter, the blocking removal is enabled. The enabling and disabling of deblocking
feature is also done through the Harmonic deblock 5.H parameter.

532 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-A97464D1-3085-4F27-B829-11EEC47CA654 V1 EN

Figure 276: The limits and operation of the fifth harmonic blocking when both
blocking and deblocking features are enabled using the Harmonic
deblock 5.H control parameter.

The fifth harmonic blocking has a hysteresis to avoid rapid fluctuation between
"TRUE" and "FALSE". The blocking also has a counter, which counts the required
consecutive fulfillments of the condition. When the condition is not fulfilled, the
counter is decreased (if >0).

Also the fifth harmonic deblocking has a hysteresis and a counter which counts the
required consecutive fulfillments of the condition. When the condition is not fulfilled,
the counter is decreased (if >0).

Waveform blocking
The biased low stage can always be blocked with waveform blocking. The stage can
not be disabled with the Restraint mode parameter. This algorithm has two parts. The
first part is intended for external faults while the second is intended for inrush
situations. The algorithm has criteria for a low current period during inrush where also
the differential current (not derivative) is checked.

Biased low stage

The current differential protection needs to be biased because the possible appearance
of a differential current can be due to something else than an actual fault in the
transformer (or generator).

In the case of transformer protection, a false differential current can be caused by:
• CT errors
• Varying tap changer positions (if not automatically compensated)
• Transformer no-load current
• Transformer inrush currents
• Transformer overexcitation in overvoltage
• Underfrequency situations
• CT saturation at high currents passing through the transformer.

630 series 533

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The differential current caused by CT errors or tap changer positions increases at the
same percent ratio as the load current.

In the protection of generators, the false differential current can be caused by:
• CT errors
• CT saturation at high currents passing through the generator.

I_D Charact.
(from Differential calculation) OPERATE
OR
I_B
I
(from Differential calculation) OPR_LS

BLOCK
Ibias OPR_A
BLOCK_LS AND
OR
OPR_B
Slope section 2
OPR_C
OR AND
End section 2

Low operate value

OR AND

OR BLKD2H
Fault in protected area
(from Differential calculation) BLKD2H_A
AND AND
BLK_2H_A
(from Second harmonic blocking) BLKD2H_B

AND AND
BLK_2H_B BLKD2H_C
(from Second harmonic blocking)

AND AND OR BLKD5H

BLK_2H_C
(from Second harmonic blocking)

AND BLKD5H_A
BLK_5H_A AND
(from Fifth harmonic blocking)
BLKD5H_B
AND AND
BLK_5H_B
(from Fifth harmonic blocking) BLKD5H_C

AND AND
BLK_5H_C OR BLKDWAV
(from Fifth harmonic blocking)

AND AND BLKDWAV_A

BLK_WAV_A
(from Waveform blocking)
BLKDWAV_B
AND AND
BLK_WAV_B
(from Waveform blocking) BLKDWAV_C

AND AND
BLK_WAV_C
(from Waveform blocking))

GUID-C76B2341-0DA7-4E35-A17C-1A7C70CE002C V2 EN

Figure 277: Operation logic of the biased low stage

The high currents passing through a protected object can be caused by the short
circuits outside the protected area, the large currents fed by the transformer in motor
startup or the transformer inrush situations. Therefore, the operation of the differential
protection is biased in respect to the load current. In biased differential protection, the
higher the differential current required for the protection to operate, the higher the load
current.

The operating characteristic of the biased low stage is determined by Low operate
value, Slope section 2 and the setting of the second turning point of the operating
characteristic curve, End section 2 (the first turning point and the slope of the last part
of the characteristic are fixed). The settings are the same for all the phases. When the
differential current exceeds the operating value determined by the operating

534 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

characteristic, the differential function awakes. If the differential current stays above
the operating value continuously for a short period, the OPR_LS output is activated.
The OPERATE output is always activated when the OPR_LS output is activated and
the outputs OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C are activated according to the faulted phase
detected by the biased low stage.

The stage can be blocked internally by the second or fifth harmonic restraint, or by
special algorithms detecting inrush and current transformer saturation at external
faults. When the operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the second harmonic
blocking functionality, the outputs BLKD2H_A, BLKD2H_B, BLKD2H_C and the
combined output BLKD2H are activated according to the phase information.

When operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the fifth harmonic blocking
functionality, the outputs BLKD5H_A, BLKD5H_B, BLKD5H_C and the combined
output BLKD5H are activated according to the phase information. Correspondingly,
when the operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the waveform blocking
functionality, the outputs BLKDWAV_A, BLKDWAV_B, BLKDWAV_C and the
combined output BLKDWAV are activated according to the phase information.

When required, the operate outputs of the biased low stage can be blocked by the
BLK_OPR_LS or BLOCK external control signals.

Id [%In]

300 Ib3

Id3
200

Ib2

100

Id1
Id2
Low operate value

100 200 300 400 500 Ib [%In]

Section 1 Section 2 Section 3

End section 1 End section 2

GUID-8F4DB4E4-64B4-4035-9A31-C3B68EE7BEF2 V1 EN

Figure 278: Operation characteristic for biased operation of TR2PTDF

Lowoperate value = Id1 / In × 100%

GUID-8C70C699-8216-4E56-997D-B0B15FACB932 V2 EN (Equation 81)

630 series 535

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Id 2
Slope section 2 = ⋅ 100%
I b2
GUID-D1C2CAED-3D58-4405-A79D-17B203A8D3A9 V4 EN (Equation 82)

The second turning point End section 2 can be set in the range of 100 percent to 500
percent.

The slope of the differential function's operating characteristic curve varies in the
different sections of the range.
• In section 1, where 0.0 < Ib/In < End section 1, End section 1 being fixed to 50
percent Ir, the differential current required for tripping is constant. The value of
the differential current is the same as the Low operate value selected for the
function. Low operate value basically allows the no-load current of the power
transformer and small inaccuracies of the current transformers, but it can also be
used to influence the overall level of the operating characteristic. At the rated
current, the no-load losses of the power transformer are about 0.2 percent. If the
supply voltage of the power transformer suddenly increases due to operational
disturbances, the magnetizing current of the transformer increases as well. In
general the magnetic flux density of the transformer is rather high at rated voltage
and a rise in voltage by a few percent causes the magnetizing current to increase
by tens of percent. This should be considered in Low operate value
• In section 2, where End section 1 < Ib/In < End section 2, is called the influence
area of Slope section 2. In this section, variations in the starting ratio affect the
slope of the characteristic, that is, how big a change in the differential current is
required for tripping in comparison with the change in the load current. The
starting ratio should consider CT errors and variations in the transformer tap
changer position (if not compensated). Too high a starting ratio should be
avoided, because the sensitivity of the protection for detecting inter-turn faults
depends basically on the starting ratio.
• In section 3, where Ib/In > End section 2, the slope of the characteristic is
constant. The slope is 100%, which means that the increase in the differential
current is equal to the corresponding increase in the biasing current.

536 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-739E1789-778D-44BF-BD4A-6BD684BF041D V2 EN

Figure 279: Setting range for biased low stage

If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current of the phase angle
between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero (in a normal
situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has most likely occurred in the
area protected by TR2PTDF. Then the internal blocking signals of the biased stage are
inhibited.

Instantaneous high stage

The instantaneous high stage operation can be enabled and disabled with the Enable
high set setting. The corresponding parameter values are "TRUE" and "FALSE."

The operation of the instantaneous high stage is not biased. The instantaneous stage
operates and the output OPR_HS is activated when the amplitude of the fundamental
frequency component of the differential current exceeds the set High operate value or
when the instantaneous value of the differential current exceeds 2.5 times the value of
High operate value. The factor 2.5 (=1.8 x √2) is due to the maximum asymmetric
short circuit current.

If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current or the phase angle
between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero (in a normal
situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has occurred in the area
protected by TR2PTDF. Then the operation value set for the instantaneous stage is
automatically halved and the internal blocking signals of the biased stage are
inhibited.

630 series 537

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-8B8EC6FC-DF75-4674-808B-7B4C68E9F3E8 V1 EN

Figure 280: Operating characteristics of the protection. (LS) stands for the biased
low stage and (HS) for the instantaneous high stage

The OPERATE output is activated always when the OPR_HS output activates and
outputs OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C are activated according to the faulted phase
detected by the instantaneous high stage.

The internal blocking signals of the differential function do not prevent the operate
signal of the instantaneous differential current stage. When required, the operate
outputs of the instantaneous high stage can be blocked by the BLK_OPR_HS and
BLOCK external control signals.

GUID-6BB9E91D-6C5D-404C-8380-A3D8F3398F8C V2 EN

Figure 281: Operation logic of instantaneous high stage

Reset of the blocking signals (de-block)

All three blocking signals, that is, waveform and second and fifth harmonic, have a
counter, which holds the blocking on for a certain time after the blocking conditions
have ceased to be fulfilled. The deblocking takes place when those counters have
elapsed. This is a normal case of deblocking.

538 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The blocking signals can be reset immediately if a very high differential current is
measured or if the phase difference of the compared currents (the angle between the
compared currents) is close to zero after the automatic vector group matching has been
made (in a normal situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees). This does not,
however, reset the counters holding the blockings, so the blocking signals may return
when these conditions are not valid anymore.

External blocking functionality

TR2PTDF has three inputs for blocking.
• When the BLOCK input is active ("TRUE"), the operation of the function is
blocked but measurement output signals are still updated.
• When the BLK_OPR_LS input is active ("TRUE"), TR2PTDF operates normally
except that the OPR_LS output is not active or activated in any circumstance.
Additionally, the outputs OPERATE, OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C can be
activated only by the instantaneous high stage (if not blocked as well).
• When the BLK_OPR_HS input is active ("TRUE"), TR2PTDF operates normally
except that the OPR_HS output is not active or activated in any circumstance.
Additionally, the outputs OPERATE, OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C can be
activated only by the biased low stage (if not blocked as well).

4.3.1.5 Application

TR2PTDF is a unit protection function serving as the main protection for transformers
in case of winding failure. The protective zone of a differential protection includes the
transformer, the bus-work or the cables between the current transformer and the power
transformer. When bushing current transformers are used for the differential IED, the
protective zone does not include the bus work or cables between the circuit breaker
and the power transformer.

In some substations, there is a current differential protection for the busbar. The
busbar protection includes bus work or cables between the circuit breaker and the
power transformer. Internal electrical faults are very serious and cause immediate
damage. Short circuits and earth faults in windings and terminals are normally
detected by the differential protection. If enough turns are short-circuited, the
interturn faults, which are flashovers between the conductors within the same physical
winding, are also detected. The interturn faults are the most difficult transformer-
winding faults to detect with electrical protections. A small interturn fault including a
few turns results in an undetectable amount of current until the fault develops into an
earth-fault. Therefore, it is important that the differential protection has a high level of
sensitivity and that it is possible to use a sensitive setting without causing unwanted
operations for external faults.

It is important that the faulty transformer is disconnected as fast as possible. As

TR2PTDF is a unit protection function, it can be designed for fast tripping, thus
providing a selective disconnection of the faulty transformer. TR2PTDF should never
operate to faults outside the protective zone.

630 series 539

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

TR2PTDF compares the current flowing into the transformer to the current leaving the
transformer. A correct analysis of fault conditions by TR2PTDF must consider the
changes to voltages, currents and phase angles. The traditional transformer
differential protection functions required auxiliary transformers for the correction of
the phase shift and turns ratio. The numerical microprocessor based differential
algorithm implemented in TR2PTDF compensates for both the turns ratio and the
phase shift internally in the software.

The differential current should theoretically be zero during normal load or external
faults if the turns ratio and the phase shift are correctly compensated. Several different
phenomena other than internal faults cause unwanted and false differential currents.
The main reasons for unwanted differential currents are:
• Mismatch due to varying tap changer positions
• Different characteristics, loads and operating conditions of the current
transformers
• Zero sequence currents that only flow on one side of the power transformer
• Normal magnetizing currents
• Magnetizing inrush currents
• Overexcitation magnetizing currents.

TR2PTDF is designed mainly for the protection of two-winding transformers.

TR2PTDF can also be utilized for the protection of generator-transformer blocks as
well as short cables and overhead lines. If the distance between the measuring points
is relatively long in line protection, interposing CTs can be required to reduce the
burden of the CTs.

GUID-B326703C-3645-4256-96AD-DA87FC9E9C67 V1 EN

Figure 282: Differential protection of a generator-transformer block and short

cable/line

540 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

TR2PTDF can also be used in three-winding transformer applications or two-winding

transformer applications with two output feeders.

On the double-feeder side of the power transformer, the current of the two CTs per
phase must be summed by connecting the two CTs of each phase in parallel. Generally
this requires the interposing CTs to handle the vector group and/or ratio mismatch
between the two windings/feeders.

The accuracy limit factor for the interposing CT must fulfill the same requirements as
the main CTs. Please note that the interposing CT imposes an additional burden to the
main CTs.

The most important rule in these applications is that at least 75 percent of the short-
circuit power has to be fed on the side of the power transformer with only one
connection to the IED.

GUID-799588E3-C63F-4687-98C5-FF48284676DF V1 EN

Figure 283: Differential protection of a three-winding transformer and a

transformer with two output feeders

TR2PTDF can also be used for the protection of the power transformer feeding the
frequency converter. An interposing CT is required for matching the three-winding
transformer currents to a two-winding protection relay.

The fundamental frequency component is numerically filtered with a Fourier filter,

DFT. The filter suppresses frequencies other than the set fundamental frequency, and
therefore the IED is not adapted for measuring the output of the frequency converter,
that is, TR2PTDF is not suited for protecting of a power transformer or motor fed by
a frequency converter.

630 series 541

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-583768FC-A3FC-4CF2-BF09-4C34D1AED019 V1 EN

Figure 284: Feeding frequency converter

Transforming ratio correction of current transformers

Often the CT secondary currents differ from the rated current at the rated load of the
power transformer. The CT transforming ratios can be corrected on both sides of the
power transformer with the base value settings.
Sn
I nT =
3 ×U n
GUID-B5467DB8-17EB-4D09-A741-1F5BB23466AA V1 EN (Equation 83)

InT rated load of the power transformer

Sn rated power of the power transformer

Un rated phase-to-phase voltage

542 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Example
The rated power of the transformer is 25 MVA, the ratio of the CTs on the 110 kV side
is 300/1 and that on the 21 kV side is 1000/1

GUID-854DC103-BBAB-4A62-AB87-6429B06C5500 V2 EN

Figure 285: Example of two-winding power transformer differential protection

The rated load of the transformer is calculated on the high voltage side: InT = 25 MVA /
(1.732 × 110 kV) = 131.2 A

Setting
The calculated value is set, for example, to global setting parameter: “Configuration/
Analog inputs/Base values/Phase Grp1/Current base Val Ph” = 131 A.

Low voltage side: InT = 25 MVA / (1.732 × 21 kV) = 687.3 A

Setting
The calculated value is set, for example, to global setting parameter: “Configuration/
Analog inputs/Base values/Phase Grp2/Current base Val Ph” = 687 A. Phase Grp1 is
now selected for the high voltage side and Phase Grp2 for the low voltage side. Those
selections must also be done in TR2PTDF.

Setting
Base value Sel Wnd 1 = 1

Base value Sel Wnd 2 = 2

Vector group matching and elimination of the zero-sequence

component
The vector group of the power transformer is numerically matched on the high voltage
and low voltage sides by means of the Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type and Clock
number settings. Thus no interposing CTs are needed if there is only a power
transformer inside the protected zone. The matching is based on phase shifting and a
numerical delta connection in the IED. If the neutral of a star-connected power
transformer is earthed, any earth fault in the network is perceived by the IED as a
differential current. The elimination of the zero-sequence component can be selected
for that winding by setting the Zro A elimination parameter.

630 series 543

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 550: TR2PTDF settings corresponding to the power transformer vector groups and zero-
sequence elimination
Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
Yy0 Y Y Clk Num 0 Not needed
YNy0 YN Y Clk Num 0 HV side
YNyn0 YN YN Clk Num 0 HV & LV side
Yyn0 Y YN Clk Num 0 LV side
Yy2 Y Y Clk Num 2 Not needed
YNy2 YN Y Clk Num 2 Not needed
YNyn2 YN YN Clk Num 2 Not needed
Yyn2 Y YN Clk Num 2 Not needed
Yy4 Y Y Clk Num 4 Not needed
YNy4 YN Y Clk Num 4 Not needed
YNyn4 YN YN Clk Num 4 Not needed
Yyn4 Y YN Clk Num 4 Not needed
Yy6 Y Y Clk Num 6 Not needed
YNy6 YN Y Clk Num 6 HV side
YNyn6 YN YN Clk Num 6 HV & LV side
Yyn6 Y YN Clk Num 6 LV side
Yy8 Y Y Clk Num 8 Not needed
YNy8 YN Y Clk Num 8 Not needed
YNyn8 YN YN Clk Num 8 Not needed
Yyn8 Y YN Clk Num 8 Not needed
Yy10 Y Y Clk Num 10 Not needed
YNy10 YN Y Clk Num 10 Not needed
YNyn10 YN YN Clk Num 10 Not needed
Yyn10 Y YN Clk Num 10 Not needed
Yd1 Y D Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNd1 YN D Clk Num 1 Not needed
Yd5 Y D Clk Num 5 Not needed
YNd5 YN D Clk Num 5 Not needed
Yd7 Y D Clk Num 7 Not needed
YNd7 YN D Clk Num 7 Not needed
Yd11 Y D Clk Num 11 Not needed
YNd11 YN D Clk Num 11 Not needed
Dd0 D D Clk Num 0 Not needed
Dd2 D D Clk Num 2 Not needed
Dd4 D D Clk Num 4 Not needed
Dd6 D D Clk Num 6 Not needed
Dd8 D D Clk Num 8 Not needed
Table continues on next page

544 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
Dd10 D D Clk Num 10 Not needed
Dy1 D Y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Dyn1 D YN Clk Num 1 Not needed
Dy5 D Y Clk Num 5 Not needed
Dyn5 D YN Clk Num 5 Not needed
Dy7 D Y Clk Num 7 Not needed
Dyn7 D YN Clk Num 7 Not needed
Dy11 D Y Clk Num 11 Not needed
Dyn11 D YN Clk Num 11 Not needed
Yz1 Y Z Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNz1 YN Z Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNzn1 YN ZN Clk Num 1 LV side
Yzn1 Y ZN Clk Num 1 Not needed
Yz5 Y Z Clk Num 5 Not needed
YNz5 YN Z Clk Num 5 Not needed
YNzn5 YN ZN Clk Num 5 LV side
Yzn5 Y ZN Clk Num 5 Not needed
Yz7 Y Z Clk Num 7 Not needed
YNz7 YN Z Clk Num 7 Not needed
YNzn7 YN ZN Clk Num 7 LV side
Yzn7 Y ZN Clk Num 7 Not needed
Yz11 Y Z Clk Num 11 Not needed
YNz11 YN Z Clk Num 11 Not needed
YNzn11 YN ZN Clk Num 11 LV side
Yzn11 Y ZN Clk Num 11 Not needed
Zy1 Z Y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Zyn1 Z YN Clk Num 1 Not needed
ZNyn1 ZN YN Clk Num 1 HV side
ZNy1 ZN Y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Zy5 Z Y Clk Num 5 Not needed
Zyn5 Z YN Clk Num 5 Not needed
ZNyn5 ZN YN Clk Num 5 HV side
ZNy5 ZN Y Clk Num 5 Not needed
Zy7 Z Y Clk Num 7 Not needed
Zyn7 Z YN Clk Num 7 Not needed
ZNyn7 ZN YN Clk Num 7 HV side
ZNy7 ZN Y Clk Num 7 Not needed
Zy11 Z Y Clk Num 11 Not needed
Zyn11 Z YN Clk Num 11 Not needed
Table continues on next page

630 series 545

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
ZNyn11 ZN YN Clk Num 11 HV side
ZNy11 ZN Y Clk Num 11 Not needed
Dz0 D Z Clk Num 0 Not needed
Dzn0 D ZN Clk Num 0 LV side
Dz2 D Z Clk Num 2 Not needed
Dzn2 D ZN Clk Num 2 Not needed
Dz4 D Z Clk Num 4 Not needed
Dzn4 D ZN Clk Num 4 Not needed
Dz6 D Z Clk Num 6 Not needed
Dzn6 D ZN Clk Num 6 LV side
Dz8 D Z Clk Num 8 Not needed
Dzn8 D ZN Clk Num 8 Not needed
Dz10 D Z Clk Num 10 Not needed
Dzn10 D ZN Clk Num 10 Not needed
Zd0 Z D Clk Num 0 Not needed
ZNd0 ZN D Clk Num 0 HV side
Zd2 Z D Clk Num 2 Not needed
ZNd2 ZN D Clk Num 2 Not needed
Zd4 Z D Clk Num 4 Not needed
ZNd4 ZN D Clk Num 4 Not needed
Zd6 Z D Clk Num 6 Not needed
ZNd6 ZN D Clk Num 6 HV side
Zd8 Z D Clk Num 8 Not needed
ZNd8 ZN D Clk Num 8 Not needed
Zd10 Z D Clk Num 10 Not needed
ZNd10 ZN D Clk Num 10 Not needed
Zz0 Z Z Clk Num 0 Not needed
ZNz0 ZN Z Clk Num 0 HV side
ZNzn0 ZN ZN Clk Num 0 HV & LV side
Zzn0 Z ZN Clk Num 0 LV side
Zz2 Z Z Clk Num 2 Not needed
ZNz2 ZN Z Clk Num 2 Not needed
ZNzn2 ZN ZN Clk Num 2 Not needed
Zzn2 Z ZN Clk Num 2 Not needed
Zz4 Z Z Clk Num 4 Not needed
ZNz4 ZN Z Clk Num 4 Not needed
ZNzn4 ZN ZN Clk Num 4 Not needed
Zzn4 Z ZN Clk Num 4 Not needed
Zz6 Z Z Clk Num 6 Not needed
Table continues on next page

546 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
ZNz6 ZN Z Clk Num 6 HV side
ZNzn6 ZN ZN Clk Num 6 HV & LV side
Zzn6 Z ZN Clk Num 6 LV side
Zz8 Z Z Clk Num 8 Not needed
ZNz8 ZN Z Clk Num 8 Not needed
ZNzn8 ZN ZN Clk Num 8 Not needed
Zzn8 Z ZN Clk Num 8 Not needed
Zz10 Z Z Clk Num 10 Not needed
ZNz10 ZN Z Clk Num 10 Not needed
ZNzn10 ZN ZN Clk Num 10 Not needed
Zzn10 Z ZN Clk Num 10 Not needed

Commissioning
The correct settings, which are CT connection type, Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type
and Clock number, for the connection group compensation can be verified by
monitoring the angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1,
I_ANGL_C1_A1, I_ANGL_A2_B2, I_ANGL_B2_C2, I_ANGL_C2_A2,
I_ANGL_A1_A2, I_ANGL_B1_B2 and I_ANGL_C1_C2 while injecting the
current into the transformer. These angle values are calculated from the compensated
currents. See signal description in the Monitored data table.

When a station service transformer is available, it can be used to provide current to the
high voltage side windings while the low voltage side windings are short-circuited.
This way the current can flow in both the high voltage and low voltage windings. The
commissioning signals can be provided by other means as well. The minimum current
to allow for phase current and angle monitoring is 0.015 pu.

GUID-5ACBF127-85A3-4E5E-A130-9F7206A2DB4C V1 EN

Figure 286: Low voltage test arrangement. The three-phase low voltage source
can be the station service transformer.

The Tapped winding control setting parameter has to be set to “Not in use” to make
sure that the monitored current values are not scaled by the automatic adaptation to the
tap changer position. When only the angle values are required, the setting of Tapped
winding is not needed since angle values are not affected by the tap changer position
adaptation.

630 series 547

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

When injecting the currents in the high voltage winding, the angle values
I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1, I_ANGL_C1_A1, I_ANGL_A2_B2,
I_ANGL_B2_C2 and I_ANGL_C2_A2 have to show +120 deg. Otherwise the phase
order can be wrong or the polarity of a current transformer differs from the polarities
of the other current transformers on the same side.

If the angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1 and I_ANGL_C1_A1 show

-120 deg, the phase order is wrong on the high voltage side. If the angle values
I_ANGL_A2_B2, I_ANGL_B2_C2 and I_ANGL_C2_A2 show -120 deg, the
phase order is wrong on the low voltage side. If the angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1,
I_ANGL_B1_C1 and I_ANGL_C1_A1 do not show the same value of +120, the
polarity of one current transformer can be wrong. For instance, if the polarity of the
current transformer measuring IL2 is wrong, I_ANGL_A1_B1 shows -60 deg,
I_ANGL_B1_C1 shows -60 deg and I_ANGL_C1_A1 shows +120 deg.

When the phase order and the angle values are correct, the angle values
I_ANGL_A1_A2, I_ANGL_B1_B2 and I_ANGL_C1_C2 usually show ±180 deg.
There can be several reasons if the angle values are not ±180 deg. If the values are 0
deg, the value given for CT connection type is probably wrong. If the angle values are
something else, the value for Clock number can be wrong. Another reason is that the
combination of Winding 1 type and Winding 2 type does not match Clock number. This
means that the resulting connection group is not supported.

Example
If Winding 1 type is set to "Y", Winding 2 type is set to “Y” and Clock number is set
to "Clk num 1", the resulting connection group "Yy1" is not a supported combination.
Similarly if Winding 1 type is set to "Y", Winding 2 type is set to "D" and Clock number
is set to "Clk num 0", the resulting connection group "Yd0" is not a supported
combination. All the non-supported combinations of Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type
and Clock number settings result in the default connection group compensation that is
"Yy0".

Recommendations for current transformers

The more important the object to be protected, the more attention has to be paid to the
current transformers. It is not normally possible to dimension the current transformer
so that they repeat the currents with high DC components without saturating when the
residual flux of the current transformer is high. TR2PTDF operates reliably even
though the current transformers are partially saturated.

The accuracy class recommended for current transformers to be used with TR2PTDF
is 5P, in which the limit of the current error at the rated primary current is 1 percent and
the limit of the phase displacement is 60 minutes. The limit of the composite error at
the rated accuracy limit primary current is five percent.

The approximate value of the accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the actual
current transformer burden can be calculated on the basis of the rated accuracy limit
factor Fn at the rated burden, the rated burden Sn, the internal burden Sinand the actual
burden Sa of the current transformer.

548 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Sin + Sn
Fa = Fn ×
Sin + Sa
GUID-26DEE538-9E1A-49A2-9C97-F69BD44591C9 V2 EN (Equation 84)

Fa The approximate value of the accuracy limit factor (ALF) corresponding to the actual CT burden

Fn The rated accuracy limit factor at the rated burden of the current transformer

Sn The rated burden of the current transformer

Sin The internal burden of the current transformer

Sa The actual burden of the current transformer

Example 1
The rated burden Sn of the current transformer 5P20 is 10 VA, the secondary rated
current is 5A, the internal resistance Rin= 0.07 Ω and the accuracy limit factor Fn
corresponding to the rated burden is 20 (5P20). Thus the internal burden of the current
transformer is Sin= (5A)2 × 0.07 Ω = 1.75 VA. The input impedance of the IED at a
rated current of 5A is <20 mΩ. If the measurement conductors have a resistance of
0.113 Ω, the actual burden of the current transformer is Sa = (5A)2 × (0.113 + 0.020) Ω
= 3.33 VA. Thus the accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the actual burden is
approximately 46.

The CT burden can grow considerably at the rated current 5A. The actual burden of the
current transformer decreases at the rated current of 1A while the repeatability
simultaneously improves.

At faults occurring in the protected area, the currents may be very high compared to
the rated currents of the current transformers. Due to the instantaneous stage of the
differential function block, it is sufficient that the current transformers are capable of
repeating the current required for instantaneous tripping during the first cycle.

Thus the current transformers usually are able to reproduce the asymmetric fault
current without saturating within the next 10 ms after the occurrence of the fault to
secure that the operate times of the IED comply with the retardation time.

The accuracy limit factors corresponding to the actual burden of the phase current
transformer to be used in differential protection fulfill the requirement.

Fa > K r × Ikmax × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e−Tm /Tdc ) + 1)

GUID-DA861DAD-C40E-4A82-8973-BBAFD15279C0 V1 EN (Equation 85)

Ikmax The maximum through-going fault current (in pu) at which the protection is not allowed to operate

Tdc The primary DC time constant related to Ikmax

ω The angular frequency, that is, 2 × π × fn

Tm The time-to-saturate, that is, the duration of the saturation free transformation

630 series 549

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Kr The remanence factor 1/(1-r), where r is the maximum remanence flux in pu from saturation flux

The accuracy limit factors corresponding to the actual burden of the phase current
transformer is used in differential protection.

The parameter r is the maximum remanence flux density in the CT core in p.u. from
saturation flux density. The value of the parameter r depends on the magnetic material
used and on the construction of the CT. For instance, if the value of r = 0.4, the
remanence flux density can be 40 percent of the saturation flux density. The
manufacturer of the CT has to be contacted when an accurate value for the parameter r
is needed. The value r = 0.4 is recommended to be used when an accurate value is not
available.

The required minimum time-to-saturate Tm in TR2PTDF is half fundamental cycle

period (10 ms when fn = 50 Hz).

Two typical cases are considered for the determination of the sufficient accuracy limit
factor (Fa):

1. A fault occurring at the substation bus:

The protection must be stable at a fault arising during a normal operating
situation. Re-energizing the transformer against a bus fault leads to very high
fault currents and thermal stress and therefore re-energizing is not preferred in
this case. Thus, the remanence can be neglected.
The maximum through-going fault current Ikmax is typically 10 pu for a
substation main transformer. At a short circuit fault close to the supply
transformer, the DC time constant (Tdc) of the fault current is almost the same as
that of the transformer, the typical value being 100 ms.

Ikmax 10 pu

Tdc 100 ms

ω 100π Hz
Tm 10 ms

Kr 1

When the values are substituted in Equation 85, the result is:

Fa > K r × Ikmax × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e−Tm / Tdc ) + 1) ≈ 40

GUID-7F1019C5-C819-440B-871B-5CFD1AF88956 V1 EN

2. Re-energizing against a fault occurring further down in the network:

The protection must be stable also during re-energization against a fault on the
line. In this case, the existence of remanence is very probable. It is assumed to be
40 percent here.

550 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

On the other hand, the fault current is now smaller and since the ratio of the
resistance and reactance is greater in this location, having a full DC offset is not
possible. Furthermore, the DC time constant (Tdc) of the fault current is now
smaller, assumed to be 50 ms here.
Assuming a maximum fault current being 30 percent lower than in the bus fault
and a DC offset 90 percent of the maximum.

Ikmax 0.7 × 10 = 7 (pu)

Tdc 50 ms

ω 100π Hz
Tm 10 ms

Kr 1/(1-0.4) = 1.6667

When the values are substituted in the equation, the result is:

Fa > K r × Ikmax × 0.9 × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e−Tm / Tdc ) + 1) ≈ 40

GUID-9B859B2D-AC40-4278-8A99-3475442D7C67 V1 EN

If the actual burden of the current transformer (Sa) in Equation 84 cannot be

reduced low enough to provide a sufficient value for Fa, there are two alternatives
to deal with the situation:
• a CT with a higher rated burden Sn can be chosen (which also means a
higher rated accuracy limit Fn)
• a CT with a higher nominal primary current I1n (but the same rated burden)
can be chosen

Example 2
Assuming that the actions according to alternative two above are taken in order to
improve the actual accuracy limit factor:
IrCT
Fa = × Fn
IrTR
GUID-31A3C436-4E17-40AE-A4EA-D2BD6B72034E V2 EN (Equation 86)

IrTR 1000 A (rated secondary side current of the power transformer)

IrCT 1500 A (rated primary current of the CT on the transformer secondary side)
Fn 30 (rated accuracy limit factor of the CT)

Fa (IrCT / IrTR) × Fn (actual accuracy limit factor due to oversizing the CT) = (1500/1000) × 30 = 45

In TR2PTDF, it is important that the accuracy limit factors Fa of the phase current
transformers at both sides correspond with each other, that is, the burdens of the
current transformers on both sides are to be as equal as possible. If high inrush or start

630 series 551

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

currents with high DC components pass through the protected object when it is
connected to the network, special attention is required for the performance and the
burdens of the current transformers and for the settings of the function block.

4.3.1.6 CT connections and transformation ratio correction

The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as "Type 1" and
"Type 2".
• If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 IED currents are
opposite, the CT connection type setting parameter is "Type 1". The connection
examples of "Type 1" are as shown in Figure 287 and Figure 288.
• If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 IED currents equate, the
CT connection type setting parameter is "Type 2". The connection examples of
"Type 2" are as shown in Figure 289 and Figure 290.
• The default value of the CT connection type setting is "Type 1".

L1 L2 L3
AIM
P1 X101
S1
1 1/5A
S2 IL1
P2 2 N
3 1/5A
IL2
4 N
5 1/5A
IL3
6 N
7
8
9 1/5A
IL1B
10 N

AIM
X102

1 1/5A
IL2B
2 N
3 1/5A
IL3B
4 N
5
P2 6
S2
S1 7
P1 8
9
10

GUID-0C7035F9-87D2-4A32-BAFB-5BB32FC8A806 V1 EN

Figure 287: Connection example of current transformers of Type 1

552 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

L1 L2 L3

P2
S2
S1 AIM
P1 X101

1 1/5A
IL1
2 N
3 1/5A
IL2
4 N
5 1/5A
IL3
6 N
7
8
9 1/5A
IL1B
10 N

AIM
X102

1 1/5A
IL2B
P1 2 N
S1 3 1/5A
IL3B
S2 4 N
P2 5
6
7
8
9
10

GUID-514655CA-688C-4591-BCDE-EF7185BC3225 V1 EN

Figure 288: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 1

L1 L2 L3
AIM
P1 X101
S1
1 1/5A
S2 IL1
P2 2 N
3 1/5A
IL2
4 N
5 1/5A
IL3
6 N
7
8
9 1/5A
IL1B
10 N

AIM
X102

1 1/5A
IL2B
2 N
3 1/5A
IL3B
4 N
P1 5
S1
6
S2
P2 7
8
9
10

GUID-AB97BE14-E066-487D-9FB9-F7519A8DC877 V1 EN

Figure 289: Connection example of current transformers of Type 2

630 series 553

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

L1 L2 L3

P2
S2
S1 AIM
P1 X101

1 1/5A
IL1
2 N
3 1/5A
IL2
4 N
5 1/5A
IL3
6 N
7
8
9 1/5A
IL1B
10 N

AIM
X102

1 1/5A
IL2B
P2 2 N
S2 3 1/5A
S1 IL3B
P1 4 N
5
6
7
8
9
10

GUID-A8E1D0D2-2DD9-458F-BDE3-0695BEDB22B6 V1 EN

Figure 290: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 2

If the rated primary current of the winding 1 and winding 2 side current transformers
is not equal to the rated current of the power transformer on the concerned side, the
Phase Grp1…3\Current base Val Ph global setting parameters can be used for
correcting the transformation ratios. The general base values can be set equal to the
rated primary current of the power transformer on both sides. The base values for
winding 1 and winding 2 are selected with the Base value Sel Wnd 1 and Base value
Sel Wnd 2 setting parameters.

4.3.1.7 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

554 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.1.8 Signals
Table 551: TR2PTDF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs from
SIGNAL winding 1
I3P2 GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs from
SIGNAL winding 2
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operate outputs from biased stage
BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operate outputs from instantaneous stage
TAP_POS INTEGER 0 Present tap position reading (integer)
TAP_POS_IV BOOLEAN 0 Tap position invalidity

Table 552: TR2PTDF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal, combined (all phases, both stages)
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate signal phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate signal phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate signal phase C
OPR_LS BOOLEAN Operate signal from low set (biased) stage
OPR_HS BOOLEAN Operate signal from high set (instantaneous) stage
BLKD2H BOOLEAN Status from 2nd harmonic restraint block,
combined
BLKD2H_A BOOLEAN Status from 2nd harmonic restraint block, phase A
BLKD2H_B BOOLEAN Status from 2nd harmonic restraint block, phase B
BLKD2H_C BOOLEAN Status from 2nd harmonic restraint block, phase C
BLKD5H BOOLEAN Status from 5th harmonic restraint blocking,
combined
BLKD5H_A BOOLEAN Status from 5th harmonic restraint blocking, phase
A
BLKD5H_B BOOLEAN Status from 5th harmonic restraint blocking, phase
B
BLKD5H_C BOOLEAN Status from 5th harmonic restraint blocking, phase
C
BLKDWAV BOOLEAN Status from waveform blocking, combined
BLKDWAV_A BOOLEAN Status from waveform blocking, phase A
BLKDWAV_B BOOLEAN Status from waveform blocking, phase B
BLKDWAV_C BOOLEAN Status from waveform blocking, phase C

630 series 555

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.3.1.9 Settings
Table 553: TR2PTDF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Restraint mode 2.h & 5.h & wav - - 2.h & 5.h & wav Selects what harmonic blocking methods
Waveform are in use
2.h & waveform
5.h & waveform
High operate value 500 - 3000 % 10 1000 Instantaneous stage setting
Low operate value 5 - 50 % 1 20 Basic setting for stabilized operation
Slope section 2 10 - 50 % 1 30 Slope of the second line of the operating
characteristics
End section 2 100 - 500 % 1 150 Turn-point between sections 2 and 3 of
the characteristics
Start value 2.H 7 - 20 % 1 15 2. harmonic blocking ratio
Start value 5.H 10 - 50 % 1 35 5. harmonic blocking ratio

Table 554: TR2PTDF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Stop value 5.H 10 - 50 % 1 35 5. harmonic deblocking ratio
Enable high set No - - Yes Enable instantaneous (high set) stage
Yes
Harmonic deblock 2.H Not allowed - - Allowed 2. harmonic deblocking in case of switch
Allowed on to fault
Harmonic deblock 5.H Not allowed - - Not allowed 5. harmonic deblocking in case of severe
Allowed overvoltage

Table 555: TR2PTDF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Clock number Clk Num 0 - - Clk Num 0 Phase shift between winding1 and
Clk Num 1 winding 2 (clock number)
Clk Num 2
Clk Num 4
Clk Num 5
Clk Num 6
Clk Num 7
Clk Num 8
Clk Num 10
Clk Num 11
Winding 1 type Y - - Y Connection of the winding 1
YN
D
Z
ZN
Table continues on next page

556 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Winding 2 type Y - - Y Connection of the winding 2
YN
D
Z
ZN
CT connection type Type 1 - - Type 1 CT connection type
Type 2
Zro A elimination Not eliminated - - Not eliminated Elimination of the zero-sequence current
Winding 1
Winding 2
Winding 1 and 2

Table 556: TR2PTDF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Wnd 1 Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector winding 1, phase
Phase Grp 2
Phase Grp 3
Base value Sel Wnd 2 Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 2 Base value selector winding 2, phase
Phase Grp 2
Phase Grp 3
Step of tap 0.60 - 9.00 % 0.01 1.50 The change in voltage corresp. one step
of the tap changer
Tapped winding Not in use - - Not in use The winding where the tap changer is
Winding 1 connected to.
Winding 2
Max winding tap -36 - 36 - 1 0 The tap pos resulting maximum of
effective winding turns
Min winding tap -36 - 36 - 1 36 The tap pos resulting minimnum of
effective winding turns
Tap nominal -36 - 36 - 1 18 The nominal position of the tap changer

4.3.1.10 Measured values

Table 557: TR2PTDF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operate outputs from biased stage
BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operate outputs from instantaneous stage
TAP_POS INTEGER 0 Present tap position reading (integer)
TAP_POS_IV BOOLEAN 0 Tap position invalidity

630 series 557

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.3.1.11 Monitored data

Table 558: TR2PTDF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal phase A
1=TRUE
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal phase B
1=TRUE
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal phase C
1=TRUE
OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal from low
1=TRUE set (biased) stage
OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal from high
1=TRUE set (instantaneous) stage
BLKD2H_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Status from 2nd
1=TRUE harmonic restraint block,
phase A
BLKD2H_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Status from 2nd
1=TRUE harmonic restraint block,
phase B
BLKD2H_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Status from 2nd
1=TRUE harmonic restraint block,
phase C
BLKD5H_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Status from 5th harmonic
1=TRUE restraint blocking, phase
A
BLKD5H_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Status from 5th harmonic
1=TRUE restraint blocking, phase
B
BLKD5H_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Status from 5th harmonic
1=TRUE restraint blocking, phase
C
BLKDWAV_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Status from waveform
1=TRUE blocking, phase A
BLKDWAV_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Status from waveform
1=TRUE blocking, phase B
BLKDWAV_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Status from waveform
1=TRUE blocking, phase C
I_AMPL_A1 REAL - - Compensated current
amplitude phase A,
winding 1
I_AMPL_B1 REAL - - Compensated current
amplitude phase B,
winding 1
I_AMPL_C1 REAL - - Compensated current
amplitude phase C,
winding 1
I_AMPL_A2 REAL - - Compensated current
amplitude phase A,
winding 2
Table continues on next page

558 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

I_AMPL_B2 REAL - - Compensated current
amplitude phase B,
winding 2
I_AMPL_C2 REAL - - Compensated current
amplitude phase C,
winding 2
ID_A REAL - - Differential current phase
A
ID_B REAL - - Differential current phase
B
ID_C REAL - - Differential current phase
C
IB_A REAL - - Bias current phase A
IB_B REAL - - Biasing current phase B
IB_C REAL - - Biasing current phase C
I_ANGL_A1_B1 REAL - deg Current phase angle
phase A – phase B,
winding 1
I_ANGL_B1_C1 REAL - deg Current phase angle
phase B – phase C,
winding 1
I_ANGL_C1_A1 REAL - deg Current phase angle
phase C – phase A,
winding 1
I_ANGL_A2_B2 REAL - deg Current phase angle
phase A – phase B,
winding 2
I_ANGL_B2_C2 REAL - deg Current phase angle
phase B – phase C,
winding 2
I_ANGL_C2_A2 REAL - deg Current phase angle
phase C – phase A,
winding 2
I_ANGL_A1_A2 REAL - deg Current phase angle diff
between winding 1 and 2,
phase A
I_ANGL_B1_B2 REAL - deg Current phase angle diff
between winding 1 and 2,
phase B
I_ANGL_C1_C2 REAL - deg Current phase angle diff
between winding 1 and 2,
phase C
I_2H_RAT_A REAL - - Differential current
second harmonic ratio,
phase A
I_2H_RAT_B REAL - - Differential current
second harmonic ratio,
phase B
I_2H_RAT_C REAL - - Differential current
second harmonic ratio,
phase C

630 series 559

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.3.1.12 Technical data

Table 559: TR2PTDF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Operate time1)2) Biased low stage Typically 35 ms (±5 ms)

Instantaneous high Typically 17 ms (±5 ms)
stage
Reset time <30 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Differential current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz. Injected differential current = 2.0 × set operate
value
2) Includes the delay of the output contact value and fn = 50 Hz

4.3.1.13 Technical revision history

Table 560: TR2PTDF technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Internal improvements

4.3.2 Low impedance restricted earth-fault protection LREFPNDF

4.3.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Low impedance restricted earth-fault LREFPNDF dIoLo> 87NL
protection

4.3.2.2 Function block

GUID-8BE869D7-E9E4-47C9-B777-DE7A055FCA8B V1 EN

Figure 291: Function block

560 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.2.3 Functionality

The stabilized restricted low-impedance earth-fault protection LREFPNDF for a two-

winding transformer is based on the numerically stabilized differential current
principle. No external stabilizing resistor or non-linear resistor are required.

The fundamental components of the currents are used for calculating the residual
current of the phase currents, the neutral current, differential currents and stabilizing
currents. The operating characteristics are according to the definite time.

LREFPNDF contains a blocking functionality. The neutral current second harmonic

is used for blocking during the transformer inrush situation. Blocking deactivates all
outputs and resets timers.

4.3.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the stabilized restricted low-impedance earth-fault protection can be

described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the
next sections.

GUID-6E8DDE24-71AE-450E-9ED2-22DF9895CBAD V1 EN

Figure 292: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Earth-fault detector
The operation is based on comparing the amplitude and the phase difference between
the sum of the fundamental frequency component of the phase currents (ΣI, residual
current) and the fundamental frequency component of the neutral current (Io) flowing
in the conductor between the transformer or generator's neutral point and earth. The
differential current is calculated as the absolute value of the difference between the
residual current, that is, the sum of the fundamental frequency components of the
phase currents I_A, I_B and I_C, and the neutral current. The directional differential
current ID_COSPHI is the product of the differential current and cosφ. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

630 series 561

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

ID _ COSPHI = ( ΣI − Io ) × cos ϕ
GUID-46782962-D465-47D2-8ECE-3FF0B87B324F V3 EN (Equation 87)

Residual current
ΣI
GUID-87E4DEDD-9288-41D9-B608-714CF3CC7A04 V1 EN

ϕ Phase difference between the residual and neutral currents

GUID-C4F98C50-7279-4DAA-8C77-5C761572F4B4 V1 EN

Neutral current
Io
GUID-2D713C98-4F81-4DF4-8193-C47120A65489 V1 EN

An earth fault occurring in the protected area, that is, between the phase CTs and the
neutral connection CT, causes a differential current. The directions, that is, the phase
difference of the residual current and the neutral current, are considered in the
operation criteria to maintain selectivity. A correct value for CT connection type is
determined by the connection polarities of the current transformer.

The current transformer ratio mismatch between the phase current

transformer and neutral current transformer (residual current in the
analog input settings) is taken into account by the function with the
properly set analog input setting values.

During an earth fault in the protected area, the currents ΣI and Io are directed towards
the protected area. The factor cosφ is 1 when the phase difference of the residual
current and the neutral current is 180 degrees, that is, when the currents are in opposite
direction at the earth faults within the protected area. Similarly, ID_COSPHI is
specified to be 0 when the phase difference between the residual current and the
neutral current is less than 90 degrees in situations where there is no earth fault in the
protected area. Thus tripping is possible only when the phase difference between the
residual current and the neutral current is above 90 degrees.

The stabilizing current IB used by the stabilizing current principle is calculated as an

average of the phase currents in the windings to be protected. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

I _ A + I _ B + I _C
IB =
3
GUID-E162EE11-DEDF-49BA-B60F-E22ECF1ACAE8 V2 EN (Equation 88)

The Operate value setting is used for defining the characteristics of the function. The
differential current value required for tripping is constant at the stabilizing current
values 0.0 < IB/In < 1.0, where In is the nominal current and refers to the nominal of
the phase current inputs in this function. When the stabilizing current is higher than
1.0, the slope of the operation characteristic (ID/IB) is constant at 50 percent.

562 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-9D592151-7598-479B-9285-7FB7C09F0FAB V1 EN

Figure 293: Operating characteristics of the stabilized earth-fault protection

function

Different operating characteristics are possible based on the set Operate value.

GUID-552423CA-6FE9-4F69-8341-FFE0FF1943D4 V1 EN

Figure 294: Setting range of the operating characteristics for the stabilized
differential current principle of the earth-fault protection function

To calculate the directional differential current ID_COSPHI, the fundamental

frequency amplitude of both the residual and neutral currents has to be above 4 percent
of In. If neither or only one condition is fulfilled at a time, the cosφ term is forced to
1. After the conditions are fulfilled, both currents must stay above 2 percent of In to
allow the continuous calculation of the cosφ term.

630 series 563

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Second harmonic blocking

This module compares the ratio of the current second harmonic (I0_2H) and I0 to the
set value Start value 2.H. If the ratio (I0_2H / I0) value exceeds the set value, the
BLK2H output is activated.

The blocking also prevents unwanted operation at the recovery and sympathetic
magnetizing inrushes. At the recovery inrush, the magnetizing current of the
transformer to be protected increases momentarily when the voltage returns to normal
after the clearance of a fault outside the protected area. The sympathetic inrush is
caused by the energization of a transformer running in parallel with the protected
transformer connected to the network.

The second harmonic blocking is disabled when Restraint mode is set to "None" and
enabled when set to "Harmonic2".

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Minimum
operate time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by
Reset delay time, the reset timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The activation of the BLOCK signal resets the timer and deactivates the START and
OPERATE outputs. The activation of the output of the second harmonic blocking
signal BLK2H deactivates the OPERATE output.

4.3.2.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.3.2.6 Application

An earth-fault protection using an overcurrent element does not adequately protect the
transformer winding in general and the star-connected winding in particular.

The restricted earth-fault protection is mainly used as a unit protection for the
transformer windings. LREFPNDF is a sensitive protection applied to protect the star-
connected winding of a transformer. This protection system remains stable for all the
faults outside the protected zone.

564 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

LREFPNDF provides higher sensitivity for the detection of earth faults than the
overall transformer differential protection. This is a high-speed unit protection
scheme applied to the star-connected winding of the transformer. LREFPNDF is
normally applied when the transformer is earthed solidly or through low-impedance
resistor (NER). LREFPNDF can be also applied on the delta side of the transformer if
an earthing transformer (zig-zag transformer) is used there. In LREFPNDF, the
difference of the fundamental component of all three phase currents and the neutral
current is provided to the differential element to detect the earth fault in the
transformer winding based on the numerical stabilized differential current principle.

Connection of current transformers

The connections of the main CTs are designated as "Type 1" and "Type 2". In case the
earthings of the current transformers on the phase side and the neutral side are both
either inside or outside the area to be protected, the setting parameter CT connection
type is "Type 1".

If the earthing of the current transformers on the phase side is inside the area to be
protected and the neutral side is outside the area to be protected or if the earthing on
the phase side is outside the area and on the neutral side inside the area, the setting
parameter CT connection type is "Type 2".

GUID-63BD73B4-7B60-4354-9690-E96C0A8076C7 V2 EN

Figure 295: Connection of the current transformers of Type 1. The connected

phase currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at an
external earth-fault situation.

630 series 565

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-124047A0-9B33-4D2F-9519-75D98C0A4534 V2 EN

Figure 296: Connection of the current transformers of Type 2. The phase currents
and the neutral current have equal directions at an external earth-
fault situation.

Internal and external faults

LREFPNDF does not respond to any faults outside the protected zone. An external
fault is detected by checking the phase angle difference of the neutral current and the
sum of the phase currents. When the difference is less than 90 degrees, the operation
is internally restrained or blocked. Hence the protection is not sensitive to an external
fault.

zone of
protection

Izs1 I a =0
A a
Izs1 Ib = 0
B b
Izs1 I c =0
C c

Uzs Io IN

For external fault

Io

IN Reference is Neutral
Current

Operate for Restrain for

internal fault external fault
GUID-FAC5E4AD-A4A7-4D39-9EAC-C380EA33CB78 V2 EN

Figure 297: Current flow in all the CTs for an external fault

566 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

zone of
protection

s Ia = 0
o A a
u Ib = 0
r B b
c Ic = 0
C c
e
Ifault

Io Uzs IN

For internal fault

Io

IN Reference is Neutral
Current

Operate for Restrain for

internal fault external fault
GUID-D5D712D4-2291-4C49-93DE-363F9F10801C V2 EN

Figure 298: Current flow in all the CTs for an internal fault

LREFPNDF does not respond to phase-to-phase faults either, as in this case the fault
current flows between the two line CTs and so the neutral CT does not experience this
fault current.

Blocking based on the second harmonic of the neutral current

The transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when the transformer is energized
after a period of de-energization. The inrush current can be many times the rated
current, and the halving time can be up to several seconds. For the differential IED, the
inrush current represents the differential current, which causes the IED to operate
almost always when the transformer is connected to the network. Typically, the inrush
current contains a large amount of second harmonics.

The blocking also prevents unwanted operation at the recovery and sympathetic
magnetizing inrushes. At the recovery inrush, the magnetizing current of the
transformer to be protected increases momentarily when the voltage returns to normal
after the clearance of a fault outside the protected area. The sympathetic inrush is
caused by the energization of a transformer running in parallel with the protected
transformer already connected to the network.

Blocking the starting of the restricted earth-fault protection at the magnetizing inrush
is based on the ratio of the second harmonic and the fundamental frequency
amplitudes of the neutral current Io_2H / Io. Typically, the second harmonic content
of the neutral current at the magnetizing inrush is higher than that of the phase
currents.

630 series 567

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.3.2.7 Signals
Table 561: LREFPNDF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the output signals

Table 562: LREFPNDF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Low impedance restricted earthfault protection
operate
START BOOLEAN Low impedance restricted earthfault protection
start
BLK2H BOOLEAN Signal to indicate second harmonic blocking when
the second harmonic has been enabled
ID_COSPHI REAL Directional differential current Id cosphi
IB REAL Bias current

4.3.2.8 Settings
Table 563: LREFPNDF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operate value 5 - 50 % 1 5 Min ratio of differential and nominal
current for a trip

Table 564: LREFPNDF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Restraint mode None - - 2nd harmonic Setting to allow for second harmonic
2nd harmonic blocking
Start value 2.H 10 - 50 % 1 30 Ratio to cause the second harmonic
blocking
Minimum operate time 0.040 - 300.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time

Table 565: LREFPNDF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
CT connection type Type 1 - - Type 2 Signal to compensate for the reverse
Type 2 polarity connections

568 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 566: LREFPNDF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

4.3.2.9 Measured values

Table 567: LREFPNDF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 current amplitude (DFT) phase 1
I_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 current amplitude (DFT) phase 2
I_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 current amplitude (DFT) phase 3
I0_AMPL REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) Neutral
I0_ANG REAL 0.0 Angle of the current in neutral
I0_2H_AMPL REAL 0.0 Amplitude of second harmonic component of
neutral current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the output signals

4.3.2.10 Monitored data

Table 568: LREFPNDF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Low impedance
1=TRUE restricted earthfault
protection operate
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Low impedance
1=TRUE restricted earthfault
protection start
BLK2H BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal to indicate second
1=TRUE harmonic blocking when
the second harmonic has
been enabled
ID_COSPHI REAL - A Directional differential
current Id cosphi
IB REAL - A Bias current
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in
percentage of the total
operating time

630 series 569

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.3.2.11 Technical data

Table 569: LREFPNDF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Start time1)2) IFault = 2.0 × set Typically 18 ms (±5 ms)

Operate valueIFault = Typically 12 ms (±5 ms)
10.0 × set Operate
value
Reset time <50 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5, …

1) Current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.3.2.12 Technical revision history

Table 570: LREFPNDF technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Base value Sel Res setting is removed.

4.3.3 High impedance restricted earth-fault protection HREFPDIF

4.3.3.1 Identification
Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
High impedance restricted earth-fault HREFPDIF dIoHi> 87NH
protection

4.3.3.2 Function block

GUID-6099228D-39F5-40D3-B3F9-F3425395ABF6 V1 EN

Figure 299: Function block

570 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.3.3 Functionality

The high-impedance restricted earth-fault protection HREFPDIF is used for the

restricted earth-fault protection of generators and power transformers based on the
high-impedance principle.

HREFPDIF starts when the ID_N, the differential neutral current, exceeds the set
limit. HREFPDIF operates with the DT characteristic.

HREFPDIF contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.3.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the high impedance restricted earth-fault protection function can be
described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the
next sections.

GUID-424EBB88-7E8C-401D-9656-B160A8F94526 V1 EN

Figure 300: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P_D is used for feeding
the necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector
The level detector compares the differential neutral current to the Operate value
setting. If the ID_N value exceeds the set Operate value, the level detector sends an
enable signal to the timer module to start the definite timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The timer characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Minimum
operate time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by
Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The activation of the BLOCK signal resets the timer and deactivates the START and
OPERATE outputs.

630 series 571

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.3.3.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the residual current or voltage-related
settings, for example, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3". One
of the groups to be used with the "Base value Sel Res" setting must be selected.

4.3.3.6 Application

In solidly earthed systems, the restricted earth-fault protection is always deployed as

a complement to the normal transformer differential protection. The advantage of the
restricted earth-fault protection is its high sensitivity. Sensitivities of close to 1.0
percent can be achieved, whereas normal differential IEDs have their minimum
sensitivity in the range of 5 to 10 percent. The level for HREFPDIF is dependent on
the current transformers' magnetizing currents. The restricted earth-fault protection is
also very fast due to the simple measuring principle as it is a unit type of protection.

The differences in measuring principle limit the biased differential IED's possibility
to detect the earth faults. Such faults are then only detected by the restricted earth-fault
function.

The restricted earth-fault IED is connected across each directly or to low-ohmic

earthed transformer winding. If the same CTs are connected to other IEDs, separate
cores are to be used.

572 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

s2 s1

s1

s2

VDR

Stabilizing
Resistor
High impedance
protection
(HREFPDIF)
GUID-367BDBC9-D2E8-48D3-B98F-623F7CD70D99 V3 EN

Figure 301: Connection scheme for the restricted earth-fault protection according
to the high-impedance principle

High-impedance principle
High-impedance principle is stable for all types of faults outside the zone of
protection. The stabilization is obtained by a stabilizing resistor in the differential
circuit. This method requires that all the CTs used have a similar magnetizing
characteristic, same ratio and relatively high knee point voltage. CTs on each sides are
connected in parallel along with a relay-measuring branch as shown in Figure 302.
The measuring branch is a series connection of stabilizing resistor and IED.

630 series 573

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

CT1 CT2

Rin1 Rin2
Rm1/2 Rm2/2

Rs Ru
Id

Rm1/2 Rm2/2

GUID-80DC5CFE-118C-4C5C-A15F-13DCB1708C0E V1 EN

Figure 302: High-impedance principle

The stability of the protection is based on the use of the stabilizing resistor (Rs) and the
fact that the impedance of the CT secondary quickly decreases as the CT saturates.
The magnetization reactance of a fully saturated CT goes to zero and the impedance
is formed only by the resistance of the winding (Rin) and lead resistance (Rm).

The CT saturation causes a differential current which now has two paths to flow:
through the saturated CT because of the near-zero magnetizing reactance and through
the measuring branch. The stabilizing resistor is selected as such that the current in the
measuring branch is below the relay operating current during out-of-zone faults. As a
result, the operation is stable during the saturation and can still be sensitive at the non-
saturated parts of the current waveform as shown in Figure 303.

In case of an internal fault, the fault current cannot circulate through the CTs but it
flows through the measuring branch and the protection operates. Partial CT saturation
can occur in case of an internal fault, but the non-saturated part of the current
waveform causes the protection to operate.

Saturated part Non-saturated part

GUID-B4CBEF48-1C9C-410B-997F-440CB10486BD V1 EN

Figure 303: Secondary waveform of a saturated CT

574 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

At internal fault, the secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation voltage
of the CTs, connection wires and IED. To limit this voltage, a voltage-dependent
resistor VDR is used as shown in Figure 302.

The whole scheme, that is, the stabilizing resistor, voltage-dependent resistor and
wiring, must be adequately maintained (operation- and insulation-tested regularly) to
be able to withstand the high-voltage pulses which appear during an internal fault
throughout the lifetime of the equipment. Otherwise, during a fault within the zone of
protection, any flashover in the CT secondary circuits or in any other part of the
scheme may prevent a correct operation of the high-impedance differential function.

4.3.3.7 The measuring configuration

The external measuring configuration is composed of four current transformers

measuring the currents and a stabilizing resistor. A varistor is needed if high
overvoltages are expected.

The value of the stabilizing resistor is calculated with the formula:

Us
Rs =
I rs
GUID-00FCABE9-93E2-4BDD-83C6-EB1BE7FFE986 V1 EN (Equation 89)

Rs the resistance of the stabilizing resistor

Us the stabilizing voltage of the IED

Irs the value of the Low operate value setting

The stabilizing voltage is calculated with the formula:

I k max
Us = ( Rin + Rm )
n
GUID-6A4C58E7-3D26-40C9-A070-0D99BA209B1A V1 EN (Equation 90)

Ikmax the highest through-fault current

n the turns ratio of the CT

Rin the secondary internal resistance of the CT

Rm the resistance of the longest loop of secondary circuit

Additionally, it is required that the current transformers' knee-point voltages Uk are at

least twice the stabilizing voltage value Us.

4.3.3.8 Recommendations for current transformers

The sensitivity and reliability of the protection depends a lot on the characteristics of
the current transformers. The CTs must have an identical transformation ratio. It is

630 series 575

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

recommended that all current transformers have an equal burden and characteristics
and are of same type, preferably from the same manufacturing batch, that is, an
identical construction should be used. If the CT characteristics and burden values are
not equal, calculation for each branch in the scheme should be done separately and the
worst-case result is then used.

First, the stabilizing voltage, that is, the voltage appearing across the measuring
branch during the out-of-zone fault, is calculated assuming that one of the parallel
connected CT is fully saturated. The stabilizing voltage can be calculated with the
formula

I k max
Us = ( Rin + Rm )
n
GUID-6A4C58E7-3D26-40C9-A070-0D99BA209B1A V1 EN (Equation 91)

Ikmax the highest through-fault current in primary amps. The highest earth-fault or short circuit current
during the out-of-zone fault.
n the turns ratio of the CT
Rin the secondary internal resistance of the CT in ohms

Rm the resistance (maximum of Rin + Rm) of the CT secondary circuit in ohms

The current transformers must be able to force enough current to operate the IED
through the differential circuit during a fault condition inside the zone of protection.
To ensure this, the knee point voltage Ukn should be at least two times higher than the
stabilizing voltage Us.

The required knee point voltage Ukn of the current transformer is calculated using the
formula
U kn ≥ 2 × U s
GUID-4F7F301A-1573-4736-B740-622605DB0FFB V2 EN (Equation 92)

Ukn the knee point voltage

Us the stabilizing voltage

The factor two is used when no delay in the operating time of the protection in any
situation is acceptable. To prevent the knee point voltage from growing too high, it is
advisable to use current transformers, the secondary winding resistance of which is of
the same size as the resistance of the measuring loop.

As the impedance of the IED alone is low, a stabilizing resistor is needed. The value
of the stabilizing resistor is calculated with the formula

576 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Us
Rs =
I rs
GUID-EA4FE2BC-4E93-4093-BD14-F20A4F33AEF2 V1 EN (Equation 93)

Rs the resistance of the stabilizing resistor

Us the stabilizing voltage of the IED

Irs the value of the Operate value setting in secondary amps.

The stabilizing resistor should be capable to dissipate high energy within a very short
time; therefore, the wire wound-type resistor should be used. Because of the possible
CT inaccuracy, which might cause some current through the stabilizing resistor in a
normal load situation, the rated power should be 25 W minimum.

If Ukn is high or the stabilizing voltage is low, a resistor with a higher power rating is
needed. Often resistor manufacturers allow 10 times rated power for 5 seconds. Thus
the power of the resistor can be calculated with the equation
2
U kn
Rs × 10
GUID-93E59545-7530-408D-8ECF-2D3D9CF76C13 V1 EN (Equation 94)

The actual sensitivity of the protection is affected by the IED setting, the magnetizing
currents of the parallel connected CTs and the shunting effect of the voltage-
dependent resistor (VDR). The value of the primary current Iprim at which the IED
operates at a certain setting can be calculated with the formula

I prim = n × ( I rs + Iu + m × I m )
GUID-2A742729-7244-4B1C-A4DF-404BDD3A68D9 V1 EN (Equation 95)

Iprim the primary current at which the protection is to start

n the turn ratio of the current transformer

Irs the value of the Operate value setting

Iu the leakage current flowing through the VDR at the Us voltage

m the number of current transformers included in the protection per phase (=4)
Im the magnetizing current per current transformer at the Us voltage

The Ie value given in many catalogs is the excitation current at the knee point voltage.
Ie
Im ≈
Assuming Ukn ≈ 2 x Us, the value of 2 gives an approximate value for Equation
95.

The selection of current transformers can be divided into procedures:

630 series 577

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

1. In principle, the highest through-fault should be known. However, when the

necessary data are not available, approximates can be used:
• Small power transformers: Ikmax = 16 x In (corresponds to zk = 6% and
infinite grid)
• Large power transformers: Ikmax = 12 x In (corresponds to zk = 8% and
infinite grid)
• Generators and motors: Ikmax = 6 x In
Where In = rated current and zk = short circuit impedance of the protected
object
2. The rated primary current I1n of the CT has to be higher than the rated current of
the machine.
The choice of the CT also specifies Rin.
3. The required Ukn is calculated with Equation 92. If the Ukn of the CT is not high
enough, another CT has to be chosen. The value of the Ukn is given by the
manufacturer in the case of Class X current transformers or it can be estimated
with Equation 96.
4. The sensitivity Iprim is calculated with Equation 95. If the achieved sensitivity is
sufficient, the present CT is chosen. If a better sensitivity is needed, a CT with a
bigger core is chosen.

If other than Class X CTs are used, an estimate for Ukn is calculated with the equation

 S 
U kn = 0.8 × Fn × I 2 n ×  Rin + 2n 
 I 2 n 

GUID-AFA68232-5288-4220-845E-40347B691E29 V2 EN (Equation 96)

Fn the rated accuracy limit factor corresponding to the rated burden Sn

I2n the rated secondary current of the CT

Rin the secondary internal resistance of the CT

Sn the volt-amp rating of the CT

The formulas are based on choosing the CTs according to Equation

92, which results an absolutely stable scheme. In some cases, it is
possible to achieve stability with knee point voltages lower than stated
in the formulas. The conditions in the network, however, have to be
known well enough to ensure the stability.
1. If Uk ≥ 2 x Us, fast IED operation is secure.
2. If Uk ≥ 1.5 x Us and < 2 x Us, IED operation can be slightly
prolonged and should be studied case by case.
If Uk < 1.5 x Us, the IED operation is jeopardized. Another CT has
to be chosen.

578 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The need for the VDR depends on certain conditions.

First, voltage Umax, ignoring the CT saturation during the fault, is calculated with the
equation

I k max in I
U max = × ( Rin + Rm + Rs ) ≈ k max in × Rs
n n
GUID-CB54C30A-C69D-4C59-B9B3-44530319D1CE V1 EN (Equation 97)

Ikmaxin the maximum fault current inside the zone, in primary amps

n the turns ration of the CT

Rin the internal resistance of the CT in ohms

Rm the resistance of the longest loop of the CT secondary circuit, in ohms

Rs the resistance of the stabilized resistor, in ohms

Next, the peak voltage û, which includes the CT saturation, is estimated with the
formula (given by P.Mathews, 1955)

û = 2 2U kn (U max − U kn )
GUID-0FBE4CDF-8A7C-4574-8325-C61E61E0C55C V1 EN (Equation 98)

Ukn the knee point voltage of the CT

The VDR is recommended when the peak voltage û ≥ 2kV, which is the insulation
level for which the IED is tested.

If Rs was smaller, the VDR could be avoided. However, the value of Rs depends on the
IED operation current and stabilizing voltage. Thus, either a higher setting must be
used in the IED or the stabilizing voltage must be lowered.

4.3.3.9 Signals
Table 571: HREFPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P_D GROUP - Three phase group signal for differential current
SIGNAL inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function

Table 572: HREFPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN High impedance restricted earthfault protection
operate
START BOOLEAN High impedance restricted earthfault protection
start

630 series 579

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.3.3.10 Settings
Table 573: HREFPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operate value 0.5 - 50.0 % 0.1 0.5 Low operate value, percentage of the
nominal current
Minimum operate time 0.020 - 300.000 s 0.001 0.020 Minimum operate time

Table 574: HREFPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

Table 575: HREFPDIF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

4.3.3.11 Measured values

Table 576: HREFPDIF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
ID_N REAL 0.0 Differential neutral current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function

4.3.3.12 Monitored data

Table 577: HREFPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - High impedance
1=TRUE restricted earthfault
protection operate
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - High impedance
1=TRUE restricted earthfault
protection start
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in
percentage of the total
operating time

580 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.3.13 Technical data

Table 578: HREFPDIF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Start time1)2) IFault = 2.0 × set Typically 22 ms (±5 ms)

Operate value Typically 15 ms (±5 ms)
IFault = 10.0 × set
Operate value
Reset time <60 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <60 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

1) Current before fault = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.3.3.14 Technical revision history - HREFPDIF

Table 579: HREFPDIF technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Internal improvements

4.3.4 Stabilized differential protection for machines MPDIF

4.3.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
number
Stabilized differential MPDIF 3dI>G/M 87G/87M
protection for machines

4.3.4.2 Function block

MPDIF
I3P1 OPERATE
I3P2 OPR_A
U3P OPR_B
BLOCK OPR_C
BLK_OPR_LS OPR_LS
BLK_OPR_HS OPR_HS
INT_BLKD
INT_BLKD_A
INT_BLKD_B
INT_BLKD_C

GUID-D1B0188F-177E-4331-B9AA-501AC7DD7535 V2 EN

Figure 304: Function block

630 series 581

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.3.4.3 Functionality

Stabilized differential protection for machines MPDIF is a unit protection function.

The possibility of internal failures of the machines is relatively low. However, the
consequences in terms of cost and production loss are often serious, which makes the
differential protection an important protection function.

The stability of the differential protection is enhanced by a DC restraint feature. This

feature decreases the sensitivity of the differential protection optionally for a
temporary time period to avoid an unnecessary disconnection of the machine during
the external faults that have a fault current with high DC currents. MPDIF also
includes a CT saturation-based blocking which prevents unnecessary tripping in case
of the detection of the magnetizing inrush currents which can be present at the
switching operations, overvoltages or external faults.

4.3.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the stabilized differential protection for motors can be described
using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

I_A1 Differential
I_B1 and bias
I3P1
I_C1 calculation

I_A2 OPERATE
I_B2 Through Instan- OPR_A
I3P2
I_C2 fault taneous OPR_B
detection high stage OPR_C
FR OPR_LS
U3P
OPR_HS
DC INT_BLKD
Biased low
component INT_BLKD_A
stage
detection INT_BLKD_B
INT_BLKD_C

CT
saturation
based
blocking

BLOCK
BLK_OPR_LS
BLK_OPR_HS
GUID-DC78623F-2BC7-45ED-889A-EC0352F3114B V2 EN

Figure 305: Functional module diagram

Differential and bias calculation

Differential calculation module calculates the differential current. The differential
current is the difference in current between the phase and neutral sides of the machine.

582 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The phase currents I 1 and I 2 denote the fundamental frequency components on the
phase and neutral sides of the current. The amplitude of the differential current Id is
obtained using the equation (assuming that the positive direction of the current is
towards the machine):

Id = I1 + I 2
GUID-9BC6A743-CA43-407E-8340-7463F15C8128 V1 EN (Equation 99)

During normal conditions, there is no fault in the area protected by the function block,
so the currents I 1 and I 2 are equal and the differential current Id = 0. However, in
practice some differential current exists due to inaccuracies in the current transformer
on the phase and neutral sides, but it is very small during normal conditions.

The module calculates the differential current for all three phases.

The low-stage differential protection is stabilized with a bias current. The bias current
is also known as the stabilizing current. Stabilization means that the differential
current required for tripping increases according to the bias current and the operation
characteristics. When an internal fault occurs, the currents on both sides of the
protected object are flowing into it. This causes the biasing current to be considerably
smaller, which makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults.

The traditional way for calculating the stabilized current is:

I1 − I 2
Ib =
2
GUID-34FA472E-E419-4A0E-94A3-238D7A3CE5ED V1 EN (Equation 100)

The module calculates the bias current for all three phases.

Generator differential protection should be available already during

the starting (acceleration) phase of the generator, so it is
recommended to use an adaptive DFT preprocessing block to provide
analog input to this function.

Through-fault detection
Through-fault (TF) detection module is for detecting whether the fault is external, that
is, going through, or internal. This information is essential for ensuring the correct
operation of the protection in case of the CT saturation:
• In a through-fault situation, CTs can saturate because of a high fault current
magnitude. Such AC saturation does not happen immediately when the fault
begins. Thus, the TF module sees the fault as external because the bias current is
high but the differential current remains low. If the AC saturation then occurs, a
CT saturation-based blocking is allowed to work to prevent tripping.
• Normally, the phase angle between the machine neutral and line side CTs is 180
degrees. If an internal fault occurs during a through fault, an angle less than 50

630 series 583

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

degrees clearly indicates an internal fault and the TF module overrules, that is,
deblocks the presence of any blocking due to CT saturation.

CT saturation-based blocking
Higher currents during the motor startup or abnormally high magnetizing currents at
an overvoltage (transformer-fed motor) or an external fault may saturate the current
transformers. The uneven saturation of the star and line side CTs (for example, due to
burden differences) may lead to a differential current which can cause a differential
protection to operate. This module blocks the operation of MPDIF biased low stage
internally in case of the CT saturation. Once the blocking is activated, it is held for a
certain time after the blocking conditions have ceased to be fulfilled.

DC component detection
On detection of a DC component, the function temporarily desensitizes the
differential protection. The functioning of this module depends on the DC restrain
Enable setting. The DC components are continuously extracted from the three
instantaneous differential currents. The highest DC component of all three is taken as
a kind of DC restraint in a sense that the highest effective, temporary sensitivity of the
protection is temporarily decreased as a function of this highest DC offset. The
calculated DC restraint current is not allowed to decay (from its highest ever measured
value) faster than with a time constant of one second. The value of the temporarily
effective sensitivity limit is limited upwards to the rated current of the machine or 3.3
times that of Low operate value, whichever is smaller. The temporary extra limit
decays exponentially from its maximum value with a time constant of one second.

This feature should be used in case of networks where very long time constants are
expected. The temporary sensitivity limit is higher to the set operating characteristics.
In other words, the temporary limit has superposed the unchanged operating
characteristics and temporarily determines the highest sensitivity of the protection.
The temporary sensitivity is less than the sensitivity in section 1 of the operating
characteristic and is supposed to prevent an unwanted trip during the external faults
with lower currents.

MPDIF uses three-phase voltage U3P for obtaining the actual network frequency. The
actual frequency information is needed to calculate the accurate DC component in the
current signal.

Biased low stage

The current differential protection needs to be biased because of the possible
appearance of a differential current which can be due to something else than an actual
fault in the machine. In case of differential protection, a false differential current can
be caused by:
• CT errors
• CT saturation at high currents passing through the machine

584 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The differential current caused by CT errors increases at the same percent ratio as the
load current.

The high currents passing through the protected object can be caused by the through
fault. Therefore, the operation of the differential protection is biased with respect to
the load current. In the biased differential protection, the higher the differential current
required for the protection of operation, the higher the load current.

Based on the conditions checked from the through-fault module, the DC (component)
detection module and the CT saturation-based blocking modules, the biased low-stage
module decides whether the differential current is due to the internal faults or some
false reason. In case of detection of the TF, DC or CT saturation, the internal
differential blocking signal is generated, which in turn blocks the operate signal. In
case of internal faults, the operation of the differential protection is affected by the bias
current .

The Low operate value setting for the stabilized stage of the function block is
determined with the equation:
I d1
Lowoperate value = ⋅100%
In
GUID-22A3726A-4B8C-418F-B8C3-D6A5AACD165F V1 EN (Equation 101)

The Slope section 2 is determined correspondingly:

Id 2
Slope section 2 = ⋅100%
Ib 2
GUID-6707BA3B-6446-4B54-B09B-7D8D1F0DDF32 V1 EN (Equation 102)

The end of the first section End section 1 can be set at a desired point within the range
of 0 to 100 percent (or % In). Accordingly, the end of the second section End section 2
can be set within the range of 100 percent to 300 percent (or % In).

The slope of the operating characteristic for the function block varies in different parts
of the range.

In section 1, where 0.0 < Ib/In < End section 1, the differential current required for
tripping is constant. The value of the differential current is the same as the Low operate
value setting selected for the function block. The Low operate value setting allows for
small inaccuracies of the current transformers but it can also be used to influence the
overall level of the operating characteristic.

In section 2, where End section 1 < Ib/In < End section 2, is called the influence area
of the setting Slope section 2. In this section, variations in End section 2 affect the
slope of the characteristic, that is, how big the change in the differential current
required for tripping is in comparison to the change in the load current. The End
section 2 setting allows for the CT errors.

630 series 585

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

In section 3, where Ib/In > End section 2, the slope of the characteristic is constant. The
slope is 100 percent, which means that an increase in the differential current is equal
to the corresponding increase in the stabilizing current.

The required differential current for tripping at a certain stabilizing current level can
be calculated using the formulae:

For a stabilizing current lower than End section 1

I doperate [% I r ] = Set Lowoperate value
GUID-4FAC8F94-FBB0-47DB-A952-F995889969C6 V2 EN (Equation 103)

For a stabilizing current higher than End section 1 but lower than End section 2
I doperate [% I r ] = Lowoperate value + ( I b [% Ir ] − End section 1) ⋅ Slope section 2
GUID-EB0A327A-4079-45A5-87E6-AA30A8D2220C V2 EN (Equation 104)

For higher stabilizing current values exceeding End section 2

I d operate [% I r ] = Lowoperate value + ( End section 2 − End section 1) ⋅ Slope section 2 + ( I b [% I r ] − End section 2) ⋅ Slope section 3

GUID-E9DA330C-84A8-40C2-BCFB-1F7E517395D8 V3 EN (Equation 105)

GUID-295E8CB1-B4A0-4207-A1B2-F542C5D1DF94 V1 EN

Figure 306: Operating characteristic for the stabilized stage of the differential
protection function

When the differential current exceeds the operating value determined by the operating
characteristics, the OPR_LS output is activated. The OPERATE output is always
activated when the OPR_LS output activates, and the outputs OPR_A, OPR_B and
OPR_C are activated according to the faulted phase detected by the biased low stage.

586 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The operate signal due to the biased stage can be blocked by the activation of the
BLK_OPR_LS or BLOCK input. Also, when the operation of the biased low stage is
blocked by the waveform blocking functionality, the outputs INT_BLKD_A,
INT_BLKD_B, INT_BLKD_C and the combined output INT_BLKD are activated
according to the phase information.

The phase angle difference between the two currents I_A1 and I_A2 is theoretically
180 electrical degrees for the external fault and 0 electrical degrees for the internal
fault conditions. If the phase angle difference is less than 50 electrical degrees or if the
biasing current drops below 30 percent of the differential current, a fault has most
likely occurred in the area protected by MPDIF. Then the internal blocking signals
(CT saturation and DC blocking) of the biased stage are inhibited.

GUID-D401D103-BD7C-4096-986F-578925ADB1CC V1 EN

Figure 307: Positive direction of current

Instantaneous high stage

The differential protection includes an unbiased instantaneous high stage. The
instantaneous stage operates and the OPR_HS output is activated when the amplitude
of the fundamental frequency component of the differential current exceeds the set
High operate value or when the instantaneous peak values of the differential current
exceed 2.5 · High operate value. The factor 2.5 (= 1.8 · √2) is due to the maximum
asymmetric short circuit current.

The OPERATE output is always activated when the OPR_HS output activates, and the
outputs OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C are activated according to the faulted phase
detected by the instantaneous high stage.

The internal blocking signals of the function block do not prevent the operation of the
instantaneous stage. When required, the operate signal due to instantaneous operation
can be blocked by the binary inputs BLK_OPR_HS or BLOCK.

630 series 587

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.3.4.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.3.4.6 Application

The differential protection works on the principle of calculating the differential

current at two ends of the winding, that is, the current entering the winding is
compared to the current exiting the winding. In case of any internal fault, the currents
entering and exiting the winding are different, which results in a differential current,
which is then used as a base for generating the operating signal. Due to this principle,
the differential protection does not trip during external faults. However, it should be
noted that interturn faults in the same phase are usually not detected unless they
developed into some other kind of fault.

The short circuit between the phases of the stator windings normally causes large fault
currents. The short circuit creates a risk of damages to the insulation, windings and
stator core. The large short circuit currents cause large current forces which can
damage other components in the machine. The short circuit can also initiate explosion
and fire. When a short circuit occurs in a machine, there is a damage that has to be
repaired. The severity and the repair time depend on the degree of damage, which is
highly dependent on the fault time. The fast fault clearance of this fault type is of
greatest importance to limit the damages and the economic loss.

To limit the damages in connection to the stator winding short circuits, the fault
clearance time must be as short as possible (instantaneous). The fault current
contributions from both the external power system (via the machine or the block
circuit breaker) and from the machine itself must be disconnected as fast as possible.

The DC restraint feature should be used in case of an application with a long DC time
constant in the fault currents are present. This fault current may be of a lesser
magnitude (less than rated current) but is unpleasant and tends to saturate the CT and
operate the differential protection for external faults. This feature is effective at
moderate through-currents and ineffective at higher through-currents.

Although the short circuit fault current is normally very large, that is, significantly
larger than the rated current of the machine, it is possible that a short circuit can occur
between phases close to the neutral point of the machine, causing a relatively small
fault current. The fault current fed from the synchronous machine can also be limited
due to a low excitation of the synchronous generator. This is normally the case at the
run-up of the synchronous machine, before synchronization to the network.
Therefore, it is desired that the detection of the machine phase-to-phase short circuits
shall be relatively sensitive, thus detecting the small fault currents.

588 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

It is also important that the machine short circuit protection does not trip for external
faults when a large fault current is fed from the machine. To combine fast fault
clearance, sensitivity and selectivity, the machine current differential protection is
normally the best alternative for the phase-to-phase short circuits.

The risk of an unwanted differential protection operation caused by the current

transformer saturation is a universal differential protection problem. If a big
synchronous machine is tripped in connection to an external short circuit, it gives an
increased risk of a power system collapse. Besides, there is a production loss for every
unwanted trip of the machine. Therefore, preventing the unwanted disconnection of
machines has a great economical value.

Recommendations for current transformers

The more important the object to be protected is, the more attention is paid to the
current transformers. It is not normally possible to dimension the current transformers
so that they repeat the currents with high DC components without saturating when the
residual flux of the current transformer is high. The differential protection function
block operates reliably even though the current transformers are partially saturated.

The accuracy class recommended for current transformers to be used with the
differential function block is 5P, in which the limit of the current error at the rated
primary current is 1 percent and the limit of the phase displacement is 60 minutes. The
limit of the composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current is 5 percent.

The approximate value of the actual accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the
actual CT burden can be calculated on the basis of the rated accuracy limit factor Fn
(ALF) at the rated burden, the rated burden Sn, the internal burden Sin and the actual
burden Sa of the current transformer as:

Sin + Sn
Fa = Fn ×
Sin + S a
GUID-8EFD1AED-A804-45DD-963F-D453A6B3D782 V2 EN (Equation 106)

Example 1
The rated burden Sn of the current transformer 5P20 is 10 VA, the secondary rated
current 5A, the internal resistance Rin = 0.07 Ω and the rated accuracy limit factor Fn
corresponding to the rated burden is 20 (5P20). The internal burden of the current
transformer is Sin = (5A)² · 0.07 Ω = 1.75 VA. The input impedance of the IED at a
rated current of 5A is < 20 mΩ. If the measurement conductors have a resistance of
0.113 Ω, the actual burden of the current transformer is Sa = (5A)² · (0.113 + 0.020) Ω
= 3.33 VA. Thus, the accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the actual burden is
about 46.

The CT burden can grow considerably at the rated current 5A. The actual burden of the
current transformer decreases at the rated current of 1 A while the repeatability
simultaneously improves.

630 series 589

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

At faults occurring in the protected area, the fault currents can be very high compared
to the rated currents of the current transformers. Due to the instantaneous stage of the
differential function block, it is sufficient that the current transformers are capable of
repeating the current required for an instantaneous tripping during the first cycle.

Thus the current transformers usually are able to reproduce the asymmetric fault
current without saturating within the next 10 ms after the occurrence of the fault to
secure that the operate times of the IED comply with the retardation time.

The accuracy limit factors corresponding to the actual burden of the phase current
transformer to be used in differential protection must fulfill the requirement:
−T
m
Fa > K r × Ikmax × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e Tdc ) + 1)
GUID-21C442C8-79F8-411A-829A-1980BC5D1A2E V2 EN (Equation 107)

Ikmax The maximum through-going fault current (in IR) at which the protection is not allowed to operate

Tdc The primary DC time constant related to Ikmax

ω The angular frequency, that is, 2 x π x fn

Tm The time to saturate, that is, the duration of the saturation-free transformation

Kr The remanence factor 1/(1-r), where r is the maximum remanence flux in p.u. from the saturation
flux

The parameter r is the maximum remanence flux density in the CT core in pu from the
saturation flux density. The value of the parameter r depends on the magnetic material
used and also on the construction of the CT. For instance, if the value r = 0.4, the
remanence flux density can be 40 percent of the saturation flux density. The
manufacturer of the CT has to be contacted when an accurate value for the parameter
r is needed. The value r = 0.4 is recommended to be used when an accurate value is not
available.

The required minimum time-to-saturate Tm in MPDIF is half-fundamental cycle

period (10 ms when fn = 50 Hz).

Two typical cases are considered for the determination of the sufficient actual
accuracy limit factor Fa:

1. A fault occurring at the substation bus.

The protection must be stable at a fault arising during a normal operating

situation. The reenergizing of the transformer against a bus fault leads to very
high fault currents and thermal stress. Therefore, reenergizing is not preferred in
this case. The remanence can be neglected.
The maximum through-going fault current Ikmax is typically 6 IR for a motor. At
a short circuit fault close to the supply transformer, the DC time constant Tdc of
the fault current is almost the same as that of the transformer, the typical value
being 100 ms.

590 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Ikmax 6 IR

Tdc 100 ms

ω 100π Hz
Tm 10 ms

Kr 1

Equation 107 with these values gives the result:

−T
m
Tdc
Fa > K r × Ikmax × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e ) + 1) ≈ 24
GUID-C510CA46-3857-40D3-B40A-3C237BCE6E79 V2 EN

2. Reenergizing against a fault occurring further down in the network.

The protection must be stable also during reenergization against a fault on the
line. In this case, the existence of remanence is very probable. It is assumed to be
40 percent here.
On the other hand the fault current is now smaller and since the ratio of the
resistance and reactance is greater in this location, having a full DC offset is not
possible. Furthermore, the DC time constant (Tdc) of the fault current is now
smaller, assumed to be 50 ms here.
Assuming the maximum fault current is 30 percent lower than in the bus fault and
a DC offset 90 percent of the maximum.

Ikmax 0.7 · 6 = 4.2 (IR)

Tdc 50 ms

ω 100π Hz
Tm 10 ms

Kr 1/(1-0.4) = 1.6667

Equation 107 with these values gives the result:

−T
m
Fa > K r × Ikmax × 0.9 × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e Tdc ) + 1) ≈ 24
GUID-46A4591B-876D-4E32-A9AB-29F6C1657644 V2 EN

If the actual burden of the current transformer Sa in the accuracy limit factor equation
cannot be reduced low enough to provide a sufficient value for Fa, there are two
alternatives to deal with the situation.

630 series 591

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

1. A current transformer with a higher rated burden Sn can be chosen (which also
means a higher rated accurate limit Fn).
2. A current transformer with a higher nominal primary current I1n (but the same
rated burden) can be chosen.

Alternative 2 is more cost-effective and therefore often better, although the sensitivity
of the scheme is slightly reduced.

Example 2
Here the actions according to alternative 2 are taken to improve the actual accuracy
limit factor.

 I CT 
Fa =  R  × Fn
 I R Motor 
GUID-560620F9-50B1-4DA4-AF3F-2B24212080D9 V2 EN (Equation 108)

IRCT rated primary current of the CT, for example, 1500A

IRMotor rated current of the motor under protection, for example, 1000A

Fn rated accuracy limit factor of the CT, for example, 30

Fa actual accuracy limit factor due to oversizing the CT, substituting the values in the equation, Fa
= 45

In differential protection it is important that the accuracy limit factors Fa of the phase
current transformers at both sides correspond with each other, that is, the burdens of
the current transformers on both sides are to be as close to each other as possible. If
high inrush or start currents with high DC components pass through the protected
object when it is connected to the network, special attention is required for the
performance and the burdens of the current transformers and the settings of the
function block.

Connection of current transformers

The connections of the main current transformers are designated as Type 1 and Type
2. If the earthings of the current transformers are either inside or outside the area to be
protected, the setting CT connection type is of "Type 1" as shown in Figure 308. If the
earthing of the current transformers are both inside and outside the area to be
protected, the setting CT connection type is of "Type 2" as shown in Figure 309.

592 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-A6716146-6ECD-46A2-B2AC-4408DDDB7BF6 V2 EN

Figure 308: Connection of current transformer of Type 1

630 series 593

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-20C85C2F-B738-4E5A-ACE1-7B30EC9799E2 V2 EN

Figure 309: Connection of current transformer of Type 2

Saturation of current transformers

There are basically two types of saturation phenomena that have to be detected: the
AC saturation and the DC saturation. The AC saturation is caused by a high fault
current where the CT magnetic flux exceeds its maximum value. As a result, the
secondary current is distorted as shown in Figure 310. A DC component in the current
also causes the flux to increase until the CT saturates. This is known as DC saturation.

GUID-0A569D8E-6A69-43F1-848B-6AA364E130B7 V1 EN

Figure 310: AC saturation

594 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

When having a short circuit in a power line, the short circuit current contains a DC
component. The magnitude of the DC component depends on the phase angle when
the short circuit occurs. Figure 311 shows the secondary current of the CT in the fault
situation. Because of the DC component, the flux reaches its maximum value at 0.07
second causing saturation. As the DC component decays, the CT recovers gradually
from the saturation.

GUID-505C1447-5FA4-43B7-8AD7-9E2449CC10C3 V1 EN

Figure 311: DC saturation

4.3.4.7 Signals
Table 580: MPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs, line
SIGNAL side
I3P2 GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs, neutral
SIGNAL side
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operate outputs from biased stage
BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operate outputs from instantaneous stage

Table 581: MPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal, combined (all phases, both stages)
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate signal, Phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate signal, Phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate signal, Phase C
OPR_LS BOOLEAN Operate signal from low set (biased) stage
OPR_HS BOOLEAN Operate signal from high set (instantaneous) stage
INT_BLKD BOOLEAN Protection internally blocked, combined
Table continues on next page

630 series 595

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Description

INT_BLKD_A BOOLEAN Protection internally blocked, Phase A
INT_BLKD_B BOOLEAN Protection internally blocked, Phase B
INT_BLKD_C BOOLEAN Protection internally blocked, Phase C

4.3.4.8 Settings
Table 582: MPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
High operate value 100 - 1000 % 1 500 Instantaneous stage setting
Low operate value 5 - 30 % 1 5 Basic setting for stabilized operation
Slope section 2 10.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 20.0 Slope of the second line of the operation
characteristics
End section 1 0 - 100 % 1 50 Turn-point between sections 1 and 2 of
the characteristics
End section 2 100 - 300 % 1 150 Turn-point between sections 2 and 3 of
the characteristics

Table 583: MPDIF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DC restrain enable No - - No Setting for enabling DC restrain feature
Yes

Table 584: MPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
CT connection type Type 1 - - Type 1 CT connection type
Type 2

Table 585: MPDIF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3

4.3.4.9 Measured values

Table 586: MPDIF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operate outputs from biased stage
BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operate outputs from instantaneous stage

596 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.4.10 Monitored data

Table 587: MPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal, Phase A
1=TRUE
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal, Phase B
1=TRUE
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal, Phase C
1=TRUE
OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal from low
1=TRUE set (biased) stage
OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal from high
1=TRUE set (instantaneous) stage
INT_BLKD_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Protection internally
1=TRUE blocked, Phase A
INT_BLKD_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Protection internally
1=TRUE blocked, Phase B
INT_BLKD_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Protection internally
1=TRUE blocked, Phase C
ID_A REAL - A Differential current,
Phase A
ID_B REAL - A Differential current,
Phase B
ID_C REAL - A Differential current,
Phase C
IB_A REAL - A Bias current, phase A
IB_B REAL - A Bias current, phase B
IB_C REAL - A Bias current, phase C
I_ANGL_A1_B1 REAL - deg Current phase angle
Phase A – Phase B, line
side
I_ANGL_B1_C1 REAL - deg Current phase angle
Phase B – Phase C, line
side
I_ANGL_C1_A1 REAL - deg Current phase angle
Phase C – Phase A, line
side
I_ANGL_A2_B2 REAL - deg Current phase angle
Phase A – Phase B,
neutral side
I_ANGL_B2_C2 REAL - deg Current phase angle
Phase B – Phase C,
neutral side
I_ANGL_C2_A2 REAL - deg Current phase angle
Phase C – Phase A,
neutral side
Table continues on next page

630 series 597

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

I_ANGL_A1_A2 REAL - deg Current phase angle diff
between line and neutral
side, Phase A
I_ANGL_B1_B2 REAL - deg Current phase angle diff
between line and neutral
side, Phase B
I_ANGL_C1_C2 REAL - deg Current phase angle diff
between line and neutral
side, Phase C

4.3.4.11 Technical data

Table 588: MPDIF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±3% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Operate time 1)2) Biased low Typically 40 ms (±10 ms)

stage Typically 15 ms (±10 ms)
Instantaneous
high stage3)
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <20 ms

1) Fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

2) Includes the delay of the high speed power output contact
3) Ifault = 2 × High operate value

4.3.4.12 Technical revision history

Table 589: MPDIF technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B • Change in function description and IEC
60617 and ANSI symbol
• Added support for frequency adaptivity

4.3.5 High-impedance or flux-balance based differential protection

for machines MHZPDIF

4.3.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
High-impedance or flux-balance based MHZPDIF 3dIHi>G/M 87GH/87MH
differential protection for machines

598 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.5.2 Function block

GUID-24CCEC75-1ADE-4D2D-86D6-35E22B7278FF V1 EN

Figure 312: Function block

4.3.5.3 Functionality

The high-impedance or flux-balance based differential protection for machines

MHZPDIF provides winding short circuit protection for generators and motors.

MHZPDIF starts and operates when any of the three-phase differential currents,
ID_A, ID_B and ID_C, exceeds the set limit. The operation time characteristic is
according to the definite time (DT).

This function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and
resets timers.

4.3.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the high-impedance or flux-balance based differential protection for

machines can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram
are explained in the next sections.

GUID-8FB25404-B7E4-41C1-9BE2-461AA2F8C335 V1 EN

Figure 313: Functional module diagram

Level detector
This module compares the three-phase differential currents to the set Operate value.
If any of the differential currents ID_A, ID_B and ID_C exceeds the set Operate
value, the level detector module sends an enable signal to the timer module to start the
definite timer (DT).

630 series 599

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The timer characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Minimum
operate time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by
Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The activation of the BLOCK signal resets the timer and deactivates the START and
OPERATE outputs.

It is recommended to use the adaptive DFT preprocessing block to

provide the analog input to this function.

4.3.5.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.3.5.6 Application

MHZPDIF provides the winding short circuit and earth-fault protection for generators
and motors. The high-impedance or flux-balance principle has been used through
many years for differential protection due to the capability to manage through-faults
with a heavy current transformer (CT) saturation.

High-impedance principle
The high-impedance principle is stable for all types of faults outside the protection
zone. The stabilization is obtained by a stabilizing resistor in the differential circuit.
This method requires all the CTs to have a similar magnetizing characteristic, same
ratio and a relatively high knee point voltage. The CTs in each phase are connected in
parallel with a relay-measuring branch. The measuring branch is a series connection
of the stabilizing resistor and the IED.

The stability of the protection is based on the use of the stabilizing resistor (Rs) and the
fact that the impedance of the CT secondary quickly decreases as the CT saturates.
The magnetization reactance of a fully saturated CT drops to zero and the impedance
is formed only by the resistance of the winding (Rin) and lead resistance (Rm).

600 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The CT saturation causes a differential current which can flow through the saturated
CT (because of the near-zero magnetizing reactance) or through the measuring
branch. The stabilizing resistor is selected so that the current in the measuring branch
is below the IED operating current during out-of-zone faults. As a result, the operation
is stable during the saturation and can still be sensitive at the undistorted parts of the
current waveform.

GUID-C9F29BF5-BFE3-4EB8-B7AA-025B4D72CE98 V1 EN

Figure 314: Three-phase differential protection for generators and motors based
on high-impedance principle

In case of an internal fault, the fault current cannot circulate through the CTs. It flows
through the measuring branch, and the protection operates. A partial CT saturation can
occur in case of an internal fault, but the undistorted part of the current waveform
causes the protection to operate.

630 series 601

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-AB182BA0-40A2-435F-85ED-9629D5F49955 V1 EN

Figure 315: Secondary waveform of a saturated CT

At an internal fault, the secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation
voltage of the CTs, connection wires and the IED. To limit this voltage, a voltage-
dependent resistor (VDR) is used.

The whole scheme, that is, the stabilizing resistor, voltage-dependent resistor and
wiring, must be adequately maintained (operation and insulation tested regularly) to
be able to withstand the high-voltage pulses that appear during an internal fault
throughout the lifetime of the equipment. Otherwise, during a fault within the zone of
protection, any flashover in the CT secondary circuits or any other part of the scheme
can prevent the correct operation of MHZPDIF.

Flux-balancing principle
In a measuring configuration for the three-phase differential currents according to the
flux-balancing principle, no stabilizing resistors are needed. The configuration,
however, requires the use of core balance current transformers. The compared
currents, the one at the line end and the other at the neutral end, are both measured by
the same core balance current transformer.

In this scheme, the currents flowing through one core balance transformer cancel each
other out when there is no fault within the protected zone. When a fault occurs within
the protected zone, the currents flowing through the core balance transformer amplify
each other and the differential protection operates.

602 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-A4DDB734-AC8E-4124-9B70-5A501ED80EC6 V1 EN

Figure 316: Three-phase differential protection for generators and motors based
on flux-balancing principle

The advantage of this scheme is that the CT rated primary current can be selected
smaller than the rated current of the machine.

If six current transformers are used, the flux-balancing principle (that

is, summing two CTs in each phase) cannot be used. Instead, the high-
impedance principle or stabilized three-phase differential protection
must be used.

4.3.5.7 Recommendations for current transformers

High-impedance principle
The sensitivity and reliability of the protection depend on the characteristics of the
current transformers. The CTs must have an identical transformation ratio. It is
recommended that all current transformers have an equal burden and characteristics
and that they are of the same type, preferably from the same manufacturing batch, that
is, an identical construction used. If the CT characteristics and the burden values are
not equal, the calculation for each branch in the scheme should be done separately and
the worst-case result is used. In the case where the CT winding resistance and the
burden of the branches are not equal, the maximum burden equal to 3.2 Ω should be
used for calculating the stabilized voltage.

630 series 603

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-575B946F-B88E-40B1-9307-950BFE94B3B0 V1 EN

Figure 317: High-impedance differential protection with different CT burden value

on each branch

First, the stabilizing voltage, that is, the voltage appearing across the measuring
branch during an out-of-zone fault, is calculated assuming that one of the CTs
connected in parallel is fully saturated. The stabilizing voltage can be calculated using
the formula:
I kmax
US = ( Rin + Rm )
n
GUID-42B37DB8-C02D-4FE2-942E-64B2F07E79AB V1 EN (Equation 109)

Ikmax The highest through-fault current in primary amps. The highest earth fault or short circuit current
during out-of-zone fault.
n Turns ratio of the CT
Rin Secondary winding resistance of CT in ohms

Rm Resistance (maximum of Rin + Rm) of the CT secondary circuit in ohms

The current transformers must be able to force enough current to operate the IED
through the differential circuit during a fault condition inside the protection zone. To
ensure this, the knee point voltage Ukn should be at least twice higher than the
stabilizing voltage Us.

The required knee point voltage Ukn of the current transformer is calculated using the
formula:

604 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

U kn ≥ 2 × U S
GUID-D4379003-3492-4C28-8285-3FF3EB0942A9 V1 EN (Equation 110)

Ukn Knee point voltage

Us Stabilizing voltage

The factor two is used when no delay in the operating time of the protection in any
situation is acceptable. It is advisable to use the current transformers whose secondary
winding resistance is of the same size as the resistance of the measuring loop to
prevent the knee point voltage from growing too high.

As the impedance of the IED is low, a stabilizing resistor is needed. The value of the
stabilizing resistor is calculated using the formula:
US
RS =
I rs
GUID-F56F36B1-C353-4B94-B99D-1C930B842920 V1 EN (Equation 111)

RS Resistance of the stabilizing resistor

US Stabilizing voltage of the IED

Irs Value of the Operate value setting in secondary amps

The stabilizing resistor should be capable of dissipating high energy within a very
short time. Therefore, a wire-wound-type resistor should be used. The rated power
should be in class of a few tens of watts in minimum because of the possible CT
inaccuracy, which might cause some current through the stabilizing resistor in a
normal load situation.

If Ukn is high or the stabilizing voltage is low, a resistor with a higher power rating is
needed. Often the resistor manufacturers allow 10 times rated power for five seconds.
Thus the power of the resistor can be calculated from the equation:
2
U kn
Rs × 10
GUID-2A68A3E9-C55F-4478-995E-7888F1A37002 V1 EN (Equation 112)

The actual sensitivity of the protection is affected by the IED setting, the magnetizing
currents of the CTs connected in parallel and the shunting effect of the voltage-
dependent resistor. The value of the primary current Iprim at which the IED operates at
a certain setting can be calculated using the formula:

630 series 605

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

I prim = n × ( I rs + Iu + m × I m )
GUID-64075260-CB30-4CD4-A88F-BC4530F21968 V1 EN (Equation 113)

Im Magnetizing current per current transformer at the Us voltage

Iprim Primary current level at which the protection is to start

Irs Value of the Operate value setting

Iu Leakage current through VDR at the Us voltage

n turn ratio of the current transformer

m number of current transformers included in the protection per phase (=2)

The Ie value given in many catalogs is the excitation current at the knee point voltage.

Assuming UKN ≈ 2 × Us, the value of Im ≈ Ie/2 gives an approximate value for Equation
113.

The selection of the current transformers is based on the following procedures:

1. The rated current In of the protected machine should be known. The value of In
also affects how high Ikmax is. Normally the Ikmax value for generators and motors
is 6 × In.
2. The rated primary current I1n of the CT has to be higher than the rated current of
the machine. The choice of the CT also specifies Rin.
3. The required Ukn is calculated using Equation 110. If Ukn of the CT is not high
enough, another CT has to be chosen. The value of Ukn is given by the
manufacturer in the case of the Class X current transformer or it can be estimated
using Equation 114.
4. The sensitivity Iprim is calculated using Equation 113. If the achieved sensitivity
is sufficient, the present CT is chosen. A CT with a bigger core is chosen if a better
sensitivity is needed.

If a CT other than Class X CTs is used, an estimate for Ukn is calculated using:

Sn
U kn = 0.8 × Fn × I 2n × ( Rin + )
I 22n
GUID-7D424942-08A0-49E6-8905-4BAD2092AE73 V1 EN (Equation 114)

Fn Rated accuracy limit factor corresponding to the rated burden Sn

I2n Rated secondary current of the current transformer

Rin Secondary internal resistance of the CT

Sn Volt-amp rating of the CT

The formulas are based on choosing the CTs according to Equation

110, which results in an absolute stable scheme. In some cases, it is

606 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

possible to achieve stability with the knee point voltages lower than
the voltage stated in the formulas. However, the network conditions
have to be known well enough to ensure the stability.
• If Uk >= 2 × Us, the fast IED operation is secure.
• If Uk >= 1.5 × Us and < 2 × Us, the IED operation can be slightly
prolonged and it should be studied case by case.
• If Uk <1.5 × Us, the IED operation is jeopardized. Another CT has
to be chosen.

The need for a voltage-dependent resistor (VDR) depends on the insulation level for
which the IEDs are tested.

First, the voltage Umax ignoring the CT saturation during the fault is calculated as:

I kmax in I kmax in
U max = × ( Rin + Rm + Rs ) ≈ × Rs
n n
GUID-774FDBB5-408A-4EAB-8E1A-600D0A68BD07 V1 EN (Equation 115)

Ikmax in Maximum fault current inside the zone in primary amps

n Turns ratio of CT
Rin Internal resistance of CT in ohms

Rm Resistance of the longest loop of the CT secondary circuit in ohms

Rs Resistance of the stabilized resistor in ohms

Next the peak voltage û, which includes the CT saturation, is estimated using the
formula given by P.Mathews in 1955.
∧
u = 2 2U kn (U max − U kn )
GUID-A51971B7-BA7A-4C5D-AC86-FFC1B674FE18 V1 EN (Equation 116)

Ukn Knee point voltage of CT

The VDR is recommended when the peak voltage û ≥ 2 kV (it is the insulation level
for which the IEDs are tested).

For example, the maximum fault current in case of fault inside the zone is 12.6 kA in
primary, CT is of 1250/5 A (that is, ratio n = 240) and knee point voltage is 81 V.
Stabilizing resistor is 330 Ω.

12600 A
U max = × 330 Ω = 17325 V
240
GUID-D5C1796B-342C-4A77-B454-59B68C3B8558 V1 EN

630 series 607

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

∧
u = 2 2 × 81× (17325 − 81) ≈ 3.34 kV
GUID-FBEA5B92-671B-4EF7-9FE0-CFAA612DB59B V1 EN

As the peak voltage û is 3.2 kV, VDR must be used. Sometimes if Rs is smaller, VDR
can be avoided. But the value of Rs depends on the IED operation current and
stabilizing voltage. Thus a higher setting in the IED must be used or the stabilizing
voltage lowered.

Flux-balancing principle
When the function block is used with the flux-balancing principle, there are no extra
requirements for the measuring devices but the core balance transformers used in the
ordinary overcurrent protection are adequate here as well.

4.3.5.8 Example calculations for high-impedance differential protection

The example shows the calculation for the Operate value setting, stabilizing resistor
value (Rs) and required knee point voltage (Ukn) of the CTs.

Table 590: Protected generator values

Quantities Values
Sn 8 MVA

Un 6 kV

In 770 A

Ikmax 4620 A, (6 x In) out of zone fault

Ikmax in 9.24 kA, (12 x In) in zone fault

Table 591: Assumed CT data

Quantities Values
CT 1000/1 A
Rin 15.3 Ω

Ukn 323 V

Ie 35 mA (at Ukn)

608 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-19DB39B0-4D6F-4EE3-8F19-B797A22F8316 V1 EN

Figure 318: Example calculation for high-impedance differential protection (only

one phase is presented in detail)

The length of the secondary circuit loop is 200 m and the area of the cross-section is
2.5 mm2 (resistance at 75 °C is 0.00865 Ω/m)

Rm = 0.00865 Ω / m × 200 m ≈ 1.73 Ω

GUID-0C91267F-3989-4FA6-940F-4D77721B50A0 V1 EN

First, the stabilizing voltage is calculated based on Equation 109:

6 × 770 A
Us = (15.3 Ω + 1.73 Ω ) ≈ 78.7 V
1000
GUID-745EC85F-77A1-4BA5-9DF6-C713C028AE87 V1 EN

In this case, the requirement for the current transformer knee point voltage is fulfilled
because Ukn > 2Us.

The magnetizing curve of the CT is assumed to be linear. The magnetizing current at

the stabilizing voltage can be estimated:

Us
Im = × Ie
U kn
GUID-89021103-B75B-4469-8F94-6BFCF22E4B2C V1 EN

78.7 V
Im = × 35 mA ≈ 8.5 mA
323 V
GUID-491DEB8A-FFFD-452E-9E1C-51F71CD2122A V1 EN

630 series 609

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The setting current Irs should be at the minimum of the sum of the magnetizing
currents of all the connected CTs to obtain adequate protection stability.

I rs = 2 × 8.5 mA ≈ 17 mA
GUID-36EDA686-1C70-4ED6-9101-B789DF25D41A V1 EN

The resistance of the stabilizing resistor is calculated based on Equation 111.

78.7 V
RS = ≈ 4629 Ω
0.017 A
GUID-FE3950D9-8DCD-4826-B00A-5260FF86E105 V1 EN

The calculated value 4629 Ω is the maximum value for the stabilizing resistor. If this
value is not available, the next available value downwards should be chosen and the
IED setting current is to be tuned according to the selected resistor. For example, the
resistance value 3900 Ω is used in this case.

78.7 V
I rs = ≈ 20 mA
3900 Ω
GUID-748E772E-1AF6-44B4-A83A-5F013186AC4B V1 EN

The sensitivity of the protection is obtained as per Equation 112, assuming Iu to be

zero;

I prim = 1000 × (0.020 A + 2 × 0.0085 A + 0 A) ≈ 37 A

GUID-91ECE858-3738-47A7-B026-294F1422542A V1 EN

The power of the stabilizing resistor is calculated as:

(323V ) 2
P≥ ≈ 27 W
3900 Ω
GUID-45E53EAB-5A26-4F30-BDF9-FC68F48C301F V1 EN

Based on Equation 114 and Equation 115, the need for a voltage-dependent resistor is
checked.

12 × 770 A
U max = (3900 Ω + 15.3Ω + 1.73 Ω + 0.10 Ω) ≈ 36.2 kV
1000
GUID-816E7C20-DDD5-4FAA-85AF-A70A59BE5ADF V1 EN

u˘ = 2 2 × 323V × (36200 V − 323V ) ≈ 9.6 kV

GUID-A76CF2FC-4F8B-4E74-9AE0-BBCB4F7F7446 V1 EN

The voltage-dependent resistor (one for each phase) is needed in this case because the
voltage during the fault is much higher than 2 kV.

The leakage current through the varistor at the stabilizing voltage can be available
from the varistor manual, assuming that to be approximately 2 mA at the stabilizing
voltage.

Iu ≈ 0.002 A
GUID-60950B16-2C98-4137-A2B7-962BAC5921D6 V1 EN

610 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The sensitivity of the protection can be recalculated taking into account the leakage
current through the varistor as per Equation 112.

I prim = 1000 × (0.020 A + 2 × 0.0085 A + 0.002 A) ≈ 39 A

GUID-5B1557F6-D7F3-4422-B74D-8728BDD5BAE1 V1 EN

4.3.5.9 Signals
Table 592: MHZPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P_D GROUP - Three phase group signal for differential current
SIGNAL inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs

Table 593: MHZPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operated phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operated phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operated phase C
START BOOLEAN Started
ST_A BOOLEAN Started phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Started phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Started phase C

4.3.5.10 Settings
Table 594: MHZPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operate value 0.5 - 50.0 % 0.1 0.5 Operate value, percentage of the nominal
current
Minimum operate time 0.02 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.02 Minimum operate time

Table 595: MHZPDIF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

630 series 611

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 596: MHZPDIF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Reset delay time

4.3.5.11 Measured values

Table 597: MHZPDIF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs

4.3.5.12 Monitored data

Table 598: MHZPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase A
1=TRUE
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase B
1=TRUE
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated phase C
1=TRUE
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase A
1=TRUE
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase B
1=TRUE
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started phase C
1=TRUE
ID_A REAL - A Analog output value
phase A
ID_B REAL - A Analog output value
phase B
ID_C REAL - A Analog output value
phase C
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

612 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.5.13 Technical data

Table 599: MHZPDIF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy ±1.5% of the set value or 0.002 × In

Start time 1)2) Typically 15 ms (±10 ms)

Reset time <65 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <50 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms

1) Fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.4 Unbalance protection

4.4.1 Negative sequence current protection NSPTOC

4.4.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative sequence current protection NSPTOC I2> 46

4.4.1.2 Function block

GUID-97DA5E96-A45D-4CEA-B1E7-B6BB62E0C4F1 V1 EN

Figure 319: Function block

4.4.1.3 Functionality

The negative-sequence current protection NSPTOC is used for increasing sensitivity

to detect single-phase and phase-to-phase faults or unbalanced loads due to, for
example, broken conductors or unsymmetrical feeder voltages.

NSPTOC can also be used for detecting broken conductors.

630 series 613

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The function is based on the measurement of the negative sequence current. In a fault
situation, the function starts when the negative sequence current exceeds the set limit.
The operate time characteristics can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). In the DT mode, the function operates after
a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears. The IDMT
mode provides current-dependent timer characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.4.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the negative sequence current protection can be described using a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-27733093-7ECF-48D3-BCB5-88FF47FC40E3 V1 EN

Figure 320: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector
The measured negative-sequence current is compared to the set Start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector activates the timer
module. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the set Start value is multiplied by the set
Start value Mult.

The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting if
the product of the settings exceeds the Start value setting range.

Do not set the multiplier setting Start value Mult higher than
necessary. If the value is too high, the function may not operate at all
during an inrush followed by a fault, no matter how severe the fault is.

614 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The ST_A, ST_B and ST_C
outputs are used to indicate which phases are started. Depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT.
When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode
or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is
activated. The OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C outputs are used to indicate which phases
are operated.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B,
Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate
delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the timer in
the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type, Type of reset
curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, the reset
timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When the IDMT curves are
selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or
"Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the
reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time
setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current
during the drop-off situation. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer
has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the
drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but always
at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For more
information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section
in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input

630 series 615

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.4.1.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.4.1.6 Application

Since the negative sequence current quantities are not present during normal, balanced
load conditions, the negative sequence overcurrent protection elements can be set for
faster and more sensitive operation than the normal phase-overcurrent protection for
fault conditions occurring between two phases. The negative sequence overcurrent
protection also provides a back-up protection functionality for the feeder earth-fault
protection in solid and low resistance earthed networks.

The negative sequence overcurrent protection provides the back-up earth-fault

protection on the high voltage side of a delta-wye connected power transformer for
earth faults taking place on the wye-connected low voltage side. If an earth fault
occurs on the wye-connected side of the power transformer, negative sequence current
quantities appear on the delta-connected side of the power transformer.

Multiple time curves and time multiplier settings are also available for coordinating
with other devices in the system.

4.4.1.7 Signals
Table 600: NSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operate outputs.
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Blocks start outputs.
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer counts.
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 Enables current multiplier.

Table 601: NSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate Signal
START BOOLEAN Start Signal

616 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.4.1.8 Settings
Table 602: NSPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.01 - 5.00 pu 0.01 0.30 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier/ Time Dial in IEC/ANSI
curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Operate delay time 0.04 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.04 Operate Delay Time

Table 603: NSPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset
Minimum operate time 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

Table 604: NSPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 605: NSPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Table continues on next page

630 series 617

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

4.4.1.9 Measured values

Table 606: NSPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.01 - 5.00 pu 0.01 0.30 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier/ Time Dial in IEC/ANSI
curves
Operating curve type ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
Operate delay time 0.04 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.04 Operate Delay Time

Table 607: NSPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Inverse reset
Minimum operate time 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves

Table 608: NSPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

618 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 609: NSPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Curve parameter A 0.0086 - 120.0000 - 0.0001 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000 - 0.7120 - 0.0001 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.46 - 30.00 - 0.01 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

4.4.1.10 Monitored data

Table 610: NSPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate Signal
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start Signal
1=TRUE
START_DUR REAL - % Start Duration
INVAL_CRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Invalid curve parameters
1=TRUE

4.4.1.11 Technical data

Table 611: NSPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Start time 1)2) IFault = 2 × set Start Typically 23 ms (±15 ms)

value Typically 16 ms (±15 ms)
IFault = 10 × set Start
value
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Table continues on next page

630 series 619

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Operate curve type = IEC definite time, negative sequence current before fault = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 × In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5 to 20

4.4.1.12 Technical revision history

Table 612: NSPTOC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting

4.4.2 Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC

4.4.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC I2/I1> 46PD

4.4.2.2 Function block

A070685 V2 EN

Figure 321: Function block

4.4.2.3 Functionality

The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC is used for detecting unbalance

situations caused by broken conductors.

The function starts and operates when the unbalance current I2/I1 exceeds the set limit.
To prevent faulty operation at least one phase current needs to be above the minimum
level. PDNSPTOC operates with DT characteristic.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

output, timer or the function itself, if desired.

620 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.4.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of phase discontinuity protection can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-A492307B-54B7-4CAF-A7E7-E660FC4769DA V1 EN

Figure 322: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

I2/I1
The I2/I1 module calculates the ratio of the negative and positive sequence current. It
reports the calculated value to the level detector.

Level detector
The level detector compares the calculated ratio of the negative- and positive-
sequence currents to the set Start value. If the calculated value exceeds the set Start
value and the min current check module has exceeded the value of Min phase current,
the level detector reports the exceeding of the value to the timer.

Min current check

The min current check module checks whether the measured phase currents are above
the set Min phase current. At least one of the phase currents needs to be above the set
limit to enable the level detector module.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset
delay time, the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

630 series 621

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.4.2.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.4.2.6 Application

In three-phase distribution and subtransmission network applications the phase

discontinuity in one phase can cause increase of zero sequence voltage and short
overvoltage peaks and also oscillation in the corresponding phase.

PDNSPTOC is a three-phase protection with DT characteristic, designed for detecting

broken conductors in distribution and subtransmission networks. The function is
applicable for both overhead lines and underground cables.

The operation of PDNSPTOC is based on the ratio of positive and negative sequence
currents. This gives better sensitivity and stability compared to plain negative
sequence current protection since the calculated ratio of positive and negative
sequence currents is relatively constant during load variations.

The unbalance of the network is detected by monitoring the negative and positive
sequence current ratio, where the negative sequence current value is I2 and I1 is the
positive sequence current value. The unbalance is calculated:
I2
Iratio =
I1
A070702 V2 EN (Equation 117)

Broken conductor fault situation can occur in phase A in a feeder.

622 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

IECA070699 V2 EN

Figure 323: Broken conductor fault situation in phase A in a distribution or

subtransmission feeder

IECA070698 V1 EN

Figure 324: Three-phase current quantities during the broken conductor fault in
phase A with the ratio of negative and positive sequence currents

4.4.2.7 Signals
Table 613: PDNSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers.
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate outputs.
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate time counts

630 series 623

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 614: PDNSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Phase discontinuity protection operated.
START BOOLEAN Phase discontinuity protection started

4.4.2.8 Settings
Table 615: PDNSPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 10 - 100 % 1 20 Current ratio setting I2 / I1
Operate delay time 0.100 - 30.000 s 0.001 0.100 Operate time delay

Table 616: PDNSPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 617: PDNSPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay
Min phase current 0.05 - 0.30 pu 0.01 0.10 Minimum phase current

4.4.2.9 Measured values

Table 618: PDNSPTOC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Current value of phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Current value of phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Current value of phase C
I1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive phase sequence current value
I2_AMPL REAL 0.0 Negative phase sequence current value
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers.
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate outputs.
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate time counts

624 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.4.2.10 Monitored data

Table 619: PDNSPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Phase discontinuity
1=TRUE protection operated.
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Phase discontinuity
1=TRUE protection started
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time
RATIO_I2_I1 REAL - % Measured current ratio
I2 / I1

4.4.2.11 Technical data

Table 620: PDNSPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±2% of the set value

Start time Typically 15 ms
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

4.4.2.12 Technical revision history

Table 621: PDNSPTOC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Internal improvements

4.4.3 Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC

4.4.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC I2>> 46R

630 series 625

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.4.3.2 Function block

GUID-7580B052-365E-40D4-B3E3-6F4C1993CF67 V2 EN

Figure 325: Function block

4.4.3.3 Functionality

The phase-reversal protection PREVPTOC is used to detect the reversed connection

of the phases to a three-phase motor by monitoring the negative phase-sequence
current I2 of the motor.

PREVPTOC starts and operates when I2 exceeds the set limit. PREVPTOC operates
on definite time (DT) characteristics. PREVPTOC is based on the calculated I2, and
the function detects too high I2 values during the motor startup. The excessive I2
values are caused by incorrectly connected phases, which in turn makes the motor
rotate in the opposite direction.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.4.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the phase reversal protection can be described with a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-9262A00B-39E7-4690-AE02-5927BF7DFA00 V1 EN

Figure 326: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector
The level detector compares the negative-sequence current to the set Start value. If the
I2 value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the
timer module.

626 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. When the operation timer has
reached the set Operate delay time value, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault
disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer
reaches the value of 200 ms, the operation timer resets and the START output is
deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The activation of the BLOCK signal resets the timer and deactivates the START and
OPERATE outputs. It is possible to block individual START and OPERATE outputs by
the activation of the BLK_ST and BLK_OPR inputs respectively.

4.4.3.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.4.3.6 Application

The rotation of a motor in the reverse direction is not a desirable operating condition.
When the motor drives fans and pumps, for example, and the rotation direction is
reversed due to a wrong phase sequence, the driven process can be disturbed and the
flow of the cooling air of the motor can become reversed too. With a motor designed
only for a particular rotation direction, the reversed rotation direction can lead to an
inefficient cooling of the motor due to the fan design.

In a motor, the value of the negative sequence component of the phase currents is very
negligible when compared to the positive-sequence component of the current during
a healthy operating condition of the motor. But when the motor is started with the
phase connections in the reverse order, the magnitude of I2 is very high. So whenever
the value of I2 exceeds the start value, the function detects the reverse rotation
direction and provides an operate signal that disconnects the motor from the supply.

630 series 627

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.4.3.7 Signals
Table 622: PREVPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output

Table 623: PREVPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated signal
START BOOLEAN Started signal

4.4.3.8 Settings
Table 624: PREVPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.75 Start value
Operate delay time 0.100 - 30.000 s 0.001 0.100 Operate delay time

Table 625: PREVPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

Table 626: PREVPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3

4.4.3.9 Measured Values

Table 627: PREVPTOC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I2_AMPL REAL 0.0 Negative phase sequence current value
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output

628 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.4.3.10 Monitored data

Table 628: PREVPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated signal
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started signal
1=TRUE
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in
percentage of the total
operating time

4.4.3.11 Technical data

Table 629: PREVPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Start time1)2) IFault = 2.0 × set Start Typically 25 ms (±15 ms)

value
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Negative-sequence current before = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.4.4 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for machines

MNSPTOC

4.4.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative-sequence overcurrent MNSPTOC I2>G/M 46G/46M
protection for machines

630 series 629

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.4.4.2 Function block

GUID-FF704D53-EE79-4285-B87F-413FBE54659F V1 EN

Figure 327: Function block

4.4.4.3 Functionality

The negative-sequence overcurrent protection for machines function MNSPTOC

protects electric motors from phase unbalance. A small voltage unbalance can
produce a large negative-sequence current flow in the motor. For example, a 5 percent
voltage unbalance produces a stator negative-sequence current of 30 percent of the
full load current, which can severely heat the motor. MNSPTOC detects the large
negative-sequence current and disconnects the motor.

4.4.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of unbalance protection based on negative sequence current can be

described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in
the next sections.

GUID-F2FE853C-A48C-4395-B9F1-4F30AF5FD103 V1 EN

Figure 328: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The calculated negative-sequence current is compared to the Start value setting. If the
measured value exceeds the Start value setting, the function activates the timer
module.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of the
set Operating curve type, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When
the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT mode

630 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is
activated.

In a drop-off situation, that is, when the value of the negative-sequence current drops
below the Start value setting, the reset timer is activated and the START output resets
after the time delay of Reset delay time for the DT characteristics. For IDMT, the reset
time depends on the curve type selected.

For the IDMT curves, it is possible to define minimum and maximum operate times
with the Minimum operate time and Maximum operate time settings. The Machine
time Mult setting parameter corresponds to the machine constant, equal to the I22t
constant of the machine, as stated by the machine manufacturer.

The activation of the OPERATE output activates the BLK_RESTART output. The
deactivation of the OPERATE output activates the cooling timer. The timer is set to the
value entered in the Cooling time setting. The BLK_RESTART output is kept active
until the cooling timer is exceeded. If the negative-sequence current increases above
the set value during this period, the OPERATE output is activated immediately.

The operation timer counting can be frozen to the prevailing value by activating the
FR_TIMER input.

The T_ENARESTART output indicates the duration for which the BLK_RESTART
output remains active, that is, it indicates the remaining time of the cooling timer. The
value is available in the monitored data view.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The BLOCK binary input can be used for blocking the function. Activating the BLOCK
input deactivates all the binary outputs and resets the internal timers. It is possible to
block individual START and OPERATE outputs with the activation of the BLK_ST
and BLK_OPR inputs.

4.4.4.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.4.4.6 Timer characteristics

MNSPTOC supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The DT timer characteristics

can be selected with "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time" in the Operating curve
type setting. The functionality is identical in both cases. When the DT characteristics

630 series 631

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

are selected, the functionality is only affected by the Operate delay time and Reset
delay time settings.

The IED provides two user-programmable IDMT characteristics curves, "Inv. curve
A" and "Inv. curve B".

Current-based inverse definite minimum time curve (IDMT)

In inverse-time modes, the operate time depends on the momentary value of the
current: the higher the current, the shorter the operate time. The operate time
calculation or integration starts immediately when the current exceeds the set Start
value and the START output is activated.

The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of the
integrator calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the inverse
time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values
used.

The Minimum operate time and Maximum operate time settings define the minimum
operate time and maximum operate time possible for the IDMT mode. For setting
these parameters, a careful study of the particular IDMT curves is recommended.

Inv. curve A
The inverse time equation for curve type A is:

k
t[ s ] = 2
 I2 
 
 Ir 
GUID-C17AF789-778A-40D4-B001-C0D57A1822FB V2 EN (Equation 118)

t[s] Operate time in seconds

k Set Machine time Mult
I2 Negative-sequence current

Ir Set Rated current

If the negative-sequence current drops below the Start value setting, the reset time is
defined as:

 b 
t [ s] = a ×  
 100 
GUID-8BE4B6AC-FB61-4D30-B77B-3E599D5BAE81 V1 EN (Equation 119)

t[s] Reset time in seconds

a set Cooling time
b percentage of start time elapse (START_DUR)

632 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

When the reset period is initiated, the time for which START has been active is saved.
Now, if the fault reoccurs, that is, the negative-sequence current rises above the set
value during the reset period, the operate calculations are continued using the saved
values. However, if the reset period elapses without a fault being detected, the operate
timer is reset and the saved values of start time and integration are cleared.

Inv. curve B
The inverse time equation for curve type B is:

k
t[ s ] = 2 2
 I2   IS 
  − 
 Ir   Ir 
GUID-572198A3-2386-4A6B-A67B-F1E81CDDA90C V3 EN (Equation 120)

t[s] Operate time in seconds

k Machine time Mult
I2 Negative-sequence current

IS Set Start value

Ir Set Rated current

If the fault disappears, the negative-sequence current drops below the Start value
setting and the START output is deactivated. However, the function does not reset
instantaneously, but instead it depends on the equation or the Cooling time setting.

The timer can be reset in two ways:

• With a drop in the negative-sequence current below start value, the subtraction in
the denominator becomes negative and the cumulative sum starts to decrease.
The decrease in the sum indicates the cooling of the machine and the cooling
speed depends on the value of the negative-sequence current. If the sum reaches
zero without a fault being detected, the accumulation stops and the timer is reset.
• If the reset time set through the Cooling time setting elapses without a fault being
detected, the timer is reset.

The reset period thus continues for a time equal to the Cooling time setting or until the
operate time decreases to zero, whichever is less.

4.4.4.7 Application

In a three-phase motor, the conditions that can lead to unbalance are single phasing,
voltage unbalance from the supply and single-phase fault. The negative sequence
current damages the motor during the unbalanced voltage condition, and therefore the
negative sequence current is monitored to check the unbalance condition.

630 series 633

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

When the voltages supplied to an operating motor become unbalanced, the positive-
sequence current remains substantially unchanged, but the negative-sequence current
flows due to the unbalance. For example, if the unbalance is caused by an open circuit
in any phase, a negative-sequence current flows and it is equal and opposite to the
previous load current in a healthy phase. The combination of positive and negative-
sequence currents produces phase currents approximately 1.7 times the previous load
in each healthy phase and zero current in the open phase.

The negative-sequence currents flow through the stator windings inducing negative-
sequence voltage in the rotor windings. This can result in a high rotor current that
damages the rotor winding. The frequency of the induced current is approximately
twice the supply frequency. Due to skin effect, the induced current with a frequency
double the supply frequency encounters high rotor resistance which leads to excessive
heating even with phase currents with value less than the rated current of the motor.

The negative-sequence impedance of induction or a synchronous motor is

approximately equal to the locked rotor impedance, which is approximately one-sixth
of the normal motor impedance, considering that the motor has a locked-rotor current
of six times the rated current. Therefore, even a three percent voltage unbalance can
lead to 18 percent stator negative sequence current in windings. The severity of this is
indicated by a 30-40 percent increase in the motor temperature due to the extra current.

4.4.4.8 Signals
Table 630: MNSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the binary output signals of the function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers

Table 631: MNSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Signal for blocking reconnection of an overheated
machine

634 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.4.4.9 Settings
Table 632: MNSPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.01 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.20 Start value of negative-sequence current
Operating curve type ANSI Def. Time - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
IEC Def. Time
Inv. Curve A
Inv. Curve B
Machine time Mult 5.0 - 100.0 - 0.1 5.0 Machine time multiplier
Operate delay time 0.10 - 120.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time in definite-time mode
Maximum operate time 500 - 7200 s 1 1000 Max operate time regardless of the
inverse characteristic
Minimum operate time 0.10 - 120.00 s 0.01 0.10 Definite minimum operate time
Cooling time 5 - 7200 s 1 50 Time required to cool the machine

Table 633: MNSPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 634: MNSPTOC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Resetting time of the operate time counter
in DT mode

4.4.4.10 Measured values

Table 635: MNSPTOC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I2_AMPL REAL 0.0 Negative phase sequence current value
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the binary output signals of the function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timers

630 series 635

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.4.4.11 Monitored data

Table 636: MNSPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal for blocking
1=TRUE reconnection of an
overheated machine
T_ENARESTART INTEGER - s Estimated time to reset of
block restart
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

4.4.4.12 Technical data

Table 637: MNSPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Start time1)2) IFault = 5.0 × set Start Typically 43 ms (±15 ms)

value
Reset time <70 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±35 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±30 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Negative-sequence current before = 0.0 × In, fn = 50 Hz

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Start value multiples in range of 1.10...5.00

4.4.4.13 Technical revision history

Table 638: MNSPTOC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Correction in IEC 61850 mapping
C Change in the function IEC 60617 and ANSI
symbol
D Change in the function description available in
PCM600

636 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5 Voltage protection

4.5.1 Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV

4.5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 3U> 59

4.5.1.2 Function block

A070749 V1 EN

Figure 329: Function block

4.5.1.3 Functionality

The three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV is applied on power system

elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines, to protect the
system from excessive voltages that could damage the insulation and cause insulation
breakdown. The three-phase overvoltage function includes a settable value for the
detection of overvoltage either in a single phase, two phases or three phases.

Correspondingly, the function gives an operate signal in the respective phases.

PHPTOV includes both definite time (DT) and inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT) characteristics for the delay of the trip.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the three-phase overvoltage protection can be described using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 637

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-F524F580-1383-4EC3-B338-AAB702025E97 V1 EN

Figure 330: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The fundamental frequency component of the measured three phase voltages are
compared phase-wise to the set value of the Start value setting. If the measured value
is higher than the set value of the Start value setting, the level detector enables the
phase selection logic module. The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for
preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly varies above/below the
Start value setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition has to be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area.

The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase

voltages for protection.

For the voltage IDMT operation mode, the used IDMT curve equations contain
discontinuity characteristics (denominator in the equation becomes zero with a certain
value of the measured voltage). The Curve Sat relative setting is used to compensate
for an undesired operation.

For a more detailed description of the IDMT curves and the use of the
Curve Sat Relative setting, see the General function block features
section in this manual.

U_MAX gives the maximum value of the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltages,

and U_RATIO is the ratio between U_MAX and the Start value setting. The values are
available in the monitored data view.

Phase selection logic

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects
the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected. If the number of faulty phases
matches the set Num of start phases, the phase selection logic activates the timer.

638 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output and the corresponding output of
the respective phases (ST A, ST B, ST C). Depending on the value of the set Operating
curve type, the time characteristics are selected according to DT or IDMT. PHPTOV
supports the following IDMT operating curve types:
• (5) ANSI Def. Time
• (15) IEC Def. Time
• (17) Inv. Curve A
• (18) Inv. Curve B
• (19) Inv. Curve C
• (20) Programmable.

For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves, see the General
function block features section in this manual.

When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT
mode or the maximum value set by the IDMT operate time curve, the OPERATE
output is activated. The corresponding output for the respective phases (OPR A, OPR
B, OPR C) is also activated.

When the user programmable IDMT operate time curve is selected, the operate time
characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B,
Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operation
delay is exceeded, the reset state is activated. The behavior in the drop-off situation
depends on the selected operation time characteristics. If the DT characteristics are
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. If the
drop-off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time, the timer is reset and the START
output is deactivated.

When the IDMT operation time curve is selected, the functionality of the timer in the
drop-off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve, Type of time reset
and Reset delay time settings.

630 series 639

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 639: Reset time functionality when IDMT operation time curve selected

Reset functionality Value/effect of settings

"Type of reset Type of time reset Reset delay time
curve"
Instantaneous Operation timer is “Immediate” Setting has no Setting has no
reset reset effect effect
instantaneously
when drop-off
occurs
Frozen timer Operation timer is “Def time reset” “Freeze Op Defines the
frozen during Timer” freezing time for
drop-off operation timer
during drop-off.
After the set
delay, the operate
timer is reset.
Linear decrease Operation timer “Def time reset” “Decr. Op timer” Operation timer is
value linearly reset after the set
decreases during value is
the drop-off exceeded.
situation

640 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Example

GUID-504A5E09-8D82-4B57-9B3A-2BAE7F84FC0D V2 EN

Figure 331: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes.

The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operating times.

The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time for IDMT. The
setting is only applicable when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with care because
the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least
the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For more information,
see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section in this manual.

630 series 641

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets the internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operating signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

Note that the FR_TIMER input has no effect during definite time
linearly decreasing reset.

4.5.1.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.5.1.6 Application

Overvoltage in a network occurs either due to the transient surges on the network or
due to prolonged power frequency overvoltages. Surge arresters are used to protect the
network against the transient overvoltages, but the IED protection function is used to
protect against power frequency overvoltages.

The power frequency overvoltage may occur in the network due to contingencies such
as:
• Defective operation of the automatic voltage regulator when the generator is in
isolated operation.
• Operation under manual control with the voltage regulator out of service. A
sudden variation of load, in particular the reactive power component, gives rise to
a substantial change in voltage because of the large voltage regulation inherent in
a typical alternator.
• Sudden loss of load due to the tripping of outgoing feeders, leaving the generator
isolated or feeding a very small load, can cause a sudden rise in the terminal
voltage due to the trapped field flux and overspeed.

PHPTOV is not usually applied to the attended generators but can be required for the
unattended automatic hydro-stations. If a load sensitive to overvoltages remains
connected, it leads to equipment damage.

Therefore, it is essential to provide power frequency overvoltage protection in the

form of time delayed element, either IDMT or DT.

642 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.1.7 Signals
Table 640: PHPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage magnitude in all the three phases
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the binary output signals of the function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the trip signals of the function
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the start outputs of the function
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freezes all the operate timer counts

Table 641: PHPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal, combined
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate signal, phase 1
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate signal, phase 2
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate signal, phase 3
START BOOLEAN Start signal, combined
ST_A BOOLEAN Start signal, phase 1
ST_B BOOLEAN Start signal, phase 2
ST_C BOOLEAN Start signal, phase 3

4.5.1.8 Settings
Table 642: PHPTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05 - 1.60 pu 0.01 1.10 Preset value to check for the voltage
violation
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC curves
Operating curve type ANSI Def. Time - - IEC Def. Time Selection of the type of time delay curve
IEC Def. Time
Inv. Curve A
Inv. Curve B
Inv. Curve C
Programmable
Operate delay time 0.040 - 300.000 s 0.010 0.040 Operating time delay for definite time
curve

Table 643: PHPTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Type of time reset Freeze Op timer - - Freeze Op timer Type of time reset (1=Freeze Op timer, 2=
Decr. Op timer Decrease Op timer)

630 series 643

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 644: PHPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
Voltage selection phase-to-earth - - phase-to-phase Parameter to select phase or phase-to-
phase-to-phase phase voltages
Num of start phases 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2 out of 3 activation
3 out of 3

Table 645: PHPTOV Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Relative hysteresis 1.0 - 5.0 % 0.1 4.0 Relative Hysteresis to compensate for
oscillations
Curve Sat Relative 0.0 - 10.0 % 0.1 2.0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve
discontinuities
Curve parameter A 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Delay time provided to reset the timers
Minimum operate time 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time delay for IDMT
curves

4.5.1.9 Measured values

Table 646: PHPTOV Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U_AMPL_A REAL 0.000 Phase to ground voltage phase A
U_AMPL_B REAL 0.000 Phase to ground voltage phase B
U_AMPL_C REAL 0.000 Phase to ground voltage phase C
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.000 Phase-to-phase voltage AB
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0.000 Phase-to-phase voltage BC
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0.000 Phase-to-phase voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the binary output signals of the function
Table continues on next page

644 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the trip signals of the function
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the start outputs of the function
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freezes all the operate timer counts

4.5.1.10 Monitored data

Table 647: PHPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal, phase 1
1=TRUE
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal, phase 2
1=TRUE
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal, phase 3
1=TRUE
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal, phase 1
1=TRUE
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal, phase 2
1=TRUE
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal, phase 3
1=TRUE
U_MAX REAL - V Maximum of the phase or
phase-to-phase voltages
U_RATIO REAL - - Maximum voltage ratio to
the Start value
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of Start time to
Operate time

4.5.1.11 Technical data

Table 648: PHPTOV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time1)2) UFault = 2.0 × set Start Typically 17 ms (±15 ms)

value
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Depends of the set Relative hysteresis
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Start value = 1.0 × Un, Voltage before fault = 0.9 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, overvoltage in one phase-to-phase
with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 1.20 × Un, Start value multiples in range of 1.10...2.00

630 series 645

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.1.12 Technical revision history

Table 649: PHPTOV technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting

4.5.2 Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV

4.5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV 3U< 27

4.5.2.2 Function block

GUID-2773C568-EF69-4371-9DEF-FB495E868B60 V2 EN

Figure 332: Function block

4.5.2.3 Functionality

The three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV is used to disconnect from the

network devices, for example electric motors, which are damaged when subjected to
service under low voltage conditions. PHPTUV includes a settable value for the
detection of undervoltage either in a single phase, two phases or three
phases.Correspondingly, the function gives an operate signal in the respective phases.

PHPTUV includes both definite time (DT) and inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT) characteristics for the delay of the trip.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

646 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The operation of the three-phase undervoltage protection can be described using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-324DEF92-B761-4D39-A77B-D72BED33208D V1 EN

Figure 333: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The fundamental frequency component of the measured three phase voltages are
compared phase-wise to the set value of the Start value setting. If the measured value
is lower than the set value of the Start value setting, the level detector enables the
phase selection logic module. The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for
preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly varies above/below the
Start value setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition has to be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area.

Blocking for low voltage levels is activated by default (Enable block value is set to
“Yes”). The desired blocking level can be adjusted by the Voltage block value setting.

The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase

voltages for protection.

For the voltage IDMT operation mode, the used IDMT curve equations contain
discontinuity characteristics (denominator in the equation becomes zero with a certain
value of the measured voltage). The Curve Sat relative setting is used to compensate
for an undesired operation.

For a more detailed description of the IDMT curves and the use of the
Curve Sat Relative setting, see the General function block features
section in this manual.

U_MIN gives the maximum value of the phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltages,

and U_RATIO is the ratio between U_MIN and the Start value setting. The values are
available in the monitored data view.

630 series 647

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Phase selection logic

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects
the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected. If the number of faulty phases
matches the set Num of start phases, the phase selection logic activates the timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output and the corresponding output of
the respective phases (ST A, ST B, ST C). Depending on the value of the set Operating
curve type, the time characteristics are selected according to DT or IDMT. PHPTUV
supports the following IDMT operating curve types:
• (5) ANSI Def. Time
• (15) IEC Def. Time
• (21) Inv. Curve A
• (22) Inv. Curve B
• (23) Programmable

For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves, see the General
function block features section in this manual.

When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT
mode or the maximum value set by the IDMT operate time curve, the OPERATE
output is activated. The corresponding output for the respective phases (OPR A, OPR
B, OPR C) is also activated.

When the user programmable IDMT operate time curve is selected, the operate time
characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B,
Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operation
delay is exceeded, the reset state is activated. The behavior in the drop-off situation
depends on the selected operation time characteristics. If the DT characteristics are
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. If the
drop-off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time, the timer is reset and the START
output is deactivated.

When the IDMT operation time curve is selected, the functionality of the timer in the
drop-off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve, Type of time reset
and Reset delay time settings.

648 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 650: Reset time functionality when IDMT operation time curve selected

Reset functionality Value/effect of settings

"Type of reset Type of time reset Reset delay time
curve"
Instantaneous Operation timer is “Immediate” Setting has no Setting has no
reset reset effect effect
instantaneously
when drop-off
occurs
Frozen timer Operation timer is “Def time reset” “Freeze Op Defines the
frozen during Timer” freezing time for
drop-off operation timer
during drop-off.
After the set
delay, the operate
timer is reset.
Linear decrease Operation timer “Def time reset” “Decr. Op timer” Operation timer is
value linearly reset after the set
decreases during value is
the drop-off exceeded.
situation

630 series 649

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Example

GUID-111E2F60-2BFC-4D9B-B6C3-473F7689C142 V2 EN

Figure 334: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes

The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operating times.

The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time for IDMT. The
setting is only applicable when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with care because
the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least
the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For more information,
see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

650 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets the internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operating signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

Note that the FR_TIMER input has no effect during definite time
linearly decreasing reset.

4.5.2.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.5.2.6 Application

PHPTUV is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers,

motors and power lines, to detect low voltage conditions. Low voltage conditions are
caused by abnormal operation or a fault in the power system. PHPTUV can be used in
combination with overcurrent protections. Other applications are the detection of a
no-voltage condition, for example before the energization of a high voltage line, or an
automatic breaker trip in case of a blackout. PHPTUV is also used to initiate voltage
correction measures, such as insertion of shunt capacitor banks, to compensate for a
reactive load and thereby to increase the voltage.

PHPTUV can be used to disconnect from the network devices, such as electric motors,
which are damaged when subjected to service under low voltage conditions.
PHPTUV deals with low voltage conditions at power system frequency. Low voltage
conditions can be caused by:
1. Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control
(symmetrical voltage decrease).
2. Overload (symmetrical voltage decrease).
3. Short circuits, often as phase-to-earth faults (unsymmetrical voltage decrease).

PHPTUV prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could
cause overheating and thus shorten their life time expectancy. In many cases,
PHPTUV is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in
the power system.

630 series 651

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.2.7 Signals
Table 651: PHPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage magnitude in all the three phases
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the binary output signals of the function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the trip signals of the function
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the start outputs of the function
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freezes all the operate timer counts

Table 652: PHPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal, combined
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate signal, phase 1
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate signal, phase 2
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate signal, phase 3
START BOOLEAN Start signal, combined
ST_A BOOLEAN Start signal, phase 1
ST_B BOOLEAN Start signal, phase 2
ST_C BOOLEAN Start signal, phase 3

4.5.2.8 Settings
Table 653: PHPTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.90 Preset value to check for the voltage
violation
Time multiplier 0.05 - 15.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC curves
Operating curve type ANSI Def. Time - - IEC Def. Time Selection of the type of time delay curve
IEC Def. Time
Inv. Curve A
Inv. Curve B
Programmable
Operate delay time 0.040 - 300.000 s 0.010 0.040 Operating time delay for definite time
curve

Table 654: PHPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type of reset curve Immediate - - Immediate Selection of reset curve type
Def time reset
Type of time reset Freeze Op timer - - Freeze Op timer Type of time reset (1=Freeze Op timer, 2=
Decr. Op timer Decrease Op timer)

652 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 655: PHPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
Voltage selection phase-to-earth - - phase-to-phase Parameter to select phase or phase-to-
phase-to-phase phase voltages
Phase supervision A or AB - - All Parameter for phase selection in
B or BC undervoltage protection
A&B or AB&BC
C or CA
A&C or AB&CA
B&C or BC&CA
All
Num of start phases 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2 out of 3 activation
3 out of 3

Table 656: PHPTUV Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Voltage block value 0.05 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.20 Low level blocking for undervoltage mode
Relative hysteresis 1.0 - 5.0 % 0.1 4.0 Relative Hysteresis to compensate for
oscillations
Curve Sat Relative 0.0 - 10.0 % 0.1 2.0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve
discontinuities
Curve parameter A 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter D 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter E 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Delay time provided to reset the timers
Minimum operate time 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time delay for IDMT
curves
Enable block value No - - Yes Enable internal blocking
Yes

630 series 653

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.2.9 Measured values

Table 657: PHPTUV Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U_AMPL_A REAL 0.000 Phase to ground voltage phase A
U_AMPL_B REAL 0.000 Phase to ground voltage phase B
U_AMPL_C REAL 0.000 Phase to ground voltage phase C
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.000 Phase-to-phase voltage AB
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0.000 Phase-to-phase voltage BC
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0.000 Phase-to-phase voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the binary output signals of the function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the trip signals of the function
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the start outputs of the function
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freezes all the operate timer counts

4.5.2.10 Monitored data

Table 658: PHPTUV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal, phase 1
1=TRUE
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal, phase 2
1=TRUE
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal, phase 3
1=TRUE
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal, phase 1
1=TRUE
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal, phase 2
1=TRUE
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal, phase 3
1=TRUE
U_MIN REAL - V Minimum of the phase or
phase-to-phase voltages
U_RATIO REAL - - Minimum voltage ratio to
the Start value
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of Start time to
Operate time

654 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.2.11 Technical data

Table 659: PHPTUV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time1)2) UFault = 0.9 × set Start Typically 24 ms (±15 ms)

value
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Depends of the set Relative hysteresis
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Start value = 1.0 × Un, Voltage before fault = 1.1 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, undervoltage in one phase-to-phase
with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Minimum Start value = 0.50 × Un, Start value multiples in range of 0.90...0.20

4.5.2.12 Technical revision history

Table 660: PHPTUV technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for Time
multiplier setting

4.5.3 Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV

4.5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV Uo> 59G

4.5.3.2 Function block

A070767 V2 EN

Figure 335: Function block

630 series 655

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.3.3 Functionality

The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV is used in distribution networks

where the residual overvoltage can reach non-acceptable levels in, for example, high
impedance earthing.

The function starts when the residual voltage exceeds the set limit. ROVPTOV
operates with the definite time (DT) characteristic.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of residual overvoltage protection can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A070998 V1 EN

Figure 336: Functional module diagram. Group signal U3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector
The measured or calculated residual voltage is compared with the set Start value. If the
value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector sends an enable signal to the timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset
delay time, the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

656 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.5.3.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the residual current or voltage-related
settings, for example, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3". One
of the groups to be used with the "Base value Sel Res" setting must be selected.

4.5.3.6 Application

ROVPTOV is designed to be used for earth-fault protection in isolated neutral,

resistance earthed or reactance earthed systems. In compensated networks, starting of
the function can be used to control the switching device of the neutral resistor. The
function can also be used for the back-up protection of feeders for busbar protection
when a more dedicated busbar protection would not be justified.

In compensated and isolated neutral systems, the system neutral voltage, that is, the
residual voltage, increases in case of any fault connected to earth. Depending on the
type of the fault and the fault resistance, the residual voltage reaches different values.
The highest residual voltage, equal to the phase-to-earth voltage, is achieved for a
single-phase earth fault. The residual voltage increases approximately the same
amount in the whole system and does not provide any guidance in finding the faulty
component. Therefore, this function is often used as a backup protection or as a release
signal for the feeder earth-fault protection.

The protection can also be used for the earth-fault protection of generators and motors
and for the unbalance protection of capacitor banks.

The residual voltage can be calculated internally based on the measurement of the
three-phase voltage. This voltage can also be measured by a single-phase voltage
transformer, located between a transformer star point and earth, or by using an open-
delta connection of three single-phase voltage transformers.

630 series 657

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.3.7 Signals
Table 661: ROVPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer

Table 662: ROVPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal for residual overvoltage logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal for residual overvoltage logic

4.5.3.8 Settings
Table 663: ROVPTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010 - 1.000 pu 0.001 0.030 Residual overvoltage start value
Operate delay time 0.040 - 300.000 s 0.001 0.040 Operate delay time

Table 664: ROVPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

Table 665: ROVPTOV Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

658 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.3.9 Measured values

Table 666: ROVPTOV Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U0_AMPL REAL 0.0 Residual voltage amplitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer

4.5.3.10 Monitored data

Table 667: ROVPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for
1=TRUE residual overvoltage logic
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal for residual
1=TRUE overvoltage logic
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in
percentage of the total
operating time

4.5.3.11 Technical data

Table 668: ROVPTOV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time1)2) UFault = 1.1 × set Start Typically 27 ms (± 15 ms)

value
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Residual voltage before fault = 0.0 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, residual voltage with nominal frequency injected
from random phase angle
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

630 series 659

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.4 Positive sequence overvoltage protection PSPTOV

4.5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Positive-sequence overvoltage PSPTOV U1> 47O+
protection

4.5.4.2 Function block

GUID-D4416734-B75E-4C4D-B4C3-DC6AFDC07E9B V1 EN

Figure 337: Function block

4.5.4.3 Functionality

The positive sequence overvoltage protection PSPTOV is used as an alternative to the

ordinary three-phase overvoltage protection. PSPTOV is used for supervision and for
detection of abnormal conditions, which, in combination with the other protection
functions, increase the security of the complete protection system.

The function starts when the positive sequence voltage exceeds the set limit. PSPTOV
operates on definite time (DT) characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the positive-sequence overvoltage protection can be described using

a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

660 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-27B218E8-42F4-40D3-A69D-C6960B49A9BD V1 EN

Figure 338: Functional module diagram. The U3P group signal is used for feeding
the necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector
The calculated positive-sequence voltage is compared to the set Start value setting. If
the value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector enables the timer. The Relative
hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input
signal slightly varies from the Start value setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the
start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only
return to the hysteresis area.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated if the overvoltage condition persists. If the
positive sequence voltage normalizes before the module operates, the reset timer is
activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operate timer
resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.5.4.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

630 series 661

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.4.6 Application

A sudden power loss, tap-changer regulating failures and open line ends on long lines
are abnormal conditions which cause overvoltages in a power system. PSPTOV is
applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and
power lines, to detect overvoltage conditions.

PSPTOV can be used in combination with low-current signals or a directional reactive

overpower function to identify the distribution line with an open remote end. PSPTOV
can also be used to initiate voltage correction measures like insertion of shunt reactors
or switching out capacitor banks to control the voltage.

Overvoltage faced by the power transformer can lead to an overexcitation problem.

The overexcitation occurs normally when the ratio of the voltage-to-frequency
increases much above the design value resulting into transformer operation under a
nonlinear region. Such an overvoltage situation can be faced by a transformer during
a sudden loss of load due to underfrequency load shedding. The overexcitation results
into increase in exciting current eventually resulting into heating of core and can
damage the transformer. The positive sequence overvoltage protection along with the
underfrequency protection can be used for the protection of the transformer during
overexcitation.

Some common reasons leading to positive sequence overvoltages are:

• Broken conductor falling to a crossing overhead line, transformer flash overfault
from high voltage winding to low voltage winding
• Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control
(symmetrical voltage increase)
• Low load compared to the reactive power generation (symmetrical voltage
increase)

PSPTOV prevents sensitive equipment from running overvoltage conditions causing

the equipment to overheat or stress on insulation material.

4.5.4.7 Signals
Table 669: PSPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer

662 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 670: PSPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal for Positive Sequence Overvoltage
logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal for Positive Sequence Overvoltage
logic

4.5.4.8 Settings
Table 671: PSPTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.800 - 1.600 pu 0.001 1.100 Positive Sequence overvoltage start
value
Operate delay time 0.040 - 120.000 s 0.001 0.040 Operate delay time

Table 672: PSPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

Table 673: PSPTOV Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Relative hysteresis 1.0 - 5.0 % 0.1 4.0 Relative hysteresis for operation
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

4.5.4.9 Measured values

Table 674: PSPTOV Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage amplitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer

630 series 663

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.4.10 Monitored data

Table 675: PSPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for
1=TRUE Positive Sequence
Overvoltage logic
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal for Positive
1=TRUE Sequence Overvoltage
logic
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in
percentage of the total
operating time

Table 676: PSPTOV Technical data

Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time1)2) UFault = 1.1 × set Start

value Typically 29 ms (±15 ms)
UFault = 2.0 × set Start
value Typically 24 ms (±15 ms)

Reset time <40 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Positive-sequence voltage before fault = 0.0 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, positive-sequence overvoltage of nominal
frequency injected from random phase angle
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.5.5 Negative sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV

4.5.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV U2> 47O-
protection

664 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.5.2 Function block

GUID-93CA0B64-09E7-4DCD-82A2-3680066F9C0E V1 EN

Figure 339: Function block

4.5.5.3 Functionality

The negative-sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV is used to detect negative

sequence overvoltage conditions. NSPTOV is used for the protection of machines.

The function starts when the negative sequence voltage exceeds the set limit.
NSPTOV operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the negative-sequence overvoltage protection can be described using

a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-5EAC4B47-E042-4BA5-ADC9-2408D2615123 V1 EN

Figure 340: Functional module diagram. The U3P group signal is used for feeding
the necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector
The calculated negative-sequence voltage is compared to the set Start value setting. If
the value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector enables the timer.

630 series 665

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated if the overvoltage condition persists. If the
negative-sequence voltage normalizes before the module operates, the reset timer is
activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operate timer
resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.5.5.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.5.5.6 Application

A continuous or temporary voltage unbalance can appear in the network for various
reasons. The voltage unbalance mainly occurs due to broken conductors or
asymmetrical loads and is characterized by the appearance of a negative-sequence
component of the voltage. In rotating machines, the voltage unbalance results in a
current unbalance, which heats the rotors of the machines. The rotating machines,
therefore, do not tolerate a continuous negative-sequence voltage higher than
typically 1-2 percent x Un.

The negative-sequence component current I2, drawn by an asynchronous or a

synchronous machine, is linearly proportional to the negative-sequence component
voltage U2. When U2 is P% of Un, I2 is typically about 5 x P% x In.

The negative-sequence overcurrent NSPTOC blocks are used to accomplish a

selective protection against the voltage and current unbalance for each machine
separately. Alternatively, the protection can be implemented with the NSPTOV
function, monitoring the voltage unbalance of the busbar.

If the machines have an unbalance protection of their own, the NSPTOV operation can
be applied as a backup protection or it can be used as an alarm. The latter can be

666 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

applied when it is not required to trip loads tolerating voltage unbalance better than the
rotating machines.

If there is a considerable degree of voltage unbalance in the network, the rotating

machines should not be connected to the network at all. This logic can be implemented
by inhibiting the closure of the circuit breaker if the NSPTOV operation has started.
This scheme also prevents connecting the machine to the network if the phase
sequence of the network is not correct.

An appropriate value for the setting parameter Voltage start value is approximately 3
percent of Un. A suitable value for the setting parameter Operate delay time depends
on the application. If the NSPTOV operation is used as backup protection, the operate
time should be set in accordance with the operate time of NSPTOC used as main
protection. If the NSPTOV operation is used as main protection, the operate time
should be approximately one second.

4.5.5.7 Signals
Table 677: NSPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer

Table 678: NSPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal for Negative Sequence
Overvoltage logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal for Negative Sequence Overvoltage
logic

4.5.5.8 Settings
Table 679: NSPTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010 - 1.000 pu 0.001 0.030 Negative sequence overvoltage start
value
Operate delay time 0.040 - 120.000 s 0.001 0.040 Operate delay time

630 series 667

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 680: NSPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

Table 681: NSPTOV Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

4.5.5.9 Measured values

Table 682: NSPTOV Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U2_AMPL REAL 0.0 Negative sequence voltage amplitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer

4.5.5.10 Monitored data

Table 683: NSPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for
1=TRUE Negative Sequence
Overvoltage logic
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal for Negative
1=TRUE Sequence Overvoltage
logic
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in
percentage of the total
operating time

668 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.5.11 Technical data

Table 684: NSPTOV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time1)2) UFault = 1.1 × set Start Typically 29 ms (± 15ms)

value Typically 24 ms (± 15ms)
UFault = 2.0 × set Start
value
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Negative-sequence voltage before fault = 0.0 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, negative-sequence overvoltage of

nominal frequency injected from random phase angle
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.5.6 Positive sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV

4.5.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Positive-sequence undervoltage PSPTUV U1< 47U+
protection

4.5.6.2 Function block

GUID-E756BC9C-F607-4860-B515-508567DC7764 V1 EN

Figure 341: Function block

4.5.6.3 Functionality

The positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV is used to detect positive-

sequence undervoltage conditions. PSPTUV is used for the protection of small power
generation plants. The function helps in isolating an embedded plant from a fault line
when the fault current fed by the plant is too low to start an overcurrent function but

630 series 669

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

high enough to maintain the arc. Fast isolation of all the fault current sources is
necessary for a successful autoreclosure from the network-end circuit breaker.

The function starts when the positive-sequence voltage drops below the set limit.
PSPTUV operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.6.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the positive-sequence undervoltage protection can be described

using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

GUID-CE4BEAC7-518C-43B7-9586-6957189EF018 V1 EN

Figure 342: Functional module diagram. The U3P group signal is used for feeding
the necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector
The calculated positive-sequence voltage is compared to the set Start value setting. If
the value drops below the set Start value, the level detector enables the timer. The
Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the
input signal slightly varies from the Start value setting. After leaving the hysteresis
area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal
to only return to the hysteresis area.

The level detector contains a low-level blocking functionality for cases where the
positive-sequence voltage is below the desired level. This feature is useful when
unnecessary starts and operates are wanted to avoid during, for example, an
autoreclose sequence. The low-level blocking is activated by default (Enable block
value is set to “Enabled”) and the blocking level can be set with the Voltage block
value setting.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay

670 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

time, the OPERATE output is activated if the undervoltage condition persists. If the
positive-sequence voltage normalizes before the module operates, the reset timer is
activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operate timer
resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.5.6.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.5.6.6 Application

PSPTUV can be applied for protecting a power station used for embedded generation
when network faults like short circuits or phase-to-earth faults in a transmission or a
distribution line cause a potentially dangerous situations for the power station. A
network fault can be dangerous for the power station for various reasons. The
operation of the protection can cause an islanding condition, also called a loss-of-
mains condition, in which a part of the network, that is, an island fed by the power
station, is isolated from the rest of the network. There is then a risk of an autoreclosure
taking place when the voltages of different parts of the network do not synchronize,
which is a straining incident for the power station. Another risk is that the generator
can lose synchronism during the network fault. A sufficiently fast trip of the utility
circuit breaker of the power station can avoid these risks.

The lower the three-phase symmetrical voltage of the network is, the higher is the
probability that the generator loses the synchronism. The positive-sequence voltage is
also available during asymmetrical faults. It is a more appropriate criterion for
detecting the risk of loss of synchronism than, for example, the lowest phase-to-phase
voltage.

Analyzing the loss of synchronism of a generator is rather complicated and requires a

model of the generator with its prime mover and controllers. The generator can be able
to operate synchronously even if the voltage drops by a few tens of percent for some
hundreds of milliseconds. The setting of PSPTUV is thus determined by the need to

630 series 671

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

protect the power station from the risks of the islanding conditions since that requires
a higher setting value.

The loss of synchronism of a generator means that the generator is unable to operate
as a generator with the network frequency but enters into an unstable condition in
which it operates by turns as a generator and a motor. Such a condition stresses the
generator thermally and mechanically. This kind of loss of synchronism should not be
mixed with the one between an island and the utility network. In the islanding
situation, the condition of the generator itself is normal but the phase angle and the
frequency of the phase-to-phase voltage can be different from the corresponding
voltage in the rest of the network. The island can have a frequency of its own relatively
fast when fed by a small power station with a low inertia.

PSPTUV complements other loss-of-grid protection principles based on the

frequency and voltage operation.

Motor stalling and failure to start can lead to a continuous undervoltage. The positive-
sequence undervoltage is used as a backup protection against the motor stall
condition.

4.5.6.7 Signals
Table 685: PSPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer

Table 686: PSPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal for Positive Sequence
Undervoltage protection
START BOOLEAN Start signal for Positive Sequence Undervoltage
logic

4.5.6.8 Settings
Table 687: PSPTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010 - 1.200 pu 0.001 0.900 Positive sequence undervoltage start
value
Operate delay time 0.040 - 120.000 s 0.001 0.040 Operate delay time

672 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 688: PSPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Voltage block value 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.20 Internal blocking level
Enable block value Disabled - - Enabled Enable Internal Blocking
Enabled

Table 689: PSPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

Table 690: PSPTUV Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Relative hysteresis 1.0 - 5.0 % 0.1 4.0 Relative hysteresis for operation
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

4.5.6.9 Measured values

Table 691: PSPTUV Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage amplitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer

4.5.6.10 Monitored data

Table 692: PSPTUV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for
1=TRUE Positive Sequence
Undervoltage protection
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal for Positive
1=TRUE Sequence Undervoltage
logic
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in
percentage of the total
operating time

630 series 673

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.6.11 Technical data

Table 693: PSPTUV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time1)2) UFault = 0.9 × set Start Typically 28 ms (±15 ms)

value
Reset time <40 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Positive-sequence voltage before fault = 1.1 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, positive-sequence undervoltage of

nominal frequency injected from random phase angle
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.5.7 Overexitation protection OEPVPH

4.5.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overexcitation protection OEPVPH U/f> 24

4.5.7.2 Function block

GUID-2573B480-1482-4E9B-BEB9-0FEE8BB0C145 V1 EN

Figure 343: Function block

4.5.7.3 Functionality

The overexcitation protection OEPVPH is used to protect the generators and power
transformers against an excessive flux density and saturation of the magnetic core.

The function calculates the U/f ratio (volts/hertz) proportional to the excitation level
of the generator or transformer and compares this value to the setting limit. The
function starts when the excitation level exceeds the set limit and operates when the
set operating time has elapsed. The operating time characteristic can be selected to be

674 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

either definite time (DT) or overexcitation inverse definite minimum time

(overexcitation type IDMT).

This function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, reset timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.7.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the overexcitation protection can be described using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-19FF0393-D642-488F-BB49-DF89594902DF V1 EN

Figure 344: Functional module diagram

U/f calculation
This module calculates the U/f ratio, that is, the excitation level from the internal
induced voltage (E) and frequency. The actual measured voltage (Um) deviates from
the internal induced voltage (emf) E, a value the equipment has to withstand. This
voltage compensation is based on the load current (IL) and the leakage reactance
(Xleak) of the equipment. The leakage reactance of the transformer or generator is set
through the Leakage React setting in percentage of the Z base.

The internal induced voltage (E) is calculated from the measured voltage. The settings
Voltage selection and Phase supervision determine which voltages and currents are to
be used. If the Voltage selection setting is set to "phase-to-earth" or "phase-to-phase",
the Phase supervision setting is needed for determining which phases or phase-to-
phase voltages ("A or AB", "B or BC" and "C or CA") and currents are to be used for
the calculation of the induced voltage.

630 series 675

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 694: Voltages and currents used for induced voltage E calculation
Voltage selection setting Phase supervision setting Calculation of internal induced voltage (emf) E
phase-to-earth A or AB
(
E = 3 ⋅ U A + I A ⋅ ( j ⋅ X leak ) )
GUID-1287475D-62CA-4683-8E56-C49878E707CE V1 EN

phase-to-earth B or BC
(
E = 3 ⋅ U B + I B ⋅ ( j ⋅ X leak ) )
GUID-E78900F1-CF36-46B9-8358-40769F4C59E2 V1 EN

phase-to-earth C or CA
(
E = 3 ⋅ U C + IC ⋅ ( j ⋅ X leak ) )
GUID-DA1EB85C-01C5-48D3-8862-87B248CAD3C2 V1 EN

phase-to-phase A or AB
(
E = U AB + ( I A − I B ) ⋅ ( j ⋅ X leak ) )
GUID-D3885BFD-D9F3-4E6E-9214-209EA9FA419E V1 EN

phase-to-phase B or BC
(
E = U BC + ( I B − IC ) ⋅ ( j ⋅ X leak ) )
GUID-751A9D22-A5C7-4991-AA26-CDD1435910EF V1 EN

phase-to-phase C or CA
(
E = U CA + ( I C − I A ) ⋅ ( j ⋅ X leak ) )
GUID-B9AA1AEC-B25A-4C62-A84F-3A7025B2D230 V1 EN

Pos sequence N/A

(
E = 3 ⋅ U1 + I1 ⋅ ( j ⋅ X leak ) )
GUID-AADD53F4-E176-4753-9EFF-564EBBF7A3C3 V1 EN

The voltages, currents and leakage reactance Xleak are given in volts, amps and ohms.

If all three phase or phase-to-phase voltages and phase currents are fed
to the IED, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended.

If the leakage reactance of the protected equipment is unknown or if

the measured voltage Um is to be used in the excitation level
calculation, the leakage reactance setting is set to zero. The calculated
induced voltage E is then equal to the measured voltage.

The calculated U/f ratio is scaled to a value based on the nominal Un/fn ratio. However,
the highest allowed continuous voltage (in % Un) can be defined by setting the
parameter Volt Max continuous to change the basis of the voltage. The measured
voltage is compared to the new base value to obtain the excitation level.

The excitation level (M) can be calculated:

676 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

E
fm
M =
U n Volt Max continuous
×
fn 100
GUID-6C4FE80D-7940-4130-9BF7-E44ED087EE41 V1 EN (Equation 121)

M the excitation level (U/f ratio or volts/hertz) in pu

E the internal induced voltage (emf)
fm the measured frequency

Un the nominal phase-to-phase voltage

fn the nominal frequency

If the input frequency fm is less than 20 percent of the nominal frequency fn, the
calculation of the excitation level is disabled and forced to zero value, that is, the
function is blocked internally during low-frequency condition.

The calculated excitation level (U/f ratio or volts/hertz) VOLTPERHZ is available in

the monitored data view.

Level detector
The level detector compares the calculated excitation level to the Start value setting.
If the excitation level exceeds the set limit, the module sends an enabling signal to start
the timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of the
set Operating curve type, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When
the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT mode
or the value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is activated.

In a drop-off situation, that is, when the excitation level drops below Start value before
the function operates, the reset timer is activated and the START output resets after the
time delay of Reset delay time for the DT characteristics. For the IDMT curves, the
reset operation is as described in the Timer characteristics chapter.

For the IDMT curves, it is possible to define the maximum and minimum operating
times via the Minimum operate time and Maximum operate time settings. The
Maximum operate time setting is used to prevent the infinite start situations at low
degrees of overexcitation. The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT
operate times.

The activation of the OPERATE output activates the BLK_RESTART output.

For the DT characteristics, the deactivation of the OPERATE output activates the
cooling timer. The timer is set to the value entered in the Cooling time setting. The
BLK_RESTART and COOL_ACTIVE outputs are kept active until the cooling timer

630 series 677

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

is reset. If the excitation increases above the set value during this period, the
OPERATE output is activated immediately. For IDMT, the deactivation of
BLK_RESTART and COOL_ACTIVE depends on the curve type selected.

The operation timer counting can be frozen to the prevailing value by activating the
FR_TIMER input.

The T_ENARESTART output indicates the duration in seconds for which the
BLK_RESTART output still remains active. The value is available in the monitored
data view.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The BLOCK binary input can be used for blocking the function. Activating the BLOCK
input deactivates all the binary outputs and resets the internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST is used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR is used to block
the operating signals.

4.5.7.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.5.7.6 Timer characteristics

OEPVPH supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The DT timer characteristics

can be selected as "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time" in the Operating curve type
setting. The functionality is identical in both cases. When the DT characteristics are
selected, the functionality is only affected by the Operate delay time and Reset delay
time settings.

OEPVPH also supports four overexcitation IDMT characteristic curves: "OvExt

IDMT Crv1", "OvExt IDMT Crv2", "OvExt IDMT Crv3" and "OvExt IDMT Crv4".

Overexcitation inverse definite minimum time curve (IDMT)

In the inverse time modes, the operate time depends on the momentary value of the
excitation: the higher the excitation level, the shorter the operate time. The operate
time calculation or integration starts immediately when the excitation level exceeds
the set Start value and the START output is activated.

The OPERATE output is activated when the cumulative sum of the integrator
calculating the overexcitation situation exceeds the value set by the inverse time
mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values used.

678 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The Minimum operate time and Maximum operate time settings define the minimum
operate time and maximum operate time possible for the IDMT mode. For setting
these parameters, a careful study of the particular IDMT curves is recommended.

The operation time of the function block can vary much between
different operating curve types even if other setting parameters for the
curves were not changed.

Once activated, the timer activates the START output for the IDMT curves. If the
excitation level drops below the Start value setting before the function operates, the
reset timer is activated and the START output resets immediately. If START reoccurs
during the reset time, the operation calculation is made based on the effects of the
period when START was previously active. This is intended to allow an operating
condition to occur in less time to account for the heating effects from the previous
active start period.

For the IDMT curves, when START is deactivated, the integral value calculated
during START is continuously decremented by a constant that causes its value to
become zero when the reset time elapses during the reset period. If a fault reoccurs, the
integration continues from the current integral value and the start time is adjusted, as
shown in Figure 345. The start time becomes the value at the time when the fault
dropped off minus the amount of reset time that occurred. If the reset period elapses
without a fault being detected, the saved values of the start time and integration are
cleared.

630 series 679

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Inverse time
counter

Operate level
100%

50%

25%

START Drop-off START Reset time

START
resets
reset time

GUID-C6AAFC57-08D7-4AF9-99D6-6153D9A7D0DC V1 EN

Figure 345: An example of a delayed reset in the inverse time characteristics.

When the start becomes active during the reset period, the operate
time counter continues from the level corresponding to the drop-off
(reset time = 0.50 · Cooling time).

Overexcitation IDMT curves 1, 2 and 3

The base equation for the IDMT curves "OvExt IDMT Crv1", "OvExt IDMT Crv2"
and "OvExt IDMT Crv3" is:
 ak +b −100 M 
 
t ( s ) = 60 ⋅ e c 

GUID-5D74EA35-03AD-44D1-9EE0-0B1999C55BF1 V1 EN (Equation 122)

t(s) the operate time in seconds

M excitation level (U/f ratio or volts/hertz) in pu
k the Time multiplier setting

The constant "60" in Equation 122 converts time from minutes to

seconds.

Table 695: Parameters a, b and c for different IDMT curves

Operating curve type a b c
setting
OvExt IDMT Crv1 2.5 115.00 4.886
OvExt IDMT Crv2 2.5 113.50 3.040
OvExt IDMT Crv3 2.5 108.75 2.443

680 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-BD1205DC-1794-4F64-A950-6199C54DB7B1 V1 EN

Figure 346: Operating time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve ("OvExt
IDMT Crv1") for parameters a = 2.5, b = 115.0 and c = 4.886.

Overexcitation IDMT curve 4

The base equation for the IDMT curve "OvExt IDMT Crv4" is:
0.18k
t (s) = d +
( M − 1)2
GUID-154EC60E-DF7E-4013-8846-C357174869F4 V1 EN (Equation 123)

t(s) the operate time in seconds

d the Constant delay setting in seconds
M the excitation value (U/f ratio or volts/hertz) in pu
k the Time multiplier setting

630 series 681

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-6FC7624E-7E13-4645-8943-0FDFBAA1D184 V1 EN

Figure 347: Operating time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve 4 ("OvExt
IDMT Crv4") for different values of the Time multiplier setting when
the Constant delay is 0.8 sec.

The activation of the OPERATE output activates the BLK_RESTART output.

For the IDMT characteristic "OvExt IDMT Crv4", the deactivation of the OPERATE
output activates the cooling timer. The timer is set to the value entered in the Cooling
time setting. The COOL_ACTIVE output is kept active until the cooling timer is reset,
whereas the BLK_RESTART output remains active until the timer exceeds the value
to enable the restart time, given in Equation 124. The Ena restart level setting
determines the level when BLK_RESTART should be released.

 100 − Ena restart level 

enable restart time =   ⋅ Cooling time
 100 
GUID-76116B3C-28C5-4865-A164-A2376B881915 V1 EN (Equation 124)

If the excitation level increases above the set value when BLK_RESTART is active,
the OPERATE output is activated immediately.

If the excitation level increases above the set value when BLK_RESTART is not active
but COOL_ACTIVE is active, the OPERATE output is not activated instantly. In this
case, the remaining part of the cooling timer affects the calculation of the operate timer
as shown in Figure 348. This compensates for the heating effect and makes the overall
operate time shorter.

682 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-6D98255F-CD77-44BB-A8F4-8E34D0956F21 V1 EN

Figure 348: Example of an inverse time counter operation if START occurs when
BLK_RESTART is not active but COOL_ACTIVE is active. (The Ena
restart level setting is considered to be 40 percent)

4.5.7.7 Application

If the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic

flux density beyond its designed limits, the leakage flux increases. This results in a
heavy hysteresis and eddy current losses in the non-laminated parts. These losses can
cause excessive heating and severe damage to the insulation and adjacent parts in a
relatively short time.

Overvoltage, underfrequency or a combination of the two results in an excessive flux

density level. Since the flux density is directly proportional to the voltage and
inversely proportional to the frequency, the overexcitation protection calculates the
relative V/Hz ratio instead of measuring the flux density directly. The nominal level
(nominal voltage at nominal frequency) is usually considered as the 100-percent level,
which can be exceeded slightly based on the design.

The greatest risk for overexcitation exists in a thermal power station when the
generator-transformer unit is disconnected from the rest of the network or in the
network islands where high voltages or low frequencies can occur.

Overexcitation can occur during the startup and shutdown of the generator if the field
current is not properly adjusted. The loss-of-load or load shedding can also result in
overexcitation if the voltage control and frequency governor do not function properly.
The low frequency in a system isolated from the main network can result in
overexcitation if the voltage-regulating system maintains a normal voltage.

630 series 683

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Overexcitation protection for the transformer is generally provided by the generator

overexcitation protection, which uses the VTs connected to the generator terminals.
The curves that define the generator and transformer V/Hz limits must be coordinated
properly to protect both equipments.

If the generator can be operated with a leading power factor, the high-side voltage of
the transformer can have a higher pu V/Hz than the generator V/Hz. This needs to be
considered in a proper overexcitation protection of the transformer. Also,
measurement for the voltage must not be taken from any winding where OLTC is
located.

It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon caused by events such

as loss-of-load. It should be noted that a high phase-to-earth voltage does not mean
overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single-phase-to-earth
fault means high voltages on the two healthy phases but no overexcitation on any
winding. The phase-to-phase voltages remain essentially unchanged. The voltage to
be considered for the overexcitation is the voltage between the two ends of each
winding.

Example calculations for overexcitation protection

Example 1
Nominal values of the machine

Nominal phase-to-phase voltage (Un) 11000 V

Nominal phase current (In) 7455 A

Nominal frequency (fn) 50 Hz

Leakage reactance (Xleak) 20% or 0.2 pu

Measured voltage and load currents of the machine

Phase A-to-phase B voltage (UAB) 11500∠0° V

Phase A current (IA) 5600∠-63.57° A

Phase B current (IB) 5600∠176.42° A

Measured frequency (fm) 49.98 Hz

The setting Volt Max continuous 100%

The setting Voltage selection phase-to-phase
The setting Phase supervision A or AB

The pu leakage reactance XleakPU is converted to ohms.

684 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

   
U
X leak Ω = X leakPU ×  n  = 0.2 × 11000  = 0.170378 Ohms


In × 3 


 ( )
7455 × 3 
 ( )
GUID-93EB75F7-CAA1-4127-95A8-E58A8FC291F5 V1 EN (Equation 125)

The internal induced voltage E of the machine is calculated.

E = U AB + ( I A − I B ) × ( jX leak )
GUID-EFEFD1C2-206B-4CC1-A58F-75C05E0897F9 V1 EN (Equation 126)

E = 11500∠0°+ (5600∠-63.57°- 5600∠176.42°) x (0.170378∠90°) = 12490 V

The excitation level M of the machine is calculated.

12490
Excitationlevel M = 49.98 = 1.1359
11000 × 1.00
50
GUID-75BDACA1-7D77-4E84-A574-AEF9A8AD1A08 V1 EN

Example 2
The situation and the data are according to example 1. In this case, the manufacturer
of the machine allows the continuous operation at 105 percent of the nominal voltage
at the rated load and this value to be used as the base for overexcitation.

Usually, the U/f characteristics are specified so that the ratio is 1.00 at
the nominal voltage and nominal frequency. Therefore, the value 100
percent for the setting Volt Max continuous is recommended.

If the Volt Max continuous setting is 105 percent, the excitation level M of the machine
is calculated with the equation.

12490
Excitationlevel M = 49.98 = 1.0818
11000 × 1.05
50
GUID-9373AED6-4A78-487C-979B-31E8D77D5668 V1 EN

Example 3
In this case, the function operation is according to IDMT. The Operating curve type
setting is selected as "OvExt IDMT Crv2". The corresponding example settings for
the IDMT curve operation are given as: Start value = 110%, Volt Max continuous =
100%, Time multiplier = 4, Maximum operate time = 1000 s and Minimum operate
time = 1.0 s.

630 series 685

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-433F1AF8-DA0B-4FEA-A281-1872487F3B97 V1 EN

Figure 349: Operating curve of "OvExt IDMT Crv2" based on the settings
specified in example 3. The two dots marked on the curve are
referred to in the text.

If the excitation level stays at 1.26, the operation occurs after 26.364 seconds as per the
marked dot in Figure 349 for operating curve with the settings specified as per
example 3. For the excitation level of 1.4, the second dot in Figure 349, the curve
"OvExt IDMT Crv2" gives 0.2636 sec as per Equation 122, but the Minimum operate
time setting limits the operate time to 1.0 second.

The Maximum operate time setting limits the operate time to 1000
seconds if the excitation level stays between 1.1 and 1.16.

In general, however, the excitation level seldom remains constant.

Therefore, the exact operate times in any inverse time mode are
difficult to predict.

Example 4
In this case, the function operation is according to IDMT. The Operating curve type
setting is selected as "OvExt IDMT Crv4". The corresponding example settings for
the IDMT curve operation are given as: Start value = 110%, Volt Max continuous =

686 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

100%, Time multiplier = 5, Maximum operate time = 3600 s and Constant delay = 0.8
s.

GUID-78B05F4B-3434-4DD5-89F6-17F099444C04 V1 EN

Figure 350: Operating curve of “OvExt IDMT Crv4” based on the specified
settings. The two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text.

If the excitation level stays at 1.25, the operation occurs after 15.20 s. At the excitation
level of 1.42, the time to operation would be 5.90 s as per the two dots in Figure 350.
In this case, the setting Maximum operate time = 3600 s does not limit the maximum
operate time because the operate time at Start value = 110% (1.1 pu) is approximately
75 seconds.

4.5.7.8 Signals
Table 696: OEPVPH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timer

630 series 687

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 697: OEPVPH Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Signal for blocking reconnection of an overheated
machine
COOL_ACTIVE BOOLEAN Signal to indicate machine is in cooling process

4.5.7.9 Settings
Table 698: OEPVPH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 100 - 200 %UB/f 1 100 Over excitation start value
Time multiplier 0.10 - 100.00 - 0.10 3.00 Time multiplier for Overexcitation IDMT
curves
Operating curve type ANSI Def. Time - - IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
IEC Def. Time
OvExt IDMT Crv1
OvExt IDMT Crv2
OvExt IDMT Crv3
OvExt IDMT Crv4
Operate delay time 0.10 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.50 Operate delay time in definite- time mode

Table 699: OEPVPH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Voltage selection phase-to-earth - - Pos Seq Selection of phase / phase-to-phase / pos
phase-to-phase sequence voltages
Pos Seq
Phase supervision A or AB - - A or AB Parameter for phase selection
B or BC
C or CA

Table 700: OEPVPH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On
Leakage React 0.0 - 50.0 % Zb 0.1 0.0 Leakage reactance of the machine

688 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 701: OEPVPH Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Restart Ena level 0 - 100 % 1 0 Determines the level in % when block
restart is released
Voltage Max Cont 80 - 160 %UB 1 110 Maximum allowed continuous operating
voltage ratio
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Resetting time of the operate time counter
in DT mode
Maximum operate time 500.00 - 10000.00 s 0.01 1000.00 Maximum operate time for IDMT curves
Minimum operate time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Cooling time 5 - 10000 s 1 600 Time required to cool the machine
Constant delay 0.10 - 120.00 s 0.01 0.80 Parameter constant delay

4.5.7.10 Measured values

Table 702: OEPVPH Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timer

4.5.7.11 Monitored data

Table 703: OEPVPH Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal for blocking
1=TRUE reconnection of an
overheated machine
COOL_ACTIVE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal to indicate
1=TRUE machine is in cooling
process
VOLTPERHZ REAL - xUB/f Excitation level, i.e U/f
ratio or Volts/Hertz
T_ENARESTART INTEGER - s Estimated time to reset of
block restart
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time (in %)

630 series 689

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.7.12 Technical data

Table 704: OEPVPH Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±2.5% of the set value or 0.01 × Ub/f

Start time 1)2) Frequency change Typically 200 ms (±20

ms)
Voltage change Typically 100 ms (±20
ms)
Reset time <60 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time <45 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite-time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse-time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±50 ms

1) Results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.5.7.13 Technical revision history

Table 705: OEPVPH technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Change in the function description available in
PCM600

4.5.8 Voltage vector shift protection VVSPPAM

4.5.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage vector shift protection VVSPPAM VS 78V

4.5.8.2 Function block

GUID-DC842D8A-D754-4F79-B682-33D9B6FBD679 V1 EN

Figure 351: Function block

690 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.8.3 Functionality

Voltage vector shift protection function VVSPPAM (which can be called also vector
surge or delta phi function) measures continuously the duration of a voltage cycle. At
the instance of islanding, the duration of measured voltage cycle becomes shorter or
longer than the previous one, that is, the measured voltage cycle shifts with time. This
shifting of voltage is measured in terms of phase angle. VVSPPAM issues
instantaneous trip when shift in voltage vector exceeds the set value.

VVSPPAM contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, timer or the function itself.

4.5.8.4 Operation principle

The Operation setting is used to enable or disable the function. When "On" is selected,
the function is enabled and when "Off" is selected, the function is disabled.

The operation of VVSPPAM can be described using a module diagram. All modules
in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-E5A905A7-8FF5-416D-B265-EF128266DB33 V1 EN

Figure 352: Functional module diagram

Vector shift detector

This module measures the duration of each cycle of the voltage signal phase. The
duration of the present cycle is compared to the previous cycle (which is considered
as reference). When the mains is lost, a sudden change is seen in the cycle length
(Figure 353), if loading of the generator changes suddenly and power mismatch or
unbalance (generation vs. load) in the islanded part of the network is large enough.
The cycle shifts with time, that is, the frequency may not change but a vector shift is
seen in phase as shown in the Figure 353.

This step is measured in degrees for each voltage signal defined by the Phase
supervision setting. The Phase supervision setting determines which voltage is used
for vector shift detection. The available Phase supervision options are “All” and “Pos
sequence”. If the calculated value of Δδ exceeds the set Start value setting for all the
defined phases, the module sends an enable signal to start the Pulse timer.

The Voltage selection setting is used to select whether the available voltage signal is
phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltages.

630 series 691

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Phase supervision selected as “Pos sequence” is recommended and

hence kept as default.

If the magnitude of the voltage level of any of the monitored voltage signal (defined
by the Phase supervision setting) drops below Under Volt Blk value or exceeds Over
Volt Blk value, the calculation of vector shift is disabled and the INT_BLKD output is
activated.

The function is blocked and LOWAMPL_BLKD is activated if the measured

frequency deviates ±5% from the nominal value.

The magnitude of calculated vector shift for three phases-to-earth / phase-to-phase

voltages, USHIFT_A_AB, USHIFT_B_BC and USHIFT_C_CA or positive
sequence voltage U1SHIFT which resulted into activation of last OPERATE output
are available in the monitored data view.

The activation of BLOCK input deactivates the INT_BLKD output.

GUID-262B10D9-1EF9-4AB8-AC64-F01ECCD547D1 V1 EN

Figure 353: Vector shift during Loss of Mains

Pulse timer
Once the Pulse timer is activated, it activates the OPERATE output. The pulse length
of OPERATE is fixed to 100 ms.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the OPERATE binary output and resets
timer.

4.5.8.5 Base value

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to the base values. For example, the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example, “Phase Grp 1”, “Phase Grp 2” and “Phase Grp 3”. One of the
groups must be selected with the Base value Sel phase settings.

692 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.8.6 Application

Use of distributed generation (DG) units is increasing due to liberalized markets

(deregulation) and the global trend to use more renewable sources of energy. They
generate power in the range of 10 kW to 10 MW and most of them are interconnected
to the distribution network. They can supply power into the network as well as to the
local loads. It is not common to connect generators directly to the distribution
networks and thus the distributed generation can cause some challenges for the
protection of distribution networks. From the protection point of view, one of the most
challenging issue is islanding.

Islanding is defined as a condition in which a distributed generation unit continues to

supply power to a certain part of the distribution network when power from the larger
utility main grid is no longer available after opening of a circuit-breaker. Islanding is
also referred as Loss of Mains (LOM) or Loss of Grid (LOG). When LOM occurs,
neither the voltage nor the frequency is controlled by the utility supply. Also, these
distributed generators are not equipped with voltage and frequency control; therefore,
the voltage magnitude of an islanded network may not be kept within the desired limits
resulting into undefined voltage magnitudes during islanding situations and
frequency instability. Further, uncontrolled frequency represents a high risk for drives
and other machines. Islanding can occur as a consequence of a fault in the network,
due to circuit-breaker maloperation or due to circuit-breaker opening during
maintenance. If the distributed generator continues its operation after the utility
supply is disconnected, faults do not clear under certain conditions as the arc is
charged by the distributed generators. Moreover, the distributed generators are
incompatible with the current reclosing practices. During the reclosing sequence dead
time, the generators in the network usually tend to drift out of synchronism with the
grid and, reconnecting them without synchronizing may damage the generators
introducing high currents and voltages in the neighbouring network.

Due to the technical difficulties mentioned above, protection should be provided,

which disconnects the distributed generation once it is electrically isolated from the
main grid supply. Various techniques are used for detecting Loss of Mains. However,
the present function focuses on voltage vector shift.

The vector shift detection guarantees fast and reliable detection of mains failure in
almost all operational conditions when a distributed generation unit is running in
parallel with the mains supply, but in certain cases this may fail.

If the active and reactive power generated by the distributed generation units is nearly
balanced (for example, if the power mismatch or unbalance is less than 5...10%) with
the active and reactive power consumed by loads, a large enough voltage phase shift
may not occur which can be detected by the vector shift algorithm. This means that the
vector shift algorithm has a small non-detection-zone (NDZ) which is also dependent
on the type of generators, loads, network and start or operate value of the vector shift
algorithm. Other network events like capacitor switching, switching of very large
loads in weak network or connection of parallel transformer at HV/MV substation, in
which the voltage magnitude is not changed considerably (unlike in faults) can

630 series 693

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

potentially cause maloperation of vector shift algorithm, if very sensitive settings are
used.

The vector shift detection also protects synchronous generators from damaging due to
islanding or loss-of-mains. To detect loss-of-mains with vector shift function, the
generator should aim to export or import at least 5...10% of the generated power to the
grid, in order to guarantee detectable change in loading after islanding or loss-of-
mains.

Multicriteria Loss of Mains

Apart from vector shift, there are other passive techniques which are used for
detecting Loss of Mains. Some of these passive techniques are over/under voltage,
over/under frequency, rate of change of frequency, voltage unbalance, rate of change
of power and so on. These passive methods use voltage and frequency to identify Loss
of Mains. The performance of these methods depends on the power mismatch between
local generation and load. The advantage of all these methods is that, they are simple
and cost effective, but each method has a non detectable zone. To overcome this
problem, it is recommended to combine different criteria for detecting Loss of Mains.

Two or more protection functions run in parallel to detect Loss of Mains. When all
criteria are fulfilled to indicate Loss of Mains, an alarm or a trip can be generated.
Vector shift and rate of change of frequency are two parallel criteria typically used for
detection of Loss of Mains.

For REG630, chosen protection criteria can be included in the Application

Configuration tool (ACT) to create multicriteria loss of mains alarm or trip.

4.5.8.7 Signals
Table 706: VVSPPAM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all binary output signals (includes timer
reset)

Table 707: VVSPPAM Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
INT_BLKD BOOLEAN Protection function internally blocked

4.5.8.8 Settings
Table 708: VVSPPAM Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 2 - 30 Deg 1 6 Start value for vector shift

694 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 709: VVSPPAM Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Phase supervision All - - Pos sequence Monitored voltage phase
Pos sequence
Over Volt Blk value 0.40 - 1.50 pu 0.01 0.70 Voltage above which function will be
internally blocked
Under Volt Blk value 0.15 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.45 Voltage below which function will be
internally blocked

Table 710: VVSPPAM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Voltage selection phase-to-earth - - phase-to-phase Parameter to select phase or phase-to-
phase-to-phase phase voltages

Table 711: VVSPPAM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3

4.5.8.9 Measured values

Table 712: VVSPPAM Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Phase-to-ground voltage amplitude phase A
U_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Phase-to-ground voltage amplitude phase B
U_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Phase-to-ground voltage amplitude phase C
U_ANGL_A REAL 0.0 Phase-to-ground voltage angle phase A
U_ANGL_B REAL 0.0 Phase-to-ground voltage angle phase B
U_ANGL_C REAL 0.0 Phase-to-ground voltage angle phase C
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase voltage amplitude AB
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase voltage amplitude BC
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase voltage amplitude CA
U_ANGL_AB REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase voltage angle AB
U_ANGL_BC REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase voltage angle BC
U_ANGL_CA REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase voltage angle CA
U1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage amplitude
U1_ANGL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage angle
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all binary output signals (includes timer
reset)

630 series 695

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.5.8.10 Monitored data

Table 713: VVSPPAM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate
1=TRUE
INT_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Protection function
1=TRUE internally blocked
VEC_SHT_A_AB REAL - deg Vector shift for ph-earth
voltage A or ph-ph
voltage AB
VEC_SHT_B_BC REAL - deg Vector shift for ph-earth
voltage A or ph-ph
voltage BC
VEC_SHT_C_CA REAL - deg Vector shift for ph-earth
voltage A or ph-ph
voltage CA
VEC_SHT_U1 REAL - deg Vector shift for positive
sequence voltage

4.5.8.11 Technical data

Table 714: VVSPPAM Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn
±0.5% of the set value or ±0.01°
Operate time Typically 60 ms

4.5.9 Low voltage ride through protection LVRTPTUV

4.5.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Low voltage ride through protection LVRTPTUV U<RT 27RT
function

4.5.9.2 Function block

GUID-074AEFD6-7484-4C3A-8C5C-4DC10734A917 V1 EN

Figure 354: Functional block

696 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.9.3 Functionality

Low voltage ride through protection LVRTPTUV is principally a three-phase

undervoltage protection. It differs from the traditional three-phase undervoltage
protection PHPTUV by allowing the grid operators to define its own Low-Voltage-
Ride-Through (LVRT) curve for generators, as defined by local or national grid
codes. The LVRT curve can be defined accurately according to the requirements by
setting the appropriate time-voltage coordinates.

This function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timer or the function itself.

4.5.9.4 Operation principle

The Operation setting is used to enable or disable the function. When "On" is selected,
the function is enabled and when "Off" is selected, the function is disabled.

The operation of LVRTPTUV is described using a module diagram. All modules in

the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-B95903FA-8D98-46A1-A5D0-EA29884A26D2 V1 EN

Figure 355: Functional module diagram

LVRT curve monitoring

LVRT curve monitoring starts with detection of under voltage. Under voltage
detection depends on Voltage selection setting. All selectable options are based on
fundamental frequency components.

Function uses phase-to-earth voltages when Voltage selection is set to “Highest Ph-to-
E” or “Lowest Ph-to-E” and phase-to-phase voltages when Voltage selection is set to
“Highest Ph-to-Ph” or “Lowest Ph-to-Ph”.

When the Voltage selection setting is set to “Highest Ph-to-E”, “Lowest Ph-to-E”,
“Highest Ph-to-Ph” or “Lowest Ph-to-Ph”, the measured three phase voltages are
compared phase-wise to the set Voltage start value setting. If the measured value is

630 series 697

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

lower than the set Voltage start value setting in number of phases equal to that set Num
of start phases, the START output is activated.

When the Voltage selection setting is “Positive Seq”, the positive sequence
component is compared with the set Voltage start value setting. If it is lower than the
set Voltage start value setting, the START output is activated.

Once START is activated, the function monitors the behavior of the voltage defined by
Voltage selection setting with the defined LVRT curve. When defined voltage enters
the operating area, the OPERATE output is activated instantaneously. The pulse length
of OPERATE is fixed to 100 ms. START also deactivates along with OPERATE.

If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, voltage restores above Voltage start value, before
OPERATE is activated, the function does not reset until maximum recovery time
under consideration has elapsed, that is, START output remains active.

LVRT curve is defined using time-voltage settings coordinates. The settings available
are Recovery time 1…Recovery time 10 and Voltage level 1…Voltage level 10. The
number of coordinates required to define a LVRT curve is set by Active coordinate
settings.

When Recovery time 1 is set to non-zero value, it results into

horizontal characteristics from point of fault till Recovery time 1.

Two examples of LVRT curve are defined in Figure 356 and Figure 357 with
corresponding settings in Table 715.

It is necessary to set the coordinate points correctly in order to avoid

mal-operation. For example, setting for Recovery time 2 should be
greater than Recovery time 1. Recovery time 1…Recovery time 10 are
the respective time setting from the point of fault.

698 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-0C8F6809-1B14-4C45-B2C5-7B65E3496279 V1 EN

Figure 356: Low voltage ride through example curve A

GUID-A0416B72-DBF2-4F53-B173-2B2CDA8BD294 V1 EN

Figure 357: Low voltage ride through example curve B

Table 715: Settings for example A and B

Settings Curve A Curve B
Voltage start value 0.9×Un 0.9×Un
Active coordinates 3 5
Voltage level 1 0.2×Un 0×Un
Recovery time 1 500 ms 150 ms
Voltage level 2 0.8×Un 0.7×Un
Recovery time 2 1000 ms 150 ms
Voltage level 3 0.9×Un 0.7×Un
Recovery time 3 10000 ms 700 ms
Voltage level 4 - 0.9×Un
Table continues on next page

630 series 699

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Settings Curve A Curve B

Recovery time 4 - 1500 ms
Voltage level 5 - 0.9×Un
Recovery time 5 - 3000 ms

It is necessary that the last active Voltage level X setting should be set
greater than or equal to Voltage start value. If it is less than the Voltage
start value setting, function automatically considers it to be equal to
Voltage start value.

Figure 358 describes an example of operation of LVRTPTUV protection function set

to operate with Num of start phases set to “Exactly 2 of 3” and Voltage selection as
“Lowest Ph-to-Ph” voltage.

GUID-2ABBAF53-16A0-4B35-A730-6B26A86CA36E V1 EN

Figure 358: Typical example of operation of LVRTPTUV function

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block both the operation signals.

700 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.9.5 Base value

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example, the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example, “Phase Grp 1”, “Phase Grp 2” and “Phase Grp 3”. Select one of
the groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase settings.

4.5.9.6 Application

Distributed generation mainly wind and solar farms are rapidly increasing due to
liberalized markets (deregulation) and the global trend to use more renewable sources
of energy. These farms are directly connected to girds, and due to their large size it
may influence the behavior of the grid. Thus these farms are now required to comply
with stringent grid connection requirement which was previously mandatory only for
high capacity power plants. Few of these requirements include helping grid in
maintaining system stability, reactive power support, transient recovery and voltage-
frequency regulation. These requirements make necessary for the wind and solar
farms to remain in operation in the event of network disturbances.

Many grid codes now demand that the distributed generation connected to HV grids
must withstand voltage dips to a certain percentage of nominal voltage (down to 0%
in some cases) and for a specific duration. Such requirements are knows as Low
Voltage Ride through (LVRT) or Fault Ride through (FRT) and are described by a
voltage vs time characteristics.

Typical LVRT behaviors of a distributed generation can be divided into three areas
according to the variation in voltage over time.
• At the time of system faults, the magnitude of the voltage may dip to Voltage level
1 for time defined by Recovery time 1. The generating unit has to remain
connected to the network during such condition. This boundary defines area A.
• Area B defines the linear growth recovery voltage level from Voltage level 1 to
Voltage level 2 in a time period from Recovery time 1 to Recovery time 2.
• Area C is the zone where voltage stabilizes. Voltage level 3 is defined to same
value as Voltage level 2. The system should remain above this voltage in a time
period from Recovery time 2 to Recovery time 3.

System restores to a normal state and function resets when the voltage is equal or
greater than Voltage level 4 after Recovery time 4 time period.

When the voltage at the point of common coupling is above the LVRT curve, the
generation unit must remain connected, and must be disconnected only if the voltage
takes values below the curve.

630 series 701

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-87B53640-A42B-4671-AA2A-60A3DE2D7294 V1 EN

The LVRT requirement depends on the power system characteristics and the
protection employed, it varies significantly from each other. Requirement also differs
from country to country. LVRTPTUV function incorporates four types of LVRT
curves which satisfy most of the power system needs. Grid operators can fine-tune the
LVRT curve by setting the parameters as per their requirement, making the use
simpler in comparison with different conventional undervoltage protection with
different operate time setting and logics.

4.5.9.7 Signals
Table 716: LVRTPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs

Table 717: LVRTPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN Started
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate

4.5.9.8 Settings
Table 718: LVRTPTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Voltage start value 0.05 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.90 Voltage value below which function starts

702 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 719: LVRTPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Num of start phases Exactly 1 of 3 - - Exactly 1 of 3 Number of faulty phases
Exactly 2 of 3
Exactly 3 of 3
Voltage selection Highest Ph-to-E - - Lowest Ph-to-Ph Parameter to select voltage for curve
Lowest Ph-to-E monitoring
Highest Ph-to-Ph
Lowest Ph-to-Ph
Positive Seq
Active coordinates 1 - 10 - 1 3 Coordinates used for defining LVRT curve
Voltage level 1 0.00 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.20 1st voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Recovery time 1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.50 1st time coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Voltage level 2 0.00 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.80 2nd voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Recovery time 2 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 1.00 2nd time coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Voltage level 3 0.00 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.90 3rd voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Recovery time 3 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 3rd time coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Voltage level 4 0.00 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.90 4th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Recovery time 4 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.0 4th time coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Voltage level 5 0.00 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.90 5th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Recovery time 5 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.0 5th time coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Voltage level 6 0.00 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.90 6th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Recovery time 6 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.0 6th time coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Voltage level 7 0.00 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.90 7th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Recovery time 7 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.0 7th time coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Voltage level 8 0.00 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.90 8th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Recovery time 8 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.0 8th time coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Voltage level 9 0.00 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.90 9th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Table continues on next page

630 series 703

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Recovery time 9 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 9th time coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Voltage level 10 0.00 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.90 10th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT
curve
Recovery time 10 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 10th time coordinate for defining LVRT
curve

Table 720: LVRTPTUV Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3

4.5.9.9 Measured values

Table 721: LVRTPTUV Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Phase to earth voltage A
U_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Phase to earth voltage B
U_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Phase to earth voltage C
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.0 Phase to phase voltage AB
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0.0 Phase to phase voltage BC
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0.0 Phase to phase voltage CA
U1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs by resetting timers
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs

4.5.9.10 Monitored data

Table 722: LVRTPTUV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate
1=TRUE

704 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.9.11 Technical data

Table 723: LVRTPTUV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time Typically 40 ms

Reset time Based on maximum value of Recovery time
setting
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±40 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5 and so
on

4.6 Frequency protection

4.6.1 Overfrequency protection DAPTOF

4.6.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection DAPTOF f> 81O

4.6.1.2 Function block

GUID-BCCA2C67-2D5D-429B-9740-73B16EBBA6AF V1 EN

Figure 359: Function block

4.6.1.3 Functionality

The overfrequency protection function DAPTOF can be used to protect network

components from possible damage caused by overfrequency conditions. DAPTOF
can also be used as a sub-nominal frequency stage initiating load restoring.

The frequency must exceed the set start frequency value before the function can start
and operate. DAPTOF operates with definite time (DT) characteristics. To avoid
unwanted operation due to an uncertain frequency measurement at a low voltage
magnitude, a voltage-controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the
voltage is lower than the set minimum voltage, the function is blocked. The frequency
measurement is based on the voltage available only for preprocessor function SMAI
internally. This voltage is dependent on all connected phase-to-earth or phase-to-

630 series 705

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

phase voltages. If only one phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage is connected

then, that is used.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and
resets timers.

4.6.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the overfrequency protection can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-A7DC35DA-4628-45B5-A67A-669C447E950E V1 EN

Figure 360: Functional module diagram

Overfrequency detector
The fundamental frequency is compared to the Start value setting. If the frequency
exceeds the set Start value, the enable signal is sent to the timer.

Low amplitude blocking

The voltage is compared to the value of the MinValFreqMeas setting. If the voltage
magnitude is below the set value, the LOWAMPL_BLKD output is activated, which also
resets the timer.

MinValFreqMeas is the setting related to the preprocessor function

SMAI. The setting level is compared to the physically connected
voltages. For example, if phase-to-phase voltages are physically
connected (phase-to-earth voltages virtual), the 10% setting results in
ten percent of the normal phase-to-phase voltage. If phase-to-earth
voltages are connected (phase-to-phase voltages virtual), the 10%
setting results in 17 percent of the normal phase-to-earth voltage. This
is assuming the base voltage is set to be the normal/nominal phase-to-
phase voltage.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the LOWAMPL_BLKD output.

706 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the frequency becomes normal before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by
Reset delay time, the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

For a detailed description of the definite timer, see the General

function block features section in this manual.

The activation of the BLOCK input resets the timer and deactivates the OPERATE and
START outputs.

4.6.1.5 Application

DAPTOF is applicable in all situations where high levels of the fundamental

frequency of power system voltage must be reliably detected. A high fundamental
frequency in a power system indicates that there is an unbalance between production
and consumption. In this case, the available generation is too large compared to the
power demanded by the load connected to the power grid. This can occur due to a
sudden loss of a significant amount of load or due to failures in the turbine governor
system. If the situation continues and escalates, the power system loses its stability.
The overfrequency function detects such situations and provides an output signal
suitable for example for generator shedding . The function can also be used as a sub-
nominal frequency stage initiating load restoring. The overfrequency function is very
sensitive and accurate and can also be used to alert operators that frequency has
slightly deviated from the set-point and that manual actions can suffice.

Traditionally, frequency protection is highly recommended to be based on a phase-to-

phase voltage which is less dependent on the asymmetry of separate phase voltages
and less sensitive to harmonics. The third harmonic, for instance, is not present in
phase-to-phase voltages. However, the DAPTOF is also able to measure the
frequency reliably and accurately using a single phase-to-earth voltage.

4.6.1.6 Signals
Table 724: DAPTOF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for pos seq voltage
SIGNAL inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

630 series 707

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 725: DAPTOF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal for overfrequency protection
START BOOLEAN Start signal for overfrequency protection
LOWAMPL_BLKD BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude.

4.6.1.7 Settings
Table 726: DAPTOF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 35.00 - 64.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency setting/start value
Operate delay time 0.08 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.08 Operate time delay

Table 727: DAPTOF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 728: DAPTOF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Time delay for reset

4.6.1.8 Measured values

Table 729: DAPTOF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

4.6.1.9 Monitored data

Table 730: DAPTOF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for
1=TRUE overfrequency protection
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal for
1=TRUE overfrequency protection
LOWAMPL_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Blocking indication due to
1=TRUE low amplitude.
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in percents
of the total operation
time.

708 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.6.1.10 Technical data

Table 731: DAPTOF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = 35...66 Hz
±0.003 Hz

Start time1)2) fFault = 1.01 × set Start Typically <190 ms

value
Reset time <190 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±30 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Frequency before fault = 0.99 × fn, fn = 50 Hz

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.6.1.11 Technical revision history

Table 732: DAPTOF technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B • Removed one decimal from Reset delay
time and Operate delay time setting
• Added one decimal for Start value setting
• Minimum setting value changed from 0.170
to 0.08, maximum setting value changed
from 60.000 to 200.00 and default setting
value changed from 0.200 to 0.08 for the
Operate delay time setting
• Internal improvements

4.6.2 Underfrequency protection DAPTUF

4.6.2.1 Identification
Table 733: Function identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection DAPTUF f< 81U

4.6.2.2 Function block

GUID-8B24B83B-5226-43CA-B4BC-4E8D926DA380 V1 EN

Figure 361: Function block

630 series 709

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.6.2.3 Functionality

The underfrequency protection function DAPTUF is used to detect low power system
frequency. DAPTUF is used, for example, in load shedding systems, remedial action
schemes and gas turbine startup.

The function starts and operates when the frequency drops below the set start
frequency value. The operate time characteristics are according to definite time (DT).

To avoid the unwanted operation due to an uncertain frequency measurement at a low

voltage magnitude, the voltage-controlled blocking of DAPTUF is available. If the
voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage, the function is blocked and no start or
operate signal is issued. The frequency measurement is based on a voltage available
only for preprocessor function SMAI internally. This voltage is dependent on all
connected phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltages. If only one phase-to-earth or
phase-to-phase voltage is connected then, that is used.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and
resets the timers.

4.6.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of underfrequency protection can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-5B1963AF-7E93-4EF6-AD2D-61E3BCBCFE8F V2 EN

Figure 362: Functional module diagram. Group signal U3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Underfrequency detector
The fundamental frequency is compared to the Start value setting. If the frequency is
lower than the set Start value, the enabling signal is sent to the Timer 1. The measured
frequency (FREQ) is available in the monitored data view.

710 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Timer 1
Once activated, Timer 1 activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer reaches the value set by Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset
delay time, the operation timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

For a detailed description of the definite timer, see the General

function block features section in this manual.
The activation of the BLOCK input resets the timer and deactivates the
OPERATE and START outputs.

Restoring frequency detector

The restoring frequency detector is enabled after the OPERATE output of Timer 1 is
activated. When enabled, the fundamental frequency is compared to the set Restore
start Val setting. When the frequency has returned to a value higher than the value of
Restore start Val, Timer 2 is enabled.

Timer 2
Once activated, the RESTORE output is activated after the set Restore delay time. The
time characteristic is according to DT. If the frequency drops below Restore start Val
before RESTORE is activated, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the
value set by Reset delay time, Timer 2 is reset. The RESTORE output remains active
for 100 ms.

Activating the BLOCK output cancels the restoring operation. If the restoring
command is cancelled, the RESTORE output can be activated only when the next load-
shedding operation is detected, that is, when the OPERATE output is activated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the ongoing restoring situation and the set Restore delay time. The
value is available in the monitored data view.

For a detailed description of the definite timers, see the General

function block features section in this manual.

The activation of the BLK_REST input deactivates the RESTORE output. The restore
functionality can be disabled by setting the Reset delay time value to 0.0 s.

630 series 711

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Low amplitude blocking

The voltage is compared to the set MinValFreqMeas setting. If the voltage magnitude
is lower than the set value, the LOWAMPL_BLKD output is activated which resets the
timers Timer 1 and Timer 2.

MinValFreqMeas is the setting related to preprocessor function

SMAI. The setting level is compared to the physically connected
voltages. For example, if phase-to-phase voltages are physically
connected (phase-to-earth voltages virtual), the 10% setting results in
ten percent of the normal phase-to-phase voltage. If phase-to-earth
voltages are connected (phase-to-phase voltages virtual), the 10%
setting results in 17 percent of the normal phase-to-earth voltage. This
is assuming the base voltage is set to be the normal/nominal phase-to-
phase voltage.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the LOWAMPL_BLKD output.

4.6.2.5 Application

DAPTUF is applicable in all situations where a reliable detection of a low

fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed. A low fundamental
frequency in a power system indicates that the power generated is too low to meet the
power demanded by the load connected to the power grid.

An underfrequency can occur as a result of an overload of the generators operating in

an isolated system. It can also occur as a result of a serious fault in the power system
due to the deficit of generation when compared to the load. This can happen due to a
fault in the grid system on transmission lines that link two parts of the system. As a
result, the system splits in two with one part having the excess load and the other part
the corresponding deficit. The frequency dips rapidly in the latter, resulting in load
shedding either by the load shedding relays or by the operator action. DAPTUF
detects such situations and provides an output signal suitable for load shedding,
generator boosting, set point change in sub-transmission DC systems, gas turbine
startup and so on

In some cases, to reduce the power system voltage and the voltage dependent part of
the load, shunt reactors are automatically switched on at low frequencies. The
DAPTUF function is very sensitive and accurate and can also be used to alert the
operators that the frequency deviates slightly from the set-point and that manual
actions can be sufficient enough to ensure the stability of the system. The
underfrequency signal is also used for over-excitation detection. This is especially
important for generator step-up transformers during a rollout sequence when the
transformers can be connected to the generator but disconnected from the grid. If the
generator is still energized, the system experiences over-excitation due to the low
frequency.

712 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

When the system recovers from the disturbance after the action of the underfrequency
protection, the operating frequency recovers to nominal frequency. The load that was
shed during the disturbance can be restored.

4.6.2.6 Signals
Table 734: DAPTUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for pos seq voltage
SIGNAL inputs
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_REST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output.

Table 735: DAPTUF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal for underfrequency protection
START BOOLEAN Start signal for underfrequency protection
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
LOWAMPL_BLKD BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude.

4.6.2.7 Settings
Table 736: DAPTUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 35.00 - 64.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency setting/start value.
Operate delay time 0.08 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.08 Operate time delay

Table 737: DAPTUF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Restore start Val 35.00 - 64.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency setting value
Restore delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.00 Restore time delay

Table 738: DAPTUF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 739: DAPTUF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Time delay for reset

630 series 713

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.6.2.8 Measured values

Table 740: DAPTUF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_REST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output.

4.6.2.9 Monitored data

Table 741: DAPTUF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for
1=TRUE underfrequency
protection
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal for
1=TRUE underfrequency
protection
RESTORE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Restore signal for load
1=TRUE restoring purposes.
LOWAMPL_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Blocking indication due to
1=TRUE low amplitude.
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in percents
of the total operation
time.

4.6.2.10 Technical data

Table 742: DAPTUF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = 35...66 Hz
±0.003 Hz

Start time1)2) fFault = 0.99 × set Start Typically <190 ms

value
Reset time <190 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±30 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Frequency before fault = 1.01 × fn, fn = 50 Hz

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

714 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.6.2.11 Technical revision history

Table 743: DAPTUF technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B • Removed one decimal from Reset delay
time, Restore delay time and Operate delay
time setting
• Added one decimal for Start value and
Restore start Val setting
• Minimum setting value changed from 0.170
to 0.08, maximum setting value changed
from 60.000 to 200.00 and default setting
value changed from 0.200 to 0.08 for the
Operate delay time setting
• Internal improvements

4.6.3 Frequency gradient protection DAPFRC

4.6.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Frequency gradient protection function DAPFRC df/dt> 81R

4.6.3.2 Function block

GUID-ADC9C642-C93E-46FB-AF8D-B52B6DABBE6E V2 EN

Figure 363: Function block

4.6.3.3 Functionality

The frequency gradient protection or the rate of change of frequency protection

DAPFRC is used to detect the increase or decrease of the fast power system frequency
at an early stage. DAPFRC gives an early indication of a disturbance in the system.
The function can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action
schemes.

The rate of change of the fundamental frequency is calculated and compared to the set
frequency gradient value before the function can start and operate. DAPFRC operates
with the definite time (DT) characteristics. The function can discriminate between a
positive or negative change in frequency.

A voltage-controlled blocking feature is available to avoid unwanted operation due to

uncertain frequency measurement at a low-voltage magnitude, that is, if the voltage is

630 series 715

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

lower than the set blocking voltage, the function is blocked. The frequency
measurement is based on a voltage available only for the preprocessor function SMAI
internally. This voltage is dependent on all connected phase-to-earth or phase-to-
phase voltages. If only one phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage is connected, that
is used.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and
resets timers.

4.6.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of frequency gradient protection can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-31BC1CD5-76B7-4130-8E4B-97A44EF28A75 V2 EN

Figure 364: Functional module diagram. Group signal U3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Frequency rate of change detector

The rate of change of the frequency of the positive sequence voltage is calculated from
phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltages and compared to the set Start value. If the
measured frequency rate of change is higher than the set Start value, the timer module
is enabled.

The sign of the set Start value controls DAPFRC to react on a positive change or on
a negative change in frequency. A positive setting of Start value sets the frequency
rate of change detector to react on increases of the frequency. Similarly, a negative
setting of Start value results in a decrease of frequency.

Low amplitude blocking

The voltage is compared to the set MinValFreqMeas value. If the voltage magnitude
is detected to be below the set value, the LOWAMPL_BLKD output is activated, which
resets the timer.

MinValFreqMeas is the setting related to Preprocessor function

SMAI. The setting level is compared to the physically connected
voltages. For example, if phase-to-phase voltages are physically
connected (phase-to-earth voltages virtual), the 10% setting results in

716 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

ten percent of the normal phase-to-phase voltage. If phase-to-earth

voltages are connected (phase-to-phase voltages virtual), the 10%
setting results in 17 percent of the normal phase-to-earth voltage. This
is assuming the base voltage is set to be the normal/nominal phase-to-
phase voltage.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer reaches the value set by Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the frequency rate of change condition
disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer
reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and the START
output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available
in the monitored data view.

The activation of the BLOCK input resets the timer and deactivates the START and
OPERATE outputs.

4.6.3.5 Application

DAPFRC is applicable in all the situations where the change of the fundamental power
system voltage frequency should be detected reliably. DAPFRC can be used for both
increasing and decreasing of the frequencies. This function provides an output signal
suitable for load shedding, generator shedding, generator boosting and gas turbine
startup. The frequency gradient is often used in combination with a low frequency
signal, especially in smaller power systems where the loss of a fairly large generator
requires quick remedial actions to secure the power system's integrity. In such
situations, load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency level, but in
combination with a large negative frequency gradient, the underfrequency protection
can be used at a high setting.

4.6.3.6 Signals
Table 744: DAPFRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

630 series 717

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 745: DAPFRC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate signal for frequency gradient
START BOOLEAN Start signal for frequency gradient
LOWAMPL_BLKD BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude.

4.6.3.7 Settings
Table 746: DAPFRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value. Sign
defines direction
Operation delay time 0.12 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.20 Operate time delay

Table 747: DAPFRC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 748: DAPFRC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Time delay for reset

4.6.3.8 Measured values

Table 749: DAPFRC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
FREQ REAL 50.0 Measured analog signal frequency [Hz]
FREQGRAD REAL 0 Measured analog signal frequency gradient, df/dt.
[Hz/s].
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

718 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.6.3.9 Monitored data

Table 750: DAPFRC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for
1=TRUE frequency gradient
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal for frequency
1=TRUE gradient
LOWAMPL_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Blocking indication due to
1=TRUE low amplitude.
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in percents
of the total operation time

4.6.3.10 Technical data

Table 751: DAPFRC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy df/dt < ±10 Hz/s: ±10 mHz/s
Undervoltage blocking: ±1.5% of the set value or
±0.002 × Un

Start time1)2) Start value = 0.05 Hz/s Typically 110 ms (±15 ms)
df/dtFAULT = ±1.0 Hz/s

Reset time <150 ms

Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±30 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Frequency before fault = 1.0 × fn, fn = 50 Hz

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.6.3.11 Technical revision history

Table 752: DAPFRC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B • Removed one decimal from Reset delay
time and Operate delay time setting
• Internal improvements

4.6.4 Load shedding LSHDPFRQ

4.6.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Load shedding LSHDPFRQ UFLS/R 81LSH

630 series 719

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.6.4.2 Function block

GUID-EF9080CF-8CC2-4140-AF5E-E95F9059B9DF V1 EN

Figure 365: Function block

4.6.4.3 Functionality

The Load shedding function LSHDPFRQ is capable of performing load shedding

based on underfrequency and the rate of change of the frequency. The load that is shed
during the frequency disturbance can be restored once the frequency has stabilized to
the normal level.

The measured system frequency is compared to the set value to detect the
underfrequency condition. The measured rate of change of frequency (df/dt) is
compared to the set value to detect a high frequency reduction rate. The combination
of the detected underfrequency and the high df/dt is used for the activation of the load
shedding. There is a definite time delay between the detection of the underfrequency
and high df/dt and the activation of LSHDPFRQ. This time delay can be set and it is
used to prevent unwanted load-shedding actions when the system frequency recovers
to the normal level.

Once the frequency has stabilized, LSHDPFRQ can restore the load that is shed during
the frequency disturbance. The restoration is possible manually or automatically.

An undervoltage restraint condition is used to disable the load-shedding operation,

avoid decisions based on invalid data or avoid load shedding in the condition of a fault.

The frequency measurement is based on a voltage available only for the preprocessor
function SMAI internally. This voltage is dependent on all connected phase-to-earth
or phase-to-phase voltages. If only one phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage is
connected, that is used.

Throughout this document, “high df/dt” is used to mean “a high rate of

change of the frequency in negative direction.”

4.6.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

720 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The operation of the load-shedding function can be described using a module diagram.
All the modules are explained in the next sections.

Under ST_FRQ
frequency
detection OPR_FRQ

FR
ST_FRG
df/dt
U3P
GRAD detection
OPR_FRG

Load START
shedding
control OPERATE

ST_REST
Restore
MAN_RESTORE
detection
RESTORE
BLK_REST

Low
U1
amplitude LOWAMPL_BLKD
blocking

BLOCK
BLK_OPR
BLK_ST
FR_TIMER
GUID-D6091070-DFC8-4806-96DE-B2B760BCBFFA V3 EN

Figure 366: Functional module diagram. Group signal U3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Underfrequency detection
The underfrequency detection measures the input frequency calculated from the
voltage signal. An underfrequency is detected when the measured frequency drops
below the set value of the Start Val frequency setting.

The underfrequency detection module includes a timer with the Definite Time (DT)
characteristics. Upon detection of underfrequency, operation timer activates the
ST_FRQ output. When the underfrequency timer has reached the value set by
Frequency Op delay, the OPR_FRQ output is activated if the underfrequency
condition still persists. If the frequency becomes normal before the module operates,
the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time,
the timer resets and the ST_FRQ output is deactivated.

The activation of the FR_TIMER input causes the timer to freeze, that is, it holds the
value from the last execution round. The activation of the FR_TIMER input has no
effect on the operation of the ST_FRQ output. However, the activation of the
OPR_FRQ output is delayed by the time for which the FR_TIMER input remains high.

630 series 721

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The timer is reset by the activation of the BLOCK input. It is possible to block the
individual start and operate outputs ST_FRQ and OPR_FRQ by the activation of the
BLK_ST and BLK_OPR inputs respectively.

df/dt detection
The df/dt detection measures the input frequency calculated from the voltage signal
and calculates its gradient. A high df/dt condition is detected by comparing the
gradient to the Start value df/dt setting. The Start value df/dt setting is set in terms of
positive values. The df/dt detection is activated when the frequency gradient decreases
at a faster rate than the set value of Start value df/dt.

The df/dt detection module includes a timer with the DT characteristics. Upon
detection of df/dt, operation timer activates the ST_FRG output. When the timer has
reached the value set by Df/dt operate delay, the OPR_FRG output is activated if the
df/dt condition still persists. If df/dt becomes normal before the module operates, the
reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value of the Reset delay time
setting, the timer resets and the ST_FRG output is deactivated.

Load-shedding control
The way of load shedding, that is, whether to operate based on underfrequency or high
df/dt or both, is defined with the Load shed mode user setting. The valid operation
modes for the Load shed mode settings are "Freq<", "Freq< AND df/dt" and "Freq<
OR df/dt".

Once the selected operation mode conditions are satisfied, the START and OPERATE
output signals are activated.

When the START output is active, the percentage of the elapsed delay time can be
monitored through START_DUR which is available as monitored data.

722 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-EA561B7D-2C93-4FE8-B188-D2EA281DA934 V1 EN

Figure 367: Load-shedding operation in the “Freq< AND df/dt>” mode when both
Freq< and df/dt conditions are satisfied (Rated frequency=50 Hz)

630 series 723

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-5C98E80A-534D-488B-855B-D5D9F1E4FE40 V1 EN

Figure 368: Load-shedding operation in the “Freq< AND df/dt>” mode when only
the df/dt condition is satisfied (Rated frequency=50 Hz)

Restore detection
If after the activation of the OPERATE input the frequency recovers to a level above
the Restore start Val setting, the RESTORE signal output is activated. The RESTORE
output remains active for a 100 ms. The Restore mode setting is used to select the
restoring mode to be "Disabled", "Auto" or "Manual".

724 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Restoring mode Description

Disabled Load restoration is disabled.
Auto In the “Auto” mode, input frequency is continuously compared to the Restore
start Val setting. The restore detection module includes a timer with the DT
characteristics. Upon detection of restoring, the operation timer activates the
ST_REST output. When the timer has reached the value of the Restore delay
time setting, the RESTORE output is activated if the restoring condition still
persists. If the frequency drops below the Restore start Val before the
RESTORE output is activated, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer
reaches the value of the Reset delay time setting, the timer resets and the
ST_REST start output is deactivated.

Manual In the “Manual” mode, a manual restoration is possible through the

MAN_RESTORE input or via communication. The ST_REST output is activated if
the MAN_RESTORE command is available and the frequency has exceeded the
Restore start Val setting. The manual restoration includes a timer with the DT
characteristics. When the timer has reached the set value of the Restore delay
time setting, the RESTORE output is activated if the restoring condition still
persists. If the frequency drops below the Restore start Val setting before the
RESTORE output is activated, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer
reaches the value of the Reset delay time setting, the timer resets and the
ST_REST start output is deactivated.

A condition can arise where the restoring operation needs to be canceled. Activating
the BLK_REST input for the "Auto" or "Manual" modes cancels the restoring
operation. In the "Manual" restoring mode, the cancellation happens even if
MAN_RESTORE is present.

Once the RESTORE output command is cancelled, the reactivation of RESTORE is

possible only after the reactivation of the OPERATE output, that is, when the next
load-shedding operation is detected.

Low amplitude blocking

The voltage is compared to the set MinValFreqMeas setting. If the voltage magnitude
is lower than the set value, the LOWAMPL_BLKD output is activated which resets the
timers of the underfrequency and df/dt detection modules.

MinValFreqMeas is the setting related to the preprocessor function

SMAI. The setting level is compared to the physically connected
voltages. For example, if phase-to-phase voltages are physically
connected (phase-to-earth voltages virtual), the 10% setting results in
ten percent of the normal phase-to-phase voltage. If phase-to-earth
voltages are connected (phase-to-phase voltages virtual), the 10%
setting results in 17 percent of the normal phase-to-earth voltage. This
is assuming the base voltage is set to be the normal/nominal phase-to-
phase voltage.

Undervoltage detection is blocked by the activation of the BLOCK input.

630 series 725

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.6.4.5 Application

An AC power system operates at a defined rated frequency. The nominal frequency in

most systems in the world is 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The nominal frequency is such that the
operating frequency value remains approximately at the nominal frequency value by
a small margin. The safe margin of operation is usually less than ±0.5 Hz. The system
frequency stability is one of the main concerns in the transmission and distribution
network operation and control. To protect the frequency-sensitive electrical
equipment in the network, departure from the allowed band for safe operation should
be inhibited.

Any increase in the connected load requires an increase in the real power generation
to maintain the system frequency. Frequency variations form whenever there are
system conditions that result in an unbalance between the generation and load. The
rate of change of the frequency represents the magnitude of the difference between the
load and generation. A reduction in frequency and a negative rate of change of the
frequency are observed when the load is greater than the generation, and an increase
in the frequency along with a positive rate of change of the frequency are observed if
the generation is greater than the load. The rate of change of the frequency is used for
a faster decision of load shedding. In an underfrequency situation, the load shedding
trips out the unimportant loads to stabilize the network. Thus, loads are normally
prioritized so that the less important loads are shed before the important loads.

During the operation of some of the protective schemes or other system emergencies,
the power system is divided into small islands. There is always a load - generation
imbalance in such islands that leads to a deviation in the operating frequency from the
nominal frequency. This off-nominal frequency operation is harmful to power system
components like turbines and motors. Therefore, such situation must be prevented
from continuing. The frequency-based load-shedding scheme should be applied to
restore the operation of the system to normal frequency. This is achieved by quickly
creating the load - generation balance by disconnecting the load.

As the formation of the system islands is not always predefined, several load-shedding
relays are required to be deployed at various places near the load centers. A quick
shedding of a large amount of load from one place can cause a significant disturbance
in the system. The load-shedding scheme can be made most effective if the shedding
of load feeders is distributed and discrete, that is, the loads are shed at various
locations and in distinct steps until the system frequency reaches the acceptable limits.

Due to the action of load-shedding schemes, the system recovers from the disturbance
and the operating frequency value recovers towards the nominal frequency. The load
that was shed during the disturbance can be restored. The load-restoring operation
should be done stepwise in such a way that it does not lead the system back to the
emergency condition. This is done through an operator intervention or in case of
remote location through an automatic load restoration function. The load restoration
function also detects the system frequency and restores the load if the system
frequency remains above the value of the set restoration frequency for a predefined
duration.

726 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-8FFC488C-BD1F-467C-8540-47606B22AED1 V1 EN

Figure 369: Operation of the load-shedding function

Power system protection by load shedding

The decision on the amount of load that is required to be shed is taken through the
measurement of frequency and the rate of change of frequency (df/dt). At a single
location, many steps of load shedding can be defined based on different criteria of the
frequency and df/dt. Typically, the load shedding is performed in six or four steps with
each shedding increasing the portion of load from five to twenty-five percent of full
load within a few seconds. After every shedding, the system frequency is read back
and further shedding actions are taken only if necessary. In order to take the effect of
any transient, a sufficient time delay should be set.

The value of the setting has to be well below the lowest occurring normal frequency
and well above the lowest acceptable frequency of the system. The setting level, the
number of steps and the distance between two steps (in time or in frequency) depend
on the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The size of the largest
loss of generation compared to the size of the power system is a critical parameter. In
large systems, the load shedding can be set at a high frequency level and the time delay
is normally not critical. In small systems, the frequency start level has to be set at a low
value and the time delay must be short.

If a moderate system operates at 50 Hz, an underfrequency should be set for different

steps from 49.2 Hz to 47.5 Hz in steps of 0.3 – 0.4 Hz. The operating time for the

630 series 727

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

underfrequency can be set from a few seconds to a few fractions of a second stepwise
from a higher frequency value to a lower frequency value.
Table 753: Setting for a five-step underfrequency operation
Load-shedding steps Start Val frequency Frequency Op delay
1 0.984 · Fn (49.2 Hz) 45000 ms
2 0.978 · Fn (48.9 Hz) 30000 ms
3 0.968 · Fn (48.4 Hz) 15000 ms
4 0.958 · Fn (47.9 Hz) 5000ms
5 0.950 · Fn (47.5 Hz) 500 ms

The rate of change of frequency function is not instantaneous since the function needs
time to supply a stable value. It is recommended to have a time delay long enough to
take care of the signal noise.

Small industrial systems can experience the rate of change of frequency as large as 5
Hz/s due to a single event. Even large power systems can form small islands with a
large imbalance between the load and generation when severe faults or combinations
of faults are cleared. Up to 3 Hz/s has been experienced when a small island becomes
isolated from a large system. For normal severe disturbances in large power systems,
the rate of change of the frequency is much less, often just a fraction of 1.0 Hz/s.

Similarly, the setting for df/dt can be from 0.1 Hz/s to 1.2 Hz/s in steps of 0.1 Hz/s to
0.3 Hz/s for large distributed power networks, with the operating time varying from a
few seconds to a few fractions of a second. Here, the operating time should be kept in
minimum for the higher df/dt setting.
Table 754: Setting for a five-step df/dt< operation
Load-shedding steps Start value df/dt Df/dt operate delay
1 -0.005 · Fn /s (-0.25 Hz) 8000 ms
2 -0.010 · Fn /s (-0.50 Hz) 2000 ms
3 -0.015 · Fn /s (-0.75 Hz) 1000 ms
4 -0.020 · Fn /s (-1.00 Hz) 500 ms
5 -0.025 · Fn /s (-1.25 Hz) 250 ms

Once the frequency has stabilized, the shed load can be restored. The restoring
operation should be done stepwise, taking care that it does not lead the system back to
the emergency condition.

728 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 755: Setting for a five-step restoring operation

Load-shedding steps Restoring start Val Restore delay time
1 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 200000 ms
2 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 160000 ms
3 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 100000 ms
4 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 50000 ms
5 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 10000 ms

4.6.4.6 Signals
Table 756: LSHDPFRQ Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group input for voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of load shed function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the operate output of the function
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block of start output of the function
BLK_REST BOOLEAN 0 Cancels activation of restore output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freezes time count of all definite timers to previous
values
MAN_RESTORE BOOLEAN 0 manual activation of restore output

Table 757: LSHDPFRQ Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operation of load shedding
OPR_FRQ BOOLEAN Operate signal for under frequency
OPR_FRG BOOLEAN Operate signal for high df/dt
START BOOLEAN General start. Under frequency or high df/dt
detected
ST_FRQ BOOLEAN Pick-Up signal for under frequency detection
ST_FRG BOOLEAN Pick-Up signal for high df/dt detection
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
ST_REST BOOLEAN Restore frequency attained and restore timer
started
LOWAMPL_BLKD BOOLEAN Signal indicating internal blocking due to low
amplitude

630 series 729

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.6.4.7 Settings
Table 758: LSHDPFRQ Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Load shed mode Freq< - - Freq< Set the operation mode for load shedding
freq< AND dfdt> function
Freq< OR dfdt>
Restore mode Disabled - - Disabled Mode of operation of restore functionality
Auto
Manual
Start Val frequency 35.00 - 60.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency setting/start value
Start value df/dt 0.10 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Setting of frequency gradient for df/dt
detection
Restore start Val 45.00 - 60.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency setting value
Frequency Op delay 0.08 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.08 Time Delay to operate for under frequency
stage
Df/dt operate delay 0.12 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.20 Time Delay to operate for df/dt stage
Restore delay time 0.17 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.30 Time Delay to restore

Table 759: LSHDPFRQ Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation off/On
On

Table 760: LSHDPFRQ Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.05 Time Delay after which the definite timers
will reset

4.6.4.8 Measured values

Table 761: LSHDPFRQ Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of load shed function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the operate output of the function
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block of start output of the function
BLK_REST BOOLEAN 0 Cancels activation of restore output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freezes time count of all definite timers to previous
values
MAN_RESTORE BOOLEAN 0 manual activation of restore output

730 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.6.4.9 Monitored data

Table 762: LSHDPFRQ Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operation of load
1=TRUE shedding
OPR_FRQ BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for under
1=TRUE frequency
OPR_FRG BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate signal for high df/
1=TRUE dt
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - General start. Under
1=TRUE frequency or high df/dt
detected
ST_FRQ BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Pick-Up signal for under
1=TRUE frequency detection
ST_FRG BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Pick-Up signal for high df/
1=TRUE dt detection
RESTORE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Restore signal for load
1=TRUE restoring purposes
ST_REST BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Restore frequency
1=TRUE attained and restore timer
started
LOWAMPL_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal indicating internal
1=TRUE blocking due to low
amplitude
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in percents
of the total operation time

4.6.4.10 Technical data

Table 763: LSHDPFRQ Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = 35...66 Hz
±0.003 Hz

Start time1)2) Load shed mode Typically 175 ms (±15 ms)

Typically 250 ms (±15 ms)
Freq<: fFault = 0.80 × set
Start value
freq< AND dfdt>: df/dt =
0.3 Hz/s
Reset time <190 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±30 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Frequency before fault = 1.2 × fn, fn = 50 Hz

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

630 series 731

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.6.4.11 Technical revision history

Table 764: LSHDPFRQ technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B • Removed one decimal from Reset delay
time, Restore delay time, Df/dt operate delay
and Frequency Op delay setting
• Minimum setting value changed from 0.170
to 0.08, maximum setting value changed
from 60.000 to 200.00 and default setting
value changed from 0.200 to 0.08 for the
Frequency Op delay setting
• Minimum setting value changed from 0.170
to 0.12 for Df/dt operate delay setting
• Internal improvements

4.7 Impedance protection

4.7.1 Distance protection DSTPDIS

4.7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase distance protection DSTPDIS Z< 21, 21P, 21N
function

732 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.7.1.2 Function block

GUID-6231ECEF-A728-430D-A88C-F26653CA4E1E V2 EN

Figure 370: Function block

4.7.1.3 Functionality

Three-phase distance protection DSTPDIS provides a full-scheme distance protection

function for distribution networks where three-phase tripping is allowed for all kinds
of faults.

DSTPDIS has three flexible, configurable impedance zones for protection (Z1, Z2 and
Z3) and two impedance zones for auto-reclosing schemes (ZAR1 and ZAR2).

630 series 733

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-F07C2455-01C2-429B-BB8F-07483C4A9AA0 V1 EN

Figure 371: Zones of DSTPDIS function

The supported zone characteristic shapes are quadrilateral, mho (circular) or bullet
(quadrilateral and mho characteristics combined). Mho can be combined with
directional lines to secure directionality and to enable increased fault resistance
coverage with an offset mho circle.

734 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-C075CCAC-AC5E-4793-B0DB-BCE9ACF7A7FC V1 EN

Figure 372: Possible combinations of Directional mode Zx and Zone

characteristics settings. Pol. here means that the shape of the
characteristic is affected by the selected polarization method of mho
circle (Pol quantity zone = "Cross Pol", "Pos Seq Pol")

The directional lines are polarized with positive sequence voltage for all impedance
measuring elements. In addition, the memory voltage is used with three-phase
impedance measurement elements if the positive sequence voltage drops too low.

DSTPDIS has separate and independent measurement elements for each separate fault
loop in the respective distance protection zone. In addition to the full scheme design,
the separate measuring elements are used for general fault detection and faulted phase
selection.

DSTPDIS supports both fault-detection dependent control of zone timers and zone
dedicated timer control for maximum application flexibility.

The impedance measurement is always done the same way regardless of the zone
shape. The operation is based on the impedance mapping approach where the fault
loop impedance is first calculated and then compared to the zone boundaries. If
impedance is recognized within the operation zone, the corresponding operate output
is activated after the operate time has elapsed.

The impedance measurement is based on full cycle DFT filtered current and voltage
phasors. The minimum operate time that can be achieved is 40...50 ms.

630 series 735

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Average start time

65

SIR = 50
SIR = 30
60 SIR = 10
SIR = 5
SIR = 0.2
Start time [ms]

55

50

45

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Fault location of zone reach [%]
GUID-B65522AA-18C5-4B22-BC71-AE766B6FF45C V1 EN

Figure 373: Average start time of distance protection function according to IEC
60255-121 network models Short line and Long line (50 Hz)

SIR curves are plotted from the data which includes variation of fault location (0…
100% of zone reach, 5% step), fault type (LN, LL, LLN, LLL) and fault inception
angle (0, 30, 60, 90 degrees). Each combination is repeated ten times giving the total
number of 16800 shots. Start times include the delay of relay output contacts.

4.7.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The function consists of sub-functions which are described in the next sections.

736 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-EEDE16EA-76C4-45DD-B99D-0763E18EBD98 V1 EN

Figure 374: Main functionality of DSTPDIS

All outputs and the operation of all sub-functions can be blocked with the BLOCK
binary input signal. In addition, it resets the timers.

Earth-fault detection function

The recognition of an earth fault is an important part in identifying the correct fault
type. This information is used in faulted loop (phase) selection to release the correct
impedance-measuring elements. The earth-fault recognition is always required to
release the phase-to-earth impedance-measuring elements.

The earth-fault detection is indicated with the EARTH_FLT output. The earth-fault
detection criterion can be defined with the "EF detection Mod GFC " setting. The
fundamental criterion is based on the residual current. The residual voltage and
reference neutral current, measured from the transformer neutral point, can be used for
the earth-fault detection criteria.
Table 765: Selection of earth-fault detection criteria
Setting Enumerator name
EF detection Mod GFC • Io
• Io OR Uo
• Io AND Uo
• Io AND Ioref

If the residual current Io is derived from the phase currents either by the summation
connection of CTs, that is, the Holmgreen connection, or by internally summing the
phase currents, there is a risk of a false earth-fault detection due to apparent residual
current from the current transformer errors. This risk can be eliminated using a
stabilized residual current measurement. The stabilization is enabled by setting the EF
Det neutral A GFC setting to "Virtual". The stabilization increases the residual current

630 series 737

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Gnd Op current GFC threshold setting when the maximum phase current exceeds the
base current. The increase is defined with the Stab slope 1 GFC setting. The apparent
residual current may exist during short circuits and in inrush current situations if the
CTs saturate partially. The earth-fault detection function takes the CT saturation into
account with additional stabilization settings Gnd Op current 2 GFC, A Ph Stab value
GFC and Stab slope 2 GFC.

Setting EF Det neutral A GFC to "Measured" disables the stabilization of the residual
current measurement and should be used only when the residual current is measured
with a cable current transformer. The residual current threshold setting for earth-fault
detection is Gnd Op current GFC. If residual current is measured from a transformer
neural point, Gnd Op A Ref GFC is used. This is valid when the setting EF detection
mod GFC is "Io AND Ioref".

GUID-79F7EA98-29B1-4D43-AABA-E42939ECFB71 V1 EN

Figure 375: Stabilized residual current measurement for earth-fault detection

The residual voltage can also be used as a complementary criterion for earth-fault
detection. This is valid when the setting EF detection Mod GFC is "Io OR Uo" or EF
detection Mod GFC is "Io AND Uo". The threshold setting for the residual voltage is
Gnd Str voltage GFC.

Directional function for earth faults

In low-impedance earthed networks, when the System grounding GFC setting is set to
"Low impedance", the earth-fault detection function can be optionally supervised by
a directional function which can be enabled with the Dir Mode EF GFC setting. If Dir
mode EF GFC is set to "Forward" or "Reverse", the earth-fault detection function
becomes directional. In this case, in addition to satisfying the operation criteria, the
detection of an earth-fault requires that the calculated direction of the earth-fault

738 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

matches the Dir mode EF GFC setting. The calculated direction for the earth-fault is
indicated in the DIR_E_FLT output ("Unknown", "Forward", "Reverse", "Both").

The directional function for earth faults is common for all zones and
can therefore only be applied when the directionality of all zones is set
similarly, that is, "Forward" or "Reverse".

The operation characteristic of the directional function is defined by three settings:

Chr angle GFC, Min phase angle GFC and Max phase angle GFC.

GUID-42B80900-4546-4802-9977-2D58C7D53103 V1 EN

Figure 376: Characteristic of the directional function for earth faults

The Chr angle GFC setting, also known as relay characteristic angle or basic angle, is
used to turn the directional characteristic. It has a positive value when the operating
quantity lags the polarizing quantity and a negative value when the operating quantity
leads the polarizing quantity. For low-impedance earthed networks, Chr angle GFC
equals the angle of the fault loop impedance and is typically positive.

The Min phase angle GFC and Max phase angle GFC settings define the width of the
operating sector.

The directional function for earth faults must operate at fault current values below the
magnitude of the load currents. The use of sequence quantities is preferred for
polarizing quantity as the phase quantities are affected by the load currents. Four
possibilities are available and defined by the Pol quantity GFC setting.

630 series 739

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 766: Polarizing quantities for optional directional function for earth fault in low-impedance
earthed networks
Pol quantity GFC Polarizing quantity Operating quantity Description
Zero seq. volt. -U0 I0 Zero-sequence voltage
polarization
Neg. seq. volt. -U2 I2 Negative-sequence
voltage polarization
Zero seq. cur. Ioref I0 Zero-sequence current
polarization
Zro vol.OR cur. -U0 OR Ioref I0 Dual polarization

The polarizing quantity is -U0 and the operating quantity is I0 in case

of zero-sequence voltage polarization.
The polarizing quantity is -U2 and the operating quantity is I2 in case
of negative-sequence polarization.

In case of zero-sequence current polarization "Zero seq. cur.", the zero-sequence

current I0 of the protected line is the operating quantity while another reference zero-
sequence current I0ref is the polarizing quantity. I0ref, for example, could be the current
from the neutral of a power transformer. In case of zero-sequence current polarization,
the relay characteristic angle Chr angle GFC is fixed and is equal to zero degrees. The
zero-sequence current direction must remain unchanged during all network
configurations and faults. Therefore, all transformer configurations or constructions
are not suitable for polarization.

In case of dual polarization "Zro vol. OR cur.", the zero-sequence voltage polarization
and zero-sequence current polarization elements are logically OR:ed. Typically,
when I0 is high, U0 is low, and when I0 is low, U0 is high. Hence the protection can
benefit from both elements as the two polarization methods complement each other.
If the zero-sequence current polarization source is switched off for service, the
flexibility is increased as the zero-sequence voltage polarization can be used.

Faulted loop phase selection

A reliable identification of a fault and faulted phases is needed to guarantee a selective
operation of the distance protection. This information is used to release correct
measuring elements of the protection zones.

In DSTPDIS, the faulted phase selection can be done in various ways and defined with
the Phase Sel mode GFC setting.
Table 767: Supported methods for phase selection
Setting Enumerator value
Phase Sel mode GFC • Overcurrent
• Voltdep overcur
• Under impedance

740 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The “Overcurrent” method is the basic method for identifying the faulted phases. It
can be used in applications where the fault current magnitude exceeds the load current
despite the possible changes in the network configuration and fault type.

The “Voltdep overcur” method combines overcurrent and undervoltage conditions.

An undervoltage condition allows lower current threshold settings and increases the
sensitivity of the fault detection.

The “Under impedance” method uses fault loop impedance for identifying the faulted
phases. The underimpedance characteristic can be either quadrilateral or circular in
shape. The sensitivity of the fault detection is defined by an independent setting in
resistive and reactive reaches. The underimpedance method is supervised by a load
encroachment logic which ensures that the load impedance does not interfere with the
faulted phase selection.

All phase selection methods require that all three phase currents are measured and all
three phase-to-earth voltages are available. In case only phase-to-phase voltages are
available (Phase voltage Meas = “PP without Uo”), only phase-to-phase measuring
loops can be released for measurement. The release of phase-to-earth fault measuring
elements is then blocked, RELEASE_PE = “No releases”.

The operation of the faulted phase selection function is highly dependent on the earth-
fault detection function, which can be supervised by the directional function in low
impedance earthed networks. The phase preference or faulted loop selection logic can
be set to filter the faulted phases to be released for measurement in the protection
zones.

The general indication of a fault is given in the binary-output START_GFC. The

faulted phase information can be found from the integer-type output signal
STARTS_GFC.

Table 768: Enumeration values for integer output signal STARTS_GFC

Enumeration name Value

No starts 0
Start PhA 1
Start PhB 2
Start PhA, PhB 3
Start PhC 4
Start PhC, PhA 5
Start PhB, PhC 6
St PhA, PhB, PhC 7

The fault loops released for measurement are indicated with the integer-type output
signals RELEASE_PE and RELEASE_PP. These outputs may be filtered by the
phase preference of the faulted loop selection logic.

630 series 741

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 769: Enumeration values for integer output signal RELEASE_PE

Enumeration name Value

No releases 0
Release PhA 1
Release PhB 2
Release PhA, PhB 3
Release PhC 4
Release PhC, PhA 5
Release PhB, PhC 6
Release PhA, B, C 7

Table 770: Enumeration values for integer output signal RELEASE_PP

Enumeration value Value

No releases 0
Release PhAB 1
Release PhBC 2
Rel PhAB, PhBC 3
Release PhCA 4
Rel PhAB, PhCA 5
Rel PhBC, PhCA 6
PhAB, PhBC, PhCA 7
Release PhABC 8
Rel PhAB, PhABC 9
Rel PhBC, PhABC 10
PhAB, PhBC, PhABC 11
Rel PhCA, PhABC 12
PhAB, PhCA, PhABC 13
PhBC, PhCA, PhABC 14
PhAB, BC, CA, ABC 15

The phase selection function can be set to issue a trip as the faulted phase selection
uses independent measuring elements from the distance protection zones. This can be
applied as a back-up protection for the measurement zones. The time delay of the trip
signals is defined with the "Operate delay GFC" setting. The trip signal is the binary
output OPERATE_GFC.

All the outputs from the faulted loop phase selection function (OPERATE_GFC,
START_GFC, STARTS_GFC, RELEASE_PE, RELEASE_PP, EARTH_FLT,
XC_FLT, DIR_E_FLT and CONFLICT_GFC) can be blocked and the timers are also
reset with the binary-input signal BLOCK_GFC. The start outputs can be blocked with
the binary-input signal BLK_ST_GFC. The OPERATE output can be blocked with the

742 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

binary-input signal BLK_OP_GFC. The timers of the fault measuring elements in the
phase selection function can be stopped with the binary-input signal FR_T_GFC.

Faulted loop phase selection by the overcurrent method

The "Overcurrent" method is the basic method used for identifying the faulted phases.
It can be used in applications where the fault current magnitude exceeds the load
current despite the possible changes in the network configuration and fault type.

In the overcurrent-based faulted phase selection method, the amplitude of each phase
current is compared to the Ph Str A Ph Sel GFC threshold setting. If the phase current
magnitude exceeds the value of Ph Str A Ph Sel GFC, that particular phase is faulty.

Earth-fault recognition is always required to release a phase-to-earth

impedance-measuring element.

Table 771: Conversion from element start to output signals

Start of element START_GFC STARTS_GFC RELEASE_PE RELEASE_PP
IA> & TRUE Start PhA Release PhA No releases
EARTH_FLT

IB> & TRUE Start PhB Release PhB No releases

EARTH_FLT

IC> & TRUE Start PhC Release PhC No releases

EARTH_FLT

IA> & IB> TRUE Start PhA, PhB No releases Release PhAB

IB> & IC> TRUE Start PhB, PhC No releases Release PhBC

IC> & IA> TRUE Start PhC, PhA No releases Release PhCA

IA> & IB> & TRUE Start PhA, PhB Release PhA, PhB Release PhAB
EARTH_FLT

IB> & IC> & TRUE Start PhB, PhC Release PhB, PhC Release PhBC
EARTH_FLT

IC> & IA> & TRUE Start PhC, PhA Release PhC, PhA Release PhCA
EARTH_FLT

IA> & IB> & IC> 1) TRUE St PhA, PhB, PhC No releases Release PhABC

IA> & IB> & IC> & TRUE St PhA, PhB, PhC No releases Release PhABC
EARTH_FLT2)

1) This applies for near 3-phase fault and in case voltages are still relatively high, all PP releases will be
given.
2) This applies for near 3-phase fault with EF indication. In case voltages are still relatively high, all PE and
PP releases (except PhABC) will be given.

In case of a high-impedance earthed network, a phase preference logic can be added

to complement the phase selection in case of a cross-country fault. This can affect the
RELEASE_PE signals.

630 series 743

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

In case of a low-impedance earthed network, a faulted loop selection logic can be

added to complement the phase selection in case of a two-phase-to-earth fault. This
can affect the RELEASE_PE and RELEASE_PP signals.

Faulted phase selection, the voltdep overcur method

The "Voltdep overcur" method combines the overcurrent and undervoltage
conditions. The phase current amplitude is compared to the Ph Str A Ph Sel GFC
threshold setting but a lower current Ph Lo A Ph Sel GFC threshold is valid during an
undervoltage condition. This increases the sensitivity of the fault detection. The
amplitude of phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltages is compared to the Ph V Ph
Sel GFC and PP V Ph Sel GFC settings. In case of a three-phase fault, the phase-to-
phase voltages are monitored and compared to the PP V Ph Sel GFC setting.

Earth-fault recognition is required to release a phase-to-earth

impedance measuring element.

GUID-0E69CC47-562A-422A-992D-9117001E840E V1 EN

Figure 377: Overcurrent/undervoltage characteristics

Table 772: Conversion from element start to output signals

Start of element START_GFC STARTS_GFC RELEASE_PE RELEASE_PP
IA> & UA< & TRUE Start PhA Release PhA No release
EARTH_FLT |
IA>> & EARTH_FLT

IB> & UB< & TRUE Start PhB Release PhB No release
EARTH_FLT |
IB>> & EARTH_FLT

IC> & UC< & TRUE Start PhC Release PhC No release
EARTH_FLT |
IC>> & EARTH_FLT

IA> & IB> & UAB< | TRUE Start PhA, PhB No release Release PhAB
IA>> & IB>>

Table continues on next page

744 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Start of element START_GFC STARTS_GFC RELEASE_PE RELEASE_PP

IB> & IC> & UBC< | TRUE Start PhB, PhC No release Release PhBC
IB>> & IC>>

IC> & IA> & UCA< | TRUE Start PhC, PhA No release Release PhCA
IC>> & IA>>

IA> & IB> & UAB< & TRUE Start PhA, PhB Release PhA, Release PhAB
EARTH_FLT | PhB
IA>> & IB>> &
EARTH_FLT

IB> & IC> & UBC< & TRUE Start PhB, PhC Release PhB Release PhBC
EARTH_FLT | PhC
IB>> & IC>> &
EARTH_FLT

IC> & IA>& UCA< & TRUE Start PhC, PhA Release PhC, Release PhCA
EARTH_FLT | PhA
IC>> & IA>> &
EARTH_FLT

IA> & IB> & IC> & TRUE St PhA, PhB, No release Release PhABC
UAB<& UBC<& UCA<| PhC
IA>> & IB>> & IC>> 1)

IA>& IB >& IC TRUE St PhA, PhB, No release Release PhABC

<&UAB<&UBC<&UCA PhC
<& EARTH_FLT|
IA>> & IB>> & IC>> &
EARTH_FLT2)

1) This applies for near 3-phase fault and in case voltages are still relatively high, all PP releases will be
given.
2) This applies for near 3-phase fault with EF indication. In case voltages are still relatively high, all PE and
PP releases (except PhABC) will be given.

Ix> the phase current exceeds the Ph Lo A Ph Sel GFC setting.

Ix>> the current exceeds the Ph Str A Ph Sel GFC setting.
Ux< the phase voltage is under the "Ph V Ph Sel GFC" setting.
Uxy< means the phase-to-phase voltage is under the PP V Ph Sel GFC setting.

In case of a high-impedance earthed network, a phase preference logic can be added

to complement the phase selection in case of a cross-country fault. This can affect the
RELEASE_PE signals.

In case of a low-impedance earthed network, a faulted loop selection logic can be

added to complement the phase selection in case of a two-phase-to-earth fault. This
can affect the RELEASE_PE and RELEASE_PP signals.

Faulted phase selection, the underimpedance method

The "Under impedance" method uses fault loop impedance for identifying the faulted
phases. The advantage of the underimpedance criterion is that the sensitivity of the
fault detection is independent of the source impedance. The underimpedance function

630 series 745

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

has six impedance measuring elements. The phase-to-earth measuring elements are
calculated:

UA
ZA =
IA
GUID-34FC67B7-F0E9-4083-9E27-76B6CAD3CC82 V1 EN (Equation 127)

UB
ZB =
IB
GUID-F4A6E6E6-83BD-48E6-9135-7BACD7C6BE59 V1 EN (Equation 128)

UC
ZC =
IC
GUID-E82B402A-6878-4C95-85B0-5A0E65F71C95 V1 EN (Equation 129)

The phase-to-phase measuring elements are based on the formula:

U AB
Z AB =
I AB
GUID-2172DAEE-B80F-455F-B2ED-67C84F55D211 V1 EN (Equation 130)

U BC
Z BC =
I BC
GUID-061DEFA3-D7B6-41BF-859F-DB964323403B V1 EN (Equation 131)

U CA
Z CA =
I CA
GUID-FC87CF5F-04B1-4481-A407-83275287EE0B V1 EN (Equation 132)

The faulted phase identification is done by comparing the measured impedance to the
operating characteristics in the impedance domain. If a measured fault loop
impedance is inside the characteristics, the corresponding phase(s) is identified as
faulty.

The earth return path impedance is included in the calculated fault

loop impedance of the phase-to-earth measuring element.

The shape of the characteristic is selected with the Z Chr Mod Ph Sel GFC setting.
Two shapes are available and they have flexible configuration:
• "Mho (circular)", Non-directional mho
• "Quadrilateral", Non-directional quadrilateral.

The two shapes can be flexibly configured. It is possible to set the reactive reaches
independently in forward and reverse direction and for phase-to-earth (Gnd) and
phase-to-phase (PP) measurement elements, for example, the X Gnd Fwd reach GFC,
X Gnd Rv reach GFC, X PP Fwd reach GFC and X PP Rv reach GFC settings. Also,
the resistive reach in case of quadrilateral characteristic can be set independently of

746 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

reactive reaches, for example, the Ris Gnd Rch GFC and Resistive PP Rch GFC
settings. The characteristic is always mirror-symmetric around the reactance-axis.

The impedance settings are in primary ohms.

In case of heavy loaded feeders, the optional load encroachment logic can be enabled
with the Load Dsr mode GFC setting. The logic reserves an area for load impedance
defined by the Ris reach load GFC and Angle load area GFC settings.

The underimpedance characteristics in case of phase-to-earth measuring elements are

illustrated in Figure 378 and Figure 379. Similar characteristics apply also for phase-
to-phase measuring elements with independent settings.

GUID-E4A115A0-CBEF-42BF-9C3E-F65F6F42144F V1 EN

Figure 378: Circular mho underimpedance characteristics

GUID-2FF39588-DE16-45C9-84F5-38B8BB11CDA9 V1 EN

Figure 379: Quadrilateral underimpedance characteristics

The earth-fault recognition is always required to release a phase-to-

earth impedance measuring element.

630 series 747

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 773: Conversion from element start to output signals

Start of element START_GFC STARTS_GFC RELEASE_PE RELEASE_PP
ZA< & TRUE Start PhA Release PhA No release
EARTH_FLT

ZB< & TRUE Start PhB Release PhB No release

EARTH_FLT

ZC< & TRUE Start PhC Release PhC No release

EARTH_FLT

ZAB< TRUE Start PhA, PhB No release Release PhAB

ZBC< TRUE Start PhB, PhC No release Release PhBC

ZCA< TRUE Start PhC, PhA No release Release PhCA

ZAB< & TRUE Start PhA, PhB Release PhA, Release PhAB
EARTH_FLT PhB

ZBC< & TRUE Start PhB, PhC Release PhB, Release PhBC
EARTH_FLT PhC

ZCA< & TRUE Start PhC, PhA Release PhC, Release PhCA
EARTH_FLT PhA

ZAB< & ZBC< & TRUE Start PhA, PhB, No release PhABC
ZCA< 1) PhC

ZA< & ZB< & ZC< TRUE Start PhA, PhB, No release PhABC
& EARTH_FLT 2) PhC

1) This applies for near 3-phase fault. In case voltages are still relatively high, all PP releases could be
given, depending on impedances seen inside GFC zone.
2) This applies for near 3-phase fault with EF indication. In case voltages are still relatively high, all or
some PE and PP releases (except PhABC) could be given, depending on impedances seen inside
GFC zone.

In case of a high-impedance earthed network, a phase preference logic can be added

to complement the phase selection in case of a cross-country fault. This can affect the
RELEASE_PE signals.

In case of a low-impedance earthed network, a faulted loop selection logic can be

added to complement the phase selection in case of a two-phase-to-earth fault. This
can affect the RELEASE_PE and RELEASE_PP output signals.

Cross-country fault detection function for high impedance earthed

networks
In isolated and high impedance earthed networks, the overvoltages produced by a
single-phase earth fault may lead to a cross-country fault, where two simultaneously
single-phase earth faults are present in the system but in different locations and
phases. The cross-country fault is hazardous because the magnitude of the fault
current through earth can be as high as in the case of a two-phase short-circuit fault.
The protection must therefore remove the cross-country fault quickly without
sacrificing the selectivity. This can be done with the help of a phase preference logic
which is activated by the cross-country fault detection function. The phase preference
logic transforms the fault back to an ordinary single-phase earth fault by tripping
selectively one of the faulted feeders.

748 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Only the cross-country detecting function becomes active if the network is either
isolated or high impedance earthed (System grounding GFC = "High impedance").

The fault detection is based on monitoring two quantities:

• Residual current
• Phase-to-phase voltages.

A cross-country fault is detected if:

• An earth fault is detected, EARTH_FLT = TRUE.
AND
• The calculated residual current exceeds the value of the Gnd Op A XC GFC
setting. This setting value should exceed the highest expected single-phase earth-
fault current. The residual current is calculated from phase currents and also
monitored because the cable current transformer saturates easily due to the high
fault current.
AND
• The residual overcurrent condition must be valid at least for the duration defined
by the Cross-country Dl GFC setting. This shows that the detection is not misled
by the high magnitude initial transients of a single-phase earth fault.
OR
• Any phase-to-phase voltage drops below the value of the PP voltage XCF GFC
setting. The undervoltage condition is based on the fact that during a single-phase
earth fault, the phase-to-phase voltages are unaffected in isolated and high
impedance earthed networks. The fulfilment of this criterion avoids the need for
any delays in combination with the residual overcurrent condition.

The detection of a cross-country fault is indicated by the XC_FLT output signal.

GUID-0085EBAA-5AED-4E57-B3BD-156656CE15D7 V1 EN

Figure 380: Cross-country fault detection logic for high impedance earthed
networks

630 series 749

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Phase preference logic for high impedance earthed networks

The phase preference logic for high impedance earthed networks is a supplement to
the faulted phase identification function. It provides selective filtering of phase-to-
earth measurement elements in case of a cross-country fault or double earth-fault in
isolated and high impedance earthed networks.

The logic releases the preferred phase-to-earth loop for measurement when a cross-
country fault with two faulted phase-to-earth loops are detected. If only one faulted
phase-to-earth loop is detected by phase selection logic (GFC), another faulted phase-
to-earth loop is determined based on analyzing voltages. The phase preference scheme
must be set in the same way for the entire system so that all distance relays measure
the same preferred phase-to-earth loop. As a result, the cross-country fault is changed
back into and ordinary single-phase earth-fault by tripping selectively one of the
faulted feeders.

The phase preference logic influences only the selection of the phase-earth loops and
has no effect on the selection of the phase-to-phase loops. The influence is seen in the
RELEASE_PE output. The logic does not affect the RELEASE_PP or START/
STARTS outputs.

The phase preference logic is applicable only in isolated and high impedance earthed
networks with System grounding GFC = "High impedance".

All schemes except "No-filter" require a cross-country fault detection XC_FLT =

TRUE; otherwise all the phase-to-earth measuring elements are blocked,
RELEASE_PE = No release. This guarantees that tripping at single-phase earth fault
in high impedance earthed network is blocked.

If a cross-country fault is detected, XC_FLT = TRUE and only a single fault loop can
be identified as faulty by the faulted phase selection function, then that loop is directly
selected for measurement. In such case, simultaneous tripping of both faulted feeders
during a cross-country is expected.

Example: consider a cross-country fault where phases A and B become faulted

simultaneously. All relays, R1, R2, R3 and R4, are equipped with an "Acyc C-A-B"
phase preference scheme.

GUID-FAEE560E-977D-4BFE-B863-FA853399EEC2 V1 EN

Figure 381: Cross-country fault (or double earth-fault) in high impedance earthed
system

750 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The expected operations of the relays are:

• R1: The cross-country fault cannot be detected as the residual current does not
flow through the R1 relay. The phase-to-phase loop AB is measured in the
forward direction but the estimated impedance represents an average impedance
between two fault locations and therefore is not seen in the Z1 zone.
• R2: The cross-country fault is detected as large residual current flowing through
the R2 relay. Phase A earth fault is seen in forward direction and phase B earth
fault in reverse direction. Based on "Acyc C-A-B" phase preference scheme,
phase A is selected for measurement. The R2 relay operates without delay and
opens the CB2 circuit breaker.
• R3: The cross-country fault is detected when a large residual current flows
through the R3 relay. The phase A earth fault is seen in reverse direction and
phase B earth fault in forward direction. Based on the "Acyc C-A-B" phase
preference scheme, phase A is selected for measurement. As fault direction does
not coincide with zone direction, the R3 relay does not operate.
• R4: Same as the R1 relay.

As a result of the circuit-breaker CB2 operation, the cross-country fault is transformed

back to an ordinary single-phase earth fault.

The tables summarize the available phase preference logic schemes and their
operation in different fault scenarios. The logic is selected with the Ph Prf mode Hi Z
GFC setting. In case the logic is not required, then the "No-filter" option should be
selected.

"No-filter" option does not block the single-phase earth-faults, and

therefore this option should be used with caution.

Table 774: Output RELEASE_PE with supported phase preference logic schemes for high
impedance earthed networks and their operation in case of single phase start with and
without cross-country fault detection

Ph Prf mode Hi Z Faulted loops

GFC A& B& C& A & XC_FLT B & XC_FLT C & XC_FLT
EARTH_FLT EARTH_FLT EARTH_FLT
1 No-filter Release PhA Release PhB Release Release Release Release PhC
PhC PhA PhB
2 No No release No release No release Release Release Release PhC
preferenc PhA PhB
e
3 Cyc A-B- No release No release No release Release Release Release PhC
C-A PhA PhB
4 Cyc A-C- No release No release No release Release Release Release PhC
B-A PhA PhB
5 ACyc A- No release No release No release Release Release Release PhC
B-C PhA PhB
6 ACyc A- No release No release No release Release Release Release PhC
C-B PhA PhB
7 ACyc B- No release No release No release Release Release Release PhC
A-C PhA PhB

Table continues on next page

630 series 751

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Ph Prf mode Hi Z Faulted loops

GFC A& B& C& A & XC_FLT B & XC_FLT C & XC_FLT
EARTH_FLT EARTH_FLT EARTH_FLT
8 ACyc B- No release No release No release Release Release Release PhC
C-A PhA PhB
9 ACyc C- No release No release No release Release Release Release PhC
A-B PhA PhB
10 ACyc C- No release No release No release Release Release Release PhC
B-A PhA PhB

Table 775: Supported phase preference logic schemes for high impedance earthed networks and
their operation in case two phase start without cross-country fault detection

Ph Prf mode Hi Z Faulted loops

GFC A&B B&C C&A A&B B&C C&A
EARTH_FLT EARTH_FLT EARTH_FLT EARTH_FLT EARTH_FLT EARTH_FLT
1 No-filter Release PhA, Release Release Release Release Release
PhB PhB, PhC PhC, PhA PhAB PhBC PhCA
2 No No release No release No release Release Release Release
preferenc PhAB PhBC PhCA
e
3 Cyc A-B- No release No release No release Release Release Release
C-A PhAB PhBC PhCA
4 Cyc A-C- No release No release No release Release Release Release
B-A PhAB PhBC PhCA
5 ACyc A- No release No release No release Release Release Release
B-C PhAB PhBC PhCA
6 ACyc A- No release No release No release Release Release Release
C-B PhAB PhBC PhCA
7 ACyc B- No release No release No release Release Release Release
A-C PhAB PhBC PhCA
8 ACyc B- No release No release No release Release Release Release
C-A PhAB PhBC PhCA
9 ACyc C- No release No release No release Release Release Release
A-B PhAB PhBC PhCA
10 ACyc C- No release No release No release Release Release Release
B-A PhAB PhBC PhCA

Table 776: Supported phase preference logic schemes for high impedance earthed networks and
their operation in case two phase starts with cross-country fault detection

Ph Pref logic Hi Faulted loops

Imp A & B XC_FLT B&C C&A A&B B&C C&A
XC_FLT XC_FLT XC_FLT XC_FLT XC_FLT
1 No-filter Release PhA, Release Release Release Release Release
PhB PhB, PhC PhC, PhA PhAB PhBC PhCA
2 No Release PhA, Release Release Release Release Release
preferenc PhB PhB, PhC PhC, PhA PhAB PhBC PhCA
e
3 Cyc A-B- Release PhA Release PhB Release PhC Release Release Release
C-A PhAB PhBC PhCA
4 Cyc A-C- Release PhB Release Release PhA Release Release Release
B-A PhC PhAB PhBC PhCA
5 ACyc A- Release PhA Release PhB Release PhA Release Release Release
B-C PhAB PhBC PhCA
6 ACyc A- Release PhA Release Release PhA Release Release Release
C-B PhC PhAB PhBC PhCA
7 ACyc B- Release PhB Release PhB Release PhA Release Release Release
A-C PhAB PhBC PhCA

Table continues on next page

752 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Ph Pref logic Hi Faulted loops

Imp A & B XC_FLT B&C C&A A&B B&C C&A
XC_FLT XC_FLT XC_FLT XC_FLT XC_FLT
8 ACyc B- Release PhB Release PhB Release PhC Release Release Release
C-A PhAB PhBC PhCA
9 ACyc C- Release PhA Release Release PhC Release Release Release
A-B PhC PhAB PhBC PhCA
10 ACyc C- Release PhB Release Release PhC Release Release Release
B-A PhC PhAB PhBC PhCA

Faulted loop phase selection for low impedance earthed networks

The faulted loop selection logic for low-impedance earthed networks serves as a
supplement to the faulted phase identification function and it provides a selective
filtering of measurement element in case of a two-phase-to-earth fault in low-
impedance earthed networks. The individual earth faults can be located close to each
other:

GUID-5E4A334F-E562-4F4F-9165-0B426D8B6573 V1 EN

Figure 382: Two-phase-to-earth fault in low-impedance earthed system

Impedance can be measured during a two-phase-to-earth fault when individual earth

faults are located in the same direction and they are in close proximity to each other.
Generally, too large an impedance is measured for the lagging phase-to-earth loop, for
example phase B in an AB-E-fault. Similarly, low Impedance is measured for the
leading phase-to-earth loop, for example phase A in an AB-E-fault. The
corresponding phase-to-phase loop is measured correctly, for example phase-to-
phase loop AB in an AB-E-fault.

630 series 753

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-3DC6652A-5E20-4EEA-AE5B-E956980D23F1 V1 EN

Figure 383: Impedance measured during a two-phase-to-earth fault

The available faulted loop selection logic schemes allows blocking the phase-earth
loop of the leading phase to prevent overreaching Ph Prf mode Lo Z GFC = "BLK
leading PE".

It is also possible to block the lagging phase-earth loop, Ph Prf mode Lo Z GFC =
"BLK lagging PE". In case only the phase-to-phase loop or phase-to-earth loops are
to be measured, select the Ph Prf mode Lo Z GFC = "PP only" or Ph Prf mode Lo Z
GFC = "PE only" settings and if the logic is not required, "All loops" option should be
selected.

The tables summarize the available faulted loop selection logic schemes and their
operations. The logic is selected with the "Ph Prf mode Lo Z GFC" setting.
Table 777: Supported faulted loop phase selection schemes for low impedance earthed networks
and their influence on the RELEASE_PE output

Ph Prf mode Lo Z GFC

Element start "All loops" "PE only" "PP only" "BLK leading "BLK lagging
PE" PE"
RELEASE_PE
A&B& Release PhA, Release PhA, No release Release PhB Release PhA
EARTH_FLT PhB PhB
B&C& Release PhB, Release PhB, No release Release PhC Release PhB
EARTH_FLT PhC PhC
C&A& Release PhC, Release PhC, No release Release PhA Release PhC
EARTH_FLT PhA PhA

754 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 778: Supported faulted loop phase selection schemes for low impedance earthed networks
and their influence on the RELEASE_PP output

Ph Prf mode Lo Z GFC

Element start "All loops" "PE only" "PP only" "BLK leading "BLK lagging
PE" PE"
RELEASE_PP
A&B& Release PhAB No release Release PhAB Release PhAB Release PhAB
EARTH_FLT

B&C& Release No release Release Release Release

EARTH_FLT PhBC PhBC PhBC PhBC
C&A& Release No release Release Release Release
EARTH_FLT PhCA PhCA PhCA PhCA

Impedance protection zones

DSTPDIS has three flexible and configurable impedance zones, which are Z1, Z2, Z3,
and two additional impedance zones, ZAR1 and ZAR2, that can be applied for
autoreclosing AR schemes, for example the local acceleration scheme.

630 series 755

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-F07C2455-01C2-429B-BB8F-07483C4A9AA0 V1 EN

Figure 384: Zones of DSTPDIS function: ZAR1 and ZAR2

The AR-zones, ZAR1 and ZAR2, can be enabled only when the autorecloser function
is included in the configuration and set to operate. In the configuration, the
AR_ZONES group output from the AR-function is connected to the AR_ZONES group
input of DSTPDIS.

Each zone in DSTPDIS provides three independent phase-to-earth and three phase-to-
phase measuring elements. A three-phase fault is measured with a dedicated
measuring element. Each measuring element is controlled by the faulted loop phase

756 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

selection function. Based on the recognized fault type, the release-signals are given
for the corresponding measuring elements.

DSTPDIS supports both fault detection dependent control of zone timers and zone
dedicated timer control for maximum application flexibility. Zone dedicated timer
control is enabled when Zone timer mode is set to “Independent”. In this case operate
delay timers of protection zones are independent from each other and starts when fault
is seen inside the particular protection zone. Fault detection dependent control of zone
timers is enabled when Zone timer mode is set to “Common”. In this case operate delay
timers of all protection zones starts simultaneously and immediately when the fault is
seen by the GFC. The operation of a particular zone is given after the set Operate delay
time (considering the fault type), is detected. The actual operate time is the value
calculated from the initial fault detection and it is not affected, for example, in case the
fault moves between zones.

The general indication of fault for each zone is given in the START_Zx (x = 1...3,
AR1, AR2) binary output. The faulted phase information can be found from the
STARTS_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) integer type output signal.

Table 779: Enumeration values for integer output signal STARTS_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2 )

Enumeration name Value

No starts 0
Start PhA 1
Start PhB 2
Start PhA, PhB 3
Start PhC 4
Start PhC, PhA 5
Start PhB, PhC 6
Start PhA, PhB, PhC 7

The operate signal from each zone is the OPERATE_Zx (x = 1...3,

AR1, AR2) binary output signal.

The output from each zones can be blocked and the timers are also reset with the
BLOCK_Zx (x = 1...3 AR1, AR2) binary input signal. The start outputs can be blocked
with the BLK_ST_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) binary input signal and the operate output
can be blocked with the BLK_OP_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) binary input signal. The
timers of phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase fault measuring elements can be stopped
with the FR_T_PE_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) and FR_T_PP_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1,
AR2) binary input signals.

The CONFLICT_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) output data is an assisting integer type
output which supervises the validity of a tilt angle of quadrilateral characteristics so
that the characteristics always produces a closed boundary. It can have the values: No
conflict, PhE angle tilt, PhPh angle tilt and PhE,PhPh tilt. If the actual value for Angle
tilt Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) is not valid, the value of Angle tilt Zx is forced to zero.

630 series 757

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Impedance measurement
The impedance measurement is based on a full cycle DFT-filtered current and voltage
phasors providing the operating time for approximately two to three cycles.

DSTPDIS provides three independent phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase measuring

elements per zone and the three-phase fault is measured with a dedicated
measurement element.

The impedance measurement is done similarly regardless of the zone shape. The
operation is based on impedance mapping approach where the fault loop impedance
is first calculated and then compared with the zone boundaries. If impedance is
recognized inside the operation zone, the corresponding operate output is activated
after the operate time has elapsed.

Phase-to-earth impedance measuring elements

The phase-to-earth impedance measuring elements provide the basic earth-fault
protection in direct or low impedance earthed networks. The earth-fault protection is
enabled with the Op Mod Gnd loops Znx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) = "Enabled" setting.
The enabling requires that all three phase-to-earth voltages are measured. Otherwise,
the release of the earth-fault measuring elements is automatically blocked.

The reach of phase-to-earth measuring elements is based on loop impedance

Z 1 + Z N + RF = ( R1 + ( R0 − R1) / 3) + j ⋅ ( X 1 + ( X 0 − X 1) / 3) + RF
GUID-F9E9588C-0C04-48DC-A7CE-3DC9EB38276A V1 EN (Equation 133)

758 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-FC3E00A3-D2E5-44C8-98CA-C3B3CB7F0BD5 V1 EN

Figure 385: The fault loop impedance model for phase-to-earth impedance
measuring elements

R1 Positive sequence resistance from measuring point to fault location

X1 Positive sequence reactance from measuring point to fault location

RN Earth return path resistance = (R0 - R1)/3 from measuring point to fault loaction

XN Earth return path reactance = (X0 - X1)/3 from measuring point to fault location

R0 Zero sequence resistance from measuring point to fault location

X0 Zero sequence reactance from measuring point to fault location

RF Physical fault resistance between phase and earth (includes arc and earthing resistances)

Considering the load in case of a single line to earth fault, conventional distance
protection might overreach at the exporting end and underreach at the importing end.
DSTPDIS has a load compensation functionality which increases the security in such
applications. The load compensation is enabled with the Load Com zone x (x = 1...3,
AR1, AR2) setting.

The load compensation is only used with single phase-to-earth faults.

Load compensation is not used if multiple phases are included into
fault (more than one single earth fault releases).

630 series 759

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-7B58F330-E0FF-479F-B433-25EE831555BF V1 EN

Figure 386: Operation principle of load compensation functionality

When three-phase feeders are placed close to each other, a mutual inductive zero
sequence coupling of the current path exists. This has an impact during earth faults. If
no special measures are taken, this will lead to errors in the impedance calculation.
The residual current of the parallel line induces a voltage in the protection line and
changes the measured voltage at the IED location. The influence depends on the
system configuration, that is, the magnitude and polarity of the residual current in a
parallel line. The phase-to-earth impedance measuring elements in DSTPDIS take the
zero-sequence mutual coupling into account in impedance calculation. The
compensation is enabled and set with the Par line Com zone x, Mutual R0 zone and
Mutual X0 zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) settings. It is required that the residual current
of the parallel line is available and connected to the I3P_PAR input. The earth-current
balance logic is implemented to prevent malfunctioning of the IED on the healthy
parallel line. This means that the parallel compensation functionality is internally
blocked when the ratio between residual current of the parallel line and protected lines
exceeds the Fact EF current Bal setting.

The parallel line compensation functionality is only used with single

phase-to-earth faults. Parallel line compensation is not used if
multiple phases are included into fault (more than one single earth
fault releases).

760 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-510EFF41-3C62-4024-BACC-8884B7743A9C V1 EN

Figure 387: Operation principle of parallel line compensation functionality

The time delay of operation is defined with the Gnd operate Dl Znx (x = 1...3, AR1,
AR2) setting. The timer can be disabled with the Gnd Op Dl mode Znx = "Disable"
setting. This blocks the OPERATE_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) output of the phase-to-
earth measuring elements.

Phase-to-phase impedance measuring elements

The phase-to-phase distance protection is suitable as a basic protection function
against two-phase short circuit faults in all kinds of networks, regardless of the
treatment of the neutral point. The short circuit fault protection is enabled with the Op
Mod PP loops Znx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) = "Enabled" setting.

The reach of the phase-to-phase measuring elements is based on the loop impedance
RF R
Z + = R1 + j ⋅ X1 + F
1 2 2
GUID-F26B67C9-E462-4857-B73B-48AC5EE46AE5 V1 EN (Equation 134)

630 series 761

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-0DA458BD-E68F-4685-9B2C-FBC72FBD7270 V1 EN

Figure 388: The fault loop impedance model for phase-to-phase impedance
measuring elements

R1 Positive-sequence resistance from measuring point to fault location

X1 Positive-sequence reactance from measuring point to fault location

RF Physical fault resistance between phases, for example, arc resistance

The phase-to-phase impedance measuring elements measure only

half of the physical fault resistance between phases. This must be
taken into account when the resistive reach of the phase-to-phase
elements is set (that is, setting the value of 5 ohm corresponds 5+5=10
ohm of physical arc resistance between phases).

The resistive reach setting is common for phase-to-phase and three-phase impedance
measuring elements.

The time delay of operation is defined with the PP operate delay Znx (x = 1...3, AR1,
AR2) setting. The timer can be disabled with the PP Op delay Mod Znx = "Disabled"
setting. This blocks the OPERATE_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) output of the phase-to-
phase measuring elements.

Three-phase impedance measuring element

DSTPDIS has a dedicated measuring element for three-phase short-circuit fault for
each zone. The three-phase measuring element utilizes the positive sequence
quantities for a fault loop impedance estimation which increases the accuracy by
reducing the influence of line parameter asymmetry. This is advantageous especially
in case of non-transposed, asymmetrical lines. The three-phase impedance measuring
element is enabled together with the phase-to-phase impedance elements by the OP
Mod PP loops Znx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) = "Enabled" setting.

The reach of three-phase measuring element is based on the loop impedance:

762 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Three-phase measuring element reach = Z1 + RF = R1 + j X1 + RF

GUID-86A2A6CF-4650-4335-B1F2-7A16E29C12F9 V1 EN (Equation 135)

GUID-0A98A6B5-BEE5-48DA-B053-7D7331F74BB3 V1 EN

Figure 389: The fault loop impedance model for three-phase impedance
measuring element

R1 Positive sequence resistance from measuring point to fault location

X1 Positive sequence reactance from measuring point to fault location

RF Physical fault resistance per phase, for example, arc resistance

The three-phase impedance measuring element measures the physical

fault resistance per phase. The resistive reach setting is common for
three-phase and phase-to-phase impedance measuring elements.

The time delay of operation is defined with the PP operate delay Znx (x = 1...3, AR1,
AR2) setting. The timer can be disabled with the PP Op delay Mod znx = "Disabled"
setting. This will block the OPERATE_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) output of the three-
phase measuring elements.

Entering the line reach

The line reach is entered in primary ohms. The impedance format is selected with the
Impedance mode Zn = "Rectangular" for the vectors R, X and "Polar" for the
magnitude and angle.

Impedance mode Zn = Rectangular

In case of phase-to-phase or three-phase impedance measuring elements, the line
reach is defined with:

• Resistive reach: R1 zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2)

• Reactive reach: X1 zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2).

630 series 763

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

In case of non-directional characteristics, the reactive reach in reverse direction is

defined with the X1 reverse zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) setting. The characteristic
line angle, denoted as α, is the same for both forward and reverse direction.

GUID-4C1DE86E-2076-460B-A627-9538BCA22237 V1 EN

Figure 390: Settings which define the line reach for phase-to-phase or three
phase impedance measuring elements in case of Impedance mode
Zn = "Rectangular"

In case of phase-to-earth impedance measuring elements, the line reach is defined

with:

• Resistive reach :(2*R1 zone x + R0 zone x)/3, (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2)

• Reactive reach : (2*X1 zone x + X0 zone x)/3, (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2).

764 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-2570E424-A4D9-4E79-8D48-4940D07D9975 V1 EN

Figure 391: Settings which define line reach for phase-to-earth impedance
measuring elements in case of Impedance mode Zn = "Rectangular"
and forward or reverse directionality

In case of non-directional characteristics, the reactive reach in reverse direction is

defined with the X1 reverse zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) setting. The total reactive
reach in reverse direction includes a part which is common to both forward and reverse
direction. This part is automatically calculated based on the values of R1 zone x, R0
zone 0, X1 zone x and X0 zone x settings. The characteristic line angle, denoted as α,
is the same for forward and reverse direction.

630 series 765

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-C1268DE7-169A-4BCD-9896-05E65B5A4919 V1 EN

Figure 392: Settings which define the line reach for phase-to-earth impedance
measuring elements in case of Impedance mode Zn = "Rectangular"
and non-directional directionality

Impedance mode Zn = Polar

In case of phase-to-phase or three-phase impedance measuring elements, the line
reach is defined with:

• Z1 zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2)

• Z1 angle zone x (x = 1...3 AR1, AR2)

In case of non-directional characteristics, the reactive reach magnitude in reverse

direction is defined with the Z1 reverse zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) setting. The
characteristic line angle, Z1 angle zone x, is the same for forward and reverse
direction.

766 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-E0E4261B-794C-4C2B-8B24-CA95B086B619 V1 EN

Figure 393: Settings which define line reach for phase-to-phase or three-phase
impedance measuring elements in case of Impedance mode Zn =
"Polar"

In case of phase-to-earth impedance measuring elements, the line reach is defined

with:

• Z1 zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2)

• Z1 angle zone x (x = 1...3 AR1, AR2)
• Factor K0 zone x (x = 1...3 AR1, AR2)
• Factor K0 angle Znx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2)

The reach magnitude and angle are:

Magnitude = abs ( Z1 + Z1× K N )
GUID-E4CF913D-749C-4077-B57E-8DE8D7015AB3 V1 EN (Equation 136)

Angle = angle( Z1 + Z1K N )

GUID-FFD16052-88A1-4059-BC2C-D0B5DD1BDFCA V1 EN (Equation 137)

Z 1 = Z1 zone x(cos( Z1 angle zone x) + j sin( Z1 angle zone x))

GUID-BD71218F-BDC4-4664-9596-620C039E785D V1 EN

K N = Factor K 0 zone x(cos( Factor K 0angle znx) + j sin( Factor K 0angle znx))
GUID-1E27246E-79FD-4ADA-A5F1-A724E45FE89D V1 EN

In case of non-directional characteristics, the reactive reach in reverse direction is

defined with the Z1 reverse zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) setting.
Z 1R = Z1 reverse zone x(cos( Z1 angle zone x) + j sin( Z1 angle zone x))
GUID-9779A9CD-9A0A-4218-85E6-C2F09473EF88 V1 EN (Equation 138)

630 series 767

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The total reactive reach in reverse direction includes a part which is defined by the
residual compensation factor KN. The characteristic line angle, denoted as α, is the
same for forward and reverse direction.

GUID-4F0CDEF1-F5CF-47CF-84C8-E645A1DFCF24 V1 EN

Figure 394: Settings which define line reach for phase-to-earth impedance
measuring elements in case of Impedance mode Zn = "Polar"

Protection zone characteristics

DSTPDIS has both “Quadrilateral” and “Mho (circular)” characteristics available for
the protection zones and they can be combined also with the bullet characteristic. The
shape of a tripping characteristic can be set independently for phase-to-earth and for
phase-to-phase or three-phase impedance elements. The zone shape is defined with
the Impedance Chr Gnd Zn setting for phase-to-earth impedance elements, and with
the Impedance Chr PP Zn setting for phase-to-phase/three-phase impedance
elements. The alternatives are "Quadrilateral", "Mho (circular)", "Mho dir line",
"Offset dir line" and "Bullet (combi)".

All impedance values defining the zone shape is entered in primary ohms. Angles are
given in degrees.

Quadrilateral characteristic
If the zone has the "Quadrilateral" shape, DSTPDIS has a polygonal tripping
characteristic.

768 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-E8BBCC67-C630-4686-A01A-4331C833DAC7 V1 EN

Figure 395: Tripping characteristic for phase-to-earth impedance elements in

case the zone shape is quadrilateral. The tilt angle is set to
compensate for possible under or overreaching.

The reach in the reactive direction is defined by the line reach independently for
phase-to-earth and for phase-to-phase/three-phase elements. The resistive reach is
defined at the minimum and maximum reactive reach with the Min Ris Gnd Rch Znx,
Max Ris Gnd Rch Znx, Min Ris PP Rch Znx, Max Ris PP Rch Znx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2)
settings. In case of a non-directional zone, only the Min Ris Gnd Rch Znx, Min Ris PP
Rch Znx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) settings are valid. The resistive reach can be set
independently for phase-to-earth and for phase-to-phase or three-phase elements.

In case of phase-to-earth impedance elements, the resistive reach value corresponds to

the physical fault resistance between phase and earth including arc and earthing
resistance.

In case of phase-to-phase impedance elements, the resistive reach value corresponds

to the half of the physical fault resistance between the phases. If there is a three-phase
impedance element, the resistive reach value corresponds to the physical fault
resistance per phase.

The directionality of the quadrilateral zone is defined with two independent

directional boundary lines. See chapter Directional lines for details.

The reactive reach can be adjusted by tilting the top reactance boundary line by an
angle with Tilt angle zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2). The negative value decreases the
tripping zone area while the positive value increases the tripping area. The negative
value is used in case of underreaching zones to compensate a possible overreaching.
The positive value is used in case of overreaching zones to compensate a possible
underreaching.

630 series 769

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-A0AF25AD-F990-4056-88F5-34723BA1C1FE V1 EN

Figure 396: Operation principle of top reactance line tilting

The CONFLICT_Zx (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) output data is an assisting integer-type

output which supervises the validity of the tilt angle. It can have the values: No
conflict, PhE angle tilt, PhPh angle tilt and PhE, PhPh tilt. If the actual value for Tilt
angle zone x (x = 1...3, AR1, AR2) is not valid, which means that the polygon
boundaries do not form a close loop, the value of Tilt angle zone x is forced to zero.

Directional lines
The direction of a zone is defined with the Directional mode Znx = "Non-directional",
"Forward" or "Reverse" setting. The directionality of each zone can be set
independently from other zones. For example, zones Z1 and Z2 can be set in the
"Forward" direction and Z3 set in the "Reverse" direction.

The directionality of a quadrilateral zone is defined with two independent directional

lines. The directional lines can be included into the mho characteristics to secure the
directionality or to transform the non-directional mho characteristic into a directional
one.

The directional lines are adjusted with the Min phase angle zone and Max phase angle
zone settings. These settings are common for all the zones. The angles are given in
degrees.

770 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-17446A91-C260-4683-BE0A-B778541C1F32 V1 EN

Figure 397: Settings that adjust directional lines in case of quadrilateral

characteristics

If there is no fault present, the calculated direction of the fault or load current is
indicated in the DIRECTION = "Unknown", "Forward", "Reverse" or "Both" output.
The direction is based on the measurement of the three-phase impedance element.

Voltage memory
The directional lines are polarized with a positive sequence voltage for all impedance
measuring elements. The memory voltage is used with three-phase impedance
measurement elements if the positive sequence voltage is too low. This assures the
correct directional measurement in case of close-in three-phase faults, where the
voltages on all three phases are close to zero. The memory voltage is calculated using
the positive-sequence voltage measured before the fault occurred. The memory
function enables the function to operate up to a maximum of three seconds after a total
loss of voltage. This time can be set with the Voltage Mem time setting.

Switch onto fault function (CVRSOF) is recommended to be used

together with distance protection. CVRSOF accelerates and secures
the operation of the protection, in case a close-in three-phase fault is
detected immediately after circuit breaker closing.

Voltage memory functionality for close-in three phase faults supports AR sequences
up to 300 seconds.

Mho circular characteristic

When the zone characteristic is "Mho (circular)", the distance protection has a circular
tripping characteristic. The zone reach is defined independently by the line reach for
phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase/three-phase elements. The resistive reach of the
tripping characteristic depends on the selected polarization method defined with the
Pol quantity zone setting (Pol quantity zone = "Cross Pol", "Pos seq Pol"). The non-
directional mho characteristics is an exception being independent from the selected
polarization method. It is always explicitly defined by the reach settings and thus fixed
in the impedance plane.

630 series 771

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 780: Polarization methods and corresponding polarization voltages

Fault loop "Cross Pol" "Pos seq Pol"
ZA j·UL23/√3 U1

ZB j·UL31/√3 U1·1∠-120°

ZC j·UL12/√3 U1·1∠120°

ZAB j·(UL23-UL31)/√3 U1·√3·1∠30°

ZBC j·(UL31-UL12)/√3 U1·√3·1∠-90°

ZCA j·(UL12-UL23)/√3 U1·√3·1∠150°

ZABC U11)

1) Regardless of the selected polarization method, the three-phase fault measuring element always uses
a positive sequence voltage for polarization. Memory voltage is included in the polarization voltage to
secure directionality in case the positive sequence voltage becomes too small.

In case of cross-polarization "Cross Pol", the polarization voltages is in theory

quadrature to the fault loop voltage. The phase angle of the polarization voltage is
rotated 90 degrees to match the original fault loop voltage. The cross-polarization
expands the tripping characteristic according to the prevailing system conditions. In
case of short-circuit faults, the circle expands as a function of the source impedance
magnitude Z1source. In case of an earth fault, the circle expands as a function of the
source impedance Z1source, Z0source and earthing impedance magnitude ZE as
(2*Z1source + Z0source)/3 +ZE.

GUID-C8A7570F-11B4-4BDB-A833-CEAFAC96EB72 V2 EN

Figure 398: Tripping characteristic in case the zone characteristic is "Mho

(circular)" and Pol quantity zone is "Cross Pol"

In case of positive-sequence polarization "Pos seq Pol", the polarization voltage is the
positive-sequence voltage. The voltage phase angle is rotated to match the original
fault loop voltage. The positive-sequence polarization expands the tripping

772 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

characteristic according to the prevailing system conditions. In case of short-circuit

faults, the circle expands as a function of the source impedance magnitude Z1source/2.
In case of an earth fault, the circle expands as a function of source impedance and
earthing impedance magnitude:(Z1source + Z0source)/3 +ZE.

GUID-16B49D5C-2C1B-4C16-AF67-DDB75983B16F V1 EN

Figure 399: Tripping characteristic in case the zone characteristic is "Mho

(circular)" and Pol quantity zone is "Pos seq Pol"

In case of cross and positive-sequence polarization, the expansion of the mho circle is
a positive feature as the fault resistance coverage is increased. The reach of the zone
is not affected by the expansion. The greatest expansion is obtained with cross-
polarization.

The shape of the off-set mho (non-directional mho) characteristic is independent from
the selected polarization method. The off-set mho is selected with the Imp zone shape
and Directional mode Znx settings (Imp zone shape = "Mho (circular)" and
Directional mode Znx = "Non-directional"). It is always explicitly defined by the
reach settings and thus fixed in the impedance plane.

630 series 773

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-2A5B8628-6823-4C7A-BDE4-748DD4A88E37 V1 EN

Figure 400: Tripping characteristic for phase-to-phase or three-phase

impedance measuring elements in case Imp zone shape is "Mho
(circular)" and Directional mode Znx is "Non-directional". On the left,
the Impedance mode Zn is "Rectangular". On the right, Impedance
mode Zn is "Polar".

GUID-11313BFE-988D-411E-8767-E5A6E09C3889 V1 EN

Figure 401: Tripping characteristic for phase-to-earth impedance measuring

elements in case Imp zone shape is "Mho (circular)" and Directional
mode Znx is "Non-directional". On the left, the Impedance mode Zn is
"Rectangular". On the right, Impedance mode Zn is "Polar".

Adding directional lines into circular mho charateristic

Directional lines which are always included in the directional quadrilateral
characteristic can also be included in the mho characteristics to secure the
directionality or to transform the non-directional mho characteristics into a directional
one.

Directional lines with mho are available only when the zone is set to directional, that
is, Directional mode Znx is "Forward" or "Reverse".

774 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The directionality of the directional mho characteristic is secured with directional

lines by setting the impedance zone shape to "Mho dir line". The directional mho
characteristic can also be created by adding directional lines in the offset mho
characteristic. This is done by selecting the impedance zone shape as "Offset dir line".

GUID-C075CCAC-AC5E-4793-B0DB-BCE9ACF7A7FC V1 EN

Figure 402: Possible combinations of the Directional mode Zx and zone

characteristics settings. Pol. in the figure means that the shape of the
characteristic is affected by the selected polarization method of the
mho circle, Pol quantity zone = "Cross Pol" and "Pos Seq Pol"

Bullet combi characteristic

In case the impedance zone shape equals to "Bullet (combi)", the distance protection
has a tripping characteristic which is a combination of the quadrilateral and mho. All
settings relevant to the quadrilateral and mho are applicable. The shape of the "Bullet
(combi)" characteristic is affected by the selected polarization method of the mho
circle (Pol quantity zone = "Cross Pol", "Pos seq Pol").

The directionality of the "Bullet (combi)" characteristic is defined by the directional

lines when Directional mode Zx is "Forward" or "Reverse".

630 series 775

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-D6A4B225-F76D-40C7-8D9D-364787F35E8A V1 EN

Figure 403: Bullet combi tripping characteristic. Pol, in the figure means the
shape of the characteristic is affected by the selected polarization
method of the mho circle, Pol quantity zone = "Cross Pol", "Pos seq
Pol"

4.7.1.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (p.u). These p.u. values
are relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA.
The IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-
related settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3".
Similarly, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3" are supported for
the residual current or voltage-related settings. One of the groups to be used with the
Base value Sel phase or Base value Sel Res settings must be selected.

4.7.1.6 Recorded data

The required information for later fault analysis is recorded when the recording
function of DSTPDIS is triggered. The triggering can either be internal or external.
Internal triggering occurs every time a zone is operating.
Table 781: Recorded data for the phase selection function
Parameter name Description
n Recording time GFC Recording date
n RELEASE_PE GFC Release signals for PE-loops, GFC
n RELEASE_PP GFC Release signals for PP/3P-loops, GFC
n EARTH_FLT GFC Indication of a single-phase earth-fault, GFC
n XC_FLT GFC Indication of a cross-country fault (high imp.
earthed), GFC
n DIR_E_FLT GFC Earth-fault direction (low imp. earthed), GFC
n DIRECTION Direction of fault or load
n Zones OPERATE Operate signals of all zones

776 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The direction of the fault is indicated with the parameter n DIRECTION ("Unknown",
"Forward", "Reverse" or "Both"). In case of a no-fault condition, the direction of the
load current seen by a three-phase fault measuring element is indicated.

The parameter n Zones OPERATE can have the values (0...31):

:
Table 782: Enumeration values and names for the parameter n Zones OPERATE
Enumerator value Enumerator name
0 No Zn operates
1 Zn1
2 Zn2
3 Zn1,2
4 Zn3
5 Zn1,3
6 Zn2,3
7 Zn1,2,3
8 AR1
9 Zn1,AR1
10 Zn2,AR1
11 Zn1,2,AR1
12 Zn3,AR1
13 Zn1,3,AR1
14 Zn2,3,AR1
15 Zn1,2,3,AR1
16 AR2
17 Zn1,AR2
18 Zn2,AR2
19 Zn1,2,AR2
20 Zn3,AR2
21 Zn1,3,AR2
22 Zn2,3,AR2
23 Zn1,2,3,AR2
24 AR1,AR2
25 Zn1,AR1,AR2
26 Zn2,AR1,AR2
27 Zn1,2,AR1,AR2
28 Zn3,AR1,AR2
29 Zn1,3,AR1,AR2
30 Zn2,3,AR1,AR2
31 Zn1,2,3,AR1,AR2

630 series 777

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Additionally, the zone which has operated generates a data record.

Table 783: Parameter names and respective functions
Parameter name Description
n Recording time Zx Recording date
n DIR_LOOP_R Zx direction resistance, Zone Zx
n DIR_LOOP_X Zx direction reactance, Zone Zx
n FLTLOOP_RFST Zx PE-loop resistance (1st), Zone Zx
n FLTLOOP_XFST Zx PE-loop reactance (1st), Zone Zx
n FLTLOOP_RSND Zx PE-loop resistance (2nd), Zone Zx
n FLTLOOP_XSND Zx PE-loop reactance (2nd), Zone Zx
n FLTLOOP_RPP Zx PP-loop resistance, Zone Zx
n FLTLOOP_XPP Zx PP-loop reactance, Zone Zx
n FLTPH_X PE-phase reactance, Zone 1

n DIR_LOOP_R Zx and n DIR_LOOP_X Zx are the loop resistance and reactance from
the impedance calculation used in directional discrimination for the zones. Depending
on the released fault loops, the calculated fault loop impedance can be read from the
parameters n FLTLOOP_RFST Zx, n FLTLOOP_XFST Zx and n FLTLOOP_RPP Zx,
n FLTLOOP_XPP Zx. In case two phase-to-earth loops are released simultaneously
for measurement, the second phase-to-earth impedance can be found from the
parameters n FLTLOOP_RSND Zx and n FLTLOOP_XSND Zx. The corresponding
positive sequence phase to earth-fault reactance can be found from parameters n
FLTPH_X.

The impedances are shown in primary ohms.

During external triggering (input signal TRIGG_REC), the recorded data of all zones
and the phase selection function are recorded.

There are a total of three sets of recorded data which are saved in data banks 1, 2 and
3. The data bank 1 holds the most recent recorded data and the older data are moved
into the following banks (1->2 and 2->3) when triggering occurs. When all three
banks have data and a new triggering occurs, the latest data is placed into bank 1 and
the data in bank 3 becomes overwritten by the data from bank 2.

4.7.1.7 Application

DSTPDIS provides a fast and reliable protection for overhead lines and power cables.
DSTPDIS is applied in distribution and sub-transmission networks where three-phase
tripping is allowed for all kinds of faults.

778 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-8CCC2537-4568-4097-A173-87398731E593 V1 EN

Figure 404: Application scope of DSTPDIS

Typically these networks are operated in ring or meshed type of configurations. It is

also characteristic for these networks that the switching state is changed frequently
due to daily operation and load flow considerations. The networks also include
varying capacities of distributed generation. This makes it impossible to apply simple
overcurrent based schemes. In these kind of networks, DSTPDIS is used to provide a
fast and selective protection for overhead lines and power cables. It can also be applied
for radial feeders to increase the sensitivity of the protection, especially if the short
circuit power of the source is low or it is changing due to network operation.

From selectivity point of view, it is advantageous that in the protection chain all
functions in different positions operate according to the same measuring principle.
Therefore, DSTPDIS can also be applied for the backup protection of main
transformers and buses. This way the selectivity with the distance protection of the
outgoing lines is easier to achieve.

GUID-B45F50FA-E707-4C55-BFD1-96E3B01A102B V1 EN

Figure 405: Typical network configurations for DSTPDIS application

630 series 779

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

DSTPDIS has three flexible configurable impedance zones for protection (Z1, Z2 and
Z3) and two impedance zones for autoreclosing schemes (ZAR1 and ZAR2). ZAR1
can be used in a local acceleration scheme and ZAR2 to block autoreclosure in the
cable section of a feeder. The autoreclosing related zones can be enabled only when
the autoreclosing function is included in the configuration and it is set operational.

Phase-to-earth distance protection serves as a basic earth-fault protection in solidly or

low impedance earthed networks. Together with the phase preference logic, it also
serves as a selective protection function at cross-country faults in isolated or Petersen
coil compensated networks. In certain applications system earthing is changed during
operation from high impedance to low impedance earthed system due to fault location
procedures. It is possible to use DSTPDIS during such an application by setting
System grounding GFC to ""From input"" and by providing information about the
type of earthing though binary input SYS_EARTHING. Low SYS_EARTHING input
indicates low impedance earthing system.

DSTPDIS is suitable as a basic protection function against two and three-phase faults
in all kinds of networks, regardless of the treatment of the neutral point. The
independent setting of the reach in the reactive and the resistive direction makes it
possible to create a fast and selective short circuit protection in many applications.

4.7.1.8 Signals
Table 784: DSTPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for phase and measured or virtual Io
SIGNAL currents
I3P_PAR GROUP - Group signal for measured Io current from parallel
SIGNAL line
I3P_REF GROUP - Group signal for Io current for polarization or EF
SIGNAL detection
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltages and virtual or measured
SIGNAL Uo
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset)
SYS_EARTHING BOOLEAN 0 Network earthing method
TRIGG_REC BOOLEAN 0 External triggering for all recorded data
AR_ZONES GROUP - Enabling connection from autorecloser for AR
SIGNAL zones
BLOCK_GFC BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), GFC
BLK_OP_GFC BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, GFC
BLK_ST_GFC BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, GFC
FR_T_GFC BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of all fault loops, GFC
BLOCK_Z1 BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), Zone Z1
BLK_OP_Z1 BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, Zone Z1
BLK_ST_Z1 BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, Zone Z1
FR_T_PE_Z1 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PE-loops, Zone Z1
Table continues on next page

780 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

FR_T_PP_Z1 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PP/3P-loops, Zone Z1
BLOCK_Z2 BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), Zone Z2
BLK_OP_Z2 BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, Zone Z2
BLK_ST_Z2 BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, Zone Z2
FR_T_PE_Z2 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PE-loops, Zone Z2
FR_T_PP_Z2 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PP/3P-loops, Zone Z2
BLOCK_Z3 BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), Zone Z3
BLK_OP_Z3 BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, Zone Z3
BLK_ST_Z3 BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, Zone Z3
FR_T_PE_Z3 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PE-loops, Zone Z3
FR_T_PP_Z3 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PP/3P-loops, Zone Z3
BLOCK_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), Zone AR1
BLK_OP_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, Zone AR1
BLK_ST_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, Zone AR1
FR_T_PE_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PE-loops, Zone AR1
FR_T_PP_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PP/3P-loops, Zone AR1
BLOCK_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), Zone AR2
BLK_OP_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, Zone AR2
BLK_ST_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, Zone AR2
FR_T_PE_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PE-loops, Zone AR2
FR_T_PP_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PP/3P-loops, Zone AR2
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal for resetting registers

Table 785: DSTPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE_GFC BOOLEAN Time delayed operate-signal, GFC
START_GFC BOOLEAN General start-signal, GFC
STARTS_GFC INTEGER Start-signals for phases A, B and C, GFC
RELEASE_PE INTEGER Release signals for PE-loops, GFC
RELEASE_PP INTEGER Release signals for PP/3P-loops, GFC
EARTH_FLT BOOLEAN Indication of a single phase earth-fault, GFC
XC_FLT BOOLEAN Indication of a cross-country-fault (high imp.
earthed), GFC
DIR_E_FLT INTEGER Earth-fault direction (low imp. earthed), GFC
OPERATE_Z1 BOOLEAN Time delayed operate signal, Zone Z1
START_Z1 BOOLEAN General start-signal, Zone Z1
STARTS_Z1 INTEGER Start signals for phases A, B and C, Zone Z1
OPERATE_Z2 BOOLEAN Time delayed operate signal, Zone Z2
START_Z2 BOOLEAN General start-signal, Zone Z2
Table continues on next page

630 series 781

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Description

STARTS_Z2 INTEGER Start signals for phases A, B and C, Zone Z2
OPERATE_Z3 BOOLEAN Time delayed operate signal, Zone Z3
START_Z3 BOOLEAN General start-signal, Zone Z3
STARTS_Z3 INTEGER Start signals for phases A, B and C, Zone Z3
OPERATE_ZAR1 BOOLEAN Time delayed operate signal, Zone AR1
START_ZAR1 BOOLEAN General start-signal, Zone AR1
STARTS_ZAR1 INTEGER Start signals for phases A, B and C, Zone AR1
OPERATE_ZAR2 BOOLEAN Time delayed operate signal, Zone AR2
START_ZAR2 BOOLEAN General start-signal, Zone AR2
STARTS_ZAR2 INTEGER Start signals for phases A, B and C, Zone AR2
DIRECTION INTEGER Direction of fault or load
DIR_LOOP_R REAL Real part of the impedance used in dir. evaluation,
Zone Z1
DIR_LOOP_X REAL Imaginary part of the impedance used in dir. eval.,
Zone Z1
FLTLOOP_RFST REAL Real part of the first PE-loop impedance, Zone Z1
FLTLOOP_XFST REAL Imaginary part of the first PE-loop impedance,
Zone Z1
FLTLOOP_RSND REAL Real part of the second PE-loop impedance, Zone
Z1
FLTLOOP_XSND REAL Imaginary part of the second PE-loop impedance,
Zone Z1
FLTLOOP_RPP REAL Real part of the PP/3P-loop impedance, Zone Z1
FLTLOOP_XPP REAL Imaginary part of PP/3P-loop impedance, Zone Z1
FLTPH_X REAL Phase to earth reactance in phase domain, Zone 1

4.7.1.9 Settings
Table 786: DSTPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Phase Sel mode GFC Overcurrent - - Overcurrent Phase selection method
Voltdep overcur
Under impedance
EF detection Mod GFC Io - - Io Earth-fault (EF) detection method
Io OR Uo
Io AND Uo
Io AND Ioref
Operate delay GFC 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay to operate, GFC
Ph Str A Ph Sel GFC 0.10 - 10.00 pu 0.01 2.00 Phase current start value, PSL
Ph Lo A Ph Sel GFC 0.10 - 10.00 pu 0.01 0.80 Phase current start value, voltage dep.
over current, PSL
Ph V Ph Sel GFC 0.10 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.80 PE-voltage start value, voltage dep. over
current, PSL
Table continues on next page

782 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PP V Ph Sel GFC 0.10 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.80 PP-voltage start value, voltage dep. over
current, PSL
Z Chr Mod Ph Sel GFC Quadrilateral - - Quadrilateral Impedance characteristic,
Mho (circular) underimpedance, PSL
Load Dsr mode GFC Off - - Off Enable load discrimination,
On underimpedance, PSL
X Gnd Fwd reach GFC 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 React. reach in fwd. dir. for PE-loops,
underimpedance, PSL
X Gnd Rv reach GFC 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 React. reach in rev. dir. for PE-loops,
underimpedance, PSL
Ris Gnd Rch GFC 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Resistive reach for PE-loops,
underimpedance, PSL
X PP Fwd reach GFC 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 React. reach in fwd. dir. for PP-loops,
underimpedance, PSL
X PP Rv reach GFC 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 React. reach in rev. dir. for PP-loops,
underimpedance, PSL
Resistive PP Rch GFC 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Resistive reach for PP-loops,
underimpedance, PSL
Ris reach load GFC 1.00 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 80.00 Resistive reach for load discrimination,
underimpedance, PSL
Angle load area GFC 5 - 45 Deg 1 25 Load discrimination angle,
underimpedance, PSL
Gnd Op current GFC 0.01 - 10.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Basic start value for residual curr., EF-
detection function
Gnd Op A Ref GFC 0.01 - 10.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Transformer neutral curr. start val., EF-
detection function
Gnd Str voltage GFC 0.02 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.15 Residual voltage start value, EF-detection
function
Gnd Op A XC GFC 0.10 - 10.00 pu 0.01 0.20 Residual current start value, XC-fault
detection function
PP voltage XCF GFC 0.10 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.80 PP-voltage start value, XC-fault detection
function
Directional mode Zn1 Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode, Zone Z1
Forward
Reverse
Op Mod PP loops Zn1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable PP/3P-loop measurement, Zone
Enabled Z1
PP Op delay Mod Zn1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable operate timer for PP/3P-loops,
Enabled Zone Z1
R1 zone 1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence resistive zone reach,
Zone Z1
X1 zone 1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactive zone reach,
Zone Z1
X1 reverse zone 1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. reactive zone reach in rev. dir.,
non-dir. Zone Z1
Z1 zone 1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 56.57 Positive sequence zone reach, Zone Z1
Z1 angle zone 1 15 - 90 Deg 1 45 Positive sequence line angle, Zone Z1
Z1 reverse zone 1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 56.57 Positive sequence zone reach in rev. dir.,
non-dir. Zone Z1
Table continues on next page

630 series 783

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Min Ris PP Rch Zn1 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Minimum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops,
Zone Z1
Max Ris PP Rch Zn1 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Maximum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops,
Zone Z1
PP operate delay Zn1 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Time delay to operate of PP/3P-loops,
Zone Z1
Op Mod Gnd loops Zn1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable PE-loop measurement, Zone Z1
Enabled
Gnd Op Dl mode Zn1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable operate timer for PE-loops, Zone
Enabled Z1
Load Com zone 1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable load compensation for PE-loops,
Enabled Zone Z1
R0 zone 1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence resistive zone reach, Zone
Z1
X0 zone 1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence reactive zone reach, Zone
Z1
Factor K0 zone 1 0.0 - 4.0 - 0.1 1.0 Residual compensation factor,
magnitude, Zone Z1
Factor K0 angle Zn1 -135 - 135 Deg 1 0 Residual compensation factor, angle,
Zone Z1
Min Ris Gnd Rch Zn1 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Minimum resistive reach of PE-loops,
Zone Z1
Max Ris Gnd Rch Zn1 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Maximum resistive reach of PE-loops,
Zone Z1
Gnd operate Dl Zn1 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Time delay to operate of PE-loops, Zone
Z1
Directional mode Zn2 Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode, Zone Z2
Forward
Reverse
Op Mod PP loops Zn2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable PP/3P-loop measurement, Zone
Enabled Z2
PP Op delay Mod Zn2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable operate timer for PP/3P-loops,
Enabled Zone Z2
R1 zone 2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence resistive zone reach,
Zone Z2
X1 zone 2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactive zone reach,
Zone Z2
X1 reverse zone 2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. reactive zone reach in rev. dir.,
non-dir. Zone Z2
Z1 zone 2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 56.57 Positive sequence zone reach, Zone Z2
Z1 angle zone 2 15 - 90 Deg 1 45 Positive sequence line angle, Zone Z2
Z1 reverse zone 2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 56.57 Positive sequence zone reach in rev. dir.,
non-dir. Zone Z2
Min Ris PP Rch Zn2 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Minimum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops,
Zone Z2
Max Ris PP Rch Zn2 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Maximum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops,
Zone Z2
PP operate delay Zn2 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to operate of PP/3P-loops,
Zone Z2
Table continues on next page

784 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Op Mod Gnd loops Zn2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable PE-loop measurement, Zone Z2
Enabled
Gnd Op Dl mode Zn2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable operate timer for PE-loops, Zone
Enabled Z2
Load Com zone 2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable load compensation for PE-loops,
Enabled Zone Z2
R0 zone 2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence resistive zone reach, Zone
Z2
X0 zone 2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence reactive zone reach, Zone
Z2
Factor K0 zone 2 0.0 - 4.0 - 0.1 1.0 Residual compensation factor,
magnitude, Zone Z2
Factor K0 angle Zn2 -135 - 135 Deg 1 0 Residual compensation factor, angle,
Zone Z2
Min Ris Gnd Rch Zn2 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Minimum resistive reach of PE-loops,
Zone Z2
Max Ris Gnd Rch Zn2 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Maximum resistive reach of PE-loops,
Zone Z2
Gnd operate Dl Zn2 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay to operate of PE-loops, Zone
Z2
Directional mode Zn3 Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode, Zone Z3
Forward
Reverse
Op Mod PP loops Zn3 Disabled - - Disabled Enable PP/3P-loop measurement, Zone
Enabled Z3
PP Op delay Mod Zn3 Disabled - - Enabled Enable operate timer for PP/3P-loops,
Enabled Zone Z3
R1 zone 3 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence resistive zone reach,
Zone Z3
X1 zone 3 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactive zone reach,
Zone Z3
X1 reverse zone 3 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. reactive zone reach in rev. dir.,
non-dir. Zone Z3
Z1 zone 3 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 56.57 Positive sequence zone reach, Zone Z3
Z1 angle zone 3 15 - 90 Deg 1 45 Positive sequence line angle, Zone Z3
Z1 reverse zone 3 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 56.57 Positive sequence zone reach in rev. dir.,
non-dir. Zone Z3
Min Ris PP Rch Zn3 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Minimum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops,
Zone Z3
Max Ris PP Rch Zn3 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Maximum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops,
Zone Z3
PP operate delay Zn3 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to operate of PP/3P-loops,
Zone Z3
Op Mod Gnd loops Zn3 Disabled - - Disabled Enable PE-loop measurement, Zone Z3
Enabled
Gnd Op Dl mode Zn3 Disabled - - Enabled Enable operate timer for PE-loops, Zone
Enabled Z3
Load Com zone 3 Disabled - - Enabled Enable load compensation for PE-loops,
Enabled Zone Z3
Table continues on next page

630 series 785

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

R0 zone 3 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence resistive zone reach, Zone
Z3
X0 zone 3 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence reactive zone reach, Zone
Z3
Factor K0 zone 3 0.0 - 4.0 - 0.1 1.0 Residual compensation factor,
magnitude, Zone Z3
Factor K0 angle Zn3 -135 - 135 Deg 1 0 Residual compensation factor, angle,
Zone Z3
Min Ris Gnd Rch Zn3 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Minimum resistive reach of PE-loops,
Zone Z3
Max Ris Gnd Rch Zn3 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Maximum resistive reach of PE-loops,
Zone Z3
Gnd operate Dl Zn3 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay to operate of PE-loops, Zone
Z3
Directional mode AR1 Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode, Zone AR1
Forward
Reverse
Op Mod PP loops AR1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable PP/3P-loop measurement, Zone
Enabled AR1
PP Op delay Mod AR1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable operate timer for PP/3P-loops,
Enabled Zone AR1
R1 AR1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence resistive zone reach,
Zone AR1
X1 AR1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactive zone reach,
Zone AR1
X1 reverse AR1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. reactive zone reach in rev. dir,
non-dir. Zone AR1
Z1 AR1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 56.57 Positive sequence zone reach, Zone AR1
Z1 angle AR1 15 - 90 Deg 1 45 Positive sequence line angle, Zone AR1
Z1 reverse AR1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 56.57 Positive sequence zone reach in rev. dir.,
non-dir. Zone AR1
Min Ris PP Rch AR1 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Minimum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops,
Zone AR1
Max Ris PP Rch AR1 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Maximum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops,
Zone AR1
PP operate delay AR1 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 Time delay to operate of PP/3P-loops,
Zone AR1
Op Mod Gnd loops AR1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable PE-loop measurement, Zone AR1
Enabled
Gnd Op Dl mode AR1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable operate timer for PE-loops, Zone
Enabled AR1
Load Com AR1 Disabled - - Enabled Enable load compensation for PE-loops,
Enabled Zone AR1
R0 AR1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence resistive zone reach, Zone
AR1
X0 AR1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence reactive zone reach, Zone
AR1
Factor K0 AR1 0.0 - 4.0 - 0.1 1.0 Residual compensation factor,
magnitude, Zone AR1
Table continues on next page

786 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Factor K0 angle AR1 -135 - 135 Deg 1 0 Residual compensation factor, angle,
Zone AR1
Min Ris Gnd Rch AR1 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Minimum resistive reach of PE-loops,
Zone AR1
Max Ris Gnd Rch AR1 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Maximum resistive reach of PE-loops,
Zone AR1
Gnd operate Dl AR1 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 Time delay to operate of PE-loops, Zone
AR1
Directional mode AR2 Non-directional - - Forward Directional mode, Zone AR2
Forward
Reverse
Op Mod PP loops AR2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable PP/3P-loop measurement, Zone
Enabled AR2
PP Op delay Mod AR2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable operate timer for PP/3P-loops,
Enabled Zone AR2
R1 AR2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence resistive zone reach,
Zone AR2
X1 AR2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Positive sequence reactive zone reach,
Zone AR2
X1 reverse AR2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Pos. seq. reactive zone reach in rev. dir,
non-dir. Zone AR2
Z1 AR2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 56.57 Positive sequence zone reach, Zone AR2
Z1 angle AR2 15 - 90 Deg 1 45 Positive sequence line angle, Zone AR2
Z1 reverse AR2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 56.57 Positive sequence zone reach in rev. dir.,
non-dir. Zone AR2
Min Ris PP Rch AR2 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Minimum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops,
Zone AR2
Max Ris PP Rch AR2 0.01 - 100.00 ohm 0.01 30.00 Maximum resistive reach of PP/3P-loops,
Zone AR2
PP operate delay AR2 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 Time delay to operate of PP/3P-loops,
Zone AR2
Op Mod Gnd loops AR2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable PE-loop measurement, Zone AR2
Enabled
Gnd Op Dl mode AR2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable operate timer for PE-loops, Zone
Enabled AR2
Load Com AR2 Disabled - - Enabled Enable load compensation for PE-loops,
Enabled Zone AR2
R0 AR2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence resistive zone reach, Zone
AR2
X0 AR2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 160.00 Zero sequence reactive zone reach, Zone
AR2
Factor K0 AR2 0.0 - 4.0 - 0.1 1.0 Residual compensation factor,
magnitude, Zone AR2
Factor K0 angle AR2 -135 - 135 Deg 1 0 Residual compensation factor, angle,
Zone AR2
Table continues on next page

630 series 787

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Min Ris Gnd Rch AR2 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Minimum resistive reach of PE-loops,
Zone AR2
Max Ris Gnd Rch AR2 0.01 - 500.00 ohm 0.01 100.00 Maximum resistive reach of PE-loops,
Zone AR2
Gnd operate Dl AR2 0.040 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 Time delay to operate of PE-loops, Zone
AR2

Table 787: DSTPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Gnd Op current 2 GFC 0.10 - 10.00 pu 0.01 1.00 Res. curr. start value for slope 2, EF-
detection function
Stab slope 1 GFC 0.00 - 0.30 - 0.01 0.10 Slope 1 for res. curr. stabilization, EF-
detection function
Stab slope 2 GFC 0.00 - 1.00 - 0.01 1.00 Slope 2 for res. current stab., EF-
detection function
A Ph Stab value GFC 1.00 - 10.00 pu 0.01 2.00 Phase current start value for slope 2, EF-
detection function
Dir mode EF GFC Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode, earth-fault directional
Forward function
Reverse
Pol quantity GFC Zro vol.OR cur. - - Zero seq. volt. Polarization method, earth-fault
Zero seq. cur. directional function
Zero seq. volt.
Neg. seq. volt.
Chr angle GFC -179 - 180 Deg 1 75 Characteristic angle, earth-fault
directional function
Max phase angle GFC 0 - 90 Deg 1 88 Right hand side angle, earth-fault
directional function
Min phase angle GFC 0 - 90 Deg 1 88 Left hand side angle, earth-fault
directional function
Cross-country Dl GFC 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for residual current, XC-fault
detection function
Tilt angle zone 1 -45 - 45 Deg 1 0 Tilt angle (positive value increases Zone
area), Zone Z1
Par line Com zone 1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable parallel line compensation for PE-
Enabled loops, Zone Z1
Mutual R0 zone 1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Parallel line zero sequence mutual
resistance, Zone Z1
Mutual X0 zone 1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Parallel line zero sequence mutual
reactance, Zone Z1
Tilt angle zone 2 -45 - 45 Deg 1 0 Tilt angle (positive value increases Zone
area), Zone Z2
Par line Com zone 2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable parallel line compensation for PE-
Enabled loops, Zone Z2
Mutual R0 zone 2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Parallel line zero sequence mutual
resistance, Zone Z2
Mutual X0 zone 2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Parallel line zero sequence mutual
reactance, Zone Z2
Table continues on next page

788 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Tilt angle zone 3 -45 - 45 Deg 1 0 Tilt angle (positive value increases Zone
area), Zone Z3
Par line Com zone 3 Disabled - - Disabled Enable parallel line compensation for PE-
Enabled loops, Zone Z3
Mutual R0 zone 3 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Parallel line zero sequence mutual
resistance, Zone Z3
Mutual X0 zone 3 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Parallel line zero sequence mutual
reactance, Zone Z3
Tilt angle AR1 -45 - 45 Deg 1 0 Tilt angle (positive value increases Zone
area), Zone AR1
Par line Com AR1 Disabled - - Disabled Enable parallel line compensation for PE-
Enabled loops, Zone AR1
Mutual R0 AR1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Parallel line zero sequence mutual
resistance, Zone AR1
Mutual X0 AR1 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Parallel line zero sequence mutual
reactance, Zone AR1
Tilt angle AR2 -45 - 45 Deg 1 0 Tilt angle (positive value increases Zone
area), Zone AR2
Par line Com AR2 Disabled - - Disabled Enable parallel line compensation for PE-
Enabled loops, Zone AR2
Mutual R0 AR2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Parallel line zero sequence mutual
resistance, Zone AR2
Mutual X0 AR2 0.01 - 3000.00 ohm 0.01 40.00 Parallel line zero sequence mutual
reactance, Zone AR2

Table 788: DSTPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Phase voltage Meas Accurate - - Accurate Phase voltage measurement principle
PP without Uo
System grounding GFC High impedance - - Low impedance Network neutral earthing method
Low impedance
From input
Ph Prf mode Hi Z GFC No filter - - No filter Phase preference mode for high
No preference impedance earthed network
Cyc A-B-C-A
Cyc A-C-B-A
Acyc A-B-C
Acyc A-C-B
Acyc B-A-C
Acyc B-C-A
Acyc C-A-B
Acyc C-B-A
Ph Prf mode Lo Z GFC All loops - - All loops Loop selection mode for low impedance
PE only earthed network
PP only
BLK leading PE
BLK lagging PE
Impedance mode Zn Rectangular - - Rectangular Impedance format, Zones
Polar
Table continues on next page

630 series 789

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Impedance Chr Gnd Zn Quadrilateral - - Quadrilateral Impedance characteristic for PE-loops,
Mho (circular) Zones
Mho dir line
Offset dir line
Bullet (combi)
Impedance Chr PP Zn Quadrilateral - - Quadrilateral Impedance characteristic for PP/3P-
Mho (circular) loops, Zones
Mho dir line
Offset dir line
Bullet (combi)
Max phase angle zone 0 - 45 Deg 1 15 Angle from R-axis to right hand side
directional line
Min phase angle zone 90 - 135 Deg 1 115 Angle from R-axis to left hand side
directional line
Pol quantity zone Pos. seq. volt. - - Pos. seq. volt. Mho polarization method for zones
Cross Pol

Table 789: DSTPDIS Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase
Phase Grp 2
Phase Grp 3
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Base Val Sel Res Ref Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 2 Base value selector for reference residual
Residual Grp 2 current
Residual Grp 3
EF Det neutral A GFC Measured - - Measured Residual current meas. principle, EF-
Virtual detection function
Fact EF current Bal 1.000 - 2.000 - 0.001 1.200 Residual current ratio for parallel line
compensation
Zone timer mode Independent - - Independent Operate timer start mode, Zones
Common
Voltage Mem time 100 - 3000 ms 10 400 Voltage memory time

4.7.1.10 Measured values

Table 790: DSTPDIS Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase A current
I_AMPL_B REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase B current
I_AMPL_C REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase C current
I0_AMPL REAL 0 Amplitude of the residual current
I0_ANGL REAL 0 Angle of the residual current
I0_AMPL_VIR REAL 0 Amplitude of residual current, virtual
Table continues on next page

790 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

I0_AMPL_REF REAL 0 Amplitude of transformer neutral current
I0_ANGL_REF REAL 0 Angle of the transformer neutral current
I1_AMPL REAL 0 Amplitude of the positive-sequence current
I2_AMPL REAL 0 Amplitude of the negative-sequence current
I2_ANGL REAL 0 Angle of the negative-sequence current
U_AMPL_A REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase A voltage
U_AMPL_B REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase B voltage
U_AMPL_C REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase C voltage
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase-to-phase AB voltage
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase-to-phase BC voltage
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase-to-phase CA voltage
U0_AMPL REAL 0 Amplitude of the residual voltage
U0_ANGL REAL 0 Angle of the residual voltage
U1_AMPL REAL 0 Amplitude of the positive-sequence voltage
U1_ANGL REAL 0 Angle of the positive-sequence voltage
U2_AMPL REAL 0 Amplitude of the negative-sequence voltage
U2_ANGL REAL 0 Angle of the negative-sequence voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset)
SYS_EARTHING BOOLEAN 0 Network earthing method
TRIGG_REC BOOLEAN 0 External triggering for all recorded data
AR_ZONES BOOLEAN 0 Configuration allows AR-zones to be enabled
BLOCK_GFC BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), GFC
BLK_OP_GFC BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, GFC
BLK_ST_GFC BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, GFC
FR_T_GFC BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of all fault loops, GFC
BLOCK_Z1 BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), Zone Z1
BLK_OP_Z1 BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, Zone Z1
BLK_ST_Z1 BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, Zone Z1
FR_T_PE_Z1 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PE-loops, Zone Z1
FR_T_PP_Z1 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PP/3P-loops, Zone Z1
BLOCK_Z2 BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), Zone Z2
BLK_OP_Z2 BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, Zone Z2
BLK_ST_Z2 BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, Zone Z2
FR_T_PE_Z2 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PE-loops, Zone Z2
FR_T_PP_Z2 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PP/3P-loops, Zone Z2
BLOCK_Z3 BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), Zone Z3
BLK_OP_Z3 BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, Zone Z3
BLK_ST_Z3 BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, Zone Z3
FR_T_PE_Z3 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PE-loops, Zone Z3
Table continues on next page

630 series 791

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

FR_T_PP_Z3 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PP/3P-loops, Zone Z3
BLOCK_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), Zone AR1
BLK_OP_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, Zone AR1
BLK_ST_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, Zone AR1
FR_T_PE_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PE-loops, Zone AR1
FR_T_PP_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PP/3P-loops, Zone AR1
BLOCK_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs (includes timer reset), Zone AR2
BLK_OP_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output, Zone AR2
BLK_ST_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs, Zone AR2
FR_T_PE_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PE-loops, Zone AR2
FR_T_PP_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0 Freeze timers of PP/3P-loops, Zone AR2
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal for resetting registers

4.7.1.11 Monitored data

Table 791: DSTPDIS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE_GFC BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Time delayed
1=TRUE operate-signal,
GFC
START_GFC BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - General start-
1=TRUE signal, GFC
STARTS_GFC INTEGER 0=No starts - Start-signals for
1=Start PhA phases A, B and
2=Start PhB C, GFC
3=Start PhA, PhB
4=Start PhC
5=Start PhC, PhA
6=Start PhB, PhC
7=St
PhA,PhB,PhC
RELEASE_PE INTEGER 0=No releases - Release signals
1=Release PhA for PE-loops,
2=Release PhB GFC
3=Release
PhA,PhB
4=Release PhC
5=Release
PhC,PhA
6=Release
PhB,PhC
7=Release
PhA,B,C
Table continues on next page

792 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

RELEASE_PP INTEGER 0=No releases - Release signals
1=Release PhAB for PP/3P-loops,
2=Release PhBC GFC
3=Rel
PhAB,PhBC
4=Release PhCA
5=Rel
PhAB,PhCA
6=Rel
PhBC,PhCA
7=PhAB,PhBC,P
hCA
8=Release
PhABC
9=Rel
PhAB,PhABC
10=Rel
PhBC,PhABC
11=PhAB,PhBC,
PhABC
12=Rel
PhCA,PhABC
13=PhAB,PhCA,
PhABC
14=PhBC,PhCA,
PhABC
15=PhAB,BC,CA,
ABC
EARTH_FLT BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Indication of a
0=No single phase
earth-fault, GFC
XC_FLT BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Indication of a
0=No cross-country-
fault (high imp.
earthed), GFC
DIR_E_FLT INTEGER 3=Both - Earth-fault
0=Unknown direction (low imp.
1=Forward earthed), GFC
2=Reverse
CONFLICT_GFC BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Conflict with PSL-
0=No function and
voltage
measuring
principle
OPERATE_Z1 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Time delayed
1=TRUE operate signal,
Zone Z1
START_Z1 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - General start-
1=TRUE signal, Zone Z1
STARTS_Z1 INTEGER 0=No starts - Start signals for
1=Start PhA phases A, B and
2=Start PhB C, Zone Z1
3=Start PhA, PhB
4=Start PhC
5=Start PhC, PhA
6=Start PhB, PhC
7=St
PhA,PhB,PhC
Table continues on next page

630 series 793

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

CONFLICT_Z1 INTEGER 0=No conflict - Tilt angle validity
1=PhE angle tilt check, Zone Z1
2=PhPh angle tilt
3=PhE,PhPh tilt
OPERATE_Z2 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Time delayed
1=TRUE operate signal,
Zone Z2
START_Z2 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - General start-
1=TRUE signal, Zone Z2
STARTS_Z2 INTEGER 0=No starts - Start signals for
1=Start PhA phases A, B and
2=Start PhB C, Zone Z2
3=Start PhA, PhB
4=Start PhC
5=Start PhC, PhA
6=Start PhB, PhC
7=St
PhA,PhB,PhC
CONFLICT_Z2 INTEGER 0=No conflict - Tilt angle validity
1=PhE angle tilt check, Zone Z2
2=PhPh angle tilt
3=PhE,PhPh tilt
OPERATE_Z3 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Time delayed
1=TRUE operate signal,
Zone Z3
START_Z3 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - General start-
1=TRUE signal, Zone Z3
STARTS_Z3 INTEGER 0=No starts - Start signals for
1=Start PhA phases A, B and
2=Start PhB C, Zone Z3
3=Start PhA, PhB
4=Start PhC
5=Start PhC, PhA
6=Start PhB, PhC
7=St
PhA,PhB,PhC
CONFLICT_Z3 INTEGER 0=No conflict - Tilt angle validity
1=PhE angle tilt check, Zone Z3
2=PhPh angle tilt
3=PhE,PhPh tilt
OPERATE_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Time delayed
1=TRUE operate signal,
Zone AR1
START_ZAR1 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - General start-
1=TRUE signal, Zone AR1
STARTS_ZAR1 INTEGER 0=No starts - Start signals for
1=Start PhA phases A, B and
2=Start PhB C, Zone AR1
3=Start PhA, PhB
4=Start PhC
5=Start PhC, PhA
6=Start PhB, PhC
7=St
PhA,PhB,PhC
Table continues on next page

794 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

CONFLICT_ZAR INTEGER 0=No conflict - Tilt angle validity
1 1=PhE angle tilt check, Zone AR1
2=PhPh angle tilt
3=PhE,PhPh tilt
OPERATE_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Time delayed
1=TRUE operate signal,
Zone AR2
START_ZAR2 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - General start-
1=TRUE signal, Zone AR2
STARTS_ZAR2 INTEGER 0=No starts - Start signals for
1=Start PhA phases A, B and
2=Start PhB C, Zone AR2
3=Start PhA, PhB
4=Start PhC
5=Start PhC, PhA
6=Start PhB, PhC
7=St
PhA,PhB,PhC
CONFLICT_ZAR INTEGER 0=No conflict - Tilt angle validity
2 1=PhE angle tilt check, Zone AR2
2=PhPh angle tilt
3=PhE,PhPh tilt
DIRECTION INTEGER 3=Both - Direction of fault
0=Unknown or load
1=Forward
2=Reverse
DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Real part of the
impedance used
in dir. evaluation,
Zone Z1
DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Imaginary part of
the impedance
used in dir. eval.,
Zone Z1
FLTLOOP_RFST REAL - Ohm Real part of the
first PE-loop
impedance, Zone
Z1
FLTLOOP_XFST REAL - Ohm Imaginary part of
the first PE-loop
impedance, Zone
Z1
FLTLOOP_RSND REAL - Ohm Real part of the
second PE-loop
impedance, Zone
Z1
FLTLOOP_XSND REAL - Ohm Imaginary part of
the second PE-
loop impedance,
Zone Z1
FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Real part of the
PP/3P-loop
impedance, Zone
Z1
Table continues on next page

630 series 795

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Imaginary part of
PP/3P-loop
impedance, Zone
Z1
FLTPH_X REAL - Ohm Phase to earth
reactance in
phase domain,
Zone 1
1 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
GFC bank 1 for fault
time stamp, GFC
1 RELEASE_PE INTEGER 0=No releases - Record data of
GFC 1=Release PhA bank 1 for release
2=Release PhB PE-loops, GFC
3=Release
PhA,PhB
4=Release PhC
5=Release
PhC,PhA
6=Release
PhB,PhC
7=Release
PhA,B,C
1 RELEASE_PP INTEGER 0=No releases - Record data of
GFC 1=Release PhAB bank 1 for release
2=Release PhBC PP-loops, GFC
3=Rel
PhAB,PhBC
4=Release PhCA
5=Rel
PhAB,PhCA
6=Rel
PhBC,PhCA
7=PhAB,PhBC,P
hCA
8=Release
PhABC
9=Rel
PhAB,PhABC
10=Rel
PhBC,PhABC
11=PhAB,PhBC,
PhABC
12=Rel
PhCA,PhABC
13=PhAB,PhCA,
PhABC
14=PhBC,PhCA,
PhABC
15=PhAB,BC,CA,
ABC
1 EARTH_FLT BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Record data of
GFC 0=No bank 1 for earth-
fault, GFC
1 XC_FLT GFC BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Record data of
0=No bank 1 for cross
country fault, GFC
Table continues on next page

796 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

1 DIR_E_FLT INTEGER 3=Both - Record data of
GFC 0=Unknown bank 1 for EF-
1=Forward direction, GFC
2=Reverse
1 DIRECTION INTEGER 3=Both - Record data of
0=Unknown bank 1 for
1=Forward direction
2=Reverse
1 Zones INTEGER 0=No Zn operates - Record data of
OPERATE 1=Zn1 bank 1 for operate
2=Zn2 signals of all
4=Zn3 zones
3=Zn1,2
5=Zn1,3
6=Zn2,3
7=Zn1,2,3
8=AR1
9=Zn1,AR1
10=Zn2,AR1
11=Zn1,2,AR1
12=Zn3,AR1
13=Zn1,3,AR1
14=Zn2,3,AR1
15=Zn1,2,3,AR1
16=AR2
17=Zn1,AR2
18=Zn2,AR2
19=Zn1,2,AR2
20=Zn3,AR2
21=Zn1,3,AR2
23=Zn1,2,3,AR2
22=Zn2,3,AR2
24=AR1,AR2
25=Zn1,AR1,AR2
26=Zn2,AR1,AR2
27=Zn1,2,AR1,A
R2
28=Zn3,AR1,AR2
29=Zn1,3,AR1,A
R2
30=Zn2,3,AR1,A
R2
31=Zn1,2,3,AR1,
AR2
1 FLTPH_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
bank 1 PE
reactance in
phase domain
2 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
GFC bank 2 for fault
time stamp, GFC
Table continues on next page

630 series 797

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 RELEASE_PE INTEGER 0=No releases - Record data of
GFC 1=Release PhA bank 2 for release
2=Release PhB PE-loops, GFC
3=Release
PhA,PhB
4=Release PhC
5=Release
PhC,PhA
6=Release
PhB,PhC
7=Release
PhA,B,C
2 RELEASE_PP INTEGER 0=No releases - Record data of
GFC 1=Release PhAB bank 2 for release
2=Release PhBC PP-loops, GFC
3=Rel
PhAB,PhBC
4=Release PhCA
5=Rel
PhAB,PhCA
6=Rel
PhBC,PhCA
7=PhAB,PhBC,P
hCA
8=Release
PhABC
9=Rel
PhAB,PhABC
10=Rel
PhBC,PhABC
11=PhAB,PhBC,
PhABC
12=Rel
PhCA,PhABC
13=PhAB,PhCA,
PhABC
14=PhBC,PhCA,
PhABC
15=PhAB,BC,CA,
ABC
2 EARTH_FLT BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Record data of
GFC 0=No bank 2 for earth-
fault, GFC
2 XC_FLT GFC BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Record data of
0=No bank 2 for cross
country fault, GFC
2 DIR_E_FLT INTEGER 3=Both - Record data of
GFC 0=Unknown bank 2 for EF-
1=Forward direction, GFC
2=Reverse
2 DIRECTION INTEGER 3=Both - Record data of
0=Unknown bank 2 for
1=Forward direction
2=Reverse
Table continues on next page

798 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 Zones INTEGER 0=No Zn operates - Record data of
OPERATE 1=Zn1 bank 2 for operate
2=Zn2 signals of all
4=Zn3 zones
3=Zn1,2
5=Zn1,3
6=Zn2,3
7=Zn1,2,3
8=AR1
9=Zn1,AR1
10=Zn2,AR1
11=Zn1,2,AR1
12=Zn3,AR1
13=Zn1,3,AR1
14=Zn2,3,AR1
15=Zn1,2,3,AR1
16=AR2
17=Zn1,AR2
18=Zn2,AR2
19=Zn1,2,AR2
20=Zn3,AR2
21=Zn1,3,AR2
23=Zn1,2,3,AR2
22=Zn2,3,AR2
24=AR1,AR2
25=Zn1,AR1,AR2
26=Zn2,AR1,AR2
27=Zn1,2,AR1,A
R2
28=Zn3,AR1,AR2
29=Zn1,3,AR1,A
R2
30=Zn2,3,AR1,A
R2
31=Zn1,2,3,AR1,
AR2
2 FLTPH_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
bank 2 PE
reactance in
phase domain
3 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
GFC bank 3 for fault
time stamp, GFC
3 RELEASE_PE INTEGER 0=No releases - Record data of
GFC 1=Release PhA bank 3 for release
2=Release PhB PE-loops, GFC
3=Release
PhA,PhB
4=Release PhC
5=Release
PhC,PhA
6=Release
PhB,PhC
7=Release
PhA,B,C
Table continues on next page

630 series 799

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3 RELEASE_PP INTEGER 0=No releases - Record data of
GFC 1=Release PhAB bank 3 for release
2=Release PhBC PP-loops, GFC
3=Rel
PhAB,PhBC
4=Release PhCA
5=Rel
PhAB,PhCA
6=Rel
PhBC,PhCA
7=PhAB,PhBC,P
hCA
8=Release
PhABC
9=Rel
PhAB,PhABC
10=Rel
PhBC,PhABC
11=PhAB,PhBC,
PhABC
12=Rel
PhCA,PhABC
13=PhAB,PhCA,
PhABC
14=PhBC,PhCA,
PhABC
15=PhAB,BC,CA,
ABC
3 EARTH_FLT BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Record data of
GFC 0=No bank 3 for earth-
fault, GFC
3 XC_FLT GFC BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Record data of
0=No bank 3 for cross
country fault, GFC
3 DIR_E_FLT INTEGER 3=Both - Record data of
GFC 0=Unknown bank 3 for EF-
1=Forward direction, GFC
2=Reverse
3 DIRECTION INTEGER 3=Both - Record data of
0=Unknown bank 3 for
1=Forward direction
2=Reverse
Table continues on next page

800 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3 Zones INTEGER 0=No Zn operates - Record data of
OPERATE 1=Zn1 bank 3 for operate
2=Zn2 signals of all
4=Zn3 zones
3=Zn1,2
5=Zn1,3
6=Zn2,3
7=Zn1,2,3
8=AR1
9=Zn1,AR1
10=Zn2,AR1
11=Zn1,2,AR1
12=Zn3,AR1
13=Zn1,3,AR1
14=Zn2,3,AR1
15=Zn1,2,3,AR1
16=AR2
17=Zn1,AR2
18=Zn2,AR2
19=Zn1,2,AR2
20=Zn3,AR2
21=Zn1,3,AR2
23=Zn1,2,3,AR2
22=Zn2,3,AR2
24=AR1,AR2
25=Zn1,AR1,AR2
26=Zn2,AR1,AR2
27=Zn1,2,AR1,A
R2
28=Zn3,AR1,AR2
29=Zn1,3,AR1,A
R2
30=Zn2,3,AR1,A
R2
31=Zn1,2,3,AR1,
AR2
3 FLTPH_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
bank 3 PE
reactance in
phase domain
1 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
Z1 bank 1 for fault
time stamp, Zone
1
1 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 1 for
direction
resistance, Zone
Z1
1 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 1 for
direction
reactance, Zone
Z1
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 1 for PE-
Z1 loop resistance
(1st), Zone Z1
Table continues on next page

630 series 801

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 1 for PE-
Z1 loop reactance
(1st), Zone Z1
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 1 for PE-
Z1 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone Z1
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 1 for PE-
Z1 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone Z1
1 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 1 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone Z1
1 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 1 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone Z1
2 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
Z1 bank 2 for fault
time stamp, Zone
1
2 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 2 for
direction
resistance, Zone
Z1
2 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 2 for
direction
reactance, Zone
Z1
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 2 for PE-
Z1 loop resistance
(1st), Zone Z1
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 2 for PE-
Z1 loop reactance
(1st), Zone Z1
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 2 for PE-
Z1 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone Z1
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 2 for PE-
Z1 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone Z1
2 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 2 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone Z1
Table continues on next page

802 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 2 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone Z1
3 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
Z1 bank 3 for fault
time stamp, Zone
1
3 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 3 for
direction
resistance, Zone
Z1
3 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 3 for
direction
reactance, Zone
Z1
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 3 for PE-
Z1 loop resistance
(1st), Zone Z1
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 3 for PE-
Z1 loop reactance
(1st), Zone Z1
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 3 for PE-
Z1 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone Z1
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 3 for PE-
Z1 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone Z1
3 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 3 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone Z1
3 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z1 bank 3 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone Z1
1 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
Z2 bank 1 for fault
time stamp, Zone
2
1 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 1 for
direction
resistance, Zone
Z2
1 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 1 for
direction
reactance, Zone
Z2
Table continues on next page

630 series 803

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 1 for PE-
Z2 loop resistance
(1st), Zone Z2
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 1 for PE-
Z2 loop reactance
(1st), Zone Z2
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 1 for PE-
Z2 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone Z2
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 1 for PE-
Z2 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone Z2
1 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 1 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone Z2
1 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 1 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone Z2
2 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
Z2 bank 2 for fault
time stamp, Zone
2
2 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 2 for
direction
resistance, Zone
Z2
2 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 2 for
direction
reactance, Zone
Z2
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 2 for PE-
Z2 loop resistance
(1st), Zone Z2
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 2 for PE-
Z2 loop reactance
(1st), Zone Z2
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 2 for PE-
Z2 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone Z2
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 2 for PE-
Z2 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone Z2
Table continues on next page

804 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 2 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone Z2
2 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 2 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone Z2
3 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
Z2 bank 3 for fault
time stamp, Zone
2
3 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 3 for
direction
resistance, Zone
Z2
3 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 3 for
direction
reactance, Zone
Z2
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 3 for PE-
Z2 loop resistance
(1st), Zone Z2
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 3 for PE-
Z2 loop reactance
(1st), Zone Z2
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 3 for PE-
Z2 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone Z2
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 3 for PE-
Z2 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone Z2
3 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 3 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone Z2
3 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z2 bank 3 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone Z2
1 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
Z3 bank 1 for fault
time stamp, Zone
3
1 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 1 for
direction
resistance, Zone
Z3
Table continues on next page

630 series 805

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

1 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 1 for
direction
reactance, Zone
Z3
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 1 for PE-
Z3 loop resistance
(1st), Zone Z3
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 1 for PE-
Z3 loop reactance
(1st), Zone Z3
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 1 for PE-
Z3 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone Z3
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 1 for PE-
Z3 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone Z3
1 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 1 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone Z3
1 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 1 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone Z3
2 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
Z3 bank 2 for fault
time stamp, Zone
3
2 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 2 for
direction
resistance, Zone
Z3
2 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 2 for
direction
reactance, Zone
Z3
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 2 for PE-
Z3 loop resistance
(1st), Zone Z3
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 2 for PE-
Z3 loop reactance
(1st), Zone Z3
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 2 for PE-
Z3 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone Z3
Table continues on next page

806 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 2 for PE-
Z3 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone Z3
2 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 2 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone Z3
2 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 2 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone Z3
3 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
Z3 bank 3 for fault
time stamp, Zone
3
3 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 3 for
direction
resistance, Zone
Z3
3 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 3 for
direction
reactance, Zone
Z3
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 3 for PE-
Z3 loop resistance
(1st), Zone Z3
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 3 for PE-
Z3 loop reactance
(1st), Zone Z3
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 3 for PE-
Z3 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone Z3
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 3 for PE-
Z3 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone Z3
3 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 3 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone Z3
3 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
Z3 bank 3 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone Z3
1 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
AR1 bank 1 for fault
time stamp, Zone
AR1
Table continues on next page

630 series 807

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

1 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 1 for
direction
resistance, Zone
AR1
1 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 1 for
direction
reactance, Zone
AR1
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 1 for PE-
AR1 loop resistance
(1st), Zone AR1
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 1 for PE-
AR1 loop reactance
(1st), Zone AR1
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 1 for PE-
AR1 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone AR1
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 1 for PE-
AR1 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone AR1
1 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 1 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone AR1
1 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 1 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone AR1
2 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
AR1 bank 2 for fault
time stamp, Zone
AR1
2 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 2 for
direction
resistance, Zone
AR1
2 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 2 for
direction
reactance, Zone
AR1
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 2 for PE-
AR1 loop resistance
(1st), Zone AR1
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 2 for PE-
AR1 loop reactance
(1st), Zone AR1
Table continues on next page

808 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 2 for PE-
AR1 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone AR1
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 2 for PE-
AR1 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone AR1
2 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 2 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone AR1
2 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 2 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone AR1
3 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
AR1 bank 3 for fault
time stamp, Zone
AR1
3 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 3 for
direction
resistance, Zone
AR1
3 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 3 for
direction
reactance, Zone
AR1
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 3 for PE-
AR1 loop resistance
(1st), Zone AR1
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 3 for PE-
AR1 loop reactance
(1st), Zone AR1
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 3 for PE-
AR1 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone AR1
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 3 for PE-
AR1 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone AR1
3 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 3 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone AR1
3 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR1 bank 3 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone AR1
Table continues on next page

630 series 809

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

1 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
AR2 bank 1 for fault
time stamp, Zone
AR2
1 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 1 for
direction
resistance, Zone
AR2
1 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 1 for
direction
reactance, Zone
AR2
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 1 for PE-
AR2 loop resistance
(1st), Zone AR2
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 1 for PE-
AR2 loop reactance
(1st), Zone AR2
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 1 for PE-
AR2 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone AR2
1 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 1 for PE-
AR2 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone AR2
1 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 1 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone AR2
1 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 1 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone AR2
2 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
AR2 bank 2 for fault
time stamp, Zone
AR2
2 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 2 for
direction
resistance, Zone
AR2
2 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 2 for
direction
reactance, Zone
AR2
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 2 for PE-
AR2 loop resistance
(1st), Zone AR2
Table continues on next page

810 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 1 for PE-
AR2 loop reactance
(1st), Zone AR2
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 2 for PE-
AR2 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone AR2
2 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 2 for PE-
AR2 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone AR2
2 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 2 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone AR2
2 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 2 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone AR2
3 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of
AR2 bank 3 for fault
time stamp, Zone
AR2
3 DIR_LOOP_R REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 3 for
direction
resistance, Zone
AR2
3 DIR_LOOP_X REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 3 for
direction
reactance, Zone
AR2
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RFST bank 3 for PE-
AR2 loop resistance
(1st), Zone AR2
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XFST bank 3 for PE-
AR2 loop reactance
(1st), Zone AR2
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_RSND bank 3 for PE-
AR2 loop resistance
(2nd), Zone AR2
3 REAL - Ohm Record data of
FLTLOOP_XSND bank 3 for PE-
AR2 loop reactance
(2nd), Zone AR2
3 FLTLOOP_RPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 3 for PP-
loop resistance,
Zone AR2
3 FLTLOOP_XPP REAL - Ohm Record data of
AR2 bank 3 for PP-
loop reactance,
Zone AR2

630 series 811

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.7.1.12 Technical data

Table 792: DSTPDIS Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.003 × In
Voltage:
±1.0% of the set value or ±0.003 × Un
Impedance:
±2.0% of the set value or ±0.01 Ω static accuracy
Phase angle: ±2°

Start time 1)2) SIR3): 0.1...60 Typically 40...50 ms (±15 ms)

Transient overreach SIR = 0.1...60 <6%

Reset time <65 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.95/1.05
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

1) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

2) Relates to start signals of the Zone Z1–Zone ZAR2
3) SIR = Source impedance ratio

4.7.1.13 Technical revision history

Table 793: DSTPDIS technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Voltage Mem time setting is added. Information
related to fault time stamp (x Recording time xxx)
is made available in recorded data.
C Voltage memory functionality for close-in three-
phase faults supports AR up to 300 s.
Output FLTPH_X is added.
Selection “Self Pol” is removed from setting Pol
quantity zone.
Selection “Overcur/underZ” is removed from
setting Phase Sel mode GFC.
Minimum setting value changed from 0.050 ms to
0.040 ms for Gnd operate Dl Zn1, PP operate
delay Zn1, Gnd operate Dl Zn2, PP operate delay
Zn2, Gnd operate Dl Zn3, PP operate delay Zn3,
Gnd operate Dl AR1, PP operate delay AR1, Gnd
operate Dl AR2, and PP operate delay AR2.
Default setting for Gnd operate Dl Zn1 and PP
operate delay Zn1 changed from 0.050 ms to
0.040 ms.
Support for other faulty phase detection in XC
fault.
Added setting Zone timer mode.

812 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.7.2 Three-phase underexitation protection UEXPDIS

4.7.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase underexcitation protection UEXPDIS X< 40

4.7.2.2 Function block

GUID-D82B59E6-78DE-494F-890A-3848616388DE V1 EN

Figure 406: Function block

4.7.2.3 Functionality

The three-phase underexcitation protection UEXPDIS is used to protect the

synchronous machine against the underexcitation or loss of excitation condition.

The protection is based on the offset-mho circular characteristics on the impedance

plane. The function calculates the apparent impedance from the machine terminal
voltages and currents. If the impedance vector enters the offset-mho circle, the
function gives the operating signal after a set definite time. The operating time
characteristics are according to definite time (DT).

This function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.7.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the three-phase underexcitation protection function can be described

using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

630 series 813

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

I_A
I_B
I3P I_C
I1 Timer
U_A Impedance OPERATE
U_B Impedance t
reach
U_C calculation
check START
U3P U_AB
U_BC
U_CA
U1

External
EXT_LOS_DET loss
detection

BLOCK
BLK_OPR
BLK_ST
FR_TIMER

GUID-00F32CB4-F05B-4A43-AC64-31A4FBEA5312 V1 EN

Figure 407: Functional module diagram

Impedance calculation
This module calculates the apparent impedance based on the selected voltages and
currents. The Measurement mode and Phase Sel for Z Clc settings determine which
voltages and currents are to be used. If the Measurement mode is set to "1Phase-earth"
or "1Phase-phase", the Phase Sel for Z Clc setting is needed for determining which
phase or phase-phase voltages ("A or AB", "B or BC" and "C or CA") and currents
should be used for calculating the impedance.
Table 794: Voltages and currents used in impedance calculation
Measurement mode Phase Sel for Z Clc Voltages and currents
1Phase-earth A or AB U_A, I_A
1Phase-earth B or BC U_B, I_B
1Phase-earth C or CA U_C, I_C
1Phase-phase A or AB U_AB, I_A, I_B
1Phase-phase B or BC U_BC, I_B, I_C
1Phase-phase C or CA U_CA, I_C, I_A
3Phase-earth N/A U_A, U_B, U_C, I_A, I_B, I_C
3Phase-phase N/A U_AB, U_BC, U_CA, I_A, I_B, I_C
Pos seqn N/A { U_A,U_B,U_C } or { U_AB,U_BC,U_CA } and
I_A, I_B, I_C

If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the IED, the
positive-sequence alternative is recommended.

If the polarity of the voltage signals is opposite to the normal polarity, the correction
can be done by setting Voltage reversal to "Yes", which rotates the impedance vector
by 180 degrees.

814 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

If the magnitude of the voltage is less than 0.05 × UN, the calculated impedance is not
reliable and the impedance calculation is disabled. UN is the rated phase-to-phase
voltage.

The calculated impedance magnitudes and angles are available in the monitored data
view. The impedance angles are provided between -180 to 180 degrees.

The calculated apparent impedance is converted to pu impedance as

the operating characteristics are defined with the pu settings.

Impedance reach check

The operating characteristic is a circular offset mho on the impedance plane. The
operating characteristics are defined with the Offset, Diameter and Displacement
settings. If the calculated impedance value enters the circle in the impedance plane, the
module sends an enabling signal to start the timer.

GUID-78CC6BF8-EC11-47E8-962B-FA3FDFAB62AC V1 EN

Figure 408: Operating region of the impedance mho circle

A fault in Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) or in the excitation system may cause
a total loss of excitation. A short circuit on the slip rings reduces the excitation voltage
to zero. This causes a gradual reduction of the excitation current and eventually a loss
of excitation. An open circuit in the field circuit also causes a loss of excitation. These
are the typical examples which cause underexcitation in synchronous machines. This

630 series 815

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

module detects the underexcitation condition for the above cases when the calculated
impedance enters the operating characteristics.

External loss detection

This module checks the status information of the excitation system. The module is
activated when the External Los Det Ena setting is set to "Enable". The total loss of
excitation current or a failure in the excitation system is indicated by connecting the
external binary signal to the EXT_LOS_DET input. The timer is enabled immediately
when the EXT_LOS_DET input is activated.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the duration of the underexcitation exceeds the set definite
Operate delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the impedance locus moves
out of the offset-mho operating characteristics before the module operates, the reset
timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the
operating timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time (DT). The value is
available in the monitored data view.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates all the binary outputs and resets the
internal timers. The BLK_ST binary input can be used to block the START signal. The
BLK_OPR binary input can be used to block the OPERATE signal. The operation timer
counting can be frozen on the prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

The angle values available at the input monitor data view are in
radians.

4.7.2.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.7.2.6 Application

There are limits for the underexcitation of a synchronous machine. A reduction of the
excitation current weakens the coupling between the rotor and the external power
system. The machine may lose the synchronism and starts to operate like an induction
machine, which increases the consumption of the reactive power. Even if the machine
does not lose synchronism, it may not be acceptable to operate in this state for a long

816 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

time. The underexcitation causes excessive heating in the end region of the stator
winding. This can damage the insulation of the stator winding and even the iron core.

The underexcitation also causes the generator to operate in the asynchronous mode.
This increases the rotor speed, which causes heating in the rotor iron and damps the
windings. A high intake of the reactive power from the network during
underexcitation causes problems in the network like voltage dip, stability and power
swings. The power swings stress the prime mover, causing turbine blade cavitations
and mechanical stress in the gearbox, for example.

The capability curve of a synchronous generator describes the underexcitation

capability of the machine. An excessive capacitive load on the synchronous machine
causes it to drop out-of-step. The reason is the steady-state stability limit as defined by
the load angle being 90°, which can only be reached when the unit is underexcited.

Q (Reactive power) p.u.

Motor Generator
A
0.9

0.6 B
ng
gi
ag

Over-Excitation
l
pf
8
0.

37o
P (Active power) p.u.
0.0 18o 0.8 1.0
0.95
pf lea
Under-Excitation ding Xe=0.2
0.3
C
E H F
0.5
Xs=0.0
D Where,
AB= Field current limit
BC= Stator current limit
CD= End region heating limit of stator. Due to leakage flux
BH= Possible active power limit due to turbine output power limitation
EF= Steady -state limit without AVR

GUID-875108FD-722B-4A19-81A6-49942A645756 V1 EN

Figure 409: Capability curve of a synchronous generator

UEXPDIS protects the synchronous machines against an unstable operation due to

loss of excitation. A partial or total loss of excitation causes a reactive power intake
from the network to the machine, and the reactance of the system viewed from the
machine terminals turns negative. This kind of drop-of-reactance condition can be
detected by measuring the impedance of the system.

630 series 817

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

The operating characteristic is an offset-mho circle in the impedance plane, and the
circle is parameterized with the Offset, Diameter and Displacement setting values.
Table 795: Parameters of the circle
Setting values Description
Offset Distance of the top of the circle from the R-axis. This is usually set equal to – xd’/2,
where xd’ is the transient reactance of the machine. The sign of the setting value
determines the top of the circle regarding the R-axis. If the sign is negative, the
circle lies below the R-axis.
Diameter Normally set equal to the machine's synchronous reactance xd, which determines
the size of the impedance circle.
Displacement Displacement of the center of the circle from the reactance axis or the R–
coordinate of the center. The setting can be used to adjust the sensitivity of the
underexcitation protection. If the sign of the setting is positive, the circle is shifted
to the right, that is, closer to the normal operating point. Respectively, if the sign is
negative, the circle is shifted to the left and thus moves away from the normal
operating point.

The setting parameters of the off-set mho circle are to be given in pu values. The base
impedance (ZN) in ohms is:

UN2
ZN =
SN
GUID-FDF8D989-6F91-4AE9-8A3C-31769808FF71 V1 EN

UN the rated (phase-to-phase) voltage in kV

SN the rated power of the protected machine in MVA

The corresponding calculation to convert ohms to pu values is:

X ohm
X pu =
ZN
GUID-8F02750E-98A4-4AD9-82C6-0632CCE84F01 V1 EN

Xpu the pu value

Xohm the reactance in ohms

ZN the base impedance

Example of impedance locus in underexcitation

In an example of a typical impedance locus, once the impedance locus enters the relay
operation characteristics, the relay operates after a settable definite time.

818 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

X (Reactance)

-R R (Resistance)

a b

Relay operation
characteristics

a) Z locus in under excitation for heavily loaded machine

b) Z locus in under excitation for lightly loaded machine
-X c) Z locus for a fault in the network

GUID-BA88ECBB-5F42-4B24-B4BC-B922E2CB6769 V1 EN

Figure 410: Typical impedance locus in underexcitation: a) heavy load b) light

load c) fault in the network

4.7.2.7 Signals
Table 796: UEXPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timer
EXT_LOS_DET BOOLEAN 0 External signal for excitation loss detection

Table 797: UEXPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started

630 series 819

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.7.2.8 Settings
Table 798: UEXPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Diameter 1 - 6000 % Zb 1 200 Diameter of the impedance mho circle
Offset -1000 - 1000 % Zb 1 -10 Offset of top of the impedance circle from
the R-axis
Displacement -1000 - 1000 % Zb 1 0 Displacement of impedance circle centre
from the X-axis
Operate delay time 0.06 - 200.00 s 0.01 5.00 Operate delay time

Table 799: UEXPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Measurement mode 1Phase-earth - - Pos Seqn Select voltage/current signals for Z
1Phase-phase calculation
3Phase-earth
3Phase-phase
Pos Seqn
Phase Sel for Z Clc A or AB - - A or AB Select ph/ ph-ph voltages and currents for
B or BC Z calculation
C or CA

Table 800: UEXPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On
External Los Det Ena Disable - - Enable Enable external excitation loss detection
Enable

Table 801: UEXPDIS Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 3.00 Time delay to reset timer
Voltage reversal No - - No Rotate voltage signals by 180 degrees
Yes

820 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.7.2.9 Measured values

Table 802: UEXPDIS Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase C
I_ANGL_A REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase A
I_ANGL_B REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase B
I_ANGL_C REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase C
I1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence current amplitude
I1_ANGL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence current angle
U_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Phase A-to-ground voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Phase B-to-ground voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Phase C-to-ground voltage amplitude
U_ANGL_A REAL 0.0 Phase A-to-ground voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_B REAL 0.0 Phase B-to-ground voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_C REAL 0.0 Phase C-to-ground voltage phase angle
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase A-B voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase B-C voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase C-A voltage amplitude
U_ANGL_AB REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase A-B voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_BC REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase B-C voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_CA REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase C-A voltage phase angle
U1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage amplitude
U1_ANGL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage phase angle
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timer
EXT_LOS_DET BOOLEAN 0 External signal for excitation loss detection

4.7.2.10 Monitored data

Table 803: UEXPDIS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
Z_AMPL_A REAL - pu Impedance amplitude
phase A
Table continues on next page

630 series 821

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Z_AMPL_B REAL - pu Impedance amplitude
phase B
Z_AMPL_C REAL - pu Impedance amplitude
phase C
Z_ANGLE_A REAL - deg Impedance phase angle
phase A
Z_ANGLE_B REAL - deg Impedance phase angle
phase B
Z_ANGLE_C REAL - deg Impedance phase angle
phase C
Z_AMPL_AB REAL - pu Phase-to-phase A-B
impedance amplitude
Z_AMPL_BC REAL - pu Phase-to-phase B-C
impedance amplitude
Z_AMPL_CA REAL - pu Phase-to-phase C-A
impedance amplitude
Z_ANGLE_AB REAL - deg Phase-to-phase A-B
impedance phase angle
Z_ANGLE_BC REAL - deg Phase-to-phase B-C
impedance phase angle
Z_ANGLE_CA REAL - deg Phase-to-phase C-A
impedance phase angle
Z1_AMPL REAL - pu Positive sequence
impedance amplitude
Z1_ANGLE REAL - deg Positive sequence
impedance phase angle
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

4.7.2.11 Technical data

Table 804: UEXPDIS Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy1) At the frequency f = fn

±3.0% of the set value or ±0.2% Zb

Start time2)3) Typically 45 ms (±15 ms)

Reset time <50 ms

Reset ratio Typically 1.04
Retardation time Total retardation time when the impedance returns
from the operating circle <40 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite-time mode ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms

1) Adaptive DFT measurement used

2) fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
3) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

822 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.7.3 Three-phase underimpedance protection UZPDIS

4.7.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase underimpedance UZPDIS Z< GT 21GT
protection

4.7.3.2 Function block

GUID-856BE5AC-7DD6-46CA-860F-61E3853908E7 V1 EN

Figure 411: Function block

4.7.3.3 Functionality

The three-phase underimpedance protection UZPDIS is generally applied as a backup

protection for generators and transformers against short circuit faults.

The protection is based on the origin-centric circular characteristics on the impedance

plane. The function calculates the impedance value from the voltage and current
phasors. If the impedance vector enters the origin-centric circle, the function produces
the operating signal after a set delay. The operating time characteristics are according
to definite time (DT).

This function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, reset timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.7.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the three-phase underimpedance protection can be described with a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 823

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-97E6023F-064C-4535-A537-75763A7EA8C6 V1 EN

Figure 412: Functional module diagram

Impedance calculation
This module calculates the impedance based on the selected voltages and currents.
The Impedance Meas mode and Phase Sel for Z Clc settings determine which voltages
and currents are to be used. If Impedance Meas mode is set to "1Phase-phase", the
Phase Sel for Z Clc setting is needed for determining which phase-phase voltages
("AB", "BC" and "CA") and currents should be used for calculating the impedance.
Table 805: Voltages and currents used in impedance calculation
Impedance Meas mode Phase Sel for Z Clc Voltages and currents used in
impedance calculation
1Phase-phase AB
U _ AB
ZAB =
I _ A− I _ B
1Phase-phase BC
U _ BC
ZBC =
I _ B− I _C
1Phase-phase CA
U _ CA
ZCA =
I _C −I _ A
3Phase-phase N/A
U _ AB
ZAB =
I _ A− I _ B
U _ BC
ZBC =
I _ B− I _C
U _ CA
ZCA =
I _C −I _ A
The voltages and currents in the calculations are given in volts and amps.

If all three phase or phase-phase voltages and phase currents are fed to
the IED, the "3Phase-phase" mode is recommended.

The current measurement of the function is based on two alternative measurement

modes, "DFT" and "Peak-To-Peak". The measurement mode is selected using the
Measurement mode setting.

824 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

If the current magnitude is below 0.02 x IN, where IN is the nominal phase current, the
impedance value is not evaluated and the maximum impedance value (99.999 pu) is
shown in the monitored data view.

The calculated impedances are converted to a pu impedance as the

operating characteristics are defined using the Polar reach setting in
%Zb.

The calculated phase-phase impedance amplitudes ZAB_AMPL, ZBC_AMPL and

ZCA_AMPL are available as pu values in the monitored data view.

Underimpedance detection
The operating characteristic is an origin-centric circle on the impedance plane. The
origin-centric circular characteristic is defined using the Polar reach setting. If the
calculated impedance value enters the circle in the impedance plane, the module sends
an enabling signal to start the timer.

GUID-28F500A3-B738-4BEF-8451-45D67E1762BF V1 EN

Figure 413: Origin-centric circular operating characteristics

630 series 825

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

More than one impedance value is available when Impedance Meas

mode is set to "3Phase-phase", and the function considers the lowest
impedance value for starting and operating.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the duration of the underimpedance condition exceeds the set
definite Operate delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the impedance locus
moves out of circular operating characteristics before the module operates, the reset
timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the
operating timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time (DT). The value is
available in the monitored data view.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates all binary outputs and resets internal
timers. The BLK_ST binary input can be used to block the START signal. The
BLK_OPR binary input can be used to block the OPERATE signal. The operation timer
counting can be frozen on the prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

4.7.3.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.7.3.6 Application

The three-phase underimpedance protection is used as a backup protection against

short circuit faults at the generator terminals or on the high-voltage side of a step-up
transformer. This function can be used either instead of the definite time voltage-
dependent overcurrent protection or to obtain a limited protection zone and the
optimum operating time instead of the non-directional overcurrent protection.

Comparison between overcurrent and underimpedance protection

When a fault occurs at zero seconds in the phase current in a three-phase short circuit
with an ordinary overcurrent IED having the current setting as 1.2 x In, the time setting
should be less than 0.2 seconds because the short circuit current decays below the set
value and the IED drops off with a higher value of time. The current setting can also
be reduced to 1.1 x In, although this provides no substantial rise in the time setting. In
some situations, either of the above current settings is appropriate, but if longer
tripping times are required to maintain the time selectivity, the underimpedance
protection is needed.

826 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-A0F9BC84-C51C-4F93-9A32-DF303D3A9898 V1 EN

Figure 414: Short circuit current waveform, fault occurs at time 0 seconds
(Current setting limit is multiplied by the square root of 2).

The phase voltage in a three-phase short circuit when a fault occurs at zero seconds is
shown in Figure 415. The voltage drop caused by a three-phase fault provides more
time for determining the fault by means of an underimpedance protection.

630 series 827

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-4F3DC9C2-A983-4408-854F-050F940CA1A7 V1 EN

Figure 415: Short-circuit voltage waveform, fault occurs at time 0 seconds

In a typical impedance trajectory during a short circuit, the fault impedance remains
inside the impedance circle for a longer time, in which case the underimpedance
protection provides longer tripping delay times to maintain the time selectivity.

828 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-818E1FD1-0FB7-49A3-84CB-D5999F68CBB3 V1 EN

Figure 416: Typical impedance trajectory during a short circuit.

Underimpedance protection for transformers

The underimpedance function is used as a short circuit protection instead of the
overcurrent protection. It is also used as a backup to the differential protection of
transformers.

The voltage and current phasors are measured with the VTs and CTs connected on the
HV side of the transformer.

The phase and current shifts due to transformer D/Y connections and
other factors complicate the settings for the faults in the secondary
winding (as seen from the IED), and detailed calculations are
necessary for a good coverage.

The Polar reach setting is set to a value equal to 150 percent of the transformer short
circuit impedance. The setting also provides a backup protection for the busbar and
feeder faults on the HV side.

630 series 829

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Underimpedance protection for generators

The underimpedance protection is set to protect the zone between the generator
windings and the generator side windings of the step-up transformer. The function
mainly protects the generator bus, the low-voltage part of the step-up transformer and
a part of the stator winding against any short circuits.

The voltages should be measured from the generator terminals and the phase currents
from the neutral point of the generator.

GUID-744031AE-0995-4337-80F2-114360E46F7A V1 EN

Figure 417: Current and voltage signals for underimpedance protection.

To prevent malfunctioning of the underimpedance protection in case of nearby faults,

the Polar reach setting is set to a value equal to 70 percent of the step-up transformer
short circuit impedance.

In directly connected machines where the impedance towards the network is limited
only by the lines or bus bars, it must be secured that the function does not cause any
selectivity problems. In such cases, it is recommended to use the voltage-dependent
overcurrent protection instead of the underimpedance protection.

Function blocking guidelines

The operation of the underimpedance protection must be restrained if the voltage in
one or more phases suddenly drops close to zero without any significant change in the
current observed at the same time. This situation is considered as a fuse failure or a
miniature circuit breaker operation in the voltage transformer secondary circuit. The

830 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

voltage drop could cause an unwanted operation of the function block since the
calculated impedance could fall below the set operating limit even if there is no actual
fault in the primary system.

The blocking operation is provided by an external function block, the fuse failure
supervision SEQRFUF, whose output is connected to the BLOCK input of UZPDIS.

4.7.3.7 Signals
Table 806: UZPDIS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three-phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three-phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timer

Table 807: UZPDIS Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started

4.7.3.8 Settings
Table 808: UZPDIS Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Polar reach 1 - 6000 % Zb 1 7 Impedance start value, i.e. radius of
impedance circle
Operate delay time 0.04 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.20 Operate delay time

Table 809: UZPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Impedance Meas mode 1Phase-phase - - 3Phase-phase Select voltage and currents for
3Phase-phase impedance calculation
Phase Sel for Z Clc AB - - AB Select ph/ ph-ph voltages for Impedance
BC calculation
CA

630 series 831

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Table 810: UZPDIS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On

Table 811: UZPDIS Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Measurement mode DFT - - DFT Selected measurement mode for phase
Peak-to-Peak currents
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Reset delay time

4.7.3.9 Measured values

Table 812: UZPDIS Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase C
I_PTOP_A REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase A
I_PTOP_B REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase B
I_PTOP_C REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (PTOP) phase C
I_ANGL_A REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase A
I_ANGL_B REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase B
I_ANGL_C REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase C
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase A-B voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase B-C voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase C-A voltage amplitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start outputs
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timer

832 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.7.3.10 Monitored data

Table 813: UZPDIS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
Z_AMPL_AB REAL - pu Phase-to-phase A-B
impedance amplitude
Z_AMPL_BC REAL - pu Phase-to-phase B-C
impedance amplitude
Z_AMPL_CA REAL - pu Phase-to-phase C-A
impedance amplitude
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time (in %)

4.7.3.11 Technical data

Table 814: UZPDIS Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±3.0% of the set value or ±0.2% × Zb

Start time Typically 25 ms (±15 ms)

Reset time <50 ms
Reset ratio Typically 1.04
Retardation time <40 ms

Operate time accuracy in definite-time mode 1)2) ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

1) Fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.7.3.12 Technical revision history

Table 815: UZPDIS technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Inputs BLOCK, BLK_OPR, BLK_ST, FR_TIMER and
outputs OPERATE and START are made visible in
the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) of PCM600

630 series 833

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.8 Power protection

4.8.1 Reverse power/directional overpower protection DOPPDPR

4.8.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Reverse power/directional overpower DOPPDPR P> 32R/32O
protection

4.8.1.2 Function block

DOPPDPR
I3P OPERATE
U3P START
DISABLE
BLOCK
BLK_OPR
BLK_ST
FR_TIMER

GUID-E4756531-3C76-4D90-B0DC-DCC21770ABB2 V2 EN

Figure 418: Function block

4.8.1.3 Functionality

The reverse power/directional overpower protection DOPPDPR can be used for

generator protection against delivering an excessive power beyond the generator's
capacity to the grid, against the generator running like a motor, against the motor
running like a generator and protecting a motor which consumes more reactive power
due to loss of field. DOPPDPR can also be used in feeder protection for indicating
overload on the distribution system to indicate that a customer is supplying power into
the grid and for protecting the transformer from delivering an excessive load.

DOPPDPR starts and operates when the measured power exceeds the set limit and in
a specified direction. The operate time characteristics are according to definite time
(DT).

This function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.8.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

834 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

The operation of the reverse power/directional overpower protection protection

function can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are
explained in the next sections.

I_A
I_B Level
I3P I_C
detector
I1
Timer
OPERATE
U_A Power t
U_B calculation
U_C
U_AB
START
U3P U_BC Directional
U_CA
U1
calculation

BLOCK
BLK_OPR
BLK_ST
FR_TIMER

GUID-0D501C16-0882-4420-BC15-E4D57AD2AE18 V1 EN

Figure 419: Functional module diagram

Power calculation
This module calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltages and
currents. The Measurement mode setting determines which voltages and currents are
used. It is also possible to use positive-sequence components for calculating the
apparent power which makes the determination of power insensitive to a possible
asymmetry in currents or voltages and corresponds to the real load on the prime mover
of the generator.
Table 816: Voltages and currents used in apparent power calculation
Measurement mode Voltages and currents used in power calculation
PhsA, PhsB, PhsC U_A, U_B, U_C, I_A, I_B, I_C
Arone U_AB, U_BC, I_A, I_C
Pos Seq { U_A, U_B, U_C } or { U_AB, U_BC, U_CA } and
I_A, I_B, I_C
PhsAB U_AB, I_A, I_B
PhsBC U_BC, I_B, I_C
PhsCA U_CA, I_C, I_A
PhsA U_A, I_A
PhsB U_B, I_B
PhsC U_C, I_C

If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the IED, the
positive-sequence alternative is recommended.

The calculated powers S, P and Q and the power factor angle PF_ANGL are available
in the monitored data view.

630 series 835

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Level detector
The level detector compares the magnitude of the measured apparent power to the set
Start value. If the measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector sends
an enabling signal to the timer module.

Directional calculation
The directional calculation module monitors the direction of the apparent power.
When the apparent power flow is in the operating area, the module sends the enabling
signal to the timer module. The directional operation can be selected with the
combination of the settings Directional mode and Power angle. The selectable
options for the Directional mode setting are "Forward" and "Reverse". The Power
angle setting can be used to set the power direction between the reactive and active
power.

A typical error is, for example, that the VT or CT poles are wrongly
connected. This is seen as a power flow opposite to that of the intended
direction. The Pol Reversal setting can be used to correct the situation.
By setting the value to "Yes", the measured apparent power is turned
180 degrees.

GUID-7C8F2C37-311E-455F-A68B-18DE1208E118 V1 EN

Figure 420: Operating characteristics with the Start Value setting, the Power
angle setting being 0 and Directional mode "Forward"

836 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-E85507DB-E41A-4C1E-9EED-89B5BB0DA2F6 V1 EN

Figure 421: Operating characteristics with the Start Value setting, Power angle
(α) being +45 and Directional mode "Forward"

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristics are
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated. If a drop-off situation happens, that is, the
value of power drops below Start value before the operate delay is exceeded, the timer
reset state is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the
operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time (DT). The value is
available in the monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the module. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all the outputs and resets the internal timer. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the START output. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block the OPERATE output. The operation timer counting can be frozen to the
prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

The angle values available at the input monitor data view are in
radians.

4.8.1.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related

630 series 837

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.8.1.6 Application

DOPPDPR is used to provide protection against an excessive power flow in the set
operating direction. Main application is the protection of generators and turbines. It
can also be used in feeder protection applications, for example, the ring network.

DOPPDPR in the forward direction can be used to protect the generators or motors
from delivering or consuming excess power. For example, the generator overpower
protection can be used to shed a noncritical feeder load or to start parallel generators.
A synchronous motor may start consuming more reactive power in case of loss of
excitation, in which case the forward overpower protection is used to detect such
condition.

The reverse power/directional overpower protection function has many applications

when used as a reverse power protection. A generator in a power plant converts
mechanical energy to electrical energy. Sometimes the mechanical power from a
prime mover may decrease to a limit that it does not cover the internal losses. The
synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts importing power
from the system. The effect of a generator acting as a motor implies no risk to the
machine but can cause damage to the prime mover. The extent of the damage depends
on the type of the prime mover.

Steam turbines become overheated easily if the steam flow drops too low or if the
steam ceases to flow through the turbine. The break of a main steam pipe, damage to
one or more blades in the steam turbine or an inadvertent closing of the main stop
valves are typical causes for the low steam flow. The steam turbines of turbo
generators can be protected during a low steam flow with the overpower protection
operating in reverse direction. Hydroturbines tolerate reverse power much better than
steam turbines do. There is a risk that the turbine runner moves axially and touches
stationary parts. They are not always strong enough to withstand the associated
stresses.

A hydroturbine that rotates in water with the closed wicket gates draws about 10
percent of the rated power from the rest of the power system if the intake is blocked
due to ice, snow, branches or leaves. A complete blockage of the intake may cause
cavitations. If there is only air in the hydroturbine, the power demand drops to about
3 percent. The risk of damages to the hydroturbines can justify the reverse operation
of the overpower protection in unattended plants.

Whenever a low value of the reverse power setting is required, an

underpower protection should also be used in conjunction with
DOPPDPR. The limit depends on the CT and VT accuracy.

Diesel engines should have overpower protection in reverse direction. The generator
takes about 15 percent or more of its rated power from the system. A stiff engine may

838 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

require 25 percent of the rated power to motor it. A well run engine may need no more
than 5 percent. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and
to measure the reverse power during commissioning.

Reverse overpower can also act as an alternative for an under excitation protection in
case of small generators. If the field excitation is reduced, the generator may start
importing the reactive power, making the generator run as an asynchronous generator.
A synchronous generator is not designed to work asynchronously and may become
damaged due to heating in the damper windings or heating in the rotor due to slip
frequency current.

When operated in reverse power direction, it can be used as an alarm if the power
flowing from the industry is feeding the grid, which may not be desired as per the rules
and regulations of the utility owning the grid.

GUID-8F443990-50DE-4771-97C3-0B545BDC2D45 V1 EN

Figure 422: Forward active overpower characteristics and forward reactive

overpower characteristics

630 series 839

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-0C752136-2105-42F0-8B84-9FF31214A84B V1 EN

Figure 423: Reverse active overpower characteristics and reverse reactive

overpower characteristics

4.8.1.7 Signals
Table 817: DOPPDPR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timer

Table 818: DOPPDPR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started
S REAL Apparent power
P REAL Active power
Q REAL Reactive power
PF_ANGL REAL Angle between apparent power and active power

840 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.8.1.8 Settings
Table 819: DOPPDPR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode Forward - - Forward Directional mode
Reverse
Start value 0.01 - 2.00 pu 0.01 1.00 Start value
Power angle -90.00 - 90.00 Deg 0.01 0.00 Adjustable angle for power
Operate delay time 0.04 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.04 Operate delay time

Table 820: DOPPDPR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On

Table 821: DOPPDPR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Measurement mode PhsA, PhsB, PhsC - - Pos Seq Selection of power calculation method
Arone
Pos Seq
PhsAB
PhsBC
PhsCA
PhsA
PhsB
PhsC
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Reset delay time
Pol reversal No - - No Reversing the definition of the positive
Yes power direction

4.8.1.9 Measured values

Table 822: DOPPDPR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase C
I_ANGL_A REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase A
I_ANGL_B REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase B
I_ANGL_C REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase C
I1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence current amplitude
Table continues on next page

630 series 841

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

I1_ANGL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence current angle
U_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Phase A-to-earth voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Phase B-to-earth voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Phase C-to-earth voltage amplitude
U_ANGL_A REAL 0.0 Phase A-to-earth voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_B REAL 0.0 Phase B-to-earth voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_C REAL 0.0 Phase C-to-earth voltage phase angle
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase A-B voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase B-C voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase C-A voltage amplitude
U_ANGL_AB REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase A-B voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_BC REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase B-C voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_CA REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase C-A voltage phase angle
U1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage amplitude
U1_ANGL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage phase angle
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timer

4.8.1.10 Monitored data

Table 823: DOPPDPR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
S REAL - MVA Apparent power
P REAL - MW Active power
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power
PF_ANGL REAL - deg Angle between apparent
power and active power
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

842 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.8.1.11 Technical data

Table 824: DOPPDPR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±3% of the set value or ±0.002 × Sn

Start time1)2) Typically 20 ms (±15 ms)

Reset time <40 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.94
Retardation time <45 ms
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms

1) U = Un, Fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements.

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact.

4.8.1.12 Technical revision history

Table 825: DOPPDPR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Change in function IEC 60617 and ANSI symbol

4.8.2 Underpower protection DUPPDPR

4.8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Underpower protection DUPPDPR P< 32U

4.8.2.2 Function block

DUPPDPR
I3P OPERATE
U3P START
DISABLE
BLOCK
BLK_OPR
BLK_ST
FR_TIMER

GUID-2E82AEB1-2AA3-4BBC-A4C5-1F5462133B2F V1 EN

Figure 424: Function block

630 series 843

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.8.2.3 Functionality

The underpower protection DUPPDPR is used for protecting generators and prime
movers against the effects of very low power outputs or reverse power condition.

DUPPDPR operates when the measured active power falls below the set value. The
operating characteristics are according to definite time DT.

DUPPDPR contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.8.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the underpower protection function can be described using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

I_A Timer
I_B
OPERATE
Directional Level t
I3P I_C
calculation detector
I1
START
U_A Power
U_B calculation
U_C
U_AB
U3P U_BC
U_CA
U1

DISABLE
BLOCK
BLK_OPR
BLK_ST
FR_TIMER
GUID-A0BE99BC-E258-47AA-AF9C-65CADCAAE745 V1 EN

Figure 425: Functional module diagram

Power calculation
The power calculation calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltage and
current measurements as described in Table 826. The Measurement mode setting
determines which voltage and current measurements are to be used.

It is also possible to use positive-sequence components for calculating apparent

power, which makes the determination of power insensitive to the possible
asymmetry in currents or voltages and corresponds to the real load of the prime mover
of the generator.

844 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 826: Measured apparent power

Measurement mode setting Voltages and currents used in power calculation
"PhsA", "PhsB", "PhsC" U_A,U_B, U_C, I_A, I_B, I_C

"Arone" U_AB, U_BC, I_A, I_C

"Pos Seq" (U_A, U_B, U_C) or (U_AB, U_BC, U_CA) and I_A,
I_B, I_C

"PhsAB" U_AB, I_A, I_B

"PhsBC" U_BC, I_B, I_C

"PhsCA" U_CA, I_C, I_A

"PhsA" U_A, I_A

"PhsB" U_B, I_B

"PhsC" U_C, I_C

If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the IED, the
positive-sequence alternative is recommended (default).

Depending on the set Measurement mode, the power calculation calculates active
power, reactive power and apparent power values from the available set of
measurements. The calculated powers S, P, Q and the power factor angle, PF_ANGL,
are available in the monitored data.

Directional calculation
The directional calculation determines the direction of the measured power. The
measured power is considered to be in the forward direction if the active power is
positive, else it is considered to be in the reverse direction.

If the polarity of the measured power is opposite to normal, the correction can be done
by the Pol reversal setting to "Yes", which rotates the apparent power by 180 degrees.

Level detector
The level detector compares the calculated value of the active power with a set Start
value. If the calculated value of the active power falls below Start value in the forward
direction or if the measured power is in the reverse direction, the level detector enables
the timer module.

630 series 845

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Operating Non
area operating
area

Start Value

GUID-A5309A3D-A96D-43BE-9FDF-C007BE412779 V1 EN

Figure 426: Operating characteristics of DUPPDPR with setting Start value

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristics are
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated. If a drop-off situation happens, that is, if the
underpower condition disappears before the operation delay is exceeded, the timer
reset state is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the
operation timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the START_DUR value which indicates the percentage of the
time elapsed since the activation of the START output with respect to Operate delay
time. The value is available in the monitored data.

The DISABLE input can be used to coordinate the correct operation during the
generator startup situation. By activating the DISABLE signal, both the START and
OPERATE outputs are blocked. Once the DISABLE signal is deactivated, the timer
remains blocked for an additional time duration as set through the setting Disable
time.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the module. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all binary outputs and reset the internal timer. The binary
input BLK_ST can be used to block the START signal. The binary input BLK_OPR
can be used to block the OPERATE signal. The operation timer counting can be frozen
on the prevailing value by the activation of the FR_TIMER input.

846 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.8.2.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

4.8.2.6 Application

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy into electrical
energy. Sometimes the mechanical power from the prime mover may decrease so
much that it does not cover the internal losses. The task of an underpower protection
is to protect the generator from very low power output conditions.

Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the
steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Hydro turbine of the Kaplan type may be
damaged due to the fact that the turbine blade surf on the water and set up axial
pressure on the bearing. Diesel engines may be damaged due to insufficient
lubrication.

If the generator size is very large, it is uneconomical to continue running it with low
generated power. In the reverse power condition, large generators draw a considerable
amount of power from the rest of the system to feed their internal losses. Hence, it is
desirable to disconnect the generator in such situations.

In case of the parallel-connected generators, for example, the load of one generator
may be so low that it is better to disconnect it and let the remaining generators feed the
network.

Where a low value of power setting is required, for example less than
2%, the correction parameters should be used to compensate for the
measuring errors. The manufacturer of the measuring devices is to be
contacted for information on the measuring errors.
If the measuring errors are not compensated for, the underpower
setting should not be lower than the sum of the current-measuring and
voltage-measuring errors.
For example, if the error of the current-measuring device is 2% and
that of the voltage-measuring device is 1%, the minimum setting is (2
+ 1)% = 3%.

630 series 847

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.8.2.7 Signals
Table 827: DUPPDPR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timer
DISABLE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the function during generator
startup

Table 828: DUPPDPR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started
S REAL Apparent power
P REAL Active power
Q REAL Reactive power
PF_ANGL REAL Angle between apparent power and active power

4.8.2.8 Settings
Table 829: DUPPDPR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.01 - 2.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Start value
Operate delay time 0.04 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.04 Operate delay time
Disable time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.00 Additional wait time after CB closing

Table 830: DUPPDPR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On

848 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 831: DUPPDPR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Measurement mode PhsA, PhsB, PhsC - - Pos Seq Selection of power calculation method
Arone
Pos Seq
PhsAB
PhsBC
PhsCA
PhsA
PhsB
PhsC
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.02 Reset delay time
Pol reversal No - - No Reversing the definition of the positive
Yes power direction

4.8.2.9 Measured values

Table 832: DUPPDPR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Current amplitude (DFT) phase C
I_ANGL_A REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase A
I_ANGL_B REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase B
I_ANGL_C REAL 0.0 Current phase angle phase C
I1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence current amplitude
I1_ANGL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence current angle
U_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Phase A-to-earth voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Phase B-to-earth voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Phase C-to-earth voltage amplitude
U_ANGL_A REAL 0.0 Phase A-to-earth voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_B REAL 0.0 Phase B-to-earth voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_C REAL 0.0 Phase C-to-earth voltage phase angle
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase A-B voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase B-C voltage amplitude
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase C-A voltage amplitude
U_ANGL_AB REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase A-B voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_BC REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase B-C voltage phase angle
U_ANGL_CA REAL 0.0 Phase-to-phase C-A voltage phase angle
U1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage amplitude
U1_ANGL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage phase angle
Table continues on next page

630 series 849

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze signal for timer
DISABLE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the function during generator
startup

4.8.2.10 Monitored data

Table 833: DUPPDPR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started
1=TRUE
S REAL - MVA Apparent power
P REAL - MW Active power
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power
PF_ANGL REAL - deg Angle between apparent
power and active power
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

4.8.2.11 Technical data

Table 834: DUPPDPR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn
±3% of the set value or ±0.002 × Sn

Start time 1)2) Typically 20 ms (±15 ms)

Reset time <40 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.94
Retardation time <45 ms
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms

1) U = Un, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements.

2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact.

850 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.8.3 Directional reactive power undervoltage protection (Q→& U<)

DQPTUV

4.8.3.1 Identification
Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional reactive power undervoltage DQPTUV Q>-->,3U< 32Q,27
protection

4.8.3.2 Function block

GUID-CBAB5744-9F2D-481A-96DD-E2B047734704 V1 EN

Figure 427: Function block

4.8.3.3 Functionality

Directional reactive power and under voltage protection DQPTUV is used at the grid
connection point of distributed power generating units as stipulated by various grid
codes to prevent voltage collapse of the grid due to network faults. DQPTUV
measures phase voltages and current at the grid connection point. The generating
facility is disconnected from the network with a specific time delay if all phase
voltages decrease and remain at or below the specified limit and if reactive power is
simultaneously consumed (that is, under-excitation operation).

DQPTUV contains a blocking functionality to block function outputs, timer or the

function itself.

4.8.3.4 Operation principle

The Operation setting is used to enable or disable the function. When "On" is selected,
the function is enabled and when "Off" is selected, the function is disabled.

The operation of DQPTUV can be described using a module diagram. All modules in
the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 851

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

GUID-4E58880D-BE6A-47CE-AFB9-2EF0490D1A07 V1 EN

Figure 428: Functional module diagram

Under voltage detection

Under voltage detection compares the fundamental frequency component of all three
phase-to-phase voltages with the set Voltage start value. When all three phase-to-
phase voltages are lower than the set Voltage start value, the Under voltage detection
module sends an enable signal to the Timer indicating an under voltage condition at
the grid connection point.

Reactive power monitoring

This module calculates and monitors the reactive power based on positive sequence
current and voltage. The usage of a positive sequence component makes the
determination of power insensitive to a possible asymmetry in current and voltages.
When the reactive power exceeds Min reactive power and flows in the operating area,
the module sends an enable signal to the Timer indicating that the reactive power is
being consumed at the grid connection point. A slight tilt in the curve can be obtained
by the setting Pwr sector reduction.

To avoid false tripping, reactive power calculation is blocked if the magnitude of

positive sequence current is less than the set Min PS current.

The magnitude of calculated reactive power Q is available in the monitored data view.

852 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-9C7C3D36-0158-47B5-902B-E4F22830C03E V1 EN

Figure 429: Operating area of DQPTUV function

In the above figure, the power directions are defined as follows.

Quadrant II = generator produces active power, but draws reactive
power (under-excited).
Quadrant III = generator produces both active and reactive power.

The power direction can be reversed by setting Pol reversal to “True”.

Timer
Once activated by both Under voltage detection and Reactive power monitoring
module, the Timer activates the START output. The Timer characteristic is according
to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time the
OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module operates, the
resetting happens instantaneously.

The Timer calculates the start duration value "START_DUR" which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operate time. The value is available
through the Monitored data view.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The binary input
BLK_ST can be used to block the start signals. The binary input BLK_OPR can be
used to block both the operation signals. The operation timer counting can be frozen
to the prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input.

630 series 853

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.8.3.5 Base value

In this function block, some of the settings are in per unit (pu). These pu values are
related to certain base values, for example, the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example, “Phase Grp 1”, “Phase Grp 2” and “Phase Grp 3”. One of the
groups should be selected to use with the Base value Sel phase settings.

4.8.3.6 Application

Use of distributed power generating units (PGU) is rapidly increasing due to

liberalized markets (deregulation) and the global trend to use more renewable sources
of energy. As the capacity of these generating units increase, they are connected
directly to medium voltage networks. Until recent years it had been a practice by grid
operators to disconnect the distributed power generator from the network in case of
fault in the network.

If this causes considerable loss of power generation, this may affect the system’s
ability to recover. Therefore, to ensure power system stability, various grid codes have
revised their requirements and requires that the distributed PGUs have to make a
contribution to network support. In case of faults, the distributed power generator
should not be disconnected from the network. Instead, the PGU must contribute to
voltage stability to maintain the security and reliability of the network operation.
However, if the generators stay connected, it must be ensured that they do not take
reactive power from the network because this may lead to collapse of the grid.
DQPTUV is used for detecting such situations, that is, simultaneous undervoltage and
reactive power (under excited generators) and trip the generators.

The protection function DQPTUV is developed considering various grid codes. For
example, in the German transmission code 2007 it is requested that if all three phase-
to-phase voltage at the grid connection point decrease and remain at and below a value
of 85 percentage of the rated and if reactive power is simultaneously consumed at the
grid connection point (under-excited operation), the generating facility must be
disconnected from the network with a time delay of 0.5 seconds. The disconnection
must take place at the generator circuit breaker.

It is recommended that two instances of DQPTUV are used for protection when
several power generating units are operated in parallel and feeding to one common
network grid, the first instance should be set to operate at 0.5 s, so as to disconnect the
power generating unit. In case the expected results are not achieved, second instance
set to operate between 1...1.5 s should trip the breaker at network connection point.

854 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-77708399-5DDF-4D78-8A11-793BD3C8DF1F V1 EN

Figure 430: A typical distributed power generating unit connected to a grid

4.8.3.7 Signals
Table 835: DQPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs and reset timer
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer count

Table 836: DQPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

630 series 855

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.8.3.8 Settings
Table 837: DQPTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Voltage start value 0.20 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.85 Start value for under voltage detection
Operate delay time 0.1 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.50 Operate delay time

Table 838: DQPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pol reversal FALSE - - FALSE Reverse the definition of the positive
TRUE reactive power direction

Table 839: DQPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On

Table 840: DQPTUV Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Min reactive power 0.01 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.05 Minimum reactive power needed for
function to operate
Min PS current 0.02 - 0.20 pu 0.01 0.05 Minimum positive sequence current
needed for reactive power calculation
Pwr sector reduction 0.0 - 10.0 Deg 1.0 3.0 Adjustable angle for power

4.8.3.9 Measured values

Table 841: DQPTUV Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.0 Voltage amplitude phase to phase AB
U_AMPL_BC REAL 0.0 Voltage amplitude phase to phase BC
U_AMPL_CA REAL 0.0 Voltage amplitude phase to phase CA
U1_REAL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage real part
U1_IMAG REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage imaginary part
I1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence current amplitude
I1_REAL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence current real part
I1_IMAG REAL 0.0 Positive sequence current imaginary part
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs and reset timer
Table continues on next page

856 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer count

4.8.3.10 Monitored data

Table 842: DQPTUV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start
1=TRUE
Q REAL - MVAr Calculated positive
sequence reactive power
START_DUR REAL - % Ratio of start time /
operate time

4.8.3.11 Technical data

Table 843: DQPTUV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn
Power:
1.5% or 0.002 × Qn (±1.5%) for power, PF
-0.71...0.71
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time 1) Typically 22 ms

Reset time <40 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5 and so
on

1) Start value = 0.05 × Sn, Reactive power before fault = 0.8 × Start value. Reactive power overshoot 2
times. Results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurement.

4.9 Multipurpose analog protection MAPGAPC

4.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Multipurpose analog protection MAPGAPC MAP MAP

630 series 857

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.9.2 Function block

GUID-75500106-5F41-4834-9D02-40282D4C7221 V1 EN

Figure 431: Function block

4.9.3 Functionality
The multipurpose analog protection function MAPGAPC is used as a general
protection with many possible application areas as it has flexible measuring and
setting facilities. The function can be used as an underprotection or overprotection
with a settable absolute hysteresis limit. The function operates with the definite time
(DT) characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.9.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the multipurpose analog protection function can be described using
a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-FA6A9C14-37BF-4D65-B0CD-A89F359C4EEE V1 EN

Figure 432: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The level detector compares AI_VALUE to the Start value setting. The Operation
mode setting defines the direction of the level detector.

858 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

Table 844: Operation mode types

Operation Mode Description
"Under" If the input signal AI_VALUE is lower than the set
value of the "Start value" setting, the level detector
enables the timer module.
"Over" If the input signal AI_VALUE exceeds the set
value of the Start value setting, the level detector
enables the timer module.

The Absolute hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if
the input signal is slightly above or below the Start value setting. After leaving the
hysteresis area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for
the signal to only return to the hysteresis area. If the ENA_ADD input is activated, the
threshold value of the internal comparator is the sum of the Start value Add and Start
value settings. The resulting threshold value for the comparator can be increased or
decreased depending on the sign and value of the Start value Add setting.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay
time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the starting condition disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by
Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

MAPGAPC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The start signals from
the function can be blocked from the binary input BLK_ST. The operate signals from
the function can be blocked from the binary input BLK_OPR. The operation timer
counting can be frozen to the prevailing value by activating the FR_TIMER input
signal.

4.9.5 Application
The function block can be used for any general analog signal protection, either
underprotection or overprotection. The setting range is wide, allowing various
protection schemes for the function. Thus, the absolute hysteresis can be set to a value
that suits the application.

The temperature protection using the RTD sensors can be done using the function
block. The measured temperature can be fed from the RTD sensor to the function input
that detects too high temperatures in the motor bearings or windings, for example.
When the ENA_ADD input is enabled, the threshold value of the internal comparator
is the sum of the Start value Add and Start value settings. This allows a temporal
increase or decrease of the level detector depending on the sign and value of the Start
value Add setting, for example, when the emergency start is activated. If, for example,
Start value is 100, Start value Add is 20 and the ENA_ADD input is active, the input
signal needs to rise above 120 before MAPGAPC operates.

630 series 859

Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRS756508 F
Protection functions

4.9.6 Signals
Table 845: MAPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
AI_VALUE REAL 0.0 Analog input value
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer
ENA_ADD BOOLEAN 0 Enable start using added start value

Table 846: MAPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated
START BOOLEAN Started signal

4.9.7 Settings
Table 847: MAPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value -10000.0 - 10000.0 - 0.1 0.0 Start value
Start value Add -100.0 - 100.0 - 0.1 0.0 Added value to start value
Operate delay time 0.03 - 200.00 s 0.01 0.03 Operate delay time

Table 848: MAPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
Operation mode Over - - Over Operation mode (1=Over;2=Under)
Under

Table 849: MAPGAPC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Absolute hysteresis 0.01 - 100.00 - 0.01 0.10 Absolute hysteresis for operation
Reset delay time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset delay time

860 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 4
Protection functions

4.9.8 Measured values

Table 850: MAPGAPC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
AI_VALUE REAL 0.0 Analog input value
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block overall function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Block operate output
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start output
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Freeze internal operate timer
ENA_ADD BOOLEAN 0 Enable start using added start value

4.9.9 Monitored data

Table 851: MAPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operated
1=TRUE
START BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Started signal
1=TRUE
START_DUR REAL - % Start duration in
percentage of the total
operating time

4.9.10 Technical data

Table 852: MAPGAPC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

4.9.11 Technical revision history

Table 853: MAPGAPC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B • Change in function description available in
PCM600
• Internal improvements

C Correction in instance number appearing in

PCM600

630 series 861

Technical Manual
862
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Section 5 Protection related functions

5.1 Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR

5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 3I2f> 68

5.1.2 Function block

GUID-819A17B1-03BB-4163-84A5-695728676B1F V1 EN

Figure 433: Function block

5.1.3 Functionality
The transformer inrush detection INRPHAR is used to coordinate transformer inrush
situations in distribution networks.

Transformer inrush detection is based on the following principle: the output signal
BLK2H is activated once the numerically derived ratio of second harmonic current
I_2H and the fundamental frequency current I_1H exceeds the set value.

The operate time characteristic for the function is of definite time (DT) type.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and
resets timers.

5.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of an inrush current detection function can be described using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 863

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

GUID-3F8B897F-79BF-4F06-A343-DB1174AA4E72 V1 EN

Figure 434: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

I_2H/I_1H
This module calculates the ratio of the second harmonic (I_2H) and fundamental
frequency (I_1H) phase currents. The calculated value is compared to the set Start
value. If the calculated value exceeds the set Start value, the module output is
activated.

Level detector
The output of the phase specific level detector is activated when the fundamental
frequency current I_1H exceeds five percent of the nominal current.

Timer
Once activated, the timer runs until the set Operate delay time value. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the Operate
delay time value, the BLK2H output is activated. After the timer has elapsed and the
inrush situation still exists, the BLK2H signal remains active until the I_2H/I_1H ratio
drops below the value set for the ratio in all phases, that is, until the inrush situation is
over. If the drop-off situation occurs within the operate time up counting, the reset
timer is activated. If the drop-off time exceeds Reset delay time, the operate timer is
reset.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers.

It is recommended to use the second harmonic and waveform based

inrush blocking from the transformer differential protection function
TR2PTDF function if available.

864 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.1.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

5.1.6 Application
Transformer protections require high stability to avoid tripping during magnetizing
inrush conditions. A typical example of an inrush detector application is doubling the
start value of an overcurrent protection during inrush detection.

The inrush detection function can be used to selectively block overcurrent and earth-
fault function stages when the ratio of second harmonic component over the
fundamental component exceeds the set value.

Other applications of this function include the detection of inrush in lines connected
to a transformer.

630 series 865

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

A070695 V4 EN

Figure 435: Inrush current in transformer

5.1.7 Signals
Table 854: INRPHAR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs

866 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Table 855: INRPHAR Output signals

Name Type Description
BLK2H BOOLEAN Second harmonic based block
BLK2H_A BOOLEAN Second harmonic based block, phase A
BLK2H_B BOOLEAN Second harmonic based block, phase B
BLK2H_C BOOLEAN Second harmonic based block, phase C

5.1.8 Settings
Table 856: INRPHAR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 5 - 100 % 1 20 Ratio of the 2. to the 1. harmonic leading
to restraint
Operate delay time 0.020 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Operate delay time

Table 857: INRPHAR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 858: INRPHAR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset delay time

5.1.9 Measured values

Table 859: INRPHAR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_1H_A REAL 0 Current fundamental frequency component, phase
A
I_1H_B REAL 0 Current fundamental frequency component, phase
B
I_1H_C REAL 0 Current fundamental frequency component, phase
C
I_2H_A REAL 0 Current second harmonic component, phase A
I_2H_B REAL 0 Current second harmonic component, phase B
I_2H_C REAL 0 Current second harmonic component, phase C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal for all binary outputs

630 series 867

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

5.1.10 Monitored data

Table 860: INRPHAR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BLK2H_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Second harmonic based
1=TRUE block, phase A
BLK2H_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Second harmonic based
1=TRUE block, phase B
BLK2H_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Second harmonic based
1=TRUE block, phase C

5.1.11 Technical data

Table 861: INRPHAR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

Current measurement:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In
Ratio I2f/I1f measurement:
±5.0% of the set value
Reset time +35 ms / -0 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Operate time accuracy +30 ms / -0 ms

5.2 Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF

5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 3I>/I0>BF 51BF/51NBF

5.2.2 Function block

A071002 V1 EN

Figure 436: Function block

868 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.2.3 Functionality
The breaker failure function CCBRBRF is activated by trip commands from the
protection functions. The commands are either internal commands to the terminal or
external commands through binary inputs. The start command is always a default for
three-phase operation. CCBRBRF includes a three-phase conditional or
unconditional re-trip function, and also a three-phase conditional back-up trip
function.

CCBRBRF uses the same levels of current detection for both re-trip and back-up trip.
The operating values of the current measuring elements can be set within a predefined
setting range. The function has two independent timers for trip purposes: a re-trip
timer for the repeated tripping of its own breaker and a back-up timer for the trip logic
operation for upstream breakers. A minimum trip pulse length can be set
independently for the trip output.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, if desired.

5.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the breaker failure protection can be described using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A071004 V2 EN

Figure 437: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Level detector 1
The measured phase currents are compared phase-wise to the set Current value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Current value, the level detector reports the exceeding

630 series 869

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

of the value to the Start, Retrip and Backup trip logics. The parameter should be set
low enough so that the breaker failure situations with a small fault current or a high
load current can be detected. The setting can be chosen in accordance with the most
sensitive protection function to start the breaker failure protection.

Level detector 2
The measured residual current is compared to the set Current value Res. If the
measured value exceeds the set Current value Res, the level detector reports the
exceeding of the value to the Start and Backup trip logics. In high impedance earthed
systems, the residual current at phase to earth faults is normally much smaller than the
short circuit currents. To detect a breaker failure at single-phase earth faults in these
systems, it is necessary to measure the residual current separately. In effectively
earthed systems, also the setting of the earth-fault current protection can be chosen at
a relatively low current level. The current setting should be chosen in accordance with
the setting of the sensitive earth-fault protection.

Start logic
The Start logic is used to manage the starting of Timer 1 and Timer 2. It resets the
function after the circuit breaker failure is handled. On the rising edge of the START
input, the enabling signal is send to Timer 1 and Timer 2.

Once the Timer 1 and Timer 2 are activated, CCBRBRF can be reset only after the
timers have reached the value set with the Retrip time and CB failure delay settings
and the 150 ms time elapse after Timer 1 and Timer 2 are activated. The 150 ms time
elapse is provided to prevent malfunctioning due to oscillation in the starting signal.

The resetting of the function depends on the CB failure mode setting.

• If CB failure mode is set to "Current", the resetting logic further depends on the
CB failure trip mode setting.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 3", the resetting logic requires that
the values of all the phase currents drop below the Current value setting.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 4", the resetting logic requires that
either the values of the phase currents or the residual current drop below the
Current value and Current value Res setting.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "2 out of 4", the resetting logic requires that
the values of all the phase currents and the residual current drop below the
Current value and Current value Res setting.
• If CB failure mode is set to "Breaker status" mode, the resetting logic requires that
the circuit breaker is in the open condition.
• If CB failure mode setting is set to "Both", the logic resets when both CB is open
and currents falls below the set limit.

The activation of the BLOCK input resets the function.

870 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

GUID-90A0E510-A037-4392-AAC0-E63309763DF3 V1 EN

Figure 438: Start logic

Timer 1
Once activated, the timer runs until the set Retrip time value has elapsed. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set
with Retrip time, the retrip logic is activated. A typical setting is 0...50 ms.

When setting the value of the Retrip time setting, the time delays should be considered
in the calculation.
• Circuit breaker operating time (tcbopen), which is the time between activating the
trip command for the circuit breaker trip coil and CB reaching the open position
• Reset time (tBFP_reset) of current detection in current based operation mode, which
is the time between the moment when the circuit breaker is opened and the
moment when the measured current is detected to be under the set level of the
level detector limits
• Additional safety margin (tmargin), which is to avoid unintentional operation of
circuit breaker failure protection, retripping or backup tripping, when the CB is
opened.

630 series 871

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

The minimum time delay for the retrip can be estimated as:
Retriptime ≥ tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + tmargin
GUID-D9A545B5-AF05-4238-8315-26B36D471B78 V2 EN (Equation 139)

Timer 2
Once activated, the timer runs until the set CB failure delay value is elapsed. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the set
maximum time value CB failure delay. The value of this setting is made as low as
possible at the same time as any unwanted operation is avoided. A typical setting is
90...150 ms which is dependent on the retrip timer.

The minimum time delay for the backup trip can be estimated as:

CBfailuredelay ≥ Retriptime + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + tmargin

A070693 V3 EN (Equation 140)

tcbopen Maximum opening time for the circuit breaker

tBFP_reset Maximum time for the breaker failure protection to detect the correct breaker function (the
current criteria reset)
tmargin Safety margin

The example shows the time line of the circuit breaker opening with the trip in the
normal and faulty breaker condition. Normally, the fault is cleared after the delay
which consists of the protection time delay and breaker operating time delay. The
breaker failure function is initiated at the same moment. To avoid unwanted
retripping, that is, retrip output activation although the CB is already opened, the retrip
time delay must cover the circuit breaker operating time, reset time of the current
detection unit of the circuit breaker failure function and also some additional safety
margin. The safety margin can be selected application-wise. The time delay for the
backup trip must be longer compared to the retrip time so that the unwanted backup
tripping can be avoided. However, there are requirements for the total fault clearing
time to avoid system instability.

It is often required that the total fault clearance time is less than the given critical time.
This time is often dependent on the ability to maintain transient stability in case of a
fault close to a power plant.

872 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

A070692 V2 EN

Figure 439: Timeline of the breaker failure protection

Timer 3
This module is activated by the CB_FAULT signal. Once activated, the timer runs
until the set CB fault delay value has elapsed. The time characteristic is according to
DT. When the operation timer has reached the maximum time value CB fault delay,
the CB_FAULT_AL output is activated. After the set time, an alarm is given so that the
circuit breaker can be repaired. A typical value is 5 s.

Retrip logic
The Retrip logic provides the TRRET output, which can be used to give a retrip signal
for the main circuit breaker. Timer 1 activates the Retrip logic. The operation of the
Retrip logic depends on the CB fail retrip mode setting.

630 series 873

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

A070689 V3 EN

Figure 440: Retrip logic internal design

• The Retrip logic is inactive if the CB fail retrip mode setting is set to "Off".
• If CB fail retrip mode is set to the "Current check" mode, the activation of the
retrip output TRRET depends on the CB failure mode setting.
• If CB failure mode is set to the "Current" mode, TRRET is activated when
the value of any phase current exceeds the Current value setting. The
TRRET output remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time
setting or until all phase current values drop below the Current value
setting, whichever is longer.
• If CB failure mode is set to the "Breaker status" mode, TRRET is activated
if the circuit breaker is in the closed position. The TRRET output remains
active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or the time the circuit
breaker is in the closed position, whichever is longer.
• If CB failure mode is set to "Both", TRRET is activated when either of the
"Breaker status" or "Current" mode condition is satisfied.

• If CB fail retrip mode is set to the "Without check" mode, TRRET is activated
once the Timer 1 is activated without checking the current level. The TRRET
output remains active for a fixed time set with the Trip pulse timer setting.

The activation of the BLOCK input or the CB_FAULT_AL output deactivates the
TRRET output.

Backup trip logic

The Backup trip logic provides the TRBU output which can be used to trip the
upstream backup circuit breaker when the main circuit breaker fails to clear the fault.
The Backup trip logic is activated by Timer 2 module or timer-enabling signal from
the start logic module (rising edge of the START input detected), and simultaneously

874 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

CB_FAULT_AL is active. The operation of the Backup logic depends on the CB

failure mode setting.

• If the CB failure mode is set to "Current", the activation of TRBU depends on the
CB failure trip mode setting.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 3", the failure detection is based
on any of the phase currents exceeding the Current value setting. Once
TRBU is activated, it remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time
setting or until the values of all the phase currents drop below the Current
value setting, whichever is longer.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 4", the failure detection is based
on either a phase current or a residual current exceeding the Current value
or Current value Res setting. Once TRBU is activated, it remains active for
the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until the values of all the
phase currents or residual currents drop below the Current value and
Current value Res setting, whichever is longer.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "2 out of 4", the failure detection requires
that any of the two currents among phase current and a residual current
exceeds their respective set value. Once TRBU is activated, it remains active
for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until the values of all the
phase currents and residual currents drop below the Current value and
Current value Res setting, whichever is longer.

In most applications, "1 out of 3" is sufficient.

• If the CB failure mode is set to "Breaker status", the TRBU output is activated if
the circuit breaker is in the closed position. Once activated, the TRBU output
remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or the time the
circuit breaker is in the closed position, whichever is longer.
• If the CB failure mode setting is set to "Both", TRBU is activated when the
"Breaker status" or "Current" mode conditions are satisfied.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the TRBU output.

630 series 875

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

A070690 V4 EN

Figure 441: Backup trip logic internal design

5.2.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (p.u). These p.u. values
are relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA.
The IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-
related settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3".
Similarly, "Residual Grp 1", "Residual Grp 2" and "Residual Grp 3" are supported for
the residual current or voltage-related settings. One of the groups to be used with the
Base value Sel phase or Base value Sel Res settings must be selected.

5.2.6 Application
The n-1 criterion is used in the design of a fault clearance system. This means that the
fault is cleared even if some component in the fault clearance system is faulty. A
circuit breaker is a necessary component in the fault clearance system. For practical
and economical reasons, it is not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker for the
protected component, but breaker failure protection is used instead.

The breaker failure function issues a backup trip command to upstream circuit
breakers in case the original circuit breaker fails to trip for the protected component.

876 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

The detection of a failure to break the current through the breaker is made by
measuring the current or by detecting the remaining trip signal (unconditional).

CCBRBRF can also retrip. This means that a second trip signal is sent to the protected
circuit breaker. The retrip function is used to increase the operational reliability of the
breaker. The function can also be used to avoid backup tripping of several breakers in
case mistakes occur during IED maintenance and tests.

CCBRBRF is initiated by operating different protection functions or digital logics

inside the IED. It is also possible to initiate the function externally through a binary
input.

CCBRBRF can be blocked by using an internally assigned signal or an external signal

from a binary input. This signal blocks the function of the breaker failure protection
even when the timers have started or the timers are reset.

The retrip timer is initiated after the start input is set to true. When the pre-defined time
setting is exceeded, CCBRBRF issues the retrip and sends a trip command, for
example, to the circuit breaker's second trip coil. Both a retrip with current check and
an unconditional retrip are available. When a retrip with current check is chosen, the
retrip is performed only if there is a current flow through the circuit breaker.

The backup trip timer is also initiated at the same time as the retrip timer. If CCBRBRF
detects a failure in tripping the fault within the set backup delay time, which is longer
than the retrip time, it sends a backup trip signal to the chosen backup breakers. The
circuit breakers are normally upstream breakers which feed fault current to a faulty
feeder.

The backup trip always includes a current check criterion. This means that the
criterion for a breaker failure is that there is a current flow through the circuit breaker
after the set backup delay time.

630 series 877

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

GUID-DA28AB63-2327-41B2-976E-99D36F516172 V1 EN

Figure 442: Typical breaker failure protection scheme in distribution substations

5.2.7 Signals
Table 862: CCBRBRF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
START BOOLEAN 0 CBFP start command
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 CB in closed poisition
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block CBFP operation
CB_FAULT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty and unable to trip

Table 863: CCBRBRF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip
TRBU BOOLEAN Backup trip
CB_FAULT_AL BOOLEAN Delayed CB failure alarm

878 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.2.8 Settings
Table 864: CCBRBRF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On/Off
On
Current value 0.05 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.30 Operating phase current
Current value Res 0.05 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.30 Operating residual current
Retrip time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.00 Delay timer for retrip
CB failure delay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.15 Delay timer for backup trip

Table 865: CCBRBRF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3
Measurement mode DFT - - DFT Phase current measurement mode of
Peak-to-Peak function
CB failure mode Current - - Current Operating mode of function
Breaker status
Both
CB failure trip mode 2 out of 4 - - 2 out of 4 Backup trip current check mode
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
CB fail retrip mode Off - - Off Operating mode of retrip logic
Without check
Current check
CB fault delay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Circuit breaker faulty delay
Trip pulse time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.20 Pulse length of retrip and backup trip
outputs

5.2.9 Measured values

Table 866: CCBRBRF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0 Phase1 current DFT amplitude
I_AMPL_B REAL 0 Phase2 current DFT amplitude
I_AMPL_C REAL 0 Phase3 current DFT amplitude
I_PTOP_A REAL 0 Phase1 current Peak to Peak value
I_PTOP_B REAL 0 Phase2 current Peak to Peak value
I_PTOP_C REAL 0 Phase3 current Peak to Peak value
I0_AMPL REAL 0 Residual current amplitude
Table continues on next page

630 series 879

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Name Type Default Description

START BOOLEAN 0 CBFP start command
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 CB in closed poisition
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block CBFP operation
CB_FAULT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty and unable to trip

5.2.10 Monitored data

Table 867: CCBRBRF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TRRET BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Retrip
1=TRUE
TRBU BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Backup trip
1=TRUE
CB_FAULT_AL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Delayed CB failure alarm
1=TRUE

5.2.11 Technical data

Table 868: CCBRBRF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±30 ms

5.2.12 Technical revision history

Table 869: CCBRBRF technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B • Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for
Current value and Current value Res
settings
• Internal improvements

5.3 Tripping logic TRPPTRC

5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tripping logic TRPPTRC I->O 94

880 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.3.2 Function block

A071286 V2 EN

Figure 443: Function block

5.3.3 Functionality
The tripping logic function TRPPTRC is used as a trip command collector and handler
after the protection functions. The features of this function influence the trip signal
behavior of the circuit breaker. The user can set the minimum trip pulse length when
the non-latched mode is selected. It is also possible to select the latched mode for the
trip signal.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and
resets timers.

5.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

When the TRPPTRC function is disabled, all trip outputs intended to

go through the function to the circuit breaker trip coil are blocked!

The operation of the tripping logic function can be described with a module diagram.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A070882 V4 EN

Figure 444: Functional module diagram

Timer
The duration of the TRIP output signal from TRPPTRC can be adjusted with the Trip
pulse time setting when Trip lockout is "Off". The pulse length should be long enough
to secure the opening of the breaker. For three-pole tripping, TRPPTRC has a single
input OPERATE, through which all trip output signals are routed from the protection

630 series 881

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

functions within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the
IED's binary inputs. The function has a single trip output TRIP for connecting the
function to one or more of the IED's binary outputs and also to other functions within
the IED requiring this signal.

Lockout logic
TRPPTRC is provided with possibilities to activate a lockout. When activated, the
lockout can be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating the
RST_LKOUT input or from the LHMI clear menu parameter. When using the
"Lockout & latched trip" mode (Automatic lockout = "On", Trip lockout = "On"), the
resetting of the TRIP output can be done similarly as when using the "Lockout" mode
(Automatic lockout = "On", Trip lockout = "Off"). It is also possible to reset remotely
through a separate communication parameter.

The minimum pulse trip function is not active when using the
"Lockout & latched trip" mode (Automatic lockout = "On", Trip
lockout = "On").

The CL_LKOUT and TRIP outputs can be blocked with the BLOCK input.

Table 870: Lockout modes for the TRPPTRC trip output

Lockout mode Description
Automatic lockout If set to "On", the activation of the TRIP output
activates the CL_LKOUT lockout output.

Trip lockout If set to "On" (together with Automatic lockout =

"On"), the TRIP output will be latched together
with the activation of the CL_LKOUT output.

5.3.5 Application
All trip signals from different protection functions are routed through the trip logic.
The most simplified application of the logic function is linking the trip signal and
ensuring that the signal is long enough.

The tripping logic in the protection relay is intended to be used in the three-phase
tripping for all fault types (3ph operating). To prevent the closing of a circuit breaker
after a trip, the function can block the DAXCBR closing.

The TRPPTRC function is intended to be connected to one trip coil of the

corresponding circuit breaker. If tripping is needed for another trip coil or another
circuit breaker which needs, for example, different trip pulse time, another trip logic
function can be used.

The inputs from the protection functions are connected to the OPERATE input.
Usually, a logic block OR is required to combine the different function outputs to this
input. The TRIP output is connected to the binary outputs on the IO board.

882 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

TRPPTRC is used for simple three-phase tripping applications.

GUID-4C1ED151-A703-4CBC-A4A1-558027B10625 V1 EN

Figure 445: Typical TRPPTRC connection

5.3.6 Signals
Table 871: TRPPTRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0 Request to trip circuit breaker.
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RST_LKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function

Table 872: TRPPTRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
CL_LKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

630 series 883

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

5.3.7 Settings
Table 873: TRPPTRC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Trip lockout Off - - Off On: activate output (CL_LKOUT) and trip
On latch, Off: only out
Automatic lockout Off - - Off On: lockout from trip, Off: no lockout
On
Trip pulse time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal

5.3.8 Measured values

Table 874: TRPPTRC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0 Request to trip circuit breaker.
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
RST_LKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function

5.3.9 Monitored data

Table 875: TRPPTRC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TRIP BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - General trip output signal
1=TRUE
CL_LKOUT BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Circuit breaker lockout
1=TRUE output (set until reset)

5.4 Fault locator SCEFRFLO

5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fault locator function SCEFRFLO FLOC 21FL

884 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.4.2 Function block

GUID-961EEAE7-D10F-406E-9BC5-28DC1DE177B7 V3 EN

Figure 446: Function block

5.4.3 Functionality
The fault locator function SCEFRFLO provides impedance-based fault location. It is
designed for radially operated distribution systems. It is applicable for locating short
circuits in distribution networks. Earth faults can be located in effectively earthed and
low resistance and in low-reactance earthed networks. Under certain limitations,
SCEFRFLO can also be applied for earth-fault location in unearthed distribution
networks.

The fault distance calculation is based on locally measured fundamental frequency

current and voltage phasors. The full operation of SCEFRFLO requires that all three
currents and phase-to-earth voltages are measured.

The fault distance calculation is done in two steps. The fault type is determined first
using the built-in Phase Selection Logic PSL. After this, the fault distance is
calculated.

The fault distance estimate is obtained when SCEFRFLO is triggered. The triggering
can be blocked with the binary input signal BLOCK.

5.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The actual fault distance calculation consists of two steps. The fault type is determined
first by using the built-in phase selection logic PSL. After this, the fault distance is
calculated. As a fundamental operation criterion, the maximum of the phase current
magnitudes must exceed a threshold value of 1 percent of the nominal phase current
value of the CT primary current. When this condition is not met, all the outputs of the
function are blocked.

630 series 885

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

5.4.4.1 Fault type selection

The identification of the faulty phases is compulsory for the correct operation of the
fault locator function. This is because only one of the impedance measuring elements,
that is, the fault loops, provides the correct result for a specific fault type. A three-
phase fault is an exception and it could, in theory, be calculated with any of the fault
loops.
Fault type Description Output FAULT_LOOP
Phase A to Gnd Phase A-to-earth fault 1
Phase B to Gnd Phase B-to-earth fault 2
Phase C to Gnd Phase C-to-earth fault 3
Phase A to B Phase A-to-B short circuit fault 4
Phase B to C Phase B-to-C short circuit fault 5
Phase C to A Phase C-to-A short circuit fault 6
Three phase Three-phase short circuit 7

The fault loop used in the fault distance calculation is indicated in the FAULT_LOOP
output as integer numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7.

In case of phase-to-phase-to-earth faults AB-earth, BC-earth or CA-earth, the selected

fault loop depends on the location of the individual earth faults. When the faults are
located at the same feeder, the corresponding phase-to-phase loop AB, BC or CA is
used for calculation. When the faults are located at different feeders, the phase-to-
earth loop A, B or C, corresponding to the faulty phase at the protected feeder, is used
for calculation.

Identification of the faulty phase is provided by the built-in PSL based on combined
impedance and current criteria. PSL is virtually setting-free and has only one
parameter, Z Max phase load, for discriminating a large symmetrical load from a
three-phase fault. The Z Max phase load parameter can be calculated using the
equation:

 U2 
Z Max phase load = 0.8  
 S max 
 
GUID-9801C2DA-D1BD-4EA4-ABDD-1126B6CEA0AE V1 EN (Equation 141)

U nominal phase-to-phase voltage

Smax maximum three-phase load

For example, if U = 20 kV and Smax = 1 MVA, Z Max phase load = 320 ohm.

886 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.4.4.2 Fault distance calculation

As soon as a fault condition is recognized by PSL, the fault distance calculation is

started using one of the seven impedance measuring elements, that is, the fault loops.
SCEFRFLO employs independent algorithms for each fault type in order to achieve
optimal performance.

The inherent result from the fault distance calculation is the ohmic fault loop
impedance value.

ZFLOOP = RFLOOP + j × XFLOOP + RF

GUID-062F4362-3C18-4B5B-A136-24127E839F6D V1 EN (Equation 142)

The result can be utilized as such or it can be further processed in system level fault
localization applications.

Depending on the fault loop, the composition of terms RFLOOP, XFLOOP and RF is
different.

t
Fault loops 1, 2 and 3
Fault loops 1, 2 and 3 are used for single-phase earth faults. When the individual earth
faults are located at different feeders, they are also used in the case of a phase-to-
phase-to-earth fault. In this case, the phase-to-earth loop 1, 2 or 3, corresponding to the
faulty phase at the protected feeder, is used for calculation.

Fault loops 1, 2 and 3 measure the impedances which, at the same time, are the outputs
of SCEFRFLO.

GUID-63FFBE53-B17B-4914-94BB-65236C1EFBEA V1 EN (Equation 143)

GUID-846A9380-8705-478D-9929-8BD61930BC66 V1 EN

Figure 447: Fault loop impedance for phase-to-earth fault impedance loops 1, 2
or 3

630 series 887

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

The earth-fault distance calculation algorithm is selected with setting EF algorithm to

"Load compensation" or "Load modelling". For correct operation of both algorithms
there should not be any zero-sequence current sources, for example, earthing
transformers, in front of the IED location.

"Load compensation" utilizes symmetrical components to compensate the effect of a

load on the measured voltages and currents. It should be selected in case of radial
feeders with low impedance or effectively earthed systems, where the fault current is
fed from one side only and there are no in-feeds along the protected line.

"Load modelling" takes into account the effect of the load in measured currents and
voltages by load modelling. The "Load modelling" algorithm can be applied in case
of radial feeders with low impedance or effectively earthed systems, where the fault
current is fed from one side only.

The "Load modelling" algorithm requires the Equivalent load Dis setting, that is, an
equivalent load distance, as an additional parameter. The maximum value of the
voltage drop, denoted Udrop(real), appears at the end of the line. The Equivalent load
Dis parameter is the distance at which a single load tap corresponding to the total load
of the feeder would result in a voltage drop equal to Udrop(real). The dashed curve
shows the voltage drop profile in this case.

GUID-3576462C-9920-4590-889A-5A8E8DD1B64B V1 EN

Figure 448: Description of the equivalent load distance

888 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

The value of Equivalent load Dis can be calculated based on the load flow and voltage
drop calculations using equation:

Equivalent load Dis = Udrop(real) / Udrop(s=1),

Udrop(real) the actual maximum voltage drop of the feeder

Udrop(s=1) the fictional voltage drop if the entire load is tapped at the end of the feeder

the Equivalent load Dis parameter can be determined by conducting a single-phase

earth-fault test (Rfault = 0 ohm) at that point of the feeder where the maximum actual
voltage drop takes place. This point is typically located at the end of the main line. The
calculated value of Equivalent load Dis can be obtained from the S_CALC output.

In case of evenly distributed load, Equivalent load Dis ~ 0.5. When the load is tapped
at the end of the line, Equivalent load Dis = 1.0. If nothing else is known, a good initial
guess for Equivalent load Dis is 0.5.

When "Load modelling" algorithm is used, the user can select with the EF algorithm
current setting whether the I0 or I2-current based algorithm is used. The difference
between I0 and I2 is that I2 does not require the settings Ph capacitive React and Ph
leakage Ris. In case of I0, these settings are required in order to compensate for the
influence of line charging capacitances. This typically improves the accuracy of a
fault location estimate when fault resistance is involved in the fault.

Under certain restrictions the "Load modelling" algorithm can also be applied into
unearthed networks. Based on simulation and field tests, when Rfault = 0 ohm, the
defined earth-fault current magnitude should exceed the pre-fault load current
Ief(Rfault=0) / ILoad≥1. This ratio is recorded and can be read from the IFLT_PER_ILD
output. The low ratio affects also the validity estimate of calculated fault distance,
which can be read from the EF_VALIDITY output. Sufficient fault current
magnitude can be achieved, for example, with proper switching operations in the
background network, which increases the fault current. After the switching operation,
a re-energizing of the faulted line is done and a new estimate obtained. The fault
resistance decreases the fault location accuracy and it should not be too large,
maximum a few hundreds of ohms.

The range of the setting Equivalent load Dis is 0.01...1.00. Any value
of S_CALC outside this range needs to be ignored.

Fault loops 12, 23 and 31

Fault loops 12, 23 and 31 are used for the phase-to-phase short circuit faults and also
for the phase-to-phase-to-earth faults if the individual earth-faults are located in the
same feeder.

630 series 889

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Fault loops 12, 23 and 31 measure the impedances, which at the same time are the
outputs of SCEFRFLO.
RFLOOP = R1 + R fault / 2
XFLOOP = X1
RF = R fault / 2
GUID-457251F5-6518-497E-A015-4933EDD541AE V1 EN (Equation 144)

GUID-3FA48705-A1CD-4CB8-87C9-2FE5CC192040 V1 EN

Figure 449: Fault loop impedance for phase-to-phase fault impedance loops 12,
23 and 31

For the fault loops 12, 23, 31, the estimated fault resistance is half the
total fault resistance between the phases.

The fault distance calculation algorithm for the phase-to-phase fault impedance loops
(12, 23 or 31) is defined by using setting Load Com PP loops = "Disabled"/"Enabled"
setting and setting Simple mode PP loops = "Disabled"/"Enabled".

The load compensation can be enabled or disabled with the Load Com PP loops =
FALSE/TRUE setting. The load compensation should be disabled only if the ratio
between the fault current and load current is large or when the value of the fault
distance estimate for the short circuit fault is required for each shot of an auto-
reclosing cycle.

The fault distance calculation is the most accurate when the calculation is made with
the fault loop model. This model requires positive sequence impedances as initial
data. If the data is not accessible, the calculation can be made with a simple fault loop
model that does not need any impedance data. The simple fault loop model is enabled,
with the value Simple mode PP loops = TRUE. When the simple model is enabled, the
conversion of electrical fault distance into a physical distance is not done in the IED
and the FLT_DISTANCE output is not valid. The estimated impedances are still
calculated and shown normally in their respective outputs.

Fault loop 123

Fault loop 123 is used only for the three-phase short circuit fault and it measures the
impedances that are the outputs of SCEFRFLO:

890 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

RFLOOP = R1 + R fault
XFLOOP = X1
RF = R fault
GUID-E37FE8BB-6284-451F-B59E-B94D9BCB4C67 V1 EN (Equation 145)

GUID-F56A8418-F124-4833-BF83-430D234FDF6E V1 EN

Figure 450: Fault loop impedance for a three-phase fault impedance loop 123

The three-phase fault distance is calculated with a special measuring element using
positive sequence quantities. This is advantageous especially in case of non-
transposed (asymmetric) lines, as the line parameter has less influence. If the line is
non-transposed, all the phase-to-phase loops have different fault loop reactance. The
use of positive sequence quantities results in the average value of phase-to-phase loop
reactance. This is the most representative estimate in case of three-phase faults.

The fault distance calculation algorithm for the three-phase fault impedance loop is
defined by using the setting Load Com PP loops = "Disabled"/"Enabled" and setting
Simple mode PP loops = "Disabled"/"Enabled" setting.

The load compensation can be enabled or disabled with the Load Com PP loops =
FALSE/TRUE setting. The load compensation should be disabled only if the ratio
between the fault current and load current is large or when the value of the fault
distance estimate for the short circuit fault is required for each shot of an auto-
reclosing cycle.

The fault distance calculation is the most accurate when the calculation is made with
the fault loop model. This model requires positive sequence impedances as initial
data. If the data is not accessible, then the calculation can be made with a simple fault
loop model that does not need any impedance data. The simple fault loop model is
enabled, with the value Simple mode PP loops = TRUE. When the simple model is
enabled, the conversion of electrical fault distance into a physical distance is not done
in the IED and the FLT_DISTANCE output is not valid. The estimated impedances
are still calculated and shown normally in their respective outputs.

The function calculates XFPHASE, which is the positive sequence fault reactance in
primary ohms and is available as an output.

630 series 891

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Table 876: Explanation of used abbreviations

Abbreviation Description
RFLOOP Estimated fault loop resistance in primary ohms
XFLOOP Estimated fault reactance in primary ohms
XFPHASE Positive sequence fault reactance in primary ohms
RF Estimated fault resistance in primary ohms
R1 Positive sequence resistance from the substation
to the fault location
X1 Positive sequence reactance from the substation
to the fault location
RN Earth return path resistance from the substation to
the fault location = (R0 - R1)/3

XN Earth return path reactance from the substation to

the fault location = (X0 - X1)/3

R0 Zero sequence resistance from the substation to

the fault location
X0 Zero sequence reactance from the substation to
the fault location
Rfault Physical fault resistance at the fault location. In
case of earth faults, it includes the arc and the
earthing resistance. In case of the phase-to-phase
faults, it equals to the arc resistance between the
phases. In case of three-phase faults, it equals to
the arc resistance per phase.

GUID-6E182370-3330-47B0-B208-2091D8843AE8 V1 EN

Figure 451: Physical fault resistance in different fault loops

For fault loops 12, 23 and 31 the estimated fault resistance (the RF
output) is half of the total physical fault resistance between the phases.
In earth faults, the estimated fault resistance includes the arc and the
earthing resistance. In case of a three-phase fault the estimated fault
resistance equals the arc resistance per phase.

892 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.4.4.3 Steady-state asymmetry and load compensation

In reality, power systems are never totally symmetrical. The asymmetry produces
steady-state quantities in the form of zero and negative sequence voltages and
currents. If not compensated, these are the error sources for the fault distance
calculation, especially in the case of earth faults. In SCEFRFLO, all the fault distance
calculation algorithms utilize the delta (Δ) quantities which eliminate the steady-state
asymmetry. The delta quantities are also used for load compensation for short circuit
faults (fault loops 12, 23, 31 and 123).

The delta quantities describe the change in the measured quantities due to the fault:

Δx = xfault - xpre-fault.

The Pre fault time setting is used for generating the delta quantities. The pre-fault
values are captured at least Pre fault time earlier than the actual fault moment occurs.

Load current is one of the main error sources for the fault distance calculation. The
effect of the load current increases with high fault resistance values. SCEFRFLO
employs independent load compensation methods for each type of fault in order to
achieve optimal performance. For the earth faults (fault loops 1, 2, and 3), the load
compensation is done numerically within the fault distance algorithm. For the short
circuit faults (fault loops 12, 23, 31 and 123), the delta quantities are used for the load
compensation.

5.4.4.4 Triggering the SCEFRFLO

The fault distance estimate is obtained when SCEFRFLO is triggered. The triggering
can be blocked with the BLOCK binary input signal.

SCEFRFLO requires a minimum of two cycles of measuring time after the fault
occurrence. This provides time for filtering the fault distance estimate. The behavior
of the fault distance estimate of SCEFRFLO varies as a function of time:
• Immediately after the fault occurrence, the estimate is affected by initial transient
in voltages and currents
• After one cycle, when the fault has occurred, the fault distance starts to converge
towards the final value.
• After two cycles, when the fault has occurred, the fault distance estimate is ready
and SCEFRFLO can be triggered. The more there is measuring time, the better
the fault distance estimate is.

630 series 893

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

GUID-FA598223-CCF0-40C2-B206-54A231633153 V1 EN

Figure 452: The behavior of the fault distance estimate in time

The actual trigger time is saved in the registers (recorded data). The trigger method is
defined with the control parameter Calculation Trg mode with the values "External",
"Internal" and "Continuous".

External
In case of external triggering, an external trigger signal should be connected to the
TRIGG input. The trigger signal is typically a trip signal from a protective function.
The TRIGG_OUT output signal can be monitored to see if the distance estimate is
updated. The Pre fault time setting should be set at a default value of 100 ms using the
external triggering. This guarantees that the load compensation uses valid data from
the load conditions.

Internal
In case of internal triggering, the TRIGG input is not used for triggering. Instead, the
trigger signal is created by PSL. The challenge is to time the triggering moment so that
there is sufficient measuring time without the feeder breaker being operated. This is
done by timing the actual triggering moment based on the Pre fault time setting.

To prove that the internal triggering has time to operate before the feeder breaker is
opened, the Pre fault time setting must be set to a valuer smaller than or equal to the

894 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

minimum operating time of the function used for tripping the breaker. For example, if
the short circuit protection operating time delay is 0.2 s and the earth-fault protection
operating time delay is 0.3 s, Pre fault time should be 0.2 s. The actual triggering
occurs (200 ms - 40 ms) = 160 ms after PSL has recognized the fault condition. 40 ms
is reserved for the PSL function for identifying the fault type.

PSL is a non-directional function and therefore, internal triggering

should not be used when directionality is required. The TRIGG output
can be monitored to see if the distance estimate is updated.

Continuous
Continuous trigger mode can be utilized during the secondary testing of the function
block. In this mode, the function outputs are continuously updated at the task time
interval and can thus be monitored for testing purposes. Recorded data are updated
when the internal or external triggering occurs.

Example configuration for the triggering of SCEFRFLO

GUID-1ABD2908-F4F6-4E77-A736-D58D08DBEB18 V1 EN

Figure 453: A typical configuration for the triggering of SCEFRFLO

The OPERATE signal from the non-directional overcurrent function PHLPTOC is

used to provide an indication of a short circuit fault. The OPERATE signal from the
directional earth-fault function DEFLPDEF is used to provide an indication of an
earth fault at the protected feeder.

SCEFRFLO with autoreclosing function

When SCEFRFLO is used with the autoreclosing sequence, the distance estimate
from the first trip is typically the most accurate one. The fault distance estimates from
successive trips are possible but accuracy may be degraded due to inaccurate load
compensation. During the autoreclosing cycle dead time, the load condition of the
feeder is unsure.

In unearthed networks, the earth-fault magnitude during normal network

configuration may not be enough for an accurate fault location estimate. However, the
accuracy of the fault location estimate can be improved by increasing the earth-fault
current magnitude. This can be done with proper switching operations that enlarge the
background network after the tripping of the faulty feeder. The re-energization of the
feeder on to the fault gives the improved estimate for fault distance. The needed
switching operations can also be done during the dead time of the delayed
autoreclosing sequence.

630 series 895

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Triggering of SCEFRFLO may also be inhibited during the autoreclosing sequence.

This is achieved by connecting the signal AR_READY from the autoreclosing function
that indicates that the autoreclosing sequence is in progress to the BLOCK input of
SCEFRFLO. Blocking of SCEFRFLO triggering is suggested during the
autoreclosing sequence when the load compensation or steady-state asymmetry
elimination is based on the delta quantities. This applies to the short circuit faults (fault
loops 12, 23, 31 and the 123) when the setting is Load Com PP loops = TRUE or to
earth faults with the value EF algorithm = Load compensation.

5.4.4.5 Result validity indicator for earth faults

Fault localization is a challenging task. There are many factors that can deteriorate the
accuracy of the calculated fault distance estimate. The most important factors are:
• Fault resistance. The smaller the fault resistance, the more accurate the result is
likely to be. The accuracy of the fault distance estimation deteriorates if the
resistive part of the fault loop impedance becomes much larger than the reactive
part due to the large fault resistance. The fault resistance is typically quite low
during short circuits. However, it can be the most dominant error source in earth
faults.
• Asymmetry. The asymmetry of the line parameters and the loading affects the
fault distance estimation accuracy. If the asymmetry has a very high value, the
accuracy of the fault distance estimation deteriorates.
• Saturation. The saturation of current or voltage transformers increases certain
harmonics, especially the second, the fifth and the seventh. Saturation
deteriorates the fault distance estimate.
• In unearthed networks, the ratio between the earth-fault current (Rfault = 0 ohms)
and load current magnitude is critical. The higher the ratio, the better the fault
distance estimate.

Furthermore, the distribution networks have specific features which further

complicate and challenge fault localization algorithms. These include, for example,
non-homogeneity of lines, presence of laterals and load taps.

The validity of the estimated earth fault distance is judged and reported together with
the fault distance estimate. The EF_VALIDITY output has various values:

Table 877: The EF_VALIDITY output values

N/A Indicator is not applicable (fault type is a short

circuit).
High Result is not affected by error sources.
Moderate Result is slightly affected by error sources. The
additional error in the fault distance estimate can
be tens of percents.
Poor Fault distance algorithm is greatly affected by error
sources and cannot function properly. In this case,
the result is only trend setting. The result can only
indicate, for example, whether the fault is in the
beginning or in the end of the feeder section.

896 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.4.4.6 ALARM output

The SCEFRFLO function contains an alarm output for the calculated fault distance. If
the value of the calculated fault distance FLT_DISTANCE is between the Low alarm
Dis limit setting and High alarm Dis limit, the ALARM output is set to TRUE.

The ALARM output can be utilized, for example, in regions with waterways or other
places where knowledge of certain fault locations is of high importance.

GUID-888F1A74-78DC-4303-BEAD-86C052FBC5A9 V1 EN

Figure 454: An example of the ALARM output usage

5.4.4.7 Impedance settings

The fault distance calculation in SCEFRFLO is based on the fault impedance loop
modeling. The fault loop is parameterized with the impedance settings, for example
R1 line section A, X1 line section A, R0 line section A, and X0 line section A. The earth
fault loops ( fault loops 1, 2 and 3) require both positive and zero sequence impedances
as an initial data. For the short circuit fault loops (fault loops 12, 23, 31 and 123), only
positive sequence impedances are needed. Even these can be omitted if the Simple
mode PP loops = "Enabled". In this case, the conversion of electrical fault distance
into a physical distance cannot be done in the IED and the FLT_DISTANCE output is
not valid.

If the impedance settings are in use, it is important that the settings closely match the
impedances through which the fault current flows. The impedance settings, for
example R1 line section A, X1 line section A, R0 line section A, and X0 line section A,
are given in the units of primary ohm/pu and the line section lengths in per unit (pu).
Pu can be the unit that the user prefers and it allows the user to give the impedances
in ohm/km and length in km, for example, (pu = km), or impedance in ohm/mile and

630 series 897

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

length in mile (pu = mile). The resulting fault distance is also obtained in pu and it
should match the units entered for the line section lengths.
Table 878: Positive sequence impedance values for typical 11 kV conductors, “Flat” tower
configuration assumed
Name R1 (Ω/km) X1 (Ω/km)
ACSR 50 sq.mm 0.532 0.373
ACSR 500 sq.mm 0.0725 0.270

Table 879: Positive sequence impedance values for typical 10/20 kV conductors, “Flat” tower
configuration assumed
Name R1 (Ω/km) X1 (Ω/km)
Al/Fe 36/6 Sparrow 0.915 0.383
Al/Fe 54/9 Raven 0.578 0.368
Al/Fe 85/14 Pigeon 0.364 0.354
Al/Fe 93/39 Imatra 0.335 0.344
Al/Fe 108/23 Vaasa 0.287 0.344
Al/Fe 305/39 Duck 0.103 0.314

Table 880: Positive sequence impedance values for typical 33 kV conductors, “Flat” tower
configuration assumed
Name R1 (Ω/km) X1 (Ω/km)
ACSR 50 sq.mm 0.529 0.444
ACSR 100 sq.mm 0.394 0.434
ACSR 500 sq.mm 0.0548 0.346

Positive-sequence impedance values

Accurate fault localization requires accurate values of the setting for line impedances.
As datasheet impedance values are valid only for a certain tower configuration, the
user has to adjust the datasheet impedance values according to the actual install
configuration. This minimizes the fault localization error due to inaccurate settings.

The positive sequence reactance per phase can be calculated using the following
equation which also applies for symmetrically transposed three-phase aluminum
overhead lines without ground wires:

 a 
X1 ≈ f n × 2π × 10−4  2 × ln en + 0.5  [Ohm / km]
 r 
GUID-B3D2EC98-E22D-447A-8269-DD770726B0E9 V1 EN (Equation 146)

898 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

fn Fundamental frequency [Hz]

aen
( a12 .a23 .a31 )1 / 3
= geometric average of phase distances [m]
axy distance [m] between phases X and Y

r radius [m] for single conductor

GUID-86571C2A-BC00-4A84-9A56-F3B9AC538BCE V1 EN

Figure 455: Typical distribution line tower configurations

Zero sequence impedance values

The zero sequence impedances are needed only in case of earth fault localization. In
case of the localization of a two-phase or three-phase short-circuit fault, positive
sequence impedances are sufficient.

The positive sequence impedance values for the lines are known or can easily be
obtained from datasheets. The zero sequence values, on the other hand, are not so easy
to obtain as they depend on actual installation conditions and configurations.
Sufficient accuracy can, however, be obtained with rather simple calculations using
these equations (applies per phase for symmetrically transposed three-phase
aluminium overhead lines without ground wires):

R0[50 Hz ] ≈ R1 + 0.14804 [ohm / km]

GUID-9788EC26-6E2D-4DD4-89D9-565D4D7481D4 V1 EN (Equation 147)

R0[60 Hz ] ≈ R1 + 0.17765 [ohm / km]

GUID-6AA28C80-E150-4B1B-8AF8-EAA328B626FF V1 EN (Equation 148)

 W 
X 0 = f n × 4π × 10−4 ×  3 × ln + 0.25  [ohm / km]
 ren 
GUID-B1FFED85-92F0-42C6-AEDE-B980047E2A55 V1 EN (Equation 149)

630 series 899

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

R1 conductor AC resistance [ohm/km]

fn fundamental frequency [Hz]

W
ρearth
658
fn
= equivalent depth [m] of the earth return path
ρearth earth resistivity [ohm, m]

ren 1
 1 3
 r ⋅ (a12
2 2 2 3
⋅ a23 ⋅ a31 )
 
 
= equivalent radius [m] for conductor bundle
r radius [m] for single conductor
axy distance [m] between phases X and Y

Settings Ph leakage Ris and Ph capacitive React

The Ph leakage Ris and Ph capacitive React settings are used for improving fault
distance estimation accuracy due to earth faults. They are critical in finding the
accurate fault location in unearthed networks. In other types of networks, they are less
critical.

The Ph leakage Ris setting represents the leakage losses (resistive losses due to
insulators and so on) of the protected feeder in terms of resistance per phase. The Ph
capacitive React setting represents the total phase-to-earth capacitive reactance of the
protected feeder per phase. Based on experience, a proper estimate for the Ph leakage
Ris is greater than 20 to 40 times Ph capacitive React.

GUID-F1F1C5F8-B0FD-4EC8-903D-0A6BBF3E0B46 V1 EN

Figure 456: Equivalent diagram of the protected feeder, RL0F = Ph leakage Ris

The determination of the value of the Ph capacitive React setting can be based either
on network data or measurement.

900 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

If the total phase-to-earth capacitance (including all branches) per phase C0F of the
protected feeder is known,

Ph capacitive React = 1 / (ω × C0 F ), ω = 2 × π × fn
GUID-95F80FC2-BF63-45AE-A6C0-98265F599CF9 V1 EN (Equation 150)

fn system nominal frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz)

If the earth-fault current of protected feeder Ief is known (Rf=0 ohm) in case of an
unearthed network, then the corresponding earth capacitance per phase can be
calculated using the equation:

I ef
COF =
3 ⋅ ω ⋅ UV
GUID-7897F6EB-6E9E-436A-AC97-359F44E17D81 V1 EN (Equation 151)

UV phase-to-ground voltage

SCEFRFLO can also determine the value for the Ph capacitive React setting by
measurements. The calculation of the value of Ph capacitive React setting is
accomplished by conducting an earth-fault test outside the protected feeder during
commissioning, for example at the substation busbar. The calculated value of the Ph
capacitive React setting is obtained from the XC0F_CALC output. This value must be
manually entered for the Ph capacitive React setting.

The calculated value matches the current switching state of the feeder
and if the switching state of the protected feeder changes, the value is
no longer valid. In this case, the setting should be updated, for
example by repeating the test.

The calculation procedure of the Ph capacitive React setting is triggered by the binary
signal connected to the TRIGG_XC0F input. The trigger signal should indicate that an
earth-fault is detected outside the protected feeder.

Figure 457 shows a typical configuration of the Ph capacitive React setting

calculation triggering.

The logic is based on:

• If the earth-fault is detected by overvoltage function (START of ROVPTOV) and
fault is not seen by forward looking earth-fault protection functions (START of
DEFLPDEF), then after a set delay (TIMERSET) output XC0F_CALC is
updated.
• The Delay (TIMERSET) must be set longer than the start delay of directional
earth-fault function (DEFLPEF) inside terminal , but shorter than the minimum

630 series 901

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

operate time of directional earth-fault functions in the substation. For example, if

the start delay is 100 ms and the shortest operate time 300 ms, then a value of 200
ms can be used.
• Additionally, circuit breaker and disconnector status is used to verify that entire
feeder is measured.

GUID-E8D104FD-6E19-466A-A7A5-0C178DAD980B V1 EN

Figure 457: Typical configuration for XC0F calculation triggering

Modelling a non-homogenous line

A typical distribution feeder is built with several different types of overhead lines and
cables. This means that the feeder is electrically non-homogenous. The impedance
diagram is non-linear.

GUID-33901C2C-7D94-41A1-AD60-7960A45A1BD2 V1 EN

Figure 458: Non-homogeneity of a feeder in an impedance diagram

If the impedance of an individual line section varies, an accurate conversion of the

fault loop reactance into a physical fault distance, for example into kilometres, is not
possible with only one impedance setting. Therefore, SCEFRFLO allows the
modeling of the line impedance variation in IED with three line sections and with
independent impedance settings. This improves the accuracy of the physical fault
distance conversion done in the IED, especially in cases where the line impedance
non-homogeneity is severe. The number of line sections used in the conversion
procedure from ohmic fault distance into physical fault distance are defined by using
the Num of line sections setting.

If Num of line sections = 0, the conversion of the electrical fault distance into a
physical distance is not done in the IED and the FLT_DISTANCE output is not valid.
Estimated impedances are still calculated and are shown on their respective outputs.

902 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

In order to guarantee accurate impedance estimation, the user should give as good
values as possible for the longitudinal impedance settings R1 line section A, X1 line
section A, R0 line section A, X0 line section A and the Line Len section A parameter
corresponding to the total line length. Other longitudinal impedance settings are
disabled (sections B and C).

If Num of line sections = 1, the longitudinal impedance settings R1 line section A, X1

line section A, R0 line section A, X0 line section A and the Line Len section A parameter
are enabled for the conversion of the electrical fault distance into a physical distance.
This option should be used only in the case of a homogeneous line, for example, when
the protected feeder consists of only one conductor type. Also this option should be
used if the user is only interested in calculated fault loop reactance XFLOOP and final
fault location is done in higher system level utilizing, for example DMS-system.

If Num of line sections = 2, the longitudinal impedance settings R1 line section A, X1

line section A, R0 line section A, X0 line section A, R1 line section B, X1 line section
B, R0 line section B, X0 line section B and the parameters Line Len section A, Line Len
section B are enabled for the conversion of the electrical fault distance into a physical
distance. This option should be used in the case of a non-homogenous line, for
example, when the protected feeder consists of two types of conductors.

If Num of line sections = 3, the longitudinal impedance settings R1 line section A, X1

line section A, R0 line section A, X0 line section A, R1 line section B, X1 line section
B, R0 line section B, X0 line section B, R1 line section C, X1 line section C, R0 line
section C, X0 line section C and the parameters Line Len section A, Line Len section
B, Line Len section C are enabled for the conversion of the electrical fault distance into
a physical distance. This option should be used in the case of a non-homogenous line,
for example, when the protected feeder consists of more than two types of conductors.

In order to illustrate the effect of line impedance non-homogeneity in conversion of

fault loop reactance into physical fault distance, consider a 10 km long feeder with 3
line types:
• 4 km of PAS 150 (R1 = 0.236 ohm/km, X1 = 0.276 ohm/km)
• 3 km of Al/Fe 54/9 Raven (R1 = 0.536 ohm/km, X1 = 0.369 ohm/km)
• 3 km of Al/Fe 21/4 Swan (R1 = 1.350 ohm/km, X1 = 0.398 ohm/km)

The total line impedance for the 10 km line is R1 = 6.602 ohm (0.6602 ohm/km) and
X1 = 3.405 ohm (0.3405 ohm/km). The example impedance diagram, Figure 458,
illustrates the conversion error as a function of physical fault location if only one
impedance setting was used:

R1 line section A 0.6602 ohm/pu

X1 line section A 0.3405 ohm/pu
Line Len section A 10 pu
Num of line sections 1

630 series 903

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

At the maximum, an error of nearly eight percent is created by the conversion

procedure. Figure 458 shows an example of impedance diagram of the protected
feeder in the case of a non-homogenous line (on the left) and a physical fault distance
error due to conversion with one impedance setting (on the right). The fault location
is varied from 1 km to 10 km in 1 km steps (marked with circles).

With three impedance settings there is no error in conversion:

R1 line section A 0.236 ohm/pu

X1 line section A 0.276 ohm/pu
Line Len section A 4 pu
R1 line section B 0.536 ohm/pu
X1 line section B 0.369 ohm/pu
Line Len section B 3 pu
R1 line section C 1.350 ohm/pu
X1 line section C 0.398 ohm/pu
Line Len section C 3 pu
Num of line sections 3

The previous example assumed a short-circuit fault and therefore only positive-
sequence impedance settings were used. The results, however, also apply for earth
faults.

Taps or spurs in the feeder

If the protected feeder consists of taps or spurs, the measured fault impedance can
correspond to several physical fault locations, for example A or B as shown in the
diagram. The actual fault location must be identified using additional information, for
example the short circuit current indicators placed on the tapping points.

904 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

GUID-36C77B78-CCEB-49A8-BF61-1CE2DC95EEDD V1 EN

Figure 459: Fault on a distribution feeder with spurs

5.4.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

5.4.6 Recorded data

General
All the information required later for fault analysis is recorded when the recording
function of SCEFRFLO is triggered. The triggering can be either internal or external.
Table 881: Recorded data of the SCEFRFLO
Parameter name Description
1 Recording time Record data of bank 1 for trigger time stamp
1 FAULT_LOOP Record data of bank 1 for fault loop
1 RF Record data of bank 1 for fault resistance
1 RFLOOP Record data of bank 1 for fault loop resistance
1 XFLOOP Record data of bank 1 for fault loop reactance
1 FLT_DISTANCE Record data of bank 1 for fault distance
1 XCOF_CALC Record data of bank 1 for line phase-to-earth capacitance
Table continues on next page

630 series 905

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Parameter name Description

1 S_CALC Record data of bank 1 for equivalent load distance
1 IFLT_PER_ILD Record data of bank 1 for ratio between fault current and load current
1 EF_VALIDITY Record data of bank 1 for validity of earth-fault location
1 ALARM Record data of bank 1 for alarm signal
1 PhV Pre value PhA Record data of bank 1 for phase A pre-fault voltage amplitude
1 PhV Pre angle PhA Record data of bank 1 for phase A pre-fault voltage angle
1 PhV Pre value PhB Record data of bank 1 for phase B pre-fault voltage amplitude
1 PhV Pre angle PhB Record data of bank 1 for phase B pre-fault voltage angle
1 PhV Pre value PhC Record data of bank 1 for phase C pre-fault voltage amplitude
1 PhV Pre angle PhC Record data of bank 1 for phase C pre-fault voltage angle
1 A Pre value PhA Record data of bank 1 for phase A pre-fault current amplitude
1 A Pre angle PhA Record data of bank 1 for phase A pre-fault current angle
1 A Pre value PhB Record data of bank 1 for phase B pre-fault current amplitude
1 A Pre angle PhB Record data of bank 1 for phase B pre-fault current angle
1 A Pre value PhC Record data of bank 1 for phase C pre-fault current amplitude
1 A Pre angle PhC Record data of bank 1 for phase C pre-fault current angle
1 PhV Flt value PhA Record data of bank 1 for phase A voltage amplitude during fault
1 PhV Flt angle PhA Record data of bank 1 for phase A voltage angle during fault
1 PhV Flt value PhB Record data of bank 1 for phase B voltage amplitude during fault
1 PhV Flt angle PhB Record data of bank 1 for phase B voltage angle during fault
1 PhV Flt value PhC Record data of bank 1 for phase C voltage amplitude during fault
1 PhV Flt angle PhC Record data of bank 1 for phase C voltage angle during fault
1 A Flt value PhA Record data of bank 1 for phase A current amplitude during fault
1 A Flt angle PhA Record data of bank 1 for phase A current angle during fault
1 A Flt value PhB Record data of bank 1 for phase B current amplitude during fault
1 A Flt angle PhB Record data of bank 1 for phase B current angle during fault
1 A Flt value PhC Record data of bank 1 for phase C current amplitude during fault
1 A Flt angle PhC Record data of bank 1 for phase C current angle during fault

The registers can be reset with the RESET binary input signal.

Three sets of recorded data are available in total. They are saved in data banks 1...3.
Data bank 1 holds the most recent recorded data and older data are moved into the next
banks (1 to 2 and 2 to 3) when a fault is detected. When all three banks have data and
a new unbalance is detected, the latest data set is placed into bank 1 and the data in
bank 3 is overwritten by the data from bank 2

5.4.7 Application
The main objective of line protection and monitoring terminals is fast, selective and
reliable operation for faults on a protected line section. Besides this, information on

906 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

the distance to fault is very important for those involved in operation and maintenance.
Reliable information on the fault location greatly decreases the downtime of the
protected lines and increases the total availability of a power system.

SCEFRFLO can be applied as a device level solution or as a part of a system level

solution. In the device level applications, the physical fault distance
(FLT_DISTANCE) is calculated in the IED based on settings. A more accurate result
can be expected if the fault loop impedance (XFLOOP, RFLOOP) estimated by
SCEFRFLO is utilized in the system level fault location applications.

SCEFRFLO provides the distance to the fault together with the information about the
measuring loop that has been used in the calculation. Also, an estimate for the fault
resistance at the fault point is calculated. In addition, both pre-fault and fault quantities
of voltages and currents are available for a post-fault analysis in the recorded data. The
validity of the estimated earth-fault distance is judged and reported together with the
fault distance estimate.

5.4.8 Configuration
SCEFRFLO requires three phase currents for operation. The phase currents can be
measured with conventional current transformers or Rogowski coils.

The full operation of SCEFRFLO requires that all three phase-to-earth voltages are
measured. The voltages can be measured with conventional voltage transformers or
voltage dividers connected between the phase and earth. Other alternative is to
measure phase-to-phase voltages and residual voltage (Uo). Both alternatives are
covered by setting the configuration parameter Phase voltage Meas to "Accurate".
When the Phase voltage Meas setting is set to "PP without Uo" and only phase-to-
phase voltages are available, only short-circuit measuring loops (fault loops 12, 23,
31, 123) can be measured accurately. In this case, the earth-fault loops (fault loops 1,
2, 3) cannot provide correct fault distance estimates and the triggering of the function
is automatically disabled.

5.4.9 Signals
Table 882: SCEFRFLO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking the triggering
TRIGG BOOLEAN 0 Triggering signal for outputs of the function
TRIGG_XC0F BOOLEAN 0 Triggering signal for XC0F calculation
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal for resetting registers

630 series 907

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Table 883: SCEFRFLO Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal indicating that fault is located between
set limits
EF_VALIDITY INTEGER Validity of earth fault location
FAULT_LOOP INTEGER Fault impedance loop used for distance
measurement
TRIGG_OUT BOOLEAN Signal indicating function triggering
FLT_DISTANCE REAL Fault distance in units selected by the user (pu)
IFLT_PER_ILD REAL Ratio between fault current and load current in case
of an earth fault
RF REAL Fault resistance in primary ohms
RFLOOP REAL Fault loop resistance in primary ohms
XFLOOP REAL Fault loop reactance in primary ohms
XFPHASE REAL Positive sequence fault reactance in primary ohms
S_CALC REAL Estimated equivalent load distance
XC0F_CALC REAL Estimated phase-to-earth capacitive reactance of
the feeder

5.4.10 Settings
Table 884: SCEFRFLO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Z Max phase load 1.00 - 10000.00 ohm 0.01 80.00 Impedance per phase of max. load, over-
curr./under-imp., PSL
Ph leakage Ris 1 - 1000000 ohm 1 210000 Line PhE leakage resistance in primary
ohms
Ph capacitive React 1 - 1000000 ohm 1 7000 Line PhE capacitive reactance in primary
ohms
R1 line section A 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 1.000 Positive-sequence line resistance, line
section A
X1 line section A 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 1.000 Positive-sequence line reactance, line
section A
R0 line section A 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 4.000 Zero-sequence line resistance, line
section A
X0 line section A 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 4.000 Zero-sequence line reactance, line
section A
Line Len section A 0.001 - 1000.000 pu 0.001 1.000 Line length, section A

908 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Table 885: SCEFRFLO Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Equivalent load Dis 0.01 - 1.00 - 0.01 0.50 Equivalent load distance when EF
algorithm = load modelling
Num of line sections 0-3 - 1 1 Number of line sections
R1 line section B 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 1.000 Positive-sequence line resistance, line
section B
X1 line section B 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 1.000 Positive-sequence line reactance, line
section B
R0 line section B 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 4.000 Zero-sequence line resistance, line
section B
X0 line section B 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 4.000 Zero-sequence line reactance, line
section B
Line Len section B 0.001 - 1000.000 pu 0.001 1.000 Line length, section B
R1 line section C 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 1.000 Positive-sequence line resistance, line
section C
X1 line section C 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 1.000 Positive-sequence line reactance, line
section C
R0 line section C 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 4.000 Zero-sequence line resistance, line
section C
X0 line section C 0.001 - 1000.000 ohm/pu 0.001 4.000 Zero-sequence line reactance, line
section C
Line Len section C 0.001 - 1000.000 pu 0.001 1.000 Line length, section C

Table 886: SCEFRFLO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation mode Off / On
On
Phase voltage Meas Accurate - - Accurate Phase voltage measurement principle
PP without Uo
Calculation Trg mode External - - External Trigger mode for distance calculation
Internal
Continuous
Pre fault time 0.100 - 300.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for healthy values of I and U
before fault [s]

Table 887: SCEFRFLO Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
High alarm Dis limit 0.001 - 1.000 pu 0.001 1.000 High alarm limit for calculated distance
Low alarm Dis limit 0.001 - 1.000 pu 0.001 1.000 Low alarm limit for calculated distance
EF algorithm Load comp - - Load comp PE-loop calculation algorithm
Load modelling
Table continues on next page

630 series 909

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EF algorithm current I0 based - - I0 based Earth-fault current model
I2 based
Load Com PP loops Disabled - - Enabled Enable load compensation for PP/3P-
Enabled loops
Simple mode PP loops Disabled - - Disabled Enable calc. without impedance settings
Enabled for PP/3P-loops

5.4.11 Measured values

Table 888: SCEFRFLO Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase A current
I_AMPL_B REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase B current
I_AMPL_C REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase C current
U_AMPL_A REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase A voltage
U_AMPL_B REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase B voltage
U_AMPL_C REAL 0 Amplitude of the phase C voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking the triggering
TRIGG BOOLEAN 0 Triggering signal for outputs of the function
TRIGG_XC0F BOOLEAN 0 Triggering signal for XC0F calculation
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal for resetting registers

5.4.12 Monitored data

Table 889: SCEFRFLO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal indicating
1=TRUE that fault is located
between set limits
EF_VALIDITY INTEGER 1=High - Validity of earth fault
0=N/A location
2=Moderate
3=Poor
FAULT_LOOP INTEGER 1=Phase A to - Fault impedance loop
Gnd used for distance
2=Phase B to measurement
Gnd
3=Phase C to
Gnd
4=Phase A to B
5=Phase B to C
6=Phase C to A
7=Three phase
0=No fault
TRIGG_OUT BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal indicating function
1=TRUE triggering
Table continues on next page

910 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

RF REAL - ohm Fault resistance in
primary ohms
RFLOOP REAL - ohm Fault loop resistance in
primary ohms
XFLOOP REAL - ohm Fault loop reactance in
primary ohms
XFPHASE REAL - ohm Positive sequence fault
reactance in primary
ohms
XC0F_CALC REAL - ohm Estimated phase-to-earth
capacitive reactance of
the feeder
1 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of bank 1 for
fault time stamp
1 FAULT_LOOP INTEGER 1=Phase A to - Record data of bank 1 for
Gnd fault loop
2=Phase B to
Gnd
3=Phase C to
Gnd
4=Phase A to B
5=Phase B to C
6=Phase C to A
7=Three phase
0=No fault
1 RF REAL - Ohm Record data of bank 1 for
fault resistance
1 RFLOOP REAL - Ohm Record data of bank 1 for
fault loop resistance
1 XFLOOP REAL - Ohm Record data of bank 1 for
fault loop reactance
1 FLT_DISTANCE REAL - - Record data of bank 1 for
fault distance
1 XC0F_CALC REAL - Ohm Record data bank1
feeder phase-to-earth
capacitive reactance
1 S_CALC REAL - - Record data of bank 1 for
equivalent load distance
1 IFLT_PER_ILD REAL - - Record data of bank 1 for
ratio between fault
current and load current
1 EF_VALIDITY INTEGER 1=High - Record data of bank 1 for
0=N/A validity of earth fault
2=Moderate location
3=Poor
1 ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Record data of bank 1 for
1=TRUE alarm signal
1 A Pre value PhA REAL - A Record data of bank 1 for
phase A pre-fault current
amplitude
1 A Pre angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase A pre-fault current
angle
Table continues on next page

630 series 911

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

1 A Pre value PhB REAL - A Record data of bank 1 for
phase B pre-fault current
amplitude
1 A Pre angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase B pre-fault current
angle
1 A Pre value PhC REAL - A Record data of bank 1 for
phase C pre-fault current
amplitude
1 A Pre angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase C pre-fault current
angle
1 A Flt value PhA REAL - A Record data of bank 1 for
phase A current
amplitude during fault
1 A Flt angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase A current angle
during fault
1 A Flt value PhB REAL - A Record data of bank 1 for
phase B current
amplitude during fault
1 A Flt angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase B current angle
during fault
1 A Flt value PhC REAL - A Record data of bank 1 for
phase C current
amplitude during fault
1 A Flt angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase C current angle
during fault
1 PhV Pre value PhA REAL - kV Record data of bank 1 for
phase A pre-fault voltage
amplitude
1 PhV Pre angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase A pre-fault voltage
angle
1 PhV Pre value PhB REAL - kV Record data of bank 1 for
phase B pre-fault voltage
amplitude
1 PhV Pre angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase B pre-fault voltage
angle
1 PhV Pre value PhC REAL - kV Record data of bank 1 for
phase C pre-fault voltage
amplitude
1 PhV Pre angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase C pre-fault voltage
angle
1 PhV Flt value PhA REAL - kV Record data of bank 1 for
phase A voltage
amplitude during fault
Table continues on next page

912 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

1 PhV Flt angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase A voltage angle
during fault
1 PhV Flt value PhB REAL - kV Record data of bank 1 for
phase B voltage
amplitude during fault
1 PhV Flt angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase B voltage angle
during fault
1 PhV Flt value PhC REAL - kV Record data of bank 1 for
phase C voltage
amplitude during fault
1 PhV Flt angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 1 for
phase C voltage angle
during fault
2 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of bank 2 for
fault time stamp
2 FAULT_LOOP INTEGER 1=Phase A to - Record data of bank 2 for
Gnd fault loop
2=Phase B to
Gnd
3=Phase C to
Gnd
4=Phase A to B
5=Phase B to C
6=Phase C to A
7=Three phase
0=No fault
2 RF REAL - Ohm Record data of bank 2 for
fault resistance
2 RFLOOP REAL - Ohm Record data of bank 2 for
fault loop resistance
2 XFLOOP REAL - Ohm Record data of bank 2 for
fault loop reactance
2 FLT_DISTANCE REAL - - Record data of bank 2 for
fault distance
2 XC0F_CALC REAL - Ohm Record data bank2
feeder phase-to-earth
capacitive reactance
2 S_CALC REAL - - Record data of bank 2 for
equivalent load distance
2 IFLT_PER_ILD REAL - - Record data of bank 2 for
ratio between fault
current and load current
2 EF_VALIDITY INTEGER 1=High - Record data of bank 2 for
0=N/A validity of earth fault
2=Moderate location
3=Poor
2 ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Record data of bank 2 for
1=TRUE alarm signal
2 A Pre value PhA REAL - A Record data of bank 2 for
phase A pre-fault current
amplitude
Table continues on next page

630 series 913

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 A Pre angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase A pre-fault current
angle
2 A Pre value PhB REAL - A Record data of bank 2 for
phase B pre-fault current
amplitude
2 A Pre angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase B pre-fault current
angle
2 A Pre value PhC REAL - A Record data of bank 2 for
phase C pre-fault current
amplitude
2 A Pre angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase C pre-fault current
angle
2 A Flt value PhA REAL - A Record data of bank 2 for
phase A current
amplitude during fault
2 A Flt angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase A current angle
during fault
2 A Flt value PhB REAL - A Record data of bank 2 for
phase B current
amplitude during fault
2 A Flt angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase B current angle
during fault
2 A Flt value PhC REAL - A Record data of bank 2 for
phase C current
amplitude during fault
2 A Flt angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase C current angle
during fault
2 PhV Pre value PhA REAL - kV Record data of bank 2 for
phase A pre-fault voltage
amplitude
2 PhV Pre angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase A pre-fault voltage
angle
2 PhV Pre value PhB REAL - kV Record data of bank 2 for
phase B pre-fault voltage
amplitude
2 PhV Pre angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase B pre-fault voltage
angle
2 PhV Pre value PhC REAL - kV Record data of bank 2 for
phase C pre-fault voltage
amplitude
2 PhV Pre angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase C pre-fault voltage
angle
Table continues on next page

914 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 PhV Flt value PhA REAL - kV Record data of bank 2 for
phase A voltage
amplitude during fault
2 PhV Flt angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase A voltage angle
during fault
2 PhV Flt value PhB REAL - kV Record data of bank 2 for
phase B voltage
amplitude during fault
2 PhV Flt angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase B voltage angle
during fault
2 PhV Flt value PhC REAL - kV Record data of bank 2 for
phase C voltage
amplitude during fault
2 PhV Flt angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 2 for
phase C voltage angle
during fault
3 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of bank 3 for
fault time stamp
3 FAULT_LOOP INTEGER 1=Phase A to - Record data of bank 3 for
Gnd fault loop
2=Phase B to
Gnd
3=Phase C to
Gnd
4=Phase A to B
5=Phase B to C
6=Phase C to A
7=Three phase
0=No fault
3 RF REAL - Ohm Record data of bank 3 for
fault resistance
3 RFLOOP REAL - Ohm Record data of bank 3 for
fault loop resistance
3 XFLOOP REAL - Ohm Record data of bank 3 for
fault loop reactance
3 FLT_DISTANCE REAL - - Record data of bank 3 for
fault distance
3 XC0F_CALC REAL - Ohm Record data bank3
feeder phase-to-earth
capacitive reactance
3 S_CALC REAL - - Record data of bank 3 for
equivalent load distance
3 IFLT_PER_ILD REAL - - Record data of bank 3 for
ratio between fault
current and load current
3 EF_VALIDITY INTEGER 1=High - Record data of bank 3 for
0=N/A validity of earth fault
2=Moderate location
3=Poor
3 ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Record data of bank 3 for
1=TRUE alarm signal
Table continues on next page

630 series 915

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3 A Pre value PhA REAL - A Record data of bank 3 for
phase A pre-fault current
amplitude
3 A Pre angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase A pre-fault current
angle
3 A Pre value PhB REAL - A Record data of bank 3 for
phase B pre-fault current
amplitude
3 A Pre angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase B pre-fault current
angle
3 A Pre value PhC REAL - A Record data of bank 3 for
phase C pre-fault current
amplitude
3 A Pre angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase C pre-fault current
angle
3 A Flt value PhA REAL - A Record data of bank 3 for
phase A current
amplitude during fault
3 A Flt angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase A current angle
during fault
3 A Flt value PhB REAL - A Record data of bank 3 for
phase B current
amplitude during fault
3 A Flt angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase B current angle
during fault
3 A Flt value PhC REAL - A Record data of bank 3 for
phase C current
amplitude during fault
3 A Flt angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase C current angle
during fault
3 PhV Pre value PhA REAL - kV Record data of bank 3 for
phase A pre-fault voltage
amplitude
3 PhV Pre angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase A pre-fault voltage
angle
3 PhV Pre value PhB REAL - kV Record data of bank 3 for
phase B pre-fault voltage
amplitude
3 PhV Pre angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase B pre-fault voltage
angle
3 PhV Pre value PhC REAL - kV Record data of bank 3 for
phase C pre-fault voltage
amplitude
Table continues on next page

916 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3 PhV Pre angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase C pre-fault voltage
angle
3 PhV Flt value PhA REAL - kV Record data of bank 3 for
phase A voltage
amplitude during fault
3 PhV Flt angle PhA REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase A voltage angle
during fault
3 PhV Flt value PhB REAL - kV Record data of bank 3 for
phase B voltage
amplitude during fault
3 PhV Flt angle PhB REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase B voltage angle
during fault
3 PhV Flt value PhC REAL - kV Record data of bank 3 for
phase C voltage
amplitude during fault
3 PhV Flt angle PhC REAL - deg Record data of bank 3 for
phase C voltage angle
during fault

5.4.13 Technical data

Table 890: SCEFRFLO Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracies At the frequency f = fn

Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un
Fault location accuracy: ±2.5% of the line length or
±0.2 km/0.13 mile.
Actual fault location accuracy depends on the fault
and the power system characteristics.
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

5.4.14 Technical revision history

Table 891: SCEFRFLO technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Additional recording data bank 2 and 3 added
C Output XFPHASE is added

630 series 917

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

5.5 Switch onto fault CVRSOF

5.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Automatic switch-onto-fault logic CVRSOF SOTF SOTF

5.5.2 Function block

GUID-B2628196-CAD7-4628-80C7-89131D312B90 V1 EN

Figure 460: Function block

5.5.3 Functionality
CVRSOF is a complementary function, especially for the distance protection function
(DSTPDIS), but it can also be used to complement the non-directional or directional
overcurrent protection functions (PHxPTOC, DPHxPDOC).

CVRSOF accelerates the operation of the protection, ensuring a fast trip when the
breaker is closed onto faulted feeder or bus. Without CVRSOF, there is a risk that if
the breaker is closed onto close-in three-phase fault, the measured voltages may be too
small for the impedance zones or the directional overcurrent stages to operate reliably.
This condition exists when the voltage transformers are located in the feeder or the bus
side to be energized and therefore the voltage memory required for a correct
directional measurement is not available.

5.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of automatic switch-onto-fault logic can be described by using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

918 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

GUID-4538CEF9-F0F1-4C3D-82F1-22FEF52D93DD V1 EN

Figure 461: Functional module diagram

Trigger
This module is used for detecting a possible fault immediately after circuit breaker
closing. The use of external protection function (typically the start-signal from a non-
directional distance zone or overcurrent stage) is required for fault indication. The
START and START_DLYD inputs are available for the purpose.

• The START input has no delay. Thus, a switch-onto-fault situation is

immediately signalled to SOTF control.
• START_DLYD is used when an additional delay is required to start the signal. The
switch-onto-fault situation is signalled to the SOTF control after the set Operate
delay time.

Dead-line detection

The dead-line detection should be used only when the voltage

transformers are located on the line side of the circuit breaker.

The Automatic SOTF Ini setting is used to configure the internal dead-line detection
function.

630 series 919

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Table 892: Options for dead-line detection

Value of Automatic SOTF Ini Description
“DLD disabled” The dead-line detection function is disabled. This
operation mode must be applied when voltage
transformers are located on the bus side of the
circuit breaker.
“Voltage” The dead-line detection function is enabled and
based solely on the undervoltage condition. A
dead-line condition is declared, if all the phase
voltages are below the Voltage dead Lin Val
setting. The dead line is detected if the dead-line
condition is declared and simultaneously no fault
is detected by the START and START_DLYD
inputs . The dead-line condition is signalled to the
SOTF control after the delay defined with the Dead
line time setting.
“Current” The dead-line detection function is enabled and
based solely on the undercurrent condition. A
dead-line condition is declared, if all the phase
currents are below the Current dead Lin Val
setting. The dead line is detected if the dead-line
condition is declared and simultaneously no fault
is detected by the START and START_DLYD
inputs. The dead-line condition is signalled to the
SOTF control after delay defined with the Dead
line time setting.
“Current & Voltage” The dead-line detection function is enabled and
based on undercurrent and undervoltage
condition. A dead line condition is declared, if all
the phase currents are below the Current dead Lin
Val setting and simultaneously all phase voltages
are below the Voltage dead Lin Val setting. The
dead line is detected if the dead-line condition is
declared and simultaneously no fault is detected
by the START and START_DLYD inputs. The dead-
line condition is signalled to the SOTF control after
delay defined with the Dead line time setting.

SOTF detection
The purpose of this module is to detect the switch onto fault situation based on the
current and voltage measurements. If the voltage, in any of the phases, is below the
Voltage dead Lin Val setting and simultaneously the current in the same phase exceeds
the Current dead Lin Val setting, the SOTF situation is signalled to SOTF control
module after the set Cur voltage Det time.

SOTF control
The SOTF control module needs to be activated before the operation is possible in the
switch-onto-fault situation. There are two ways to activate the SOTF control module.
• By CB_CL_CMD (circuit breaker closing command)
• By the dead-line condition received from the dead-line detection module

920 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

The dead-line detection should be used only when the voltage

transformers are located on the line side of the circuit breaker.

When the CB_CL_CMD input is activated or the dead-line condition is detected, the
SOTF control module becomes active. The reset timer is started when CB_CL_CMD
is inactivated or the dead-line condition disappears. Thus the module becomes
inactive after the set SOTF reset time is exceeded.

When the SOTF control module is active, the Operation mode setting defines the
operation criteria for the detection of a switch-onto-fault condition. The detection can
be based on the external start signals from the distance or overcurrent functions, or on
the measured internal voltage and current levels or on both.
Table 893: Options for SOTF detection
Value of Operation mode Description
“Start” The OPERATE output is activated immediately
after a signal from the trigger module. This
indicates that the breaker is closed onto fault.
“Current & Vlotage” The OPERATE output is activated immediately
after a signal from the SOTF detection module.
This indicates that the breaker is closed onto fault.
This operation mode can be used, for example, if
the non-directional distance zone is not available.
“Both” The OPERATE output is activated immediately
after a signal from the trigger or SOTF detection
modules. This indicates that the breaker is closed
onto fault.

The OPERATE output can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.

5.5.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

5.5.6 Application
The operation of CVRSOF is generally based on the non-directional distance zone or
the non-directional overcurrent stage. When the feeder-side voltage transformers are
used for providing the polarization quantity for the distance or directional overcurrent
protection, the use of non-directional impedance or current based protection for
starting CVRSOF secures a fast switch-onto-fault tripping in the close-in three-phase
short circuits. The non-directional protection provides a fast fault clearance when the
protection is used for energizing a bus from the feeder with a short-circuit fault in it.

630 series 921

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Other protection functions, like time delayed zero sequence overcurrent functions,
can be connected to CVRSOF to increase the dependability of the scheme. The other
main advantage of using CVRSOF is that it typically accelerates the tripping in case
of energizing a feeder onto a fault. Without CVRSOF, this tripping is normally
performed by the normal time-graded protection or alternatively by the time-delayed
local backup protection, for which operate times are considerably longer than with
CVRSOF tripping.

An internal dead-line detection check is provided to activate the function when the
voltage transformers are located on the feeder side. An initiation by the dead-line
detection is highly recommended for the busbar configurations where more than one
circuit breaker at one feeder end can energize the protected feeder or the feeder can
also be energized from the other end.

Setting guidelines
Input START: If a distance zone is used for starting the switch-onto-fault function, the
zone has to be set to cover the entire protected feeder with a safety margin of minimum
20 percent. If the non-directional zone is not available, the internal Current & Voltage
criterion or the start signal from the GFC function can be used instead. If a non-
directional overcurrent is used for starting, the current setting must not be higher than
what is required for the non-delayed and dependable tripping for a close-in three-
phase fault during minimum source conditions. If the short-circuit current along the
feeder is considerably higher than the maximum load currents, it is possible that the
whole feeder length is covered by CVRSOF tripping. If it is required to delay the
tripping, for example, due to high inrush currents, the starting signal can be connected
to the START_DLYD input instead.

The Current dead Lin Val setting parameter is set to 20 percent of the base current by
default. The parameter must be set with a sufficient margin of 15 to 20 percent under
the minimum expected load current. The setting must still exceed the maximum
charging current of a feeder.

The Voltage dead Lin Val setting parameter is set to 70 percent of the base voltage by
default. This is a suitable setting in most cases, but it is recommended to check the
suitability in the actual application.

The Cur voltage Det time setting parameter is set to 0.02 seconds by default. The is
suitable in most applications. This delay can be coordinated, for example, with the
dead time settings of the AR shots to prevent the release of CVRSOF by the dead-line
detection function when the high speed auto-reclosing is in progress.

The Dead line time setting parameter is set to 0.2 seconds by default. This is suitable
in most applications. The delay must not be set too short to avoid unwanted activations
during the transients in the system.

The SOTF reset time setting parameter is set to 1 second by default. This is suitable for
most applications.

922 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.5.7 Signals
Table 894: CVRSOF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CB_CL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 External enabling of SOTF by CB close command
START BOOLEAN 0 Start from function to be accelerated by SOTF
START_DLYD BOOLEAN 0 Start from function to be accelerated with delay by
SOTF

Table 895: CVRSOF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate

5.5.8 Settings
Table 896: CVRSOF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 897: CVRSOF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Operation mode Start - - Both Mode of operation of SOTF Function
Current&Voltage
Both
Automatic SOTF Ini DLD disabled - - DLD disabled Automatic switchonto fault initialization
Voltage
Current
Current & Voltage
Current dead Lin Val 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.20 Dead line value, current. Used also in auto
activation logic
Voltage dead Lin Val 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.70 Dead line value, voltage. Used also in
auto activation logic
Cur voltage Det time 0.03 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.03 Time delay for voltage and current based
detection
Table continues on next page

630 series 923

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operate time delay 0.03 - 120.00 s 0.01 0.03 time delay to operate of switch onto fault
function
SOTF reset time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 SOTF detection period after initialization
Dead line time 0.03 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.20 Delay time for activation of dead line
detection

5.5.9 Measured values

Table 898: CVRSOF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0 Current amplitude phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0 Current amplitude phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0 Current amplitude phase C
U_AMPL_A REAL 0 Voltage amplitude phase A
U_AMPL_B REAL 0 Voltage amplitude phase B
U_AMPL_C REAL 0 Voltage amplitude phase C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CB_CL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 External enabling of SOTF by CB close command
START BOOLEAN 0 Start from function to be accelerated by SOTF
START_DLYD BOOLEAN 0 Start from function to be accelerated with delay by
SOTF

5.5.10 Monitored data

Table 899: CVRSOF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate
1=TRUE

5.5.11 Technical data

Table 900: CVRSOF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracies At the frequency f = fn

Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±35 ms

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

924 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.5.12 Technical revision history

Table 901: CVRSOF technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Internal improvements

5.6 Current reversal logic CRWPSCH

5.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed CRWPSCH CLCRW 85CRW
logic

5.6.2 Function block

GUID-8482C3BF-061D-40F3-9E31-1361C45E41A1 V2 EN

Figure 462: Function block

5.6.3 Functionality
The scheme communication logic DSOCPSCH may require additional logics to
operate correctly in all possible power system conditions. Such special logics include,
for example, the current reversal logic and weak-end infeed logic which are combined
to the CRWPSCH function block.

Current reversal logic: In the parallel feeder applications, the direction of fault current
on the healthy feeder can change when the circuit breaker on the faulty feeder opens
to clear the fault. This can lead to an unwanted operation of the distance protection on
the healthy parallel feeder when DSOCPSCH is used with the permissive overreach
scheme. The main purpose of the current reversal logic is to prevent such unwanted
operations.

The weak-end infeed (WEI) logic: Basically, the permissive communication schemes
can operate only when the protection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. This
detection requires a sufficient minimum fault current. If such current is not available

630 series 925

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

due to a too weak remote end source, the weak-end infeed logic can be used to
overcome the situation and trip the remote end breaker.

5.6.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of current reversal and weak-end infeed logic can be described by using
a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-646B1E3C-B2C3-4614-AC7F-1E10E22ED8F8 V1 EN

Figure 463: Functional module diagram

Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic is enabled by changing the value of the Reversal mode
setting to “On”.

The current reversal logic uses the start signal of the reverse looking zone (Z3)
connected to the IRV input, which is used to recognize the fault being in the reverse
direction, that is, in the parallel feeder. When the reverse zone is activated, after a start
delay (the Reversal time setting), the logic is ready to issue an OPR_IRV output
signal. The OPR_IRV signal is connected to the BLK_CS input of the scheme
communication logic function DSOCPSCH in order to block the sending of the carrier
send signal (CS) and the activation of the OPERATE output of the communication
logic. The OPR_IRV signal has a drop-off delay defined with the Reversal reset time
setting.

An internal 10 ms drop-off timer is provided which secures the current

reversal logic to be activated for the short duration input signals, even
if the Reversal reset time setting is set to zero.

The BLK_IRV input is used to block the activation of the OPR_IRV output. The
BLK_IRV input is typically connected to the forward looking zone start signals within
the terminal. General blocking is achieved by activating the BLOCK input.

926 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Weak-end infeed logic

The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the fault current infeed is too low due
to, for example, high source impedance or fault current distribution between sources
to activate the distance protection function. When activated, the CR signal is logically
combined with the local criteria to initiate the tripping of the weak end breaker. The
received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the tripping in the opposite end with
the stronger source.

GUID-8B36621F-9C58-4474-81CD-7A3F7B4A242E V1 EN

Figure 464: Functional module diagram of weak-end infeed logic

The WEI logic is enabled using the Wei mode setting.

• If Wei mode= “Off”, the WEI logic is disabled.
• If Wei mode= “Echo”, the WEI logic is enabled without the trip function.
• If Wei mode= “Echo & Trip”, the WEI logic is enabled with the trip function.

Level detector
The phase-to-earth voltages are monitored and the virtual phase-to-earth voltages are
calculated inside the function. The undervoltage criteria are applied to the phase-to-
phase voltages with the PPV level for Wei setting and for the phase-to-earth voltages
with the Phv level for Wei. The level detector sends an enable signal for respective
phase to the weak end trip logic when one or more voltages are below the
corresponding settings. The level detector does blocks enable signal if all three phase
voltages are above the set value more than 100 ms. This is to avoid sending an
unnecessary operate signal, if the breaker is already open.

Echo logic
The WEI logic returns the received carrier signal with the ECHO output when it
receives a CR signal under the condition that no fault has been detected by the forward
and reverse looking zones and the duration of CR is longer than the coordination time
delay (setting Wei Crd time). The received carrier receive signal is also given as the CR
output.

When the WEI logic is enabled at both feeder ends, a spurious signal
can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lockup
of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.

630 series 927

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Weak-end trip logic

The weak-end trip logic is activated if the level detector and echo logic are activated.
Then a general trip signal OPR_WEI is activated. Along with the OPR_WEI output
signal, the OPR_WEI_x signals are also activated for the corresponding phase where
undervoltage is detected. The activation of the CB_OPEN input blocks the tripping.

The ECHO and OPR_WEI outputs can be blocked using the FF and BLK_WEI1
inputs. The FF input is usually connected to the functional output of the fuse failure
function and the BLK_WEI1 input is typically connected to the forward and reverse
looking zone start signals within the terminal. In addition, the BLK_WEI2 input can
be used to block the ECHO and OPR_WEI outputs. The BLK_WEI2 signal has an
inbuilt 200 ms drop-off delay. The BLK_WEI2 input is usually connected to all the
fault detection functions within the terminal except the undervoltage function.

The general blocking of the WEI logic is achieved by activating the BLOCK input.

5.6.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

5.6.6 Application
Current reversal logic
In parallel feeder applications, when the overreaching permissive communication
schemes are used, unselective tripping may result due to the current reversal. Such a
condition can occur in the healthy feeder when the fault is cleared in the faulty feeder.
The tripping of the healthy parallel feeder may lead to losing of the connection
between the two buses. To avoid this situation, the current reversal logic (transient
blocking logic) can be used.

Assume that the relays Relay A1, Relay A2, Relay B1 and Relay B2 are equipped with
the scheme communication logic DSOCPSCH and the permissive overreach scheme
is enabled. A fault occurs at Feeder 1 close to the bus B. The Relay A2 at the healthy
feeder 2 recognizes the fault in the forward direction by the overreaching zone Z2 and
sends a CS signal to Relay B2 according to the PUTT scheme. The Relay B2 does not
recognize the fault in the forward direction and does not operate even though a
permissive CR signal is received from the Relay A2. Moreover, the Relay B2 does not
send a permissive signal to the Relay A2.

928 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

GUID-CB87B7FF-C2D1-4E9B-A5B6-C5A414E945AE V1 EN

Figure 465: The fault occurs at one of the parallel lines. CS=carrier signal
sending, CR=carrier signal receiving

In practice, the faulted feeder (Feeder 1) is not simultaneously tripped at both ends and
it might occur that, for example, the circuit breaker closer to the fault at Relay B1 is
tripped faster than the breaker at bus A due to the direct operation of the zone Z1 of
Relay B1. The result is that when the breaker at Relay B1 opens, the direction of the
fault current at the healthy feeder (Feeder 2) is reversed.

GUID-2DFEBD2E-66C2-4CE6-9B6A-DDE77894427A V1 EN

Figure 466: The circuit breaker at Relay B1 opens and creates a current reversal
condition. CS=carrier signal sending, CR=carrier signal receiving.

The Relay A2 is still sending the CS signal because of the reset time delay of the
forward zone of Relay A2 when the overreaching zone of Relay B2 starts to recognize

630 series 929

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

the fault in the forward direction. The Relay B2 can mis-operate and trip the breaker
of the healthy feeder.

This problem can be solved by using the reverse looking zone (Z3) to recognize the
fault in reverse direction and temporarily block the operation of the scheme
communication logic due to the current reversal condition. This is utilized in
CRWPSCH.

Weak-end infeed logic

Avoid using the WEI function at both feeder ends. It can only be
enabled at the weak end.

The weak-end infeed logic is recommended to be used only in permissive schemes.

Setting guidelines for current reversal logic

Setting Reversal reset time: Set the Reversal reset time setting at the maximum reset
time of the communication channel. A minimum setting of 40 ms is recommended. A
long Reversal reset time setting increases the security against unwanted tripping, but
delays the fault clearing if the fault develops from one feeder to involve the other.
However, the probability of this type of fault is small.

Setting Reversal time: Set the start delay Reversal time setting to less than 80 percent
of the breaker operate time, but with a minimum of 20 ms.

Setting guidelines for weak-end infeed logic

The WEI function returns the received carrier signal with the ECHO output when it
receives the carrier signal (CR) under the condition that no fault has been detected by
forward and reverse looking zones and the duration is longer than the Wei Crd time
coordination time delay setting. Set the Wei Crd time = "0.010 s" to avoid the spurious
carrier received signals that activates the WEI logic and cause unwanted
communications.

Set the voltage criteria PPV level for Wei and PhV level for Wei for the weak-end trip
to 70 percent of the system base voltage. The setting should be below the minimum
operate voltage of the system but above the voltage that occurs for a fault on the
protected feeder. The phase-to-phase elements must be verified not to operate for the
phase-to-earth faults.

5.6.7 Signals
Table 902: CRWPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_IRV BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
Table continues on next page

930 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Name Type Default Description

BLK_WEI1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
BLK_WEI2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
FF BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 903: CRWPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
OPR_IRV BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
OPR_WEI BOOLEAN Operation of WEI logic
OPR_WEI_A BOOLEAN Operation of WEI logic in phase A
OPR_WEI_B BOOLEAN Operation of WEI logic in phase B
OPR_WEI_C BOOLEAN Operation of WEI logic in phase C
ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier send by WEI logic
CR BOOLEAN POR Carrier signal received from remote end

5.6.8 Settings
Table 904: CRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Reversal mode Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
Wei mode Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
PhV level for Wei 0.10 - 0.90 pu 0.01 0.70 Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of
fault condition
PPV level for Wei 0.10 - 0.90 pu 0.01 0.70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of
fault condition
Reversal time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
Reversal reset time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
Wei Crd time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic

630 series 931

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Table 905: CRWPSCH Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3

5.6.9 Measured values

Table 906: CRWPSCH Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U_AMPL_A REAL 100 Phase to ground voltage phase A
U_AMPL_B REAL 100 Phase to ground voltage phase B
U_AMPL_C REAL 100 Phase to ground voltage phase C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_IRV BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
BLK_WEI1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
BLK_WEI2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
FF BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

5.6.10 Monitored data

Table 907: CRWPSCH Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_IRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operation of current
1=TRUE reversal logic
OPR_WEI BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operation of WEI logic
1=TRUE
OPR_WEI_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operation of WEI logic in
1=TRUE phase A
OPR_WEI_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operation of WEI logic in
1=TRUE phase B
OPR_WEI_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operation of WEI logic in
1=TRUE phase C
ECHO BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Carrier send by WEI logic
1=TRUE
CR BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - POR Carrier signal
1=TRUE received from remote end

932 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.6.11 Technical data

Table 908: CRWPSCH Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

5.7 Scheme communication logic DSOCPSCH

5.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic DSOCPSCH CL 85

5.7.2 Function block

GUID-ACBB51BD-3020-435C-9D85-006FEC90C795 V1 EN

Figure 467: Function block

5.7.3 Functionality
To achieve instantaneous fault clearing independent of the fault location on the
protected feeder, the scheme communication logic DSOCPSCH is provided. The
available communication scheme types are:
• Direct intertrip (DUTT)
• Permissive underreach (PUTT)
• Permissive overreach (POTT)
• Directional comparison blocking (DCB)

The directional comparison unblocking scheme (DCUB) can also be implemented by

complementing the permissive schemes with an additional logic called the unblocking
function, which is also included in DSOCPSCH.

630 series 933

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

If the permissive overreach scheme is used, some of the power system conditions
requires additional special logic circuits, like current reversal logic and weak-end
infeed (WEI) logic for distance protection, CRWPSCH.

5.7.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the communication scheme logic function for distance protection can
be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in
the next sections.

GUID-F7DC90D5-9A80-4369-ADBE-556D227AF6ED V1 EN

Figure 468: Functional module diagram

The applied communication scheme logic in DSOCPSCH is selected with the

SchemeType setting.
• If SchemeType = “Intertrip”, it is (DUTT)
• If SchemeType = “Permissive UR” , it is (PUTT)
• If SchemeType = “Permissive OR”, it is (POTT)
• If SchemeType = “Blocking” , it is (DCB)

The unblocking scheme (DCUB) is enabled with the Unblock mode setting.

934 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Direct underreaching transfer trip scheme (DUTT)

The direct intertrip is enabled with SchemeType = “Intertrip”.

In the direct intertrip scheme, the start signal from the underreaching zone Z1 is
connected to the CSUR input to create a carrier send (CS) signal. The duration of the
CSUR input signal is prolonged by the Carrier Min Dur setting to assure a sufficient
duration for the CS signal.

The local circuit breaker is directly tripped (activation of the OPERATE output) with
the carrier received (CR) signal after a settable pick-up delay Coordination time has
elapsed without further local criteria.

The unblocking function (Unblock = “NoRestart” and Unblock =

“Restart”) must not be enabled with the DUTT scheme, as the lost
guard signal results in an immediate trip of the local circuit breaker.

The activation of the BLOCK input does a total blocking of the direct intertrip scheme.
The activation of the BLK_OPR input blocks the OPERATE output.

GUID-E5832505-6E03-4A5E-909E-2E587BE67B8E V1 EN

Figure 469: Simplified functional diagram of the direct intertrip scheme

Permissive underreaching transfer trip scheme (PUTT)

The permissive underreach is enabled with SchemeType = “Permissive UR”.

In the permissive underreach scheme, the start signal from the underreaching zone Z1
is connected to the CSUR input to create a CS signal. The duration of the CSUR input
signal can be prolonged by the Carrier Min Dur setting to assure a sufficient duration
of the CS signal.

In the permissive underreach scheme, the CR signal, or CRL signal if the unblocking
function is enabled, is used to allow the overreaching zone Z2 to trip (activation of the
OPERATE output) after the pick-up delay Coordination time. The start signal from the
overreaching zone Z2 is connected to the CACC input.

630 series 935

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Activating the BLOCK input blocks totally the permissive underreach scheme.
Activating the BLK_OPR input blocks the OPERATE output.

GUID-5FEFC0F6-0EC3-4256-8BC5-6A72DDE4E07A V1 EN

Figure 470: Simplified functional diagram of permissive underreach scheme

POTT (Permissive overrreaching transfer trip scheme)

The permissive overreach is enabled with SchemeType = “Permissive OR”.

In the permissive overreach scheme, the start signal from the overreaching zone Z2 is
connected to the CSOR input to create a CS signal. The CS signal can also be issued
simultaneously from the underreaching zone Z1. In this case, the start signal from the
underreaching zone Z1 is connected to the CSUR input. The duration of the CSUR
input signal is prolonged by the Carrier Min Dur setting, to assure a sufficient
duration of the CS signal. The carrier send from CSOR overreaching zone can be
blocked with the BLK_CS input.

In case of the parallel feeders, and when the external current reversal
logic (CRWPSCH) is enabled, the CS signal is not prolonged and the
value of Carrier Min Dur is set to zero in to secure correct operation.

In the permissive overreach scheme, the received signal CR or CRL, if unblocking

function is enabled used to allow the overreaching zone Z2 to trip (activation of the
OPERATE output) after the settable pick-up delay Coordination time. The start signal
from the overreaching zone is connected to the CACC input.

Activating the BLOCK input blocks totally the permissive overreach scheme.
Activating the BLK_OPR input blocks the OPERATE output.

936 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

GUID-4923C51C-075A-4E73-BA47-3321511AFF6D V1 EN

Figure 471: Simplified functional diagram of permissive overreach scheme

Directional comparison blocking scheme (DCB)

The directional comparison blocking scheme is enabled with SchemeType =
“Blocking”.

In the blocking scheme, the start signal from the reverse looking zone Z3 is connected
to the CSBLK input in to create a CS signal. The starting of the reverse looking zone
indicates that the fault is located outside the protected feeder. The duration of the
CSBLK input signal can be prolonged with the Carrier Min Dur setting to assure a
sufficient duration of the CS signal. The CS signal from the CSBLK reverse zone can
be blocked with the BLK_CS input.

The principal operation of the blocking scheme is that the overreaching zone Z2 is
allowed to trip (activation of the OPERATE output) after the settable Coordination
time has elapsed, and if no blocking signal is received from the remote terminal. To
prevent a false trip in case of an external fault, the block signal (CR) must be received
before the Coordination time has elapsed. The start signal from the overreaching zone
Z2 is connected to the CACC input.

The Coordination time setting in the blocking scheme depends, for

example, on communication system delay and on the terminal
response times in transmitting the CS signal to the other feeder end.
The Coordination time setting must not be zero.

Activating the BLOCK input blocks totally the permissive overreach scheme.
Activating the BLK_OPR input blocks the OPERATE output.

630 series 937

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

GUID-BB454B55-19FA-4AB3-B3D2-43D8698A65D1 V1 EN

Figure 472: Simplified functional diagram of the blocking scheme, internal fault.
The CS signal is not sent as the fault is not seen by the reverse-
looking zones (Z3).

GUID-631F4D44-A77C-4C20-9671-863FF9D258DC V1 EN

Figure 473: Simplified functional diagram of the blocking scheme, external fault.
The IED at bus B sees the fault in the reverse direction and sends a
blocking signal (CS) to the IED at bus A. There is no CB operation at
either end.

The unblocking function used with the blocking function provides a possibility to
supervise the communication channel. In this case, the CRL output signal is used as a
local blocking signal.

938 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

The operation mode Unblock = “Restart” is not recommended as the

blocking is activated only for 150 ms after the guard signal disappears.
This results in an unwanted operation of the protection.

DCUB (Directional Comparison Unblocking)

The unblocking function is a complementary logic, which can be used together with
the permissive communication schemes. In the unblocking scheme, the dependability
of the permissive schemes is improved by using the loss of guard signal from the
communication equipment to create locally a CRL output signal. This enables the
permissive scheme to operate even if the communication channel is interrupted or lost.

The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal (CRG), which must always be
present. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the value of the Loss of
carrier time setting is used to generate a logical CRL signal. This enables the
permissive scheme to operate despite the loss of the communication channel. A
communication failure shorter than the value of the Loss of carrier time setting is
always ignored.

The unblocking function is configured with the Unblock setting.

• Unblock = “Off”: The unblocking function is disabled.
• Unblock = “NoRestart”: If the CRG signal disappears for a longer time than
defined in the Loss of carrier time setting. The logical CRL signal is generated.
The CRL output signal is kept up until the CRG signal is present again. The
communication failure is not signaled by the LCG output.
• Unblock = “Restart”: If the CRG signal disappears for a longer time than defined
in the Loss of carrier time setting, theCRL output signal is generated. The CRL
output signal is kept up for 150 ms, after which a communication failure is
signaled by the LCG output. The LCG output is reset 200 ms after the CRG signal
is present again. The purpose of this mode is to ensure tripping during a fixed
delay of 150 ms after the loss of communication due to possible consequences of
an internal fault. After this time, the accelerated tripping is allowed only if the
actual CR signal is received again.

With operation modes Unblock = “NoRestart” and Unblock = “Restart” the created
CRL output signal is internally ORed with the CR input to allow the permissive scheme
to operate even when the communication channel has been interrupted or lost. The
CRL and LCG output signals are also available as outputs for monitoring purposes.
Activating the BLOCK input blocks the CRL and LCG outputs.

5.7.5 Application
To achieve fast fault clearing for the fault on the part of the protected feeder not
covered by the instantaneous zone, Z1, the stepped distance protection function can be
supported with DSOCPSCH.

630 series 939

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Applying DSOCPSCH requires a communication channel capable of transmitting an

"On" or "Off" signal in each direction. To enable fast tripping, the most important
requirement for communication channel is the communication speed.

The performance of DSOCPSCH is directly related to the communication channel

speed, and to the security against false or lost signals. Therefore, dedicated
communication channels are recommended. With short distances up to a few
kilometers, a typical communication media is a simple pilot wire based on auxiliary
power. With distances up to 150 km, the fibre-optic cables utilizing the digital data
transmission can be used. To avoid false signals causing unwanted operation, the
security of the communication channel should be emphasized. It is also important to
pay attention to the dependability of the communication channel to ensure that the
signals are reliably transmitted during the power system faults.

Communication schemes supported by DSOCPSCH:

• Direct underreaching transfer trip, DUTT
• Permissive underreaching transfer trip, PUTT
• Permissive overreaching transfer trip, POTT
• Directional comparison blocking scheme, DCB
• Directional comparison unblocking scheme, DCUB

Depending on whether the communication channel is used for sending a block or a trip
signal, the communication schemes can be divided into blocking schemes and
permissive schemes.

In permissive schemes, the trip signals of the distance zones are interchanged between
the terminals to receive a permission to trip during an internal fault. The tripping of the
local terminal depends on both the starting of its own forward-looking zone, and on
the received signal from the opposite terminal. In the underreaching scheme, no
signals are sent during an external fault. During an external fault, a trip signal is also
sent to the opposite terminal ff the fault is seen in the forward direction and the
overreaching scheme is used. However, in case of external faults, tripping is always
blocked because either no signal is received as the opposite terminal sees a reverse
fault, or because the signal is received but the fault is seen in the reverse direction. In
either case, the blocking is not dependent on the received signal so that a lost
communication channel would not result in false operation.

In the blocking scheme, a blocking signal is sent to the opposite terminal if the fault
is locally seen in the reverse direction, that is, during an external fault. Thus, the
blocking is dependent on the received signal, and there is typically a need to delay the
tripping of the terminal receiving the blocking signal. This delay depends, for
example, on the response times of the communication channel and terminals. During
an internal fault, there is no signal transmission between the terminals. Thereby the
tripping does not depend on the received signal from the opposite terminal.

In conclusion, when compared to the blocking schemes, the permissive schemes are
inherently faster and have better security** against false tripping, since tripping in an
external fault is not possible in case of a channel interruption. In a blocking scheme,
a lost communication channel simultaneously with an external fault may lead to a false

940 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

operation of the protection if the communication channel is not being supervised. On

the other hand, as the fast trip of the permissive scheme depends on the received
signal, its dependability*** is lower than that of the blocking scheme. [1] [2]

The unblocking scheme is also available to enhance the dependability of the

permissive scheme. If the communication channel is interrupted, and simultaneously
a fault occurs in the forward direction within that time, tripping is still possible either
during a fixed time interval counting from the beginning of the interruption, or for as
long as the communication channel is lost. This is achieved by connecting the
supervision output of the implemented communication functionality to the dedicated
carrier guard signal input of DSOCPSCH. In general, the unblocking scheme provides
better security than the blocking scheme because tripping in external faults is only
possible if the fault occurs within the fixed time interval from the beginning of the
channel interruption..

The direct transfer trip scheme uses the underreaching zone to trip the local breaker
and to transfer the trip signal to a remote terminal. The remote terminal operates
immediately based on the received transfer trip signal, without any additional
conditions. This scheme is very simple, but the security is low as a spurious signal
results in false operation of the protection.

Direct intertrip
In some applications, there is a need to trip the remote-end breaker immediately based
on fault detection by the local measurements. This applies, for example, when the
transformers or reactors are connected to the system without circuit breakers, or for
remote tripping after the operation of the local breaker failure protection (CBFP).

In the direct intertrip scheme (DUTT), the carrier send signal (CS) is initiated by an
underreaching zone, or by the tripping signal from an external IED, such as
transformer or reactor protection. At the remote end, the received signals initiates a
breaker trip immediately without any further local protection criteria. To limit the risk
for unwanted trip due to spurious sending of signals, the trip can be delayed by the
Coordination time setting, which should be set to 10...30 ms, depending on the type of
the communication channel. The general requirement for implementing the
communication channel operating in direct inter tripping applications is that it should
be very secure and dependable.

Setting guidelines for the intertrip scheme, DUTT:

Scheme type = "Intertrip"

Coordination time = "0.050" s (10 ms + maximal transmission time)

Carrier Min Dur = "0.1" s

[1] ** security = The ability to block operation in case of an external fault

[2] *** dependability = The ability to operate in case of an internal fault

630 series 941

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Permissive underreach scheme

In permissive underreach scheme, the permission to trip is obtained locally from the
underreaching zone and sent to the remote end. The received signal is combined again
with the local fault indication from the overreaching zone resulting to trip command
after a settable pick-up delay Coordination time.

In the permissive underreach scheme, the IED of either feeder end sends a permissive
signal to trip the other end. The communication channel needs to be able to receive and
transmit at the same time. In permissive schemes, a general requirement for the
communication channel is that it must be fast and secure, but also dependable.
Inadequate security causes the unwanted tripping for the external faults. Inadequate
speed or dependability causes delayed tripping for internal faults.

In the permissive underreach scheme, the CS signal is issued based on the

underreaching zone, Z1.

The underreach scheme is not applicable on short feeder lengths due to the difficulties
in the impedance measurement to distinguish between the internal and external faults
in such cases.

The underreaching zones (Z1) at local and remote end must overlap to prevent a gap
between the protection zones, where the faults would not be detected. If the
underreaching zone does not meet the required sensitivity, for example, the fault
infeed from a remote end, the blocking or permissive overreach scheme is considered.

To achieve an instantaneous trip, the carrier received signal (CR) must be received
when the overreaching zone, Z2, is still starting . In some cases, due to a fault in current
distribution, the overreaching zone can operate only after the fault has been cleared by
the remote terminal. In this case, there is certain risk that in case the remote terminal
is tripped directly by, for example, the zone Z1, the CS signal issued by the zone resets
before the overreaching zone of the local end terminal has operated. To assure a
sufficient duration of the CR signal, the CS signal can be prolonged by the time
Carrier Min Dur. The recommended value of the Carrier Min Dur setting is "0.1" s.

The received communication signal is combined with the output from the local
overreaching zone. Therefore, there is less concern for false signal causing an
incorrect trip, and therefore the timer Coordination time is set to "0". A
communication channel failure does not affect the selectivity, but delays the tripping
at the other end for certain fault locations.

Setting guidelines for the permissive underreach scheme, PUTT:

Scheme type = "Permissive UR"

Coordination time = "0" s

Carrier Min Dur = "0.1" s

942 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Permissive overreach scheme

In permissive overreach scheme, the permission to trip is obtained locally from an
overreaching zone and sent to the remote end. The received signal is then combined
with the local fault indication from the overreaching zone, resulting in trip command
after a settable pick-up delay Coordination time.

In the permissive overreach scheme, the IED at either end of the feeder sends a
permissive signal to trip the other end. Therefore the communication channel must be
able to receive and transmit at the same time. A general requirement for the
communication on permissive schemes is that it should be fast and secure.

In the permissive overreach scheme, the CS signal is issued based on the overreaching
zone, Z2.

The permissive overreach scheme can be used for all feeder types and lengths.

In the permissive overreach scheme, the communication channel plays an essential

role in obtaining a fast tripping at both ends. Typically, a lost communication channel
does not cause false tripping. However, it delays the operation of the protection for the
faults anywhere on the feeder.

The communication channel for a permissive overreach scheme must be fast and
secure, but also dependable. Inadequate security can cause unwanted tripping for
external faults. Inadequate speed or dependability can cause delayed tripping for
internal faults.

In the permissive overreaching scheme, the CS signal can be issued in parallel both
from the overreaching and underreaching zones. The CS signal from the overreaching
zone must not be prolonged, while the CS signal from the underreaching zone must
typically be prolonged. In parallel feeder applications, the scheme typically needs to
be complemented by the current reversal logic. To ensure the correct operation in this
case, the CS signal shall not be prolonged (Carrier Min Dur = "0" s). There is no need
to delay the tripping while receiving the carrier signal, so set the timer Coordination
time to "0".

Setting guidelines for the permissive overreaching transfer trip scheme, POTT:

Scheme type = "Permissive OR"

Coordination time = "0" s

Carrier Min Dur = "0.1" s

Carrier Min Dur = "0" s (in case of parallel lines and current reversal logic)

Directional comparison blocking scheme

In the blocking scheme, the reverse-looking zone, Z3, is used for sending a block
signal to the remote end to block the overreaching zone.

630 series 943

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

The blocking scheme is very dependable because it operates on faults anywhere on the
protected feeder, even if the communication channel is out of service. Conversely, it
is less secure than a permissive scheme because it trips for external faults within the
reach of the overreaching local zone, in case the communication channel is out of
service and no block signal is received.

Inadequate speed or low dependability of the communication channel can cause

spurious tripping for external faults.

To secure that the blocking signal has time to arrive before the local overreaching zone
trips, the trip is delayed by the Coordination time setting. The Coordination time
setting must be set longer than the maximal transmission time of the channel added by
the start and response times of the IEDs sending and receiving the CS signal. A
security margin of at least 10 ms should be considered. The time delay Carrier Min
Dur for prolonging the CS signal is set to "0".

Setting guidelines for the blocking scheme, DCB:

Scheme type = "Blocking"

Coordination time = "0.1" s (10 ms + maximal transmission time)

Carrier Min Dur = "0" s

Directional comparison unblocking scheme

Metallic communication paths unfavourably affected by fault-generated noise or by
other electrical phenomena, such as lightning, are not suitable for conventional
permissive schemes that rely on the signal transmitted during a fault in the protected
feeder. Principally, the communication media must be properly shielded or otherwise
designed to provide an adequate performance during such conditions.

In general, to overcome the lower dependability of permissive schemes, the

unblocking scheme can be used. The function is used at older, less reliable
communication, where the signal has to be sent through the primary fault. The
unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal (CRG) which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. Due to the absence of the CRG signal during the
security time, the Loss of carrier time setting is used as a CR signal. This also enables
a permissive scheme to operate when the communication channel is temporarily lost
during an internal fault.

Setting guidelines for the unblocking scheme, DCUB:

The unblocking function is configured with the Unblock setting:

• Unblock = “Off”: The unblocking function is disabled
• Unblock = “NoRestart”: If the CRG signal disappears for a longer time period
defined in the Loss of carrier time setting, a logical carrier received signal (CRL)
is generated. The CRL signal is kept up until the CRG signal is present. The

944 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

communication failure is not signalled by the LCG output. The Loss of carrier
time setting is set to "35" ms.
• Unblock = “Restart”: If the CRG signal disappears for a longer time period than
the Loss of carrier time setting, a CRL signal is generated. The CRL signal is kept
up for 150 ms, after which a communication failure is signalled by the LCG
output. The value of the LCG output is reset 200 ms after the CRG signal is present
again. The Loss of carrier time setting is set to "35" ms.

5.7.6 Signals
Table 909: DSOCPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic
BLK_CS BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in permissive OR and blocking
schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal Received
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received

Table 910: DSOCPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Trip output
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send signal
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard
signal
LCG BOOLEAN Loss of carrier guard signal

630 series 945

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

5.7.7 Settings
Table 911: DSOCPSCH Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Scheme type Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Coordination time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Communication scheme coordination
time
Carrier Min Dur 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

Table 912: DSOCPSCH Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Loss of carrier time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection
Unblock mode Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart

5.7.8 Measured values

Table 913: DSOCPSCH Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic
BLK_CS BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in permissive OR and blocking
schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal Received
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received

946 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.7.9 Monitored data

Table 914: DSOCPSCH Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Trip output
1=TRUE
CS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Carrier Send signal
1=TRUE
CRL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Carrier signal received or
1=TRUE missing carrier guard
signal
LCG BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Loss of carrier guard
1=TRUE signal

5.7.10 Technical data

Table 915: DSOCPSCH Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

5.8 Local acceleration logic DSTPLAL

5.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local acceleration logic DSTPLAL LAL LAL

5.8.2 Function block

GUID-975CAB39-678F-488F-A8F0-A8357005F805 V2 EN

Figure 474: Function block

630 series 947

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

5.8.3 Functionality
The local acceleration logic function DSTPLAL is a complementary function to the
distance protection function DSTPDIS. DSTPLAL is not intended for a stand-alone
use.

The main purpose of DSTPLAL is to achieve a fast fault clearing which is independent
of the fault location on the protected feeder when no communication channel is
available between the local and remote terminals. DSTPLAL enables a fast fault
clearing during certain conditions, but the function cannot completely replace the
communication scheme logic.

DSTPLAL can be controlled either by the auto-recloser ( zone extension logic), or by

monitoring the loss of load currents (the loss of load logic). Both operation modes are
enabled independently.

5.8.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the local acceleration logic function can be described using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

EX_ACC
AR_READY Zone
extension OPR_Z_EXTN
NONDIR_ST logic

I_A
I_B
I3P
I_C
Loss of
OPR_LOSSLOAD
LOSSLOAD_ACC load logic
CB_CL_CMD
BLOCK

GUID-8244C3AE-7CD7-4C3A-9104-0144F332E8BF V2 EN

Figure 475: Functional module diagram

Zone extension logic

The zone extension logic is enabled with Zone extension = “Enabled”.

When the operation mode Zone extension is enabled, the auto-recloser (AR) function
enables a fast fault clearance that covers the entire length of the protected feeder. This
is achieved by allowing a time delayed overreaching zone to trip instantaneously
when a fault occurs. For this purpose either a normal overreaching zone Z2 or a
dedicated overreaching zone ZAR with an independently set reach can be used.

948 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

After instantaneously tripping for over reaching zone, the auto-reclose sequence
starts. If the fault is transient the system may get restored in the first shot of AR.
However, in case of persistant fault only the first trip of the AR sequence is accelerated
by the zone extension logic. During the rest of the sequence, the zone extension logic
is blocked and AR-initiation is performed selectively by the time graded distance
zones

In case the fault is located on the adjacent feeder or bus within the
reach of the overreaching zone, tripping and AR initiation will take
place in an external fault.

The Zone extension operation mode setting can be described using a module diagram.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-F201BE49-3B21-43AD-AA03-C5EE4D0C355E V1 EN

Figure 476: Functional module diagram of operation mode: Zone extension

AR control
The AR control module supervises the zone acceleration by monitoring the status of
the AR_READY and NONDIR_ST input signals. The READY output signal from the
autorecloser (AR) function which indicates the status of the autoreclosing is
connected to the AR_READY input. The start signal from the non-directional zone is
connected to the NONDIR_ST input. If the non-directional zone is not available for
this, then the start output from the overreaching zone with the biggest reach or GFC
can be used instead.

The permission for zone acceleration is given if AR_READY = TRUE, that is, the AR
function is ready to start a new AR sequence. If the set reclaim time of the AR function
expires before the fault is cleared, the NONDIR_ST input signal is used to block the
activation of the zone acceleration. This ensures that the accelerated trip followed by
the AR initiation is not repeated for the same fault regardless of the reclaim time
setting and the reach of the overreaching zone connected to the EX_ACC input.
Otherwise, this could lead to pumping of the circuit breaker, that is, the repetition of
the first shot without being able to complete the desired AR sequence.

The AR control module blocks the zone acceleration module after the
initiation of the first shot until the AR sequence has been completed,
that is, until the AR_READY input signal changes its state back from
FALSE to TRUE.

630 series 949

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Zone acceleration
The start signal from the overreaching zone whose operation is to be accelerated is
connected to the EX_ACC input. When the EX_ACC input is activated and
simultaneously the AR control module gives a permission for acceleration, the
operate signal from the zone extension logic is obtained from the OPR_Z_EXTN
output, which is used to trip the circuit breaker and initiate the autoreclosing (the AR
shot).

The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the OPR_Z_EXTN output.

Loss of load logic

The loss of load logic is enabled with Loss of load Op = “Enabled.”

When the Loss of load Op operation mode is enabled, a time-delayed overreaching

zone is allowed to trip instantaneously if the loss of load current condition is detected.

The loss of load function does not operate in case of a three-phase fault
as all the phases are faulty. Therefore, none of the current values drops
below the Minimum current setting, meaning that the loss of load
current condition cannot be detected.

The Loss of load Op setting mode can be described using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

I_A
I_B
I3P Initialization
I_C

Trip logic OPR_LOSSLOAD

Loss of load
current
detection

LOSSLOAD_ACC
CB_CL_CMD
BLOCK
GUID-3E5D26BC-7873-40C3-A160-DB9FF9ADC983 V2 EN

Figure 477: Functional module diagram of operation mode: Loss of load Op

Initialization
The initialization module gives an enabling signal to the trip logic module when the
values of all three phase currents are above the set value of Load current value for
more than the time set with Load release on time. The enabling signal has a drop-off
delay defined with the Load release off Tm setting.

950 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Loss of load current detection

The loss of load current detection module gives an enabling signal to the trip logic
module if any of the phase current values drops below the Minimum current setting
due to a remote end breaker opening and simultaneously the value of at least one phase
current exceeds the value of the Load current value setting due to a fault. Such a
condition has to be valid for longer than the Minimum current time setting.

Trip logic
The operate signal is obtained from the OPR_LOSSLOAD output if both initialization
and loss of load current detection modules are activated and simultaneously a fault is
seen by the overreaching zone connected to the LOSSLOAD_ACC input.

The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the OPR_LOSSLOAD output. Temporarily
blocking is achieved using the circuit breaker close command pulse connected to the
CB_CL_CMD input. It is used to prevent an unwanted operation due to initial
transients after the breaker is closed, for example, in case of inrush currents.

5.8.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

5.8.6 Application
DSTPLAL is used in those applications when the conventional communication
scheme logic cannot be applied (when no communication channel is available), but
the user still requires a fast clearance for the faults on the entire feeder.

DSTPLAL enables a fast fault clearing during certain conditions. DSTPLAL is unable
to replace the communication scheme logic completely due to a possible lack of
selectivity during the first trip and AR initiation and also as the loss of load logic
cannot operate for three-phase faults. DSTPLAL is controlled either by the auto-
recloser (zone extension logic), or by monitoring the loss of load current (loss of load
logic).

Zone extension logic

The Zone extension setting can be applied in cases when the auto-recloser function is
in operation. When Zone extension is enabled, the auto-recloser (AR) function is used
to enable the fast fault clearance independent of the fault location on the protected
feeder. This is achieved by allowing a time delayed overreaching zone to trip instantly
when a fault occurs. Also, in cases where there are tapped loads on the protected
feeder, it is required to set a dedicated zone to initiate one or two shots as fast as
possible before the protection devices of these taps clear. If the fault is still present
after these shots, further tripping is delayed more in accordance with the other zones

630 series 951

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

so that the operation becomes slower than the protection of the load taps, enabling it
to clear. The final tripping that ends the sequence is always performed selectively
according to a proper time grading of the zones.

If the fault is located on the adjacent feeder or bus within the reach of
the overreaching zone, the tripping and the AR initiation takes place
during an external fault.

Loss of load logic

The loss of load acceleration gives the overreaching zone a permission to operate
instantly after the detection of a loss of load current condition.

The loss of load logic is unable to operate for three-phase faults.

Setting guidelines

The Load current value setting must be set below the minimum three-phase load
current during the healthy state. A security factor of 0.5 is used:

Load current value = 0.5*Iminload

Iminload the minimum load current during normal operation conditions.

The loss of load function is released after Load release on time is elapsed at the same
time as the load current in all three phases has been above the Load current value
setting. If the current values drop below the Load current value setting, the release
condition stays activated until the drop-out delay time has expired (the Load release
off Tm setting). The value of Load release off Tm is by default set to ”0.3 s". The Load
release on time setting is used to increase the security of the loss of load function, for
example in the case of transient inrush currents during the energizing of a power
transformer. When there is no need for delaying the release, the Load release on time
is set to zero in applications.

The Minimum current setting is used to detect the loss of load condition in healthy
phases during the fault. The Minimum current setting is set to a value higher than the
maximum current flowing in the healthy phases during the fault when the breaker at
the remote end has been opened and the through flowing load has therefore been
disconnected. This current can be, for example, due to the charging current of the
phases or the load current of the tapped loads. At the same time, the Minimum current
setting value is set below the Load current value setting. By default, the Minimum
current setting value is set to “0.05 pu”.

952 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

The Minimum current time setting is used to provide the start delay for the loss of load
current detection to avoid an unwanted release of the function. The value of Minimum
current time is by default set to “0.2 s”.

5.8.7 Signals
Table 916: DSTPLAL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
AR_READY BOOLEAN 0 Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for
fast trip
CB_CL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 CB close command
EX_ACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at zone
xtension
LOSSLOAD_ACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at loss of
load
NONDIR_ST BOOLEAN 0 Non directional criteria used to prevent
instantaneous trip

Table 917: DSTPLAL Output signals

Name Type Description
OPR_LOSSLOAD BOOLEAN Operate by loss of load
OPR_Z_EXTN BOOLEAN Operate by zone extension

5.8.8 Settings
Table 918: DSTPLAL Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Load current value 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Load current before disturbance
Minimum current 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.05 Level taken as current loss due to remote
CB trip
Minimum current time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay on pick-up for Minimum
current value
Load release on time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay on pick-up for load current
release
Load release off Tm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay on drop off for load current
release
Loss of load Op Disabled - - Disabled Enable/Disable operation of Loss of load.
Enabled
Zone extension Disabled - - Disabled Enable/Disable operation of Zone
Enabled extension

630 series 953

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Table 919: DSTPLAL Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3

5.8.9 Measured values

Table 920: DSTPLAL Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0 Current amplitude phase A
I_AMPL_B REAL 0 Current amplitude phase B
I_AMPL_C REAL 0 Current amplitude phase C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
AR_READY BOOLEAN 0 Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for
fast trip
CB_CL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 CB close command
EX_ACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at zone
xtension
LOSSLOAD_ACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at loss of
load
NONDIR_ST BOOLEAN 0 Non directional criteria used to prevent
instantaneous trip

5.8.10 Monitored data

Table 921: DSTPLAL Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_LOSSLOAD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate by loss of load
1=TRUE
OPR_Z_EXTN BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operate by zone
1=TRUE extension

5.8.11 Technical data

Table 922: DSTPLAL Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

954 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.9 Communication logic for residual overcurrent

RESCPSCH

5.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Communication logic for residual RESCPSCH CLN 85N
overcurrent

5.9.2 Function block

GUID-87A087BE-1208-4202-97B1-A388B10AEA6E V1 EN

Figure 478: Function block

5.9.3 Functionality
The scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection RESCPSCH is
provided to achieve an instantaneous fault clearing independent of the fault location
on the protected feeder. The available communication scheme types are:
• Direct intertrip (DUTT)
• Permissive underreach (PUTT)
• Permissive overreach (POTT
• Directional comparison blocking (DCB)

The directional comparison unblocking scheme (DCUB) can also be provided by

complementing the permissive schemes with an additional logic called the unblocking
function, which is also included in RESCPSCH.

If the permissive overreaching scheme is used, some of the power system conditions
requires additional special logic circuits, like current reversal logic and weak-end
infeed (WEI) logic for distance protection, RCRWPSCH.

5.9.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

630 series 955

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

The operation of the scheme communication logic function for residual overcurrent
protection can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram
are explained in the next sections.

GUID-C8EE9156-EF07-41EB-903F-06DA8269C5AA V1 EN

Figure 479: Functional module diagram

The applied communication scheme logic in RESCPSCH is selected with the

SchemeType setting.
• If SchemeType = “Intertrip”, it is (DUTT)
• If SchemeType = “Permissive UR” , it is (PUTT)
• If SchemeType = “Permissive OR”, it is (POTT)
• If SchemeType = “Blocking” , it is (DCB)

The unblocking scheme (DCUB) is enabled with the Unblock mode setting.

Direct underreaching transfer trip scheme (DUTT)

The direct intertrip is enabled with SchemeType = “Intertrip”.

In the direct intertrip scheme, the start signal from the underreaching (instantaneous)
residual overcurrent function DEFHPDEF, is connected to the CSUR input to create
a carrier send (CS) signal. The duration of the CSUR input signal can be prolonged by
the Carrier Min Dur setting to assure a sufficient duration for the CS signal.

The local circuit breaker is directly tripped (activation of the OPERATE output) with
the carrier received (CR) signal after a settable pick-up delay Coordination time has
elapsed without further local criteria.

956 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

The unblocking function (Unblock = “NoRestart” and Unblock =

“Restart”) must not be enabled with the DUTT scheme, as the lost
guard signal results in an immediate trip of the local circuit breaker.

The activation of the BLOCK input does a total blocking of the direct intertrip scheme.
The activation of the BLK_OPR input blocks the OPERATE output.

GUID-47FB8923-BB0D-4856-9CB7-3C6FF359F09D V1 EN

Figure 480: Simplified functional diagram of the direct intertrip scheme

Permissive underreaching transfer trip scheme (PUTT)

The permissive underreach is enabled with SchemeType = “Permissive UR”.

In the permissive underreach scheme, the start signal from the underreaching
(instantaneous) residual overcurrent function DEFHPDEF, is connected to the CSUR
input to create a CS signal. The duration of the CSUR input signal can be prolonged by
the Carrier Min Dur setting to assure a sufficient duration of the CS signal.

In the permissive underreach scheme, the CR signal or CRL signal if unblocking

function is enabled, is used to allow the overreaching residual overcurrent function
DEFLPDEF, to trip (activation of the OPERATE output) after the pick-up delay
Coordination time. The start signal from the overreaching function is connected to the
CACC input. A general start signal in forward direction can also be connected to the
CACC input.

The CS signal is also generated if the CR signal is received and the local carrier
acceleration signal CACC is active.

Activating the BLOCK input blocks totally the permissive underreach scheme.
Activating the BLK_OPR input blocks the OPERATE output.

630 series 957

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

GUID-8BFAECCF-472E-45B9-9E1B-DCFAD672A563 V1 EN

Figure 481: Simplified functional diagram of permissive underreach scheme

POTT (Permissive overrreaching transfer trip scheme)

The permissive overreach is enabled with SchemeType = “Permissive OR”.

In the permissive overreach scheme, the start signal from the overreaching residual
overcurrent function DEFLPDEF, is connected to the CSOR input to create a CS
signal. The CS signal can also be issued simultaneously from the underreaching
residual overcurrent function DEFHPDEF. In this case, the start signal from the
underreaching function is connected to the CSUR input. The duration of the CSUR
input signal can be prolonged by the Carrier Min Dur setting, to assure a sufficient
duration of the CS signal. The carrier send from CSOR can be blocked with the
BLK_CS input.

In case of parallel feeders, and when the external current reversal logic
(RCRWPSCH) is enabled, the CS signal is not prolonged and the
value of Carrier Min Dur is set to zero to secure correct operation.

In the permissive overreach scheme, the received signal CR or CRL, if unblocking

function is enabled used to allow the overreaching residual overcurrent function
DEFLPDEF, to trip (activation of the OPERATE output) after the settable pick-up
delay Coordination time. The start signal from the overreaching zone is connected to
the CACC input.

The CS signal is also generated if the CR signal is received and the local carrier
acceleration signal CACC is active.

Activating the BLOCK input blocks totally the permissive overreach scheme.
Activating the BLK_OPR input blocks the OPERATE output.

958 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

GUID-33562061-82CD-4345-95D2-66A8AE677B94 V1 EN

Figure 482: Simplified functional diagram of permissive overreach scheme

Directional comparison blocking scheme (DCB)

The directional comparison blocking scheme is enabled with SchemeType =
“Blocking”.

In the blocking scheme, the start signal from the reverse looking residual overcurrent
function DEFLPDEF set to operate for reverse direction earth fault, is connected to the
CSBLK input to create a CS signal. The starting of the reverse looking function
indicates that the fault is located outside the protected feeder. The duration of the
CSBLK input signal can be prolonged with the Carrier Min Dur setting, to assure a
sufficient duration of the CS signal. The CS signal from the CSBLK input can be
blocked with the BLK_CS input.

The principal operation of the blocking scheme is that the forward looking
overreaching residual overcurrent function is allowed to trip (activation of the
OPERATE output) after the settable Coordination time setting, and if no block signal
is received from the remote terminal. To prevent a false trip in case of external faults,
the CR signal must be received before the Coordination time has elapsed. The start
signal from the overreaching residual overcurrent function DEFLPDEF, is connected
to the CACC input.

The Coordination time setting in the blocking scheme depends, for

example. on the communication system delay and on the terminal
response times in transmitting a CS signal to the other feeder end. The
Coordination time setting must not be zero.

Activating the BLOCK input blocks totally the permissive overreach scheme.
Activating the BLK_OPR input blocks the OPERATE output.

630 series 959

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

GUID-0EECD5F8-A08B-4D14-91FE-987F5009B2A3 V1 EN

Figure 483: Simplified functional diagram of the blocking scheme, internal fault.
The CS signal is not sent as the fault is not seen by the reverse-
looking overreaching function.

GUID-E2A25FAC-19BD-427C-AD02-0E5805F818EF V1 EN

Figure 484: Simplified functional diagram of the blocking scheme, external fault.
The IED at bus B sees the fault in the reverse direction and sends a
blocking signal (CS) to the IED at bus A. There is no CB operation at
either end.

The unblocking function used with the blocking function provides a possibility to
supervise the communication channel. In this case, the CRL output signal is used as a
local blocking signal.

960 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

The operation mode Unblock = “Restart” is not recommended as the

blocking is activated only for 150 ms after the guard signal disappears.
This results in an unwanted operation of the protection.

DCUB (Directional Comparison Unblocking)

The unblocking function is a complementary logic, which can be used together with
the permissive communication schemes. In the unblocking scheme, the dependability
of the permissive schemes is improved by using the loss of guard signal from the
communication equipment to create locally a CRL output signal. This enables the
permissive scheme to operate even if the communication channel is interrupted or lost.

The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal (CRG), which must always be
present. The absence of the CRG signal for a time longer than the value of the Loss of
carrier time setting is used to generate a logical CRL signal. This enables the
permissive scheme to operate despite the loss of the communication channel. A
communication failure shorter than the value of the Loss of carrier time setting is
always ignored.

The unblocking function is configured with the Unblock setting :

• Unblock = “Off”: The unblocking function is disabled.
• Unblock = “NoRestart”: If the CRG signal disappears for a longer time than
defined in the Loss of carrier time setting. The logical CRL signal is generated.
The CRL output signal is kept up until the CRG signal is present again. The
communication failure is not signaled by the LCG output.
• Unblock = “Restart”: If the CRG signal disappears for a longer time than defined
in the Loss of carrier time setting, theCRL output signal is generated. The CRL
output signal is kept up for 150 ms, after which a communication failure is
signaled by the LCG output. The LCG output is reset 200 ms after the CRG signal
is present again. The purpose of this mode is to ensure tripping during a fixed
delay of 150 ms after the loss of communication due to possible consequences of
an internal fault. After this time, the accelerated tripping is allowed only if the
actual CR signal is received again.

With operation modes Unblock = “NoRestart” and Unblock = “Restart” the created
CRL output signal is internally ORed with the CR input to allow the permissive scheme
to operate even when the communication channel has been interrupted or lost. The
values of CRL and LCG output signals are also available through the monitored data
view. Activating the BLOCK input blocks the CRL and LCG outputs.

5.9.5 Application
To achieve a fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the protected feeder not
covered by the instantaneous step of residual overcurrent protection, the directional
residual overcurrent protection can be supported with RESCPSCH.

630 series 961

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Applying RESCPSCH requires a communication channel capable of transmitting an

"On" or "Off" signal in each direction. To enable fast tripping, the most important
requirement for communication is the communication speed.

The performance of RESCPSCH function is directly related to the communication

channel speed, and to the security against false or lost signals. Therefore, dedicated
communication channels are recommended. A typical communication media is a
simple pilot wire based on auxiliary power with short distances up to few kilometers,
and fiber-optic cables utilizing digital data transmission up to distances of 150 km. To
avoid false signals that could cause unwanted operation, the security of the
communication channel should be emphasized. It is also important to pay attention to
the dependability of the communication channel to ensure that the signals are reliably
transmitted during power system faults.

The communication schemes supported by RESCPSCH are:

• Direct underreaching transfer trip, DUTT
• Permissive underreaching transfer trip, PUTT
• Permissive overreaching transfer trip, POTT
• Directional comparison blocking scheme, DCB
• Directional comparison unblocking scheme, DCUB

Depending on whether the communication channel is used for sending a block or a trip
signal, the communication schemes can be divided into blocking schemes and
permissive schemes.

In permissive schemes, the trip signals of the directional residual overcurrent

protection are interchanged between the terminals to receive a permission to trip
during an internal fault. The tripping of the local terminal depends on both the starting
of its own forward looking function and on the received signal from the opposite
terminal. In the underreaching scheme, no signals are sent during an external fault.
However, during an external fault, a trip signal is also send to the opposite terminal,
if the fault is seen in the forward direction and the overreaching scheme is used.
However, in case of external faults, the tripping is always blocked either due to that no
signal is received as the opposite terminal sees a reverse fault, or that the signal is
received but locally the fault is seen in the reverse direction. In either case, the
blocking is eventually not dependent on the received signal so that a lost
communication channel would not result in false operation.

In the blocking scheme, a blocking signal is sent to the opposite terminal if the fault
is locally seen in the reverse direction, that is, during an external fault. Thus, the
blocking is dependent on the received signal, and there is typically a need to delay the
tripping of the terminal receiving the blocking signal. This delay depends, for
example, on the response times of the communication channel and terminals. During
an internal fault, there is no signal transmission between the terminals, so the tripping
does not depend on the received signal from the opposite terminal.

In conclusion, permissive schemes are inherently faster and have better security**
against false tripping than a blocking scheme, since tripping in an external fault is not
possible in case of a channel interruption. In a blocking scheme, a lost communication

962 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

channel simultaneously with an external fault may lead to a false operation of the
protection if the communication channel is not being supervised. On the other hand,
as the fast trip of the permissive scheme depends on a received signal, its
dependability*** is lower than that of the blocking scheme. [3] [4]

The unblocking scheme is also available to enhance the dependability of the

permissive scheme. If the communication channel is interrupted, and simultaneously
a fault occurs in the forward direction within that time, tripping is still possible either
during a fixed time interval from the beginning of the interruption, or as long as the
communication channel is lost. This is achieved by connecting the supervision output
of the implemented communication functionality to the dedicated carrier guard signal
input of RESCPSCH. In general, the unblocking scheme also provides better security
than the blocking scheme because tripping in external faults is only possible if the fault
occurs within the above time.

The direct transfer trip scheme uses the underreaching function to trip the local
breaker and to transfer the trip signal to the remote terminal. The remote terminal
operates immediately based on the received transfer trip signal, without any additional
conditions. This scheme is very simple, but its security is low, as a spurious signal
results in false operation of the protection.

Direct intertrip
In some applications, there is a need to trip the remote end breaker immediately based
on fault detection by the local measurements. This applies, for example, when the
transformers or reactors are connected to the system without circuit-breakers, or for
remote tripping following the operation of the local breaker failure protection
(CBFP).

In the direct intertrip scheme (DUTT), the carrier send signal (CS) is initiated by the
underreaching, or from the tripping signal of an external IED, such as transformer or
reactor protection. At the remote end, the received signals initiates the breaker trip
immediately without any further local protection criteria. To limit the risk for
unwanted trip due to spurious sending of signals, the trip can be delayed by the
Coordination time setting, which should be set to 10-30 ms, depending on the type of
the communication channel. The general requirement for implementing the
communication channel operating in direct intertripping applications is that it should
be very secure and dependable.

Setting guidelines for intertrip scheme, DUTT:

Scheme type = "Intertrip"

Coordination time = "0.050" s (10 ms + maximal transmission time)

Carrier Min Dur = "0.1" s

[3] ** security = The ability to block operation in case of an external fault

[4] *** dependability = The ability to operate in case of an internal fault

630 series 963

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Permissive underreach scheme

In the permissive underreach scheme, a permission to trip is obtained locally from the
underreaching function and sent to the remote end. The received signal is then
combined again with the local fault indication from the overreaching function
resulting to trip command after a settable pick-up delay Coordination time.

In the permissive underreach scheme, the IED of either feeder end sends a permissive
signal to trip the other end. The communication channel needs to be able to receive and
transmit at the same time. In permissive schemes, a general requirement for the
communication channel is that it must be fast and secure, but also the dependable.
Inadequate security causes unwanted tripping for external faults. Inadequate speed or
dependability causes delayed tripping for internal faults.

In the permissive underreach scheme, the CS signal is issued based on the

underreaching residual overcurrent protection function.

The permissive scheme is not applicable on short feeder lengths due to the difficulties
in the impedance measurement to distinguish between the internal and external faults
in such cases.

It is possible that the residual overcurrent function starts only at one end due to the
system conditions like weak zero sequence source at one end, or high fault resistance.
It is still possible to achieve fast tripping from both ends by connecting a general
forward start signal to CACC. So, even if the local overreaching residual overcurrent
function has not picked up, the local OPERATE output would still be activated. The
function also generates a CS signal by combining the carrier received (CR) signal
from a remote end and also the local activation of CACC, giving the permission to a
remote function to trip instantaneously.

The CR signal must be received when the overreaching residual overcurrent

protection is still started to achieve an instantaneous trip. In some cases, due to the
fault current distribution, the overreaching protection can operate only after the fault
has been cleared by the remote terminal. In this case, there is a certain risk that if the
remote terminal is tripped directly by the instantaneous underreaching function, the
CS signal issued by it resets before the overreaching function of the local end terminal
is operated. To assure a sufficient duration of the CR signal, the CS signal , can be
prolonged by time Carrier Min Dur. The recommended value of the Carrier Min Dur
setting is "0.1" s.

The received communication signal is combined with the output from the local
overreaching function. Therefore, there is less concern for false signal causing an
incorrect trip. Therefore, the timer Coordination time can be set to "0". A
communication channel failure does not affect the selectivity, but delays the tripping
at the other end for certain fault locations.

Setting guidelines for the permissive underreach scheme, PUTT:

Scheme type = "Permissive UR"

Coordination time = "0" s

964 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

Carrier Min Dur = "0.1" s

Permissive overreach scheme

In the permissive overreach scheme, permission to trip is obtained locally from an
overreaching function and sent to the remote end. The received signal is then
combined with the local fault indication from the overreaching function, resulting in
trip command after a settable pick-up delay Coordination time.

In the permissive overreach scheme, the IED at either end of the feeder sends a
permissive signal to trip the other end. Therefore the communication channel must be
able to receive and transmit at the same time. A general requirement for the
communication on permissive schemes is that it should be fast and secure.

In the permissive overreach scheme, the CS signal is issued based on the start of the
overreaching residual overcurrent function.

It is possible that the residual overcurrent function start at one end due to system
conditions like weak zero sequence source at one end, or high fault resistance. It is still
possible to get fast tripping from both ends by connecting a general forward start
signal to CACC. So, even if the local overreaching residual overcurrent function has
not picked up, the local OPERATE would still be activated. The function also
generates a CS signal by combining the CR signal from a remote end and local
activation of CACC, giving permission to the remote function to trip instantaneously.

The permissive overreach scheme can be used for all feeder types and lengths.

In the permissive overreach scheme, the communication channel plays an essential

role in obtaining a fast tripping at both ends. Typically, a lost communication channel
does not cause false tripping. However, it delays the operation of the protection for the
faults anywhere on the feeder.

The communication channel for a permissive overreach scheme must be fast and
secure, but also dependable. Inadequate security can cause unwanted tripping for
external faults. Inadequate speed or dependability can cause delayed tripping for
internal faults.

In the permissive overreaching scheme, the CS signal can be issued in parallel both
from the overreaching and underreaching functions. The CS signal from the
overreaching function must not be prolonged, while the CS signal from the
underreaching function must typically be prolonged. In parallel feeder applications,
the scheme typically needs to be complemented by the current reversal logic. To
ensure a correct operation in this case, the CS signal shall not be prolonged (Carrier
Min Dur = "0" s). There is no need to delay the tripping when receiving the carrier
signal, so set the time Coordination time to "0".

Setting guidelines for the permissive overreaching transfer trip scheme, POTT:

Scheme type = "Permissive OR"

Coordination time = "0" s

630 series 965

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Carrier Min Dur = "0.1" s

Carrier Min Dur = "0" s (in case of parallel lines and current reversal logic)

Directional comparison blocking scheme

In the blocking scheme, the reverse-looking residual overcurrent function, is used for
sending a block signal to the remote end to block the overreaching forward looking
residual overcurrent function.

The blocking scheme is very dependable because it operates for faults anywhere on
the protected feeder, even if the communication channel is out of service. Conversely,
it is less secure than a permissive scheme because it trips for external faults within the
reach of the overreaching local function, if the communication channel is out of
service and no block signal is received.

Inadequate speed or low dependability of the communication channel can cause

spurious tripping for external faults.

To secure that the blocking signal has time to arrive before the local overreaching
function trips, the trip is delayed by the Coordination time setting. The Coordination
time setting must be set longer than the maximal transmission time of the channel
added by the start and response times of the IEDs sending and receiving the CS signal.
A security margin of at least 10 ms should be considered. The time delay Carrier Min
Dur for prolonging the CS signal is set to "0".

Setting guidelines for the blocking scheme:

Scheme type = "Blocking"

Coordination time = "0.1" s (10 ms + maximal transmission time)

Carrier Min Dur = "0" s

Directional comparison unblocking scheme

Metallic communication paths adversely affected by fault-generated noise or by other
electrical phenomena, such as lightning, are not suitable for conventional permissive
schemes that rely on signal transmitted during a fault in the protected feeder.
Principally, the communication media must be properly shielded or otherwise
designed to provide an adequate performance during such conditions.

In general, to overcome the lower dependability of permissive schemes, the

unblocking scheme can be used. The function is used at older, less reliable
communication, where the signal has to be sent through the primary fault. The
unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal (CRG) which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. Due to the absence of the CRG signal during the
security time, the Loss of carrier time setting is used as a CR signal. This also enables
a permissive scheme to operate when the communication channel is temporarily lost
during an internal fault.

Setting guidelines for the unblocking scheme:

966 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

The unblocking function is configured with the Unblock setting:

• Unblock = “Off”: The unblocking function is disabled
• Unblock = “NoRestart”: If the CRG signal disappears for a longer time period
defined in the Loss of carrier time setting, a logical carrier received signal (CRL)
is generated. The CRL signal is kept up until the CRG signal is present. The
communication failure is not signalled by the LCG output. The Loss of carrier
time setting is set to "35" ms.
• Unblock = “Restart”: If the CRG signal disappears for a longer time period than
the Loss of carrier time setting, a CRL signal is generated. The CRL signal is kept
up for 150 ms, after which a communication failure is signalled by the LCG
output. The value of the LCG output is reset 200 ms after the CRG signal is present
again. The Loss of carrier time setting is set to "35" ms.

5.9.6 Signals
Table 923: RESCPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLK_CS BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking
schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier
Send
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for tripping by Communication
Scheme
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received

Table 924: RESCPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Trip by Communication Scheme Logic
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme
Logic
LCG BOOLEAN loss of carrier guard signal

630 series 967

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

5.9.7 Settings
Table 925: RESCPSCH Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Scheme type Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type, Mode of Operation
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Coordination time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Communication scheme coordination
time
Carrier Min Dur 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

Table 926: RESCPSCH Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Loss of carrier time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection
Unblock mode Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart

5.9.8 Measured values

Table 927: RESCPSCH Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLK_CS BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking
schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier
Send
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for tripping by Communication
Scheme
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received

968 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.9.9 Monitored data

Table 928: RESCPSCH Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Trip by Communication
1=TRUE Scheme Logic
CS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Carrier Send by
1=TRUE Communication Scheme
Logic
CRL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Carrier Receive from
1=TRUE Communication Scheme
Logic
LCG BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - loss of carrier guard
1=TRUE signal

5.9.10 Technical data

Table 929: RESCPSCH Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

5.9.11 Technical revision history

Table 930: RESCPSCH technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Default setting value changed from “Intertrip” to
“Permissive UR” for Scheme type setting

5.10 Current reversal and WEI logic for residual

overcurrent RCRWPSCH

5.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed RCRWPSCH CLCRWN 85NCRW
logic for residual overcurrent

630 series 969

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

5.10.2 Function block

GUID-866360F3-65D7-40DE-97D3-6A70057BC59A V2 EN

Figure 485: Function block

5.10.3 Functionality
The scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection RESCPSCH
may require additional logics to operate correctly in all possible power system
conditions. Such special logics include, for example, the current reversal and weak-
end infeed logics which are combined to the RCRWPSCH function block.

Current reversal logic: In the parallel feeder applications, the direction of fault current
on the healthy feeder can change when the circuit breaker on the faulty feeder opens
to clear the fault. This can lead to an unwanted operation of the residual overcurrent
protection on the healthy parallel feeder when RESCPSCH with the permissive
overreach scheme is used. The main purpose of the current reversal logic is to prevent
such unwanted operations.

The weak-end infeed (WEI) logic: Basically, the permissive communication schemes
can operate only when the protection in the remote terminal can detect the fault. This
detection requires a sufficient minimum fault current. If such current is not available
due to too weak a remote end source, the WEI logic can be used to overcome the
situation and trip the remote end breaker.

5.10.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of current reversal and weak-end infeed logics for residual overcurrent
protection can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections.

970 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

GUID-469E8E54-ED7E-4299-9CE6-5B76FEC08C6C V1 EN

Figure 486: Functional module diagram

Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic is enabled by changing the value of the Reversal mode
setting to “On”.

The current reversal logic uses the start signal of the reverse directional residual
overcurrent function connected to the IRV input, which is used to recognize the fault
being in the reverse direction, that is, in the parallel feeder. When the reverse
directional residual overcurrent function is activated, after a start delay (setting
Reversal time) the logic is ready to issue an OPR_IRV output signal. The OPR_IRV
signal is connected to the BLK_CS input of the scheme communication logic function
to block the sending of the carrier send signal (CS) and the activation of the OPERATE
output of the communication logic. The OPR_IRV signal has a drop-off delay defined
with the Reversal reset time setting.

An internal 10 ms drop-off timer is provided which secures the current

reversal logic to be activated for short duration input signals, even if
the Reversal reset time setting is set to zero.

The BLK_IRV input is used to block the activation of the OPR_IRV output. The
BLK_IRV input is typically connected to the forward looking residual overcurrent
function start signals within the terminal. General blocking is achieved by activating
the BLOCK input.

Weak-end infeed (WEI) logic

The WEI logic is used in cases where the fault current infeed is too low due to, for
example, high source impedance or fault current distribution between sources to
activate the residual overcurrent protection function. When activated, the carrier
receive (CR) signal is logically combined with the local criteria to initiate the tripping
of the weak end breaker. The received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the
tripping at the opposite end with the stronger source.

630 series 971

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

GUID-418AE3A0-3B07-4B1C-8B26-B69C608D2A9A V2 EN

Figure 487: Functional module diagram of the weak-end infeed logic

The WEI logic is enabled using the Wei mode setting.

• If Wei mode= “Off,” the WEI logic is disabled.
• If Wei mode= “Echo,” the WEI logic is enabled without the trip function.
• If Wei mode= “Echo & Trip,” the WEI logic is enabled with the trip function.

Level detector
The level detector sends an enabling signal to the weak-end trip logic when the
residual voltage is above the Residual voltage Val setting.

Echo logic
The WEI logic returns the received carrier signal with the ECHO output when it
receives a carrier receive signal (CR) under the conditions that no fault has been
detected by the forward and reverse directional residual overcurrent functions and that
the duration of CR is longer than the coordination time delay (the setting Wei Crd
time). The received carrier receive signal is also given as the CR output.

When the WEI logic is enabled at both feeder ends, a spurious signal
can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lockup
of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.

The ECHO and CR outputs can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input. The FF,
BLK_WEI1 and BLK_WEI2 inputs can be used to block the ECHO output. The FF
input is usually connected to the functional output of the fuse failure function, and the
BLK_WEI1 input is typically connected to the start signals of the forward and reverse
directional residual overcurrent functions within the terminal. The BLK_WEI2 signal
has an inbuilt 200 ms drop-off delay. The BLK_WEI2 input is usually connected to all
the fault detection functions within the terminal except the residual overvoltage
function.

Weak-end trip logic

The weak-end trip logic is activated if the level detector and echo logic are activated.
Then a general trip signal OPR_WEI is activated. The tripping is blocked if the
CB_OPEN input is activated.

972 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

The OPR_WEI output can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.

5.10.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

5.10.6 Application
Current reversal logic
When the overreaching permissive communication schemes are used in parallel
feeder applications, the current reversal can result in unselective tripping. Such a
condition can occur in the healthy feeder when the fault is cleared in the faulty feeder.
The tripping of the healthy parallel feeder can lead to the losing of the connection
between the two buses. To avoid this situation, the current reversal logic (transient
blocking logic) can be used.

In the current reversal condition, the relays Relay A1, Relay A2, Relay B1 and Relay
B2 can be equipped with the scheme communication logic RESCPSCH and the
permissive overreach scheme can be enabled.

A fault occurs at Feeder 1 close to the bus B. Relay A2 at the healthy feeder 2
recognizes the fault in the forward direction and sends a CS signal to Relay B2
according to the PUTT scheme. Relay B2 does not recognize the fault in the forward
direction and hence does not send a permissive signal to Relay A2.

GUID-BB20534F-6AD9-4FE4-B668-F2D3C1BFD277 V1 EN

Figure 488: Fault occurs at one of the parallel lines. CS=carrier signal sending,
CR=carrier signal receiving

In practice, the faulted feeder (Feeder 1) is not simultaneously tripped at both ends and
it can occur that for example the circuit breaker closer to the fault at Relay B1 is tripped

630 series 973

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

faster than the breaker at the bus A. The result is that when the breaker at Relay B1
opens, the direction of the fault current at the healthy feeder (Feeder 2) is reversed.

GUID-3A4476C3-324C-48B0-840B-543E00B08499 V2 EN

Figure 489: Circuit breaker at Relay B1 opens and creates a current reversal
condition. CS=carrier signal sending, CR=carrier signal receiving.

The Relay A2 still sends the CS signal because of the reset time delay of forward
direction residual overcurrent function of Relay A2 when the Relay B2 starts to
recognize the fault in the forward direction, Relay B2 can mis-operate and trip the
breaker of the healthy feeder.

This problem can be solved using the reverse directional residual overcurrent function
to recognize the fault in reverse direction and temporarily block the operation of the
scheme communication logic due to the current reversal condition. This is utilized in
RCRWPSCH.

Weak-end infeed (WEI) logic

Avoid using the WEI function at both feeder ends. It can only be
enabled at the weak end.

The WEI logic is recommended to be used only in the permissive schemes.

Setting guidelines for current reversal logic

Setting Reversal reset time: Reversal reset time can be set to the maximum reset time
of the communication channel. A minimum setting of 40 ms is recommended. A long
Reversal reset time setting increases the security against unwanted tripping, but
delays the fault clearing if the fault develops from one feeder to involve the other.
However, the probability of this type of fault is small.

Setting Reversal time: Set the start delay reversal time below 80 percent of the breaker
operate time, but with a minimum of 20 ms.

Setting guidelines for Weak-End Infeed (WEI) logic

The WEI function returns the received carrier signal with the ECHO output when it
receives the carrier signal (CR) under the condition that no fault has been detected by

974 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

the forward and reverse directional measuring elements and that the duration is longer
than the Wei Crd time coordination time delay setting. To prevent the spurious carrier
received signals from activating the WEI logic and causing unwanted
communications, the Wei Crd time setting can be set to “0.010 s”.

5.10.7 Signals
Table 931: RCRWPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_IRV BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
BLK_WEI1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI Logic
BLK_WEI2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
FF BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 932: RCRWPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
OPR_IRV BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
OPR_WEI BOOLEAN Operation of WEI logic
ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier send by WEI logic
CR BOOLEAN POR Carrier signal received from remote end

5.10.8 Settings
Table 933: RCRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Reversal mode Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
Wei mode Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
Residual voltage Val 0.05 - 0.70 pu 0.01 0.25 Neutral voltage setting for fault conditions
measurement
Table continues on next page

630 series 975

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Reversal time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
Reversal reset time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
Wei Crd time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Coordination time for the WEI logic

Table 934: RCRWPSCH Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel Res Residual Grp 1 - - Residual Grp 1 Base value selector, residual
Residual Grp 2
Residual Grp 3

5.10.9 Measured values

Table 935: RCRWPSCH Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U0_AMPL REAL 0 Residual voltage amplitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_IRV BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
BLK_WEI1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI Logic
BLK_WEI2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
FF BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

5.10.10 Monitored data

Table 936: RCRWPSCH Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_IRV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operation of current
1=TRUE reversal logic
OPR_WEI BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Operation of WEI logic
1=TRUE
ECHO BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Carrier send by WEI logic
1=TRUE
CR BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - POR Carrier signal
1=TRUE received from remote end

976 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

5.10.11 Technical data

Table 937: RCRWPSCH Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

5.11 Emergency start function ESMGAPC

5.11.1 Identification
Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Emergency start function ESMGAPC ESTART ESTART

5.11.2 Function block

GUID-3DFAC950-3ECE-49B5-8D3D-B33DFE3B847B V1 EN

Figure 490: Function block

5.11.3 Functionality
An emergency condition can arise in cases where the motor needs to be started despite
knowing that this can increase the temperature above limits or cause a thermal
overload or some other condition that can damage the motor. The emergency start
function ESMGAPC allows motor startups during such emergency conditions.
ESMGAPC forces the IED to allow the restarting of the motor and keeps the trip limits
10 percent higher if the RTD temperature sensors are used. After the emergency input
is activated, the motor can be started normally. ESMGAPC does not actually restart
the motor.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and
resets timers.

5.11.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

630 series 977

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

The operation of the emergency start function can be described using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-3B7AF933-9E24-48E7-98C1-0E4FBD9C7BA8 V1 EN

Figure 491: Functional module diagram

Standstill detector
The module detects if the motor is in a standstill condition. The standstill condition
can be detected based on the phase current values. If all three phase currents are below
the set value of Motor standstill A, the motor is considered to be in a standstill
condition.

Timer
The timer is a fixed 10-minute timer that is activated when the ST_EMERG_RQ input
is set high. The activation of the ST_EMERG_RQ input activates the
ST_EMERG_ENA output, provided that the motor is in a standstill condition. The
ST_EMERG_ENA output remains active for 10 minutes or as long as the
ST_EMERG_RQ input is high, whichever takes longer.

The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the function and also resets the timer.

The function also provides the ST_EMERG_ENA output change date and time,
T_ST_EMERG. The information is available in the monitored data view.

5.11.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

5.11.6 Application
If the motor needs to be started in an emergency condition at the risk of damaging the
motor, all the external restart inhibits are ignored, allowing the motor to be restarted.
Furthermore, if the calculated thermal level is higher than the restart inhibit level at an
emergency start condition, the calculated thermal level is set slightly below the restart
inhibit level. Also, if the register value of the cumulative startup time counter exceeds

978 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 5
Protection related functions

the restart inhibit level, the value is set slightly below the restart disable value to allow
at least one motor startup. If RTDs are used, the set trip values are increased by 10
percent.

The activation of the ST_EMERG_RQ digital input allows to perform emergency start.
The IED is forced to a state which allows the restart of motor, and the operator can now
restart the motor. If RTDs are used, the operator should make sure that the RTD
temperatures are low enough to restore the RTD trip level back to normal before the
emergency start is deactivated. A new emergency start cannot be made until the 10
minute time-out has passed or until the emergency start is released, whichever takes
longer.

The last change of the emergency start output signal is recorded.

5.11.7 Signals
Table 938: ESMGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal to block the function.
ST_EMERG_RQ BOOLEAN 0 Input emergency start signal from the operator.

Table 939: ESMGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
ST_EMERG_ENA BOOLEAN Emergency start signal

5.11.8 Settings
Table 940: ESMGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

Table 941: ESMGAPC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Motor standstill A 0.05 - 0.20 pu 0.01 0.12 Current limit to check for motor standstill
condition

630 series 979

Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRS756508 F
Protection related functions

5.11.9 Measured values

Table 942: ESMGAPC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_A REAL 0.0 TrueRMS motor current for phase A.
I_RMS_B REAL 0.0 TrueRMS motor current for phase B.
I_RMS_C REAL 0.0 TrueRMS motor current for phase C.
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block signal to block the function.
ST_EMERG_RQ BOOLEAN 0 Input emergency start signal from the operator.

5.11.10 Monitored data

Table 943: ESMGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ST_EMERG_ENA BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Emergency start signal
1=TRUE
T_ST_EMERG INTEGER - - Time when emergency
start output signal was
last activated /
deactivated

5.11.11 Technical data

Table 944: ESMGAPC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

980 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

Section 6 Supervision functions

6.1 Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR

6.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR TCS TCM

6.1.2 Function block

A071006 V2 EN

Figure 492: Function block

6.1.3 Functionality
The trip circuit supervision function TCSSCBR is designed to supervise the control
circuit of the circuit breaker. The invalidity of a control circuit is detected by using a
dedicated output contact that contains the supervision functionality. The failure of a
circuit is reported to the TCSSCBR function by connecting the dedicated binary input
HW channel of the PSM module to the corresponding TCSSCBR function block
instance in the IED configuration.

The function starts and operates when TCS detects a trip circuit failure. The operating
time characteristic for the function is DT. The function operates after a predefined
operating time and resets when the fault disappears.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

output or the timer itself, if desired.

6.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of trip circuit supervision can be described by using a module diagram.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 981

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

A080006 V2 EN

Figure 493: Functional module diagram

Timer
Once activated, the timer runs until the set value of Operate delay time has elapsed.
The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the
maximum time value, the ALARM output is activated. If a drop-off situation occurs
during the operate time up counting, the fixed 0.5 s reset timer is activated. After that
time, the operation timer is reset.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates the ALARM output and resets the internal timers. The
operation timer counting can be frozen to the prevailing value by activating the input
signal FR_TIMER.

6.1.5 Application
TCSSCBR detects faults in the electrical control circuit of the circuit breaker. The
function can supervise both open and closed coil circuits. This kind of supervision is
necessary to find out the vitality of the control circuits continuously.

Figure 494 shows an application of the trip-circuit supervision function use. The best
solution is to connect an external Rext shunt resistor in parallel with the circuit breaker
internal contact as shown with the dashed line. This way, although the circuit breaker
internal contact is open, TCS can see the trip circuit through Rext. The Rext resistor
should have such a resistance that the current through the circuit breaker coil remains
small, that is, it does not harm or overload the circuit breaker's trip coil if the trip is
latched or locked-out.

982 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

IS: Constant current generator.

Current level ~ 1,0 mA (Ic)
V: Transient Voltage Suppressor
Breakdown Voltage 380 to 400 VDC

(+)
PSM
PO1

TCS1 1
V
Ic
2
IS
HW
SW

TCS_BOx

TCSSCBR
R ext
TCS_STATE ALARM
CB open BLOCK
FR_TIMER

Rs

(-)
GUID-2A356F59-C6BA-48B2-A3CC-01FE9651E134 V2 EN

Figure 494: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision with an external

resistor. When the CB is open, the TCSSCBR blocking is not required
when the external resistor (Rext) is used.

If TCS is required only in a closed position, the external shunt resistance can be
omitted. When the circuit breaker is in the open position, TCS sees the situation as a
faulty circuit. One way to avoid TCS operation in this situation would be to block the
supervision function whenever the circuit breaker is open.

Trip circuit supervision and other trip contacts

It is typical that the trip circuit contains more than one trip contact in parallel, for
example in transformer feeders where the trip of a Buchholz relay is connected in
parallel with the feeder terminal and other relays involved.

630 series 983

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

GUID-7264738C-F9D7-48F0-B6FC-F85FD10D5B84 V1 EN

Figure 495: Constant test current flow in parallel trip contacts and trip-circuit
supervision

Several trip circuit supervision functions parallel in circuit

Not only the trip circuit often have parallel trip contacts, it is also possible that the
circuit has multiple TCS circuits in parallel. Each TCS circuit causes its own
supervising current to flow through the monitored coil and the actual coil current is a
sum of all TCS currents. This must be taken into consideration when determining the
resistance of Rext.

Setting the TCS function in a protection IED "Off" does not affect the
supervising current injection.

Trip circuit supervision with auxiliary relays

Many retrofit projects are carried out partially, that is, the old electromechanical
relays are replaced with new ones but the circuit breaker is not replaced. This creates
a problem that the coil current of an old type circuit breaker can be too high for the
protection IED trip contact to break.

The circuit breaker coil current is normally cut by an internal contact of the circuit
breaker. In case of a circuit breaker failure, there is a risk that the protection IED trip
contact is destroyed since the contact is obliged to disconnect high level of
electromagnetic energy accumulated in the trip coil.

An auxiliary relay can be used between the protection IED trip contact and the circuit
breaker coil. This way the breaking capacity question is solved, but the TCS circuit in
the protection IED monitors the healthy auxiliary relay coil, not the circuit breaker
coil. The separate trip circuit supervision relay is applicable for this to supervise the
trip coil of the circuit breaker.

984 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

Dimensioning of the external resistor

Under normal operating conditions, the applied external voltage is divided between
the relay’s internal circuit and the external trip circuit so that at the minimum 10 V
(3...10 V) remains over the relay’s internal circuit. Should the external circuit’s
resistance be too high or the internal circuit’s too low, for example due to welded relay
contacts, the fault is detected.

Mathematically, the operation condition can be expressed as:

U c − ( Rext + Rs ) × I c ≥ 10V DC
GUID-34BDFCA2-E72E-4602-9F0D-281CDDF0A93A V1 EN (Equation 152)

Uc Operating voltage over the supervised trip circuit

Ic Measuring current through the trip circuit, appr. 1.0 mA (0.85...1.20 mA)

Rext external shunt resistance

Rs trip coil resistance

If the external shunt resistance is used, it has to be calculated not to interfere with the
functionality of the supervision or the trip coil. Too high a resistance causes too high
a voltage drop, jeopardizing the requirement of at least 10 V over the internal circuit,
while a resistance too low can enable false operations of the trip coil.
Table 945: Values recommended for the external resistor Rext

Operating voltage Uc Shunt resistor Rext

48 V DC 10 kΩ, 5 W
60 V DC 22 kΩ, 5 W
110...130 V DC 33 kΩ, 5 W
220...250 V DC 68 kΩ, 5 W

Due to the requirement that the voltage over the TCS contact must be 10 V or higher,
the correct operation is not guaranteed with auxiliary operating voltages lower than 48
V DC because of the voltage drop in Rext and the operating coil or even voltage drop
of the feeding auxiliary voltage system which can cause too low voltage values over
the TCS contact. In this case, erroneous alarming can occur.

At lower (<48 V DC) auxiliary circuit operating voltages, it is recommended to use the
circuit breaker position to block unintentional operation of TCS. The use of the
position indication is described earlier in this chapter.

630 series 985

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

6.1.6 Signals
Table 946: TCSSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
TCS_STATE BOOLEAN 0 Trip circuit supervision from TCS hardware circuit
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocking signal of the trip circuit supervision
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Blocking signal to freeze operating counter

Table 947: TCSSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Trip circuit fault indication

6.1.7 Settings
Table 948: TCSSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

Table 949: TCSSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operate delay time 0.020 - 300.000 s 0.001 3.000 Operate Delay Time

6.1.8 Measured values

Table 950: TCSSCBR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
TCS_STATE BOOLEAN 0 Trip circuit supervision from TCS hardware circuit
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocking signal of the trip circuit supervision
FR_TIMER BOOLEAN 0 Blocking signal to freeze operating counter

6.1.9 Monitored data

Table 951: TCSSCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Trip circuit fault indication
1=TRUE

986 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

6.1.10 Technical data

Table 952: TCSSCBR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±40 ms

6.2 Current circuit supervision CCRDIF

6.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCRDIF MCS 3I MCS 3I

6.2.2 Function block

GUID-DB608E0F-5793-4D82-8744-B13C20BC0A63 V1 EN

Figure 496: Function block

6.2.3 Functionality
The current circuit supervision function CCRDIF is used for monitoring current
transformer secondary circuits.

CCRDIF calculates internally the sum of phase currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and
compares the sum against the measured single reference current (I_REF). The
reference current must originate from other three-phase CT cores than the phase
currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and it is to be externally summated, that is, outside the
IED.

CCRDIF detects a fault in the measurement circuit and issues an alarm or blocks the
protection functions to avoid unwanted tripping.

It must be remembered that the blocking of protection functions at an occurring open

CT circuit means that the situation remains unchanged and extremely high voltages
stress the secondary circuit.

6.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

630 series 987

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

The operation of current circuit supervision can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-03189A4C-F326-4CD4-9467-E60A773B00DC V1 EN

Figure 497: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P is used for feeding the
necessary analog signals to the function.

Differential current monitoring

Differential current monitoring supervises the difference between the summed phase
currents I_A, I_B and I_C and the reference current I_REF.

The current operating characteristics can be selected with the Start value setting.
When the highest phase current is less than 1.0 × In, the differential current limit is
defined with Start value. When the highest phase current is more than 1.0 × In, the
differential current limit is calculated with the formula:
MAX ( I _ A, I _ B, I _ C ) × Start value
GUID-A0C500CA-4A1A-44AA-AC14-4540676DD8CB V3 EN (Equation 153)

The differential current is limited to 1.0 × In.

GUID-DC279F84-19B8-4FCB-A79A-2461C047F1B2 V1 EN

Figure 498: CCRDIF operating characteristics

988 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

When the differential current I_DIFF is in the operating region, the FAIL output is
activated.

The function is internally blocked if any phase current is higher than the set Max
operate current. When the internal blocking activates, the FAIL output is deactivated
immediately. The internal blocking is used for avoiding false operation during a fault
situation when the current transformers are saturated due to high fault currents.

The value of the differential current is available in the monitored data view on the
LHMI or through other communication tools. The value is calculated with the
formula:

I _ DIFF = I _ A + I _ B + I _ C − I _ REF
GUID-9CC931FA-0637-4FF8-85D4-6F461BD996A9 V2 EN (Equation 154)

The Start value setting is given in units of × In of the phase current transformer. The
possible difference in the phase and reference current transformer ratios is internally
compensated by scaling I_REF with the value derived from the Primary current
setting values. These setting parameters can be found in the Basic functions section.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the FAIL output immediately.

Timer
The timer is activated with the FAIL signal. The ALARM output is activated after a
fixed 200 ms delay. FAIL needs to be active during the delay.

When the internal blocking is activated, the FAIL output deactivates immediately,
however the ALARM output deactivates after a fixed delay of three seconds.

The function resets when the differential current is below start value
and highest phase current is more than five percent of the nominal
current (0.05 × In).

If the current falls to zero when FAIL or ALARM outputs are active, then deactivation
of FAIL and ALARM outputs are prevented.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the ALARM output.

6.2.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

630 series 989

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

6.2.6 Application
Open or short-circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation in
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative
sequence current functions. When currents from two independent three-phase sets of
CTs or CT cores measuring the same primary currents are available, reliable current
circuit supervision can be arranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. When
an error in any CT circuit is detected, the protection functions concerned can be
blocked and an alarm given.

In case of high currents, the unequal transient saturation of CT cores with a different
remanence or saturation factor may result in differences in the secondary currents
from the two CT cores. Unwanted blocking of protection functions during the
transient stage must then be avoided.

The supervision function must be sensitive and have a short operate time in order to
prevent unwanted tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical protections in case of
faulty CT secondary circuits.

Open CT circuits create extremely high voltages in the circuits, which

may damage the insulation and cause further problems. This must be
taken into consideration especially when the protection functions are
blocked.

When the reference current is not connected to the IED, the function
should be turned off. Otherwise, the FAIL output is activated when
unbalance occurs in the phase currents even if there was nothing
wrong with the measurement circuit.

Reference current measured with core-balanced current transformer

The function compares the sum of phase currents to the current measured with the
core-balanced CT.

990 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

GUID-EA681A69-B377-4553-AE17-E6E877D821CB V1 EN

Figure 499: Connection diagram for reference current measurement with core-
balanced current transformer

Current measurement with two independent three-phase sets of CT

cores
Figure 500 and Figure 501 show diagrams of connections where the reference current
is measured with two independent three-phase sets of CT cores.

630 series 991

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

GUID-FA4A5A77-7670-4D05-BCF2-30276444B891 V1 EN

Figure 500: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of
three-phase current transformer protection cores

When using the measurement core for reference current

measurement, it should be noted that the saturation level of the
measurement core is much lower than with the protection core. This
should be taken into account when setting the current circuit
supervision function.

992 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

GUID-DA69204E-AA14-4907-9295-D66C0DCD03F4 V1 EN

Figure 501: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of
three-phase current transformer cores (protection and
measurement)

Example of incorrect connection

The currents must be measured with two independent cores, that is, the phase currents
must be measured with a different core than the reference current. A connection
diagram shows an example of a case where the phase currents and the reference
currents are measured from the same core.

630 series 993

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

GUID-215E4836-FC10-4AEB-9C54-8E7D6734B941 V1 EN

Figure 502: Example of incorrect reference current connection

6.2.7 Signals
Table 953: CCRDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 954: CCRDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure

6.2.8 Settings
Table 955: CCRDIF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Start value 0.05 - 2.00 pu 0.01 0.20 Minimum operate current differential level

994 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

Table 956: CCRDIF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Max operate current 0.05 - 5.00 pu 0.01 1.50 Block of the function at high phase current

6.2.9 Measured values

Table 957: CCRDIF Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

6.2.10 Monitored data

Table 958: CCRDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FAIL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Detection of current
1=TRUE circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm for current circuit
1=TRUE failure

6.2.11 Technical data

Table 959: CCRDIF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time1) <30 ms

1) Including the delay of the output contact

6.3 Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF

6.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF FUSEF 60

630 series 995

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

6.3.2 Function block

GUID-684B4209-8418-41F0-928D-64FE3ACF9321 V1 EN

Figure 503: Function block

6.3.3 Functionality
The fuse failure supervision function SEQRFUF is used to block the voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and IED to avoid misoperations of the voltage protection functions.

SEQRFUF has two algorithms, a negative sequence-based algorithm and a delta

current and delta voltage algorithm.

A criterion based on the delta current and the delta voltage measurements can be
activated to detect three-phase fuse failures which usually are more associated with
the voltage transformer switching during station operations.

6.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the fuse failure supervision function can be described with a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

996 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

GUID-94AAAC84-143B-494C-8207-F9B0401CE7EC V2 EN

Figure 504: Functional module diagram

Negative phase-sequence criterion

A fuse failure based on negative-sequence criterion is detected if the measured
negative-sequence voltage exceeds the set Neg Seq voltage Lev value and the
measured negative-sequence current is below the set Neg Seq current Lev value. The
detected fuse failure is reported to the decision logic module.

Voltage check
The phase voltage magnitude is checked when deciding whether the fuse failure is a
three-, two- or a single-phase fault.

The module makes a phase-specific comparison between each voltage input and the
Seal in voltage setting. If the input voltage is lower than the setting, the corresponding
phase is reported to the decision logic module.

Dead-line detection
The dead-line detection function is activated from the dead-line condition when the
voltage and current in at least one phase are below the respective set values of Voltage
dead Lin Val and Current dead Lin Val. This prevents the blocking of the impedance
protection by fuse failure detection during the dead-line condition. This also occurs

630 series 997

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

during single pole autoreclosing. The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead-line
condition after the line energization to prevent the blocking of the impedance
protection for unequal pole closing.

Current and voltage delta criterion

The delta function can be activated by setting the Change rate enable parameter to
"Yes". Once the function is activated, it operates in parallel with the negative
sequence-based algorithm. The current and voltage are continuously measured in all
three phases for calculations.
• Change of voltage dU/dt
• Change of current dI/dt

The calculated delta quantities are compared to the respective set values of the Current
change rate and Voltage change rate settings.

The delta current and delta voltage algorithms detect a fuse failure if there is a
sufficient negative change in the voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in the
current amplitude in each phase separately. This is performed when the circuit breaker
is closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is connected to the
CB_CLOSED input.

There are two conditions for activating the current and voltage delta function.
• The magnitude of dU/dt exceeds the corresponding value of the Voltage change
rate setting and the magnitude of dI/dt is below the value of the Current change
rate setting in any phase at the same time due to the closure of the circuit breaker
(CB_CLOSED = TRUE).
• The magnitude of dU/dt exceeds the value of the Voltage change rate setting and
the magnitude of dI/dt is below the Current change rate setting in any phase at the
same time since the magnitude of the phase current in the same phase exceeds the
Min Op current delta setting.

The first condition requires the delta criterion to be fulfilled in any phase at the same
time as the circuit breaker is closed. Opening the circuit breaker at one end and
energizing the line from the other end onto a fault could lead to an improper operation
of SEQRFUF with an open breaker. If this is considered to be an important
disadvantage, the CB_CLOSED input is to be connected to FALSE. This way, only the
second criterion can activate the delta function

The second condition requires the delta criterion to be fulfilled in one phase together
with high current for the same phase. The measured phase current is used to reduce the
risk of a false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage
drop in the system (not caused by the fuse failure) is not followed by a current change
and a false fuse failure can occur. To prevent this, the minimum phase current criterion
is checked.

The fuse failure detection is active until the voltages return above the Min Op voltage
delta setting. If a voltage in a phase is below the Min Op voltage delta setting, a new

998 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

fuse failure detection for that phase is not possible until the voltage returns above the
setting value.

Decision logic
The fuse failure detection outputs FUSEF_U and FUSEF_3PH are controlled
according to the detection criteria or external signals.
Table 960: Fuse failure output control
Fuse failure detection criterion Conditions and function response
Negative sequence criterion If a fuse failure is detected based on the negative
sequence criterion, the FUSEF_U output is
activated.
The FUSEF_Z output is also activated if the
internal dead-line detection is not activated at the
same time.
If the fuse failure detection is active for more than
five seconds and at the same time all the phase
voltage values are below the set value of the Seal
in voltage setting with Enable seal in turned to
"True", the function activates the FUSE_3PH
output signal.
The FUSEF_U output signal is also activated if all
the phase voltages are above the Seal in voltage
setting for more than 60 seconds and at the same
time the negative sequence voltage is above Neg
Seq voltage Lev for more than 5 seconds, all the
phase currents are below the Current dead Lin Val
setting and the circuit breaker is closed, that
is,CB_CLOSED is TRUE.

Current and voltage delta function criterion If the current and voltage delta criterion detects a
fuse failure condition, but all the voltages are not
below the Seal in voltage setting, only the
FUSEF_U output is activated.
The FUSEF_Z output is also activated if the
internal dead-line detection is not activated at the
same time.
If the fuse failure detection is active for more than
five seconds and at the same time all the phase
voltage values are below the set value of the Seal
in voltage setting with Enable seal in turned to
"True", the function activates the FUSE_3PH
output signal.
External fuse failure detection The MINCB_OPEN input signal is supposed to be
connected through an IED binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker
protecting the VT secondary circuit.
The MINCB_OPEN signal sets the FUSEF_U and
FUSEF_Z output signals to block all the voltage-
related functions when MCB is in the open state.
The DISCON_OPEN input signal is supposed to be
connected through an IED binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The
DISCON_OPEN signal sets the FUSEF_U output
signal to block the voltage-related functions when
the line disconnector is in the open state.

630 series 999

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

6.3.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

6.3.6 Application
Some protection functions operate on the basis of the measured voltage value in the
IED point. These functions can fail if there is a fault in the measuring circuits between
the voltage transformers and the IED.

A fault in the voltage measuring circuit is referred to as a fuse failure. This term is
misleading since a blown fuse is just one of the many possible reasons for a broken
circuit. Since incorrectly measured voltage can result in a faulty operation of some of
the protection functions, it is important to detect the fuse failures. A fast fuse failure
detection is one of the means to block voltage-based functions before they operate.

GUID-E086FC34-27C8-4722-8A8D-A573BA7AC878 V1 EN

Figure 505: Fault in a circuit from the voltage transformer to the IED

A fuse failure occurs due to blown fuses, broken wires or intended substation
operations. The negative sequence component-based function can be used to detect
different types of single-phase or two-phase fuse failures. However, at least one of the
three circuits from the voltage transformers must not be broken. The supporting delta-
based function can also detect a fuse failure due to three-phase interruptions.

In the negative sequence component-based part of the function, a fuse failure is

detected by comparing the calculated value of the negative sequence component
voltage to the negative sequence component current. The sequence entities are
calculated from the measured current and voltage data for all three phases. The
purpose of this function is to block voltage-dependent functions when a fuse failure is

1000 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

detected. Since the voltage dependence differs between these functions, SEQRFUF
has two outputs for this purpose.

Other functions, such as the impedance-based functions, can be allowed to operate

despite a fuse failure, for example when the fuse failure occurs during the dead-line
condition. The FUSEF_Z output is based on more restricted criteria and intended to
block these functions.

6.3.7 Signals
Table 961: SEQRFUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - 3-phase current group
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - 3-phase voltage group
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ON_TR BOOLEAN 0 Block operation of function. Fuse failure is not
detected
CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when curcuit breaker is closed
DISCON_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
MINCB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected voltage
circuit

Table 962: SEQRFUF Output signals

Name Type Description
FUSEF_3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
FUSEF_U BOOLEAN General start of function
FUSEF_Z BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function

6.3.8 Settings
Table 963: SEQRFUF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

630 series 1001

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

Table 964: SEQRFUF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Neg Seq current Lev 0.10 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element
Neg Seq voltage Lev 0.10 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.30 Operate level of neg seq over-voltage
element
Current change rate 0.10 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Operate level of change in phase current
Voltage change rate 0.50 - 0.90 pu 0.01 0.60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
Min Op voltage delta 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.70 Minimum operate level of phase voltage
for delta calculation
Min Op current delta 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Minimum operate level of phase current
for delta calculation
Current dead Lin Val 0.05 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.05 Operate level for open phase current
detection
Voltage dead Lin Val 0.10 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection
Seal in voltage 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage
Enable seal in No - - Yes Enabling seal in functionality
Yes
Change rate enable No - - No Enabling operation of change based
Yes function

6.3.9 Monitored data

Table 965: SEQRFUF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FUSEF_3PH BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Three-phase start of
1=TRUE function
FUSEF_U BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - General start of function
1=TRUE
FUSEF_Z BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start of current and
1=TRUE voltage controlled
function

1002 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

6.3.10 Technical data

Table 966: SEQRFUF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × In

Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Operate time1) • NPS function UFault = 1.1 × set Neg Typically 35 ms (±15
Seq voltage Lev ms)
UFault = 5.0 × set Neg Typically 25 ms (±15
Seq voltage Lev ms)

• Delta function ΔU = 1.1 × set Voltage Typically 35 ms (±15

change rate ms)
ΔU = 2.0 × set Voltage Typically 28 ms (±15
change rate ms)

1) Includes the delay of the signal output contact, fn = 50 Hz, fault voltage with nominal frequency injected
from random phase angle

6.4 Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT

6.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT U<> U<>

6.4.2 Function block

GUID-CB57D54A-0413-4A02-AF8C-C745B2CB8621 V1 EN

Figure 506: Function block

6.4.3 Functionality
The station battery supervision function SPVNZBAT is used for monitoring battery
terminal voltage.

SPVNZBAT activates the start and alarm outputs when the battery terminal voltage
exceeds the set upper limit or drops below the set lower limit. A time delay for the
overvoltage and undervoltage alarms can be set according to definite time
characteristics.

630 series 1003

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

In the definite time (DT) mode, SPVNZBAT operates after a predefined operate time
and resets when the battery undervoltage or overvoltage condition disappears.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs,

timers or the function itself, if desired.

6.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The function execution requires that at least one of the function

outputs is connected in configuration.

The operation of the station battery supervision function can be described by using a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-800F5217-5187-4686-8C71-EDB4288A849E V1 EN

Figure 507: Functional module diagram

The battery rated voltage is set with the Battery voltage Rtg setting. The value of the
Low battery value and High battery value settings are given in relative per unit to the
Battery voltage Rtg setting.

The battery voltage to be connected to the input U_BATT_IN is available as analog

Input BATTAMPL from power source (PSM) hardware module.

Level detector 1
The level detector compares the battery voltage U_BATT_IN to the set value of the
Low battery value setting. If the value of U_BATT_IN input drops below the value of
the Low battery value setting, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer
1 module.

The measured voltage between the battery terminals U_BATT is available in

monitored data view.

Level detector 2
The level detector compares the battery voltage U_BATT_IN to the set value of the
High battery value setting. If the value of U_BATT_IN exceeds the set value of the

1004 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

High battery value setting, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer 2
module.

Timer 1
Once activated, the timer activates the ST_ULOW output for undervoltage condition.
When the operate timer has reached the value set by the Alarm delay time setting, the
AL_ULOW output is activated. If the voltage returns to normal value before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset
delay time, the operate timer resets and the ST_ULOW output is deactivated.

The activation of the BLOCK input resets the timer and deactivates the ST_ULOW and
AL_ULOW outputs. The activation of BLK_ST and BLK_AL blocks the individual
start and alarm outputs respectively.

Timer 2
Once activated, the timer activates ST_UHIGH for overvoltage condition. When the
operate timer has reached the value set by the Alarm delay time setting, the
AL_UHIGH output is activated. If the voltage returns to normal value before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by
Reset delay time, the operate timer resets and the ST_UHIGH output is deactivated.

The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the timer and deactivates the
ST_UHIGH and AL_UHIGH outputs. The activation of BLK_ST and BLK_AL blocks
the individual alarm and operate outputs respectively.

6.4.5 Application
Usually, the load on the DC system is a constant resistance load, for example, lamps,
LEDs, electronic instruments and electromagnetic contactors in a steady state
condition. A transient RL load exists when breakers are tripped or closed.

The battery voltage has to be continuously monitored as the batteries can withstand
moderate overvoltage and undervoltage only for a short period of time.
• If the battery is subjected to a prolonged or frequent overvoltage, it leads to the
ageing of the battery, which may lead to the earlier failure of the battery. The other
occurrences may be the thermal runaway, generation of heat or increased amount
of hydrogen gas and the depletion of fluid in case of valve regulated batteries.

• If the value of the charging voltage drops below the minimum recommended float
voltage of the battery, the battery does not receive sufficient charging current to
offset internal losses, resulting in a gradual loss of capacity.
• If a lead acid battery is subjected to a continuous undervoltage, heavy
sulfation occurs on the plates, which leads to the loss of the battery capacity.

630 series 1005

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

6.4.6 Signals
Table 967: SPVNZBAT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_BATT_IN REAL 0.00 Battery terminal voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_AL BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the alarm signals
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the start signals

Table 968: SPVNZBAT Output signals

Name Type Description
AL_ULOW BOOLEAN Alarm when voltage has been below lower limit for
a set time
AL_UHIGH BOOLEAN Alarm when voltage has exceeded higher limit for a
set time
ST_ULOW BOOLEAN Start signal when battery voltage drops below
lower limit
ST_UHIGH BOOLEAN Start signal when battery voltage exceeds upper
limit

6.4.7 Settings
Table 969: SPVNZBAT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
Battery voltage Rtg 20.00 - 250.00 V 1.00 110.00 Battery rated voltage
Low battery value 0.60 - 1.40 pu 0.01 0.70 Lower limit for the battery terminal voltage
High battery value 0.60 - 1.40 pu 0.01 1.20 Upper limit for the battery terminal voltage
Alarm delay time 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Delay time for alarm

Table 970: SPVNZBAT Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reset delay time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time provided to reset the timers

1006 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

6.4.8 Measured values

Table 971: SPVNZBAT Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U_BATT_IN REAL 0.00 Battery terminal voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_AL BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the alarm signals
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the start signals

6.4.9 Monitored Data

Table 972: SPVNZBAT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
U_BATT REAL - kV Service value of the
battery terminal voltage
AL_ULOW BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm when voltage has
1=TRUE been below lower limit for
a set time
AL_UHIGH BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm when voltage has
1=TRUE exceeded higher limit for
a set time
ST_ULOW BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal when battery
1=TRUE voltage drops below
lower limit
ST_UHIGH BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start signal when battery
1=TRUE voltage exceeds upper
limit

6.4.10 Technical data

Table 973: SPVNZBAT Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy ±1.0% of the set value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±40 ms

6.5 Tap position TPOSSLTC

6.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tap position TPOSSLTC TPOSM 84M

630 series 1007

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

6.5.2 Function block

GUID-C04491F3-1BA9-4ECB-BA1C-1A29006172DA V1 EN

Figure 508: Function block

6.5.3 Functionality
The binary converter function TPOSSLTC is used for converting binary-coded tap
position inputs to their decimal equivalent when a tap position indication is received
from the I/O board with the help of the coded binary inputs. Optionally, the tap
position can be read directly from the RTD input.

There are three user-selectable conversion modes available for the 7–bit binary inputs
where MSB is used as the SIGN bit: the natural binary-coded boolean input to the
signed integer output, binary coded decimal BCD input to the signed integer output
and binary reflected GRAY coded input to the signed integer output.

6.5.4 Operation principle

The operation of tap position indication function can be described by using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-3A6C1CB7-9E2F-449F-9CFD-528DCB418834 V1 EN

Figure 509: Functional module diagram

Tap position decoder

The function has four alternative user selectable operation modes: “BIN,” “BCD,”
“GRAY” and “Input TAPPOS”. The operation mode is selected with the Operation

1008 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

mode parameter. Each operation mode can be used to convert the maximum of a 6–bit
coded input to an 8–bit signed short integer output. For less than the 6–bit input
(usually 19 positions with 5 bits when the BCD coding is used), the rest of the bits can
be set to FALSE (0).

The operation mode “BIN” is selected when the natural binary coding is used for
showing the position of the transformer tap changer. The basic principle of the natural
binary coding is to calculate the sum of the bits set to TRUE (1). LSB has the factor
1. Each following bit has the previous factor multiplied by 2. This is also called dual
coding.

The operation mode “BCD” is selected when the binary-coded decimal coding is used
for showing the position of the transformer tap changer. The basic principle of the
binary coded decimal coding is to calculate the sum of the bits set to TRUE (1). The
four bits nibble (BI3...BI0) have a typical factor to the natural binary coding. The sum
of the values should not be more than 9. If the nibble sum is greater than 9, the tap
position validity output TAP_POS_IV is set to FALSE (0).

The operation mode “GRAY” is selected when the binary-reflected Gray coding is
used for showing the position of the transformer tap changer. The basic principle of
the Gray coding is that only one actual bit changes value with consecutive numbers.
This function is based on the common binary-reflected Gray code, which is used with
some tap changers. Changing the bit closest to the right side bit gives a new pattern.

An additional separate input, SIGN_BIT, can be used for negative values. If the
values are positive, the input should be set to FALSE (0). If SIGN_BIT is set to TRUE
(1) making the number negative, the remaining bits are identical to those of the coded
positive number.

The tap position validity output TAP_POS_IV is set to TRUE (1) in all valid cases.
The output is set to FALSE (0) in invalid combinations in the binary inputs. For
example, when the “BCD” mode is selected and the input binary combination is
“0001101”, TAP_POS_IV is set to FALSE (0) and the TAP_POS output is in this
case “9”. For negative values, when SIGN_BIT is set to TRUE (1) and the input
binary combination is “1011011”, TAP_POS_IV is set to FALSE (0) and the
TAP_POS output is in this case “-19”.

When Operation mode is set to “Input TAPPOS” (4), the RTD card output REAL
value is used for showing the position of the transformer tap changer. The invalidity
information from the RTD card is connected through the TAPPOS_IV input. The
TAP_POS and TAP_POS_IV outputs are then set according to the inputs from RTD.
The tap position value is also converted from REAL to INT according to rounding
rules.

630 series 1009

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

Table 974: Truth table of the decoding modes

Inputs TAP_POS outputs
SIGN_ BI5 BI4 BI3 BI2 BI1 BI0 BIN BCD GRAY
BIT

... ... ... ... ... ... ...

1 0 0 0 0 1 1 —3 —3 —3
1 0 0 0 0 1 0 —2 —2 —2
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 —1 —1 —1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 2 3
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3 2
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 4 7
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 5 6
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 6 4
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 7 5
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 8 15
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 9 14
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 9 12
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 11 9 13
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 12 9 8
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 13 9 9
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 14 9 11
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 15 9 10
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 16 10 31
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 17 11 30
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 18 12 28
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 19 13 29
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 20 14 24
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 21 15 25
0 0 1 0 1 1 0 22 16 27
0 0 1 0 1 1 1 23 17 26
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 24 18 16
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 25 19 17
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 26 19 19
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 27 19 18
0 0 1 1 1 0 0 28 19 23
0 0 1 1 1 0 1 29 19 22
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 30 19 20
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 31 19 21
Table continues on next page

1010 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

Inputs TAP_POS outputs

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 32 20 63
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 33 21 62
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 34 22 60
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 35 23 61
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 36 24 56
... ... ... ... ... ... ...

6.5.5 Application
TPOSSLTC provides tap position information for other functions as a signed integer
value that can be fed to the tap position input.

The position information of the tap changer can be coded in various methods for many
applications, for example, the differential protection algorithms. In this function, the
binary inputs in the transformer terminal connector are used as inputs to the function.
The coding method can be chosen by setting the mode parameter. The available
coding methods are BCD, Gray and Natural binary coding. Since the number of binary
inputs is limited to seven, the coding functions are limited to seven bits including the
sign bit and thus the six bits are used in the coding functions. The position limits for
the tap positions at BCD, Gray and Natural binary coding are ±39, ±63 and ±63
respectively.

In this example, the transformer tap changer position indication is wired as a mA

signal from the corresponding measuring transducer. The position indication is
connected to RTD analog input 1 (RTD_3.AI1). The tap changer operating range
from the minimum to maximum turns of the tap and a corresponding mA signal for the
tap position are set in HW configuration for RTD_3. When there is a wired connection
to the TAP_POS connector, the corresponding tap changer position is seen as the
TAP_POS output value that is fed to other functions, for example, OLATCC1. When
there is no wired connection to the TAP_POS connector, the binary inputs are
expected to be used for the tap changer position information. The invalidity
information from the RTD card is connected through the TAPPOS_IV input.

GUID-0E0ED6D1-15F8-43C9-A086-744AE5820166 V2 EN

Figure 510: RTD/analog input configuration example

630 series 1011

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

6.5.6 Signals
Table 975: TPOSSLTC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BI0 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B0
BI1 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B1
BI2 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B2
BI3 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B3
BI4 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B4
BI5 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B5
SIGN_BIT BOOLEAN 0 Input sign as TRUE for negative values
TAPPOS REAL 0 Input tap position real value from RTD
TAPPOS_IV BOOLEAN 0 TAPPOS invalidity status from RTD card

Table 976: TPOSSLTC Output signals

Name Type Description
TAP_POS INTEGER Tap position value as integer
TAP_POS_IV BOOLEAN TAP_POS invalidity status

6.5.7 Settings
Table 977: TPOSSLTC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On / Off
On
Operation mode BIN - - BCD Operation mode seletion
BCD
Gray
Input TAPPOS

6.5.8 Measured values

Table 978: TPOSSLTC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BI0 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B0
BI1 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B1
BI2 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B2
BI3 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B3
BI4 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B4
BI5 BOOLEAN 0 Input bit B5
Table continues on next page

1012 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

Name Type Default Description

SIGN_BIT BOOLEAN 0 Input sign as TRUE for negative values
TAPPOS REAL 0 Input tap position real value from RTD
TAPPOS_IV BOOLEAN 0 TAPPOS invalidity status from RTD card

6.5.9 Monitored data

Table 979: TPOSSLTC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TAP_POS INTEGER - - Tap position value as
integer
TAP_POS_IV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - TAP_POS invalidity
1=TRUE status

6.5.10 Technical data

Table 980: TPOSSLTC Technical data
Descrpition Value
Response time for binary inputs Typically 100 ms

6.6 Runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT

6.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Runtime counter for machines and MDSOPT OPTS OPTM
devices

6.6.2 Function block

GUID-10C5408F-9B5C-43CA-90C5-6305B47DB6D5 V1 EN

Figure 511: Function block

630 series 1013

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

6.6.3 Functionality
The runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT calculates and presents the
accumulated operation time of a machine or device as the output. The unit of time for
accumulation is hour. The function generates a WARNING and an ALARM when the
accumulated operation time exceeds the set limits. It utilizes a binary input to indicate
the active operation condition.

The accumulated operation time is one of the parameters for scheduling a service on
the equipment like motors. It indicates the use of the machine and hence the
mechanical wear and tear. Generally, the equipment manufacturers provide a
maintenance schedule based on the number of hours of service.

6.6.4 Operation principle

The Operation setting is used to enable or disable the function. When "On" is selected,
the function is enabled and when "Off" is selected, the function is disabled.

The operation of the generic runtime counter for machines and devices is described
using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

GUID-F059B445-077B-4C81-A29C-065966A02528 V1 EN

Operation time counter

This module counts the operation time. When POS_ACTIVE is active, the count is
continuously added to the time duration until it is deactivated. The OPR_TIME output
is the total duration for which POS_ACTIVE is active. The unit of time duration
count for OPR_TIME is hour. The value is available through the monitored data view.

The OPR_TIME output is a continuously increasing value and it is stored in a

nonvolatile memory. When POS_ACTIVE is active, the OPR_TIME count starts
increasing from the previous value. The count of OPR_TIME saturates at the final
value of 299999, that is, no further increment is possible. The activation of RESET,
resets the count to the Initial value setting.

Limit Supervision
This module compares the motor run-time count to the set values of Warning value
and Alarm value to generate the WARNING and ALARM outputs when the counts
exceed the levels.

1014 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

The activation of the WARNING and ALARM outputs depends on the Operating time
mode setting. If Operating time mode is set to “Immediate”, both WARNING and
ALARM occur immediately after the conditions are met, if Operating time mode is set
to “Timed Warn”, WARNING is activated within the next 24 hours at the time of the
day set using the Operating time hour setting. If Operating time mode is set to “Timed
Warn Alm”, the WARNING and ALARM outputs are activated at the time of day set
using Operating time hour.

The Operating time hour setting is used to set the hour of day in
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The setting has to be adjusted
according to the local time and local daylight-saving time.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Activation of the BLOCK input blocks
both WARNING and ALARM.

6.6.5 Application
The machine operating time since commissioning indicates the use of the machine.
For example, the mechanical wear and lubrication requirement for the shaft bearing of
the motors depend on the use hours.

If a motor is used for long duration runs, it might require frequent servicing, while for
a motor that is not used regularly the maintenance and service are scheduled less
frequently. The accumulated operating time of a motor together with the appropriate
settings for warning can be utilized to trigger the condition based maintenance of the
motor.

The operating time counter combined with the subsequent reset of the operating time
count can be used to monitor the motor's run time for a single run. Both the long term
accumulated operating time and the short term single run duration provide valuable
information about the condition of the machine and device. The information can be
co-related to other process data to provide diagnoses for the process where the
machine or device is applied.

6.6.6 Signals
Table 981: MDSOPT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POS_ACTIVE BOOLEAN 0 When active indicates the equipment is in
operation
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all binary outputs of the function
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

630 series 1015

Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRS756508 F
Supervision functions

Table 982: MDSOPT Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm accumulated operation time exceeds Alarm
value
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning accumulated operation time exceeds
Warning value

6.6.7 Settings
Table 983: MDSOPT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On
Warning value 0 - 299999 Hour 1 8000 Warning value for operation time
supervision
Alarm value 0 - 299999 Hour 1 10000 Alarm value for operation time supervision

Table 984: MDSOPT Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Initial value 0 - 299999 Hour 1 0 Initial value for operation time supervision
Operating time hour 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Time of day in hour when alarm and
warning will occur
Operating time mode Immediate - - Immediate Mode for time activation of binary outputs
Timed Warn
Timed Warn Alm

6.6.8 Measured values

Table 985: MDSOPT Measured values
Name Type Default Description
POS_ACTIVE BOOLEAN 0 When active indicates the equipment is in
operation
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all binary outputs of the function
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

1016 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 6
Supervision functions

6.6.9 Monitored data

Table 986: MDSOPT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm accumulated
1=TRUE operation time exceeds
Alarm value
WARNING BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Warning accumulated
1=TRUE operation time exceeds
Warning value
OPR_TIME INTEGER - - Accumulated operation
time of machine or
equipment

6.6.10 Technical data

Table 987: MDSOPT Technical data
Characteristic Value
Motor run-time measurement accuracy 1) ±0.5%

1) Of the reading, for a stand-alone protection relay without time synchronization

630 series 1017

Technical Manual
1018
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Section 7 Condition monitoring functions

7.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR

7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR CBCM CBCM

7.1.2 Function block

GUID-4175F53E-AC71-43E8-B348-CFEB451BE987 V2 EN

Figure 512: Function block

7.1.3 Functionality
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different
parameters of the circuit breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number
of operations has reached a predefined value. The energy is calculated from the
measured input currents as a sum of Iyt values. Alarms are generated when the
calculated values exceed the threshold settings.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, if desired.

7.1.4 Operation principle

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes different metering and
monitoring subfunctions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the

630 series 1019

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “On” and “Off”. The
operation counters are cleared when Operation is set to “Off”.

The operation of the functions can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-B22C9526-9992-4170-BC33-049FC24E5CF8 V2 EN

Figure 513: Functional module diagram

7.1.4.1 Circuit breaker status

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that
is, whether the breaker is in an open, closed or intermediate position. The operation of
the breaker status monitoring can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

1020 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

GUID-6DCC968F-7E0B-49CB-B054-4FD7C99277CA V1 EN

Figure 514: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status

Phase current check

This module compares the three phase currents with the setting Acc stop current. If the
current in a phase exceeds the set level, information about phase is reported to the
contact position indicator module.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low, the
POSOPEN input is high and the current is zero. The circuit breaker is closed when the
POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the
intermediate position if both the auxiliary contacts have the same value, that is, both
are in the logical level "0", or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low and the
POSOPEN input is high, but the current is not zero.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS, INTERMPOS
and CLOSEPOS for open, intermediate and closed position respectively.

7.1.4.2 Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction is to indicate if

the circuit breaker has not been operated for a long time.

The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-FEDC58F4-B835-41BA-BD4C-459F63E6DE79 V1 EN

Figure 515: Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm
for circuit breaker operation monitoring

630 series 1021

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

Inactivity timer
The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive,
that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state. The calculation is done by
monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

The inactive days INA_DAYS is available in the monitored data view. It is also
possible to set the initial inactive days with the Ini inactive days parameter.

Alarm limit check

When the inactive days exceed the limit value defined with the Inactive Alm days
setting, the MON_ALM alarm is initiated. The time in hours at which this alarm is
activated can be set with the Inactive Alm hours parameter as coordinates of UTC. The
alarm signal MON_ALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK.

7.1.4.3 Breaker contact travel time

The breaker contact travel time module calculates the breaker contact travel time for
the closing and opening operation. The operation of the breaker contact travel time
measurement can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram
are explained in the next sections.

GUID-61AAA5AC-675A-4EEE-8003-040D3951AB4C V2 EN

Figure 516: Functional module diagram for breaker contact travel time

Traveling time calculator

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between auxiliary
contacts' state change. The opening travel time is measured between the opening of the
POSCLOSE auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact.
Travel time is also measured between the opening of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact
and the closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact.

1022 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

A071107 V1 EN

Figure 517: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time gap t2 between
the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is
completely open. Therefore, to incorporate the time t1+t2, a correction factor needs to
be added with topen to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with the
Opening time Cor (=t1+t2) setting. The closing time is calculated by adding the value
set with the Closing time Cor (t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.

The last measured opening travel time T_TRV_OP and the closing travel time
T_TRV_CL are available in the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via
communications.

Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set with the Open
alarm time setting, the TRV_T_OP_ALM output is activated. Respectively, when the
measured closing travel time is longer than the value set with the Close alarm time
setting, the TRV_T_CL_ALM output is activated.

It is also possible to block the TRV_T_CL_ALM and TRV_T_OP_ALM alarm signals

by activating the BLOCK input.

7.1.4.4 Operation counter

The operation counter subfunction calculates the number of breaker operation cycles.
The opening and closing operations are both included in one operation cycle. The
operation counter value is updated after each opening operation.

The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 1023

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

GUID-681DC9AA-8A18-4695-B7C5-E093B697BB39 V1 EN

Figure 518: Functional module diagram for counting circuit breaker operations

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state change of
the binary auxiliary contacts inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NO_OPR is available in the monitored data view on the
LHMI or through tools via communications. The old circuit breaker operation counter
value can be taken into use by writing the value to the Counter initial Val parameter
and by setting the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.

Alarm limit check

The OPR_ALM operation alarm is generated when the number of operations exceeds
the value set with the Alarm Op number threshold setting. However, if the number of
operations increases further and exceeds the limit value set with the Lockout Op
number setting, the OPR_LO output is activated.

The binary outputs OPR_LO and OPR_ALM are deactivated when the BLOCK input is
activated.

7.1.4.5 Accumulation of Iyt

Accumulation of the Iyt module calculates the accumulated energy.

The operation of the module can be described with a module diagram. All the modules
in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-A3FC3D01-1E8B-409A-8214-34BF59362F5C V1 EN

Figure 519: Functional module diagram for calculating accumulative energy and
alarm

1024 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Accumulated energy calculator

This module calculates the accumulated energy Iyt [(kA)ys]. The factor y is set with
the Current exponent setting.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE input opening events. It ends when
the RMS current becomes lower than the Acc stop current setting value.

A071110 V1 EN

Figure 520: Significance of theDifference Cor time setting

The Difference Cor time setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to accumulate
the energy from the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the
calculation of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and when the delay
is equal to the value set with the Difference Cor time setting. When the setting is
negative, the calculation starts in advance by the correction time before the auxiliary
contact opens.

The accumulated energy outputs IPOW_A (_B, _C) are available in the monitored
data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. The values can be reset
by setting the parameter CB accum. currents power setting to true in the clear menu
from WHMI or LHMI.

Alarm limit check

The IPOW_ALM alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the value
set with the Alm Acc currents Pwr threshold setting. However, when the energy
exceeds the limit value set with the LO Acc currents Pwr threshold setting, the
IPOW_LO output is activated.

The IPOW_ALM and IPOW_LO outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input
BLOCK.

7.1.4.6 Remaining life of the circuit breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to wearing.
The wearing in the breaker depends on the tripping current, and the remaining life of
the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the

630 series 1025

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

manufacturer. The remaining life is decremented at least with one when the circuit
breaker is opened.

The operation of the remaining life of the circuit breaker subfunction can be described
with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

GUID-1F5E13A4-5E35-4743-9E9A-47596433F421 V1 EN

Figure 521: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit
breaker

Circuit breaker life estimator

The circuit breaker life estimator module calculates the remaining life of the circuit
breaker. If the tripping current is less than the rated operating current set with the
Rated Op current setting, the remaining operation of the breaker reduces by one
operation. If the tripping current is more than the rated fault current set with the Rated
fault current setting, the possible operations are zero. The remaining life of the
tripping current in between these two values is calculated based on the trip curve given
by the manufacturer. The Op number rated and Op number fault parameters set the
number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated current and at the rated fault
current, respectively.

The remaining life is calculated separately for all three phases and it is available as a
monitored data value CB_LIFE_A (_B,_C). The values can be cleared by setting
the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.

Clearing CB wear values also resets the operation counter.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of any phase drops below the Life alarm level threshold
setting, the corresponding circuit breaker life alarm CB_LIFE_ALM is activated.

It is possible to deactivate the CB_LIFE_ALM alarm signal by activating the binary

input BLOCK. The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken into use by
writing the value to the Initial CB Rmn life parameter and resetting the value via the
clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.

1026 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

7.1.4.7 Circuit breaker spring-charged indication

The circuit breaker spring-charged indication subfunction calculates the spring

charging time.

The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-167AB9F8-CE8F-499B-8CC6-423E809AA311 V1 EN

Figure 522: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring-charged

indication and alarm

Spring charge time measurement

Two binary inputs, SPR_CHR_ST and SPR_CHR, indicate spring charging started
and spring charged, respectively. The spring-charging time is calculated from the
difference of these two signal timings.

The spring-charging time T_SPR_CHR is available in the monitored data view.

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the Spring
charge time setting, the subfunction generates the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm.

It is possible to block the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm signal by activating the BLOCK

binary input.

7.1.4.8 Gas pressure supervision

The gas pressure supervision subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc
chamber.

The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 1027

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

GUID-7C15B086-B40A-47B6-93BA-0044405311B1 V1 EN

Figure 523: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure alarm

The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals PRES_LO_IN and
PRES_ALM_IN.

Timer 1
When the PRES_ALM_IN binary input is activated, the PRES_ALM alarm is
activated after a time delay set with the Pressure alarm time setting. The PRES_ALM
alarm can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.

Timer 2
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRES_LO_IN binary input
becomes high, activating the lockout alarm PRES_LO after a time delay set with the
Pres lockout time setting. The PRES_LO alarm can be blocked by activating the
BLOCK input.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from
the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLK_ALM.

7.1.5 Application
SSCBR includes different metering and monitoring subfunctions.

Circuit breaker status

Circuit breaker status monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is, whether the
breaker is in an open, closed or intermediate position.

Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is to indicate that the circuit
breaker has not been operated for a long time. The function calculates the number of
days the circuit breaker has remained inactive, that is, has stayed in the same open or
closed state. There is also the possibility to set an initial inactive day.

Breaker contact travel time

High travelling times indicate the need for maintenance of the circuit breaker
mechanism. Therefore, detecting excessive travelling time is needed. During the

1028 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

opening cycle operation, the main contact starts opening. The auxiliary contact A
opens, the auxiliary contact B closes, and the main contact reaches its opening
position. During the closing cycle, the first main contact starts closing. The auxiliary
contact B opens, the auxiliary contact A closes, and the main contact reaches its close
position. The travel times are calculated based on the state changes of the auxiliary
contacts and the adding correction factor to consider the time difference of the main
contact's and the auxiliary contact's position change.

Operation counter
Routine maintenance of the breaker, such as lubricating breaker mechanism, is
generally based on a number of operations. A suitable threshold setting, to raise an
alarm when the number of operation cycle exceeds the set limit, helps preventive
maintenance. This can also be used to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for
dielectric testing in case of an oil circuit breaker.

The change of state can be detected from the binary input of the auxiliary contact.
There is a possibility to set an initial value for the counter which can be used to
initialize this functionality after a period of operation or in case of refurbished primary
equipment.

Accumulation of Iyt
Accumulation of Iyt calculates the accumulated energy ΣIyt where the factor y is
known as the current exponent. The factor y depends on the type of the circuit breaker.
For oil circuit breakers the factor y is normally 2. In case of a high-voltage system, the
factor y can be 1.4...1.5.

Remaining life of the breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to wearing.
The wearing in the breaker depends on the tripping current, and the remaining life of
the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the
manufacturer.

Example for estimating the remaining life of a circuit breaker

630 series 1029

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

A071114 V3 EN

Figure 524: Trip Curves for a typical 12 kV, 630 A, 16 kA vacuum interrupter

Nr the number of closing-opening operations allowed for the circuit breaker

Ia the current at the time of tripping of the circuit breaker

Calculation of Directional Coef

The directional coefficient is calculated according to the formula:

1030 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

B
log  
Directional Coef =  A  = −2.2609
If 
log  
 Ir 
A070794 V2 EN (Equation 155)

Ir Rated operating current = 630 A

If Rated fault current = 16 kA

A Op number rated = 30000

B Op number fault = 20

Calculation for estimating the remaining life

The equation shows that there are 30,000 possible operations at the rated operating
current of 630 A and 20 operations at the rated fault current 16 kA. Therefore, if the
tripping current is 10 kA, one operation at 10 kA is equivalent to 30,000/60=500
operations at the rated current. It is also assumed that prior to this tripping, the
remaining life of the circuit breaker is 15,000 operations. Therefore, after one
operation of 10 kA, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is 15,000-500=14,500 at
the rated operating current.

Spring-charged indication
For normal operation of the circuit breaker, the circuit breaker spring should be
charged within a specified time. Therefore, detecting long spring-charging time
indicates that it is time for the circuit breaker maintenance. The last value of the
spring-charging time can be used as a service value.

Gas pressure supervision

The gas pressure supervision monitors the gas pressure inside the arc chamber. When
the pressure becomes too low compared to the required value, the circuit breaker
operations are locked. A binary input is available based on the pressure levels in the
function, and alarms are generated based on these inputs.

7.1.6 Signals
Table 988: SSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
PRES_ALM_IN BOOLEAN 0 Binary pressure alarm input
Table continues on next page

630 series 1031

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

Name Type Default Description

PRES_LO_IN BOOLEAN 0 Binary pressure input for lockout indication
SPR_CHR_ST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started input
SPR_CHR BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged input
RST_CB_WEAR BOOLEAN 0 Reset input for CB remaining life and operation
counter
RST_IPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated currents power
RST_SPR_T BOOLEAN 0 Reset input for the charging time of the CB spring
RST_TRV_T BOOLEAN 0 Reset input for CB closing and opening travel times

Table 989: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRV_T_OP_ALM BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRV_T_CL_ALM BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
SPR_CHR_ALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
OPR_ALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPR_LO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
IPOW_ALM BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded alarm
limit
IPOW_LO BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded
lockout limit
CB_LIFE_ALM BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MON_ALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
INVALIDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in invalid position (not positively open or
closed)
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position

7.1.7 Settings
Table 990: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Acc stop current 5.00 - 500.00 A 0.01 10.00 RMS current setting below which energy
acm stops
Current exponent 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent setting for energy
calculation
Rated fault current 500.00 - 75000.00 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
Rated Op current 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
Table continues on next page

1032 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Alm Acc currents Pwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Setting of alarm level for accumulated
currents power
LO Acc currents Pwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout limit setting for accumulated
currents power
Op number rated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
Op number fault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
Alarm Op number 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm limit for number of operations
Lockout Op number 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout limit for number of operations
Open alarm time 0 - 200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for open travel time
Close alarm time 0 - 200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for close travel time
Spring charge time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Setting of alarm for spring charging time
Inactive Alm days 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm limit value of the inactive days
counter
Initial CB Rmn life 0 - 9999 - 1 5000 Initial value for the CB remaining life
estimates

Table 991: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional Coef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
Life alarm level 0 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
Opening time Cor 0 - 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for open travel time
Closing time Cor 0 - 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for close travel time
Difference Cor time -10 - 10 ms 1 5 Correction factor for time difference in
auxiliary and main contacts open time
Pressure alarm time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
Pres lockout time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
Inactive Alm hours 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time of the inactive days counter in
hours
Counter initial Val 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Operation numbers counter initialization
value
Ini inactive days 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value of the inactive days counter
Ini Acc currents Pwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accumulation energy (Iyt)

630 series 1033

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

7.1.8 Measured values

Table 992: SSCBR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_A REAL 0 RMS Current input phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 RMS Current input phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 RMS Current input phase C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
PRES_ALM_IN BOOLEAN 0 Binary pressure alarm input
PRES_LO_IN BOOLEAN 0 Binary pressure input for lockout indication
SPR_CHR_ST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started input
SPR_CHR BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged input
RST_CB_WEAR BOOLEAN 0 Reset input for CB remaining life and operation
counter
RST_IPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated currents power
RST_SPR_T BOOLEAN 0 Reset input for the charging time of the CB spring
RST_TRV_T BOOLEAN 0 Reset input for CB closing and opening travel times

7.1.9 Monitored data

Table 993: SSCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TRV_T_OP_ALM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - CB open travel time
1=TRUE exceeded set value
TRV_T_CL_ALM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - CB close travel time
1=TRUE exceeded set value
T_TRV_OP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during opening operation
T_TRV_CL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during closing operation
SPR_CHR_ALM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Spring charging time has
1=TRUE crossed the set value
T_SPR_CHR REAL - s The charging time of the
CB spring
OPR_ALM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Number of CB operations
1=TRUE exceeds alarm limit
OPR_LO BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Number of CB operations
1=TRUE exceeds lockout limit
NO_OPR INTEGER - - Number of CB operation
cycle
Table continues on next page

1034 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

IPOW_ALM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Accumulated currents
1=TRUE power (Iyt),exceeded
alarm limit
IPOW_LO BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Accumulated currents
1=TRUE power (Iyt),exceeded
lockout limit
CB_LIFE_ALM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Remaining life of CB
1=TRUE reduced to Life alarm
level
MON_ALM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - CB 'not operated for long
1=TRUE time' alarm
INA_DAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB
has been inactive
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Pressure below alarm
1=TRUE level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Pressure below lockout
1=TRUE level
CB_LIFE_A INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase
A
CB_LIFE_B INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase
B
CB_LIFE_C INTEGER - - CB Remaining life phase
C
IPOW_A REAL - - Accumulated currents
power (Iyt), phase A
IPOW_B REAL - - Accumulated currents
power (Iyt), phase B
IPOW_C REAL - - Accumulated currents
power (Iyt), phase C
OPENPOS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - CB is in open position
1=TRUE
INVALIDPOS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - CB is in invalid position
1=TRUE (not positively open or
closed)
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - CB is in closed position
1=TRUE

7.1.10 Technical data

Table 994: SSCBR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Current measuring accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% or ±0.002 × In (at currents in the range of

0.1…10 × In)
±5.0% (at currents in the range of 10…40 × In)

Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

Traveling time measurement ±10 ms

630 series 1035

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

7.1.11 Technical revision history

Table 995: SSCBR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Output data objects PosCls and PosOpn removed
from being in data set by default
C Internal improvements

7.2 Hot-spot and insulation ageing rate monitoring for

transformers HSARSPTR

7.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Hot-spot and insulation ageing rate HSARSPTR 3Ihp>T 26/49HS
monitoring for transformers

7.2.2 Function block

GUID-D40ABA79-280B-48D6-9D87-65D7E0528881 V1 EN

Figure 525: Function block

7.2.3 Functionality
HSARSPTR is used for online monitoring of transformers. The function monitors the
hot-spot temperature of the transformer winding and the ageing rate of the insulation
caused by thermal stress. The function can be applied for new transformers as well as
for transformers already in service.

The hot-spot temperature and loss of life of transformer are calculated for one winding
of the transformer from three phase currents and RTD inputs for top oil temperature
and ambient temperature.

The hot-spot temperature and the momentary ageing rate are calculated based on the
IEC 60076-7 or the IEEE C57.91-2011 standard, depending upon a user defined
setting. The total ageing and loss of transformer insulation life is calculated in years.

1036 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

The function generates WARNING and ALARM signals, if the calculated hot-spot
temperature exceeds the set value.

7.2.4 Operation principle

The Operation setting is used to enable or disable the function. When "On" is selected,
the function is enabled and when "Off" is selected, the function is disabled.

The operation of HSARSPTR can be described using a module diagram. All modules
in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-52629A1F-161C-4A0F-B2B2-56DD416E333A V1 EN

Figure 526: Functional module diagram

Load factor calculation and parameter selection

The transformer top oil and hot-spot temperatures are dependent on the load factor, the
winding conductor properties and the cooling oil properties of the transformer. This
module calculates the load factor based on the measured phase currents and selects the
transformer parameters based on user defined settings.

Load factor calculation

Load factor is a ratio of the load current to the rated current. Since the thermal content
of all the three phase currents influence the temperature inside the transformer, the
load factor is calculated as a ratio of the root of sum of squared phase currents to three
times the rated current.

I _ A2 + I _ B 2 + I _ C 2
K=
2
3 × I rated
GUID-0B365816-10C2-47AB-ABCC-7B7DDCA4FA69 V1 EN (Equation 156)

Where

K Load factor
I_A, I_B and I_C RMS value of input phase currents (Amperes)
Irated Rated current (Amperes)

630 series 1037

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

If Transformer type is set to “Single phase”, the denominator consists only of I2rated
instead of 3×I2rated.

The Transformer rating setting and the value of the rated current are obtained from the
SBase and IBase settings of the IED respectively. Equation 156 assumes that voltage
is constant and tap changer position is not considered.

For a start-delta transformer, it is recommended to use the function on

the star winding, since the circulating zero sequence currents (in case
of unbalance) cannot be measured on the delta winding of the
transformer.

Transformer parameter selection

The transformer parameters are selected based on the Parm select method, Cooling
mode, Transformer type, and Transformer rating settings.

If the Parm select method setting is set to “IEC”, the transformer parameters' values
are automatically selected as per the IEC 60076-7 guidelines based on Table 996.
Table 996: Constants based IEC guidelines
Distribution Transformers Medium and Large power transformers
Cooling mode ONAN ONAN ONAF OFAF ODAF
Oil Exponent (x) 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.0
Winding Exponent (y) 1.6 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.0
Constant K11 (k11) 1.00 0.50 0.50 1.00 1.00

Constant K21 (k21) 1.00 2.00 2.00 1.30 1.00

Constant K22 (k22) 2.00 2.00 2.00 1.00 1.00

Oil Time Constant (Շ0) 180 210 150 90 90

[minutes]
Winding Tm Constant (Շw) 4 10 7 7 7
[minutes]

If Parm select method is set to “IEEE”, the constants are selected as per the IEEE
C57.91™-2011 standard based on Table 997.
Table 997: Constants based on IEEE guidelines
Distribution Transformers Medium and Large power transformers
Cooling mode ONAN ONAN ONAF OFAF ODAF
Oil Exponent (x) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.0
Winding Exponent (y) 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0
Constant K11 (k11) 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

Constant K21 (k21) 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

Table continues on next page

1038 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Distribution Transformers Medium and Large power transformers

Cooling mode ONAN ONAN ONAF OFAF ODAF
Constant K22 (k22) 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

Oil Time Constant (Շ0) 180 210 150 90 90

[minutes]
Winding Tm Constant (Շw) 4 10 7 7 7
[minutes]

A transformer is a distribution transformer if the Transformer rating setting < 2.5

MVA and Transformer type is set to “Three phase” or if the Transformer rating setting
< 0.833 MVA and Transformer type is set to “Single phase”.

Transformer parameters vary with the material used for winding and insulating oil.
The Parm select method setting can be set to “Manual” and the constants can be set
individually through the Oil exponent, Winding exponent, Constant K11, Constant
K21, Constant K22, Oil time constant and Winding Tm constant settings.

If Parm select method is set to “Manual”, the Cooling mode setting has
no effect on the transformer parameters.

Since there is no direct Cooling mode based time constants' selection

mentioned in the IEEE Std C57.91™- 2011 standard, the oil time
constant (Շ0) and winding time constant (Շw) in the Table 997 are kept
same as in the Table 996.
For more accuracy, the values of the constants can be entered
manually by setting Parm select method to “Manual”.

Top oil temp calculation

The function receives two sensor inputs for measuring top oil temperature and
ambient temperature.

The top oil temperature of the tank is obtained through a sensor placed at the upper
inner turn of the winding. If the top oil temperature sensor status TOIL_SNSFLT is
FALSE, the top oil temperature is directly obtained from the TOIL_TEMP input.

If the status of TOIL_SNSFLT is TRUE, indicating that the sensor is faulty, the top
oil temperature is calculated with the help of measured ambient temperature.

The status of the ambient temperature sensor is obtained through the AMB_SNSFLT
binary input. If AMB_SNSFLT is FALSE, indicating the healthy status of the sensor,
the ambient temperature is directly measured through the AMB_TEMP input. Else, if
AMB_SNSFLT is TRUE, the ambient temperature is taken from the Avg ambient
Temp setting.

630 series 1039

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

The formula for calculating the top oil temperature from the measured or set ambient
temperature is shown in Equation 157.

 x 
2
Dθ0( n ) =
Dt  1 + K × R ( )  
− θ0( n −1) − θ a  
 × ∆θor
×
( k11 ×τ o )   1 + R 
 

 
GUID-E3C1EB94-9F21-47ED-ADC1-AA02D0C26349 V1 EN (Equation 157)

Where

θ0(n) Top oil temperature in the tank at nth time step

θa Ambient temperature [°C]

Δθor Top oil temperature rise over ambient temperature at rated load, given by the
setting Rated TO Temp rise
R Ratio of losses at rated current to no load losses, given by the setting Ratio of
losses

k11, Շ0, K and x are as defined in the Parameter selection module in Figure 526.

The D operator implies a difference in the associated variable that corresponds to each
time step Dt. At each time step, the nth value of Dθ0(n) is calculated from the (n-1)th
value.

The initial conditions are calculated by setting the time derivative equal to zero in
Dθ0(n) equation, resulting in the following equations.

x
1 + K 2 × R
θ0( 0 ) = 
( ) 
1+ R  × ∆θor + θ a
 
GUID-BD153543-C2AA-4EAA-A657-FFD52A7BC581 V1 EN (Equation 158)

The top oil temperature at the nth time step is calculated as shown below.

TOPOIL _ TEMP = θ0( n −1) + Dθ0( n )

GUID-E13BA362-6134-4004-98B8-17506E124F6F V1 EN (Equation 159)

The measured/calculated top oil temperature TOPOIL_TEMP is available in the

monitored data view.

If the top oil temperature sensor is valid, the TOPOIL_TEMP output

is equal to the measured top oil temperature TOIL_TEMP input.

1040 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Hot-spot temp calculation

Winding hot-spot temperature depends on the winding temperature rise due to the
load factor and oil flow. These two factors act complimentary to each other in the
influence of temperature rise.

The differential equations for hot-spot temperature rise above top oil temperature is
solved as the sum of two differential equations.

∆θ h( n ) = ∆θ h1( n ) − ∆θ h 2( n )
GUID-3F9AAA62-7D80-4C57-81DF-CFC5EB70E6D6 V1 EN (Equation 160)

The two differential equations are shown in the Equation 161 and Equation 162.

Dt
× ∆θ hr × K y − ∆θ h1( n −1) )
) (k
D∆θ h1( n ) = × 21
( k 22 ×τ w
GUID-B048E03D-42B9-4F3F-B750-EF39297E203C V1 EN (Equation 161)

Dt
D∆θ h 2( n ) = × (( k 21
− 1 × ∆θ hr × K y − ∆θ h 2( n −1)
) )
 
 1  
 ×τ o 


 k 22  

GUID-A990DE6C-6720-4FED-B8A7-4CC50752DE08 V1 EN (Equation 162)

Where

Δθhr Hot-spot-to-top-oil gradient at rated current [°C]

The constants Շw, k21, k22 and y are varying according to the Cooling mode setting and
are obtained from the Load factor calculation and parameter selection module.

The rated hot-spot to top oil gradient, HS_TOIL_GRA (Δθhr), is calculated using the
formula as shown in the Equation 163.

Rated HS Temp rise − Rated TOTemp rise

∆θ hr =
( Current type test / I rated ) y
GUID-6742C36C-CE67-470F-8B27-CB49D05C03C0 V1 EN (Equation 163)

Where

Irated Rated current of the transformer

Rated HS Temp rise Hot-spot temperature rise over ambient at rated current
Current type test Current applied in type testing to reach rated hot-spot temperature

At each time step, the nth value of DΔθh1(n) and DΔθh2(n) are calculated from the (n-1)
value; the solutions of which are combined in accordance with the hot-spot
temperature rise equation.

630 series 1041

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

∆θ h1( n ) = ∆θ h1( n −1) + D∆θ h1( n )

GUID-B66DEA25-248A-4C36-9AA5-F235D15BDBB6 V1 EN (Equation 164)

∆θ h 2( n ) = ∆θ h 2( n −1) + D∆θ h 2( n )
GUID-233F0250-8B2F-41D8-9C5E-9010AD1588BD V1 EN (Equation 165)

The initial conditions are calculated by setting the time derivative equal to zero in
D∆θh1(n) and D∆θh2(n) equations, resulting in the following equations.

∆θ h1( 0 ) = k21 × ∆θ hr × K y
GUID-73F4CCE7-9F28-4EB1-A7AC-353605C96C70 V1 EN (Equation 166)

∆θ h 2( 0 ) = ( k21 − 1) × ∆θ hr × K y
GUID-28D3B517-36AA-4136-B26E-61A3239D7E73 V1 EN (Equation 167)

The final hot-spot temperature is calculated as the sum of top oil temperature and the
rise of hot-spot temperature over the top oil temperature.

The hot-spot temperature at the nth time step is calculated as shown in the Equation
168.

HOTSPOT _ TEMP = θo( n ) + ∆θ h( n )

GUID-AE4D39D5-B495-4B61-8B98-05DFA7B7F40C V1 EN (Equation 168)

The calculated hot-spot temperature HOTSPOT_TEMP and rated hot-spot to top oil
gradient, HS_TOIL_GRA are available in the monitored data view.

Level detector 1
This module compares the calculated hot-spot temperature, HOTSPOT_TEMP value
with the Alarm level and Warning level settings.

If HOTSPOT_TEMP is greater than the Warning level, the module activates the
WARNING output after a settable Warning delay time.

If HOTSPOT_TEMP is greater than the Alarm level, the module activates the ALARM
output after a settable Alarm delay time.

Assuming existing conditions, as long as the alarm/warning conditions are not

reached, the module calculates the available load reserve in percentage to reach the
alarm condition LD_RSV_ALM and to reach the warning condition, LD_RSV_WRN.
These outputs can be obtained from the monitored data view.

If the warning condition is reached, the LD_RSV_WRN output is forced to zero and if
the alarm condition is reached, LD_RSV_ALM is forced to zero.

The load reserve outputs are only indicative and are calculated based
on rated current, assuming the same ambient temperature and cooling
modes.

1042 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

If, for any reason, the load reserve calculation is not feasible, the load
reserve outputs are shown as zero.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates WARNING and ALARM outputs and resets the internal timers.

Ageing and loss of life calculation

This module calculates the rate at which transformer insulation ageing is accelerating
compared with the ageing rate at rated hot-spot temperature and equivalent ageing
over a time period.

If transformer insulation paper is not upgraded, that is, if setting Insul paper type is set
to “Normal”, the setting Ageing rate method selects between the IEC and IEEE
methods of calculation. If Ageing rate method is set to “IEC method”, the relative
ageing rate is calculated as shown in the Equation 169.

(θh −98)
VIEC = 2 6

GUID-160872AE-6E26-4782-B7AD-351E6078209E V1 EN (Equation 169)

If the setting Ageing rate method is set to “IEEE method”, the ageing rate is calculated
as shown in the Equation 170.

15000 15000
−
110+ 273 θh + 273
VIEEE = e
GUID-8E8860BA-0548-46D1-85A1-09E8C45A288A V1 EN (Equation 170)

Where

VIEC Momentary ageing rate as per IEC method

VIEEE Momentary ageing rate as per IEEE method

θh The calculated hot-spot temperature

If the setting Insul paper type is set to “Upgraded”, the IEEE method
is used for calculating the ageing rate irrespective of the value of
Ageing rate method setting.

The calculated value of the relative ageing rate, AGEING_RATE is given as an output
in the monitored data view.

The module also calculates the average ageing rate, AVG_AGE_RATE, over a
specified time period given by the Avg Age Rte period setting. The setting Avg Age Rte
period can be set to “Day”, “Week”, “Month” or “Year”.

For example, if the Avg Age rate period is set to “Month”, the output
AVG_AGE_RATE is updated every day with the average ageing rate since the day the
calculation started. Once a month is completed, the AVG_AGE_RATE is calculated

630 series 1043

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

over the previous 30 days. That is, after the 31st day, the average ageing rate is
calculated from day 2 to day 31 and so on.

If the Avg Age rate period is set to “Day”, “Week” or “Month”, the calculated
AVG_AGE_RATE is refreshed every day at 12:00 hours, but, if it is set to “Year”, the
AVG_AGE_RATE is refreshed once in 30 days.

The calculated AVG_AGE_RATE is given as an output in the monitored data view.

The function considers month as 30 days and correspondingly a year

as 12 months or 360 days.

Loss of life calculation

The momentary loss of life can be calculated as the product of the momentary ageing
rate and the time step over which the momentary ageing is calculated.

DLn = Vn × Dt
GUID-6C9690A0-B4F3-4A8E-B369-382269DB33D9 V1 EN (Equation 171)

The total loss of life is the sum of the momentary loss of life and the total loss of life
until time, n-1.

Ln = Ln −1 + DLn
GUID-2A36C5C2-17CF-4120-B149-3BA4C1BA6AFF V1 EN (Equation 172)

The initial loss of life L0, is taken from the setting Initial loss of life.

For new transformer installations, the Initial loss of life setting should
be “0”. For previously installed transformers, the Initial loss of life can
be set to the consumed transformer life in months.

The calculated value of the loss of life in years, LOSS_OF_LIFE, is given as an

output in the monitored data view.

The calculated value of LOSS_OF_LIFE can be reset through the input RESET.

Level detector 2
This module compares the AVG_AGE_RATE output with the setting Alarm level age
Rte.

If the calculated AVG_AGE_RATE over the Avg Age Rte period setting is greater than
Alarm level Age Rte, the module activates the binary output ALM_AGE_RATE.

The binary input RST_AVGAGING can be used to reset the output ALM_AGE_RATE
and also the calculated value of AVG_AGE_RATE.

1044 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Once the RST_AVGAGING input is active, the average ageing rate values stored over
the Avg Age rate period setting is erased and the calculation of AVG_AGE_RATE is
restarted.

If the Avg Age Rte period is set to “Year”, the output

AVG_AGE_RATE is refreshed once in 30 days starting from the time
the relay is installed or since the last activation of binary input
RST_AVGAGING.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the ALM_AGE_RATE output.

7.2.5 Base value

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values. For example, the values are given in A, kV and kVA.
The IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-
related settings, for example, “Phase Grp 1”, “Phase Grp 2” and “Phase Grp 3”. Select
one of the groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase settings.

7.2.6 Application
The insulation used in transformer windings is paper oil insulation that can degrade
over a period of time. The deterioration of insulation is a time function of temperature,
moisture and oxygen content. With modern oil preservation systems, the moisture and
oxygen contributions to insulation deterioration can be minimized, leaving insulation
temperature as the controlling parameter.

Since, in most of the transformers the temperature distribution is not uniform, the part
that is operating at the highest (hot-spot) temperature normally undergoes the greatest
deterioration. Hot-spot temperature of winding needs to be monitored continuously in
order to not exceed the flashover value of transformer insulation oil. The first step in
monitoring the insulation age is the calculation of hot-spot temperature of the
transformer.

A simplified representation of the variation of temperature inside the transformer is

shown in the Figure 527 (IEC 60076-7).

630 series 1045

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

GUID-32CE62F1-479C-4A63-9D2B-8F824E4E3CB7 V1 EN

Figure 527: Transformer thermal diagram

The winding hot-spot temperature depends on the load losses, type of cooling and
ambient temperature. Usually the conductors near the top of the winding experience
the maximum leakage field and the highest surrounding oil temperature (due to
convection effect). It is natural to consider that the top conductors contain the hottest
spot. Measurements have shown that the hottest spot can also be moved to lower
conductors.

Direct measurement of hot-spot temperature with fiber optic probes became available
in mid 1980s. Experience has shown that there might be gradients of more than 10 °C
between different locations at the top of a transformer winding. It is unlikely that the
insertion of one to three sensors detect the real hot-spot. Direct measurement of hot-
spot temperature is difficult and it is calculated using the empirical formulae.

The hot-spot temperature calculation is dependent upon the thermal properties of the
winding material, cooling oil and the cooling mode of the transformer. The thermal
model may also differ from IEC and IEEE markets, though the underlying principle
of temperature calculation remains the same. The transformer constants are decided
based on a user defined setting to select the preferred type of thermal model (IEC,
IEEE or Manual).

For most transformers in service, the top oil temperature inside a winding is difficult
to measure. On the other hand, the top oil temperature at the top of the tank is well
known, either by measurement or by calculation. The winding hot-spot temperature
rise above the top oil temperature is calculated. By adding this value to the measured
or calculated top oil temperature, the winding hot-spot temperature is obtained. A
pictorial representation of the location of top oil temperature sensor is shown in the
Figure 528.

1046 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

GUID-A3BB34F8-D692-4605-9CF6-9FE9599710FD V1 EN

Figure 528: Location of top oil sensor

WARNING and ALARM signals are provided for the operator to take corrective actions
to reduce the temperature inside the transformer. Corrective actions include switching
on coolers, reducing the load on the transformers and so on.

Normally, warning level is set to indicate if the temperature is nearing

the limiting value and alarm is generated when the limiting condition
has reached. Hence, alarm level is set at a higher value than the
warning level.

The function only calculates hot-spot temperature based on the load factor of the
winding. This function does not calculate the rise in actual hot-spot temperature,
which occurs due to oil flow blockage or malfunction of cooler groups. That said, the
set oil and winding properties can be updated manually to indicate this change.

Based on the calculated hot-spot temperature, the function calculates the relative
ageing, that is, the accelerated or decelerated ageing of the insulation at current load
compared to its ageing at rated load. The variation of ageing acceleration factor with
respect to the hot-spot temperature for a sample transformer is plotted in Figure 529.
Here, 110 °C is taken as the rated hot-spot temperature at which point an ageing
acceleration factor of 1.0 is achieved.

630 series 1047

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

GUID-BF161EFA-B03C-4460-B075-87D2CC18CEC5 V1 EN

Figure 529: Variation of insulation ageing factor with hot-spot temperature

(Graph produced using values from Table 11 of IEEE Std.
C57.91-1995)

The variation of insulation life with respect to the hot-spot temperature depends upon
the type of insulation paper used. Thermally upgraded insulation paper neutralizes the
production of acids caused by the hydrolysis of the material over the lifetime of the
transformer and slows down insulation ageing when compared to the normal
insulation paper (IEC 60076-7). The proper selection of insulation paper type is
needed for better accuracy of loss of life calculation.

In certain cases, it is necessary to monitor the loading of the transformer over a defined
time period. For example, during a planned overloading of a transformer for a period
of one month. In such cases it is important to know the ageing rate during that period
of overload rather than the overall loss of life transformer. Hence, an additional output
on average ageing rate over a settable average ageing period is provided in the
function.

The function can be applied for new transformers and also for transformers already in
service using the initial loss of life setting.

7.2.7 Signals
Table 998: HSARSPTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
TOIL_TEMP REAL 0.0 Measured top oil temperature
AMB_TEMP REAL 0.0 Measured ambient temperature
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs
TOIL_SNSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Top oil temperature sensor fault status
AMB_SNSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Ambient temperature sensor fault status
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset loss of life calculation
RST_AVGAGING BOOLEAN 0 Reset average ageing rate calculation

1048 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Table 999: HSARSPTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal
ALM_AGE_RATE BOOLEAN Alarm signal for average ageing rate over set time
period

7.2.8 Settings
Table 1000: HSARSPTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Cooling mode ONAN - - ONAN Transformer cooling method
ONAF
OFAF
ODAF
Alarm level 50.0 - 350.0 Deg C 0.1 120.0 Alarm level for hotspot temperature
Warning level 50.0 - 350.0 Deg C 0.1 100.0 Warning level for hotspot temperature
Alarm level Age Rte 0.10 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for average ageing rate over
set time period
Avg ambient Temp -20.00 - 70.00 Deg C 0.01 20.00 Average ambient temperature
Alarm delay time 0.00 - 3600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Time delay for hotspot temperature alarm
Warning delay time 0.00 - 3600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Time delay for hotspot temperature
warning

Table 1001: HSARSPTR Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Avg Age rate period Day - - Month Time period over which average ageing
Week rate is calculated
Month
Year

Table 1002: HSARSPTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

630 series 1049

Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRS756508 F
Condition monitoring functions

Table 1003: HSARSPTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Transformer type Single phase - - Three phase Number of phases of the transformer
Three phase
Parm select method IEC - - IEC Transformer parameter selection method
IEEE
Manual
Insul paper type Normal - - Normal Type of transformer paper insulation
Upgraded
Ageing rate method IEC - - IEC Ageing rate calculation method
IEEE
Initial loss of life 0 - 1000 Month 1 0 Initial value for winding insulation loss of
life in months
Rated HS Temp rise 50.0 - 350.0 Deg C 1.0 80.0 Hotspot temperature rise over ambient at
rated load
Rated TO Temp rise 50.0 - 350.0 Deg C 0.1 65.0 Top oil temperature rise over ambient at
rated load
Current type test 0.01 - 2.00 pu 0.01 1.00 Current applied during type test to reach
rated hotspot Temp
Ratio of losses 0.1 - 500000.0 - 0.1 25.0 Ratio of load losses at rated load to no-
load losses
Oil exponent 0.10 - 10.00 - 0.01 0.10 User defined value for Oil exponent
Winding exponent 0.10 - 10.00 - 0.01 0.10 User defined value for Winding exponent
Constant K11 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 User defined value of thermal model
constant K11
Constant K21 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 User defined value of thermal model
constant K21
Constant K22 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 2.00 User defined value of thermal model
constant K22
Oil time constant 1 - 20000 s 1 10800 user defined oil time constant in seconds
Winding Tm constant 1 - 20000 s 1 240 user defined winding time constant in
seconds

7.2.9 Measured values

Table 1004: HSARSPTR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_A REAL 0.0 RMS value of input current phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0.0 RMS value of input current phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0.0 RMS value of input current phase C
TOIL_TEMP REAL 0.0 Measured top oil temperature
AMB_TEMP REAL 0.0 Measured ambient temperature
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all binary outputs
Table continues on next page

1050 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Name Type Default Description

TOIL_SNSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Top oil temperature sensor fault status
AMB_SNSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Ambient temperature sensor fault status
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset loss of life calculation
RST_AVGAGING BOOLEAN 0 Reset average ageing rate calculation

7.2.10 Monitored data

Table 1005: HSARSPTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal
1=TRUE
WARNING BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Warning signal
1=TRUE
ALM_AGE_RATE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal for average
1=TRUE ageing rate over set time
period
HOTSPOT_TEMP REAL - deg Calculated value of hot
spot temperature
TOPOIL_TEMP REAL - deg Calculated value of top oil
temperature
LOSS_OF_LIFE REAL - - Loss of life in years
LD_RSV_WRN REAL - % Percentage load reserve
for reaching warning
condition
LD_RSV_ALM REAL - % Percentage load reserve
for reaching alarm
condition
AGEING_RATE REAL - - Momentary relative
ageing rate
AVG_AGE_RATE REAL - - Average ageing rate over
set time period

7.2.11 Technical data

Table 1006: HSARSPTR technical data
Characteristic Value
Warning/alarm time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±0.50 s

630 series 1051

Technical Manual
1052
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

Section 8 Measurement functions

8.1 Basic measurements

8.1.1 Functions
The three-phase current measurement function CMMXU is used for monitoring and
metering the phase currents of the power system.

The three-phase voltage measurement functions VPHMMXU and VPPMMXU are

used for monitoring and metering the phase and line voltage of the power system.

The residual current measurement function RESCMMXU is used for monitoring and
metering the residual current of the power system.

The residual voltage measurement function RESVMMXU is used for monitoring and
metering the residual voltage of the power system.

The sequence current measurement CSMSQI is used for monitoring and metering the
phase sequence currents.

The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI is used for monitoring and metering the
phase sequence voltages.

The three phase power measurement PWRMMXU is used for monitoring and
metering the active power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor and the
frequency. PWRMMXU calculates these quantities by using the fundamental
frequency phasors, for example, the DFT values of the measured current and voltage
signals.

The information of the measured quantity is available in the monitored data view on
the LHMI or through tools via communication.

RESVMMXU has two outputs for the residual voltages. One

corresponds to the true RMS value and the other is the fundamental
component amplitude. The service value U0_RMS_DB provides the
true RMS value. However, if a fundamental component with an angle
is required, U0_MAG_DB and U0_ANGL_INST should be
monitored.

630 series 1053

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

8.1.2 Measurement functionality

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

Zero-point clamping
Each measured signal has a separate zero-point clamping function. The active
clamping function forces the actual measurement value to zero if the measured value
goes below the zero-point clamping limit. This helps in the elimination of the noise
from the input signal.
Table 1007: Settings for the zero-point clamping
Function Settings for zero clamping
Three phase current measurement (CMMXU) A Zer deadband PhA, A Zer deadband PhB and A
zer deadband PhC
Three phase voltage measurement (VPHMMXU) V Zer deadband PhA, V Zer deadband PhB and V
Zer deadband PhC
Three phase-to-phase voltage measurement V Zer deadband PhAB, V Zer deadband PhBC
(VPPMMXU) and V Zer deadband PhCA
Residual current measurement (RESCMMXU) A Zer deadband res
Residual voltage measurement (RESVMMXU) V RMS deadband res and V Mag deadband res
Phase sequence current measurement (CSMSQI) Ps Seq A Zero Db and Ng Seq A Zero Db
Phase sequence voltage measurement Ps Seq V Zero Db and Ng Seq V Zero Db
(VSMSQI)
Three phase power measurement (PWRMMXU) Tot VA zero deadband, Tot W zero deadband, Tot
VAr zeroDb, Av PF zero deadband and Hz zero
deadband

Example for CMMXU

A minimum PhA = 0.0 A

A maximum PhA = 500.0 A

A Zer deadband PhA = 500 m%

Zero-point clamping limit for phase A = (A maximum PhA - A minimum PhA) × A Zer deadband
= (500.0 - 0.0) × 0.005
= 2.5 A

Based on this setting, all measured currents below 2.5 A for phase A are forced to zero.

In PWRMMXU, the measured current and the voltage signals have a separate zero-
point clamping function that forces these signal values to zero when the signal value
goes below the value of the current zero Db setting or voltage zero Db setting. This
avoids erroneous measurement when either current or voltage signal is not present.

1054 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

The measured values for P, Q, S and cosφ are automatically forced to zero when either
the voltage or current measurement is forced to zero.

Limit value supervision

The limit value supervision indicates whether the measured signal exceeds or goes
below the set limits. The supervision has two different modes of operation:
• Overfunction, when the measured input value exceeds the High limit or the High-
high limit preset values.
• Underfunction, when the measured input value goes below the Low limit or Low-
low limit preset values.

Table 1008: Settings for the limit value supervision

Function Settings for limit value supervision
Three phase current High limit A high limit PhA, A high limit PhB and A high limit PhC
measurement (CMMXU)
Low limit A low limit PhA, A low limit PhB and A low limit PhC
High-high A Hi high Lim PhA, A Hi high Lim PhB and A Hi high
limit Lim PhC
Low-low A low low Lim, PhA, A low low Lim PhB and A low low
limit Lim PhC
Three phase voltage High limit V high limit PhA, V high limit PhB and V high limit PhC
measurement (VPHMMXU)
Low limit V low limit PhA, V low limit PhB and V low limit PhC
High-high V Hi high Lim PhA, V Hi high Lim PhB and V Hi high
limit Lim PhC
Low-low V low low Lim PhA, V low low Lim PhB and V low low
limit Lim PhC
Three phase-to-phase voltage High limit V high limit PhAB, V high limit PhBC and V high limit
measurement (VPPMMXU) PhCA
Low limit V low limit PhAB, V low limit PhBC and V low limit
PhCA
High-high V Hi high Lim PhAB, V Hi high Lim PhBC and V Hi high
limit Lim PhCA
Low-low V low low Lim PhAB, V low low Lim PhBC and V low
limit low Lim PhCA
Residual current measurement High limit A high Lim res
(RESCMMXU)
Low limit A low Lim res
High-high A Hi high Lim res
limit
Low-low A low low Lim res
limit
Residual voltage measurement High limit V RMS high Lim res and V Mag high Lim res
(RESVMMXU)
Low limit V RMS low Lim res and V Mag low Lim res
High-high V RMS Hi Hi Lim res and V Mag Hi Hi Lim res
limit
Low-low V RMS Lo low res and V Mag Lo low Lim res
limit
Table continues on next page

630 series 1055

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Function Settings for limit value supervision

Phase sequence current High limit PS Seq A high limit and Ng Seq A high limit
measurement (CSMSQI)
Low limit PS Seq A low limit and Ng Seq A low limit
High-high PS Seq A Hi high Lim and NGgSeq A Hi high Lim
limit
Low-low PS Seq A low low Lim and Ng Seq A low low Lim
limit
Phase sequence voltage High limit PS Seq V high limit and Ng Seq V high limit
measurement (VSMSQI)
Low limit PS Seq V low limit and Ng Seq V low limit
High-high PS Seq V Hi high Lim and Ng Seq V Hi high Lim
limit
Low-low PS Seq V low low Lim and Ng Seq V low low Lim
limit
Three phase power High limit Tot VA high limit, Tot W high limit, Tot VAr high limit, Av
measurement (PWRMMXU) PF high limit and Hz high limit
Low limit Tot VA low limit, Tot W low limit, Tot VAr low limit and
Hz low limit
High-high Tot VA high high Lim, Tot W high high Lim, Tot VAr
limit high high Lim, Av PF high high Lim and Hz high high
limit
Low-low Tot VA low low limit, Tot W low low limit, Tot VAr low
limit low limit, Av PF low low limit and Hz low low limit

Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the range of zero to four (0: Normal, 1: High limit
exceeded, 2: below Low limit, 3: High-high limit exceeded, and 4: below Low-low
limit).

The logical value of the functional output signal changes as shown in the diagram.

GUID-267D40DC-C3F6-4709-8068-D3AB8CB56DE1 V1 EN

Figure 530: Presentation of the operating limits

1056 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

The hysteresis determines the difference between the operating and the reset value at
each operating point in a wide range for each measuring channel separately. The
hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel or measurement
parameter.

Since the limit hysteresis settings are in percentage of the full range,
defined by the maximum and minimum settings, the maximum,
minimum and limit hysteresis setting values need to be carefully
considered in accordance with the limit setting values, so that they do
not lead to a too big hysteresis, which may result in an erroneous
operating limit indication.

Table 1009: Settings for hysteresis-deciding operating limits

Function Settings for hysteresis-deciding operating limits
Three phase current measurement (CMMXU) A limit Hys PhA, A limit Hys PhB and A limit Hys
PhC
Three phase voltage measurement (VPHMMXU) V limit Hys PhA, V limit Hys PhB and V limit Hys
PhC
Three phase-to-phase voltage measurement V limit Hys PhAB, V limit Hys PhBC and V limit Hys
(VPPMMXU) PhCA
Residual current measurement (RESCMMXU) A limit Hys res
Residual voltage measurement (RESVMMXU) V RMS limit Hys res and V Mag limit Hys
Phase sequence current measurement (CSMSQI) Ps Seq A limit Hys and Ng Seq A limit Hys
Phase sequence voltage measurement Ps Seq V limit Hys and Ng Seq V limit Hys
(VSMSQI)
Three phase power measurement (PWRMMXU) Tot VA limit Hys, Tot W limit Hys, Tot VAr limit Hys ,
Av PF limit Hys and Hz limit hysteresis

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each of the separately measured quantity. The
reporting of the newer value depends on the selected reporting mode available. There
are three basic reporting modes available:
• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)
• Amplitude deadband reporting (Deadband)
• Integral deadband reporting (Int deadband)

630 series 1057

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Table 1010: Settings for the reporting mode

Functions Settings for the reporting mode
Three phase current measurement (CMMXU) A Db type PhA, A Db type PhB and A Db type PhC
Three phase voltage measurement (VPHMMXU) V Db type PhA, V Db type PhB and V Db type PhC
Three phase-to-phase voltage measurement V Db type PhAB, V Db type PhBC and V Db type
(VPPMMXU) PhCA
Residual current measurement (RESCMMXU) A Db type res
Residual voltage measurement (RESVMMXU) V RMS Db type res and V Mag Db type res
Phase sequence current measurement (CSMSQI) Ps Seq A db type and Ng Seq A db type
Phase sequence voltage measurement Ps Seq V db type and Ng Seq V db type
(VSMSQI)
Three phase power measurement (PWRMMXU) Tot VA deadband type, Tot W deadband type, Tot
VAr Db type, Av PF deadband type and Hz
deadband type

Cyclic reporting
In cyclic reporting, the function gives a new value when the deadband time has
elapsed.

GUID-E6A704D7-25B0-41A0-B5A7-581628FA3A9C V1 EN

Figure 531: Cyclic reporting

Amplitude deadband reporting

In the amplitude deadband reporting mode, a new value is reported when the measured
quantity changes more than the defined set limits (±ΔY).

1058 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

GUID-598314B7-9BC1-48EB-A8D2-1666FA39908F V1 EN

Figure 532: An example of amplitude deadband supervision reporting

This type of reporting limits the information flow to a minimum necessity.

Integral deadband reporting

In the integral reporting mode, the measured value is reported if the time integral of all
changes exceeds the set limits.

GUID-81E681F8-0E9F-435A-B8F6-A7157C8884CA V1 EN

Figure 533: Integral deadband supervision reporting

The integral deadband supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods

Deadband is a common setting and its unit depends upon the "Type"
of reporting mode selected:

630 series 1059

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

• time (s) in case of cyclic reporting

• amplitude ±ΔY (% of range) in case of amplitude reporting
• time integral (%s) in case of time integral reporting.

The function takes into consideration whether the setting involved in the X deadband
setting is for cyclic reporting, amplitude deadband or integral deadband depending on
the reporting mode settings.
Table 1011: Settings for deadband
Functions Settings for deadband
Three phase current measurement (CMMXU) A deadband PhA, A deadband PhB and A
deadband PhC
Three phase voltage measurement (VPHMMXU) V deadband PhA, V deadband PhB and V
deadband PhC
Three phase-to-phase voltage measurement V deadband PhAB, V deadband PhBC and V
(VPPMMXU) deadband PhCA
Residual current measurement (RESCMMXU) A deadband res
Residual voltage measurement (RESVMMXU) V RMS deadband res and V Mag deadband res
Phase sequence current measurement (CSMSQI) Ps Seq A deadband and Ng Seq A deadband
Phase sequence voltage measurement Ps Seq V deadband and Ng Seq V deadband
(VSMSQI)
Three phase power measurement (PWRMMXU) Tot VA deadband, Tot W deadband, Tot VAr
deadband, Av PF deadband and Hz deadband

Measurement mode
The power measurement function is capable of calculating complex power quantities
in nine different ways, depending on the availability of the transformer inputs
connected to the IED. One of the ways can be selected with the Measurement mode
setting.
Table 1012: Complex power calculation for different measurement mode
Measurement Formula used for complex three-phase power Comment
mode setting calculation
PhsA, PhsB, * * * Used when three phase to earth
PhsC S = U A × I B + U B × I B + U C × IC voltages are available
GUID-0A2FE804-8D3D-4D25-83E9-894274DF90B2 V2 EN

Arone * * Used when two phase to phase

S = (U AB × I A − U BC × I C ) voltages are available
GUID-5C27ADCB-1520-4180-91B5-A45DADE896EA V2 EN

Pos Seq * Used only when the symmetrical

S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq three-phase power needs to be
GUID-55CBB5E1-B9B0-47E7-9D5B-8DF2DFA00A79 V2 EN measured
PhsAB * * Used only when the UAB voltage
S = U AB × ( I A − I B) is available
GUID-E298FEB8-DCD7-4FC9-A6F6-E921DD77689B V2 EN

Table continues on next page

1060 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

Measurement Formula used for complex three-phase power Comment

mode setting calculation
PhsBC * * Used only when the UBC voltage
S = U BC × ( I B − I C) is available
GUID-B172BBA4-E1F6-4331-B276-4EC4BD8B559D V2 EN

PhsCA * * Used only when the UCA voltage

S = U CA × ( I C − I A) is available
GUID-14EC8FA5-A755-45DC-885A-1CA6F4790F58 V2 EN

PhsA * Used only when the UAN voltage

S = 3 ×U A × I A is available
GUID-7474201D-ABEA-42D6-BC5F-1B5EF29D86B7 V2 EN

PhsB * Used only when the UBN voltage

S = 3 ×U A × I A is available
GUID-A39129C9-51AE-44EF-BC55-B02BA33B0382 V2 EN

PhsC * Used only when the UCN voltage

S = 3 ×U A × I A is available
GUID-03690BA1-15FE-4A11-9EC2-1C4F1362BADE V2 EN

* indicates that it is the complex conjugate

In the first two measurement modes, the measurement function calculates the three-
phase power. In other operating modes, it calculates the three-phase power under the
assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical.

Once the complex apparent power is calculated, P, Q, S and Cosϕ are calculated as
shown in the equations.

P = Re ( S )
GUID-AF8C9EDD-0236-4F73-AC5A-D0E2CB8F06A9 V1 EN (Equation 173)

Q = Im( S )
GUID-5075A8BE-E0B0-4062-AECE-7CFB5D4C15F4 V1 EN (Equation 174)

S = S = P2 + Q2
GUID-B16BCE0F-650C-4BFE-9800-A26D6B0BBFE6 V1 EN (Equation 175)

P
Cosφ =
S
GUID-B9101319-21B9-4BF4-A06F-DB84262B9AA3 V1 EN (Equation 176)

In addition to the power factor value, two binary output signals are provided. This
provides the angular relationship between the current and voltage phasors. The ILAG
output is set high when the current phasor is lagging the voltage phasor. Similarly,
ILEAD is set high when the current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.

630 series 1061

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

PF 0.00
P- P+
Q+ Q+

PF -1.00 PF 1.00

P- P+
Q- Q-

GUID-668C013C-6D2D-4824-A738-1803C803C2E7 V1 EN

Figure 534: Complex power and power quadrants

Table 1013: Power quadrants

Quadrant Current P Q PF Power
Q1 Lagging + + 0...+1.00 +ind
Q2 Lagging – + 0...-1.00 -cap
Q3 Leading – – 0...-1.00 -ind
Q4 Leading + - 0...+1.00 +cap

Low-pass filtering
To minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement, the recursive low-
pass filtering of the P, Q, S and Cosφ measured values can be introduced. This makes
the measurement response slower to the step changes in the measured quantity. The
filtering is performed in accordance with the recursive formula:

X = k × X old + (1 − k ) × X calculated
GUID-C89ED51D-38F5-4D41-BD03-9621D5FBE6DF V3 EN (Equation 177)

X new measured value that needs to be represented as an output for example, P, Q, S

or Cosφ
Xold measured value of the previous execution cycle

Xcalculated new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k set relation constant, which influences the filter properties

1062 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

The default value for the relation constant k is zero. The new calculated value is given
out without any filtering with this value k. When the value k is set above 0.00, filtering
is enabled and the appropriate value k is determined separately for all applications.

8.1.3 Measurement function applications

The measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to LHMI, a monitoring tool within PCM600 or to the station level, for
example, via IEC 61850. The continuous monitoring of the measured values, for
example active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency and power
factors, is vital for the efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical
energy. It provides a fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system
to the system operator. Additionally, it can be used during the testing and the
commissioning of protection and control functions to verify the proper operation and
connection of instrument transformers, that is the CTs and VTs. The proper operation
of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified during the normal service by a
periodic comparison of the measured value from IED to the other independent meters.

When the zero signal is measured, the noise in the input signal can still produce small
measurement values. The zero point clamping function can be used to ignore the noise
in the input signal and hence, to prevent the noise getting displayed in the user display.
Zero clamping is done for the measured analog signals and angle values.

The limit supervision indicates whether the measured signal has exceeded or gone
below the set limits by activating the alarm or warning outputs of the function. These
outputs can be used to configure the reporting function (events). The supervision
function has four different limits:
• low alarm limit
• low warning limit
• high warning limit
• high alarm limit

The dead band supervision can be used to report the measured signal value to the
station level when change in the measured value is above the set threshold limit or time
integral of all the changes since, the last time value exceeding the threshold limit. The
measured value can also be based on periodic reporting where the measured value is
available for reporting as it is without performing any preprocesses.

The measuring functions CMMXU, VPHMMXU and VPPMMXU provide the

physical quantities:
• I : magnitude of phase currents (CMMXU)
• Iangle : angle of phase currents (CMMXU)
• U: magnitude of phase and the phase-to-phase voltages (VPPMMXU,
VPHMMXU)
• Uangle : angle of phase and phase-to-phase voltages (VPPMMXU, VPHMMXU)

630 series 1063

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

The measuring functions RESCMMXU and RESVMMXU provide the residual

quantities:
• I0 : magnitude of residual current (RESCMMXU)
• I0angle : angle of residual current (RESCMMXU)
• U0 : magnitude of residual voltage (RESVMMXU)
• U0angle : angle of the residual voltage (RESVMMXU)

The measuring functions CSMSQI and VSMSQI provides the sequence quantities:
• I1, I2 : magnitude of positive and negative sequence currents (CSMSQI)
• U1, U2 : magnitude of positive and negative sequence voltages (VSMSQI)

The measuring function PWRMMXU provides the power quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power
• Cosφ : power factor
• f : power system frequency

8.1.4 Three-phase current CMMXU

8.1.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase current measurement CMMXU 3I 3I

8.1.4.2 Function block

GUID-59A05E73-834D-4DF8-818B-F9EAF0392ADB V1 EN

Figure 535: Function block

1064 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.4.3 Signals
Table 1014: CMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL

Table 1015: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
I_INST_A REAL Phase A amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous
value
I_DB_A REAL Phase A amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I_ANGL_A REAL Phase A angle, instantaneous value
I_RANGE_A INTEGER Phase A amplitude range
I_INST_B REAL Phase B amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous
value
I_DB_B REAL Phase B amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I_ANGL_B REAL Phase B angle, instantaneous value
I_RANGE_B INTEGER Phase B amplitude range
I_INST_C REAL Phase C amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous
value
I_DB_C REAL Phase C amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I_ANGL_C REAL Phase C angle, instantaneous value
I_RANGE_C INTEGER Phase C amplitude range

8.1.4.4 Settings
Table 1016: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On / Off
On
A deadband PhA 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
A Hi high Lim PhA 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 500.0 High High limit (physical value)
A high limit PhA 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 400.0 High limit (physical value)
A low limit PhA 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low limit (physical value)
A low low Lim PhA 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low Low limit (physical value)
A minimum PhA 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Minimum value
A maximum PhA 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 500.0 Maximum value
A Db type PhA Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table continues on next page

630 series 1065

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

A deadband PhB 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
A Hi high Lim PhB 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 500.0 High High limit (physical value)
A high limit PhB 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 400.0 High limit (physical value)
A low limit PhB 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low limit (physical value)
A low low Lim PhB 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low Low limit (physical value)
A minimum PhB 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Minimum value
A maximum PhB 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 500.0 Maximum value
A Db type PhB Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
A deadband PhC 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
A Hi high Lim PhC 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 500.0 High High limit (physical value)
A high limit PhC 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 400.0 High limit (physical value)
A low limit PhC 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low limit (physical value)
A low low Lim PhC 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low Low limit (physical value)
A minimum PhC 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Minimum value
A maximum PhC 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 500.0 Maximum value
A Db type PhC Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 1017: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
A Zer deadband PhA 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
A limit Hys PhA 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
A Zer deadband PhB 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
A limit Hys PhB 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
A Zer deadband PhC 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
A limit Hys PhC 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

1066 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.4.5 Monitored data

Table 1018: CMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I_INST_A REAL - A Phase A amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
I_DB_A REAL - A Phase A amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
I_ANGL_A REAL - deg Phase A angle,
instantaneous value
I_RANGE_A INTEGER 0=Normal - Phase A amplitude range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
I_INST_B REAL - A Phase B amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
I_DB_B REAL - A Phase B amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
I_ANGL_B REAL - deg Phase B angle,
instantaneous value
I_RANGE_B INTEGER 0=Normal - Phase B amplitude range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
I_INST_C REAL - A Phase C amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
I_DB_C REAL - A Phase C amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
I_ANGL_C REAL - deg Phase C angle,
instantaneous value
I_RANGE_C INTEGER 0=Normal - Phase C amplitude range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low

8.1.4.6 Technical data

Table 1019: CMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±0.5% or ±0.002 × In
(at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × In)

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

RMS: No suppression

630 series 1067

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

8.1.5 Three-phase voltage VPHMMXU

8.1.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase voltage measurement VPHMMXU 3Upe 3Upe
function

8.1.5.2 Function block

GUID-A0EE79C7-38CC-4F68-B458-22F54F7BCA43 V1 EN

Figure 536: Function block

8.1.5.3 Signals
Table 1020: VPHMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 1021: VPHMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
U_INST_A REAL Phase A amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous
value
U_DB_A REAL Phase A amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U_ANGL_A REAL Phase A angle
U_RANGE_A INTEGER Phase A amplitude range
U_INST_B REAL Phase B amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous
value
U_DB_B REAL Phase B amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U_ANGL_B REAL Phase B angle
U_RANGE_B INTEGER Phase B amplitude range
U_INST_C REAL Phase C amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous
value
Table continues on next page

1068 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

Name Type Description

U_DB_C REAL Phase C amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U_ANGL_C REAL Phase C angle
U_RANGE_C INTEGER Phase C amplitude range

8.1.5.4 Settings
Table 1022: VPHMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On / Off
On
V deadband PhA 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
V Hi high Lim PhA 0 - 1000000 V 1 12990 High High limit (physical value)
V high limit PhA 0 - 1000000 V 1 12125 High limit (physical value)
V low limit PhA 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
V low low Lim PhA 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
V minimum PhA 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V maximum PhA 0 - 1000000 V 1 15000 Maximum value
V Db type PhA Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V deadband PhB 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
V Hi high Lim PhB 0 - 1000000 V 1 12990 High High limit (physical value)
V high limit PhB 0 - 1000000 V 1 12125 High limit (physical value)
V low limit PhB 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
V low low Lim PhB 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
V minimum PhB 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V maximum PhB 0 - 1000000 V 1 15000 Maximum value
V Db type PhB Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V deadband PhC 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
V Hi high Lim PhC 0 - 1000000 V 1 12990 High High limit (physical value)
V high limit PhC 0 - 1000000 V 1 12125 High limit (physical value)
V low limit PhC 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
V low low Lim PhC 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
V minimum PhC 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V maximum PhC 0 - 1000000 V 1 15000 Maximum value
V Db type PhC Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

630 series 1069

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Table 1023: VPHMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
V Zer deadband PhA 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
V limit Hys PhA 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
V Zer deadband PhB 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
V limit Hys PhB 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
V Zer deadband PhC 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
V limit Hys PhC 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

8.1.5.5 Monitored data

Table 1024: VPHMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
U_INST_A REAL - kV Phase A amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U_DB_A REAL - kV Phase A amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U_ANGL_A REAL - deg Phase A angle
U_RANGE_A INTEGER 0=Normal - Phase A amplitude range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
U_INST_B REAL - kV Phase B amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U_DB_B REAL - kV Phase B amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U_ANGL_B REAL - deg Phase B angle
U_RANGE_B INTEGER 0=Normal - Phase B amplitude range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
U_INST_C REAL - kV Phase C amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U_DB_C REAL - kV Phase C amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U_ANGL_C REAL - deg Phase C angle
U_RANGE_C INTEGER 0=Normal - Phase C amplitude range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low

1070 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.5.6 Technical data

Table 1025: VPHMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±0.5% or ±0.002 × Un
(at voltages in the range of 0.01...1.15 × Un)

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

RMS: No suppression

8.1.6 Three-phase voltage VPPMMXU

8.1.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase voltage measurement VPPMMXU 3Upp 3Upp
function

8.1.6.2 Function block

GUID-B18BB9BB-3585-48FB-A575-5FB217CB9957 V1 EN

Figure 537: Function block

8.1.6.3 Signals
Table 1026: VPPMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

630 series 1071

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Table 1027: VPPMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
U_INST_AB REAL Phase A to B amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U_DB_AB REAL Phase A to B amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
U_ANGL_AB REAL Phase A to B angle
U_RANGE_AB INTEGER Phase A to B amplitude range
U_INST_BC REAL Phase B to C amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U_DB_BC REAL Phase B to C amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
U_ANGL_BC REAL Phase B to C angle
U_RANGE_BC INTEGER Phase B to C amplitude range
U_INST_CA REAL Phase C to A amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U_DB_CA REAL Phase C to A amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
U_ANGL_CA REAL Phase C to A angle
U_RANGE_CA INTEGER Phase C to A amplitude range

8.1.6.4 Settings
Table 1028: VPPMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On / Off
On
V deadband PhAB 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
V Hi high Lim PhAB 0 - 1000000 V 1 22500 High High limit (physical value)
V high limit PhAB 0 - 1000000 V 1 21000 High limit (physical value)
V low limit PhAB 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
V low low Lim PhAB 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
V minimum PhAB 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V maximum PhAB 0 - 1000000 V 1 25000 Maximum value
V Db type PhAB Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V deadband PhBC 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
V Hi high Lim PhBC 0 - 1000000 V 1 22500 High High limit (physical value)
V high limit PhBC 0 - 1000000 V 1 21000 High limit (physical value)
V low limit PhBC 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
V low low Lim PhBC 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
Table continues on next page

1072 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

V minimum PhBC 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V maximum PhBC 0 - 1000000 V 1 25000 Maximum value
V Db type PhBC Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V deadband PhCA 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
V Hi high Lim PhCA 0 - 1000000 V 1 22500 High High limit (physical value)
V high limit PhCA 0 - 1000000 V 1 21000 High limit (physical value)
V low limit PhCA 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
V low low Lim PhCA 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
V minimum PhCA 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V maximum PhCA 0 - 1000000 V 1 25000 Maximum value
V Db type PhCA Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 1029: VPPMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
V Zer deadband PhAB 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
V limit Hys PhAB 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
V Zer deadband PhBC 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
V limit Hys PhBC 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
V Zer deadband PhCA 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
V limit Hys PhCA 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

8.1.6.5 Monitored data

Table 1030: VPPMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
U_INST_AB REAL - kV Phase A to B amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U_DB_AB REAL - kV Phase A to B amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U_ANGL_AB REAL - deg Phase A to B angle
U_RANGE_AB INTEGER 0=Normal - Phase A to B amplitude
1=High range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
Table continues on next page

630 series 1073

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

U_INST_BC REAL - kV Phase B to C amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U_DB_BC REAL - kV Phase B to C amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U_ANGL_BC REAL - deg Phase B to C angle
U_RANGE_BC INTEGER 0=Normal - Phase B to C amplitude
1=High range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
U_INST_CA REAL - kV Phase C to A amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U_DB_CA REAL - kV Phase C to A amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U_ANGL_CA REAL - deg Phase C to A angle
U_RANGE_CA INTEGER 0=Normal - Phase C to A amplitude
1=High range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low

8.1.6.6 Technical data

Table 1031: VPPMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±0.5% or ±0.002 × Un
(at voltages in the range of 0.01...1.15 × Un)

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

RMS: No suppression

8.1.7 Residual current RESCMMXU

8.1.7.1 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Residual current measurement RESCMMXU I0 I0

1074 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.7.2 Function block

GUID-246247B0-E97B-458E-B5EA-78B922B8CF5E V1 EN

Figure 538: Function block

8.1.7.3 Signals
Table 1032: RESCMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL

Table 1033: RESCMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
I0_INST REAL Residual current RMS, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I0_DB REAL Residual current RMS, magnitude of reported
value
I0_ANGL REAL Residual current angle
I0_RANGE INTEGER Residual current RMS range

8.1.7.4 Settings
Table 1034: RESCMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On / Off
On
A deadband res 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
A Hi high Lim res 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 15.0 High High limit (physical value)
A high limit res 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 5.0 High limit (physical value)
A low limit res 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low limit (physical value)
A low low Lim res 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low Low limit (physical value)
A minimum res 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Minimum value
A maximum res 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 70.0 Maximum value
A Db type res Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

630 series 1075

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Table 1035: RESCMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
A Zer deadband res 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
A limit Hys res 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

8.1.7.5 Monitored data

Table 1036: RESCMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I0_INST REAL - A Residual current RMS,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
I0_DB REAL - A Residual current RMS,
magnitude of reported
value
I0_ANGL REAL - deg Residual current angle
I0_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Residual current RMS
1=High range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low

8.1.7.6 Technical data

Table 1037: RESCMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±0.5% or ±0.002 × In
(at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × In)

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

RMS: No suppression

8.1.8 Residual voltage RESVMMXU

8.1.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU U0 U0

1076 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.8.2 Function block

GUID-DAE9974F-2215-4E98-B902-E7A92A81DDEF V1 EN

Figure 539: Function block

8.1.8.3 Signals
Table 1038: RESVMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 1039: RESVMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
U0_RMS_INST REAL U0 RMS, magnitude of instantaneous value
U0_RMS_DB REAL U0 RMS, magnitude of reported value
U0_RMS_RANGE INTEGER U0 RMS range
U0_MAG_INST REAL U0 Amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous value
U0_MAG_DB REAL U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U0_MAG_RANGE INTEGER U0 Amplitude range
U0_ANGL_INST REAL U0 angle, instantaneous value

8.1.8.4 Settings
Table 1040: RESVMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On / Off
On
V RMS deadband res 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
V RMS Hi Hi Lim res 0 - 1000000 V 1 1154 High High limit (physical value)
V RMS high Lim res 0 - 1000000 V 1 577 High limit (physical value)
V RMS low limit res 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
V RMS Lo low Lim res 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
V RMS minimum res 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V RMS maximum res 0 - 1000000 V 1 15000 Maximum value
Table continues on next page

630 series 1077

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

V RMS Db type res Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
V Mag deadband res 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
V Mag Hi Hi Lim res 0 - 1000000 V 1 1154 High High limit (physical value)
V Mag high Lim res 0 - 1000000 V 1 577 High limit (physical value)
V Mag low limit res 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
V Mag Lo low Lim res 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
V Mag minimum res 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
V Mag maximum res 0 - 1000000 V 1 15000 Maximum value
V Mag Db type res Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 1041: RESVMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
V RMS zero db res 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
V RMS limit Hys res 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
V Mag zero db res 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
V Mag limit Hys res 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

8.1.8.5 Monitored data

Table 1042: RESVMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
U0_RMS_INST REAL - kV U0 RMS, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U0_RMS_DB REAL - kV U0 RMS, magnitude of
reported value
U0_RMS_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - U0 RMS range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
U0_MAG_INST REAL - kV U0 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value
Table continues on next page

1078 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

U0_MAG_DB REAL - kV U0 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
U0_MAG_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - U0 Amplitude range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
U0_ANGL_INST REAL - deg U0 angle, instantaneous
value

8.1.8.6 Technical data

Table 1043: RESVMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±0.5% or ±0.002 × Un

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

RMS: No suppression

8.1.9 Sequence current CSMSQI

8.1.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase sequence current CSMSQI I1, I2 I1, I2

8.1.9.2 Function block

GUID-4FE7181C-001E-4AFF-878D-BA49CB28494D V1 EN

Figure 540: Function block

8.1.9.3 Signals
Table 1044: CSMSQI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL

630 series 1079

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Table 1045: CSMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
I1_INST REAL Positive sequence current amplitude,
instantaneous value
I1_DB REAL Positive sequence current amplitude, reported
value
I1_RANGE INTEGER Positive sequence current amplitude range
I2_INST REAL Negative sequence current amplitude,
instantaneous value
I2_DB REAL Negative sequence current amplitude, reported
value
I2_RANGE INTEGER Negative sequence current amplitude range

8.1.9.4 Settings
Table 1046: CSMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On / Off
On
Ps Seq A deadband 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Ps Seq A Hi high Lim 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 500.0 High High limit (physical value)
Ps Seq A high limit 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 400.0 High limit (physical value)
Ps Seq A low limit 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low limit (physical value)
Ps Seq A low low Lim 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low Low limit (physical value)
Ps Seq current Min 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Minimum value
Ps Seq current Max 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 500.0 Maximum value
Ps Seq A db type Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Ng Seq A deadband 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Ng Seq A Hi high Lim 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 100.0 High High limit (physical value)
Ng Seq A high limit 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 50.0 High limit (physical value)
Ng Seq A low limit 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low limit (physical value)
Ng Seq A low low Lim 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Low Low limit (physical value)
Ng Seq current Min 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 0.0 Minimum value
Ng Seq current Max 0.0 - 100000.0 A 0.1 500.0 Maximum value
Ng Seq A db type Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

1080 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

Table 1047: CSMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Ps Seq A zero Db 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Ps Seq A limit Hys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
Ng Seq A zero Db 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Ng Seq A limit Hys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

8.1.9.5 Monitored data

Table 1048: CSMSQI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
I1_INST REAL - A Positive sequence
current amplitude,
instantaneous value
I1_DB REAL - A Positive sequence
current amplitude,
reported value
I1_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Positive sequence
1=High current amplitude range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
I1_ANGL_INST REAL - deg Positive sequence
current angle,
instantaneous value
I2_INST REAL - A Negative sequence
current amplitude,
instantaneous value
I2_DB REAL - A Negative sequence
current amplitude,
reported value
I2_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Negative sequence
1=High current amplitude range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
I2_ANGL_INST REAL - deg Negative sequence
current angle,
instantaneous value

8.1.9.6 Technical data

Table 1049: CSMSQI Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.0% or ±0.002 × In
at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × In

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

630 series 1081

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

8.1.9.7 Technical revision history

Table 1050: CSMSQI technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Mapped the unused data attributes for zero
sequence to have their time quality fixed
C Internal improvements

8.1.10 Sequence voltage VSMSQI

8.1.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase sequence voltage VSMSQI U1, U2 U1, U2

8.1.10.2 Function block

GUID-5357C0A7-F155-4087-9E8C-794EF09478E0 V1 EN

Figure 541: Function block

8.1.10.3 Signals
Table 1051: VSMSQI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL

Table 1052: VSMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
U1_INST REAL Positive sequence voltage amplitude,
instantaneous value
U1_DB REAL Positive sequence voltage amplitude, reported
value
U1 RANGE INTEGER Positive sequence voltage amplitude range
U2_INST REAL Negative sequence voltage amplitude,
instantaneous value
U2_DB REAL Negative sequence voltage amplitude, reported
value
U2_RANGE INTEGER Negative sequence voltage amplitude range

1082 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.10.4 Settings
Table 1053: VSMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On / Off
On
Ps Seq V deadband 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Ps Seq V Hi high Lim 0 - 1000000 V 1 12990 High High limit (physical value)
Ps Seq V high limit 0 - 1000000 V 1 12125 High limit (physical value)
Ps Seq V low limit 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
Ps Seq V low low Lim 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
Ps Seq voltage Min 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
Ps Seq voltage Max 0 - 1000000 V 1 15000 Maximum value
Ps Seq V db type Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Ng Seq V deadband 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Ng Seq V Hi high Lim 0 - 1000000 V 1 1154 High High limit (physical value)
Ng Seq V High limit 0 - 1000000 V 1 577 High limit (physical value)
Ng Seq V low limit 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
Ng Seq V low low Lim 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
Ng Seq voltage Min 0 - 1000000 V 1 0 Minimum value
Ng Seq voltage Max 0 - 1000000 V 1 15000 Maximum value
Ng Seq V db type Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 1054: VSMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Ps Seq V zero Db 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Ps Seq V limit Hys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
Ng Seq V zero Db 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Ng Seq V limit Hys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

630 series 1083

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

8.1.10.5 Monitored data

Table 1055: VSMSQI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
U1_INST REAL - kV Positive sequence
voltage amplitude,
instantaneous value
U1_DB REAL - kV Positive sequence
voltage amplitude,
reported value
U1 RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Positive sequence
1=High voltage amplitude range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
U1_ANGL_INST REAL - deg Positive sequence
voltage angle,
instantaneous value
U2_INST REAL - kV Negative sequence
voltage amplitude,
instantaneous value
U2_DB REAL - kV Negative sequence
voltage amplitude,
reported value
U2_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Negative sequence
1=High voltage amplitude range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
U2_ANGL_INST REAL - deg Negative sequence
voltage angle,
instantaneous value

8.1.10.6 Technical data

Table 1056: VSMSQI Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.0% or ±0.002 × Un
At voltages in range of 0.01…1.15 × Un

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

8.1.10.7 Technical revision history

Table 1057: VSMSQI technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Mapped the unused data attributes for zero
sequence to have their time quality fixed

1084 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.11 Three-phase power PWRMMXU

8.1.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Power monitoring with P, Q, S, power PWRMMXU PQf PQf
factor, frequency

8.1.11.2 Function block

GUID-BBC4E3AF-25FA-4427-A440-524B47D394C0 V1 EN

Figure 542: Function block

8.1.11.3 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

8.1.11.4 Signals
Table 1058: PWRMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group Signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group Signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

630 series 1085

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Table 1059: PWRMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
S_INST REAL Apparent Power
S_DB REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P_DB REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q_DB REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF_DB REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
F_DB REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

8.1.11.5 Settings
Table 1060: PWRMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Measurement mode PhsA,PhsB,PhsC - - PhsA,PhsB,PhsC Selection of power calculation method
Arone
Pos Seq
PhsAB
PhsBC
PhsCA
PhsA
PhsB
PhsC
Tot VA deadband 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Tot VA high high Lim 0 - 2000000 kVA 1 0 High High limit (physical value)
Tot VA high limit 0 - 2000000 kVA 1 0 High limit (physical value)
Tot VA low limit 0 - 2000000 kVA 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
Tot VA low low limit 0 - 2000000 kVA 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
Tot apparent Pwr Min 0 - 2000000 kVA 1 0 Minimum value
Tot apparent Pwr Max 0 - 2000000 kVA 1 2000000 Maximum value
Tot VA deadband type Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table continues on next page

1086 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Tot W deadband 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Tot W high high Lim -2000000 - kW 1 0 High High limit (physical value)
2000000
Tot W high limit -2000000 - kW 1 0 High limit (physical value)
2000000
Tot W low limit -2000000 - kW 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
2000000
Tot W low low limit -2000000 - kW 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
2000000
Total real Pwr Min -2000000 - kW 1 -2000000 Minimum value
2000000
Total real Pwr Max -2000000 - kW 1 2000000 Maximum value
2000000
Tot W deadband type Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Tot VAr deadband 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Tot VAr Hi high Lim -2000000 - kVar 1 0 High High limit (physical value)
2000000
Tot VAr high limit -2000000 - kVar 1 0 High limit (physical value)
2000000
Tot VAr low limit -2000000 - kVar 1 0 Low limit (physical value)
2000000
Tot VAr low low Lim -2000000 - kVar 1 0 Low Low limit (physical value)
2000000
Tot reactive Pwr Min -2000000 - kVar 1 -2000000 Minimum value
2000000
Tot reactive Pwr Max -2000000 - kVar 1 2000000 Maximum value
2000000
Tot VAr Db type Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Av PF deadband 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Av PF high high Lim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
Av PF high limit -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High limit (physical value)
Av PF low limit -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low limit (physical value)
Av PF low low limit -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
Average PF minimum -1.000 - 0.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
Average PF maximum 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
Av PF deadband type Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Hz deadband 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Hz high high limit 15.000 - 75.000 Hz 0.001 60.000 High High limit (physical value)
Table continues on next page

630 series 1087

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Hz high limit 15.000 - 75.000 Hz 0.001 55.000 High limit (physical value)
Hz low limit 10.000 - 60.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low limit (physical value)
Hz low low limit 10.000 - 60.000 Hz 0.001 40.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
Frequency minimum 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
Frequency maximum 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
Hz deadband type Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 1061: PWRMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Relation constant 0.00 - 1.00 - 0.01 0.00 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement
Voltage zero Db 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.05 Zero point clamping
Current zero Db 0.01 - 1.00 pu 0.01 0.05 Zero point clamping
Tot VA zero deadband 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Tot VA limit Hys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
Tot W zero deadband 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Tot W limit Hys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
Tot VAr zero Db 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Tot VAr limit Hys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
Av PF zero deadband 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Av PF limit Hys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
Hz zero deadband 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Hz limit hysteresis 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)

1088 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.11.6 Monitored data

Table 1062: PWRMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
S_INST REAL - MVA Apparent Power
S_DB REAL - MVA Apparent Power
magnitude of deadband
value
S_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Apparent Power range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
P_INST REAL - MW Active Power
P_DB REAL - MW Active Power magnitude
of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Active Power range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
Q_INST REAL - MVAr Reactive Power
Q_DB REAL - MVAr Reactive Power
magnitude of deadband
value
Q_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Reactive Power range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
PF_INST REAL - - Power Factor i.e. cosfi
PF_DB REAL - - Power Factor magnitude
of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Power Factor range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
ILAG BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Current is lagging voltage
1=TRUE
ILEAD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Current is leading voltage
1=TRUE
F_INST REAL - Hz System frequency
F_DB REAL - Hz System frequency
magnitude of deadband
value
F_RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - System frequency range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low

630 series 1089

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

8.1.11.7 Technical data

Table 1063: PWRMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At all three currents in range 0.10…1.20 × Inn
At all three voltages in range 0.50…1.15 × Un
At the frequency f = fn
Active power and energy in range |PF| > 0.71
Reactive power and energy in range |PF| < 0.71
±1.5% for power (S, P and Q)
±0.015 for power factor
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

8.2 Energy monitoring EPDMMTR

8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Energy monitoring (including power EPDMMTR E E
demand)

8.2.2 Function block

GUID-5C85EAEA-48EB-4B3F-8D0C-8C1CA3BA7256 V1 EN

Figure 543: Function block

8.2.3 Functionality
The energy monitoring function EPDMMTR is used to calculate the active and
reactive energy from the respective power inputs P and Q. The function also provides
alarm outputs when the energy exceeds the set limit.

In addition, the function provides the service value of maximum power demand
during the set interval time and the pulse outputs for the measured energy.

1090 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

8.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the energy-monitoring function can be described using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-7BA2DEA2-A5E6-41A0-9E36-3DEEEADC7B9B V1 EN

Figure 544: Functional module diagram

Zero-point clamping
Zero point clamping is used to ignore the possible noise in the input signals. The
measured values below the zero point-clamping limits are forced to zero. W zero
deadband and VAr zero deadband are the settings used to set the limit. Enable zero
deadband can be set to “Yes” or “No” to enable or disable the function.

This module takes care of the directionality of the energy measured based on the set
reference direction. The Active energy Dir and Reactive energy Dir settings can be
used to set the reference directions for forward and reverse, active and reactive energy
flows respectively. All the positive values, dependent on the set reference direction,
are calculated and displayed in the forward outputs and the negative values in the
reverse outputs. However, both forward and reverse output values are displayed as
absolute values, that is, positive values. The active power, from supply to load, is
shown in forward direction when Active energy Dir is set to “Forward”. The active
power is shown in reverse direction when Active energy Dir is set to “Reverse”. The
same applies to reactive energy calculation.

Energy calculation
This module calculates the linear average of the active and reactive energies over a set
time interval Demand period, based on the measured powers. The interval can be set
to “1”, “5”, “10”, “15”, “30”, “60” or “180” minutes. A new energy value is obtained
once a minute, indicating the actual energy over the energy time interval preceding the
update time. The energy values, based on sliding average and the final output value,
are updated at the end of the time interval. For example, the energy value based on the
setting interval of “180” minutes is displayed in the output for the first time after 180

630 series 1091

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

minutes and the value is calculated from the interval t0 – t180. The next value is
displayed at the moment t180+1 and it is based on average between t0+1 – t180+1.

In the outputs, the energy values are calculated based on the set Demand period.

Energy = Average power calculated over the demand period × Demand period.

The accumulation of the energy values is based on the same principles as demand
energy calculation. The accumulated values are always calculated from the one-
minute values by summing, independent of the set Demand period. The accumulation
feature can be enabled by setting Enable accumulation to “Yes” and it can be disabled
by setting Enable accumulation to “No”. The binary input STACM, can also be used
for starting the accumulation. RSTACM is used to reset the accumulation. The
accumulated energy calculations can start from predefined offset values using the
Forward Wh Initial and Reverse Wh Initial settings for the accumulated active energy
values and Forward VArh initial and Reverse VArh initial settings for the accumulated
reactive-energy values.

EAFACM and EARACM are the analog value outputs of the accumulated active-energy
values in forward and reverse directions respectively. ERFACM and ERRACM are the
analog value outputs of the accumulated reactive-energy values in forward and
reverse directions respectively. These accumulated values are available in the
monitored data view, so there is a possibility of saturation for these outputs. To handle
this, the hidden parameter Energy Acc Lim setting is used. It is fixed to value 1 000 000
MWh. Whenever the accumulated energy crosses Energy Acc Lim, there is an
increment on the energy counter value and the accumulated energy value becomes
zero. EAFCNT and EARCNT are the counter values for accumulated active energy.
ERFCNT and ERVCNT are the counter values for accumulated reactive energy. The
RSTACM input is also used to reset the counter output values.

ACMST is the binary output indicating the start of the accumulation.

The pulse outputs, EAFPULSE, EARPULSE, ERFPULSE and ERRPULSE, are

activated based on the calculated values of forward and reverse, active and reactive
accumulated energy. The number of pulses depends on the energy quantity per pulse
determined by the Forward Wh Acc Pls, Reverse Wh Acc Pls, Forward VArh Acc Pls
and Reverse VArh Acc Pls settings. For instance, if the active accumulated forward-
energy value is 1 MWh and Forward Wh Acc Pls is 100 KWh, 10 pulses of
EAFPULSE is generated. The pulse-on-and-off time duration can be set using the
Pulse on time and Pulse off time settings.

During the demand period, the BCR (binary counter reading) representations of the
calculated energy are available as pulse counter outputs. The integer binary counter
outputs EAFDMD_BCR and EARDMD_BCR represent the active energy in the forward
and reverse directions respectively. The energy quantity per count is defined by the
Forward Wh Itrv Pls and Reverse Wh Itrv Pls settings. For instance, if the active-
forward-demand energy for the set interval is 100 kWh and Forward Wh Itrv Pls is 10
kWh, the EAFDMD_BCR value is equal to 10. Similarly, the integer binary counter
outputs ERFDMD_BCR and ERRDMD_BCR represent the reactive energy in the

1092 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

forward and reverse directions respectively. The energy quantity per count is defined
by the Forward VArh Itrv Pls and Reverse VArh Itrv Pls settings.

The BCR representations of the accumulated energy are available as pulse counter
outputs. The integer binary counter outputs EAFACM_BCR and EARACM_BCR
represent the accumulated active energy in the forward and reverse directions
respectively. The energy quantity per count is defined by the Forward Wh Acc Pls and
Reverse Wh Acc Pls settings. For instance, if the accumulated forward-energy value
is 500 kWh and Forward Wh Acc Pls is 10 kWh, the EAFACM_BCR value is equal to
50. Similarly, the integer binary counter outputs ERFACM_BCR and ERRACM_BCR
represent the accumulated reactive energy in the forward and reverse directions
respectively. The energy quantity per count is defined by the Demand Varh Pls Qty
and Supply Varh Pls Qty settings.

Limit supervision
The limit supervision module supervises the energy values for each demand period for
the limits defined by Energy active limit and Energy reactive limit. When the active
energy values for the demand period exceeds Energy active limit, the binary alarm
outputs EAFALM and EARALM are activated. When the reactive energy values for the
demand period exceeds Energy reactive limit, the binary alarm outputs ERFALM and
ERRALM are activated.

Maximum power demand calculator

The power demand is obtained by dividing the average energy in the interval with the
set Demand period. The active power demand outputs PAFDMD and PARDMD in
forward and reverse directions and the reactive power demand outputs PRFDMD and
PRRDMD are available in the monitored data view.

The maximum demand value is initially zero. After the first Demand period, the
calculated power demand is stored as the maximum power demand. Subsequently,
whenever the calculated power demand exceeds the maximum power demand
calculated earlier, the new values of maximum power demand are updated. The
maximum power demand is reset with the RSTDMD binary input. The maximum
demand values MAXPAFDMD, MAXPARDMD, MAXPRFDMD and MAXPRRDMD are
available in the monitored data view.

8.2.5 Application
EPDMMTR measures and monitors the energy values from the connected power
signals. The functionality includes zero point clamping, energy calculation,
accumulation of the energy values and maximum power demand. The reference
directions for positive and negative active and reactive energy flows can be set.

The function has a zero point clamping detection to ignore noise in the input signals.
The zero point clamping detection function forces the input signal values under zero-
value detection level to zero. The clamping limit can be set and the functionality can
be enabled or disabled with the Enable zero deadband setting.

630 series 1093

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

EPDMMTR calculates the linear average of the measured power signal over set time
interval. The time interval can be set and it varies between one minute and three hours.

The alarm output signals indicate if the periodic accumulated energy value exceeds
the limit set by the user during that energy interval. The maximum power demand for
the set interval is calculated.

The accumulated values are calculated by summing the one-minute energy values.
The calculation of the accumulated values are independent of the energy calculations
based on the time interval which can be set. The accumulated values are displayed as
power unit hours in the outputs. The accumulation can be started or reset with binary
inputs. The accumulated energy is also available as pulse counter outputs.

8.2.6 Signals
Table 1064: EPDMMTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
P_INST REAL 0 Measured active power
Q_INST REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STACM BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
RSTACM BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated energy reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

Table 1065: EPDMMTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ACMST BOOLEAN Start of accumulating energy values.
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFAL BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set
interval
EARAL BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set
interval
ERFAL BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in
set interv
ERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in
set interv
EAFACM REAL Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws
EARACM REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws
ERFACM REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value in
VArS
ERRACM REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in
VArS

1094 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

8.2.7 Settings
Table 1066: EPDMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
Forward Wh Acc Pls 1 - 10000 kWh 1 100 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
Reverse Wh Acc Pls 1 - 10000 kWh 1 100 Pulse quantity for active reverse
accumulated energy value
Forward VArh Acc Pls 1 - 10000 kVarh 1 100 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
accumulated energy value
Reverse VArh Acc Pls 1 - 10000 kVarh 1 100 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
accumulated energy value
Forward Wh Itrv Pls 1 - 10000 kWh 1 100 Pulse quantity for active forward energy of
set interval
Reverse Wh Itrv Pls 1 - 10000 kWh 1 100 Pulse quantity for active reverse energy of
set interval
Forward VArh ItrvPls 1 - 10000 kVarh 1 100 Pulse quantity for reactive forward energy
of set interval
Reverse VArh ItrvPls 1 - 10000 kVarh 1 100 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse energy
of set interval
Demand period 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
Pulse on time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
Pulse off time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in
secs
Enable accumulation No - - No Activate the accumulation of energy
Yes values

Table 1067: EPDMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Active energy Dir Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
Reactive energy Dir Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
Energy active limit 1 - 10000000 kWh 1 1000000 Active energy limit
Energy reactive lim 1 - 10000000 kVarh 1 1000 Reactive energy limit
W zero deadband 0.001 - 10000.000 kW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active Power
VAr zero deadband 0.001 - 10000.000 kVar 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
Forward Wh initial 0 - 10000000 kWh 1 0 Preset Initial value for forward active
energy
Table continues on next page

630 series 1095

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Reverse Wh initial 0 - 10000000 kWh 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse active
energy
Forward VArh initial 0 - 10000000 kVarh 1 0 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
energy
Reverse VArh initial 0 - 10000000 kVarh 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
energy
Enable zero deadband No - - Yes Enable of zero point clamping detection
Yes function

8.2.8 Measured values

Table 1068: EPDMMTR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
P_INST REAL 0 Measured active power
Q_INST REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STACM BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
RSTACM BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated energy reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

8.2.9 Monitored data

Table 1069: EPDMMTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ACMST BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Start of accumulating
1=TRUE energy values.
EAFAL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm for active forward
1=TRUE energy exceed limit in set
interval
EARAL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm for active reverse
1=TRUE energy exceed limit in set
interval
ERFAL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm for reactive
1=TRUE forward energy exceed
limit in set interv
ERRAL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm for reactive
1=TRUE reverse energy exceed
limit in set interv
EAFDMD_BCR INTEGER - - Last forward active
energy value for set
interval (BCR)
EARDMD_BCR INTEGER - - Last reverse active
energy value for set
interval (BCR)
ERFDMD_BCR INTEGER - - Last forward reactive
energy value for set
interval (BCR)
Table continues on next page

1096 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 8
Measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

ERRDMD_BCR INTEGER - - Last reverse reactive
energy value for set
interval (BCR)
EAFACM_BCR INTEGER - - Accumulated forward
active energy value
(BCR)
EARACM_BCR INTEGER - - Accumulated reverse
active energy value
(BCR)
ERFACM_BCR INTEGER - - Accumulated forward
reactive energy value
(BCR)
ERVACM_BCR INTEGER - - Accumulated reverse
reactive energy value
(BCR)
EAFCNT INTEGER - - Counter for accumulated
forward active energy
exceed limit
EARCNT INTEGER - - Counter for accumulated
reverse active energy
exceed limit
ERFCNT INTEGER - - Counter for accumulated
forward reactive energy
exceed limit
ERRCNT INTEGER - - Counter for accumulated
reverse reactive energy
exceed limit
EAFACM REAL - MWh Accumulated forward
active energy value in Ws
EARACM REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse
active energy value in Ws
ERFACM REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward
reactive energy value in
VArS
ERRACM REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse
reactive energy value in
VArS
PAFDMD REAL - MW Last forward active power
demand value for set
interval
PARDMD REAL - MW Last reverse active power
demand value for set
interval
PRFDMD REAL - MVAr Last forward reactive
power demand value for
set interval
PRRDMD REAL - MVAr Last reverse reactive
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPAFDMD REAL - MW Maximum forward active
power demand value for
set interval
Table continues on next page

630 series 1097

Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRS756508 F
Measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

MAXPARDMD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFDMD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward
reactive power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRRDMD REAL - MVAr Maximum reverse
reactive power demand
value for set interval

8.2.10 Technical data

Table 1070: EPDMMTR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At all three currents in range 0.10…1.20 × Inn
At all three voltages in range 0.50…1.15 × Un
At the frequency f = fn
Active power and energy in range |PF| > 0.71
Reactive power and energy in range |PF| < 0.71
±1.5% for energy
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

8.2.11 Technical revision history

Table 1071: EPDMMTR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Internal improvements

1098 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Section 9 Power quality measurement functions

9.1 Voltage unbalance VSQVUB

9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage unbalance power quality VSQVUB PQMUBU PQMUBV
function

9.1.2 Function block

GUID-AB05A93B-1338-4052-9FA1-A482471A2315 V1 EN

Figure 545: Function block

9.1.3 Functionality
The voltage unbalance power quality function VSQVUB monitors voltage unbalance
conditions in power transmission and distribution networks. It can be applied to
identify a network and load unbalance that cause sustained voltage unbalance.
VSQVUB is also used to monitor the commitment of the power supply utility of
providing a high-quality, that is, a balanced voltage supply on a continuous basis.

VSQVUB uses five different methods for calculating voltage unbalance. The methods
are the negative-sequence voltage magnitude, zero-sequence voltage magnitude, ratio
of the negative-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-sequence voltage
magnitude, ratio of the zero-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-sequence
voltage magnitude or ratio of maximum phase voltage magnitude deviation from the
mean voltage magnitude to the mean of the phase voltage magnitude.

VSQVUB includes an alarm and a blocking functionality. It is possible to block a set

of function outputs or the function itself, if desired.

9.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

630 series 1099

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

The operation of the voltage unbalance power quality function can be described using
a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-C87394EF-DE57-49C2-B8A4-1DD26A86D2F6 V2 EN

Figure 546: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P and U3P are used for
feeding the necessary analog signals to the function.

Average calculation
VSQVUB calculates two sets of measured voltage unbalance values, a three-second
and a ten-minute non-sliding average value. The three-second average value is used
for continuous monitoring.

The module uses five different methods for the average calculation. The required
method can be selected using the Unb detection method parameter.

When the "Negative sequence" mode is selected with Unb detection method, the
voltage unbalance is calculated based on the negative-sequence voltage magnitude.
Similarly, when the "Zero sequence" mode is selected, the voltage unbalance is
calculated based on the zero-sequence voltage magnitude. When the "Neg to Pos Seq"
mode is selected, the voltage unbalance is calculated based on the ratio of the
negative-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-sequence magnitude. When the
"Zero to Pos Seq" mode is selected, the voltage unbalance is calculated based on the
ratio of the zero-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-sequence magnitude.
When the "Ph vectors Comp" mode is selected, the ratio of the maximum phase
voltage magnitude deviation from the mean voltage magnitude to the mean of the
phase voltage magnitude is used for voltage unbalance calculation.

The calculated three-second value and the ten-minute value are available through the
outputs 3S_MN_UNB and 10MIN_MN_UNB.

Voltage unbalance detector

The three-second average value is continuously calculated and compared to the set
value Unbalance start val. If the voltage unbalance exceeds this limit, the
MN_UNB_AL output is activated. A maximum value calculation based on the values
of the three-second sliding average is started when MN_UNB_AL is active. The highest
unbalance value AL_UNB_VAL and the time of occurrence AL_UNB_DATE are
available in the monitored data view.

1100 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

The BLK_ALARM input is used to block the alarm output MN_UNB_VAL. In this case,
the other outputs are updated normally. However, the activation of the BLOCK input
blocks the alarm output MN_UNB_VAL and also the internal recorders. All the other
outputs are updated normally.

Recorded data
The information required for a later fault analysis is stored when the recorded data
module is triggered. This happens when a voltage unbalance is detected by the voltage
unbalance detector module.

Three sets of recorded data are available in total. The sets are saved in data banks 1-3.
The data bank 1 holds the most recent recorded data. Older data are moved to the
subsequent banks (1→2 and 2→3) when a voltage unbalance is detected. When all
three banks have data and a new unbalance is detected, the most recent data set is
placed into bank 1 and the data in bank 3 are overwritten by the data from bank 2.

The recorded data can be reset with the RESET binary input signal or by navigating to
the HMI reset (Main menu / Clear / Clear recorded data / VSQVUBx).

When a voltage unbalance is detected in the system, the function responds with the
MN_UNB_AL alarm signal. During the alarm situation, the function stores the
maximum magnitude and the time of occurrence. The recorded data are stored when
MN_UNB_AL is deactivated.
Parameter name Description
n Recording time Time of recording data
n AL_UNB_VAL Maximum 3 sec voltage unbalance

9.1.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

9.1.6 Application

Ideally, in a three-phase or multiphase power system, the frequency and voltage

magnitude of all the phases are equal and the phase displacement between any two
consecutive phases is also equal. This is called a balanced source. Apart from the
balanced source, usually the power system network and loads are also balanced,
implying that the network impedance and load impedance in each phase are equal. In
some cases, the condition of a balance network and load are not met completely, which
leads to a current and voltage unbalance in the system. Providing unbalanced supply
voltage to some of the loads causes a detrimental effect on their operation. For

630 series 1101

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

example, a small magnitude of a negative-sequence voltage applied to an induction

motor results in a significant heating of the motor.

A balanced supply, balanced network and balanced load lead to a better power quality.
When one of these conditions is disturbed, the power quality is deteriorated.
VSQVUB monitors such voltage unbalance conditions in power transmission and
distribution networks. VSQVUB calculates two sets of measured values, a three-
second and a ten-minute non-sliding average value. The three-second average value
is used for continuous monitoring while the ten-minute average value is used for
percentile calculation for a longer period of time. It can be applied to identify the
network and load unbalance that may cause sustained voltage unbalance. A single-
phase or phase-to-phase fault in the network or load side can create voltage unbalance
but, as faults are usually isolated in a short period of time, the voltage unbalance is not
a sustained one. Therefore, the voltage unbalance may not be covered by VSQVUB.

The function uses five different methods for calculating voltage unbalance. The
methods are:
• Negative-sequence voltage magnitude
• Zero-sequence voltage magnitude
• Ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence voltage magnitude
• Ratio of zero-sequence to positive-sequence voltage magnitude
• Ratio of maximum phase voltage magnitude deviation from the mean voltage
magnitude to the mean of phase voltage magnitude.

Usually, the ratio of the negative-sequence voltage magnitude to the positive-

sequence voltage magnitude is selected for monitoring the voltage unbalance.
However, other methods may also be used if required.

9.1.7 Signals
Table 1072: VSQVUB Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs except measured values
BLK_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 Block alarm outputs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Resets the registered values of the data banks

1102 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Table 1073: VSQVUB Output signals

Name Type Description
MN_UNB_AL BOOLEAN Alarm active when 3 sec voltage unbalance
exceeds the limit
3S_MN_UNB REAL Sliding 3 second mean value of voltage unbalance
10MIN_MN_UNB REAL Sliding 10 minutes mean value of voltage
unbalance
AL_UNB_VAL REAL Maximum 3 sec sliding mean voltage unbalance
measured

9.1.8 Settings
Table 1074: VSQVUB Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation mode Off / On
On
Unb detection method Negative Seq - - Neg to Pos Seq Set the operation mode for voltage
Zero sequence unbalance calculation.
Neg to Pos Seq
Zero to Pos Seq
Ph vectors Comp

Table 1075: VSQVUB Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector phase / phase to
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Unbalance start Val 1 - 100 % 1 1 Voltage unbalance start value

9.1.9 Measured values

Table 1076: VSQVUB Measured values
Name Type Default Description
U_RMS_A REAL 0.0 Voltage amptitude (RMS) phase A
U_RMS_B REAL 0.0 Voltage amptitude (RMS) phase B
U_RMS_C REAL 0.0 Voltage amptitude (RMS) phase C
U_AMPL_RES REAL 0.0 Residual voltage amplitude
U1_AMPL REAL 0.0 Positive sequence voltage amplitude
U2_AMPL REAL 0.0 Negative sequence voltage amplitude
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs except measured values
BLK_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 Block alarm outputs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Resets the registered values of the data banks

630 series 1103

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

9.1.10 Monitored data

Table 1077: VSQVUB Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MN_UNB_AL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm active when 3 sec
1=TRUE voltage unbalance
exceeds the limit
3S_MN_UNB REAL - % Sliding 3 second mean
value of voltage
unbalance
10MIN_MN_UNB REAL - % Sliding 10 minutes mean
value of voltage
unbalance
AL_UNB_VAL REAL - % Maximum 3 sec sliding
mean voltage unbalance
measured
AL_UNB_DATE INTEGER - - Time of max 3 sec sliding
mean voltage unbalance
occurrence
1 Recording time INTEGER - - Time of recording data in
record data bank1
1 AL_UNB_VAL REAL - % Record data of bank1 for
maximum 3 sec voltage
unbalance
1 AL_UNB_DATE INTEGER - - Time of occurrence of the
unbalance of time stamp
bank1
2 Recording time INTEGER - - Time of recording data in
record data bank2
2 AL_UNB_VAL REAL - % Record data of bank2 for
maximum 3 sec voltage
unbalance
2 AL_UNB_DATE INTEGER - - Time of occurrence of the
unbalance of time stamp
bank2
3 Recording time INTEGER - - Time of recording data in
record data bank3
3 AL_UNB_VAL REAL - % Record data of bank3 for
maximum 3 sec voltage
unbalance
3 AL_UNB_DATE INTEGER - - Time of occurrence of the
unbalance of time stamp
bank3

9.2 Current harmonics CMHAI

9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current harmonics CMHAI PQM3I PQM3I

1104 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

9.2.2 Function block

GUID-35372773-72BC-407C-8B20-FDC04752D07C V1 EN

Figure 547: Function block

9.2.3 Functionality
The current harmonics monitoring function CMHAI is a sample-based function
designed for monitoring the waveform distortion in distribution and transmission
networks.

CMHAI is used for monitoring the individual current harmonic components (up to
20th), total harmonic distortion (THD) and total demand distortion (TDD). The
function monitors the selected phase or the phase with the highest THD or TDD.
CMHAI provides three-second mean RMS values of the harmonic components, THD
and TDD.

The function also includes an alarm functionality. Each harmonic and the THD or
TDD RMS values are monitored; exceeding the selected limit raises an alarm. When
CMHAI enters an alarm state (a harmonic RMS limit is exceeded), it also tracks the
maximum THD or TDD value. After the alarm state is exited, the function provides
THD or TDD and RMS values for each harmonic component.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block a set of function

outputs or the function itself.

9.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the current waveform distortion measurement can be described with
a module diagram. All modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-C1CD8BBA-EDE3-467D-A4EA-A4DE7CB44923 V2 EN

Figure 548: Functional module diagram

630 series 1105

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

9.2.4.1 Distortion measurement

Distortion measurement is a sample-based module which measures the quasi-

stationary (slowly varying) harmonics up to 20th. The distortion measurement does
not include rapidly changing harmonics, interharmonics or other spurious
components. The harmonics are calculated when the amplitude of fundamental
current is above Low limit setting. The distortion measurement module calculates
THD or TDD depending on the Distortion factor setting.

L
∑ I k2
k =2
THD =
I1
GUID-DC202724-9091-4B76-B0E9-8F2BA0757252 V1 EN (Equation 178)

Ik RMS value of current harmonic component 2…L (L=20)

I1 RMS value of current fundamental component

L
∑ I k2
k =2
TDD =
IN
GUID-F9B80BE9-F994-4BE0-8D07-833B3A6A524A V1 EN (Equation 179)

IN RMS value of current fundamental component

9.2.4.2 Average calculation 3 seconds

This module calculates the three-phase three-second average THD or TDD and each
individual 1...20 harmonic value, which are used for continuous monitoring. The
output values 3SMNH(1…20)_A, 3SMNTHD_A, 3SMNTDD_A, 3SMNH(1…
20)_B, 3SMNTHD_B, 3SMNTDD_B, 3SMNH(1…20)_C, 3SMNTHD_C and
3SMNTDD_C are available in monitored data view.

9.2.4.3 Harmonic distortion detector

The Measuring mode setting defines which phase is being monitored. “Phase A”,
“Phase B” and “Phase C” are available for selecting phases. The "Worst case"
monitoring mode is used for the phase with the highest measured THD or TDD value.
This means that the actual monitored phase can change continuously. The
MONITORED_PH output indicates the actual phase.

The three-second average THD or TDD and each individual 2...20 harmonic value are
continuously calculated and compared to the set value THD limit value, TDD limit
value and 2...20 H limit Val. If the value exceeds limit, the ALM_MN_H,
ALM_MN_THD and ALM_MN_TDD outputs are activated.

1106 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

The NO_ALM_MN_H output indicates the number of harmonics components that

exceeds the limit value.

Tracking of maximum values based on the three-second averages is started when at

least one of the outputs ALM_MN_H, ALM_MN_THD or ALM_MN_TDD is active. The
MAXH(1…20), MAXTHD and MAXTDD outputs indicate the maximum harmonic
values occurred during the previous alarm state. These outputs are available in the
monitored data view.

The MAXHDATE output indicates the date and time at which the last maximum
harmonic distortion (THD / TDD) was measured.

The BLK_ALARM input is used to block all the alarm outputs (ALM_MN_H,
ALM_MN_THD and ALM_MN_TDD). In this case, all the other outputs are updated
normally. Activation of the BLOCK input blocks all the alarm outputs and the outputs
indicating the maximum value.

The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if
the current signal slightly varies above or below the limit value setting.

9.2.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

9.2.6 Application
The power quality in standards is defined through the characteristics of the supply
voltage. Transients, short- and long-duration voltage variations, unbalance and
waveform distortion are the key characteristics describing the power quality. The
power quality is, however, a customer-driven issue. It can be said that any power
problem concerning the voltage or current that results in the failure or misoperation of
the customer equipment is a power quality problem.

Harmonic distortion in a power system is caused by nonlinear devices. Electronic

power converter loads constitute the most important class of nonlinear loads in a
power system. Switch-mode power supplies in a number of single-phase electronic
equipment (personal computers, printers, copiers and so on) have very high third-
harmonic content in the current. The three-phase electronic power converters (dc/ac
drives) do not generate third-harmonic currents, but they can be a significant source
of harmonics.

The harmonic voltage distortion in a power system depends on the current distortion
produced by the nonlinear loads and on the impedance characteristics visible to each
load. The most sensitive equipment to voltage harmonics is the data processing and
communication equipment. However, these devices are considerable current

630 series 1107

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

harmonic sources. These devices are susceptible to the misoperation caused by a

harmonic distortion. For example, in computers and medical instruments
considerably low harmonic levels can result in malfunctions that can have serious
consequences. In a rotating machinery, the major effect of harmonic voltages and
currents is increased heating due to iron and copper losses at the harmonic
frequencies.

The power quality monitoring is an essential service that utilities can provide for the
industries and key customers. A monitoring system provides information about the
system disturbances and their possible causes. The monitoring system can also detect
problem conditions throughout the system before they can cause customer
complaints, equipment malfunctions and even equipment damage or failure. Power
quality problems are not limited to the utility side of the system. In fact, the majority
of power quality problems are localized within the customer facilities. Thus, the
power quality monitoring is not only an effective customer service strategy, but also
a way to protect a utility's reputation for a quality power and service.

xMHAI provides a convenient method for monitoring power quality by means of a

voltage or current waveform distortion. The function monitors the voltage or current
harmonics in the power transmission and distribution networks.

9.2.7 Signals
Table 1078: CMHAI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 Block alarm outputs

Table 1079: CMHAI Output signals

Name Type Description
MONITORED_PH INTEGER Indicates the actual phase monitored 1=Ph A,
2=Ph B, 3=Ph C
ALM_MN_H BOOLEAN Alarm signal when harmonic RMS value is greater
than limit
ALM_MN_THD BOOLEAN Alarm signal when THD value is greater than limit
ALM_MN_TDD BOOLEAN Alarm signal when TDD value is greater than limit
NO_ALM_MN_H INTEGER Highest harmonic that exceeded its alarm limit

1108 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

9.2.8 Settings
Table 1080: CMHAI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
Measuring mode Phase A - - Worst case Specifies the monitored phase
Phase B
Phase C
Worst case
Low limit 1.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 1.0 Minimum amplitude limit for fundamental
component

Table 1081: CMHAI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
2nd H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 2nd harmonic
component
3rd H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 3rd harmonic
component
4th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 4th harmonic
component
5th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 5th harmonic
component
6th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 6th harmonic
component
7th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 7th harmonic
component
8th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 8th harmonic
component
9th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 9th harmonic
component
10th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 10th harmonic
component
11th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 11th harmonic
component
12th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 12th harmonic
component
13th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 13th harmonic
component
14th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 14th harmonic
component
15th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 15th harmonic
component
16th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 16th harmonic
component
Table continues on next page

630 series 1109

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

17th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 17th harmonic
component
18th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 18th harmonic
component
19th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 19th harmonic
component
20th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 20th harmonic
component
THD limit value 1.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 50.0 Limit for THD
TDD limit value 1.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 50.0 Limit for TDD
Distortion factor THD - - THD Defines the distortion factor used in limit
TDD supervision
Relative hysteresis 0-5 % 1 2 Relative hysteresis for limit supervision of
mean values

9.2.9 Measured values

Table 1082: CMHAI Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 Block alarm outputs

9.2.10 Monitored Data

Table 1083: CMHAI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3SMNH1_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 1st
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH2_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 2nd
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH3_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 3rd
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH4_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 4th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH5_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 5th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH6_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 6th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH7_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 7th
harmonic for phase A
Table continues on next page

1110 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNH8_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 8th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH9_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 9th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH10_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 10th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH11_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 11th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH12_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 12th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH13_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 13th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH14_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 14th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH15_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 15th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH16_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 16th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH17_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 17th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH18_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 18th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH19_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 19th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH20_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 20th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNTHD_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of THD for phase A
3SMNTDD_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of TDD for phase A
3SMNH1_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 1st
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH2_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 2nd
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH3_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 3rd
harmonic for phase B
Table continues on next page

630 series 1111

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNH4_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 4th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH5_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 5th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH6_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 6th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH7_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 7th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH8_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 8th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH9_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 9th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH10_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 10th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH11_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 11th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH12_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 12th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH13_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 13th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH14_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 14th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH15_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 15th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH16_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 16th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH17_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 17th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH18_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 18th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH19_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 19th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH20_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 20th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNTHD_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of THD for phase B
Table continues on next page

1112 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNTDD_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of TDD for phase B
3SMNH1_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 1st
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH2_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 2nd
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH3_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 3rd
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH4_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 4th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH5_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 5th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH6_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 6th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH7_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 7th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH8_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 8th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH9_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 9th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH10_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 10th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH11_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 11th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH12_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 12th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH13_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 13th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH14_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 14th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH15_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 15th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH16_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 16th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH17_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 17th
harmonic for phase C
Table continues on next page

630 series 1113

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNH18_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 18th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH19_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 19th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH20_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 20th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNTHD_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of THD for phase C
3SMNTDD_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of TDD for phase C
MAXH1 REAL - % Max 1st harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH2 REAL - % Max 2nd harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH3 REAL - % Max 3rd harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH4 REAL - % Max 4th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH5 REAL - % Max 5th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH6 REAL - % Max 6th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH7 REAL - % Max 7th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH8 REAL - % Max 8th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH9 REAL - % Max 9th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH10 REAL - % Max 10th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH11 REAL - % Max 11th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH12 REAL - % Max 12th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH13 REAL - % Max 13th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
Table continues on next page

1114 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

MAXH14 REAL - % Max 14th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH15 REAL - % Max 15th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH16 REAL - % Max 16th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH17 REAL - % Max 17th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH18 REAL - % Max 18th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH19 REAL - % Max 19th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH20 REAL - % Max 20th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXTHD REAL - % Max THD updated after
exiting alarm state
MAXTDD REAL - % Max TDD updated after
exiting alarm state
MAXHDATE INTEGER - - Date and time when
maximum harmonic
occurred
MONITORED_PH INTEGER 1=Phase A - Indicates the actual
2=Phase B phase monitored 1=Ph A,
3=Phase C 2=Ph B, 3=Ph C
ALM_MN_H BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal when
1=TRUE harmonic RMS value is
greater than limit
ALM_MN_THD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal when THD
1=TRUE value is greater than limit
ALM_MN_TDD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal when TDD
1=TRUE value is greater than limit
NO_ALM_MN_H INTEGER - - Highest harmonic that
exceeded its alarm limit

9.3 Voltage harmonics VPPMHAI and VPHMHAI

9.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage harmonics (phase-to-phase) VPPMHAI PQM3Upp PQM3Vpp
Voltage harmonics (phase-to-earth) VPHMHAI PQM3Upe PQM3Vpg

630 series 1115

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

9.3.2 Function block

GUID-F66695D0-3028-47B7-A547-8A17F86F4CDE V1 EN

GUID-68E614C4-F4EC-4527-844C-7869A17A03CE V1 EN

Figure 549: Function block

9.3.3 Functionality
The voltage harmonics monitoring function VPxMHAI is a sample-based function
designed for monitoring the waveform distortion in distribution and transmission
networks.

VPxMHAI is used for monitoring the individual voltage harmonic components (up to
20th), total harmonic distortion (THD) and total demand distortion (TDD). The
function monitors the selected phase or the phase with the highest THD or TDD.
VPxMHAI provides three-second mean RMS values of the harmonic components,
THD and TDD.

The function also includes an alarm functionality. Each harmonic and THD or TDD
RMS values are monitored; exceeding the selected limit raises an alarm. When
VPxMHAI enters an alarm state (a harmonic RMS limit is exceeded), it also tracks the
maximum THD or TDD value. After the alarm state is exited, the function provides
THD or TDD and RMS values for each harmonic component.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block a set of function

outputs or the function itself.

9.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the voltage waveform distortion measurement function can be

described with a module diagram. All modules in the diagrams are explained in the
next sections.

1116 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

GUID-8DF02E0C-A5CA-4246-A215-43AA15CBAC94 V2 EN

Figure 550: VPHMHAI functional module diagram

GUID-4BF39EB6-063D-4CAF-950F-57D8B10374DB V2 EN

Figure 551: VPPMHAI functional module diagram

9.3.4.1 Distortion measurement

Distortion measurement is a sample-based module which measures the quasi-

stationary (slowly varying) harmonics up to 20th. The distortion measurement does
not include rapidly changing harmonics, interharmonics or other spurious
components. The harmonics are calculated when the amplitude of fundamental
voltage is above the Low limit setting. The distortion measurement module calculates
THD or TDD depending on the Distortion factor setting.

L
∑ U k2
k =2
THD =
U1
GUID-A4AF0573-3879-4629-932A-20A6316FA919 V1 EN (Equation 180)

Uk RMS value of voltage harmonic component 2…L (L = 20)

U1 RMS value of voltage fundamental component

L
∑ U k2
k =2
TDD =
UN
GUID-4C127049-51AD-49C0-B9F1-81FF126A87E8 V1 EN (Equation 181)

UN RMS value of voltage fundamental component

630 series 1117

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

9.3.4.2 Average calculation 3 seconds

This module calculates the three-phase three-second average THD or TDD and each
individual 1...20 harmonic value which are used for continuous monitoring. For
VPHMHAI, the output values 3SMNH(1…20)_A, 3SMNTHD_A, 3SMNTDD_A,
3SMNH(1…20)_B, 3SMNTHD_B, 3SMNTDD_B, 3SMNH(1…20)_C,
3SMNTHD_C and 3SMNTDD_C are available in the monitored data view. Similarly
for VPPMHAI, the output values 3SMNH(1…20)_AB, 3SMNTHD_AB,
3SMNTDD_AB, 3SMNH(1…20)_BC, 3SMNTHD_BC, 3SMNTDD_BC,
3SMNH(1…20)_CA, 3SMNTHD_CA and 3SMNTDD_CA are available in the
monitored data view.

9.3.4.3 Harmonic distortion detector

The Measuring mode setting defines which phase is being monitored. “Phase A”,
“Phase B” and “Phase C” for VPHMHAI and "Phase AB", “Phase BC” and “Phase
CA” for VPPMHAI are the options available for selecting the phases. The "Worst
case" monitoring mode is used for the phase with the highest measured THD or TDD
value. This means that the actual phase monitored can change continuously. The
MONITORED_PH output indicates the actual phase.

The three-second average THD or TDD and each individual 2...20 harmonic value is
continuously calculated and compared to the set value THD limit value, TDD limit
value and 2...20 H limit Val. If a value exceeds the limit, the ALM_MN_H,
ALM_MN_THD and ALM_MN_TDD outputs are activated respectively.

The NO_ALM_MN_H output indicates the number of harmonics components that

exceeds the respective limit value.

The tracking of maximum values based on the three second averages starts when at
least one of the outputs ALM_MN_H, ALM_MN_THD or ALM_MN_TDD is active. The
MAXH(1...20), MAXTHD and MAXTDD outputs indicate the maximum harmonic values
occurred during the previous alarm state. These outputs are available in the monitored
data view.

The MAXHDATE output indicates the date and time at which the last maximum
harmonic distortion (THD / TDD) was measured.

The BLK_ALARM input is used to block all the alarm outputs (ALM_MN_H,
ALM_MN_THD and ALM_MN_TDD). In this case, all the other outputs are updated
normally. Activation of the BLOCK input blocks all the alarm outputs and the output
indicating the maximum values.

The Relative hysteresis setting is used for preventing an unnecessary oscillations if the
voltage signal varies above or below the limit value setting.

1118 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

9.3.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

9.3.6 Application
The power quality in standards is defined through the characteristics of the supply
voltage. Transients, short and long duration voltage variations, unbalance and
waveform distortion are the key characteristics describing power quality. The power
quality is however a customer-driven issue. It can be said that any power problem
concerning the voltage or current that results in the failure or misoperation of the
customer equipment is a power quality problem.

Harmonic distortion in a power system is caused by nonlinear devices. Electronic

power converter loads constitute the most important class of the nonlinear loads in a
power system. A number of single-phase electronic equipments (personal computers,
printers, copiers and so on) in the switch mode power supplies, have a high third-
harmonic content in the current. The three-phase electronic power converters (dc/ac
drives) do not generate the third-harmonic currents, but they can be a significant
source of harmonics.

The harmonic voltage distortion in a power system depends on the current distortion
produced by the nonlinear loads and on the impedance characteristics visible to each
load. The most sensitive equipment to voltage harmonics is the data processing and
communication equipment, However, these devices are considerable current
harmonic sources. These devices are susceptible to the misoperation caused by a
harmonic distortion. For example, in computers and medical instruments
considerably low harmonic levels can result in malfunctions that can have serious
consequences. In a rotating machinery, the major effect of harmonic voltages and
currents is an increased heating due to iron and copper losses at the harmonic
frequencies.

The power quality monitoring is an essential service utility that can be provided for the
industries and key customers. Monitoring system provides the information about the
system disturbances and their possible causes. The monitoring system can also detect
problem conditions throughout the system before they can cause customer
complaints, equipment malfunctions, and even equipment damage or failure. Power
quality problems are not limited to the utility side of the system. In fact, the majority
of power quality problems are localized within the customer facilities. Thus, the
power quality monitoring is not only an effective customer service strategy, but also
a way to protect the quality of the utility reputation for a quality power and service.

xMHAI provides a convenient method for monitoring the power quality by means of
a voltage or current waveform distortion. The function monitors the voltage or current
harmonics in the power transmission and distribution networks. xMHAI produces

630 series 1119

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

statistical data about the harmonic distortion which is comparable to the standard
definitions of good quality power. In addition, the function provides a short term, three
seconds average and maximum values for the THD and individual harmonics.

9.3.7 Signals
Table 1084: VPHMHAI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 Block alarm outputs

Table 1085: VPPMHAI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 Block alarm outputs

Table 1086: VPHMHAI Output signals

Name Type Description
MONITORED_PH INTEGER Indicates the actual phase monitored 1=Ph A,
2=Ph B, 3=Ph C
ALM_MN_H BOOLEAN Alarm signal when harmonic RMS value is greater
than limit
ALM_MN_THD BOOLEAN Alarm signal when THD value is greater than limit
ALM_MN_TDD BOOLEAN Alarm signal when TDD value is greater than limit
NO_ALM_MN_H INTEGER Highest harmonic that exceeded its alarm limit

Table 1087: VPPMHAI Output signals

Name Type Description
MONITORED_PH INTEGER Indicates the actual phase monitored 1=Ph A,
2=Ph B, 3=Ph C
ALM_MN_H BOOLEAN Alarm signal when harmonic RMS value is greater
than limit
ALM_MN_THD BOOLEAN Alarm signal when THD value is greater than limit
ALM_MN_TDD BOOLEAN Alarm signal when TDD value is greater than limit
NO_ALM_MN_H INTEGER Highest harmonic that exceeded its alarm limit

1120 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

9.3.8 Settings
Table 1088: VPHMHAI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
Measuring mode Phase A - - Worst case Specifies the monitored phase
Phase B
Phase C
Worst case
Low limit 1.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 1.0 Minimum amplitude limit for fundamental
component

Table 1089: VPHMHAI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
2nd H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 2nd harmonic
component
3rd H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 3rd harmonic
component
4th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 4th harmonic
component
5th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 5th harmonic
component
6th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 6th harmonic
component
7th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 7th harmonic
component
8th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 8th harmonic
component
9th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 9th harmonic
component
10th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 10th harmonic
component
11th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 11th harmonic
component
12th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 12th harmonic
component
13th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 13th harmonic
component
14th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 14th harmonic
component
15th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 15th harmonic
component
16th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 16th harmonic
component
Table continues on next page

630 series 1121

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

17th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 17th harmonic
component
18th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 18th harmonic
component
19th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 19th harmonic
component
20th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 20th harmonic
component
THD limit value 1.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 50.0 Limit for THD
TDD limit value 1.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 50.0 Limit for TDD
Distortion factor THD - - THD Defines the distortion factor used in limit
TDD supervision
Relative hysteresis 0-5 % 1 2 Relative hysteresis for limit supervision of
mean values

Table 1090: VPPMHAI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
Measuring mode Phase AB - - Worst case Specifies the monitored phase
Phase BC
Phase CA
Worst case
Low limit 1.0 - 50.0 % 0.1 1.0 Minimum amplitude limit for fundamental
component

Table 1091: VPPMHAI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
2nd H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 2nd harmonic
component
3rd H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 3rd harmonic
component
4th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 4th harmonic
component
5th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 5th harmonic
component
6th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 6th harmonic
component
7th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 7th harmonic
component
8th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 8th harmonic
component
Table continues on next page

1122 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

9th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 9th harmonic
component
10th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 10th harmonic
component
11th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 11th harmonic
component
12th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 12th harmonic
component
13th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 13th harmonic
component
14th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 14th harmonic
component
15th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 15th harmonic
component
16th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 16th harmonic
component
17th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 17th harmonic
component
18th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 18th harmonic
component
19th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 19th harmonic
component
20th H limit Val 1.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Limit for RMS value of 20th harmonic
component
THD limit value 1.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 50.0 Limit for THD
TDD limit value 1.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 50.0 Limit for TDD
Distortion factor THD - - THD Defines the distortion factor used in limit
TDD supervision
Relative hysteresis 0-5 % 1 2 Relative hysteresis for limit supervision of
mean values

9.3.9 Measured values

Table 1092: VPHMHAI Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 Block alarm outputs

Table 1093: VPPMHAI Measured values

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 Block alarm outputs

630 series 1123

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

9.3.10 Monitored Data

Table 1094: VPHMHAI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3SMNH1_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 1st
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH2_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 2nd
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH3_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 3rd
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH4_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 4th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH5_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 5th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH6_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 6th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH7_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 7th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH8_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 8th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH9_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 9th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH10_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 10th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH11_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 11th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH12_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 12th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH13_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 13th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH14_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 14th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH15_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 15th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH16_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 16th
harmonic for phase A
Table continues on next page

1124 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNH17_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 17th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH18_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 18th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH19_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 19th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNH20_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 20th
harmonic for phase A
3SMNTHD_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of THD for phase A
3SMNTDD_A REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of TDD for phase A
3SMNH1_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 1st
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH2_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 2nd
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH3_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 3rd
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH4_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 4th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH5_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 5th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH6_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 6th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH7_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 7th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH8_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 8th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH9_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 9th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH10_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 10th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH11_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 11th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH12_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 12th
harmonic for phase B
Table continues on next page

630 series 1125

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNH13_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 13th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH14_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 14th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH15_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 15th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH16_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 16th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH17_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 17th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH18_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 18th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH19_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 19th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNH20_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 20th
harmonic for phase B
3SMNTHD_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of THD for phase B
3SMNTDD_B REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of TDD for phase B
3SMNH1_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 1st
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH2_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 2nd
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH3_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 3rd
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH4_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 4th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH5_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 5th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH6_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 6th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH7_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 7th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH8_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 8th
harmonic for phase C
Table continues on next page

1126 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNH9_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 9th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH10_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 10th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH11_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 11th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH12_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 12th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH13_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 13th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH14_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 14th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH15_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 15th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH16_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 16th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH17_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 17th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH18_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 18th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH19_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 19th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNH20_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 20th
harmonic for phase C
3SMNTHD_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of THD for phase C
3SMNTDD_C REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of TDD for phase C
MAXH1 REAL - % Max 1st harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH2 REAL - % Max 2nd harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH3 REAL - % Max 3rd harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH4 REAL - % Max 4th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
Table continues on next page

630 series 1127

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

MAXH5 REAL - % Max 5th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH6 REAL - % Max 6th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH7 REAL - % Max 7th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH8 REAL - % Max 8th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH9 REAL - % Max 9th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH10 REAL - % Max 10th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH11 REAL - % Max 11th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH12 REAL - % Max 12th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH13 REAL - % Max 13th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH14 REAL - % Max 14th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH15 REAL - % Max 15th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH16 REAL - % Max 16th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH17 REAL - % Max 17th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH18 REAL - % Max 18th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH19 REAL - % Max 19th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH20 REAL - % Max 20th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXTHD REAL - % Max THD updated after
exiting alarm state
MAXTDD REAL - % Max TDD updated after
exiting alarm state
Table continues on next page

1128 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

MAXHDATE INTEGER - - Date and time when
maximum harmonic
occurred
MONITORED_PH INTEGER 1=Phase A - Indicates the actual
2=Phase B phase monitored 1=Ph A,
3=Phase C 2=Ph B, 3=Ph C
ALM_MN_H BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal when
1=TRUE harmonic RMS value is
greater than limit
ALM_MN_THD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal when THD
1=TRUE value is greater than limit
ALM_MN_TDD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal when TDD
1=TRUE value is greater than limit
NO_ALM_MN_H INTEGER - - Highest harmonic that
exceeded its alarm limit

Table 1095: VPPMHAI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3SMNH1_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 1st
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH2_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 2nd
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH3_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 3rd
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH4_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 4th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH5_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 5th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH6_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 6th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH7_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 7th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH8_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 8th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH9_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 9th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH10_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 10th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH11_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 11th
harmonic for phase AB
Table continues on next page

630 series 1129

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNH12_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 12th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH13_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 13th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH14_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 14th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH15_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 15th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH16_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 16th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH17_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 17th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH18_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 18th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH19_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 19th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNH20_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 20th
harmonic for phase AB
3SMNTHD_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of THD for phase
AB
3SMNTDD_AB REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of TDD for phase
AB
3SMNH1_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 1st
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH2_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 2nd
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH3_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 3rd
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH4_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 4th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH5_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 5th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH6_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 6th
harmonic for phase BC
Table continues on next page

1130 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNH7_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 7th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH8_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 8th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH9_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 9th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH10_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 10th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH11_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 11th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH12_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 12th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH13_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 13th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH14_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 14th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH15_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 15th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH16_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 16th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH17_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 17th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH18_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 18th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH19_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 19th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNH20_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 20th
harmonic for phase BC
3SMNTHD_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of THD for phase
BC
3SMNTDD_BC REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of TDD for phase
BC
3SMNH1_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 1st
harmonic for phase CA
Table continues on next page

630 series 1131

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNH2_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 2nd
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH3_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 3rd
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH4_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 4th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH5_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 5th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH6_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 6th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH7_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 7th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH8_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 8th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH9_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 9th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH10_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 10th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH11_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 11th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH12_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 12th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH13_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 13th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH14_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 14th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH15_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 15th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH16_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 16th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH17_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 17th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH18_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 18th
harmonic for phase CA
Table continues on next page

1132 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3SMNH19_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 19th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNH20_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
RMS value of 20th
harmonic for phase CA
3SMNTHD_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of THD for phase
CA
3SMNTDD_CA REAL - % Non-sliding 3s mean
value of TDD for phase
CA
MAXH1 REAL - % Max 1st harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH2 REAL - % Max 2nd harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH3 REAL - % Max 3rd harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH4 REAL - % Max 4th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH5 REAL - % Max 5th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH6 REAL - % Max 6th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH7 REAL - % Max 7th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH8 REAL - % Max 8th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH9 REAL - % Max 9th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH10 REAL - % Max 10th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH11 REAL - % Max 11th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH12 REAL - % Max 12th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH13 REAL - % Max 13th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
Table continues on next page

630 series 1133

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

MAXH14 REAL - % Max 14th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH15 REAL - % Max 15th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH16 REAL - % Max 16th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH17 REAL - % Max 17th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH18 REAL - % Max 18th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH19 REAL - % Max 19th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXH20 REAL - % Max 20th harmonic
updated after exiting
alarm state
MAXTHD REAL - % Max THD updated after
exiting alarm state
MAXTDD REAL - % Max TDD updated after
exiting alarm state
MAXHDATE INTEGER - - Date and time when
maximum harmonic
occurred
MONITORED_PH INTEGER 1=Phase AB - Indicates the actual
2=Phase BC phase monitored 1=Ph A,
3=Phase CA 2=Ph B, 3=Ph C
ALM_MN_H BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal when
1=TRUE harmonic RMS value is
greater than limit
ALM_MN_THD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal when THD
1=TRUE value is greater than limit
ALM_MN_TDD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm signal when TDD
1=TRUE value is greater than limit
NO_ALM_MN_H INTEGER - - Highest harmonic that
exceeded its alarm limit

9.4 Voltage variation PHQVVR

9.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage variation PHQVVR PQMU PQMV

1134 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

9.4.2 Function block

GUID-E951A8E5-29D8-46B5-A051-7510C61144DA V1 EN

Figure 552: Function block

9.4.3 Functionality
The voltage variation measurement function PHQVVR is used for measuring the
short-duration voltage variations in distribution networks.

Power quality in the voltage waveform is evaluated by measuring voltage swells, dips
and interruptions. PHQVVR includes single-phase and three-phase voltage variation
modes.

Typically, short-duration voltage variations are defined to last more than half of the
nominal frequency period and less than one minute. The maximum magnitude (in the
case of a voltage swell) or depth (in the case of a voltage dip or interruption) and the
duration of the variation can be obtained by measuring the RMS value of the voltage
for each phase. International standard 61000-4-30 defines the function to be
implemented using the RMS value of the voltage.

PHQVVR contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block a set of function

outputs or the function itself, if desired.

9.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

When the setting is set to "Off", the counter outputs are stored in the nonvolatile
memory and SWELLCNT, DIPCNT and INTCNT are reset.

The operation of the voltage variation detection function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 1135

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

GUID-25C749E6-E307-46CF-8244-87F8E81BB6F0 V1 EN

Figure 553: Functional module diagram. Group signal I3P and U3P are used for
feeding the necessary analog signals to the function.

9.4.4.1 Variation detection

Variation detection compares the measured voltage to the limit settings. The input
parameter Voltage selection is used to select whether phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase
voltages are used for power quality monitoring. When there is a permanent
undervoltage or overvoltage, the Reference voltage setting can be set to this voltage
level to avoid the undesired voltage dip or swell indications. This is accomplished by
converting the variation limits with the Reference voltage setting in the variation
detection module. In other words, when there is a voltage different from the nominal
voltage, the Reference voltage setting is set to that voltage.

The voltage detection module monitors continuously the voltage waveform for
detecting voltage swells, dips and interruptions. When the measured RMS value drops
below Voltage dip set and simultaneously stays above the value of Voltage Int set, the
DIPST output is activated. If the voltage drops below the value of Voltage Int set, the
INTST output is activated. When the measured RMS value rises above the value of
Voltage swell set, the SWELLST output is activated.

The detection principle for voltage interruption is a special case. The

INTST output is activated when the voltage levels of all monitored
phases (defined with the Phase supervision setting) drop below the
Voltage Int setting.

1136 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Voltage swell set

U_A

U_C
U_B
Voltage dip set

Voltage Int set

TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE

GUID-A9CD43FF-E859-4E3D-8095-8A71CBCACBCC V1 EN

Figure 554: Detection of three-phase voltage interruption

Variation detection measures the voltage variation magnitude on each phase

separately. This per-phase measurement enables the detection of, for example, single-
phase earth faults. The ST_A_AB, ST_B_BC and ST_C_CA outputs are used to
indicate on which phase voltage variation is detected. The Phase supervision
parameter defines which voltage phase or phases are monitored. If a voltage phase is
selected to be monitored, the function assumes it to be connected to a voltage
measurement channel. In other words, if an unconnected phase is monitored, the
function falsely detects voltage interruption on that particular phase.

The maximum magnitude and depth are defined as a percentage value calculated from
the difference between the referenced and the measured voltage. For example, a 70
percent depth means that the minimum magnitude of a voltage dip variation is 70
percent of the reference voltage amplitude).

The BLK_ST input is used to block all the start outputs (ST_A_AB, ST_B_BC,
ST_C_CA, SWELLST, DIPST and INTST). In this case, all other outputs (registers,
operate outputs and counters) are updated normally. The activation of the BLOCK
input blocks all the outputs, including the start outputs.

9.4.4.2 Duration measurement

The duration of each voltage phase corresponds to the period during which the
measured RMS values remain above or below the corresponding limit.

The duration measurement module measures the voltage variation duration of each
voltage channel separately and also the total variation duration. This means that the
voltage variation may start on one phase and terminate on another phase. The total
variation duration is as shown in Figure 555. The measured value of the total variation
duration is used in the variation validation module for variation validation.

630 series 1137

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

The duration of each voltage phase corresponds to the period during which the
measured TRMS values remain above (swell) or below (dip, interruption) the
corresponding limit.

Besides the three limit settings for the variation types dip and swell, there is also a
specific duration setting for each limit setting. For interruption, there is only one limit
setting common for the three duration settings. The maximum duration setting is
common for all variation types.

The duration measurement module measures the voltage variation duration of each
phase voltage separately when the Phase mode setting is "Single Phase". The phase
variation durations are independent. However, when the Phase mode setting is "Three
Phase", voltage variation may start only when all the monitored phases are active. An
example of variation duration when Phase mode is "Single Phase" can be seen in
Figure 555. The voltage variation in the example is detected as an interruption for the
phase B and a dip for the phase A, and also the variation durations are interpreted as
independent U_B and U_A durations. In case of single-phase interruption, the DIPST
output is active when either ST_A or ST_B is active. The measured variation
durations are the times measured between the activation of the ST_A or ST_B outputs
and deactivation of the ST_A or ST_B outputs. When the Phase mode setting is
"Three Phase", the example case does not result in any activation.

GUID-22014C0F-9FE2-4528-80BA-AEE2CD9813B8 V1 EN

Figure 555: Duration measurements of single-phase interruption regarded as a

voltage dip

9.4.4.3 Variation validation

The validation criterion for a valid voltage variation is that the measured total
variation duration should be between the set value of the minimum and maximum
duration (the V Var Dur point 1 and V Var Dur point 2 settings). In case of a three-
phase interruption as shown in Figure 554, the measured total variation duration is the
time measured between the first activation of the DIPST output and the last
deactivation of the DIPST output.

1138 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

A valid voltage variation is indicated with the SWELLOPR, DIPOPR, INTOPR or

DIPSWELLOPR outputs. These outputs indicate also the type of the detected
variation. The functionality of these outputs is shown in Figure 556 for start and
operation outputs for concurrent dip and swell. After a new valid variation is detected,
the measurement data of that variation are provided and the recorded data are updated
accordingly.

U_A
Voltage swell set
U_C

U_B
Voltage dip set

Voltage Int set

TRUE
ST_A_AB FALSE
TRUE
ST_B_BC FALSE
TRUE
ST_C_CA FALSE
TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
TRUE
SWELLOPR FALSE
TRUE
DIPOPR FALSE
INTOPR TRUE
FALSE
DIPSWELLOPR TRUE
FALSE
GUID-C415DC17-E9D5-4995-99B6-A020B678EC09 V1 EN

Figure 556: Start and operation outputs in case of concurrent dip and swell. The
start outputs ST_A_AB, ST_B_BC, ST_C_CA, SWELLST. DIPST and
INTST are activated by the variation detection module.

Each time a voltage variation is validated, the variation counter SWELLCNT,

DIPCNT or INTCNT is increased by one according to the variation type. In case of a
concurrent voltage dip and voltage swell, both SWELLCNT and DIPCNT are
increased by one. These counters are available in the monitored data view on the
LHMI or through tools via communications. All variation counters can be reset with
the binary input signal RS_CNT.

The SWELLOPR, DIPOPR, INTOPR and DIPSWELLOPR outputs

stay activated for only 10 ms.

When the measured total variation duration is longer than the maximum duration V
Var Dur point 2, the corresponding outputs are set to FALSE. Furthermore, the

630 series 1139

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

function block is disabled for as long as the variation remains active in order to prevent
unnecessary indications.

The variation validation module contains a blocking functionality. The BLOCK input
is used to block all the outputs of the function. However, the internal state of the
function remains unchanged.

9.4.5 Recorded data

The information required for a later fault analysis is stored when the recorded data
module is triggered. This happens when a valid voltage variation is detected.

Three sets of recorded data are available in total. The data are saved in data banks 1-3.
The data bank 1 holds always the most recent recorded data. Older ones are moved into
the subsequent banks (1→2 and 2→3) when a valid voltage variation is detected.
When all three banks have data and a new variation is detected, the most recent data
are placed into the bank 1 and the data in bank 3 become overwritten by the data from
bank 2.

The recorded data can be reset with the RESET binary input signal or by navigating to
the HMI reset (Main menu / Clear / Clear recorded data / PHQVVRx).

U_C amplitude

Voltage swell set

U_C

U_A
U_B U_A duration

Voltage dip set

Variation start

Variation stop

U_B duration

Voltage Int set

U_B amplitude & U_A amplitude &

timestamp timestamp

GUID-C8AD5D24-038C-4274-97A0-7E2982241E57 V1 EN

Figure 557: Valid recorded voltage dip

When the voltage variation starts, the function stores the phase current magnitudes
preceding the activation moment. Also the initial voltage magnitudes are stored at the
same moment. If the variation is, for example, a two-phase voltage dip, the voltage
magnitude of the non-active phase is stored from this same moment. The function

1140 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

tracks each variation-active voltage phase, and the minimum or maximum magnitude,
corresponding to the overvoltage or undervoltage, is stored. The time instant at which
the minimum or maximum magnitude is measured is also stored for each voltage
phase that is variation active. The recorded data are stored when variation stops.
Table 1096: PHQVVR recorded data
Parameter name Description
Variation type Variation type
Recording time Fault time stamp
n Varn Str Tm PhA Phase A variation start time
n Varn Str Tm PhB Phase B variation start time
n Varn Str Tm PhC Phase C variation start time
n Varn time PhA Phase A voltage magnitude measuring time
n Varn time PhB Phase B voltage magnitude measuring time
n Varn time PhC Phase C voltage magnitude measuring time
n Varn A PhA Phase A current magnitude
n Varn A PhB Phase B current magnitude
n Varn A PhC Phase C current magnitude
n Varn V PhA Phase A voltage magnitude
n Varn V PhB Phase B voltage magnitude
n Varn V PhC Phase C voltage magnitude
n Varn Dur PhA Phase A variation duration
n Varn Dur PhB Phase B variation duration
n Varn Dur PhC Phase C variation duration

Table 1097: Enumeration values for the PHQVVR recorded data parameters
Parameter name Enum name Value
Variation type No variation "0"
Variation type Swell "1"
Variation type Dip "2"
Variation type Interruption "3"
Variation type Dip and swell "4"

9.4.6 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

630 series 1141

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

9.4.7 Application
Voltage variations are the most typical power quality variations on the public electric
network. Typically, short-duration voltage variations are defined to last more than
half of the nominal frequency period and less than one minute (European Standard EN
50160 and IEEE Std 1159-1995).

These short-duration voltage variations are almost always caused by a fault condition.
Depending on where the fault is located, it can cause either a temporary voltage rise
(swell) or voltage drop (dip). A special case of voltage variation is the complete loss
of voltage (interruption).

PHQVVR is used for measuring short-duration voltage variations in distribution

networks. The power quality is evaluated in the voltage waveform by measuring the
voltage swells, dips and interruptions.

V Var Dur point 1 V Var Dur point 2

max duration
swell
min duration

Voltage swell set

magnitude
U_B

Voltage dip set

duration
dip

Voltage Int set

interruption

GUID-EF7957CE-E6EF-483E-A879-ABD003AC1AF9 V1 EN

Figure 558: Duration and voltage magnitude limits for swell, dip and interruption
measurement

Voltage dips disturb the sensitive equipment such as computers connected to the
power system and may result in the failure of the equipment. Voltage dips are typically
caused by faults occurring in the power distribution system. Typical reasons for the
faults are lightning strikes and tree contacts. In addition to fault situations, the
switching of heavy loads and starting of large motors also cause dips.

Voltage swells cause extra stress for the network components and the devices
connected to the power system. Voltage swells are typically caused by the earth faults
that occur in the power distribution system.

1142 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Voltage interruptions are typically associated with the switchgear operation related to
the occurrence and termination of short circuits. The operation of a circuit breaker
disconnects a part of the system from the source of energy. In the case of overhead
networks, automatic reclosing sequences are often applied to the circuit breakers that
interrupt fault currents. All these actions result in a sudden reduction of voltages on all
voltage phases.

Due to the nature of voltage variations, the power quality standards do not specify any
acceptance limits. There are only indicative values for, for example, voltage dips in
the European standard EN 50160. However, the power quality standards like the
international standard IEC 61000-4-30 specify that the voltage variation event is
characterized by its duration and magnitude.

Voltage variation measurement can be done to the phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase

voltages. The power quality standards do not specify whether the measurement should
be done to phase or phase-to-phase voltages. However, in some cases it is preferable
to use phase-to-earth voltages for measurement.

9.4.8 Signals
Table 1098: PHQVVR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal for resetting registers
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal for resetting counters

Table 1099: PHQVVR Output signals

Name Type Description
SWELLOPR BOOLEAN Voltage swell detected
DIPOPR BOOLEAN Voltage dip detected
INTOPR BOOLEAN Voltage interruption detected
DIPSWELLOPR BOOLEAN Concurrent voltage dip and voltage swell detected
ST_A BOOLEAN Voltage variation present on phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Voltage variation present on phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Voltage variation present on phase C
SWELLST BOOLEAN Voltage swell active
DIPST BOOLEAN Voltage dip active
INTST BOOLEAN Voltage interruption active

630 series 1143

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

9.4.9 Settings
Table 1100: PHQVVR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Voltage swell set 100.0 - 200.0 % 0.1 110.0 Swell limit in % of declared voltage
Voltage dip set 0.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 90.0 Dip limit in % of declared voltage
Voltage Int set 0.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 1.0 Interruption limit in % of declared voltage
V Var Dur point 1 0.008 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Minimum voltage variation duration
V Var Dur point 2 0.008 - 60.000 s 0.001 60.000 Maximum voltage variation duration

Table 1101: PHQVVR Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Phase supervision A or AB - - All Monitored voltage phase
B or BC
A&B or AB&BC
C or CA
A&C or AB&CA
B&C or BC&CA
All

Table 1102: PHQVVR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On

Table 1103: PHQVVR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Voltage selection phase-to-earth - - phase-to-earth Parameter to select phase or phase-to-
phase-to-phase phase voltages
Reference voltage 80.0 - 120.0 % 0.1 100.0 Reference voltage in %

9.4.10 Measured values

Table 1104: PHQVVR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_RMS_A REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase A
I_RMS_B REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase B
I_RMS_C REAL 0 Current amplitude (RMS) phase C
U_RMS_A REAL 0 Voltage amplitude (RMS) phase A
Table continues on next page

1144 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Default Description

U_RMS_B REAL 0 Voltage amplitude (RMS) phase B
U_RMS_C REAL 0 Voltage amplitude (RMS) phase C
U_RMS_AB REAL 0 Voltage amplitude (RMS) phase AB
U_RMS_BC REAL 0 Voltage amplitude (RMS) phase BC
U_RMS_CA REAL 0 Voltage amplitude (RMS) phase CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all outputs
BLK_ST BOOLEAN 0 Block start outputs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal for resetting registers
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal for resetting counters

9.4.11 Monitored data

Table 1105: PHQVVR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWELLOPR BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage swell detected
1=TRUE
DIPOPR BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage dip detected
1=TRUE
INTOPR BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage interruption
1=TRUE detected
DIPSWELLOPR BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Concurrent voltage dip
1=TRUE and voltage swell
detected
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage variation present
1=TRUE on phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage variation present
1=TRUE on phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage variation present
1=TRUE on phase C
SWELLST BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage swell active
1=TRUE
DIPST BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage dip active
1=TRUE
INTST BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage interruption
1=TRUE active
SWELLCNT INTEGER - - Counter for detected
voltage swells
DIPCNT INTEGER - - Counter for detected
voltage dips
INTCNT INTEGER - - Counter for detected
voltage interruptions
1 Variation type INTEGER 0=No variation - Record data of bank 1 for
1=Swell variation type
3=Interruption
2=Dip
4=Dip and swell
Table continues on next page

630 series 1145

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

1 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of bank 1 for
fault time stamp
1 Varn Str Tm PhA INTEGER - - Record data of bank 1 for
phase A variation start
time
1 Varn Str Tm PhB INTEGER - - Record data of bank 1 for
phase B variation start
time
1 Varn Str Tm PhC INTEGER - - Record data of bank 1 for
phase C variation start
time
1 Varn time PhA INTEGER - - Record data of bank 1 for
phase A voltage
magnitude meas time
1 Varn time PhB INTEGER - - Record data of bank 1 for
phase B voltage
magnitude meas time
1 Varn time PhC INTEGER - - Record data of bank 1 for
phase C voltage
magnitude meas time
1 Varn A PhA REAL - % Record data of bank 1 for
phase A current
magnitude
1 Varn A PhB REAL - % Record data of bank 1 for
phase B current
magnitude
1 Varn A PhC REAL - % Record data of bank 1 for
phase C current
magnitude
1 Varn V PhA REAL - % Record data of bank 1 for
phase A voltage
magnitude
1 Varn V PhB REAL - % Record data of bank 1 for
phase B voltage
magnitude
1 Varn V PhC REAL - % Record data of bank 1 for
phase C voltage
magnitude
1 Varn Dur PhA REAL - ms Record data of bank 1 for
phase A variation
duration
1 Varn Dur PhB REAL - ms Record data of bank 1 for
phase B variation
duration
1 Varn Dur PhC REAL - ms Record data of bank 1 for
phase C variation
duration
2 Variation type INTEGER 0=No variation - Record data of bank 2 for
1=Swell variation type
3=Interruption
2=Dip
4=Dip and swell
Table continues on next page

1146 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

2 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of bank 2 for
fault time stamp
2 Varn Str Tm PhA INTEGER - - Record data of bank 2 for
phase A variation start
time
2 Varn Str Tm PhB INTEGER - - Record data of bank 2 for
phase B variation start
time
2 Varn Str Tm PhC INTEGER - - Record data of bank 2 for
phase C variation start
time
2 Varn time PhA INTEGER - - Record data of bank 2 for
phase A voltage
magnitude meas time
2 Varn time PhB INTEGER - - Record data of bank 2 for
phase B voltage
magnitude meas time
2 Varn time PhC INTEGER - - Record data of bank 2 for
phase C voltage
magnitude meas time
2 Varn A PhA REAL - % Record data of bank 2 for
phase A current
magnitude
2 Varn A PhB REAL - % Record data of bank 2 for
phase B current
magnitude
2 Varn A PhC REAL - % Record data of bank 2 for
phase C current
magnitude
2 Varn V PhA REAL - % Record data of bank 2 for
phase A voltage
magnitude
2 Varn V PhB REAL - % Record data of bank 2 for
phase B voltage
magnitude
2 Varn V PhC REAL - % Record data of bank 2 for
phase C voltage
magnitude
2 Varn Dur PhA REAL - ms Record data of bank 2 for
phase A variation
duration
2 Varn Dur PhB REAL - ms Record data of bank 2 for
phase B variation
duration
2 Varn Dur PhC REAL - ms Record data of bank 2 for
phase C variation
duration
3 Variation type INTEGER 0=No variation - Record data of bank 3 for
1=Swell variation type
3=Interruption
2=Dip
4=Dip and swell
Table continues on next page

630 series 1147

Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRS756508 F
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

3 Recording time INTEGER - - Record data of bank 3 for
fault time stamp
3 Varn Str Tm PhA INTEGER - - Record data of bank 3 for
phase A variation start
time
3 Varn Str Tm PhB INTEGER - - Record data of bank 3 for
phase B variation start
time
3 Varn Str Tm PhC INTEGER - - Record data of bank 3 for
phase C variation start
time
3 Varn time PhA INTEGER - - Record data of bank 3 for
phase A voltage
magnitude meas time
3 Varn time PhB INTEGER - - Record data of bank 3 for
phase B voltage
magnitude meas time
3 Varn time PhC INTEGER - - Record data of bank 3 for
phase C voltage
magnitude meas time
3 Varn A PhA REAL - % Record data of bank 3 for
phase A current
magnitude
3 Varn A PhB REAL - % Record data of bank 3 for
phase B current
magnitude
3 Varn A PhC REAL - % Record data of bank 3 for
phase C current
magnitude
3 Varn V PhA REAL - % Record data of bank 3 for
phase A voltage
magnitude
3 Varn V PhB REAL - % Record data of bank 3 for
phase B voltage
magnitude
3 Varn V PhC REAL - % Record data of bank 3 for
phase C voltage
magnitude
3 Varn Dur PhA REAL - ms Record data of bank 3 for
phase A variation
duration
3 Varn Dur PhB REAL - ms Record data of bank 3 for
phase B variation
duration
3 Varn Dur PhC REAL - ms Record data of bank 3 for
phase C variation
duration

1148 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 9
Power quality measurement functions

9.4.12 Technical data

Table 1106: PHQVVR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.2% of reference
voltage
Reset ratio Typically 0.96 (Swell), 1.04 (Dip, Interruption)

630 series 1149

Technical Manual
1150
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Section 10 Control functions

10.1 Apparatus control

10.1.1 Introduction
The apparatus control is a combination of functions which continuously supervise and
control the circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. The
permission to operate an apparatus is given after the evaluation of other functions'
conditions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and the
external or internal blockings.

10.1.2 Application
The apparatus control is a combination of functions which continuously supervise and
control the circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. The
permission to operate an apparatus is given after the evaluation of other functions'
conditions, such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and external
or internal blockings.

The commands to an apparatus can be initiated from the Control Center (CC), the
station HMI or the local HMI on the IED front.

GUID-7A0B6A4F-08C3-4619-ABF8-866F8FC23F85 V1 EN

Figure 559: Apparatus control function

630 series 1151

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

The features in the apparatus control function are:

• Operation of primary apparatuses
• Select-Execute principle to give a high reliability
• Selection and reservation function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of the updating of position indications
• Substitution of position indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchrocheck
• Operation counter

The apparatus control is realized with a number of function blocks designated:

• LocalRemote switch function (LOCREM)
• Bay control function (QCCBAY)
• Switch controller function (GNRLCSWI)
• Circuit breaker function (DAXCBR)
• Circuit switch function (DAXSWI)
• Interlocking interface (SCILO)

The last three functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The signal flow
between these function blocks is as shown in Figure 560. The application description
for these functions can be found below. SCILO is the logical node for interlocking.

The control operation can be performed from the LHMI. If the administrator has
defined users with the User Manager Tool (UTM), the local/remote switch is under
authority control. If not, the default, that is, the factory user, is the SuperUser, who can
perform control operations from the LHMI without LogOn. The default position of the
local/remote switch is on remote.

1152 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

GUID-65876561-511D-4620-BA05-05ED673E2F72 V1 EN

Figure 560: Signal flow between the apparatus control function blocks

10.1.3 Interaction between modules

A typical bay with apparatus control function consists of a combination of logical
nodes or functions.
• The switch controller function GNRLCSWI initializes all the operations for one
apparatus and performs the actual switching and also more or less the interface to
the drive of one apparatus. GNRLCSWI includes the position handling as well as
the control of the position.
• The circuit breaker function DAXCBR is the process interface to the circuit
breaker for the apparatus control function.
• The circuit switch function DAXSWI is the process interface to the disconnector
or the earthing switch for the apparatus control function.
• The bay control function QCCBAY fulfils the bay-level functions for the
apparatuses, such as operator place selection and blockings for a complete bay.
• The overcurrent protection function PHxPTOC trips the breaker in case of
overcurrent with the tripping logic function TRPPTRC.

630 series 1153

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

• The autoreclosing function DARREC consists of the facilities to automatically

close a tripped breaker with respect to a number of configurable conditions.
• The logical node SCILO provides the information to GNRLCSWI if SCILO is
permitted to operate due to the switchyard topology. The interlocking conditions
are evaluated with a separate logic and connected to SCILO.
• The synchronism-check function SYNCRSYN calculates the voltage phasor
difference from both sides of an open breaker and compares it to predefined
switching conditions (synchrocheck). Also the case that one side is dead
(energizing-check) is included.

1154 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

GUID-3EA2929A-B765-4F6B-A056-1CD01CEE832D V1 EN

Figure 561: Example overview of the interactions between functions in a typical

bay

10.1.4 Operation principle

A bay handles, for example, a power line, transformer, reactor or a capacitor bank. The
different primary apparatuses within the bay are controlled with the apparatus control
function directly by the operator or indirectly by the automatic sequences.

A primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within the substation

automation system. Therefore, the object-oriented approach with a function module

630 series 1155

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

that handles the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the
process information used by higher-level control functions.

The primary apparatuses such as breakers, disconnectors and earthing switch are
controlled and supervised by the switch controller function GNRLCSWI. The number
and type of signals connected to a breaker, disconnector and earthing switch are
almost the same. The function module used to handle all three types of apparatuses is
also same.

The module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard through an interface
module with a number of digital inputs and outputs. The circuit breaker function
DAXCBR acts as an interface module for circuit breaker, and the earthing switch
function DAXSWI acts as an interface module for disconnectors and earthing switch.
There are four types of function blocks available to cover most of the control and
supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control
function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number of these functions
to be used depends on the number of apparatuses to be controlled.

The function block LocalRemote used to handle the local/remote switch also belongs
to the control function.

10.1.5 Local/remote switch LOCREM

10.1.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local/Remote switch control function LOCREM R/L R/L

10.1.5.2 Function block

GUID-F8DC8400-B050-4387-B273-326EFC4BFDDA V1 EN

Figure 562: Function block

10.1.5.3 Functionality

The signals from an external local/remote switch are applied with the local remote
switch function LOCREM to the bay control function QCCBAY. The value of the
Control mode setting is set to select if the switch signals are coming from the local
HMI or from an external local/remote switch connected with the binary inputs.

1156 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.1.5.4 Operation principle

The local/remote switch interface function LOCREM handles the signals coming
from the local/remote switch. The CTRLOFF, LOCCTRL and REMCTRL inputs of
LOCREM are connected to the binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the
switch available on local HMI is used, LOCREM is not used.

The local-remote switching is done under strict password control. This is activated by
defining an administrator and user with their passwords. The default password is
“administrator”. The selected position local-remote or local and remote is indicated by
the LED is displayed on Local-Remote indicator available on the front panel.

10.1.5.5 Application

LOCREM handles the signals coming from the local/remote switch. The CTRLOFF,
LOCCTRL and REMCTRL inputs of LOCREM are connected to the binary inputs if an
external switch is used. When a switch available on local HMI is used, it is not
necessary to use the LOCREM function.

The local-remote switching is under strict password control. This is activated by

defining an administrator and user with their passwords. The default password is
“administrator”. The selected position local-remote or local and remote is indicated by
the LED displayed on local-remote indicator available on front panel.

10.1.5.6 Signals
Table 1107: LOCREM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control

10.1.5.7 Settings
Table 1108: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Control mode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR-switch switch

630 series 1157

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.1.5.8 Measured values

Table 1109: LOCREM Measured values
Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control

10.1.6 Bay control QCCBAY

10.1.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Bay control function QCCBAY CBAY CBAY

10.1.6.2 Function block

GUID-95381B17-6BB5-4E0F-A61A-90E7BB2F94AD V1 EN

Figure 563: Function block

10.1.6.3 Functionality

The bay control function QCCBAY is used to handle the selection of the operator
place per bay. QCCBAY also provides the blocking functions distributed to different
apparatuses within the bay. The functionality of QCCBAY is not defined in the IEC
61850 standard, which means that QCCBAY is a vendor specific logical node.
QCCBAY sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate and blocking
conditions to other functions within the bay, for example, switch control functions,
voltage control functions and measurement functions.

10.1.6.4 Operation principle

Local panel switch

The local panel switch defines the operator place selection. The switch connected to
this function have three positions: "remote", "local" and "off". The positions are
defined so that "remote" means that the operation is allowed from a station/remote
level and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is located on the front
panel of the IED, which means that the position of the switch and its validity
information are connected internally, not with the input/output boards. When the

1158 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

switch is mounted separately on the IED, the signals are connected to the function with
the input/output boards.

When the local panel switch is in the "Off" position, all commands from the remote
and local level are ignored.

To adapt the signals from an external local/remote switch, the local remote switch
function LOCREM is needed.

Permitted Source To Operate PSTO

The actual state of the operator place is presented with the value of the LR_POS output
signal. The LR_POS output value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position.
When the external panel switch is in the "Off" position, the LR_POS output value is
set to 0. In this case, it is not possible to control anything. The permitted source to
operate information is internally delivered to the functions that depend on it
(GNRLCSWI, LSHDPFRQ, OLATCC, VSGGIO and SLGGIO).

Blockings
The blockings state the position indications and commands that are intend to provide
the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured
within a complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are:

• Blocking of position indications: The activation of the BLK_UPD input blocks all
the inputs related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the
bay.
• Blocking of commands: The activation of the BLK_CMD input blocks all the
commands for all configured functions within the bay.

10.1.6.5 Application

QCCBAY is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCCBAY
gives permission to operate from two types of locations either from remote, for
example, control center or station HMI or from local, for example, the local HMI on
the IED. The Local/Remote switch position can also be set to Off, which means no
operator place selected, resulting into a no operation from local or remote.

The bay control function QCCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be
distributed to different apparatuses within the bay. There are two different blocking
alternatives:
• Blocking of update of positions
• Blocking of commands

630 series 1159

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.1.6.6 Signals
Table 1110: QCCBAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLK_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BLK_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command

Table 1111: QCCBAY Output signals

Name Type Description
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

10.1.6.7 Measured values

Table 1112: QCCBAY Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLK_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BLK_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote
position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid

10.1.6.8 Monitored data

Table 1113: QCCBAY Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
LR_POS INTEGER 0=Off - Position of the Local/
1=Local Remote switch
2=Remote
3=Faulty
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Update of position is
1=TRUE blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Function is blocked for
1=TRUE commands
LOC BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Local operation allowed
1=TRUE
REM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Remote operation
1=TRUE allowed

1160 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.1.7 Switch control GNRLCSWI

10.1.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Switch controller function GNRLCSWI I<-> O CB/DC I<-> O CB/DC

10.1.7.2 Function block

A070361 V1 EN

Figure 564: Function block

10.1.7.3 Functionality

The switch controller function GNRLCSWI initializes and supervises all the
functions to properly select and operate switching primary apparatuses. GNRLCSWI
provides with verification checks for the select-execute sequence, that is, the function
checks the conditions before each step of operation. The functions involved for these
condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.

10.1.7.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

Command handling
The two types of command models that can be used are "direct with enhanced
security" and "Select-Before-Operate (SBO)" with enhanced security command
models. The value of the Control Model setting defines the command model to be
used. When the Control model setting is set as "direct with enhanced security", no
selection is required. If Control model is set to "SBO with enhanced security", a
selection is required before execution.

In this function, only a command with enhanced security is supported regarding

position changes. The enhanced security means the command sequence is supervised
in three steps: the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position.
Each step ends with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command

630 series 1161

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence,
the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable
"cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC 61850
communication. The L_CAUSE output signal is read and used from the function
block, for example, in commissioning.

There is no relation between the command direction and the actual

position. For example, if the switch is in closed position, it is possible
to execute a closing command.

The evaluation of the position is done before an executing command. If the value of
Pos dependent setting is set to "Not perm 00/11" and the apparatus position is in the
intermediate or bad state, no executing command is sent. If the parameter is "Always
permit", the execution command is sent regardless of the position value.

The blocking principles are:

• Blocking only commands is possible in several ways
• With the bay control function QCCBAY: The command blocking can be
issued either with the BLK_UPD input or through the IEC 61850 DO (Data
Object) BlkCmd input in QCCBAY.
• With the IEC 61850 DO BlkCmd in GNRLCSWI.
• The BLOCK input signal is used to block the function from DO (Data Object)
Behavior (IEC 61850). If DO Beh is set to "blocked", the function is active but no
outputs or reports are generated. The control commands are rejected and the
functional and configuration data is visible. The DO Beh can be set to "blocked"
with DO Mod of the LN GNRLCSWI or with DO Mod of LLN0 of the logical
device (LD) where GNRLCSWI resides.

The different block conditions affect only the operation of this

function, no blocking signals are forwarded to the other functions. The
blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions

GNRLCSWI works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and synchronizing function
SYNCRSYN. It is assumed that the synchrocheck function operates continuously and
activates the SYNC_OK when all synchronizing conditions are satisfied to the switch
controller GNRLCSWI. The result from the synchrocheck function is evaluated
during the closing execution. If the synchrocheck is overridden, the evaluation of the
synchrocheck state is omitted. Upon a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck
function, the switch controller sends the closing signal EXE_CL to the switch function
DAXCBR.

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the switch
controller sends a start signal START_SYN to the synchronizing function. The

1162 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

function sends a closing command to the switch function when the synchronizing
conditions are fulfilled. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for the
supervision of the synchronizing-in-progress signal is set to 0, which means the
synchronizing function is in the "Off" state. The switch controller sets the attribute
"blocked-by-synchrocheck" in the cause signal.

GNRLCSWI DAXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE

SYNC_OK

START_SYN

SYN_INPRO
SYNCRSYN

.
SYNOK
Synchro Synchronizing
Check function

GUID-2FC9447F-9921-4939-A5B5-AA24931BA5EC V2 EN

Figure 565: Interaction between GNRLCSWI, synchrocheck, synchronizing

function and DAXCBR

Time diagrams
GNRLCSWI uses timers to evaluate different time supervision conditions.

The timer setting Select command time supervises the time between the select and the
execute command signals, that is, the time operator has for performing the command
execution after selecting the object of operation.

GUID-07559B18-C6BD-4255-8E79-0D7B1DFE3417 V1 EN

Figure 566: Select command time

The timer setting Cmd response time supervises the time between the execute
command and command termination.

630 series 1163

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

GUID-28B00CFF-037F-4A97-B96B-0FDCEB2D5701 V1 EN

Figure 567: Cmd response time

The value of the Synchrocheck time setting defines the maximum allowed time
between the execute command and the value of the SYNC_OK input to become true.
The SYNC_OK input is available from synchrocheck function. If the SYNC_OK input
is TRUE at the time of receipt of execute command signal, the value of the timer
setting Synchrocheck time does not start. If SYNC_OK fails to activate within the value
of the Synchrocheck time setting, the START_SY output is activated, which in turn
starts the synchronizing module of SYNCRSYN. When all the synchronizing
conditions are fulfilled, SYNCRSYN provides a closing command. The SYN_INPRO
input indicates that the checks for synchronizing conditions are in process. The
SYN_INPRO input for GNRLCSWI is connected directly from the SYN_INPRO
output of SYNCRSYN function. If SYN_INPRO fails to activate within
Synchronizing time after the receipt of START_SY, the L_CAUSE output is set to 11
indicating “blocked-by-synchrocheck”.

GUID-E7111BFA-56A8-4413-B91E-421E08547074 V1 EN

Figure 568: Synchrocheck time and Synchronizing time

Opening and Closing Command

The output command for opening or closing EXE_OP and EXE_CL can be activated
in various ways. The activation of L_SEL and then L_OPEN results in the EXE_OP
output being set to high. Similarly, the activation of L_SEL and then L_CLOSE
results in EXE_CL to activate. Also, the EXE_OP and EXE_CL outputs can be
activated by the activation of the automatic opening and closing command AU_OPEN
and AU_CLOSE respectively. In case of an interlocking logic being used, the output

1164 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

from SCILO, EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be connected directly to the EN_OPEN
and EN_CLOSE inputs of GNRLCSWI.

Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence, the error signal is
set with a value whose order of priority is described in the table listing the "cause"
values. The values are available over the IEC 61850. The L_CAUSE output on the
function block indicates the latest value of error during the command.
Table 1114: Values for the cause signal in priority order
"cause" value Description
0 no-error
8 blocked-by-mode
22 wrong-CTL-mode
4 invalid-position
10 blocked-by-interlocking
-23 blocked-for-command
11 blocked-by-synchrocheck
14 1-of-n-control
-30 long-operation-time
-35 not-expected-final-position
-31 switch-not-start-moving
-32 persistent-intermediate-state

The L_CAUSE output indicates only the cause why operation of the
controlled object failed. It does not indicate communication attempts
towards it.

10.1.7.5 Application

GNRLCSWI is used for controlling the circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing
switches.

The control of the circuit breakers is implemented with the cooperation of

GNRLCSWI and the circuit breaker DAXCBR. The circuit breaker represents the
lowest level power switching device with short-circuit breaking capability.

The control of all other switching devices is implemented with cooperation of

GNRLCSWI and the switch DAXSWI. The switch represents lowest level power
switching devices without the short-circuit breaking capability, for example, the
disconnectors, air-break switches and earthing switches.

GNRLCSWI initializes and supervises all the functions to properly select and operate
primary switching devices .

630 series 1165

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

The user of GNRLCSWI is primarily an operator, working either locally or remotely.

GNRLCSWI is not dependent on the type of switching device DAXCBR or
DAXSWI. It represents the content of the switch controller (CSWI) logical node
according to IEC 61850 with mandatory functionality.

After the selection of an apparatus and before the execution, GNRLCSWI performs
the checks and actions such as:
• A request that initiates to reserve other bays to prevent simultaneous operation.
• Actual position inputs for interlocking information are read and evaluated if the
operation is permitted.
• The synchrocheck/synchronizing conditions are read and checked, and performs
operation upon positive response.
• The blocking conditions are evaluated.
• The position indications are evaluated according to given command and its
requested direction (open or closed).

The command sequence is supervised regarding the time between:

• Select and execute.
• Select and until the reservation is granted.
• Execute and the final end position of the apparatus.
• Execute and valid close conditions from the synchrocheck.

At error, the command sequence is canceled.

10.1.7.6 Signals
Table 1115: GNRLCSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SYN_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 1 Closing is permitted at set to true by the
synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
XPOS GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI
SIGNAL

1166 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Table 1116: GNRLCSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute command for close direction
SELECTED BOOLEAN The select conditions are fulfilled
START_SYN BOOLEAN Starts the synchronizing function
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
INTERMPOS BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

10.1.7.7 Settings
Table 1117: GNRLCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Control model Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Select command time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
Synchrocheck time 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
Synchronizing time 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
Cmd response time 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Max time from command execution to
termination

Table 1118: GNRLCSWI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pos dependent Always permit - - Always permit Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm 00/11 position

630 series 1167

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.1.7.8 Measured values

Table 1119: GNRLCSWI Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SYN_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 1 Closing is permitted at set to true by the
synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation

10.1.7.9 Monitored data

Table 1120: GNRLCSWI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Execute command for
1=TRUE open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Execute command for
1=TRUE close direction
SELECTED BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - The select conditions are
1=TRUE fulfilled
START_SYN BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Starts the synchronizing
1=TRUE function
OPENPOS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Open position indication
1=TRUE
INTERMPOS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Stopped in intermediate
1=TRUE position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Closed position
1=TRUE indication
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Commands are blocked
1=TRUE

10.1.7.10 Technical revision history

Table 1121: GNRLCSWI technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Default value for input SYNC_OK changed to TRUE
from FALSE

1168 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.1.8 Circuit breaker DAXCBR

10.1.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit breaker DAXCBR I <-> O CB I <->O CB

10.1.8.2 Function block

A070364 V1 EN

Figure 569: Function block

10.1.8.3 Functionality

The circuit breaker function DAXCBR provides the actual status of the positions for
the apparatus and also perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands
to the primary apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers with the output boards and
also supervising the switching operation and position.

The intended users of DAXCBR are the other functions such as switch controller,
protection functions, autoreclosure function or the IEC 61850 clients residing in
another IED or an operator place. DAXCBR executes commands and evaluate the
block conditions and different time supervision conditions. DAXCBR performs an
execution command only if all the conditions indicate to allow a switch operation. If
erroneous conditions occur, DAXCBR indicates an appropriate “cause” value.

DAXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening command. The operator
can read the counter value remotely from an operator place. The value is reset from a
binary input or remotely from the operator place.

10.1.8.4 Operation principle

Local/Remote switch
The LR_SWI binary input signal is included in this function to indicate the local or
remote switch position from the switchyard provided with the I/O board. If the signal
is set to TRUE, the change of positions is only allowed from switchyard level. If the

630 series 1169

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

signal value is FALSE, commands from IED or higher level are permitted. When the
signal value is set to TRUE, all the commands are rejected from internal IED clients.

GUID-7A2969FB-067C-4B48-B6D0-4EFF979C9913 V1 EN

Figure 570: Functionality of Local/Remote switch

Blocking principle
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all these
blocking signals is that they affect the commands from all other clients, for example,
the operator place, protection functions and autoreclosure.

The blocking principles are:

• The activation of BLK_OPEN input blocks the open command and activates the
OP_BLKD output. This block signal also affects the OPEN input for an immediate
command.
• The activation of BLK_CLOSE input blocks the close command and activates the
CL_BLKD output. This block signal also affects the CLOSE input for an
immediate command.
• The circuit breaker position update can be blocked via 61850 communication or
by activation of BLK_UPD input of QCCBAY function. The status of this can be
seen at UPD_BLK output.
• The function can be blocked with the BLOCK input or from DO (Data Object) Beh
(Behavior, IEC61850). If DO Beh is set to blocked, the function remains active
but no outputs or reports are generated, control commands are rejected and the
functional and configuration data is visible. The DO Beh can be set to blocked by
DO Mod of the LN function or with the DO Mod of LLN0 of the logical device
(LD) where the DAXCBR resides.

The blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part is used for manual setting of positions. A typical use of
substitution is that an operator enters a value manually as the real process value is
erroneous for some reason. The function uses manually entered value instead of the
value for positions determined by the process.

It is always possible to use substitution independently of the position

indication and status information of the I/O board. When substitution
is enabled, position values are blocked for updating and other signals

1170 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a
non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams
There are two timers in this function to supervise the execute phase. The Start moving
timer setting supervises time after the breaker starts moving. If the breaker fails to
open before Start moving time is elapsed, the L_CAUSE output is set to '-31' indicating
"switch not start moving". The intermediate timer measures the time spent in
intermediate position. If the breaker remains in intermediate position for a time greater
than the value of the Intermediate time setting, the L_CAUSE output is set to '-32'
indicating "persisting intermediate state".

A070365 V2 EN

Figure 571: The start moving timer and intermediate timer during the execute
phase

The output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The
Open pulse time and Close pulse time timer settings are for the length of the execute
output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter Adaptive pulse. The adaptive parameter
affects both execute output pulses.

630 series 1171

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

A070367 V2 EN

Figure 572: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed Open pulse
time or Close pulse time.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• A new expected final position is reached and the configuration setting parameter
Adaptive pulse is set to true.
• The open pulse time or close pulse time have elapsed.
• An error occurs due to the switch not starting to move, that is, if the value of Start
moving time setting has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed, the execute output
pulse resets only when Open pulse timer or Close pulse timer have
elapsed.

One exception from the first item above occurs when the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the
configuration parameter Adaptive pulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when Start moving time has elapsed. If the configuration
parameter Adaptive pulse is set to false, the execution output remains active until the
pulse duration timer has elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed can
be shown.

1172 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

A070366 V2 EN

Figure 573: An example of open command with open position indication

Position Indicators
The binary input signal indicating the open and close position of the disconnector or
earth switch are connected to the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE inputs respectively.
Based on these inputs, the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS binary outputs get activated if
the disconnector or earth switch is in open or close position respectively.

Command inputs and counter

The pulse signal for the immediate opening and closing command of breaker is given
to the function with the OPEN and CLOSE inputs respectively. The activation of OPEN
and CLOSE inputs activates the EXE_OP and EXE_CL outputs of the function, whose
pulse length is defined by the Open pulse time and Close pulse time setting
respectively. The OPEN and CLOSE inputs of the function is connected from the
switch controller function GNRLCSWI outputs EXE_OP and EXE_CL respectively.

The number of circuit breaker operations are available with the CNT_VAL output. The
activation of the RS_OPR_CNT input resets the counter. The number of operations are
stored in nonvolatile memory.

Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence, the error signal is
set with a value. The table describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these
specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The cause values are listed in order of priority.
The L_CAUSE output on the function block indicates the latest value of error during
the command.

630 series 1173

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Table 1122: Values for cause signal in priority order

Cause value Description
0 no-error
8 blocked-by-mode
2 blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
-24 blocked-for-open-command
-25 blocked-for-close-command
9 blocked-by-process
12 command-already-in-execution
-31 switch-not-start-moving
-32 persistent-intermediate-state
-33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
-34 switch-in-bad-state
-35 not-expected-final-position

The L_CAUSE output indicates only the cause why operation of the
controlled object failed. It does not indicate communication attempts
towards it.

When used for non-controllable earth switch, DAXSWI provides only

status information.

10.1.8.5 Application

DAXCBR is a component used to close and interrupt an AC power circuit any

conditions.

DAXCBR represents a lowest level power switching device with short-circuit

breaking capability.

The purpose of this component is to provide the actual status of positions and to
perform control operations, that is, to pass all the commands to the primary device
with the output I/O-board and to supervise the switching operation and position. This
component is the lowest or the closest software component to the physical device. It
is used by other functions that need to operate the physical device in 'direct' manner,
that is not invoking other functions before operating.

This also means that the properties and knowledge that affect the operation depending
on the physical device, are part of this function.

The component has the following functions:

1174 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

• Local or remote switch intended for a switchyard

• Block or deblock for open and close command respectively
• Update block or deblock of position indication
• Substitution of a position indication
• Supervision timer for the primary device to start moving on a command
• Supervision of allowed time for intermediate position
• Definition of pulse duration for open and close command respectively

10.1.8.6 Signals
Table 1123: DAXCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TRUCK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TRUCK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_OPR_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Table 1124: DAXCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN The update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TRUCK_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER The value of the operation counter
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command

630 series 1175

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.1.8.7 Settings
Table 1125: DAXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Start moving time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
Intermediate time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position

Table 1126: DAXCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Open pulse time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
Close pulse time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
Adaptive pulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive The output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
Suppress mid Pos Off - - On If 'On' mid-pos is suppressed and
On Intermediate time is used

10.1.8.8 Measured values

Table 1127: DAXCBR Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TRUCK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TRUCK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_OPR_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter

1176 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.1.8.9 Monitored data

Table 1128: DAXCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Executes the command
1=TRUE for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Executes the command
1=TRUE for close direction
SUBSTED BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication that the
1=TRUE position is substituted
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication that the
1=TRUE function is blocked for
open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication that the
1=TRUE function is blocked for
close commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - The update of position
1=TRUE indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER - - Apparatus position
indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Apparatus open position
1=TRUE
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Apparatus closed
1=TRUE position
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - The function is active but
1=TRUE the functionality is
blocked

10.1.8.10 Technical revision history

Table 1129: DAXCBR technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added possibility to map output POSITION in
GDE for symbol type “Breaker Indication Only”

10.1.9 Circuit switch DAXSWI

10.1.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Disconnector DAXSWI I <-> O DC I <->O DC

630 series 1177

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.1.9.2 Function block

A070363 V1 EN

Figure 574: Function block

10.1.9.3 Functionality

The circuit switch function DAXSWI provides the actual status of positions for the
apparatus and to perform the control operations, that is, passing all the commands to
the primary apparatuses in the form of disconnector / earthswitch with the output
boards and also supervise the switching operation and position.

The intended users of DAXSWI are other functions like switch controller, protection
functions, autoreclosure function or IEC 61850 clients residing in another IED or at an
operator place. DAXSWI executes commands, evaluates block conditions and
different time supervision conditions. DAXSWI performs an execution command
only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed. If erroneous conditions
occur, DAXSWI indicates an appropriate “cause” value.

DAXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening command. The operator
can read the counter value remotely from an operator place. The value is reset from a
binary input or remotely from the operator place.

10.1.9.4 Operation principle

Local/Remote switch
The LR_SWI binary input signal is included in this function to indicate the local or
remote switch position from the switchyard provided with the I/O board. If the signal
is set to TRUE, the change of positions is only allowed from switchyard level. If the
signal value is FALSE, commands from IED or higher level are permitted. When the
signal value is set to TRUE, all the commands are rejected from internal IED clients.

GUID-7A2969FB-067C-4B48-B6D0-4EFF979C9913 V1 EN

Figure 575: Functionality of Local/Remote switch

1178 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Blocking principle
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all these
blocking signals is that they affect the commands from all other clients, for example,
the operator place, protection functions and autoreclosure.

The blocking principles are:

• The activation of BLK_OPEN input blocks the open command and activates the
OP_BLKD output. This block signal also affects the OPEN input for an immediate
command.
• The activation of BLK_CLOSE input blocks the close command and activates the
CL_BLKD output. This block signal also affects the CLOSE input for an
immediate command.
• The circuit breaker position update can be blocked via 61850 communication or
by activation of BLK_UPD input of QCCBAY function. The status of this can be
seen at UPD_BLK output.
• The function can be blocked with the BLOCK input or from DO (Data Object) Beh
(Behavior, IEC61850). If DO Beh is set to blocked, the function remains active
but no outputs or reports are generated, control commands are rejected and the
functional and configuration data is visible. The DO Beh can be set to blocked by
DO Mod of the LN function or with the DO Mod of LLN0 of the logical device
(LD) where the DAXCBR resides.

The blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part is used for manual setting of positions. A typical use of
substitution is that an operator enters a value manually as the real process value is
erroneous for some reason. The function uses manually entered value instead of the
value for positions determined by the process.

It is always possible to use substitution independently of the position

indication and status information of the I/O board. When substitution
is enabled, position values are blocked for updating and other signals
related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a
non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams
There are two timers in this function to supervise the execute phase. The Start moving
timer setting supervises time after the breaker starts moving. If the breaker fails to
open before Start moving time is elapsed, the L_CAUSE output is set to '-31' indicating
"switch not start moving". The intermediate timer measures the time spent in
intermediate position. If the breaker remains in intermediate position for a time greater
than the value of the Intermediate time setting, the L_CAUSE output is set to '-32'
indicating "persisting intermediate state".

630 series 1179

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

A070365 V2 EN

Figure 576: The start moving timer and intermediate timer during the execute
phase

The output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The
Open pulse time and Close pulse time timer settings are for the length of the execute
output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter Adaptive pulse. The adaptive parameter
affects both execute output pulses.

A070367 V2 EN

Figure 577: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed Open pulse
time or Close pulse time.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

• A new expected final position is reached and the configuration setting parameter
Adaptive pulse is set to true.
• The open pulse time or close pulse time have elapsed.
• An error occurs due to the switch not starting to move, that is, if the value of Start
moving time setting has elapsed.

1180 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed, the execute output
pulse resets only when Open pulse timer or Close pulse timer have
elapsed.

One exception from the first item above occurs when the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the
configuration parameter Adaptive pulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when Start moving time has elapsed. If the configuration
parameter Adaptive pulse is set to false, the execution output remains active until the
pulse duration timer has elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed can
be shown.

A070366 V2 EN

Figure 578: An example of open command with open position indication

Position Indicators
The binary input signal indicating the open and close position of the disconnector or
earth switch are connected to the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE inputs respectively.
Based on these inputs, the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS binary outputs get activated if
the disconnector or earth switch is in open or close position respectively.

Command inputs and counter

The pulse signal for the immediate opening and closing command of breaker is given
to the function with the OPEN and CLOSE inputs respectively. The activation of OPEN
and CLOSE inputs activates the EXE_OP and EXE_CL outputs of the function, whose
pulse length is defined by the Open pulse time and Close pulse time setting
respectively. The OPEN and CLOSE inputs of the function is connected from the
switch controller function GNRLCSWI outputs EXE_OP and EXE_CL respectively.

630 series 1181

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

The number of circuit breaker operations are available with the CNT_VAL output. The
activation of the RS_OPR_CNT input resets the counter. The number of operations are
stored in nonvolatile memory.

Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence, the error signal is
set with a value. The table describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these
specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The cause values are listed in order of priority.
The L_CAUSE output on the function block indicates the latest value of error during
the command.
Table 1130: Values for cause signal in priority order
Cause value Description
0 no-error
8 blocked-by-mode
2 blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
-24 blocked-for-open-command
-25 blocked-for-close-command
9 blocked-by-process
12 command-already-in-execution
-31 switch-not-start-moving
-32 persistent-intermediate-state
-33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
-34 switch-in-bad-state
-35 not-expected-final-position

The L_CAUSE output indicates only the cause why operation of the
controlled object failed. It does not indicate communication attempts
towards it.

When used for non-controllable earth switch, DAXSWI provides only

status information.

10.1.9.5 Application

DAXSWI is a component used to close and interrupt an AC power circuit under

normal conditions. It is opened or closed only after DAXCBR is opened.

DAXSWI represents lowest level power switching devices without short-circuit

breaking capability, for example disconnectors, air-break switches and earth
switches.

1182 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

The purpose of this component is to provide the actual status of positions and to
perform control operations, that is to pass all the commands to the primary device via
output I/O-board and to supervise the switching operation and position. This
component is the lowest or the closest software component to the physical device. It
is used by other functions that need to operate the physical device in "direct" manner,
that is, not invoking other functions before operating.

This also means that the properties and knowledge that affect the operation depending
on the physical device are part of this function.

The component has the following functions:

• Local or remote switch intended for a switchyard
• Block or deblock for open and close command respectively
• Update block or deblock of position indication
• Substitution of a position indication
• Supervision timer for the primary device to start moving on a command
• Supervision of allowed time for intermediate position
• Definition of pulse duration for open and close command respectively

10.1.9.6 Signals
Table 1131: DAXSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
RS_OPR_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Table 1132: DAXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
Table continues on next page

630 series 1183

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Name Type Description

UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN The update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER The value of the operation counter
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command

10.1.9.7 Settings
Table 1133: DAXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Switch type Load Break - - Disconnector Switch Type
Disconnector
Earthing Switch
HS Earth Switch
Start moving time 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
Intermediate time 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position

Table 1134: DAXSWI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Open pulse time 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
Close pulse time 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
Adaptive pulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive The output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
Suppress mid Pos Off - - On If 'On' mid-pos is suppressed and
On Intermediate time is used

10.1.9.8 Measured values

Table 1135: DAXSWI Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
RS_OPR_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter

1184 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.1.9.9 Monitored data

Table 1136: DAXSWI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Executes the command
1=TRUE for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Executes the command
1=TRUE for close direction
SUBSTED BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication that the
1=TRUE position is substituted
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication that the
1=TRUE function is blocked for
open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication that the
1=TRUE function is blocked for
close commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - The update of position
1=TRUE indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER - - Apparatus position
indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Apparatus open position
1=TRUE
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Apparatus closed
1=TRUE position
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - The function is active but
1=TRUE the functionality is
blocked

10.1.9.10 Technical revision history

Table 1137: DAXSWI technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added possibility to map output POSITION in
GDE for symbol type “Isolator Indication Only”

10.2 Reservation

10.2.1 General principles of reservation

The purpose of the reservation functionality is primarily to transfer interlocking
information between the IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part or a complete substation.

The reservation is activated in two ways. It starts when a circuit breaker or

disconnector control function from the same bay is selected or if a circuit breaker or
disconnector control function from another bay is selected. It is only possible to select
the function if no other function is already selected.

630 series 1185

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

The configuration of the reservation is done with the station bus and GOOSE
communication according to the application example. The reservation can also be
realized with external wiring.
RE_630 RE_630 RE_630

POSOPEN
POSCLOSED
AND

IntlReceive
AND QCCBAY
RESGRANT

OR BLK_CMD

• •
• •
• •
DAXCBR
BLK_OPEN
IntlReceive GNRLCSWI BLK_CLOSE

RESGRANT POSOPEN
POSCLOSED
SELECTED

SPGGIO

Other CSWI OR IN
in the bay

••• •••
Station bus
GUID-1A9D1831-7794-4CDE-9CFE-C88B51A21765 V1 EN

Figure 579: Application principles for reservation over the station bus, example 1

RE_630 RE_630 RE_630

IntlReceive GNRLCSWI
RESGRANT RES_EXT
OR SELECTED

• •
• •
• •

SPGGIO
IntlReceive
Other CSWI OR IN
RESGRANT
in the bay

••• •••
Station bus
GUID-173810BD-D9FB-42D8-99DF-50AB7359B67C V2 EN

Figure 580: Application principles for reservation over the station bus, example 2

1186 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

RE_630 RE_630

POSOPEN
POSCLOSED
AND

AND QCCBAY
BLK_CMD

DAXCBR
BLK_OPEN
GNRLCSWI BLK_CLOSE

POSOPEN
POSCLOSED
SELECTED

Other CSWI OR
in the bay

BI BO BI BO

+
GUID-92879C67-B957-4FCE-B3AC-E99F392481B5 V1 EN

Figure 581: Application principles for reservation with external wiring, example 1

GUID-4EEF2FCB-CD11-4923-812F-02F866DE9CD8 V1 EN

Figure 582: Application principles for reservation with external wiring, example 2

630 series 1187

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.3 Interlocking

10.3.1 General principles of interlocking

The interlocking function consists of the software modules located in each control
IED. The function is distributed and does not depend on any central function. The
communication between modules in different bays is performed with the station bus.

The reservation functionality is used to ensure that Medium Voltage (MV)

apparatuses that affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises
between position updates. This is done with the communication system, reserving all
MV apparatuses that influence the interlocking condition of an intended operation.
The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed.

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on
the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. The
other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching
devices that affect the function.

The interlocking logic is implemented case by case using configurable logic with the
graphical configuration tool PCM600.

The open or closed positions of the MV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains an interlocking logic for a bay.
The specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard interlocking
modules are performed with an engineering tool. The bay-level interlocking signals
can include the information such as:
• Positions of MV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)
• Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
• External release (to add special conditions for release)
• Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
• Output signals to release the MV apparatus

The example of an interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions

within a bay is as shown in the figure.

1188 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

GUID-0F308468-CEC5-4B4D-98DD-ADF58D913885 V1 EN

Figure 583: Interlocking module on bay level

The bays communicate the station bus convey the information such as:
• Unearthed busbars
• Busbars connected together
• Other bays connected to the busbar
• Received data from other bays is valid or not

When an invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control terminal, or input
board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, the release
for execution of the function is not given.

On the station HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.

For interlocking the general rules that normally apply are:

• The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing
switches are always identical.
• The earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing
switches, are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the
bay where they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the
line. A line voltage indication may be included into the line interlocking modules.
If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs
must be set to no voltage. The operator must consider this when operating.
• The earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example,
without load or voltage. The circuit breaker contacts are not used to isolate a
section, that is, the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing
switch operation is concerned.
• The disconnectors does not have the current interrupting capacity. The
disconnectors connected in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if
the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other
closed connections. The other disconnectors can be operated if one side is

630 series 1189

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

completely isolated or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with the other

closed connections or if they are earthed on both sides.

10.3.2 Application
The main purpose of switchgear interlocking is:
• To avoid the dangerous or damaging operation of switchgear.
• To enforce the restrictions on the operation of the substation for other reasons, for
example, load configuration. The examples of the latter are to limit the number of
parallel transformers to a maximum of two or to ensure that energizing is always
from one side, for example, the high voltage side of a transformer.

This document deals with only few of the interlocking restrictions caused by
switching devices other than the one to be controlled. The switch interlock because of
device alarms, is not included in this document.

The disconnectors and earthing switches have a limited switching capacity. The
disconnectors therefore only operate:
• With basically zero current: The circuit is open on one side and has a small
extension. The capacitive current is small, for example, less than 5A and power
transformers with inrush current are not allowed.
• To connect or disconnect a parallel circuit carrying load current: The switching
voltage across the open contacts is thus virtually zero due to the parallel circuit,
that is, less than 1 percent of rated voltage. The paralleling of power transformers
is not allowed.

The earthing switches are allowed to connect and disconnect earthing of isolated
points. Due to the capacitive or inductive coupling there may be some voltage, for
example, less than 40 percent of rated voltage before earthing and some current, for
example, less than 100 A after earthing of the line.

The circuit breakers are usually not interlocked. The closing is interlocked against
running the disconnectors in the same bay and the bus-coupler opening is interlocked
during the busbar transfer.

The positions of all switching devices in a bay and from some other bays determine the
conditions for operational interlocking. The conditions from other stations are usually
not available. Therefore, a line earthing switch is usually not fully interlocked. The
operator must be convinced that the line is not energized from the other side before
closing the earthing switch. As an option, a voltage indication can be used for
interlocking. Care must be taken to avoid a dangerous enable condition at the loss of a
VT secondary voltage, for example, a blown fuse.

The switch positions used by the operational interlocking logic are obtained from the
auxiliary contacts or position sensors. For each end position, that is, open or closed, a
true indication is needed – thus forming a double indication. The apparatus control

1190 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

function continuously checks its consistency. If neither condition is high, that is, 1 or
TRUE, the switch is in an intermediate position, for example, moving. This dynamic
state continues for some time, which in the case of disconnectors is may be up to 10
seconds. If both the indications stay low for a longer period, the position indication is
interpreted as unknown. If both indications stay high, something is wrong, and the
state is again treated as unknown. In both cases an alarm is sent to the operator. The
indications from position sensors is self-checked and system faults are indicated by
the fault signal. In the interlocking logic, the signals are used to avoid dangerous
enable or release conditions. When the switching state of a switching device cannot be
determined operation is not permitted.

10.3.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO

10.3.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking interface SCILO 3 3

10.3.3.2 Function block

GUID-9AC26991-7CA2-4A02-9A84-08C50D6F4716 V1 EN

Figure 584: Function block

10.3.3.3 Functionality

The interlock switching function SCILO is used to enable a switching operation if the
interlocking conditions permit. SCILO does not provide any interlocking
functionality by itself . The interlocking conditions are generated by means of
configurable logic or in separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

10.3.3.4 Operation principle

The switching interlock function SCILO has a logic to enable the open and close
commands respectively if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. If the switch has a
defined end position, for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal EN_OPEN
is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE are true at the same time only
in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking
function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes circuit breaker/switch
function (DAXCBR / DAXSWI) and the enable signals from the interlocking logic.
The outputs are connected to the logical node of the switch controller function
(GNRLCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.

630 series 1191

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

GUID-6A6B153C-7EF9-4A18-9903-75C0B33F2E2C V1 EN

Figure 585: Logic diagram for SCILO

10.3.3.5 Application

SCILO is used in configuration between the interlocking logic and the switch
controller function GNRLCSWI regardless whether the interlocking is implemented
using ready-made interlocking modules or by means of configurable logic. SCILO
implements the interface towards IEC 61850 communication.

10.3.3.6 Signals
Table 1138: SCILO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 1139: SCILO Output signals

Name Type Description
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or intermediate or bad
position is enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or intermediate or bad
position is enabled

10.3.4 Position evaluation POS_EVAL

10.3.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -

1192 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.3.4.2 Function block

POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

IEC09000079_1_en.vsd

IEC09000079 V1 EN

Figure 586: POS_EVAL function block

10.3.4.3 Functionality

Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS
or CLOSEPOS.

The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

10.3.4.4 Operation principle

POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN

Figure 587: Logic diagram

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not
used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker Good 0 0
intermediate)
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0

10.3.4.5 Signals
Table 1140: POS_EVAL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality

630 series 1193

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Table 1141: POS_EVAL Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position

10.3.4.6 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.

10.4 Synchrocheck SYNCRSYN

10.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Synchrocheck function SYNCRSYN SYNC 25

10.4.2 Function block

GUID-E7B0BB19-06BC-427B-8868-B95CE65FBD44 V1 EN

Figure 588: Function block

1194 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.4.3 Functionality
The synchrocheck function SYNCRSYN checks the condition across the circuit
breaker from separate power system parts and gives the output signal for closing the
circuit breaker. SYNCRSYN includes the functionality of synchronizing,
synchrocheck and energizing check.

For the systems which are running asynchronously, a synchronizing function is

provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide a controlled
closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected.
It is used for the slip frequencies that are higher than those for synchrocheck and lower
than the maximum possible set level for the synchronizing function.

The synchrocheck function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker
are synchronized. It is used to perform a controlled re-connection of two systems
which are divided after islanding and it is also used to perform a controlled re-
connection of the system after reclosing.

The energizing check function checks that at least one side is dead to ensure that
closing can be done safely.

SYNCRSYN includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for the double bus single
circuit breaker arrangement. It is possible to have a manual closing and automatic
reclosing using SYNCRSYN with different settings.

10.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the function can be described using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 1195

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

GUID-7ACCE172-0B7D-4DD0-B389-5403A098F20E V1 EN

Figure 589: Functional module diagram

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch or an MCB are
connected to the binary inputs that are then configured to the inputs of SYNCRSYN.
Alternatively, the internal signals from the fuse failure supervision function can also
be used when available.

There are two alternative connections possible for the inputs related to the fuse failure
supervision. The inputs with the label U_OK must be used if the available fuse failure
information indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. The inputs with the label

1196 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

U_FF must be used if the available fuse failure information indicates that the voltage
circuit is faulty.

The B1(2)_U_OK and B1(2)_U_FF inputs are to be connected for indicating the
fuse failure information related to the busbar voltage. The LN1(2)_U_OK and
LN1(2)_U_FF inputs are to be connected for indicating the fuse failure information
related to the line voltage.

In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check module is blocked. This eventually
blocks the synchrocheck and synchronizing functions.

Voltage selection
The voltage selection module includes the selection of appropriate line and bus
voltages depending on the type of system configuration. The module includes a fuse
supervision feature which supervises the voltage transformer fuses for the selected
voltage transformer. The module forms the basic part of SYNCRSYN and determines
the parameters which are fed to the synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing
check modules.

The CB configuration busbar configuration setting is used to define the type of voltage
selection for different configurations.
Table 1142: Description for CB configuration setting
CB configuration setting Description
"No voltage sel" No voltage selection
"Double bus" Single circuit breaker with double bus
"1 1/2 bus 1 CB" 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker
connected to busbar 1
"1 1/2 bus 1 CB" 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker
connected to busbar 2
"Tie CB" 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker
connected to lines 1 and 2

If the CB configuration setting is set to "No Voltage Sel", the used default voltages are
ULine1 and UBus1. This is also the case when external voltage selection is provided.
The fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.

The voltage selection made by voltage selection modules and fuse conditions are the
inputs for the synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check modules. For the
disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply
the disconnector with open and closed positions, but it is possible to use an inverter for
one of the positions.

The Phase selection bus configuration parameter setting is used for the selection of the
measuring phase of the voltage for busbars. The voltage can be a single-phase (phase-
to-neutral) or two-phase (phase-to-phase) voltage.

630 series 1197

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

The Phase selection line configuration parameter setting is used for selection of
measuring phase of the voltage for lines. The voltages can be single-phase (phase-to-
neutral) or two-phase (phase-to-phase) voltage.

When Phase selection Bus is set to "Phase1-Phase-2", "Phase2-Phase3" or "Phase3-

Phase1", the monitored values U_BUS_A, U_BUS_B and U_BUS_C show values for
phases AB, BC and CA on the bus side. Similarly, when Phase selection Line is set to
"Phase1-Phase-2", "Phase2-Phase3" or "Phase3-Phase1", the monitored values
U_LINE_A, U_LINE_B and U_LINE_C show values for phases AB, BC and CA on
the line side.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

The auxiliary contacts of the disconnectors are connected to the B1_Q_OPEN and
B1_Q_CLOSED inputs for bus 1 and B2_Q_OPEN and B2_Q_CLOSED for bus 2 to
select between the bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 2 is
closed and the disconnector connected to bus 1 is opened, the bus 2 voltage is used. All
other combinations use bus 1 voltage. The B1_SEL and B2_SEL outputs respectively
indicate the selected bus voltage for synchronizing.

A check is carried out for the fuse failure signals for the bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. The B1_U_OK input or B1_U_FF and B2_U_OK or B2_U_FF
supervises the fuse for the bus 1 and bus 2 voltage transformers respectively.
LN1_U_OK or LN1_U_FF supervises the fuse for the line voltage transformer. The
inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used depending on the available
signal. If a fuse failure is detected in either of the selected bus or line voltage source,
the output signal U_SEL_FAIL is set. The activation of the BLOCK input signal
blocks the module and U_SEL_FAIL.

GUID-9C87EB8F-8AB6-463C-A3C5-43A408C6919B V1 EN

Figure 590: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit
breaker with double busbars

1198 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Energizing check
The main purpose of the energizing check module is to facilitate the controlled re-
connection of the disconnected lines and buses to the energized lines and buses. The
energizing function in the module is defined as a situation where a dead section of the
network is connected to an energized one. The module can be operated either in auto
or manual mode.

The modules compare the amplitudes of the voltages on both sides of a circuit breaker
and compares them to the higher and lower threshold limits of the detectors. The
separate settable limits for the energized conditions (live) and non-energized
conditions (dead) can be set through Live bus value, Dead bus value, Live line value
and Dead line value for the bus and line voltages respectively. It should be noted that
a disconnected line can have a considerable potential either due to an induction from
a line running in parallel when fed through the discharging capacitor. This voltage can
be as high as 30 percent or more of the base voltage. There is also an amplitude level
check Max energizing V to ensure that the measured voltages are not too high. The
frequencies on both sides of the circuit breaker are also measured; deviation in the
frequency should not be more than the set value of the Frequency deviation setting.

The setting range of the threshold voltages, such as Live bus value or Live line value
and Dead bus value or Dead line value, partly overlap each other. The setting
conditions are such that the setting of the non-energized threshold value exceeds that
of the energized threshold value. The parameters should therefore be set carefully by
the user to avoid the described setting.

The energizing check module can be set to operate in either direction across the circuit
breaker or the module can be permitted to operate in both directions. The module can
be set either in automatic mode or manual mode or both. Both automatic mode and
manual mode have four different settable modes. It is possible to set these four modes
with the A_ENERG_MODE integer input or the Live dead mode auto setting for an
automatic mode of operation, and with the M_ENERG_MODE integer input or the Live
dead mode Man setting for a manual mode of operation. The mode selected with the
integer input overrides those provided through a setting.

630 series 1199

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Table 1143: Mode selection for the energizing check module

Live dead mode auto or Live dead Integer value at inputs Description
mode Man settings A_ENERG_MODE or
M_ENERG_MODE
"Off" 1 The energizing module is
disabled
"DLLB" 2 Dead line live bus, the line
voltage is below the set value of
Dead line value and bus voltage
is above the set value of Live
bus value
"LLDB" 3 Live line dead bus, the line
voltage is above the set value of
Live line value and bus voltage is
below the set value of Dead bus
value
"LLDB" or "DLLB" 4 Energizing can be done in both
directions, LLDB and DLLB

With the value of the Dead bus line Man setting set to "True", the manual closing is
enabled when both line and bus voltages are below the set value of the Dead line value
and Dead bus value settings respectively and the Live dead mode Man setting is set to
"DLLB" or "LLDB" or "LLDB or DLLB".

When the energizing conditions are met, the AU_ENERG_OK and MAN_ENERG_OK
outputs are activated depending on the auto or manual modes of selection if the fuse
supervision conditions are fulfilled. The AU_ENERG_OK and MAN_ENERG_OK
output signals can be delayed independently through the Energizing time Auto and
Energizing time Man settings respectively.

The activation of BLOCK or BLK_ENERG input blocks the energizing check module.
The activation of TST_ENERG allows the testing of the module and activates the
ENERG_TST output when the energizing conditions are fulfilled.

1200 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Live dead mode Auto

= Off

= Both OR
AND
= DLLB 50 ms Energizing time Auto
OR 0-60 s
t
AND t
= LLDB OR
AND

AND AU_ENERG_OK
U > Live line value

U < Dead line value

U > Live bus value

U < Dead bus value

Live dead mode Man

= Off

= Both OR
AND
50 ms Energizing time Man
= DLLB 0-60 s
OR t
AND t
= LLDB OR
AND

OR
AND
Dead bus line Man AND MAN_ENERG_OK
= Off

= On
OR
SelectedFuseOK

U < Max energizing V

AND ENERG_TST
BLK_ENERG

TST_ENERG
GUID-D7635D35-2C5D-4EDD-847E-FA2B3EE34FE1 V2 EN

Figure 591: Simplified logic diagram for the energizing function

Synchrocheck
The synchrocheck module is used for the controlled closing of a circuit breaker in an
interconnected network. When used, the function gives an enabling signal at
satisfying voltage, frequency and phase angle conditions across the breaker to be
closed. The function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breaker is
closed manually or with the autorecloser function or with both methods.

The synchrocheck module measures the amplitude, frequency and phase angle of the
voltages on both sides of a circuit breaker and compares them to the threshold value
of the limit detectors. The differences in voltage, frequency and phase angle values
between the two sides of the circuit breaker are measured and available for evaluation
before the synchronizing is done. If the available bus voltage is phase-to-phase and the
line voltage is phase-to-neutral (or the opposite), a compensation is required. This is
done with the Voltage ratio setting (defined as the ratio of bus voltage to line voltage),
which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. A typical example
of the setting is to compensate for the voltage difference caused by connecting the bus
voltage as phase-to-phase and the line voltage as phase-to-neutral, in which case the
value of the Voltage ratio setting needs to be set to 1.73. A compensation for a phase

630 series 1201

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

shift caused by a line transformer between the two measurement points of the bus
voltage and line voltage can be made with the Phase shift setting.

When the Synchrocheck mode setting is "ON", the measuring starts. If the value of the
Synchrocheck mode setting is "OFF", it disables the synchrocheck function and
deactivates the AU_SYNC_OK, MAN_SYNC_OK, AU_SYNC_TST and
MAN_SYNC_TST outputs.

The synchrocheck module starts the synchronizing check if the voltage at both sides
of the breaker is above 80 percent of the base value. When the values of the voltages
on both the sides are above 80% of the base value, the measured values are compared
to the set value for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference which are
set using Dif frequency Auto or Dif phase angle Auto for the auto mode or with the Dif
frequency Man or Dif phase angle Man settings for the manual mode and difference
voltage settings. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages on
the bus and line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison is
made for the phase angle values. The phase angle setting must be chosen to allow
closing under the maximum load condition.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than ±5 Hz. The frequency difference
between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and must not exceed the
set value of the Frequency deviation setting.

The MAN_SYNC_OK and AU_SYNC_OK outputs are activated when the actual
measured conditions match the set conditions for the manual and auto synchronizing
modes. It is possible to delay independently the MAN_SYNC_OK and AU_SYNC_OK
output signals with the Syn Chk delay Man and Syn Chk delay Auto timer settings
respectively to ensure that the synchrocheck conditions remain constant and that the
situation is not caused by a temporary interference. If the conditions do not persist for
the specified time, the delay timer is reset and the procedure is restarted until the
conditions are fulfilled again. The circuit breaker closing is thus not permitted until the
synchrocheck situation has remained constant throughout the set delay setting time.

The MAN_SYNC_TST and AU_SYNC_TST outputs are activated when the actual
measured conditions match the set conditions for the manual and auto synchronizing
modes respectively if the TST_SYNC input is active.

A number of outputs are available as information about a synchronizing condition

being checked. The U_OK output indicates that the voltage amplitude at the line and
bus sides is above 80 percent of the base value. The activation of the U_DIFF_SYNC
output indicates that the voltage difference between the two sides of the circuit breaker
is out of limit, and when the FR_DIFF_AU, FR_DIFF_MAN outputs are activated, it
indicates that the frequency difference is out of limit for the auto and manual
operations respectively. The PH_DIFF_AU and PH_DIFF_MAN outputs are related
outputs to indicate the phase angle difference is out of limit for the auto and manual
operation.

The activation of the BLOCK or BLK_SYNC inputs blocks the synchrocheck module.

1202 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

GUID-F4F75F11-876C-499E-87D9-B8A3F0F342EB V1 EN

Figure 592: Simplified logic diagram for the synchrocheck function

Synchronizing
The synchronizing module measures the conditions across the circuit breaker. The
module also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the
circuit breaker from the value of the measured slip frequency. The output is only given
when all the measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue
of the output signal is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for
the circuit breaker and the closing circuit. The main purpose of the energizing check
module is to facilitate the controlled re-connection of disconnected signals.

The synchronizing module measures the amplitude, frequency and phase angle of the
voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker and compares them to the threshold limit
detectors. The voltage, frequency and phase angle difference values between the two
sides of the circuit breaker are measured and available for evaluation before the
synchronizing. If the available bus voltage is phase-to-phase and the line voltage is
phase-to-neutral (or the opposite), a compensation is required. This is done with the
Voltage ratio setting (defined as the ratio of bus voltage to line voltage), which scales
up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. A typical example of the setting
is to compensate for the voltage difference caused by connecting the bus voltage as
phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral, in which case the Voltage ratio
setting needs to be set to 1.73. A compensation for the phase shift caused by a line
transformer between the two measurement points for the bus voltage and line voltage
can be made with the Phase shift setting. When the Synchronizing mode setting is

630 series 1203

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

"ON", the measuring starts. If the value of Synchronizing mode is "OFF", the
synchronizing module is disabled.

The module starts the synchronizing check if the voltage on both sides of the breaker
is above 80 percent of the base value which is supervising that the voltages on both
sides are live; also indicated by a high value of the U_OK_SYN output. When the
voltages on both sides are above 80 percent of the base value, the module measures
and starts comparing various synchronizing parameters.

The voltage difference between the line and bus voltages is measured and compared
to an allowable limit defined by the Dif voltage Syn setting. The difference is set
depending on the network configuration and the expected voltages in the two
networks running asynchronously. The U_DIFF_SYN output is activated when the
voltage difference is out of limit for synchronizing.

The frequency is measured on both the line and the bus side. The frequencies must not
deviate from the rated frequency by more than the set value of the Frequency deviation
setting and the rate of change of frequency should not be more than the Max Dif Hz
rate Syn setting. It is also required that the difference in frequencies on both sides of
the breaker must be between the Maximum Dif Hz Syn and Minimum Dif Hz Syn
settings. If the rate of frequency change for the bus and line frequencies is above the
value of the Max Dif Hz rate Syn setting, the FR_DER_SYN output is activated.

The Maximum Dif Hz Syn setting provides the maximum slip frequency at which
synchronizing is accepted. The 1/Maximum Dif Hz Syn setting shows the time for the
vector to turn 360˚, (one turn on the synchronoscope) and it is also known as the beat
time. A typical value lies between 200...250 mHz which gives a beat time of 4...5
seconds. Higher values should be avoided as the two networks are normally regulated
to normal frequency independently, so the frequency difference is small. The setting
Minimum Dif Hz Syn is the minimum frequency difference where the systems are
defined to be asynchronous. At a frequency difference lower than this value, the
systems are considered to be in parallel. A typical value is 10 mHz.

The activation of the FR_OK_SYN and FR_DIFF_SYN outputs indicates the

frequency difference between bus and line is in band or out of band (within the limit of
Minimum Dif Hz Syn – Maximum Dif Hz Syn) for synchronizing respectively.

The value of Minimum Dif Hz Syn is set to the same value as Dif
frequency Man or Dif frequency Auto of the synchrocheck module,
depending on whether the functions are used for manual operation,
autoreclosing or both.

The measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum
frequency initiate the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent at
the right moment, including the set value of Closing time of the circuit breaker time.
There is an internal phase angle released to block any incorrect closing pulses. At
operation, the SYN_OK output is activated with a pulse defined by the Close pulse time
setting and the function reset. The function also resets if the synchronizing conditions

1204 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

are not fulfilled within the set value of the Wait Syn time period. This then prevents the
functions from being maintained in operation by mistake for a long time waiting for
the conditions to be fulfilled.

The Closing time setting of the circuit breaker is set to match the closing time for the
circuit breaker and should also include the possible auxiliary relays in the closing
circuit. It is important to check that no slow logic components are used in the
configuration of the IED as there can be big variations in closing time due to those
components.

The Minimum Syn time setting time is set to limit the minimum time at which the
synchronizing closing attempt is given. The setting gives the SYN_OK output if a
fulfilled condition occurs within this time when the synchronizing function is started.

The start of synchronizing is initiated by the START_SYN input. The SYN_INPRO

output indicates that the synchronizing process is in progress. If any failure of the
synchronizing output occurs, the SYN_FAIL output is activated.

The Wait Syn time setting is set to reset the operation of the synchronizing function if
the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within this time. The setting must be set
considering the value of the Minimum Dif Hz Syn setting which decides the maximum
time required to reach phase equality. At a setting of 10 ms the beat time is 100 seconds
and the setting thus needs to be at least Minimum Syn time plus 100 seconds. If the
network frequencies are expected to be outside the limits from the start, a margin
needs to be added.

The activation of TST_SYN allows the testing of the module and activates the
SYN_TST output when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled. The activation of
the BLOCK or BLK_SYN input blocks the synchronizing module.

630 series 1205

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

GUID-6FFA3DFD-DD0B-45B7-8E30-8D5BE2DB0274 V1 EN

Figure 593: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

10.4.5 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

10.4.6 Application
Synchronizing
The synchronizing function is needed for the closing of a breaker between
asynchronous networks. The breaker close command is issued at the optimum time
when the conditions across the breaker are satisfied in order to avoid stress on the
network and its components.

The systems are defined to be asynchronous when the frequency difference between
a bus and a line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If the frequency difference is
less than the threshold value, the systems operate as if they were connected in parallel
and synchrocheck function was used.

At power plants, the synchronizing function is needed to permit the manual or

automatic closing of the circuit breaker.

1206 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

The synchronizing function measures the difference between the line and bus
voltages. It operates and enables a closing command to the circuit breaker when the
calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angle and certain conditions
are simultaneously fulfilled.

The conditions are:

• The line and bus voltages are over 80 percent of the base value.
• The difference in the voltage between the line and bus sides is smaller than the set
value of Dif voltage Syn.
• The frequency deviation at the line and bus sides should not exceed the set value
of the Frequency deviation limit.
• The difference in the frequency between the line and bus sides is less than the set
value of Maximum Dif Hz Syn and larger than the set value of Minimum Dif Hz
Syn.
• The rate of change of the frequencies of both the bus and line voltages should be
below the set value of Max Dif Hz rate Syn.

If the difference in the frequency between the line and bus sides is less
than the value of Minimum Dif Hz Syn, the synchrocheck module is
used.

The synchronizing function compensates for the measured slip frequency as well as
the circuit breaker closing delay. The measured frequencies between the settings for
the maximum and minimum frequencies initiate the evaluation of the angle change to
allow operation to be sent at the right moment including the set closing time of the CB
time. There is an internal phase angle release to block any incorrect closing pulses.

At operation, the SYN_OK output activates with a pulse of defined duration and the
function resets after the pulse ends. The function also resets if the synchronizing
conditions are not fulfilled within the set wait period. This prevents the situation that
the function is by mistake maintained in operation a long time for conditions to be
fulfilled.

The reference voltage can be phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltages.

630 series 1207

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

GUID-AA63F2FB-8FEA-4802-B018-6818AE8F43E8 V1 EN

Figure 594: Principle of Synchronizing module and the conditions requirement

The synchronizing module is applied in many configurations. Figure 595, describing

the synchronizing in the interconnection of generation and power distribution, shows
a situation where the synchronizing function is located to verify the interconnection of
power generation and distribution to guarantee that the generation is in synchronism
with the power distribution.

GUID-4ED3F321-1C43-4515-842B-F310109AC2E5 V1 EN

Figure 595: Synchronizing in the interconnection of generation and power

distribution

1208 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Synchrocheck
The synchrocheck module is used for the controlled closing of a circuit breaker in an
interconnected network. When used, the function gives an enable signal at adequate
voltage, frequency and phase angle conditions across the breaker to be closed. The
function can be used as a condition to be fulfilled before the breaker is closed at the
manual closing and/or together with the autorecloser function.

Figure 596 shows two interconnected power systems. The cloud means that the
interconnection can be further away, that is, a weak connection through other stations.
The need for a synchronization check increases as the meshed system decreases since
the risk of the two networks being out of synchronization at manual or automatic
closing is greater.

GUID-CCCE2418-8E2C-4063-88F0-17F7175CECF2 V1 EN

Figure 596: Two interconnected power systems

The synchrocheck module electrically determines if the difference in voltage

magnitude, frequency and phase angle between the two sides of the breaker falls
within allowable limits. The allowable limits vary with the location on the power
system. If the system is far from generation and load, more phase angle difference can
be tolerated. The synchrocheck module decides internally whether its conditions for
closing are satisfied and either allows or prevents the closing depending on its settings.
A typical synchrocheck relay allows closing if the voltage angle across the breaker is
less than 30°. A time delay can be set to ensure that the conditions are fulfilled for a
minimum period of time.

GUID-4A77374D-D292-4712-81A2-FAA95B4E649B V1 EN

Figure 597: Principle for synchrocheck module and conditions requirement

630 series 1209

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

In stable power systems, the frequency difference is insignificant or zero for manually
initiated closing or closing by automatic restoration. At steady conditions, a bigger
phase angle difference can be allowed as this is sometimes the case in a long and
loaded parallel power line. For this application, a synchrocheck with a long operate
time and high sensitivity regarding the frequency difference (3 mHz) and a relatively
big phase angle difference setting is accepted.

Another situation is where the operation of the power network is disturbed and a high-
speed autoreclosing after the fault clearance takes place. This can cause a power swing
in the network and the phase angle difference begins to oscillate. Generally, the
frequency difference is the time derivative of the phase angle difference and typically
oscillates between positive and negative values. When the circuit breaker needs to be
closed by the autoreclosing after the fault clearance, some frequency difference is
tolerated, and to a greater extent than in a steady condition as mentioned in the above
case. But if a greater phase angle difference is allowed at the same time, there is some
risk that autoreclosing takes place when the phase angle difference is big and
increasing. In this case it should be safer to close when the phase angle difference is
smaller.

To fulfill the requirements, the synchrocheck module is provided with duplicate

settings:
• Manual mode for steady conditions
• Auto mode for operation under disturbed conditions

The synchrocheck module can be utilized for various types of network configurations
or topologies. The typical examples where the synchrocheck can be utilized are:

Figure 598, depicting synchrocheck in sectionalizer, shows an example of the double

busbar system in which the feeding can be from at least two different sources and
voltages can therefore be opposite to each other.

GUID-EE488025-7707-4A52-98DC-18EE50C1585D V1 EN

Figure 598: Synchrocheck in sectionalizer

Figure 599 shows the synchrocheck for a doubly fed power line. The closing of the
circuit breaker requires that both sides are in synchronism. The energization check is
required for the breaker closing first during autoreclosing, and the synchronism check
is needed for all the breakers closing afterwards to complete the autoreclose operation.

1210 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

GUID-7E069163-5979-41E0-9567-42BB25F6BAEF V1 EN

Figure 599: Synchrocheck for doubly fed power line

Many power utilities require the three-phase autoreclosing to be combined with

synchrocheck and energizing check. It is checked that if the line is dead, this condition
is sufficient to allow autoreclosing to be executed at one end. At the opposite end of
the line, usually synchrocheck is applied. The autoreclosing waits for the line to be
energized from the first line end and the synchrocheck conditions are fulfilled. The
autoreclosing is completed.

Energizing check
The main purpose of the energizing check module is to facilitate the controlled re-
connection of disconnected lines and buses to energized lines and buses. The
energizing function of the module is applied in a situation where a dead section of the
network is to be connected to an energized section. The module can be operated in auto
or manual mode.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold values. The output is given when the measured
conditions match the set conditions. Figure 600 shows a power systems network in
which the bus side network is live and the line side which is dead needs to be energized
by closing the circuit breaker A. For this kind of system, the energizing module checks
for various conditions and provides the energizing OK signal if the selected mode for
energizing is Dead Line Live Bus "DLLB" or Dead Line Live Bus or Live Line Dead
Bus "DLLB or LLDB".

GUID-44907AA5-B9A5-4089-9116-4884B9E90C1B V1 EN

Figure 600: Principle for the energizing check function

630 series 1211

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

The energizing check module can operate in the Dead Line Live Bus (DLLB)
direction, Live Line Dead Bus (LLDB) direction or both directions over the circuit
breaker. The energizing from different directions can be different for the automatic
reclosing and manual closing of the circuit breaker. For the manual closing it is also
possible to allow closing when both sides of the breaker are dead.

The equipment is considered energized if the voltage is above a set value, for example
80 percent of the base voltage, and non-energized if it is below a set value, for example
30 percent of the base voltage. A disconnected line has a considerable potential
because of the factors, such as induction from a line running in parallel or feeding with
the extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. Normally for breakers in radial
distribution network the level is well below 30 percent.

When the energizing conditions are satisfied according to the settings, the situation
has to remain constant for a certain period of time before the close signal is permitted.
The purpose of the delayed operate time is to ensure that the dead side remains de-
energized and that the condition is not due to temporary interference.

Fuse failure supervision

The fuse failure supervision module continuously supervises the external fuse failure
of the voltage transformer of the busbar. It also supervises the line voltages. The
external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected
to binary inputs that are then configured to the inputs of SYNCRSYN. Alternatively,
the internal signals from the fuse failure supervision function can also be used when
available.

In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check module is blocked, which
eventually blocks the synchrocheck and synchronizing modules.

Voltage selection
The voltage selection function is used for the connection of appropriate voltages to the
energizing check, synchrocheck and synchronizing modules. For example, when an
IED is used in a double bus arrangement, the voltage to be selected depends on the
status of the breakers and disconnectors. By checking the status of the auxiliary
contacts of the disconnectors, the right voltages for the synchrocheck and energizing
check functions are selected. The available voltage selection type is for single circuit
breaker with the double busbar arrangement. A single circuit breaker with a single
busbar does not need any voltage selection functions, nor does a single circuit breaker
with double busbars using external voltage selection need any internal voltage
selections.

The voltages from busbars and lines must be physically connected to the voltage
inputs in the IED and connected, using the control software, to SYNCRSYN available
in the IED.

Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check are based on three-phase voltage

measurements, but usually the single-phase quantities are satisfactory. Preferably a
phase-to-phase voltage is used, but sometimes there is just a single phase-to-earth
voltage transformer installed at one side and a phase-to-earth voltage must be used.

1212 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.4.7 Application Examples

SYNCRSYN can be used in different switchyard arrangements with different
parameter settings. Below are the examples of how different arrangements are
connected to the IED analog inputs and to SYNCRSYN. One function block is used
per circuit breaker.

Single circuit breaker with single busbar

There is a voltage transformer on each side of the circuit breaker. The voltage
transformer circuit connections are straightforward and no special voltage selection is
necessary. The inputs and outputs that are not used in SYCRSYN are dimmed as
shown in Figure 601,and the variable GRP_OFF taken from the FXDSIGN function
block are to be connected to the unused inputs. The voltage selection parameter CB
Configuration is set to “No voltage sel.”.
SYNCRSYN

Bus 1 U3P_Bus U3P_B1 AU_ENERG_OK

GRP_OFF U3P_B2 AU_SYNC_OK
U12_Line U3P_LN1 MAN_ENERG_OK
GRP_OFF U3P_LN2 MAN_SYNC_OK
BLOCK SYN_OK
BLK_SYN ENERG_TST
QB1 BLK_SYNC AU_SYNC_TST
BLK_ENERG MAN_SYNC_TST
B1_Q_OPEN SYN_TST
B1_Q_CLOSED SYN_INPRO
B2_Q_OPEN SYN_FAIL
B2_Q_CLOSED B1_SEL
LN1_Q_OPEN B2_SEL
QA1 LN1_Q_CLOSED LN1_SEL
LN2_Q_OPEN LN2_SEL
LN2_Q_CLOSED U_SEL_FAIL
Bus 1 Voltage Fuse B1_U_OK
B1_U_FF
FR_DIFF_AU
PH_DIFF_AU
B2_U_OK FR_DIFF_MAN
B2_U_FF PH_DIFF_MAN
Fuse LN1_U_OK U_OK
LN1_U_FF U_DIFF_SYNC
LN2_U_OK U_DIFF_SYN
Line 1 Voltage LN2_U_FF
START_SYN
FR_OK_SYN
FR_DIFF_SYN
TST_ENERG FR_DER_SYN
TST_SYNC U_DIFF_MEAS
TST_SYN FR_DIFF_MEAS
A_ENERG_MODE PH_DIFF_MEAS
M_ENERG_MODE MODE_A_ENERG
MODE_M_ENERG

GUID-A502866F-B01F-4B0D-881E-FA7DCCDB8988 V2 EN

Figure 601: Connection principles for SYNCRSYN block in a single busbar

arrangement

Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage selection

In this type of arrangement, no internal voltage selection is required. The voltage
selection is made by external relays typically connected according to Figure 602. The
suitable voltage and VT fuse failure supervision from the two busbars are selected
based on the position of the busbar disconnectors. This means that the connections to
the function block are the same as the single busbar arrangement. The voltage
selection parameter CB configuration is set to “No voltage sel”.

630 series 1213

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

GUID-21F37E93-1661-43BC-8480-7E7738608039 V1 EN

Figure 602: Connection for SYNCRSYN block in a single breaker, double busbar
arrangement with external voltage selection

Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage selection

When the internal voltage selection is needed, two analog input modules are required.
The voltage transformer circuit connections are made as shown in Figure 603, and the
inputs and outputs not used in SYNCRSYN are dimmed.

The voltage selection parameter CB configuration is set to “Double bus”.

1214 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

GUID-217A58A6-87D8-4FC4-AA9D-5A3D08DBE45F V1 EN

Figure 603: Connection for SYNCRSYN block in a single breaker, double busbar
arrangement with internal voltage selection

10.4.8 Signals
Table 1144: SYNCRSYN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P_B1 GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs,
SIGNAL busbar 1
U3P_B2 GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs,
SIGNAL busbar 2
U3P_LN1 GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs, line 1
SIGNAL
U3P_LN2 GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs, line 2
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLK_SYN BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLK_SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLK_ENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
B1_Q_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B1_Q_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B2_Q_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
Table continues on next page

630 series 1215

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Name Type Default Description

B2_Q_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
LN1_Q_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN1_Q_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN2_Q_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
LN2_Q_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
B1_U_OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
B1_U_FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
B2_U_OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
B2_U_FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
LN1_U_OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
LN1_U_FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
LN2_U_OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
LN2_U_FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
START_SYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TST_ENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
TST_SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TST_SYN BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
A_ENERG_MODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
M_ENERG_MODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 1145: SYNCRSYN Output signals

Name Type Description
AU_ENERG_OK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
AU_SYNC_OK BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK
MAN_ENERG_OK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
MAN_SYNC_OK BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK
SYN_OK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
ENERG_TST BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
AU_SYNC_TST BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK test output
MAN_SYNC_TST BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK test output
SYN_TST BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
SYN_INPRO BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYN_FAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
B1_SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
B2_SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
LN1_SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
Table continues on next page

1216 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Name Type Description

LN2_SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
U_SEL_FAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
FR_DIFF_AU BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PH_DIFF_AU BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto
operation
FR_DIFF_MAN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual
operation
PH_DIFF_MAN BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual
Operation
U_OK BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits
U_DIFF_SYNC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
U_DIFF_SYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FR_OK_SYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FR_DIFF_SYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FR_DER_SYN BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
U_DIFF_MEAS REAL Calculated difference in voltage
FR_DIFF_MEAS REAL Calculated difference in frequency
PH_DIFF_MEAS REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
MODE_A_ENERG INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODE_M_ENERG INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing

10.4.9 Settings
Table 1146: SYNCRSYN Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Dead bus value 0.05 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.40 Voltage low limit bus for energizing check
Dead line value 0.05 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.40 Voltage low limit line for energizing check
Live bus value 0.40 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.80 Voltage high limit bus for energizing check
Live line value 0.40 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.80 Voltage high limit line for energizing check
Frequency deviation 1-5 Hz 1 5 Max allowed Frequency deviation from
rated frequency
Difference voltage 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit
Max energizing V 0.80 - 1.40 pu 0.01 1.15 Maximum voltage for energizing
Phase shift -180 - 180 Deg 5 0 Phase shift
Voltage ratio 0.20 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Voltage ratio
Live dead mode Auto Off - - LLDB Automatic energizing check mode
LLDB
DLLB
LLDB or DLLB
Dif phase angle Auto 5 - 90 Deg 1 25 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Auto
Dif frequency Auto 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Auto
Table continues on next page

630 series 1217

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Energizing time Auto 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing
check
Syn Chk delay Auto 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
Live dead mode Man Off - - LLDB or DLLB Manual energizing check mode
LLDB
DLLB
LLDB or DLLB
Dead bus line Man Off - - Off Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
On
Dif phase angle Man 5 - 90 Deg 1 25 Phase angle difference limit between bus
and line Manual
Dif frequency Man 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Manual
Energizing time Man 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check
Syn Chk delay Man 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual

Table 1147: SYNCRSYN Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Synchrocheck mode Off - - On Operation for synchronism check function
On Off/On
Synchronizing mode Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function
On Off/On
Dif voltage Syn 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for synchronizing
Maximum Dif Hz Syn 0.050 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
Minimum Dif Hz Syn 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
Max Dif Hz rate Syn 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
Minimum Syn time 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
conditions
Wait Syn time 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made
before set time

1218 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Table 1148: SYNCRSYN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
CB configuration No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus 1 CB
1 1/2 bus 2 CB
Tie CB
Phase selection bus phase1 - - phase1-phase2 Select phase for buses
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
Phase selection line phase1 - - phase1-phase2 Select phase for lines
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
Closing time of CB 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker

Table 1149: SYNCRSYN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Close pulse time 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration

10.4.10 Measured values

Table 1150: SYNCRSYN Measured values
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLK_SYN BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLK_SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLK_ENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
B1_Q_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B1_Q_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B2_Q_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
B2_Q_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
LN1_Q_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
Table continues on next page

630 series 1219

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Name Type Default Description

LN1_Q_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN2_Q_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
LN2_Q_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
B1_U_OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
B1_U_FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
B2_U_OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
B2_U_FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
LN1_U_OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
LN1_U_FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
LN2_U_OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
LN2_U_FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
START_SYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TST_ENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
TST_SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TST_SYN BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
A_ENERG_MODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
M_ENERG_MODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode

10.4.11 Monitored data

Table 1151: SYNCRSYN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
AU_ENERG_OK BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Automatic energizing
1=TRUE check OK
AU_SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Auto synchro check OK
1=TRUE
MAN_ENERG_OK BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Manual energizing check
1=TRUE OK
MAN_SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Manual synchro check
1=TRUE OK
SYN_OK BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Synchronizing OK output
1=TRUE
ENERG_TST BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Energizing check OK test
1=TRUE output
AU_SYNC_TST BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Auto synchro check OK
1=TRUE test output
MAN_SYNC_TST BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Manual synchro check
1=TRUE OK test output
SYN_TST BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Synchronizing OK test
1=TRUE output
Table continues on next page

1220 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

SYN_INPRO BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Synchronizing in
1=TRUE progress
SYN_FAIL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Synchronizing failed
1=TRUE
B1_SEL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Bus1 selected
1=TRUE
B2_SEL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Bus2 selected
1=TRUE
LN1_SEL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Line1 selected
1=TRUE
LN2_SEL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Line2 selected
1=TRUE
U_SEL_FAIL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Selected voltage
1=TRUE transformer fuse failed
FR_DIFF_AU BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Frequency difference out
1=TRUE of limit for Auto operation
PH_DIFF_AU BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Phase angle difference
1=TRUE out of limit for Auto
operation
FR_DIFF_MAN BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Frequency difference out
1=TRUE of limit for Manual
operation
PH_DIFF_MAN BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Phase angle difference
1=TRUE out of limit for Manual
Operation
U_OK BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage amplitudes
1=TRUE above set limits
U_DIFF_SYNC BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage difference out of
1=TRUE limit
U_DIFF_SYN BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Voltage difference out of
1=TRUE limit for synchronizing
FR_OK_SYN BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Frequency difference in
1=TRUE band for synchronizing
FR_DIFF_SYN BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Frequency difference out
1=TRUE of limit for synchronizing
U_DIFF_MEAS REAL - kV Calculated difference in
voltage
FR_DIFF_MEAS REAL - Hz Calculated difference in
frequency
PH_DIFF_MEAS REAL - deg Calculated difference of
phase angle
U_BUS_A REAL - kV Bus voltage phase A
U_BUS_B REAL - kV Bus voltage phase B
U_BUS_C REAL - kV Bus voltage phase C
FR_BUS REAL - Hz Bus frequency
PH_BUS REAL - deg Bus phase angle
U_LINE_A REAL - kV Line voltage phase A
U_LINE_B REAL - kV Line voltage phase B
Table continues on next page

630 series 1221

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

U_LINE_C REAL - kV Line voltage phase C
FR_LINE REAL - Hz Line frequency
PH_LINE REAL - deg Line phase angle
MODE_A_ENERG INTEGER 0=Off - Selected mode for
1=DLLB automatic energizing
2=LLDB
3=LLDB or DLLB
MODE_M_ENERG INTEGER 0=Off - Selected mode for
1=DLLB manual energizing
2=LLDB
3=LLDB or DLLB

10.4.12 Technical data

Table 1152: SYNCRSYN Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

Voltage: ±1.0% or ±0.002 × Un

Frequency: ±10 mHz
Phase angle ±2°
Reset time <50 ms
Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Operate time accuracy +90ms/0 ms

10.4.13 Technical revision history

Table 1153: SYNCRSYN technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Internal improvements

10.5 Auto-recloser DARREC

10.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 logical IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
node name identification device number
Autoreclosing DARREC O ->I 79

1222 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.5.2 Function block

GUID-EFE5F459-43FB-46E3-9E63-E1A7B6C0EFA6 V2 EN

Figure 604: Function block

10.5.3 Functionality
About 80 to 85 percent of faults in the MV overhead lines are transient and
automatically cleared with a momentary de-energization of the line. The rest of the
faults, 15 to 20 percent, can be cleared by longer interruptions. The de-energization of
the fault location for a selected time period is implemented through automatic
reclosing, during which most of the faults can be cleared.

In case of a permanent fault, the automatic reclosing is followed by final tripping. A

permanent fault must be located and cleared before the fault location can be re-
energized.

The auto-reclose function AR can be used with any circuit breaker suitable for auto-
reclosing. The function provides five programmable auto-reclose shots which can
perform one to five successive auto-reclosings of desired type and duration, for
instance one high-speed and one delayed auto-reclosing.

When the reclosing is initiated with starting of the protection function, the auto-
reclose function can execute the final trip of the circuit breaker in a short operate time,
provided that the fault still persists when the last selected reclosing has been carried
out.

10.5.3.1 Protection signal definition

The Control line setting defines which of the initiation signals are protection start and
trip signals and which are not. With this setting, the user can distinguish the blocking
signals from the protection signals. The Control line setting is a bit mask, that is, the
lowest bit controls the INIT_1 line and the highest bit the INIT_6 line. Some
example combinations of the Control line setting are as follows:

630 series 1223

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Table 1154: Control line setting definition

Control line INIT_1 INIT_2 INIT_3 INIT_4 INIT_5 INIT_6
setting DEL_INIT_2 DEL_INIT_3 DEL_INIT_4
0 other other other other other other
1 prot other other other other other
2 other prot other other other other
3 prot prot other other other other
4 other other prot other other other
5 prot other prot other other other
...63 prot prot prot prot prot prot

prot = protection signal

other = non-protection signal

When the corresponding bit or bits in both the Control line setting and the INIT_X
line are TRUE:
• The CLOSE_CB output is blocked until the protection is reset
• If the INIT_X line defined as the protection signal is activated during the
discrimination time, the AR function goes to lockout
• If the INIT_X line defined as the protection signal stays active longer than the
time set by the Max trip time setting, the AR function goes to lockout (long trip)
• The UNSUC_RECL output is activated after a pre-defined two minutes (alarming
earth-fault).

10.5.3.2 Zone coordination

Zone coordination is used in the zone sequence between local protection units and
downstream devices. At the falling edge of the INC_SHOTP line, the value of the shot
pointer is increased by one, unless a shot is in progress or the shot pointer already has
the maximum value.

The falling edge of the INC_SHOTP line is not accepted if any of the shots are in
progress.

10.5.3.3 Master and slave scheme

With the cooperation between the AR units in the same IED or between IEDs,
sequential reclosings of two breakers at a line end in a 1½-breaker, double breaker or
ring-bus arrangement can be achieved. One unit is defined as a master and it executes
the reclosing first. If the reclosing is successful and no trip takes place, the second unit,
that is the slave, is released to complete the reclose shot. With persistent faults, the
breaker reclosing is limited to the first breaker.

1224 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

A070877 V1 EN

Figure 605: Master and slave scheme

If the AR unit is defined as a master by setting its Terminal priority to High (master)”:
• The unit activates the CMD_WAIT output to the low priority slave unit whenever
a shot is in progress, a reclosing is unsuccessful or the BLK_RCLM_T input is
active
• The CMD_WAIT output is reset one second after the reclose command is given or
if the sequence is unsuccessful when the reclaim time elapses.

If the AR unit is defined as a slave by setting its terminal priority to low:

• The unit waits until the master releases the BLK_RECL_T input (the CMD_WAIT
output in the master). Only after this signal has been deactivated, the reclose time
for the slave unit can be started.
• The slave unit is set to a lockout state if the BLK_RECL_T input is not released
within the time defined by the Max wait time setting , which follows the initiation
of an auto-reclose shot.

If the terminal priority of the AR unit is set to "none", the AR unit skips all these
actions.

10.5.3.4 Thermal overload blocking

An alarm or start signal from the thermal overload protection (T1PTTR) can be routed
to the input BLK_THERM to block and hold the reclose sequence. The BLK_THERM
signal does not affect the starting of the sequence. When the reclose time has elapsed
and the BLK_THERM input is active, the shot is not ready until the BLK_THERM input
deactivates. Should the BLK_THERM input remain active longer than the time set by
the setting Max block time, the AR function goes to lockout.

If the BLK_THERM input is activated when the auto wait timer is running, the auto
wait timer is reset and the timer restarted when the BLK_THERM input deactivates.

10.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The reclosing operation can be enabled and disabled with the Reclosing operation
setting. This setting does not disable the function, only the reclosing functionality. The
setting has three parameter values: “On”, “External Ctl” and ”Off”. The setting value

630 series 1225

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

“On” enables the reclosing operation and “Off” disables it. When the setting value
“External Ctl” is selected, the reclosing operation is controlled with the RECL_ON
input .

The operation of the auto-reclose function can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-D23F3727-4ECC-413F-86B7-84371D022881 V1 EN

Figure 606: Functional module diagram

10.5.4.1 Signal collection and delay logic

When the protection trips, the initiation of auto-reclose shots is in most applications
executed with the INIT_1...6 inputs. The DEL_INIT2...4 inputs are not used.
In some countries, starting the protection stage is also used for the shot initiation. This
is the only time when the DEL_INIT inputs are used.

1226 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

A070865 V2 EN

Figure 607: Schematic diagram of delayed initiation input signals

In total, the AR function contains six separate initiation lines used for the initiation or
blocking of the auto-reclose shots. These lines are divided into two types of channels.
In three of these channels, the signal to the AR function can be delayed, whereas the
other three channels do not have any delaying capability.

Each channel that is capable of delaying a start signal has four time delays. The time
delay is selected based on the shot pointer in the AR function. For the first reclose
attempt, the first time delay is selected; for the second attempt, the second time delay
and so on. For the fourth and fifth attempts, the time delays are the same.

Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_2 signal are as follows:

• Str 2 delay shot 1

• Str 2 delay shot 2
• Str 2 delay shot 3
• Str 2 delay shot 4

Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_3 signal are as follows:

630 series 1227

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

• Str 3 delay shot 1

• Str 3 delay shot 2
• Str 3 delay shot 3
• Str 3 delay shot 4

Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_4 signal are as follows:

• Str 4 delay shot 1

• Str 4 delay shot 2
• Str 4 delay shot 3
• Str 4 delay shot 4

Normally, only two or three reclose attempts are made. The third and fourth times are
used to provide the so called fast final trip to lockout.

OR CB_TRIP

DARREC
PHLPTOC INIT_1 OPEN _CB
I_A OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE _CB CB_CLOSE
INIT_3 CMD_W AIT
I_B START
INIT_4 INPRO
I_C INIT_5 LOCKED
BLOCK INIT_6 PROT _CRD
DEL_ INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL
ENA_MULT DEL_ INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_ INIT_4 READY
BLK _RECL _T
BLK _RCLM_T
BLK _THERM
CB_POSITION CB_POS
CB_ READY CB_READY
INC_ SHOTP
INHIBIT_ RECL
RECL_ON
SYNC

A070866 V3 EN

Figure 608: Auto-reclose configuration example

Delayed DEL_INIT_2...4 signals are used only when the auto-reclose shot is
initiated with the start signal of a protection stage. After a start delay, the AR function
opens the circuit breaker and an auto-reclose shot is initiated. When the shot is
initiated with the trip signal of the protection, the protection function trips the circuit
breaker and simultaneously initiates the auto-reclose shot.

If the circuit breaker is manually closed against the fault, that is, if SOTF is used, the
fourth time delay can automatically be taken into use. This is controlled with the
internal logic of the AR function and the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter.

A typical auto-reclose situation is where one auto-reclose shot has been performed
after the fault was detected. There are two types of such cases: operation initiated with
protection start signal and operation initiated with protection trip signal. In both cases,
the auto-reclose sequence is successful: the reclaim time elapses and no new sequence
is started.

1228 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

A070867 V1 EN

Figure 609: Signal scheme of auto-reclose operation initiated with protection

start signal

The auto-reclose shot is initiated with a start signal of the protection function after the
start delay time has elapsed. The auto-reclose starts when the Str 2 delay shot 1 setting
elapses.

A070868 V1 EN

Figure 610: Signal scheme of auto-reclose operation initiated with protection

operate signal

The auto-reclose shot is initiated with a trip signal of the protection function. The auto-
reclose starts when the protection operate delay time elapses.

Normally, all trip and start signals are used to initiate an auto-reclose shot and trip the
circuit breaker. If any of the input signals INIT_X or DEL_INIT_X are used for
blocking, the corresponding bit in the Tripping line setting must be FALSE. This is to
ensure that the circuit breaker does not trip from that signal, that is, the signal does not
activate the OPEN_CB output. The default value for the setting is "63", which means
that all initiation signals activate the OPEN_CB output. The lowest bit in the Tripping
line setting corresponds to the INIT_1 input, the highest bit to the INIT_6 line.

630 series 1229

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.5.4.2 Shot initiation

A070869 V1 EN

Figure 611: Example of an auto-reclose program with a reclose scheme matrix

In the AR function, each shot can be programmed to locate anywhere in the reclose
scheme matrix. The shots are like building blocks used to design the reclose program.
The building blocks are called CBBs. All blocks are alike and have settings which give
the attempt number (columns in the matrix), the initiation or blocking signals (rows in
the matrix) and the reclose time of the shot.

The settings related to CBB configuration are:

• First...Seventh reclose time
• Init signals CBB1…CBB7
• Blk signals CBB1…CBB7
• Shot number CBB1…CBB7

The reclose time defines the open and dead times, that is, the time between the
OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB commands. The Init signals CBBx setting defines the
initiation signals. The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that are
related to the CBB (rows in the matrix). The Shot number CBB1…CBB7 setting
defines which shot is related to the CBB (columns in the matrix). For example, CBB1
settings are:

1230 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

• First reclose time = 1.0s

• Init signals CBB1 = 7 (three lowest bits: 111000 = 7)
• Blk signals CBB1 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB1 = 1

CBB2 settings are:

• Second reclose time = 10s
• Init signals CBB2 = 6 (the second and third bits: 011000 = 6)
• Blk signals CBB2 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB2 = 2

CBB3 settings are:

• Third reclose time = 30s
• Init signals CBB3 = 4 (the third bit: 001000 = 4)
• Blk signals CBB3 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB3 = 3

CBB4 settings are:

• Fourth reclose time = 0.5s
• Init signals CBB4 = 8 (the fourth bit: 000100 = 8)
• Blk signals CBB4 = 0 (no blocking signals related to this CBB)
• Shot number CBB4 = 1

If a shot is initiated from the INIT_1 line, only one shot is allowed before lockout.
If a shot is initiated from the INIT_3 line, three shots are allowed before lockout.

A sequence initiation from the INIT_4 line leads to a lockout after two shots. In a
situation where the initiation is made from both the INIT_3 and INIT_4 lines, a
third shot is allowed, that is, CBB3 is allowed to start. This is called conditional
lockout. If the initiation is made from the INIT_2 and INIT_3 lines, an immediate
lockout occurs.

The INIT_5 line is used for blocking purposes. If the INIT_5 line is active during
a sequence start, the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to lockout.

If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer, the CBB with
the smallest individual number is always selected. For example, if the
INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the second shot, that is, the
shot pointer is 2, CBB2 is started instead of CBB5.

Even if the initiation signals are not received from the protection functions, the AR
function can be set to continue from the second to the fifth reclose shot. The AR
function can, for example, be requested to automatically continue with the sequence
when the circuit breaker fails to close when requested. In such a case, the AR function

630 series 1231

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

issues a CLOSE_CB command. When the wait close time elapses, that is, the closing
of the circuit breaker fails, the next shot is automatically started. Another example is
the embedded generation on the power line, which can make the synchronism check
fail and prevent the reclosing. If the auto-reclose sequence is continued to the second
shot, a successful synchronous reclosing is more likely than with the first shot, since
the second shot lasts longer than the first one.

A070870 V1 EN

Figure 612: Logic diagram of auto-initiation sequence detection

Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the
following:

1232 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

• Not allowed: no automatic initiation is allowed

• When the synchronization fails, the automatic initiation is carried out when the
auto wait time elapses and the reclosing is prevented due to a failure during the
synchronism check
• When the circuit breaker does not close, the automatic initiation is carried out if
the circuit breaker does not close within the wait close time after issuing the
reclose command
• Both: the automatic initiation is allowed when synchronization fails or the circuit
breaker does not close.

The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated in
the auto-initiation. The default value for this parameter is "0", which
means that no auto-initiation is selected.

A070871 V1 EN

Figure 613: Example of an auto-initiation sequence with synchronization failure

in the first shot and circuit breaker closing failure in the second shot

In the first shot, the synchronization condition is not fulfilled (SYNC is FALSE).
When the auto wait timer elapses, the sequence continues to the second shot. During
the second reclosing, the synchronization condition is fulfilled and the close
command is given to the circuit breaker after the second reclose time has elapsed.

After the second shot, the circuit breaker fails to close when the wait close time has
elapsed. The third shot is started and a new close command is given after the third
reclose time has elapsed. The circuit breaker closes normally and the reclaim time
starts. When the reclaim time has elapsed, the sequence is concluded successful.

The AR_ZONES output can be connected to distance protection DSTPDIS to enable

the dedicated autorecloser specific zones in DSTPDIS while the auto reclosing
function is enabled. If the connection is not made, the auto recloser specific zones in
DSTPDIS are disabled.

630 series 1233

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.5.4.3 Shot pointer controller

The execution of a reclose sequence is controlled by a shot pointer. It can be adjusted

with the SHOT_PTR monitored data.

The shot pointer starts from an initial value "1" and determines according to the
settings whether or not a certain shot is allowed to be initiated. After every shot, the
shot pointer value increases. This is carried out until a successful reclosing or lockout
takes place after a complete shot sequence containing a total of five shots.

A070872 V1 EN

Figure 614: Shot pointer function

Every time the shot pointer increases, the reclaim time starts. When the reclaim time
ends, the shot pointer sets to its initial value, unless no new shot is initiated. The shot
pointer increases when the reclose time elapses or at the falling edge of the
INC_SHOTP signal.

When SHOT_PTR has the value six, the AR function is in a so called pre-lockout state.
If a new initiation occurs during the pre-lockout state, the AR function goes to lockout.
Therefore, a new sequence initiation during the pre-lockout state is not possible.

The AR function goes to the pre-lockout state in the following cases:

• During SOTF
• When the AR function is active, it stays in a pre-lockout state for the time defined
by the reclaim time
• When all five shots have been executed
• When the frequent operation counter limit is reached. A new sequence initiation
forces the AR function to lockout.

1234 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.5.4.4 Reclose controller

The reclose controller calculates the reclose, discrimination and reclaim times. The
reclose time is started when the INPRO signal is activated, that is, when the sequence
starts and the activated CBB defines the reclose time.

When the reclose time has elapsed, the CLOSE_CB output is not activated until the
following conditions are fulfilled:
• The SYNC input must be TRUE if the particular CBB requires information about
the synchronism
• All AR initiation inputs that are defined protection lines (using the Control line
setting) are inactive
• The circuit breaker is open
• The circuit breaker is ready for the close command, that is, the CB_READY input
is TRUE.

If at least one of the conditions is not fulfilled within the time set with the Auto wait
time parameter, the auto-reclose sequence is locked.

The synchronism requirement for the CBBs can be defined with the Synchronisation
set setting, which is a bit mask. The lowest bit in the Synchronisation set setting is
related to CBB1 and the highest bit to CBB7. For example, if the setting is set to "1",
only CBB1 requires synchronism. If the setting is it set to "7", CBB1, CBB2 and
CBB3 require the SYNC input to be TRUE before the reclosing command can be
given.

A070873 V1 EN

Figure 615: Initiation during discrimination time - AR function goes to lockout

The discrimination time starts when the close command CLOSE_CB has been given.
If a start input is activated before the discrimination time has elapsed, the AR function
goes to lockout. The default value for each discrimination time is zero. The
discrimination time can be adjusted with the Dsr time shot 1…4 parameter.

630 series 1235

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

A070874 V1 EN

Figure 616: Initiation after elapsed discrimination time - new shot begins

10.5.4.5 Sequence controller

When the LOCKED output is active, the AR function is in lockout. This means that new
sequences cannot be initialized, because AR is insensitive to initiation commands. It
can be released from the lockout state in the following ways:
• The function is reset through communication with the RsRec parameter
• The lockout is automatically reset after the reclaim time, if the Auto lockout reset
setting is in use.

If the Auto lockout reset setting is not in use, the lockout can be
released only with the RsRec parameter.

The AR function can go to lockout for many reasons:

• The INHIBIT_RECL input is active
• All shots have been executed and a new initiation is made (final trip)
• The time set with the Auto wait time parameter expires and the automatic
sequence initiation is not allowed because of a synchronization failure
• The time set with the Wait close time parameter expires, that is, the circuit breaker
does not close or the automatic sequence initiation is not allowed due to a closing
failure of the circuit breaker
• A new shot is initiated during the discrimination time
• The time set with the Max wait time parameter expires, that is, the master unit
does not release the slave unit

1236 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

• The frequent operation counter limit is reached and new sequence is initiated. The
lockout is released when the recovery timer elapses
• The protection trip signal has been active longer than the time set with the Max
wait time parameter since the shot initiation
• The circuit breaker is closed manually during an auto-reclose sequence and the
manual close mode is FALSE.

10.5.4.6 Protection coordination controller

The PROT_CRD output is used for controlling the protection functions. In several
applications, such as fuse-saving applications involving down-stream fuses, tripping
and initiation of shot 1 should be fast (instantaneous or short-time delayed). The
tripping and initiation of shots 2, 3 and definite tripping time should be delayed.

In this example, two overcurrent elements PHLPTOC and PHIPTOC are used.
PHIPTOC is given an instantaneous characteristic and PHLPTOC is given a time
delay.

The PROT_CRD output is activated, if the SHOT_PTR value is the same or higher than
the value defined with the Protection crd limit setting and all initialization signals
have been reset. The PROT_CRD output is reset under the following conditions:

• If the cut-out time elapses

• If the reclaim time elapses and the AR function is ready for a new sequence
• If the AR function is in lockout or disabled, that is, if the value of the Protection
crd mode setting is "AR inoperative" or "AR inop, CB man".

The PROT_CRD output can also be controlled with the Protection crd mode setting.
The setting has the following modes:
• "no condition": the PROT_CRD output is controlled only with the Protection crd
limit setting
• "AR inoperative": the PROT_CRD output is active, if the AR function is disabled
or in the lockout state, or if the INHIBIT_RECL input is active
• "CB close manual": the PROT_CRD output is active for the reclaim time if the
circuit breaker has been manually closed, that is, the AR function has not issued
a close command
• "AR inop, CB man": both the modes "AR inoperative" and "CB close manual" are
effective
• "always": the PROT_CRD output is constantly active

630 series 1237

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

OR CB_TRIP

DARREC
PHLPTOC INIT_1 OPEN_CB
I_A OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE_CB CB_CLOSE
INIT_3 CMD_WAIT
I_B START
INIT_4 PROT_CRD
I_C INIT_5 PROT_DISA
BLOCK INIT_6 INPRO
DEL_INIT_2 LO CKED
ENA_MULT
DEL_INIT_3 UNSUC_RECL
DEL_INIT_4 AR_ON
BLK_RECL_T
BLK_RCLM_T
BLK_THERM
CB_POSITION CB_POS
CB_READY CB_READY
DISA_COUNT
INC_SHOTP
INHIBIT_RECL
RECL_ON
SYNC

A070875 V3 EN

Figure 617: Configuration example of using the PROT_CRD output for protection
blocking

If the Protection crd limit setting has the value "1", the instantaneous three-phase
overcurrent protection function PHIPTOC is disabled or blocked after the first shot.

The protection functions can also be controlled with the PROT_DISA output. The
PROT_DISA output signal is a bit mask that is controlled with the Disable shot 1…5
settings. The Disable shot 1 setting defines the bits that are active at the first shot, the
Disable shot 2 setting defines the bits that are active at the second shot and so on. The
PROT_DISA signal is updated when the SHOT_PTR value is updated. In this way, the
user can, for example, control the protection functions to initiate a complex auto-
reclose sequence to be executed in a desired order. However, this output is not needed
in most auto-reclose applications due to a simple protection scheme.

The protection functions can also be controlled with the PROT_DISA output. The
PROT_DISA output signal is a bit mask that is controlled with the Disable shot 1…5
settings. The Disable shot 1 setting defines the bits that are active at the first shot, the
Disable shot 2 setting defines the bits that are active at the second shot and so on. The
PROT_DISA signal is updated when the SHOT_PTR value is updated. In this way, the
user can, for example, control the protection functions to initiate a complex
autoreclose sequence to be executed in a desired order. However, this output is not
needed in most autoreclose applications due to a simple protection scheme.

The PROT_DISA output follows the Disable shot 5 setting in the pre-lockout and
lockout states and in SOTF.

The PROT_DISA signal is reset when the cutout time elapses. The signal is reset to
the value defined with the Disable pro signal parameter.

1238 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

A070876 V1 EN

Figure 618: Signal scheme of PROT_DISA signal behavior

The Disable shot x settings have the following values in the sequence:
Table 1155: Disable shot x values
Setting Value
Disable shot 1 "0"
Disable shot 2 "2"
Disable shot 3 "0"
Disable shot 4 "4"
Disable shot 5 "6"

Since the PROT_DISA output is a bit mask integer, the bits must be
extracted from it with the integer-to-bit conversion INT_TO_BIT in
the configuration.

10.5.4.7 Circuit breaker controller

Circuit breaker controller contains two features: SOTF and frequent-operation

counter. SOTF protects the AR function in permanent faults.

The circuit breaker position information is controlled with the CB closed Pos status
setting. The setting value "TRUE” means that when the circuit breaker is closed, the
CB_POS input is TRUE. When the setting value is “FALSE”, the CB_POS input is
FALSE, provided that the circuit breaker is closed. The reclose command pulse time
can be controlled with the Close pulse time setting: the CLOSE_CB output is active for
the time set with the Close pulse time setting. The CLOSE_CB output is deactivated
also when the circuit breaker is detected to be closed, that is, when the CB_POS input
changes from open state to closed state. The Wait close time setting defines the time
after the CLOSE_CB command activation, during which the circuit breaker should be
closed. If the closing of circuit breaker does not happen during this time, the auto-
reclose function is driven to lockout or, if allowed, an auto-initiation is activated.

The main motivation for auto-reclosing to begin with is the assumption that the fault
is temporary by nature, and that a momentary de-energizing of the power line and an
automatic reclosing restores the power supply. However, when the power line is

630 series 1239

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

manually energized and an immediate protection trip is detected, it is very likely that
the fault is of a permanent type. A permanent fault is, for example, energizing a power
line into a forgotten earthing after a maintenance work along the power line. In such
cases, SOTF is activated, but only for the reclaim time after energizing the power line
and only when the circuit breaker is closed manually and not by the AR function.

SOTF disables any initiation of an auto-reclose shot. The energizing of the power line
is detected from the CB_POS information.

SOTF is activated when the AR function is enabled or when the AR function is started
and the SOTF should remain active for the reclaim time.

When SOTF is detected, the output SOTF is active.

If the Manual close mode setting is set to FALSE and the circuit
breaker has been manually closed during an auto-reclose shot, the AR
unit goes to an immediate lockout.

If the Manual close mode setting is set to TRUE and the circuit breaker
has been manually closed during an auto-reclose shot (the INPRO is
active), the shot is considered as completed.

When SOTF starts, reclaim time is restarted, provided that it is

running.

The frequent-operation counter is intended for blocking the auto-reclose function in

cases where the fault causes repetitive auto-reclose sequences during a short period of
time. For instance, if a tree causes a short circuit and, as a result, there are auto-reclose
shots within a few minutes interval during a stormy night. These types of faults can
easily damage the circuit breaker if the AR function is not locked by a frequent-
operation counter.

The frequent-operation counter has three settings:

• Frq Op counter limit
• Frq Op counter time
• Frq Op recovery time

The Frq Op counter limit setting defines the number of reclose attempts that are
allowed during the time defined with the Frq Op counter time setting. If the set value
is reached within a pre-defined period defined with the Frq Op counter time setting,
the AR function goes to lockout when a new shot begins, provided that the counter is
still above the set limit. The lockout is released after the recovery time has elapsed.
The recovery time can be defined with the Frq Op recovery time setting .

1240 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

If the circuit breaker is manually closed during the recovery time, the reclaim time is
activated after the recovery timer has elapsed.

10.5.5 Application
Modern electric power systems can deliver energy to users very reliably. However,
different kind of faults can occur. Protection relays play an important role in detecting
failures or abnormalities in the system. They detect faults and give commands for
corresponding circuit breakers to isolate the defective element before excessive
damage or a possible power system collapse occurs. A fast isolation also limits the
disturbances caused for the healthy parts of the power system.

The faults can be transient, semi-transient or permanent. Permanent fault, for example
in power cables, means that there is a physical damage in the fault location that must
first be located and repaired before the network voltage can be restored.

In overhead lines, the insulating material between phase conductors is air. The
majority of the faults are flash-over arcing faults caused by lightning, for example.
Only a short interruption is needed for extinguishing the arc. These faults are transient
by nature.

A semi-transient fault can be caused for example by a bird or a tree branch falling on
the overhead line. The fault disappears on its own if the fault current burns the branch
or the wind blows it away.

Transient and semi-transient faults can be cleared by momentarily de-energizing the

power line. Using the auto-reclose function minimizes interruptions in the power
system service and brings the power back on-line quickly and effortlessly.

The basic idea of the auto-reclose function is simple. In overhead lines, where the
possibility of self-clearing faults is high, the auto-reclose function tries to restore the
power by reclosing the breaker. This is a method to get the power system back into
normal operation by removing the transient or semi-transient faults. Several trials, that
is, auto-reclose shots are allowed. If none of the trials is successful and the fault
persists, definite final tripping follows.

The auto-reclose function can be used with every circuit breaker that has the ability for
a reclosing sequence. In DARREC auto-reclose function the implementing method of
auto-reclose sequences is patented by ABB

630 series 1241

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Table 1156: Important definitions related to auto-reclosing

auto-reclose shot an operation where after a preset time the breaker is closed from the breaker
tripping caused by protection
auto-reclose a predefined method to do reclose attempts (shots) to restore the power system
sequence
SOTF If the protection detects a fault immediately after an open circuit breaker has been
closed, it indicates that the fault was already there. It can be, for example, a
forgotten earthing after maintenance work. Such closing of the circuit breaker is
known as switch on to fault. Autoreclosing in such conditions is prohibited.
final trip Occurs in case of a permanent fault, when the circuit breaker is opened for the last
time after all programmed auto-reclose operations. Since no auto-reclosing
follows, the circuit breaker remains open. This is called final trip or definite trip.

10.5.5.1 Shot initiation

In some applications, the START signal is used for initiating or blocking autoreclose
shots, in other applications the OPERATE command is needed. In its simplest, the
auto-reclose function is initiated after the protection has detected a fault, issued a trip
and opened the breaker. One input is enough for initiating the function.

The function consists of six individual initiation lines INIT_1, INIT_2 ..

INIT 6 and delayed initiation lines DEL_INIT_x. The user can use as many of the
initiation lines as required. Using only one line makes setting easier, whereas by using
multiple lines, higher functionality can be achieved. Basically, there are no
differences between the initiation lines, except that the lines 2, 3 and 4 have the
delayed initiation DEL_INIT inputs, and lines 1, 5 and 6 do not.

1242 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

A070884 V1 EN

Figure 619: Simplified CBB initiation diagram

INIT_1...6 initiation lines

CBB1...CBB2 first two cycle building blocks

The operation of a CBB consists of two parts: initiation and execution. In the initiation
part, the status of the initiation lines is compared to the CBB settings. In order to allow
the initiation at any of the initiation line activation, the corresponding switch in the Init
signals CBB_ parameter must be set to TRUE. In order to block the initiation, the
corresponding switch in the Blk signals CBB_ parameter must be set to TRUE.

If any of the initiation lines set with the Init signals CBB_ parameter is active and no
initiation line causes blocking, the CBB requests for execution.

630 series 1243

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

A070885 V1 EN

Figure 620: Simplified CBB diagram

Each CBB has individual Init signals CBB_ and Blk signals CBB_ settings. Therefore,
each initiation line can be used for both initiating and blocking any or all auto-reclose
shots.

Other conditions that must be fulfilled before any CBB can be initiated are, for
example, the closed position of the circuit breaker.

10.5.5.2 Sequence

The auto reclose sequence is implemented by using CBBs. The highest possible
amount of CBBs is seven. If the user wants to have, for example, a sequence of three
shots, only the first three CBBs are needed. Using building blocks instead of fixed
shots gives enhanced flexibility, allowing multiple and adaptive sequences.

Each CBB is identical. The Shot number CBB_ setting defines at which point in the
auto-reclose sequence the CBB should be performed, that is, whether the particular
CBB is going to be the first, second, third, fourth or fifth shot.

During the initiation of a CBB, the conditions of initiation and blocking are checked.
This is done for all CBBs simultaneously. Each CBB that fulfils the initiation
conditions requests an execution.

The function also keeps track of shots already performed, that is, at which point the
auto-reclose sequence is from shot 1 to lockout. For example, if shots 1 and 2 have
already been performed, only shots 3 to 5 are allowed.

Additionally, the Enable shot jump setting gives two possibilities:

1244 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

• Only such CBBs that are set for the next shot in the sequence can be accepted for
execution. For example, if the next shot in the sequence should be shot 2, a request
from CBB set for shot 3 is rejected.
• Any CBB that is set for the next shot or any of the following shots can be accepted
for execution. For example, if the next shot in the sequence should be shot 2, also
CBBs that are set for shots 3, 4 and 5 are accepted. In other words, shot 2 can be
ignored.

In case there are multiple CBBs allowed for execution, the CBB with the smallest
number is chosen. For example, if CBB2 and CBB4 request an execution, CBB2 is
allowed to execute the shot.

The auto-reclose function can perform up to five auto-reclose shots or cycles.

10.5.5.3 Configuration examples

OR CB_ TRIP

PHHPTOC DARREC
I _A OPERATE INIT _1 OPEN _CB
I _B START INIT _2 CLOSE _CB CB_CLOSE
INIT _3 CMD_W AIT
I _C INIT _4 INPRO
BLOCK INIT _5 LOCKED
INIT _6 PROT_ CRD
ENA _MULT UNSUC_ RECL
DEL _INIT _2
DEL _INIT _3 AR_ON
DEL _INIT _4 READY
PHLPTOC
BLK _RECL_ T
I_ A OPERATE BLK _RCLM_T
I_ B START BLK _THERM
CB _POS
I_ C CB _READY
BLOCK INC_ SHOTP
INHIBIT _RECL
ENA_ MULT
RECL _ON
SYNC

EFLPTOC
Io OPERATE
BLOCK START
ENA_ MULT

Circuit breaker position

information from binary input
Conditions to verify if circuit breaker
is ready to be reclosed
A070886 V4 EN

Figure 621: Example connection between protection and autoreclose functions in

IED configuration

It is possible to create several sequences for a configuration.

Autoreclose sequences for overcurrent and non-directional earth-fault protection

applications where high speed and delayed autoreclosings are needed can be as
follows:

630 series 1245

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Example 1.
The sequence is implemented by two shots which have the same reclosing time for all
protection functions, namely I>>, I> and Io>. The initiation of the shots is done by
activating the operating signals of the protection functions.

A070887 V1 EN

Figure 622: Autoreclose sequence with two shots

tHSAR Time delay of high-speed autoreclosing, here: First reclose time

tDAR Time delay of delayed autoreclosing, here: Second reclose time

tProtection Operating time for the protection stage to clear the fault

tCB_O Operating time for opening the circuit breaker

tCB_C Operating time for closing the circuit breaker

In this case, the sequence needs two CBBs. The reclosing times for shot 1 and shot 2
are different, but each protection function initiates the same sequence. The CBB
sequence is as follows:

INIT_1 (I>>) Lockout

Shot 1 Shot 2
INIT_2 (I>) (CBB1) (CBB2) Lockout
0.3s 15.0s
INIT_3 (Io>) Lockout

A071270 V2 EN

Figure 623: Two shots with three initiation lines

1246 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Table 1157: Settings for configuration example 1

Setting name Setting value
Shot number CBB1 1
Init signals CBB1 7 (lines 1,2 and 3 = 1+2+4 = 7)
First reclose time 0.3s (an example)
Shot number CBB2 2
Init signals CBB2 7 (lines 1,2 and 3 = 1+2+4 = 7)
Second reclose time 15.0s (an example)

Example 2
There are two separate sequences implemented with three shots. Shot 1 is
implemented by CBB1 and it is initiated with the high stage of the overcurrent
protection (I>>). Shot 1 is set as a high-speed autoreclosing with a short time delay.
Shot 2 is implemented with CBB2 and meant to be the first shot of the autoreclose
sequence initiated by the low stage of the overcurrent protection (I>) and the low stage
of the non-directional earth-fault protection (Io>). It has the same reclosing time in
both situations. It is set as a high-speed autoreclosing for corresponding faults. The
third shot, which is the second shot in the autoreclose sequence initiated by I> or Io>,
is set as a delayed autoreclosing and executed after an unsuccessful high-speed
autoreclosing of a corresponding sequence.

A071272 V1 EN

Figure 624: Autoreclose sequence with two shots with different shot settings
according to initiation signal

630 series 1247

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

tHSAR Time delay of high-speed autoreclosing, here: First reclose time

tDAR Time delay of delayed autoreclosing, here: Second reclose time

tl>> Operating time for the I>> protection stage to clear the fault

tl> or lo> Operating time for the I> or Io> protection stage to clear the fault

tCB_O Operating time for opening the circuit breaker

tCB_C Operating time for closing the circuit breaker

In this case, the number of needed CBBs is three, that is, the first shot's reclosing time
depends on the initiation signal. The CBB sequence is as follows:

Shot 1
INIT_1 (I>>) (CBB1) Lockout
1.0s

INIT_2 (I>) Shot 1 Shot 2 Lockout

(CBB2) (CBB3)
INIT_3 (Io>) 0.2s 10.0s Lockout

A071274 V2 EN

Figure 625: Three shots with three initiation lines

If the sequence is initiated from the INIT_1 line, that is, the overcurrent protection
high stage, the sequence is one shot long. On the other hand, if the sequence is initiated
from the INIT_2 or INIT_3 lines, the sequence is two shots long.

Table 1158: Settings for configuration example 2

Setting name Setting value
Shot number CBB1 1
Init signals CBB1 1 (line 1)
First reclose time 1.0s (an example)
Shot number CBB2 1
Init signals CBB2 6 (lines 2 and 3 = 2+4 = 6)
Second reclose time 0.2s (an example)
Shot number CBB3 2
Init signals CBB3 6 (lines 2 and 3 = 2+4 = 6)
Third reclose time 10.0s

10.5.5.4 Delayed initiation lines

The auto-reclose function consists of six individual auto-reclose initiation lines

INIT_1...INIT 6 and three delayed initiation lines:

1248 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

• DEL_INIT_2
• DEL_INIT_3
• DEL_INIT_4

DEL_INIT_2 and INIT_2 are connected together with an OR-gate, as are inputs 3
and 4. Inputs 1, 5 and 6 do not have any delayed input. From the auto-reclosing point
of view, it does not matter whether INIT_x or DEL_INIT_x line is used for shot
initiation or blocking.

The auto-reclose function can also open the circuit breaker from any of the initiation
lines. It is selected with the Tripping line setting. As a default, all initiation lines
activate the OPEN_CB output.

A070276 V1 EN

Figure 626: Simplified logic diagram of initiation lines

Each delayed initiation line has four different time settings:

Table 1159: Settings for delayed initiation lines
Setting name Description and purpose
Str x delay shot 1 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, where x is
the number of the line 2, 3 or 4. Used for shot 1.
Str x delay shot 2 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, used for shot
2.
Str x delay shot 3 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, used for shot
3.
Str x delay shot 4 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, used for
shots 4 and 5. Optionally, can also be used with
SOTF.

630 series 1249

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.5.5.5 Shot initiation from protection start signal

In it simplest, all auto-reclose shots are initiated by protection trips. As a result, all trip
times in the sequence are the same. This is why using protection trips may not be the
optimal solution. Using protection start signals instead of protection trips for initiating
shots shortens the trip times.

Example 1
When a two-shot-sequence is used, the start information from the protection function
is routed to the DEL_INIT 2 input and the operate information to the INIT_2 input.
The following conditions have to apply:
• protection operate time = 0.5s
• Str 2 delay shot 1 = 0.05s
• Str 2 delay shot 2 = 60s
• Str 2 delay shot 3 = 60s

Operation in a permanent fault:

1. Protection starts and activates the DEL_INIT 2 input.

2. After 0.05 seconds, the first autoreclose shot is initiated. The function opens the
circuit breaker: the OPEN_CB output activates. The total trip time is the
protection start delay + 0.05 seconds + the time it takes to open the circuit breaker.
3. After the first shot, the circuit breaker is reclosed and the protection starts again.
4. Because the delay of the second shot is 60 seconds, the protection is faster and
trips after the set operation time, activating the INIT 2 input. The second shot
is initiated.
5. After the second shot, the circuit breaker is reclosed and the protection starts
again.
6. Because the delay of the second shot is 60 seconds, the protection is faster and
trips after the set operation time. No further shots are programmed after the final
trip. The function is in lockout and the sequence is considered unsuccessful.

Example 2
The delays can be used also for fast final trip. The conditions are the same as in
Example 1, with the exception of Str 2 delay shot 3 = 0.10 seconds.

The operation in a permanent fault is the same as in Example 1, except that after the
second shot when the protection starts again, Str 2 delay shot 3 elapses before the
protection operate time and the final trip follows. The total trip time is the protection
start delay + 0.10 seconds + the time it takes to open the circuit breaker.

10.5.5.6 Fast trip in Switch on to fault

The Str _ delay shot 4 parameter delays can also be used to achieve a fast and
accelerated trip with SOTF. This is done by setting the Fourth delay in SOTF

1250 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

parameter to "1" and connecting the protection start information to the corresponding
DEL_INIT_ input.

When the function detects a closing of the circuit breaker, that is, any other closing
except the reclosing done by the function itself, it always prohibits shot initiation for
the time set with the Reclaim time parameter. Furthermore, if the Fourth delay in
SOTF parameter is "1", the Str _ delay shot 4 parameter delays are also activated.

Example 1
The protection operation time is 0.5 seconds, the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter is
set to "1" and the Str 2 delay shot 4 parameter is 0.05 seconds. The protection start
signal is connected to the DEL_INIT_2 input.

If the protection starts after the circuit breaker closes, the fast trip follows after the set
0.05 seconds. The total trip time is the protection start delay + 0.05 seconds + the time
it takes to open the circuit breaker.

10.5.6 Counters
The AR function contains six counters. Their values are stored in a semi-retain
memory. The counters are increased at the rising edge of the reclose command. The
counters count the following situations:
• COUNTER: counts every reclose command activation
• CNT_SHOT1: counts reclose commands that are executed from shot 1
• CNT_SHOT2: counts reclose commands that are executed from shot 2
• CNT_SHOT3: counts reclose commands that are executed from shot 3
• CNT_SHOT4: counts reclose commands that are executed from shot 4
• CNT_SHOT5: counts reclose commands that are executed from shot 5

The counters are disabled through communication with the DsaCnt parameter. When
the counters are disabled, the values are not updated.

The counters are reset through communication with the RsCnt parameter.

10.5.7 Signals
Table 1160: DARREC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INIT_1 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 1
INIT_2 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 2
INIT_3 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 3
INIT_4 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 4
INIT_5 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 5
INIT_6 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 6
Table continues on next page

630 series 1251

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Name Type Default Description

DEL_INIT_2 BOOLEAN 0 Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 2
DEL_INIT_3 BOOLEAN 0 Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 3
DEL_INIT_4 BOOLEAN 0 Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 4
BLK_RECL_T BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reclose time
BLK_RCLM_T BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reclaim time
BLK_THERM BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and holds the reclose shot from the thermal
overload
CB_POS BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker position input
CB_READY BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker status signal
INC_SHOTP BOOLEAN 0 A zone sequence coordination signal
INHIBIT_RECL BOOLEAN 0 Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
RECL_ON BOOLEAN 0 Level sensitive signal for allowing (high) / not
allowing (low) reclosing
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing check fulfilled

Table 1161: DARREC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPEN_CB BOOLEAN Open command for circuit breaker
CLOSE_CB BOOLEAN Close (reclose) command for circuit breaker
CMD_WAIT BOOLEAN Wait for master command
INPRO BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during dead
time
LOCKED BOOLEAN Signal indicating that AR is locked out
PROT_CRD BOOLEAN A signal for coordination between the AR and the
protection
PROT_DISA INTEGER A word type signal for disabling protection functions
UNSUC_RECL BOOLEAN Indicates an unsuccessful reclosing sequence
READY BOOLEAN Indicates that the AR is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence is in progress
AR_ZONES GROUP SIGNAL Ar zones

1252 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.5.8 Settings
Table 1162: DARREC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off / On
On
Reclosing operation Off - - Off Reclosing operation (Off / External Ctrl /
External Ctl On)
On
Terminal priority None - - None Terminal priority
Low (follower)
High (master)
Synchronisation set 0 - 127 - 1 0 Configures synchrony check for CBB
Auto initiation Cnd not allowed - - when sync fails Auto initiation condition
when sync fails
CB doesn't close
Both
Init signals CBB1 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which initiate CBB1
Init signals CBB2 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which initiate CBB2
Init signals CBB3 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which initiate CBB3
Init signals CBB4 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which initiate CBB4
Init signals CBB5 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which initiate CBB5
Init signals CBB6 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which initiate CBB6
Init signals CBB7 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which initiate CBB7
Frq Op counter limit 0 - 250 - 1 0 Frequent operation counter lockout limit
Reclaim time 0.1 - 1800.0 s 0.1 10.0 Reclaim time
First reclose time 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 5.00 First reclose time, CBB1
Second reclose time 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 5.00 Second reclose time, CBB2
Third reclose time 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 5.00 Third reclose time, CBB3
Fourth reclose time 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 5.00 Fourth reclose time, CBB4
Fifth reclose time 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 5.00 Fifth reclose time, CBB5
Sixth reclose time 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 5.00 Sixth reclose time, CBB6
Seventh reclose time 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 5.00 Seventh reclose time, CBB7
Frq Op counter time 1 - 250 Min 1 1 Frequent operation counter time
Frq Op recovery time 1 - 250 Min 1 1 Frequent operation counter recovery time
Close pulse time 0.01 - 10.00 s 0.01 0.20 Close pulse time
Disable Pro signal 0 - 63 - 1 63 Defines bits that are removed from
DISA_PROT
Auto init 0 - 63 - 1 0 Defines INIT lines that are activated at
auto initiation
Fourth delay in SOTF Not in use - - Not in use Sets 4th delay into use for all DEL_INIT
In use signals during SOTF

630 series 1253

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Table 1163: DARREC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CB closed Pos status FALSE - - FALSE Status (TRUE or FALSE) meaning closed
TRUE CB in input CB_POS
Manual close mode Not in use - - Not in use Manual close mode
In use
Control line 0 - 63 - 1 63 Defines INIT inputs which are protection
signals
Tripping line 0 - 63 - 1 0 Defines INIT inputs which cause
OPEN_CB activation
Protection Crd mode no condition - - AR inop, CB man Protection coordination mode
AR inoperative
CB close manual
AR inop, CB man
always
Shot number CBB1 0-5 - 1 0 Sets shot number CBB1
Shot number CBB2 0-5 - 1 0 Sets shot number CBB2
Shot number CBB3 0-5 - 1 0 Sets shot number CBB3
Shot number CBB4 0-5 - 1 0 Sets shot number CBB4
Shot number CBB5 0-5 - 1 0 Sets shot number CBB5
Shot number CBB6 0-5 - 1 0 Sets shot number CBB6
Shot number CBB7 0-5 - 1 0 Sets shot number CBB7
Blk signals CBB1 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which block CBB1
Blk signals CBB2 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which block CBB2
Blk signals CBB3 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which block CBB3
Blk signals CBB4 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which block CBB4
Blk signals CBB5 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which block CBB5
Blk signals CBB6 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which block CBB6
Blk signals CBB7 0 - 63 - 1 0 Sets INIT inputs which block CBB7
Disable shot 1 0 - 63 - 1 0 Configures bits in PROT_DISA output for
first reclose
Disable shot 2 0 - 63 - 1 0 Configures bits in PROT_DISA output for
secondreclose
Disable shot 3 0 - 63 - 1 0 Configures bits in PROT_DISA output for
third reclose
Disable shot 4 0 - 63 - 1 0 Configures bits in PROT_DISA output for
fourth reclose
Disable shot 5 0 - 63 - 1 0 Configures bits in PROT_DISA output for
fifth reclose
Protection Crd limit 1-5 - 1 1 Protection coordination shot limit
Dsr time shot 1 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 0.00 Discrimination time for first reclosing
Dsr time shot 2 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 0.00 Discrimination time for second reclosing
Dsr time shot 3 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 0.00 Discrimination time for third reclosing
Dsr time shot 4 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.01 0.00 Discrimination time for fourth reclosing
Max Thm block time 0.1 - 1800.0 s 0.1 10.0 Maximum wait time for thermal blockin
signal deactivation
Table continues on next page

1254 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Cut-out time 0.0 - 1800.0 s 0.1 10.0 Cut-out time for protection coordination
Auto wait time 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 2.00 Maximum wait time for reclosing condition
fulfilling
Wait close time 0.05 - 10.00 s 0.05 0.25 Allowed CB closing time after reclose
command
Max wait time 0.1 - 1800.0 s 0.1 10.0 Maximum wait time for BLK_DEAD_T
release (from master)
Max trip time 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 10.0 Maximum wait time for protection signal
deactivation
Str 2 delay shot 1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_2, first reclosing
Str 2 delay shot 2 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_2, second
reclosing
Str 2 delay shot 3 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_2, third
reclosing
Str 2 delay shot 4 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_2, fourth
reclosing
Str 3 delay shot 1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_3, first reclosing
Str 3 delay shot 2 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_3, second
reclosing
Str 3 delay shot 3 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_3, third
reclosing
Str 3 delay shot 4 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_3, fourth
reclosing
Str 4 delay shot 1 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_4, first reclosing
Str 4 delay shot 2 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_4, second
reclosing
Str 4 delay shot 3 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_4, third
reclosing
Str 4 delay shot 4 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 0.00 Time delay for DEL_INIT_4, fourth
reclosing
Auto lockout reset Not in use - - In use Automatic lockout reset in use
In use
Enable shot jump 0-1 - 1 1 Enable shot jumpping

10.5.9 Measured values

Table 1164: DARREC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
INIT_1 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 1
INIT_2 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 2
INIT_3 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 3
INIT_4 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 4
INIT_5 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 5
INIT_6 BOOLEAN 0 AR initialization / blocking signal 6
DEL_INIT_2 BOOLEAN 0 Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 2
Table continues on next page

630 series 1255

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Name Type Default Description

DEL_INIT_3 BOOLEAN 0 Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 3
DEL_INIT_4 BOOLEAN 0 Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 4
BLK_RECL_T BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reclose time
BLK_RCLM_T BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and resets reclaim time
BLK_THERM BOOLEAN 0 Blocks and holds the reclose shot from the thermal
overload
CB_POS BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker position input
CB_READY BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker status signal
INC_SHOTP BOOLEAN 0 A zone sequence coordination signal
INHIBIT_RECL BOOLEAN 0 Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
RECL_ON BOOLEAN 0 Level sensitive signal for allowing (high) / not
allowing (low) reclosing
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing check fulfilled

10.5.10 Monitored data

Table 1165: DARREC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPEN_CB BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Open command for
1=TRUE circuit breaker
CLOSE_CB BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Close (reclose)
1=TRUE command for circuit
breaker
CMD_WAIT BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Wait for master
1=TRUE command
INPRO BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Reclosing shot in
1=TRUE progress, activated
during dead time
LOCKED BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal indicating that AR
1=TRUE is locked out
PROT_CRD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - A signal for coordination
1=TRUE between the AR and the
protection
UNSUC_RECL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indicates an
1=TRUE unsuccessful reclosing
sequence
FRQ_OPR_CNT INTEGER - - Frequent operation
counter
FRQ_OPR_AL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Frequent operation
1=TRUE counter alarm
STATUS INTEGER 1=Ready - AR status signal for
2=In Progress IEC61850
3=Successful
-1=Not defined
-2=Unsuccessful
AR_ON BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Autoreclosing allowed
1=TRUE
Table continues on next page

1256 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

READY BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indicates that the AR is
1=TRUE ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Reclosing sequence is in
1=TRUE progress
INPRO_1 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Reclosing shot in
1=TRUE progress, shot 1
INPRO_2 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Reclosing shot in
1=TRUE progress, shot 2
INPRO_3 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Reclosing shot in
1=TRUE progress, shot 3
INPRO_4 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Reclosing shot in
1=TRUE progress, shot 4
INPRO_5 BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Reclosing shot in
1=TRUE progress, shot 5
DISCR_INPRO BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal indicating that
1=TRUE discrimination time is
inprogress
CUTOUT_INPRO BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Signal indicating that cut-
1=TRUE out time is in progress
SUC_RECL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indicates a successful
1=TRUE reclosing sequence
UNSUC_CB BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indicates an
1=TRUE unsuccessful CB closing
CNT_SHOT1 INTEGER - - Resetable operation
counter, shot 1
CNT_SHOT2 INTEGER - - Resetable operation
counter, shot 2
CNT_SHOT3 INTEGER - - Resetable operation
counter, shot 3
CNT_SHOT4 INTEGER - - Resetable operation
counter, shot 4
CNT_SHOT5 INTEGER - - Resetable operation
counter, shot5
COUNTER INTEGER - - Resetable operation
counter, all shots
SHOT_PTR INTEGER - - Shot pointer value
MAN_CB_CL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indicates CB manual
1=TRUE closing during reclosing
sequence
SOTF BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Switch-onto-fault
1=TRUE

10.5.11 Technical data

Table 1166: DARREC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

630 series 1257

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.5.12 Technical revision history

Table 1167: DARREC technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Default setting value changed from TRUE to
FALSE for the CB closed Pos status setting
C • IEC 61850 mapping for output AR_ON is
added
• Output ACTIVE is added

10.6 Tap changer control with voltage regulator OLATCC

10.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tap changer control with voltage OLATCC COLTC 90V
regulator

10.6.2 Function block

GUID-D38AAD14-5EB0-435B-9F1C-7CD6507D780E V1 EN

Figure 627: Function block

1258 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

10.6.3 Functionality
The tap changer control with voltage regulator function OLATCC (on-load tap
changer controller) is designed for regulating the voltage of power transformers with
on-load tap changers in distribution substations. OLATCC provides a manual or
automatic voltage control of the power transformer using the raise and lower signals
to the on-load tap changer.

The automatic voltage regulation can be used in single or parallel transformer

applications. Parallel operation can be based on Master/Follower (M/F), Negative
Reactance Principle (NRP) or Minimizing Circulating Current (MCC).

OLATCC includes the line drop compensation (LDC) functionality, and the load
decrease is possible with a dynamic voltage reduction.

Either definite time characteristic (DT) or inverse time characteristic (IDMT) is

selectable for delays between the raising and lowering operations.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the voltage

control operations with an external signal or with the supervision functionality of the
function.

10.6.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the voltage regulator function can be described using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

630 series 1259

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

RAISE_LOCAL Manual
LOWER_LOCAL voltage
CON_STATUS regulation

PARALLEL Operation
mode
AUTO selection

TAP_POS
RSV Automatic
RSV voltage
I_A
regulation

I_B
I3P
I_C Auto
single
U_AB
U3P
FLLW1_CTL
TR1_TAP_POS FLLW2_CTL
Auto
TR1_TAP_VAL parallel
FLLW3_CTL
TR2_TAP_POS (Master) PAR_FAIL
TR2_TAP_VAL
TR3_TAP_POS
Auto
TR3_TAP_VAL parallel Pulse RAISE_OWN
TAPCHG_FLLW (Follower) control LOWER_OWN

Auto Timer
parallel
t
TR1_I_AMPL (NRP)
TR1_I_ANGL
TR2_I_AMPL
Alarm
TR2_I_ANGL t ALARM
Auto indication
TR3_I_AMPL parallel
TR3_I_ANGL (MCC)
TR1_I_VALID
TR2_I_VALID TR0_I_AMPL
TR3_I_VALID TR0_I_ANGL
Blocking
LTC_BLOCK
scheme

TCO
GUID-C498AFAA-794C-4A3E-8CBF-0D1929B09D8C V1 EN

Figure 628: Functional module diagram. Group signals I3P and U3P are used for
feeding the necessary analog signals to the function.

10.6.5 Voltage and current measurements

The measured voltage must be a phase-to-phase voltage from the regulated side.
Typically, it is the phase-to-phase voltage U_AB from the secondary side of the power
transformer. If the phase voltages are measured, the voltage U_AB is calculated
internally in the IED.

Currents from the secondary side of the power transformer (I_A – I_C) have several
uses.

1260 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

• The highest phase current value is used for overcurrent blocking. Primary
currents are not yet available for this use.
• The currents from the secondary side of the power transformer are used for line
drop compensation (average of the connected inputs).
• The currents from the secondary side of the power transformer are used for
calculating the circulating current in the Negative Reactance Principle (NRP) and
Minimizing Circulating Current (MCC) operation modes.

Both voltage U_AB and the phase currents from the secondary side (I_x, where x is
A, B or C) are always measured using the value of the filtered fundamental frequency
component (DFT). Hence, the harmonics are always suppressed. Moreover, the
measured voltage value is continuously average-filtered with the eight-value-long
sliding window where the resulting filtering delay is not compensated. The phase-
compensated voltage U_A is always used in calculations, although it is not connected.
Um is the averaged value used for control and its magnitude can be read from the
monitored data U_MEAS.

Similarly, the magnitude of the phase current of the own transformer, I_x, and the
phase angle difference between the internally phase-compensated voltage U_A and
phase current I_x are also average-filtered by the same length-fixed window. The
phase angle value can be read from the monitored data ANGL_UA_IA. These
currents and phase angle differences are used solely on circulating current
calculations.

The angle difference is used in Equation 184, Equation 185 and

Equation 187.

There are minimum limits for the voltage and current magnitudes, resulting in the
magnitude and phase angle difference values diverging from zero. The voltage
magnitude must exceed three percent of Un and the current I_A must exceed two
percent of In.

10.6.6 Tap changer position inputs

The position value of the tap changer can be brought to OLATCC as a resistance value,
a mA signal or as a binary-coded signal. More information on how the resistance
value, the mA signal or a binary-coded interface are implemented can be found in
TPOSSLTC in the technical manual of the IED.

The indicated tap changer position of the own transformer is internally connected to
the TAP_POS input, and the tap changer positions of the parallel transformers are fed
to the other TRx_TAP_POS inputs. This also defines the connection identity so that
follower 1 is connected to TR1_TAP_POS, follower 2 is connected to
TR2_TAP_POS and follower 3 is connected to TR3_TAP_POS. The own
transformer position can be read from the monitored data TAP_POS. The follower tap

630 series 1261

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

changer positions can also be read from the input data TRx_TAP_POS, where x is a
value between 1 and 3.

The tap changer position value is given in parentheses. For example, (0) indicates that
there is no tap changer position connected or the tap changer position value quality is
bad. Typically, if no tap changer position is connected, all the TPOSSLTC binary
inputs are FALSE by default and the value shown is (0). A value other than zero
indicates bad quality. Also, if the state of the input TAP_INVALID is TRUE (1), the
bad quality for input TAP_POS is indicated. Correspondingly, if the inputs
TR1_TAP_VAL, TR2_TAP_VAL or TR3_I_VAL are FALSE (0), the quality is bad
in inputs TR1_TAP_POS, TR2_TAP_POS and TR3_TAP_POS. A bad-quality tap
changer position is dealt by OLATCC like an unconnected tap position information.

10.6.7 Operation mode selection

OLATCC has the Operation mode and Auto parallel mode settings for selecting the
desired operation mode. The Operation mode setting can have any of the following
values: "Manual", "Auto single", "Auto parallel" and "Input control". If the Operation
mode setting is set to "Input control", the acting operation mode is determined by the
inputs PARALLEL and AUTO. The PARALLEL input defines if the transformer
(voltage regulator) is in the parallel or single mode. The AUTO input defines the
operation status in the single mode. The output signals PARALLEL and AUTO echo
fed input signals when the Operation mode setting is set to "Input control". Otherwise
the PARALLEL and AUTO monitored data represent acting "Parallel or single
operation" and "Auto/Manual indication" respectively.
Table 1168: Acting operation mode determined by the operation mode inputs
PARALLEL AUTO Operation Mode
0 0 Manual
0 1 Auto single
1 0 or 1 Auto parallel

Furthermore, if Operation mode has been set to "Auto parallel", the second setting
parameter Auto parallel mode defines the parallel mode and the alternatives are
"Master", "Follower", "MCC" or "NRP".

The acting operation mode can be read from the monitored data OPR_MODE_STS.

Command Exclusion
An acting operation mode change using two inputs (PARALLEL and AUTO) and
setting group change (either with the input or via menu) is needed when the acting
operation mode must be changed automatically, that is, there is a logic which drives
these two inputs and setting group change based on the status information from the
circuit breakers.

1262 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

The common Local/Remote (L/R) exclusion concerns the manual raising and
lowering commands of OLATCC, that is, it internally proves the exclusion
mechanism to prevent the remote commands (from SCADA) when the IED is in local
mode.

10.6.8 Manual voltage regulation

The manual raising and lowering commands can be given either via the configuration
inputs LOWER_LOCAL and RAISE_LOCAL, via the HMI of the IED or via remote
commands. The acting operation mode of OLATCC must be set to "Manual" and the
Local/Remote control LR state monitored data of the IED has to be "Local" to execute
the control commands manually from HMI or via configuration inputs. Although
OLATCC is set to "Manual" but the LR state is set to "OFF" or "Remote", no manual
control commands can be given.

For remote commands, the acting operation mode of the OLATCC function must also
be set to "Manual" and the LR state monitored data has to be "Remote".

Voltage control vs. tap changer moving direction

OLATCC has the control settings Lower block tap and Raise block tap. The Lower
block tap and Raise block tap settings should give the tap changer position that results
in the lowest and highest controlled voltage value (usually at the LV side of the
transformer). The setting of both Raise block tap value higher than Lower block tap
value and Lower block tap value higher than Raise block tap value is allowed.

When the value of Raise block tap exceeds the Lower block tap value, the raise control
activates the RAISE_OWN output. This results in raising the tap changer position, and
the measured voltage rises. Furthermore, the RAISE_OWN output value is TRUE. If
the own tap changer position is connected (that is, the own tap changer's quality is
good), the tap changer alarm is activated if the tap changer does not move upwards in
the Cmd error delay time setting after the pulse activation, resulting that
ALARM_REAS in the monitored data contains a command error value. The Cmd
error delay time setting default value is 20 seconds.

The lowering control works in a similar way, as shown in Figure 629. In the output
data the LOWER_OWN output value is TRUE. An alarm is generated if the tap changer
does not move downwards in Cmd error delay time after the pulse activation
(assuming that the own tap changer position is connected).

In the second case, the parameters are set so that the value of Lower block tap exceeds
the value of Raise block tap. The raising control activates the RAISE_OWN output.
The result should be that the tap changer lowers its position and the measured voltage
rises. Furthermore, the RAISE_OWN output value is TRUE in the output data. If the
own tap changer position is connected, the tap changer alarm is activated if the tap
changer does not move downwards in Cmd error delay time after the pulse activation,
resulting that ALARM_REAS in the monitored data contains a command error value.

630 series 1263

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

The lowering control works in a similar way, as shown in Figure 629. In the output
data, the LOWER_OWN output value is TRUE. An alarm is generated if the tap changer
does not move upwards in Cmd error delay time after the pulse activation, assuming
that the own tap changer position is connected.

10.6.9 Automatic voltage regulation of single transformer

OLATCC is intended to control the power transformers with a motor-driven on-load
tap changer. The function is designed to regulate the voltage at the secondary side of
the power transformer. The control method is based on a step-by-step principle, which
means that one control pulse at a time is issued to the tap changer mechanism to move
it exactly one position upwards or downwards. However, when intermediate steps are
not indicated for the tap changer, it does not cause alarm if more than one step change
is met.

The purpose of the regulator is to maintain a stable secondary voltage of the power
transformer. The basis for this operation is the Band center voltage setting. By
increasing or decreasing various compensation factors, the regulator calculates a
control voltage from the band center voltage as shown in Equation 182. Hence, the
control voltage is the desired transformer secondary voltage to be maintained by the
regulator. The control voltage is compared to the measured voltage and the difference
between the two forms the regulating process error.

Since the tap changer changes the voltage in steps, a certain error has to be allowed.
The error, called Band width voltage, is also set by the user. A recommended setting
for Band width voltage should be close to twice the step voltage of the transformer
ΔUstep and never below it as a minimum. For example, Band width voltage is twice the
value of ΔUstep in Figure 629.

If the measured voltage fluctuates within the control voltage ± half the Band width
voltage setting, the regulator is inactive. If the measured voltage is outside the half-
bandwidth voltage limits, an adjustable delay T1 (Control delay time 1 ) starts, as
shown in Figure 629, where the lowering function is an example. The delay T1
remains active as long as the measured voltage is outside the hysteresis limits of half
the value of Band width voltage. The factory setting for the hysteresis is 10 percent of
the set Band width voltage.

1264 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

T1 reset
T1 start

T1 start

Lower
U
T1

bandwidth limit
hysteresis limit
ΔUstep Um, measured voltage
Band
width Up, control voltage
voltage

t
GUID-65BA0EC4-8E96-41E1-B273-3519DF5C25E1 V2 EN

Figure 629: Voltage-regulating function. A control pulse to lower the voltage is

issued after the elapsed T1.

If the measured voltage is outside the hysteresis when the delay counter T1 reaches its
setting value, the raising or lowering output relay is activated. This activates either
output pulse RAISE_OWN or LOWER_OWN, and the motor drive of the tap changer
operates. The status of these outputs can be read from the output data RAISE_OWN or
LOWER_OWN.

If the measured voltage falls or rises within the hysteresis limits during the operating
time, the delay counter is reset.

The pulse length can be defined with the LTC pulse time setting. The default value is
1.5 seconds.

A short delay same as the typical tap changer operating time is active before the start
of the next operating timer is possible. For OLATCC, the delay is set to 6 seconds. If
one tap changer operation is not enough to regulate the transformer voltage within the
hysteresis limits, a second adjustable delay T2 (Control delay time 2), usually with a
shorter time setting than T1, starts. This delay is used for the control commands within
the same sequence until the recovery of voltage occurs. The delays T1 and T2 can be
selected either with definite or inverse time characteristics. In the inverse time mode
operation, the operating time depends on the difference between the control voltage
and the measured voltage as shown in Equation 188. The bigger the difference in the
voltage, the shorter the operating time. More information on the inverse time
operation can be found in the OLATCC timer characteristics chapter.

Regulation equation
The simple regulating principle is often complemented by additional features to take
the voltage drop of lines into account (line drop compensation), coordinate the
regulation of parallel transformers and change the voltage level according to the
loading state of the network. The control voltage Up is calculated according to the
equation

630 series 1265

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Up = Us + U z + U ci − U rsv
GUID-86D55536-6EF1-43CB-BA21-EF57280DEBB4 V1 EN (Equation 182)

Up Control voltage

Us Set voltage level Band center voltage

Uz Line drop compensation term

Uci Circulating current compensation term

Ursv Voltage reduction parameter

Up can be directly read in the monitored data U_CTL.

The circulating current compensation term is calculated only in the parallel acting
operation modes "NRP" and "MCC".

Line Drop Compensation (LDC)

The line drop compensation feature is used to compensate the voltage drop along a line
or network fed by the transformer. The compensation setting parameters can be
calculated theoretically if the resistance and reactance of the line are known or
measured practically from the line drop.

IL
RL XL

Load
UB UL

GUID-552C931B-4A1A-4361-8068-0A151CB99F30 V2 EN

Figure 630: Equivalent electrical circuit for calculating the LDC term

The compensation parameters Line drop V Ris (Ur) and Line drop V React (Ux), are
percentage values of Un according to the equations.

3 × In × R
Line drop V Ris = U r [% ] = × 100 [%U n ]
Un
GUID-0DFDA3BA-B1E1-44AE-83C5-C18E097A9936 V1 EN (Equation 183)
3 × In × X
Line drop V React = U x [ %] = × 100 [%U n ]
Un
GUID-392489AD-AFB9-4540-855A-FB928FA59911 V1 EN (Equation 183)

In Rated current of the power transformer

Un Rated main voltage of the power transformer

R Resistance of the line, Ω/phase

X Reactance of the line, Ω/phase

1266 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

The general LDC equation can be calculated.

I injected (U r [% ] cosϕ + U x [% ] sin ϕ )

Uz = ⋅ [ xU n ]
In 100
GUID-B004A188-862D-4015-868D-8654F8F5D214 V2 EN (Equation 184)

Iinjected Average of the currents I_A, I_B and I_C

Ur Setting Line drop V Ris

Ux Setting Line drop V React

φ Phase angle between U_A and I_A (ANGL_UA_IA in monitored data)

By default, the line drop compensation (LDC) is not active. LDC is activated by
setting LDC enable to "True". To keep the LDC term within acceptable limits in all
situations, OLATCC has a setting parameter LDC limit, which has a default value of
0.10 xUn. As a result, this gives the maximum value for Uz in Equation 182.

If more than one line is connected to the LV busbar, the equivalent impedance is
calculated and given as a parameter setting as shown in Figure 630 for the equivalent
electrical circuit for calculating LDC. For example, if there are N number of identical
lines with identical loads in the substation, the R- and X-values needed for the settings
Line drop V React and Line drop V Ris are obtained by dividing the resistance and the
reactance of one line by N. Because the voltage drop is different in lines with different
impedances and load currents, it is necessary to make a compromise when setting the
Line drop V React and Line drop V Ris settings. Raising the voltage in the point of
lowest voltage must not lead to overvoltage elsewhere.

By default, the line drop compensation is effective only on the normal active power
flow direction. If the active power flow in the transformer turns opposite, that is, from
the regulated side towards the system in the upper level, the LDC term is ignored, that
is, set to zero. In such a case, it is assumed that the feeding units at the regulated side
of the transformers maintain proper voltage levels. This can cause a conflict if the
transformer tries to reduce the voltage at the substation. Additionally, it is difficult to
predict the actual voltage levels in the feeder lines in such a case, and lowering the
voltage at the substation can have harmful effects in the far end of the network.
However, the Rv Pwr flow allowed setting allows also negative LDC terms to be taken
into equation.

The topology changes in the network can cause changes to the equivalent impedance
value of the network. If the change is substantial, the setting groups can be used to
switch between different setting values for Line drop V React and Line drop V Ris. In
practice this means that the boolean-type information from the topology change is
connected to the active setting group change.

The use of the LDC equation in the case of parallel transformers is described in the
Automatic voltage regulation of parallel transformers chapter.

630 series 1267

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Reduce Set Voltage (RSV) input

The system frequency decreases when the active power production in the network is
smaller than its consumption. Either the power supply has to be increased or some
loads have to be shed to restore the power balance.

The simplest way to decrease the load is to reduce the voltage level by giving a lower
band center voltage value to the regulators. For this purpose, OLATCC has the setting
group parameter Band reduction. The RSV input activation results in reduction. If this
input is set to TRUE, a set target voltage value is decreased by Band reduction. If more
than one RSV reduction steps are desired, the setting group change has to be used
where different Band reduction values are supported. The decreased value is kept as
a target value as long as the RSV input is TRUE.

Because the decrease of frequency indicates a need to reduce the load, it is practical
to connect the start signal of an underfrequency function block to the RSV digital
input.

It depends on the load characteristics how much the load is reduced as the voltage
drops. For instance, purely resistive loads are proportional to the square of the voltage,
whereas motor drives based on frequency controllers may draw constant power
despite small voltage changes.

The status of the RSV input can be read from the RSV input data.

10.6.10 Automatic voltage regulation of parallel transformers

It is likely that a circulating current between transformers occurs if two or more
transformers with slightly different ratios are energized in parallel. This is due to the
unbalanced short circuit impedances of the parallel transformers. To avoid such
currents, the tap changers of the transformers should be adjusted to achieve
equilibrium. If the transformers are assumed identical, the tap (voltage) steps and tap
positions should also match. In this case, the Master/Follower principle can be used.
However, unequally rated transformers with different tap steps can be connected in
parallel and these configurations can also be managed by the tap changer control
function. For these configurations, the Minimizing Circulating Current (MCC) or
Negative Reactance Principle (NRP) should be used. The MCC and NRP principles
are also suitable for identical transformers.

The circulating current, which is almost purely inductive, is defined as negative if it

flows towards the transformer. Uci in Equation 182 is positive and the control voltage
Up rises as a result to the RAISE_OWN output signal activation if the circulating
current level is sufficient (Equation 185 and Equation 187) and the other parameters
remain the same. As a result, the voltage rise should diminish the circulating current.

LDC equation and parallel connection

The additional challenge in the parallel connection regarding the line drop
compensation is to know the total current which flows through the parallel
transformers.

1268 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

In the Master/Follower mode, it is easier to know the total current than in other parallel
modes since the transformers are assumed to have identical ratings, that is, the total
current (Iinjected in Equation 184) is obtained by multiplying the measured load current
(the average of the secondary currents I_A, I_B and I_C of the connected own
transformer) with the number of parallel transformers. OLATCC can internally
conclude the number of parallel transformers from the connected tap changer position
inputs. However, if there is no connected position information from the other parallel
transformers, the correct number of the parallel transformers, excluding the own
transformer, needs to be set with the Parallel trafos setting.

In the MCC mode, the horizontal communication transfers the information from the
measured load currents between the regulators so that the total current needed in the
line drop compensation can be summed up accurately. Here, Iinjected is defined to be
the phasor sum of all the parallel power transformer secondary-side currents. The
currents from other transformers must be fed via the TRx_I_AMPL and
TRx_I_ANGL inputs. If the state of the input TRx_I_VALID is TRUE (1), the good
quality for the corresponding inputs TRx_I_AMPL and TRx_I_ANGL is indicated.

In the NRP mode, the parallel transformers have different ratings and there is no
communication between the regulators. Therefore, when setting Line drop V React
and Line drop V Ris, the ICT_n1 used in the equation should be the sum of the rated
currents of all the transformers operating in parallel. Here, Iinjected is also defined as the
average of the connected secondary currents (I_A, I_B and I_C). The calculated line
drop compensation value can be read from the monitored data LDC.

10.6.10.1 Master/Follower principle M/F

The Master/Follower (M/F) operation principle is suitable for power transformers

with identical ratings and step voltages. One voltage regulator (master) measures and
controls and the other regulators (followers) follow the master, that is, all the tap
changers connected in parallel are synchronized. This parallel operation is obtained by
connecting the FLLWx_CTL output of the master to the corresponding input
TAPCHG_FLLW of the followers via a horizontal GOOSE communication.

The values for the FLLWx_CTL command are 1=Lower follower x and 2=Raise
follower x. Consequently, the values for the TAPCHG_FLLW command are 1=Lower
and 2=Raise.

If several regulators are to act as masters (one at a time), their outputs also have to be
routed to the inputs of other regulators. To start the parallel operation, the master
regulator is set to the "Auto master" mode and the followers to the "Auto follower"
mode. To implement this setting, a group changing has to be planned.

To keep all the tap changers in the same position, the master needs to know the tap
positions of the followers. This way, the circulating current is kept at its minimum.
The position values of the followers can be brought to the master either via the
horizontal GOOSE communication or TPOSSLTC.

630 series 1269

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

If it is not possible to use horizontal communication between the IEDs and the position
information cannot be wired from the parallel transformers, the M/F principle can still
be used to regulate two or an unlimited number of transformers in parallel. Since the
master cannot detect the tap positions of parallel transformers, it just activates the
lowering and raising outputs for all the followers when it controls its own tap changer.
This is called blind control. In this case, a number of parallel transformers are
regulated as one unit. The tap position inputs 1…3
(TR1_TAP_POS..TR3_TAP_POS) must be left unconnected for the master to know
that the tap positions of the followers are unknown. The time delay between
successive commands can be set by the Follower delay time setting. The default value
is six seconds.

When a disconnected transformer is taken into use and the tap position is unknown,
the follower should be manually controlled to the same position as the master. This
can also take place in the master/follower mode. First, the master gives a control
command to its own transformer, that is, it is echoed to the followers (the follower tap
positions have to be connected). Thereafter, successive control commands to the
followers take place until the master and followers have the same tap positions.

Out-of-step function
The out-of-step function is usually used in the M/F modes only. The out-of-step
function means that the master is able to detect the position values of the followers and
control them to the same position as the master is. In this case, the master assumes that
the followers also have either Raise block tap higher than Lower block tap or Lower
block tap higher than Raise block tap because this defines what is the given command
pulse for a follower. If the master has Raise block tap higher than Lower block tap and
the follower has Lower block tap higher than Raise block tap, the corresponding
TAPCHG_FLLW included control signals should be connected crosswise. This
requires an extra logic where dual-point command bits have to be converted, that is,
0=>0, [01]=1=>[10]=2 and [10]=2=>[01]=1.

M/F is the only parallel mode which has an out-of-step functionality. In the MCC and
NRP operation modes, the circulating current is minimized, which most probably
means different tap positions in the parallel transformers. Moreover, these modes
allow different ratings and step voltages for the parallel transformers. Therefore, it is
reasonable to apply the out-of-step function only to the M/F operation mode.

The out-of-step function is triggered when the master detects a difference of at least
one step between the tap changer positions in the follower and in the master. The
master then sends special raising or lowering commands to the diverged follower. If
two consecutive commands fail to change the position of the follower to the right
direction, the master activates the PAR_FAIL output, that is, PAR_FAIL is set to
TRUE, and stops the special recovery efforts. However, every time the master
controls its own tap changer later, it always sends a controlling pulse to the diverged
follower too. Furthermore, if the master notices a correct position change after a sent
pulse, it restarts the attempt to drive the follower to the same position and deactivates
the PAR_FAIL output, that is, PAR_FAIL is set to FALSE. However, if there still are
diverged followers, the reset is not indicated. It is indicated only when no diverged
followers exist. Monitoring, and hence the indication of a paralleling failure, is not

1270 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

possible in blind control. The followers with a parallel failure can be read from the
monitored data FAIL_FLLW. For example, if only follower 3 is in the parallel failure
state, FAIL_FLLW has the value "Follower 3". If both followers 1 and 2 are in the
parallel failure state, FAIL_FLLW has the value "Followers 1+2". By default, when
no failed followers exist, the value is "No failed followers".

10.6.10.2 Negative Reactance Principle NRP

This parallel control scheme is suitable for power transformers with different ratings
and step voltages. Since no communication between the regulators is needed, this
principle can be applied even when the parallel transformers are located at different
substations. To start the parallel operation, the acting operation mode has to be set to
"NRP" for all the regulators of the connection. The acting operation mode can be
changed via function block inputs or by setting either locally or remotely.

When applying this principle, each regulator has a phase angle setting φLoad (setting
parameter Load phase angle) towards which it tries to regulate the current. The setting
value is chosen according to the expected power factor of the load (positive setting
value equals inductive load). When the actual phase angle of the load current is the
same as the setting and the transformers and their tap changer positions are identical,
the currents of the two or more transformers are in the same phase as the total load
current. If the tap changer positions are different, the circulating current flows and the
currents of different transformers either lag or lead the load current. Figure 631 shows
that the circulating current is the reactive component which separates the measured
current vector from the expected angle value.

U_A
φLOAD
φ1 ILOAD x sin(φLOAD)
ILOAD

ITR1 x sin(φ1)
Ici = circulating
current

ITR1

ILOAD = ITR1 x │cos(φ1)│/cos(φLOAD)

GUID-2B71B160-FB76-4BE0-952F-75F42220401F V2 EN

Figure 631: The expected phase angle of the load supplied by the transformers
operating in parallel is entered as a setting value φLoad

The regulators calculate the circulating current with the equation

630 series 1271

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

I ci = (sin ϕ1 − tan ϕ Load ⋅ cos ϕ1 ) ⋅ ITR1

GUID-823FAEEA-589B-4C8E-81CD-E5FECF28BF06 V2 EN (Equation 185)

ITR1 Average of the currents I_A, I_B and I_C

φ1 Phase angle between U_A and I_A

φLoad The set Load phase angle of the load current

In the negative reactance method, the circulating current is minimized by changing the
control voltage according to the measured circulating current. The regulator
calculates the circulating current compensation term Uci using the equation

− I ci Stability
U ci = ⋅ ⋅Un
In 100
GUID-2A7864D3-D59F-47F9-84FD-B3F2C15178EB V2 EN (Equation 186)

Ici Circulating current

Stability Stability setting (the recommended value depends on the loop impedance)

If the transformers operating in parallel have different rated currents, the value of the
Stability factor setting of the regulator should be proportional to the rated currents,
that is, the higher the rated current, the higher the Stability factor setting value.

By comparing the reactive components of the currents measured by the different

regulators it is possible to find out if the circulating current has been minimized. The
circulating current is minimized when the reactive components are equal.

The negative reactance method gives satisfactory results only if the phase angle of the
load current is known relatively accurately. If the actual phase angle deviates from the
phase angle setting, a regulating error occurs. However, for the cases where there is an
occasional stepwise change in the phase angle of the load, the regulating error can be
suppressed with the logic. This kind of stepwise change can occur, for example, when
a capacitor bank is switched on to compensate a reactive power flow.

Another possibility is to use an automatic setting group change between setting groups
in different loading situations. The setting groups then have different set values for the
load phase angle.

10.6.10.3 Minimizing Circulating Current principle MCC

The MCC principle is an optimal solution for controlling the parallel transformers of
different ratings or step voltages in substations with varying reactive loads. Since this
control scheme allows the exchange of data between regulators, the circulating current
can be calculated more accurately than with other schemes. However, a maximum of
four regulators can be connected in parallel. To start the parallel operation, the acting

1272 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

operation mode parameter has to be set to "MCC" for all the regulators of the
connection. Furthermore, the signal CON_STATUS must indicate that the
transformers are connected to the network. A unit that is minimizing the circulating
current must have the acting operation mode set to "MCC". However, units that have
the acting operation mode set to "Manual" do not perform any circulating current
minimization operations themselves.

U_A
φ1
φ2 ITR1 x sin(φ1)
ITR1

ITR2 x sin(φ2)
2 x Ici

ITR2

Ici = circulating current

GUID-F73692B0-629D-4C0A-BFAB-648B0A832E42 V2 EN

Figure 632: The circulating current between two parallel transformers

In this case, the circulating current can be calculated with the equation
(sin φ1 ⋅ ITR1 − sin φ2 ⋅ ITR 2 )
Ici =
2
GUID-5898550F-0095-4173-91ED-4D5AFFC7B58D V3 EN (Equation 187)

ITR1 Average primary value of the currents I_A, I_B and I_C measured by regulator 1

ITR2 Average primary value of the currents I_A, I_B and I_C measured by regulator 2

φ1 Phase angle between U_A and I_A in regulator 1

φ2 Phase angle between U_A and I_A in regulator 2

The circulation current can be read from the monitored data I_CIR.

Using the circulating current, the compensation term Uci can be calculated with the
equation

−Ici Stability
Uci = ⋅ ⋅ Un
ICT _ n1 100
GUID-173A1FA0-8C07-4BA8-AAEB-62F95E10396C V3 EN

630 series 1273

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Ici Circulating current

In Nominal current of the transformer

Stability factor Stability setting (the recommended value depends on the loop impedance)

Using the circulating current, a compensation term Uci can be calculated using
Equation 186. The value of Uci, which can be positive or negative, is considered by
adding it to the Band center voltage Us (Equation 182). According to Figure 632 and
Equation 187, the phasor information from the other IEDs is needed.

Parallel unit detection and the MCC mode

The network connection status information is essential for the MCC operation mode.
The status FALSE needs to be connected to the CON_STATUS input to ensure a
proper operation of the MCC calculation if the transformer is disconnected but
OLATCC remains in the MCC mode. This way the disconnected transformer is
excluded from the circulating current calculations.

The CON_STATUS input is used to identify if a certain transformer controller is able

to send the current information to other transformer controllers for circulating current
minimization purposes. As a result, this input has effect only in the MCC or Manual
acting operation modes. In these modes, if CON_STATUS is TRUE, the information
transmission is started. The circulating current information receiving is allowed only
in the MCC acting operation mode when CON_STATUS is TRUE. PAR_UNIT_MCC
can be seen in the monitored data view.

Communication and the MCC mode

The phasor information from the other parallel IEDs is needed for the circular current
calculation. Therefore, horizontal GOOSE communication is needed between IEDs
when the MCC principle is used.

The transferred current phasor contains the primary value of the measured current.
The received current phasor information can be read from the input data
TRx_I_AMPL and TRx_I_ANGL for the magnitude and angle respectively. The
value "x" gives the connected parallel transformer number, a value between 1 and 3.

The sent phasor information always represents the difference between the voltage
phasor U_A and I_A. This information regarding the current phasor can be read from
the output data TR0_I_AMPL and TR0_I_ANGL. The allowed acting operation
modes for sending data are MCC or Manual, both with the input CON_STATUS
activated. The communication can be seen to be active when the sent and received
phasor magnitude is not clamped to zero. The communication phasor magnitude
found to be zero results either from a rejected acting operation mode or too low signal
magnitudes (OLATCC Voltage and current measurements chapter). Active
CON_STATUS indicates that the corresponding transformer is connected to network

1274 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

and its current affects the circular current of other transformers even when it is itself
in the manual operating mode.

10.6.11 Timer characteristics

Operation timer functionality
The delay times can be set to follow either the definite time characteristic or the
inverse time characteristic with the Delay characteristic setting. By default, the
"Definite time" type is selected. The timer mode cannot be changed between cycles T1
and T2, only either before T1 has started or after T2 has elapsed.
Table 1169: Different timer mode delays
Timer mode Setting Description
T1 Control delay time 1 First delay when the measured voltage
exceeds or falls below the limit value.
T2 Control delay time 2 Second delay when the first control did not
bring the measured voltage to a desired
level.

The delay after the command pulse activation and the restart of the timer is six
seconds. The delay is assumed to be the tap changer operating delay. The timer status
can also be read from the monitoring data TIMER_STS, where T1 active gives a value
"Lower timer1 on" or "Raise timer1 on" while T2 active gives a value "Lower timer2
on" or "Raise timer2 on". Furthermore, the "Fast lower T on" value indicates that the
fast lowering control functionality is active (Blocking scheme chapter).

Activation of operation timer also activates the TIMER_ON output.

IDMT type operation

The IDMT timer can be selected by setting Delay characteristic to "Inverse time". The
minimum time at the inverse time characteristic is limited to 1.0 second. However, the
minimum recommended setting of the control delay times T1 and T2 is 10 seconds
when the definite time delay is used and 25 seconds when the inverse time delay is
used.

The inverse time function is defined by the equations:

Ud
B=
(U BW / 2)
GUID-59DE8DA1-7C1D-41A2-98A8-48A91D061FFD V1 EN (Equation 188)

Ud |Um – Up|, differential voltage

UBW Setting parameter Band width voltage

630 series 1275

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

T
t=
2 ( B −1)

GUID-18A433AA-B4A7-4DA8-94B2-4FDF12A23FD1 V1 EN (Equation 189)

T T1 or T2

The monitored data UD_CTL shows the differential voltage value Um – Up. If the
value exceeds half of the Band width voltage setting and has a negative sign, a raising
pulse is issued. The UD_CTL monitored data can also be seen in the DT timer mode.

The hysteresis approach is presented in Figure 629.

GUID-6AA3C028-E7DD-4C87-A91C-4B8B1D43CBBA V2 EN

Figure 633: Inverse time characteristic for different values on T1 or T2 (The

smaller figure is a zoom-in of the larger one)

10.6.12 Pulse control

The tap changer generates an active operating signal when the tap-changing process
is active. This signal is to be connected to the TCO input. The signal is used for
alarming purposes. If the signal is active (=TRUE) for more than 15 seconds after the
control pulse has been deactivated, an alarm is generated (Alarm indication chapter).
If the TCO input is not connected, no alarm is generated.

1276 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

The control operation is disabled when the TCO input signal is active, unless no tap
changer stuck is detected (Alarm indication chapter). Thus, it is not possible for the
controller to send new pulses to the tap changer when it is already operating. This is
because the tap changers are typically immune to new pulses when they are operating.
Furthermore, because the pulses are omitted, the tap changer pulse counter of the
controller is not incremented either.

The commands are not tolerated during an active pulse. Therefore the command pulse
length (setting LTC pulse time) has to be carefully selected, although an active TCO
input is used internally to prevent new commands from reaching the tap changer.

To be more certain that no new pulses are to be sent when the tap changer is in
operation, the tap changer operating signal can also be connected to the LTC_BLOCK
input. In this case, the external blocking is achieved when an automatic pulse is sent
to the operating tap changer. The external LTC_BLOCK has by default no effect when
the acting operation mode is set to "Manual".

The status of the TCO input can be read from the TCO input data.

10.6.13 Blocking scheme

The operation of the voltage regulator can be blocked for several reasons. The purpose
of blocking is to prevent the tap changer from operating under conditions that can
damage the tap changer or exceed other power system-related limits. There is the
BLK_STATUS monitored data that does not imply actual blocking but reveals if the
coming command pulse is issued or not. The blocking itself happens when the
corresponding bit in the signal BLK_STATUS is active and the command pulse is to
be started due to a timer elapse or a local command. This is to avoid unnecessary event
sending.

The cross (X) in the table defines when the operation is blocked (if the corresponding
bit is active in BLK_STATUS). For example, an overvoltage (runback raising
voltage) results in blocking only when the acting operation mode is "Manual" and the
manual raising command is to be given.

630 series 1277

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Table 1170: Default blocking schema in OLATCC

Acting Command Load Block Runback High External Extreme
operation current lowering raising circulating Block positions
mode voltage voltage current
Manual Raise X X X
Lower X X
Auto Raise X X X X
follower
Lower X X X X
Auto Raise X X X1) X X2)
single,
Auto Lower X X X1) X X2)
master,
NRP,
MCC

1) Because the circulating current is only calculated in the NRP and MCC modes, it can have a blocking
effect only in these modes.
2) However, in these cases pure automatic operation notices that the extreme position has already been
reached and there is no need to activate the signal for data set event sending. The automatic follower
case can here be compared to a manual case and an event can be sent, that is, the corresponding
output is activated.

In addition to the default blocking, the Custom Man blocking setting has been added
due to different operation practices considering the manual command blocking. The
setting can be used to adapt blockings considering the manual overcurrent,
undervoltage or external blocking. (The blockings are in the table in columns Load
current, Block lowering voltage and External block for the manual operating mode.)
The default value for the parameter is "OC". This means that the table explaining the
default blocking schema operates as such. However, there are also other alternatives
that cause different operation when compared to that table.
Table 1171: Customized manual blocking schema
Manual Enumeration Description
blocking
type
1 Custom disabled No Load current, blocking of lower (under) voltage or external
blocking have effect in the manual.
2 OC Load current blocking has an effect in the manual operation mode
3 UV Block lowering (under) voltage blocking has an effect in the manual
operation mode
4 OC, UV Conditions 2 and 3 together: Load current and block lowering
(under) voltage blocking have effect in the manual operation mode
5 EXT External blocking has an effect in the manual operation mode
Table continues on next page

1278 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Manual Enumeration Description

blocking
type
6 OC, EXT Conditions 2 and 5 together: Load current and external blocking
have effect in the manual operation mode
7 UV, EXT Conditions 3 and 5 together: Block lowering (under) voltage and
external blocking have effect in the manual operation mode
8 OC, UV, EXT All conditions 2, 3 and 5 together: Load current and block lowering
(under) voltage and external blocking have effect in the manual
operation mode

If the Custom Man blocking setting is "Custom disabled", the blocking schema
regarding the acting operation mode "Manual" is as given in Table 1172. Other
operation modes follow the default schema.
Table 1172: Blocking schema for selection "Custom disabled"
Acting Command Load Block Runback High External Extreme
operation current lowering raising circulating Block positions
mode voltage voltage current
Manual Raise X X
Lower X

Table 1173: Blocking schema for selection "OC, UV, EXT"

Acting Command Load Block Runback High External Extreme
operation current lowering raising circulating Block positions
mode voltage voltage current
Manual Raise X X X X X
Lower X X X X

Table 1174: Blocking schema for selection “UV, EXT”

Acting Command Load Block Runback High External Extreme
operation current lowering raising circulating Block positions
mode voltage voltage current
Manual Raise X X X X
Lower X X X

Load current
The load current blocking is mainly used for preventing the tap changer from
operating in an overcurrent situation. For example, if the current is not high enough to
activate the protective IED of the substation, it can still be fatal for the diverter switch
of the tap changer. This operation can be adjusted with the setting parameter Load
current limit. The maximum of measurements from the secondary-side current phases
is used for blocking. By default, both the automatic operation and the manual
operation are blocked (Table 1170) when the set limit is exceeded.

630 series 1279

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

The blocking status can be read from the monitored data BLKD_I_LOD.

Block lowering voltage

The block lowering voltage feature blocks both raising and lowering voltage
commands if the measured voltage is too low to be corrected by operating the tap
changer. Such a situation can occur due to a faulty measuring circuit, an earth fault or
an overcurrent situation. By default, only the automatic (also automatic follower)
operation is blocked when the undervoltage condition is met (Table 1170). This
operation can be adjusted with the setting parameter Block lower voltage.

The blocking status can be read from the monitored data BLKD_U_UN.

However, there is no minimum limit for the undervoltage blocking. The blocking is
allowed even if the measured voltage is not connected or it has temporarily a very low
value. There is a minimum limit for the phase angle calculation based on the voltage
phasor magnitude.

Runback raising voltage

The manual raising command is blocked if the overvoltage limit is exceeded (Table
1170). However, in the automatic operation mode, the overvoltage situation triggers
the fast lowering feature. More information can be found in the Manual voltage
regulation chapter. This operation can be adjusted with the setting parameter Runback
raise V.

The blocking status can be read from the monitored data RNBK_U_OV.

High Circulating Current

The circulating current value is calculated in the operation modes Negative Reactance
Principle (NRP) and Minimizing Circulating Current (MCC). Only the automatic
operation in these modes is blocked when the high circulating current is measured
(Table 1170). This operation can be adjusted with the setting parameter Cir current
limit.

The blocking status can be read from the monitored data BLKD_I_CIR.

LTC_BLOCK – external block input

With the PCM600 tool configuration possibilities, a desired blocking condition can be
built by connecting an outcome to this input. The blocking status can be read from the
monitored data BLKD_LTCBLK. When activated, this input blocks only the
automatic operation of the regulator by default (Table 1170). For the fully automatic
modes, the signal activation resets the timer, and the monitored data BLKD_LTCBLK
is not activated.

Extreme positions
This blocking function supervises the extreme positions of the tap changer. These
extreme positions can be adjusted with the setting parameters Raise block tap and
Lower block tap. When the tap changer reaches one of these two positions, the
commands in the corresponding direction are blocked (Table 1170). Here it depends

1280 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

on the comparison between the Raise block tap and Lower block tap settings, which
direction is blocked (Voltage control vs. tap changer moving direction section). This
blocking affects both the automatic and manual operation modes.

However, as shown in Table 1170, no blocking indication is to be generated in the

fully automatic modes. Here "Auto follower" is not a fully automatic mode. The
unconnected position information does not cause the total block of OLATCC, only the
extreme position blocking is not working.

The blocking status can be seen in the generated events.

Fast lowering control

OLATCC provides the fast lowering control in the automatic operation modes. When
the set Runback raise V is exceeded, the regulator gives fast lowering control pulses
until the voltage drops below the specified limit. This fast lowering control can be seen
with the monitoring data TIMER_STS, where the value "Fast lower T on" indicates
this functionality to be active.

To allow the fast lowering operation, Runback raise V has to be set

always to a value higher than the control voltage (U_CTL) plus half of
Band width voltage.

Typically, the blockings are reset when the corresponding limit with the hysteresis is
undershoot or exceeded. Although blocking is reset after undershooting the above-
mentioned limit, the fast lowering control operation continues until the measured
voltage signal difference undershoots half the Band width voltage hysteresis limit
(Figure 629). As a result, normal automatic mode operation is not possible before this
happens.

Fast lowering control causes successive LOWER_OWN pulses to be activated. The time
between consecutive pulse starts is the pulse length plus 1.5 seconds.
• There is no tap changer operating delay (otherwise six seconds) taken into
account in this cycle (meaning that some command pulses are ineffective due to
tap changer operation, as described in the Pulse control chapter)
• Timer mode set by Delay characteristic has no effect here (always the DT timer-
type operation). Because the minimum pulse length (the LTC pulse time setting)
is 0.5 seconds, the shortest interval between successive pulses can be two
seconds.

In the automatic follower mode, the fast lowering is not triggered. In this way, the
awkward dispersion of position values in different units can be avoided. The master
always decides on the fast lowering on behalf of the follower units. Moreover, master
and follower should measure an equal voltage level and have similar setting values for
the overvoltage blocking limit.

630 series 1281

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.6.14 Alarm indication

Tap Changer Monitoring
OLATCC supervises the operation of the tap changer and alarms if the alarm
condition is detected. An alarm activation means that the ALARM output is activated
and the alarm reason can be read from the monitored data ALARM_REAS. Alarms
are in use by default but they can be set not to be in use by setting Alarms enabled to
"False". Three different alarm conditions and their combinations can be detected by
OLATCC.

Command error
OLATCC supervises the tap changer position information of the own transformer
when a control pulse is given. If the correct position change (direction depends on the
comparison of the settings Raise block tap and Lower block tap) is not seen by
OLATCC in Cmd error delay time after the pulse start, the alarm is issued.

If the position information is not connected, no alarm is generated. The alarm is reset
when the correct change in position value is detected after a given pulse or if a new
command pulse is given.

The monitored data ALARM_REAS is set during an alarm. This means that if the
alarm reason is active, ALARM_REAS has the value "Cmd error".

TCO signal fails

If the tap changer operating signal TCO stays active for more than 15 seconds after the
output pulse deactivation, OLATCC concludes this as an abnormal condition and
assumes that the tap changer is stuck. The alarm is reset when the TCO input signal
deactivates. The monitored data ALARM_REAS is set during the alarm. This means
that only if alarm reason is active, ALARM_REAS has the value "TCO error".

If the TCO input signal is not connected (indicated by bad quality), this type of alarm
is not possible.

Regulator pumping
It is possible that faulty settings cause the regulator to give control pulses too
frequently. For example, too low a setting for the Band width voltage (Figure 629) can
result in a pumping condition where the regulator has problems to bring the regulated
voltage to a desired level. To detect this, OLATCC has a setting Max operations in
1h, which defines the allowed number of lowering and raising commands during a
one-hour sliding time window. The detection is active both in the manual and
automatic operation modes. The alarm is reset after the counted number of the
operations during the one-hour time window is less than the set value. The number of
executed operations per last one hour can be read from the monitored data
OP_TM_NUM_H. However, this parameter is updated only in three-minute intervals.
Again, the monitored data ALARM_REAS is set during an alarm. This means that
only if alarm reason is active, ALARM_REAS has the value "Pump error".

1282 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

The operation of OLATCC is not blocked during an alarm situation, but all the alarms
mentioned above cause the automatic operation to be delayed. In practice, this means
that the set delay times T1 and T2 are doubled.

In addition to the alarm detections, OLATCC provides a nonvolatile operation

counter parameter (monitored data OPR_CNT) for determining the service intervals
of the tap changer. The counter gives the total number of raising and lowering
commands given in the manual and automatic modes. All commands, even those that
are omitted by the tap changer due to its operation sequence, are calculated in a
cumulative counter. This data parameter can be reset via the clear menu parameter
OLATCC counter.

10.6.15 Base values

In this function block, some of the settings are set in per unit (pu). These pu values are
relational to certain base values, for example the values given in A, kV and kVA. The
IED supports alternative base value groups for the phase current or voltage-related
settings, for example "Phase Grp 1", "Phase Grp 2" and "Phase Grp 3". One of the
groups to be used with the Base value Sel phase setting must be selected.

10.6.16 Application
OLATCC is used to control the voltage on the load side of the power transformer.
Based on the measured voltage and current, the function block determines whether the
voltage needs to be increased or decreased. The voltage is regulated by the raising or
lowering commands sent to the tap changer.

The basic principle for voltage regulation is that no regulation takes place as long as
the voltage stays within the bandwidth setting. The measured voltage is always
compared to the calculated control voltage Up. Once the measured voltage deviates
from the bandwidth, the delay time T1 starts. When the set delay time has elapsed, a
raising or lowering control pulse is sent to the tap changer. Should the measured
voltage still be outside the bandwidth after one tap change, the delay time T2 starts. T2
is normally shorter than T1.

Under certain circumstances, the automatic voltage regulator needs to be enhanced

with additional functions such as Line Drop Compensation (LDC) and Reduce Set
Voltage (RSV). Also, various parallel operation modes are available to fit applications
where two or more power transformers are connected to the same busbar at the same
time. The parallel operation modes of OLATCC are Master/Follower (M/F),
Minimizing Circulating Current (MCC) and Negative Reactance Principle (NRP).

Example for operating OLATCC manually from LHMI

The tap position of the transformer can be manually raised or lowered by activating the
RAISE_LOCAL and LOWER_LOCAL inputs. The activation can be done either by
connecting the binary inputs, or the inputs can be operated also from the LHMI by
using the function keys FNKEYMD1 and FNKEYMD2 or by using the I/O buttons
with VSGGIO.

630 series 1283

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Figure 634 shows the configuration connection for operating OLATCC using the
function keys FNKYMD1 and FNKEYMD2 from the LHMI.

Here, FNKEYMD1 is used for raising the tap changer position, whereas FNKEYMD2
is used for lowering the tap changer position. For the manual operation, it is required
that the Operation mode setting of OLATCC is set to "Manual" and the type setting for
the function keys 1 and 2 is set to "Control". Manual operation also requires that the
IED is in the local mode.

OLATCC
I3P ALARM
U3P RAISE_OWN To transformer
TR1_I_AMPL LOWER_OWN tap changer
TR2_I_AMPL FLLW1_CTL
TR3_I_AMPL FLLW2_CTL
TR1_I_ANGL FLLW3_CTL
TR2_I_ANGL PAR_FAIL
FNKEYMD1 TR3_I_ANGL TR0_I_AMPL
LEDCTL1 FKEYOUT1 LTC_BLOCK TR0_I_ANGL
RAISE_LOCAL
LOWER_LOCAL
FNKEYMD2 AUTO
LEDCTL2 FKEYOUT2 CON_STATUS
RSV
PARALLEL
TCO
TAP_POS from TPOSSLTC TAP_POS
TAP_POS_IV from TPOSSLTC TAP_INVALID
TR1_TAP_POS
TR1_TAP_VAL
TR2_TAP_POS
TR2_TAP_VAL
TR3_TAP_POS
TR3_TAP_VAL
TAPCHG_FLLW
TR1_I_VALID
TR2_I_VALID
TR3_I_VALID

GUID-147E3CE1-6887-406A-834D-F5546CA61F01 V1 EN

Figure 634: Configuration for manual raising and lowering of tap positions using
function keys

Figure 635 shows the configuration connection for operating OLATCC by using the
I/O buttons from LHMI with VSGGIO. This also requires that the Select button is
configured in the graphical display editor and mapped to VSGGIO. The tap changer
position is raised using the I button and lowered using the O button of the LHMI after
selecting the configured Select button from the single-line diagram.

This requires that the VSGGIO settings are done properly.

Table 1175: VSGGIO setting example
Setting name Value
Operation On
CtlModel Dir Norm
Mode Pulse
tSelect 30.000
tPulse 1.000
PosUndefined N/A
Position1 RAISE
Position2 LOWER
PosBadState BAD_INPUT

1284 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

The text written in settings Position1 and Position2 is the text displayed when the I
and O buttons of LHMI are pressed on the SLD in the Select button. When I and O are
pressed simultaneously, the text set with the PosBadState setting appears on the SLD
in the Select button.

For the manual operation, the Operation mode setting must be set to "Manual" and the
IED must be in the local mode.

OLATCC
I3P ALARM
U3P RAISE_OWN To transformer
TR1_I_AMPL LOWER_OWN tap changer
TR2_I_AMPL FLLW1_CTL
VSGGIO
TR3_I_AMPL FLLW2_CTL
BLOCK BLOCKED TR1_I_ANGL FLLW3_CTL
IPOS1 POSITION TR2_I_ANGL PAR_FAIL
IPOS2 POS1 TR3_I_ANGL TR0_I_AMPL
POS2 LTC_BLOCK TR0_I_ANGL
CMDPOS12 RAISE_LOCAL
CMDPOS21 LOWER_LOCAL
AUTO
CON_STATUS
RSV
PARALLEL
TCO
TAP_POS from TPOSSLTC TAP_POS
TAP_POS_IV from TPOSSLTC TAP_INVALID
TR1_TAP_POS
TR1_TAP_VAL
TR2_TAP_POS
TR2_TAP_VAL
TR3_TAP_POS
TR3_TAP_VAL
TAPCHG_FLLW
TR1_I_VALID
TR2_I_VALID
TR3_I_VALID

GUID-4728959C-1A12-4616-9920-2075BA683BB3 V1 EN

Figure 635: Configuration for manual raising and lowering of tap positions using
the I/O buttons

If the tap changer position indicator function TPOSSLTC is used in the configuration,
the TAP_POS and TAP_INVALID inputs of OLATCC should be connected.

630 series 1285

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Configuration example for the Manual and Auto single modes

Tap position indication (e.g. mA -signal)

TAP_POS
U12b TCO LOWER RAISE
VT_
REx_ 630
CT_
IL1b, IL2b, IL3b
AUTO LOWER_LOCAL RAISE_LOCAL

Auto /
Manual Lower Raise

GUID-760FD4B6-CD98-48DB-9360-7959B1362F93 V1 EN

Figure 636: Basic connection diagram for the voltage regulator

IL1b OLATCC
IL2b I3P ALARM
PO2_RAISE_OWN
IL3b U3P RAISE_ OWN
U12b TR1_I_ AMPL LOWER_ OWN
TR2_I_ AMPL FLLW1_CTL PO1_LOWER_OWN
TR3_I_ AMPL FLLW2_CTL
TR1_I_ ANGL FLLW3_CTL
TR2_I_ ANGL PAR_ FAIL
TR3_I_ ANGL TR0_I_ AMPL
LTC_ BLOCK TR0_I_ ANGL
BI4_RAISE_LOCAL RAISE_ LOCAL
BI3_LOWER_LOCAL LOWER_ LOCAL
BI6_AUTO AUTO
CB_CLOSED CON_ STATUS
RSV
PARALLEL
TPOSSLTC BI1_TCO TCO
BI0 TAP_POS TAP_ POS
BI1 TAP_POS_IV TAP_ INVALID
BI2 TR1_ TAP_ POS
BI3 TR1_ TAP_ VAL
BI4 TR2_ TAP_ POS
BI5 TR2_ TAP_ VAL
SIGN_BIT TR3_ TAP_ POS
TAP_POS (mA) TAPPOS TR3_ TAP_ VAL
TAP_POS (mA_IV) TAPPOS_IV TAPCHG_ FLLW
TR1_I_ VALID
TR2_I_ VALID
TR3_I_ VALID

GUID-A57739B5-E1A9-4AB4-96A4-248FE46F644C V1 EN

Figure 637: Configuration example for the Manual and Auto single modes

The configuration example uses an mA signal to indicate the current tap position of the
local transformer. To take that position information to OLATCC, the measured mA
value is connected to the TAP_POS input of the TPOSSLTC function. The tap
position integer value is transferred from TPOSSLTC to OLATCC with a
configuration connection.

Configuration example for the Auto parallel (Master/Follower) mode

The configuration example for Master/Follower describes how the tap position
information is transferred from follower to master with the horizontal GOOSE

1286 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

communication. The status information from circuit breakers and an extra logic can be
used to change the operation mode via inputs of the master and the follower
(Operation mode = "Input control").

Regulator 1 signals Regulator 2 signals

Tap position ind.

Tap position ind.

Raise Raise
Raise
follower
M TCO TCO M
Lower
follower
Lower Lower

U12b U12b

IL1b, IL2b, IL3b IL1b, IL2b, IL3b

CB1 CB3

CB2 CB2

GUID-0B2CBB09-9B4C-498A-BB1C-3A3689513BDF V2 EN

Figure 638: An example of the configuration for the Auto parallel (Master/
Follower) mode (the position of the follower known by the master)

630 series 1287

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

IED 1 / Regulator 1 IED 2 / Regulator 2

(Master) (Follower)

OLATCC OLATCC
I3P ALARM I3P ALARM
U3P RAISE_ OWN U3P RAISE_ OWN
TR1_I_ AMPL LOWER_ OWN TR1_I_ AMPL LOWER_ OWN
TR2_I_ AMPL FLLW1_CTL TR2_I_ AMPL FLLW1_CTL
TR3_I_ AMPL FLLW2_CTL TR3_I_ AMPL FLLW2_CTL
TR1_I_ ANGL FLLW3_CTL TR1_I_ ANGL FLLW3_CTL
TR2_I_ ANGL PAR_ FAIL TR2_I_ ANGL PAR_ FAIL
CB1 TR3_I_ ANGL TR0_I_ AMPL CB1 TR3_I_ ANGL TR0_I_ AMPL
LTC_ BLOCK TR0_I_ ANGL AND LTC_ BLOCK TR0_I_ ANGL
RAISE_ LOCAL
CB2 RAISE_ LOCAL
AND LOWER_ LOCAL LOWER_ LOCAL
AND
CB2 AUTO
CB3 AUTO
CON_ STATUS CON_ STATUS
RSV RSV
AND PARALLEL PARALLEL
CB3 TCO NOT TCO
TAP_ POS TAP_ POS
TAP_ INVALID AND TAP_ INVALID
TR1_ TAP_ POS TR1_ TAP_ POS
TR1_ TAP_ VAL TR1_ TAP_VAL
TR2_ TAP_ POS TR2_ TAP_ POS
TR2_ TAP_ VAL TR2_ TAP_VAL
AND TR3_ TAP_ POS TR3_ TAP_ POS
TR3_ TAP_ VAL TR3_ TAP_VAL
TAPCHG_ FLLW TAPCHG_ FLLW
TR1_I_ VALID TR1_I_ VALID
TR2_I_ VALID TR2_I_ VALID
TR3_I_ VALID TR3_I_ VALID

GOOSEINTRCV GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK INTOUT BLOCK INTOUT
GOOSE communication DATAVALID GOOSE communication DATAVALID
COMMVALID COMMVALID
( Regulator 2 tap position ) TEST ( Raise / Lower follower ) TEST

GUID-358DBD34-7926-436B-8606-D7791739ABFD V1 EN

Figure 639: Simplified regulator 1&2 configurations of the Master/Follower

example

Table 1176: The automatic selection of operation modes for regulators in the Master/Follower
example
CB1 CB2 CB3 Regulator 1 Regulator 2
Open Open Open Manual Manual
Open Open Closed Manual Auto single
Open Closed Open Manual Manual
Open Closed Closed Manual Auto single
Closed Open Open Auto single Manual
Closed Open Closed Auto single Auto single
Closed Closed Open Auto single Manual
Closed Closed Closed Auto parallel Auto parallel
(Master) (Follower)
Auto parallel Auto parallel
mode = "Auto mode = "Auto
master'' follower"

Configuration example for the Auto parallel (MCC) mode

The purpose of the Auto parallel (MCC) mode is to minimize the circulating current
between the parallel transformers. The data exchange between the regulators can be
done with the horizontal GOOSE communication.

1288 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

IED 1 / Regulator 1 IED 2 / Regulator 2

OLATCC OLATCC
I3P ALARM I3P ALARM
U3P RAISE_ OWN U3P RAISE_ OWN
TR1_I_ AMPL LOWER_ OWN TR1_I_ AMPL LOWER_ OWN
TR2_I_ AMPL FLLW1_CTL TR2_I_ AMPL FLLW1_ CTL
TR3_I_ AMPL FLLW2_CTL TR3_I_ AMPL FLLW2_ CTL
TR1_I_ ANGL FLLW3_CTL TR1_I_ ANGL FLLW3_ CTL
TR2_I_ ANGL PAR_ FAIL GOOSE communication TR2_I_ ANGL PAR_ FAIL
TR3_I_ ANGL TR0_I_ AMPL TR3_I_ ANGL TR0_I_ AMPL
LTC_ BLOCK TR0_I_ ANGL LTC_ BLOCK TR0_I_ ANGL
RAISE_ LOCAL RAISE_ LOCAL
LOWER_ LOCAL LOWER_ LOCAL
AUTO AUTO
CON_ STATUS CON_ STATUS
RSV RSV
PARALLEL PARALLEL
TCO TCO
TAP_ POS TAP_ POS
TAP_ INVALID TAP_ INVALID
TR1_ TAP_ POS TR1_ TAP_ POS
TR1_ TAP_ VAL TR1_ TAP_ VAL
TR2_ TAP_ POS TR2_ TAP_ POS
TR2_ TAP_ VAL TR2_ TAP_ VAL
TR3_ TAP_ POS TR3_ TAP_ POS
TR3_ TAP_ VAL TR3_ TAP_ VAL
TAPCHG_ FLLW TAPCHG_ FLLW
TR1_I_ VALID TR1_I_ VALID
TR2_I_ VALID TR2_I_ VALID
TR3_I_ VALID TR3_I_ VALID

GOOSEMVRCV GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK MVOUT BLOCK MVOUT
DATAVALID DATAVALID
COMMVALID COMMVALID
TEST TEST
AND AND
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK MVOUT BLOCK MVOUT
DATAVALID DATAVALID
COMMVALID COMMVALID
TEST TEST

GOOSE communication

GUID-0C34F57F-7C49-433A-AA00-8EFFEB42C025 V1 EN

Figure 640: Two parallel transformers and horizontal connection via GOOSE to
transfer current and phase angle information when MCC principle is
used.

Configuration example for the Auto parallel (NRP) mode

The advantage of the Negative Reactance Principle (NRP) operation mode is that no
wiring or communication is needed between the IEDs. The voltage regulators operate
independently. However, for the cases where there is an occasional stepwise change
in the phase angle of the load, the regulating error can be suppressed by an automatic
setting group change or by changing the operation mode with the logic.

630 series 1289

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

OLATCC
I3P ALARM
U3P RAISE_ OWN
TR1_I_ AMPL LOWER_ OWN
TR2_I_ AMPL FLLW1_CTL
TR3_I_ AMPL FLLW2_CTL
TR1_I_ ANGL FLLW3_CTL
TR2_I_ ANGL PAR_ FAIL
TR3_I_ ANGL TR0_I_ AMPL
LTC_ BLOCK TR0_I_ ANGL
RAISE_ LOCAL
LOWER_ LOCAL
AUTO
CON_ STATUS
RSV
Capacitor bank PARALLEL
NOT
connected TCO
TAP_ POS
FALSE => Auto parallel (NRP) TAP_ INVALID
TR1_ TAP_ POS
TRUE => Auto single TR1_ TAP_ VAL
TR2_ TAP_ POS
TR2_ TAP_ VAL
TR3_ TAP_ POS
TR3_ TAP_ VAL
TAPCHG_ FLLW
TR1_I_ VALID
TR2_I_ VALID
TR3_I_ VALID

GUID-39C14282-AB8E-40DD-B072-AEC82DD2F71F V1 EN

Figure 641: Changing the operation mode of OLATCC automatically when the
capacitor bank is connected

Comparison summary between parallel operation modes

The parallel operation modes are needed because if the parallel regulators operated
independently, at some point the transformers would become out of step with each
other.

The circulating current would increase and the line drop compensation would thus
increase for the transformer giving the highest voltage. Correspondingly, the
increasing circulating current would cause the transformer giving the lowest voltage
to decrease the voltage due to a decreased line drop compensation effect. In other
words, the two transformers would run apart.

However, it is case-specific which parallel operation mode is the most suitable.

1290 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Table 1177: Different parallel operation modes

Parallel operation modes Description
Master/Follower (follower positions not known by Requires power transformers with identical ratings
master) and step voltages
- Extra wiring work: raising/lowering commands
(input TAPCHG_FLLW connected from output
FLLWx_CTL) from the master to the follower
- Manual control needed in the beginning of
operation
- Blind control: follower positions after control
cannot be supervised. It must be relied on that the
followers are following the commands.
+ Parallel transformers are regulated as one unit
+ Supports an unlimited number of transformers in
parallel
Master/Follower (follower positions known) Requires power transformers with identical ratings
and step voltages.
- Extra wiring work:
raising/lowering commands (the TAPCHG_FLLW
input connected from the FLLWx_CTL output) from
the master to the follower
TAP_POS connections from the followers to the
master
- Supports not more than four transformers in
parallel.
Negative reactance principle The actual phase angle setting results in a
regulating error. When the line drop compensation
is used, the setting should be changed when the
number of transformers in parallel operation is
changed.
+ The step voltages and short circuit impedances
of the transformers do not need to be identical.
+ No communication or wiring between regulators
is needed, meaning that the principle can be
applied even when the parallel transformers are
located at different substations.
+ Supports an unlimited number of transformers in
parallel
Minimizing circulating current - Requires extra configuration efforts since this
principle utilizes a horizontal communication
between the regulators (the inputs TRx_I
connected from parallel transformer controller's
outputs TR0_I.
+ The step voltages and short circuit impedances
of the transformers do not need to be identical.
+ The phase angle of the load current may vary
without any impact on the regulation accuracy.
+ Automatic adjustment for the number of
transformers (for an accurate calculation of line
drop compensation term)

630 series 1291

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

10.6.17 Signals
Table 1178: OLATCC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
TR1_I_AMPL REAL 0.0 Received current magnitude from transformer 1
TR2_I_AMPL REAL 0.0 Received current magnitude from transformer 2
TR3_I_AMPL REAL 0.0 Received current magnitude from transformer 3
TR1_I_ANGL REAL 0.0 Received current phase from transformer 1
TR2_I_ANGL REAL 0.0 Received current phase from transformer 2
TR3_I_ANGL REAL 0.0 Received current phase from transformer 3
LTC_BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 External signal for blocking of automatic operation
RAISE_LOCAL BOOLEAN 0 Raise command input from configuration
LOWER_LOCAL BOOLEAN 0 Lower command input from configuration
AUTO BOOLEAN 0 Selection of auto or manual operation in parallel
mode
CON_STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Network connection status of the (own) transformer
RSV BOOLEAN 0 Reduce set voltage active
PARALLEL BOOLEAN 0 Parallel (TRUE) or single (FALSE) operation
TCO BOOLEAN 0 Tap changer operating input
TAP_POS INTEGER 0 Integer representing tap changer position of own
transformer
TAP_INVALID BOOLEAN 0 Validity of tap changer position of own transformer
TR1_TAP_POS INTEGER 0 Integer representing tap changer position for
transformer 1
TR1_TAP_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Validity of tap changer position of transformer 1
TR2_TAP_POS INTEGER 0 Integer representing tap changer position for
transformer 2
TR2_TAP_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Validity of tap changer position of transformer 2
TR3_TAP_POS INTEGER 0 Integer representing tap changer position for
transformer 3
TR3_TAP_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Validity of tap changer position of transformer 3
TAPCHG_FLLW INTEGER 0 Raise/Lower command input from Master to control
follower
TR1_I_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Validity of received current from transformer 1
TR2_I_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Validity of received current from transformer 2
TR3_I_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Validity of received current from transformer 3

1292 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Table 1179: OLATCC Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm status
RAISE_OWN BOOLEAN Raise command for own transformer
LOWER_OWN BOOLEAN Lower command for own transformer
FLLW1_CTL INTEGER Lower/Raise for follower 1 in the Master/Follower
mode
FLLW2_CTL INTEGER Lower/Raise for follower 2 in the Master/Follower
mode
FLLW3_CTL INTEGER Lower/Raise for follower 3 in the Master/Follower
mode
PAR_FAIL BOOLEAN Parallel failure detected
BLKD_I_LOD BOOLEAN Indication of load current blocking
BLKD_U_UN BOOLEAN Indication of under voltage blocking
RNBK_U_OV BOOLEAN Indication of runback raise voltage
BLKD_I_CIR BOOLEAN Indication of high circulating current blocking
BLKD_LTCBLK BOOLEAN Indication of external blocking
PARALLEL BOOLEAN Parallel mode or not
AUTO BOOLEAN Acting automatic/manual
TR0_I_AMPL REAL Current magnitude from own transformer
TR0_I_ANGL REAL Current phase angle from own transformer

10.6.18 Settings
Table 1180: OLATCC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Auto parallel mode Master - - Master Parallel mode selection
Follower
NRP
MCC
Band center voltage 0.000 - 2.000 pu 0.001 1.000 The band center voltage, Us
Line drop V Ris 0.0 - 25.0 % 0.1 0.0 Resistive line-drop compensation factor
Line drop V React 0.0 - 25.0 % 0.1 0.0 Reactive line-drop compensation factor
Band reduction 0.0 - 9.0 % 0.1 0.0 Step size for Reduce Set Voltage (RSV)
Stability factor 0.0 - 70.0 % 0.1 0.0 Stability factor in parallel operation
Load phase angle -89 - 89 Deg 1 0 Load phase-shift, used with the Negative
Reactance Principle
Control delay time 1 1.0 - 300.0 s 0.1 60.0 Control delay time 1
Control delay time 2 1.0 - 300.0 s 0.1 30.0 Control delay time 2

630 series 1293

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Table 1181: OLATCC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Mode Off / On
On
Operation mode Manual - - Manual The operation mode
Auto single
Auto parallel
Input control
Custom Man blocking Custom disabled - - OC Customized manual blocking
OC
UV
OC, UV
EXT
OC, EXT
UV, EXT
OC, UV, EXT
Parallel trafos 0 - 10 - 1 0 Num of parallel transformers in addition to
own transformer
Delay characteristic Inverse time - - Definite time Selection of delay characteristic
Definite time
Band width voltage 1.20 - 18.00 % 0.01 3.00 Band width voltage. Twice the allowed
deviation
Load current limit 0.10 - 5.00 pu 0.01 2.00 Over current blocking limit
Block lower voltage 0.10 - 1.20 pu 0.01 0.70 Voltage limit, further voltage lowering
commands are blocked
Runback raise V 0.80 - 1.60 pu 0.01 1.25 Voltage limit, where fast lower commands
takes place
Cir current limit 0.10 - 5.00 pu 0.01 0.15 Blocking limit for high circulating current
LDC limit 0.00 - 2.00 pu 0.01 0.10 Maximum limit for line drop compensation
term
Lower block tap -36 - 36 - 1 0 Tap pos limit giving lowest voltage on the
regulated side
Raise block tap -36 - 36 - 1 17 Tap pos limit giving highest voltage on the
regulated side
LTC pulse time 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Output pulse duration, common for raise
and lower pulses
LDC enable FALSE - - TRUE Selection for line drop compensation
TRUE

Table 1182: OLATCC Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Base value Sel phase Phase Grp 1 - - Phase Grp 1 Base value selector, phase / phase-to-
Phase Grp 2 phase
Phase Grp 3
Max operations in 1h 0 - 10000 - 1 100 Allowed number of controls per one hour
sliding window
Cmd error delay time 10 - 50 s 1 20 Time delay before command error will be
activated
Table continues on next page

1294 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Follower delay time 6 - 20 s 1 6 Time delay between successive follower
commands by a master
Alarms enabled FALSE - - TRUE Alarm selection
TRUE
Rv Pwr flow allowed FALSE - - FALSE Reverse power flow allowed
TRUE

10.6.19 Measured values

Table 1183: OLATCC Measured values
Name Type Default Description
I_AMPL_A REAL 0.0 Phase A current magnitude on the regulated side
I_AMPL_B REAL 0.0 Phase B current magnitude on the regulated side
I_AMPL_C REAL 0.0 Phase C current magnitude on the regulated side
I_ANGL_A REAL 0.0 Phase A current phase angle on the regulated side
I_ANGL_B REAL 0.0 Phase B current phase angle on the regulated side
I_ANGL_C REAL 0.0 Phase C current phase angle on the regulated side
TR1_I_AMPL REAL 0.0 Received current magnitude from transformer 1
TR2_I_AMPL REAL 0.0 Received current magnitude from transformer 2
TR3_I_AMPL REAL 0.0 Received current magnitude from transformer 3
TR1_I_ANGL REAL 0.0 Received current phase from transformer 1
TR2_I_ANGL REAL 0.0 Received current phase from transformer 2
TR3_I_ANGL REAL 0.0 Received current phase from transformer 3
U_AMPL_AB REAL 0.0 Magnitude of phase-to-phase voltage AB on the
regulated side
U_ANGL_AB REAL 0.0 Angle of phase-to-phase voltage AB on the
regulated side
LTC_BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 External signal for blocking of automatic operation
RAISE_LOCAL BOOLEAN 0 Raise command input from configuration
LOWER_LOCAL BOOLEAN 0 Lower command input from configuration
AUTO BOOLEAN 0 Selection of auto or manual operation in parallel
mode
CON_STATUS BOOLEAN 0 Network connection status of the (own) transformer
RSV BOOLEAN 0 Reduce set voltage active
PARALLEL BOOLEAN 0 Parallel (TRUE) or single (FALSE) operation
TCO BOOLEAN 0 Tap changer operating input
TAP_POS INTEGER 0 Integer representing tap changer position of own
transformer
TAP_INVALID BOOLEAN 0 Validity of tap changer position of own transformer
TR1_TAP_POS INTEGER 0 Integer representing tap changer position for
transformer 1
TR1_TAP_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Validity of tap changer position of transformer 1
Table continues on next page

630 series 1295

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Name Type Default Description

TR2_TAP_POS INTEGER 0 Integer representing tap changer position for
transformer 2
TR2_TAP_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Validity of tap changer position of transformer 2
TR3_TAP_POS INTEGER 0 Integer representing tap changer position for
transformer 3
TR3_TAP_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Validity of tap changer position of transformer 3
TAPCHG_FLLW INTEGER 0 Raise/Lower command input from Master to control
follower
TR1_I_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Validity of received current from transformer 1
TR2_I_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Validity of received current from transformer 2
TR3_I_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Validity of received current from transformer 3

10.6.20 Monitored data

Table 1184: OLATCC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Alarm status
1=TRUE
RAISE_OWN BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Raise command for own
1=TRUE transformer
LOWER_OWN BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Lower command for own
1=TRUE transformer
FLLW1_CTL INTEGER 1=Lower - Lower/Raise for follower
2=Raise 1 in the Master/Follower
0=Stop mode
FLLW2_CTL INTEGER 1=Lower - Lower/Raise for follower
2=Raise 2 in the Master/Follower
0=Stop mode
FLLW3_CTL INTEGER 1=Lower - Lower/Raise for follower
2=Raise 3 in the Master/Follower
0=Stop mode
PAR_FAIL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Parallel failure detected
1=TRUE
TIMER_STS INTEGER 0=Timer off - Timer T1, T2 or fast lower
1=Lower timer1 timer active
on
2=Raise timer1
on
3=Lower timer2
on
4=Raise timer2
on
5=Fast lower T
on
Table continues on next page

1296 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 10
Control functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OPR_MODE_STS INTEGER 0=Not in use - The acting operation
1=Manual mode of the function
2=Auto single block
3=Auto master
4=Auto follower
5=MCC
6=NRP
BLK_STATUS INTEGER - - Bit-coded output showing
the blocking status for the
next operation
BLKD_I_LOD BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication of load current
1=TRUE blocking
BLKD_U_UN BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication of under
1=TRUE voltage blocking
RNBK_U_OV BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication of runback
1=TRUE raise voltage
BLKD_I_CIR BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication of high
1=TRUE circulating current
blocking
BLKD_LTCBLK BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Indication of external
1=TRUE blocking
PARALLEL BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Parallel mode or not
1=TRUE
AUTO BOOLEAN 0=FALSE - Acting automatic/manual
1=TRUE
ALARM_REAS INTEGER 0=No alarm - Status and reason for
1=Cmd error alarm
2=TCO error
3=Cmd + TCO
err
4=Pump error
5=Pump + cmd
err
6=Pump + TCO
err
7=Pmp+TCO
+cmd err
FAIL_FLLW INTEGER 0=No failed fllws - Failed followers
1=Follower 1
2=Follower 2
4=Follower 3
3=Followers 1+2
5=Followers 1+3
6=Followers 2+3
7=Followers
1+2+3
PAR_UNIT_MCC INTEGER 0=No parall units - Parallel units included in
1=Trafo 1 MCC calculation
2=Trafo 2
3=Trafos 1 and 2
4=Trafo 3
5=Trafos 1 and 3
6=Trafos 2 and 3
7=Trafos 1+2+3
OPR_CNT INTEGER - - Total number of
commands given,
manual and automatic
Table continues on next page

630 series 1297

Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRS756508 F
Control functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

OP_TM_NUM_H INTEGER - - Number of controls for
own tap changer during
last hour
TR0_I_AMPL REAL - A Current magnitude from
own transformer
TR0_I_ANGL REAL - deg Current phase angle from
own transformer
U_MEAS REAL - kV Phase-to-phase voltage ,
average filtered
ANGL_UA_IA REAL - deg Measured angle value
between phase A voltage
and current
U_CTL REAL - kV Control voltage, Up,
target voltage level
UD_CTL REAL - kV Voltage difference
between measured and
control Voltage
I_CIR REAL - A Calculated circulating
current - calculated in
operation modes NRP
and MCC
LDC REAL - kV Calculated line drop
compensation

10.6.21 Technical data

Table 1185: OLATCC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy 1) At the frequency f = fn

Differential voltage Ud:

±1.0% of the measured value or ±0.004 × Un (in
measured voltages <2.0 × Un)

Operation value:
±1.0% of the Ud or ±0.004 × Un for Us = 1.0 × Un

Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1) ±1.0% of the set value or 0.11 s

Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode 1) ±15.0% of the set value or 0.15 s
(at theoretical B in range of 1.1…5.0) Also note
fixed minimum operate time (IDMT) 1 s
Reset ratio for control operation Typically 0.80 (1.20)
Reset ratio for analog based blockings (except run Typically 0.96 (1.04)
back raise voltage blocking)

1) Default setting values used

1298 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

Section 11 General function block features

11.1 Definite time characteristics

11.1.1 Definite time operation

The DT mode is enabled when the Operating curve type setting is selected either as
"ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". In the DT mode, the OPERATE output of the
function is activated when the time calculation exceeds the set Operate delay time.

The user can determine the reset in the DT mode with the Reset delay time setting,
which provides the delayed reset property when needed.

The Type of reset curve setting has no effect on the reset method when
the DT mode is selected, but the reset is determined solely with the
Reset delay time setting.

The purpose of the delayed reset is to enable fast clearance of intermittent faults, for
example self-sealing insulation faults, and severe faults which may produce high
asymmetrical fault currents that partially saturate the current transformers. It is typical
for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so called drop-off periods,
during which the fault current falls below the set start current, including hysteresis.
Without the delayed reset function, the operate timer would reset when the current
drops off. In the same way, an apparent drop-off period of the secondary current of the
saturated current transformer can also reset the operate timer.

630 series 1299

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A060764 V1 EN

Figure 642: Operation of the counter in drop-off

In case 1, the reset is delayed with the Reset delay time setting and in case 2, the
counter is reset immediately, because the Reset delay time setting is set to zero.

A070421 V1 EN

Figure 643: Drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time

1300 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

When the drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time, as described in Figure
643, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active, provided that
the current is above the set Start value. The input signal is inactive when the current
is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region. The timer input rises when
a fault current is detected. The definite timer activates the START output and the
operate timer starts elapsing. The reset (drop-off) timer starts when the timer input
falls, that is, the fault disappears. When the reset (drop-off) timer elapses, the operate
timer is reset. Since this happens before another start occurs, the OPERATE output is
not activated.

A070420 V1 EN

Figure 644: Drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time

When the drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time, as described in
Figure 644, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active, provided
that the current is above the set Start value. The input signal is inactive when the
current is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region. The timer input rises
when a fault current is detected. The definite timer activates the START output and the
operate timer starts elapsing. The Reset (drop-off) timer starts when the timer input
falls, that is, the fault disappears. Another fault situation occurs before the reset (drop-
off) timer has elapsed. This causes the activation of the OPERATE output, since the
operate timer already has elapsed.

630 series 1301

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

Timer input

START

OPERATE

FR_TIMER

Operate delay time

Operate timer

GUID-5623D465-4D4A-4644-97A1-226A3BC05C01 V1 EN

Figure 645: Operating effect of the FR_TIMER input

If the FR_TIMER input is activated when the operate timer is running, as described in
Figure 645, the timer is frozen during the timer FR_TIMER remains active. If the
timer input is not active longer than specified by the Reset delay time setting, the
operate timer is reset in the way described in Figure 643, regardless of the FR_TIMER
input.

If the BLOCK input is activated when the operate timer is running, as described in
Figure 646, the operate timer and the reset timer reset. It also resets the START and
OPERATE outputs.

1302 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

Timer input

START

OPERATE

BLOCK

Operate timer
Operate delay time

GUID-9AAA5E03-AE6E-4A61-9E95-8B06E219E4CA V1 EN

Figure 646: Operating effect of the BLOCK input

BLK_ST and BLK_OPR can be used to individually block the START and OPERATE
signal respectively.

630 series 1303

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

Timer input

START

OPERATE

BLK_ST

BLK_OPR

Operate timer Operate delay time

GUID-72B048DD-B3A4-4A76-AE4E-28510FF88A89 V1 EN

Figure 647: Operating effect of the BLK_ST and BLK_OPR input

Activation of BLK_ST or BLK_OPR does not reset the timer.

11.2 Current based inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)

characteristics

11.2.1 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection

In inverse-time modes, the operation time depends on the momentary value of the
current: the higher the current, the faster the operation time. The operation time
calculation or integration starts immediately when the current exceeds the set Start
value and the START output is activated.

The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of the
integrator calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the inverse-

1304 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values
used. The curve scaling is determined with the Time multiplier setting.

The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time for the IDMT
mode, that is, it is possible to limit the IDMT based operate time for not becoming too
short.

GUID-B1A82AE1-A1DE-457E-B229-F0437336F3F6 V1 EN

Figure 648: Operate time curves based on IDMT characteristic with the value of
the Minimum operate time setting = 0.5 second

630 series 1305

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

GUID-B1F693FA-DC13-4DFC-81F3-A47FF082492B V1 EN

Figure 649: Operate time curves based on IDMT characteristic with the value of
the Minimum operate time setting = 1 second

11.2.1.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics

For inverse-time operation, both IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time

characteristics are supported.

The operate times for the ANSI and IEC IDMT curves are defined with the
coefficients A, B and C.

The values of the coefficients can be calculated according to the formula:

1306 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

 
 
t[ s ] =  A
+ B⋅k
 c 
  I 
− 1 
 I > 
  
A060821 V2 EN (Equation 190)

t[s] Operate time in seconds

I measured current
I> set Start value
k set Time multiplier

Table 1186: Curve parameters for ANSI and IEC IDMT curves
Curve name A B C
(1) ANSI Extremely 28.2 0.1217 2.0
Inverse
(2) ANSI Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0
(3) ANSI Normal 0.0086 0.0185 0.02
Inverse
(4) ANSI Moderately 0.0515 0.1140 0.02
Inverse
(6) Long Time 64.07 0.250 2.0
Extremely Inverse
(7) Long Time Very 28.55 0.712 2.0
Inverse
(8) Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.185 0.02
(9) IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.0 0.02
(10) IEC Very Inverse 13.5 0.0 1.0
(11) IEC Inverse 0.14 0.0 0.02
(12) IEC Extremely 80.0 0.0 2.0
Inverse
(13) IEC Short Time 0.05 0.0 0.04
Inverse
(14) IEC Long Time 120 0.0 1.0
Inverse

The maximum guaranteed measured current is 50 x In for the current

protection. When the set Start value exceeds 1.00 x In, the turn point
where the theoretical IDMT characteristics are leveling out to the
definite time can be calculated with the formula:
50 × In
Turn po int =
Start value
GUID-F9F8D867-11DE-4180-A0CD-ED9FA7E7ABC6 V1 EN (Equation 191)

630 series 1307

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070750 V2 EN

Figure 650: ANSI extremely inverse-time characteristics

1308 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070751 V2 EN

Figure 651: ANSI very inverse-time characteristics

630 series 1309

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070752 V2 EN

Figure 652: ANSI normal inverse-time characteristics

1310 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070753 V2 EN

Figure 653: ANSI moderately inverse-time characteristics

630 series 1311

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070817 V2 EN

Figure 654: ANSI long-time extremely inverse-time characteristics

1312 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070818 V2 EN

Figure 655: ANSI long-time very inverse-time characteristics

630 series 1313

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070819 V2 EN

Figure 656: ANSI long-time inverse-time characteristics

1314 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070820 V2 EN

Figure 657: IEC normal inverse-time characteristics

630 series 1315

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070821 V2 EN

Figure 658: IEC very inverse-time characteristics

1316 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070822 V2 EN

Figure 659: IEC inverse-time characteristics

630 series 1317

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070823 V2 EN

Figure 660: IEC extremely inverse-time characteristics

1318 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070824 V2 EN

Figure 661: IEC short-time inverse-time characteristics

630 series 1319

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070825 V2 EN

Figure 662: IEC long-time inverse-time characteristics

1320 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

11.2.1.2 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics

The user can define curves by entering parameters into the following standard
formula:

 
 
A
t [s ] =  + B ⋅k
  I c 
  −E 
I > 
A060641 V3 EN (Equation 192)

t[s] Operate time (in seconds)

A set Curve parameter A
B set Curve parameter B
C set Curve parameter C
E set Curve parameter E
I Measured current
I> set Start value
k set Time multiplier

11.2.1.3 RI and RD-type inverse-time characteristics

The RI-type simulates the behavior of electromechanical relays. The RD-type is an

earth-fault specific characteristic.

The RI-type is calculated using the formula

 
 k 
t[ s ] =  
 0.339 − 0.236 × I > 
 I 
A060642 V2 EN (Equation 193)

The RD-type is calculated using the formula

 I 
t[ s ] = 5.8 − 1.35 × In  
k×I >
A060643 V2 EN (Equation 194)

630 series 1321

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

t[s] Operate time (in seconds)

k set Time multiplier
I Measured current
I> set Start value

1322 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070826 V2 EN

Figure 663: RI-type inverse-time characteristics

630 series 1323

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070827 V2 EN

Figure 664: RD-type inverse-time characteristics

1324 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

11.2.2 Reset in inverse-time modes

The user can select the reset characteristics by using the Type of reset curve setting.
Table 1187: Values for reset mode
Setting name Possible values
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

Immediate reset
If the Type of reset curve setting in a drop-off case is selected as "Immediate", the
inverse timer resets immediately.

Definite time reset

The definite type of reset in the inverse-time mode can be achieved by setting the Type
of reset curve parameter to “Def time reset”. As a result, the operate inverse-time
counter is frozen for the time determined with the Reset delay time setting after the
current drops below the set Start value, including hysteresis.The integral sum of the
inverse-time counter is reset, if another start does not occur during the reset delay.

If the Type of reset curve setting is selected as “Def time reset”, the
current level has no influence on the reset characteristic.

Inverse reset

Inverse reset curves are available only for ANSI and user-
programmable curves. If you use other curve types, immediate reset
occurs.

Standard delayed inverse reset

The reset characteristic required in ANSI (IEEE) inverse-time modes is provided by

setting the Type of reset curve parameter to “Inverse reset”. In this mode, the time
delay for reset is given with the following formula using the coefficient D, which has
its values defined in the table below.

 
 
t[ s ] =  D ⋅k
 2 
  I 
− 1 
 I > 
  
A060817 V3 EN (Equation 195)

630 series 1325

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

t[s] Reset time (in seconds)

k set Time multiplier
I Measured current
I> set Start value

Table 1188: Coefficients for ANSI delayed inverse reset curves

Curve name D
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse 29.1
(2) ANSI Very Inverse 21.6
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse 0.46
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse 4.85
(6) Long Time Extremely Inverse 30
(7) Long Time Very Inverse 13.46
(8) Long Time Inverse 4.6

1326 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070828 V1 EN

Figure 665: ANSI extremely inverse reset time characteristics

630 series 1327

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070829 V1 EN

Figure 666: ANSI very inverse reset time characteristics

1328 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070830 V1 EN

Figure 667: ANSI normal inverse reset time characteristics

630 series 1329

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070831 V1 EN

Figure 668: ANSI moderately inverse reset time characteristics

1330 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070832 V1 EN

Figure 669: ANSI long-time extremely inverse reset time characteristics

630 series 1331

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

A070833 V1 EN

Figure 670: ANSI long-time very inverse reset time characteristics

1332 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

A070834 V1 EN

Figure 671: ANSI long-time inverse reset time characteristics

The delayed inverse-time reset is not available for IEC-type inverse

time curves.

User-programmable delayed inverse reset

630 series 1333

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

The user can define the delayed inverse reset time characteristics with the following
formula using the set Curve parameter D.

 
 
t[ s ] =  D ⋅k
 2 
  I  − 1 
 I> 
  
A060817 V3 EN (Equation 196)

t[s] Reset time (in seconds)

k set Time multiplier
D set Curve parameter D
I Measured current
I> set Start value

11.2.3 Inverse-timer freezing

When the FR_TIMER input is active, the internal value of the time counter is frozen
at the value of the moment just before the freezing. Freezing of the counter value is
chosen when the user does not wish the counter value to count upwards or to be reset.
This may be the case, for example, when the inverse-time function of a protection
relay needs to be blocked to enable the definite-time operation of another protection
relay for selectivity reasons, especially if different relaying techniques (old and
modern relays) are applied.

The activation of the BLOCK input also lengthens the minimum delay
value of the timer.

Activating the BLOCK input alone does not affect the operation of the START output.
It still becomes active when the current exceeds the set Start value, and inactive when
the current falls below the set Start value and the set Reset delay time has expired.

11.3 Voltage based inverse definite minimum time

characteristics

11.3.1 IDMT curves for overvoltage protection

In inverse-time modes, the operate time depends on the momentary value of the
voltage, the higher the voltage, the faster the operate time. The operate time

1334 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

calculation or integration starts immediately when the voltage exceeds the set value of
the Start value setting and the START output is activated.

The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of the
integrator calculating the overvoltage situation exceeds the value set by the inverse
time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values
used. The user determines the curve scaling with the Time multiplier setting.

The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time for the IDMT
mode, that is, it is possible to limit the IDMT based operate time for not becoming too
short. For example:

630 series 1335

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

GUID-BCFE3F56-BFA8-4BCC-8215-30C089C80EAD V1 EN

Figure 672: Operate time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum
operate time set to 0.5 second

1336 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

GUID-90BAEB05-E8FB-4F8A-8F07-E110DD63FCCF V1 EN

Figure 673: Operate time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum
operate time set to 1 second

11.3.1.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage protection

The operate times for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves are defined with the
coefficients A, B, C, D and E.

The inverse operate time can be calculated with the formula:

630 series 1337

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
 U −U > 
B× −C
 U > 
GUID-6E9DC0FE-7457-4317-9480-8CCC6D63AB35 V2 EN (Equation 197)

t [s] operate time in seconds

U measured voltage
U> the set value of Start value
k the set value of Time multiplier

Table 1189: Curve coefficients for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves
Curve name A B C D E
(17) Inverse Curve A 1 1 0 0 1
(18) Inverse Curve B 480 32 0.5 0.035 2
(19) Inverse Curve C 480 32 0.5 0.035 3

1338 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN

Figure 674: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

630 series 1339

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN

Figure 675: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

1340 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN

Figure 676: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

11.3.1.2 User programmable inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage

protection

The user can define the curves by entering the parameters using the standard formula:

630 series 1341

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
 U −U > 
B× −C
 U > 
GUID-6E9DC0FE-7457-4317-9480-8CCC6D63AB35 V2 EN (Equation 198)

t[s] operate time in seconds

A the set value of Curve parameter A
B the set value of Curve parameter B
C the set value of Curve parameter C
D the set value of Curve parameter D
E the set value of Curve parameter E
U measured voltage
U> the set value of Start value
k the set value of Time multiplier

11.3.1.3 IDMT curve saturation of overvoltage protection

For the overvoltage IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the operate time does
not start until the voltage exceeds the value of Start value. To cope with discontinuity
characteristics of the curve, a specific parameter for saturating the equation to a fixed
value is created. The Curve Sat Relative setting is the parameter and it is given in
percents compared to Start value. For example, due to the curve equation B and C, the
characteristics equation output is saturated in such a way that when the input voltages
are in the range of Start value to Curve Sat Relative in percent over Start value, the
equation uses Start value * (1.0 + Curve Sat Relative / 100 ) for the measured voltage.
Although, the curve A has no discontinuities when the ratio U/U> exceeds the unity,
Curve Sat Relative is also set for it. The Curve Sat Relative setting for curves A, B and
C is 2.0 percent. However, it should be noted that the user must carefully calculate the
curve characteristics concerning the discontinuities in the curve when the
programmable curve equation is used. Thus, the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives
another degree of freedom to move the inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it
effectively sets the maximum operate time for the IDMT curve because for the voltage
ratio values affecting by this setting, the operation time is fixed, that is, the definite
time, depending on the parameters but no longer the voltage.

11.3.2 IDMT curves for undervoltage protection

In the inverse-time modes, the operate time depends on the momentary value of the
voltage, the lower the voltage, the faster the operate time. The operate time calculation
or integration starts immediately when the voltage goes below the set value of the Start
value setting and the START output is activated.

The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of the
integrator calculating the undervoltage situation exceeds the value set by the inverse-

1342 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values
used. The user determines the curve scaling with the Time multiplier setting.

The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time possible for the
IDMT mode. For setting a value for this parameter, the user should carefully study the
particular IDMT curve.

11.3.2.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage protection

The operate times for the standard undervoltage IDMT curves are defined with the
coefficients A, B, C, D and E.

The inverse operate time can be calculated with the formula:

k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
 U < −U 
B× −C
 U< 
GUID-4A433D56-D7FB-412E-B1AB-7FD43051EE79 V2 EN (Equation 199)

t [s] operate time in seconds

U measured voltage
U< the set value of the Start value setting
k the set value of the Time multiplier setting

Table 1190: Curve coefficients for standard undervoltage IDMT curves

Curve name A B C D E
(21) Inverse 1 1 0 0 1
Curve A
(22) Inverse 480 32 0.5 0.055 2
Curve B

630 series 1343

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN

Figure 677: : Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

1344 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN

Figure 678: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

11.3.2.2 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage

protection

The user can define curves by entering parameters into the standard formula:

630 series 1345

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
 U < −U 
B× −C
 U < 
GUID-4A433D56-D7FB-412E-B1AB-7FD43051EE79 V2 EN (Equation 200)

t[s] operate time in seconds

A the set value of Curve parameter A
B the set value of Curve parameter B
C the set value of Curve parameter C
D the set value of Curve parameter D
E the set value of Curve parameter E
U measured voltage
U< the set value of Start value
k the set value of Time multiplier

11.3.2.3 IDMT curve saturation of undervoltage protection

For the undervoltage IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the operate time
does not start until the voltage falls below the value of Start value. To cope with
discontinuity characteristics of the curve, a specific parameter for saturating the
equation to a fixed value is created. The Curve Sat Relative setting is the parameter and
it is given in percents compared with Start value. For example, due to the curve
equation B, the characteristics equation output is saturated in such a way that when
input voltages are in the range from Start value to Curve Sat Relative in percents under
Start value, the equation uses Start value * (1.0 - Curve Sat Relative / 100 ) for the
measured voltage. Although, the curve A has no discontinuities when the ratio U/U>
exceeds the unity, Curve Sat Relative is set for it as well. The Curve Sat Relative
setting for curves A, B and C is 2.0 percent. However, it should be noted that the user
must carefully calculate the curve characteristics concerning also discontinuities in
the curve when the programmable curve equation is used. Thus, the Curve Sat Relative
parameter gives another degree of freedom to move the inverse curve on the voltage
ratio axis and it effectively sets the maximum operate time for the IDMT curve
because for the voltage ratio values affecting by this setting, the operation time is
fixed, that is, the definite time, depending on the parameters but no longer the voltage.

11.4 Measurement modes

In many current or voltage dependent function blocks, there are various alternative
measuring principles.

1346 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

• RMS
• DFT which is a numerically calculated fundamental component of the signal
• Peak-to-peak
• Peak-to-peak with peak backup

Consequently, the measurement mode can be selected according to the application.

In extreme cases, for example with high overcurrent or harmonic content, the
measurement modes function in a slightly different way. The operation accuracy is
defined with the frequency range of f/fn=0.95...1.05. In peak-to-peak and RMS
measurement modes, the harmonics of the phase currents are not suppressed, whereas
in the fundamental frequency measurement the suppression of harmonics is at least
-50 dB at the frequency range of f= n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...

RMS
The RMS measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting
using the value "RMS". RMS consists of both AC and DC components. The AC
component is the effective mean value of the positive and negative peak values. RMS
is used in applications where the effect of the DC component must be taken into
account.

RMS is calculated according to the formula:

1 n 2
I RMS = ∑ Ii
n i =1
A070883 V2 EN (Equation 201)

n The number of samples in a calculation cycle

Ii The current sample value

DFT
The DFT measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting using
the value "DFT". In the DFT mode, the fundamental frequency component of the
measured signal is numerically calculated from the samples. In some applications, for
example, it can be difficult to accomplish sufficiently sensitive settings and accurate
operation of the low stage, which may be due to a considerable amount of harmonics
on the primary side currents. In such a case, the operation can be based solely on the
fundamental frequency component of the current. In addition, the DFT mode has
slightly higher CT requirements than the peak-to-peak mode, if used with high and
instantaneous stages.

Peak-to-peak
The peak-to-peak measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode
setting using the value "Peak-to-Peak". It is the fastest measurement mode, in which
the measurement quantity is made by calculating the average from the positive and

630 series 1347

Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRS756508 F
General function block features

negative peak values. The DC component is not included. The retardation time is
short. The damping of the harmonics is quite low and practically determined by the
characteristics of the anti-aliasing filter of the protection relay inputs. Consequently,
this mode is usually used in conjunction with high and instantaneous stages, where the
suppression of harmonics is not so important. In addition, the peak-to-peak mode
allows considerable CT saturation without impairing the performance of the
operation.

Peak-to-peak with peak backup

The peak-to-peak with peak backup measurement principle is selected with the
Measurement mode setting using the value "P-to-P+backup". It is similar to the peak-
to-peak mode, with the exception that it has been enhanced with the peak backup. In
the peak-to-peak with peak backup mode, the function starts with two conditions: the
peak-to-peak value is above the set start current or the peak value is above two times
the set Start value. The peak backup is enabled only when the function is used in the
DT mode in high and instantaneous stages for faster operation.

11.5 Generator startup and shutdown protection

For a protection function to operate over a wide range of frequency, it is necessary that
the configuration of the IED is such that the preprocessor function (SMAI) processes
the analog signal using frequency adaptive approach. The measurement mode, when
selectable, has to be set to DFT.
Table 1191: Protection functions that can be used during the generator startup or shutdown phase
Function/Freq. 10-20 Hz 20-40 Hz 40-70 Hz
MPDIF Operational Operational Operational

DAPTOF Not operational Operational 1) Operational 1)

DEFLPDEF Operational Operational Operational
DEFHPDEF Operational Operational Operational
EFLPTOC Operational Operational Operational
EFHPTOC Operational Operational Operational

EFIPTOC Not operational 2) Not operational 2) Operational

HREFPDIF Not operational 2) Not operational 2) Operational

MREFPTOC Operational Operational Operational

OEPVPH Not operational 2) Not operational 2) Operational

PHLPTOC Operational Operational Operational
PHHPTOC Operational Operational Operational

PHIPTOC Not operational 2) Not operational 2) Operational

Table continues on next page

1348 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 11
General function block features

Function/Freq. 10-20 Hz 20-40 Hz 40-70 Hz

PHPTOV Operational 3) Operational Operational

ROVPTOV Operational 4) Operational Operational

TR2PTDF Operational Operational Operational

1) Start value setting range 35 - 64 Hz

2) Function has to be blocked
3) Start value setting must be higher than 1.0 x Un
4) Measured Uo must be used

630 series 1349

Technical Manual
1350
1MRS756508 F Section 12
Requirements for measurement transformers

Section 12 Requirements for measurement

transformers

12.1 Current transformers

12.1.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent protection

For reliable and correct operation of the overcurrent protection, the CT has to be
chosen carefully. The distortion of the secondary current of a saturated CT may
endanger the operation, selectivity, and co-ordination of protection. However, when
the CT is correctly selected, a fast and reliable short circuit protection can be enabled.

The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on the
network fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual CT
burden. The protection settings of the protection relay should be defined in accordance
with the CT performance as well as other factors.

12.1.1.1 Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor

The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primary
current to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformer of
type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. For protective
current transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highest permissible
percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current prescribed for
the accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaning protection).
Table 1192: Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current transformers
Accuracy class Current error at Phase displacement at rated primary Composite error at
rated primary current rated accuracy limit
current (%) minutes centiradians primary current (%)
5P ±1 ±60 ±1.8 5
10P ±3 - - 10

The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrent
protection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also if there
are accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering, power
metering, and so on) of the protection relay.

The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault current magnitude
at which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, the secondary current

630 series 1351

Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRS756508 F
Requirements for measurement transformers

of the CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on the performance of the
protection relay.

In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracy limit
factor (Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and the actual CT
burden.

The actual accuracy limit factor is calculated using the formula:

Sin + Sn
Fa ≈ Fn ×
Sin + S
A071141 V1 EN

Fn the accuracy limit factor with the nominal external burden Sn

Sin the internal secondary burden of the CT

S the actual external burden

12.1.1.2 Non-directional overcurrent protection

The current transformer selection

Non-directional overcurrent protection does not set high requirements on the accuracy
class or on the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) of the CTs. It is, however,
recommended to select a CT with Fa of at least 20.

The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal and
dynamic strength of the current measuring input of the protection relay is not
exceeded. This is always fulfilled when

I1n > Ikmax / 100,

Ikmax is the highest fault current.

The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of the
protection relay. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominal
primary current can be used than given by the formula.

Recommended start current settings

If Ikmin is the lowest primary current at which the highest set overcurrent stage is to
operate, the start current should be set using the formula:

Current start value < 0.7 × (Ikmin / I1n)

I1n is the nominal primary current of the CT.

The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection relay inaccuracy, current transformer
errors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.

1352 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 12
Requirements for measurement transformers

The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of the high
set stage overcurrent protection is defined. The operate time delay caused by the CT
saturation is typically small enough when the overcurrent setting is noticeably lower
than Fa.

When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CT does
not need to be taken into account and the start current setting is simply according to the
formula.

Delay in operation caused by saturation of current transformers

The saturation of CT may cause a delayed protection relay operation. To ensure the
time selectivity, the delay must be taken into account when setting the operate times
of successive protection relays.

With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay that is
as long as the time constant of the DC component of the fault current, when the current
is only slightly higher than the starting current. This depends on the accuracy limit
factor of the CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, and on the operate time
setting.

With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered as being
as long as the time constant of the DC component.

With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used, the AC
component of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20 times the
starting current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further prolonged.
Therefore, the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula:

Fa > 20 × Current start value / I1n

The Current start value is the primary start current setting of the protection relay.

12.1.1.3 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection

The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection is
implemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.

630 series 1353

Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRS756508 F
Requirements for measurement transformers

A071142 V1 EN

Figure 679: Example of three-stage overcurrent protection

The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase short
circuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT is calculated to
be 59.

The start current setting for low-set stage (3I>) is selected to be about twice the
nominal current of the cable. The operate time is selected so that it is selective with the
next protection relay (not visible in Figure 679). The settings for the high-set stage and
instantaneous stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with the downstream
protection. In addition, the start current settings have to be defined so that the
protection relay operates with the minimum fault current and it does not operate with
the maximum load current. The settings for all three stages are as in Figure 679.

For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage (I>>>) in
this example is 3 500 A (5.83 × I2n). I2n is the 1.2 multiple with nominal primary
current of the CT. For the CT characteristics point of view, the criteria given by the
current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the protection relay setting
is considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated burden could have been
selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.

1354 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

Section 13 IED physical connections

13.1 Protective earth connections

The IED shall be earthed with a 16.0 mm2 flat copper cable.

The earth lead should be as short as possible, distance to nearest

eartning point shall be less than 1500 mm.

GUID-B1C6B787-D2D4-450C-A18B-18131ECBC88A V1 EN

Figure 680: Protective earth pin is located to the left of connector X101 on the 4U
half 19” case

630 series 1355

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

GUID-C75F6FD4-485D-464D-B7B0-55FD1AA608E9 V1 EN

Figure 681: Protective earth pin is located below connector X102 on the 6U half
19” case

1356 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

13.2 Inputs

13.2.1 Measuring inputs

Each terminal for CTs/VTs is dimensioned for one 0.5...6.0 mm2 wire or for two wires
of maximum 2.5 mm2.
Table 1193: REF630 modules
Terminal AIMA01A AIMA03A AIMA02A
1KHL178012R0008 1KHL178012R0009 1KHL178012R0010
X101-1, 2 CT CT CT
X101-3, 4 CT CT CT
X101-5, 6 CT CT CT
X101-7, 8 CT None CT
X101-9, 10 None CTS1) CTS1)

X102-1, 2 VT VT None
X102-3, 4 VT VT VT
X102-5, 6 VT VT VT
X102-7, 8 VT VT VT
X102-9, 10 VT VT VT

1) Current Transducer for 0.1 A / 0.5 A

Table 1194: REG630 and REM630 modules

Terminal AIMA02A AIMA04A AIMA05A
1KHL178012R0010 1KHL178012R0005 1KHL178012R0013
X101-1, 2 CT CT CT
X101-3, 4 CT CT CT
X101-5, 6 CT CT CT
X101-7, 8 CT CT CT
X101-9, 10 CTS1) CT CT

X102-1, 2 None CT CT
X102-3, 4 VT CT CT
X102-5, 6 VT VT CT
X102-7, 8 VT VT VT
X102-9, 10 VT VT VT

1) Current Transducer for 0.1 A / 0.5 A

630 series 1357

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

Table 1195: RET630 modules

Terminal AIMA04A AIMA06A AIMA05A
1KHL178012R0005 1KHL178012R0012 1KHL178012R0013
X101-1, 2 CT CT CT
X101-3, 4 CT CT CT
X101-5, 6 CT CT CT
X101-7, 8 CT CT CT
X101-9, 10 CT CT CT
X102-1, 2 CT CT CT
X102-3, 4 CT CT CT
X102-5, 6 VT CTS1) CT

X102-7, 8 VT VT VT
X102-9, 10 VT VT VT

1) Current Transducer for 0.1 A / 0.5 A

13.2.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input

The auxiliary voltage of the IED is connected to terminals X430-1 and X430-2/3 or
X410-1 and X410-2/3. The terminals used depend on the power supply and the IED
case size.

The permitted auxiliary voltage range of the IED is marked on the device label on the
side of the IED.
Table 1196: Auxiliary voltage supply of 110...250 V DC or 100...240 V AC
Case Terminal Description
4U half 19” X430-1 - Input
X430-3 + Input
6U half 19” X410-1 - Input
X410-3 + Input

Table 1197: Auxiliary voltage supply of 48-125 V DC

Case Terminal Description
4U half 19” X430-1 - Input
X430-2 + Input
6U half 19” X410-1 - Input
X410-2 + Input

1358 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

13.2.3 Binary inputs

The binary inputs can be used, for example, for status indications, to generate a
blocking signal, to unlatch output contacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for
remote control of IED settings.

Each signal connector terminal is dimensioned for one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or for two
0.5...1.0 mm2 wires.

Use only DC power for the binary inputs. Use of AC power, including
full- or half-wave rectified AC power, may cause damage to the binary
input modules.

Table 1198: Binary inputs X304, 4U half 19” and 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X304-1 Common - for inputs 1-4
X304-2 Binary input 1 + COM_101 BI1
X304-3 Binary input 2 + COM_101 BI2
X304-4 Binary input 3 + COM_101 BI3
X304-5 Binary input 4 + COM_101 BI4
X304-6 Common - for inputs 5-8
X304-7 Binary input 5 + COM_101 BI5
X304-8 Binary input 6 + COM_101 BI6
X304-9 Binary input 7 + COM_101 BI7
X304-10 Binary input 8 + COM_101 BI8
X304-11 Common - for inputs 9-11
X304-12 Binary input 9 + COM_101 BI9
X304-13 Binary input 10 + COM_101 BI10
X304-14 Binary input 11 + COM_101 BI11
X304-15 Common - for inputs 12-14
X304-16 Binary input 12 + COM_101 BI12
X304-17 Binary input 13 + COM_101 BI13
X304-18 Binary input 14 + COM_101 BI14

630 series 1359

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

Table 1199: Binary inputs X319, 4U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X319-1 - for input 1 BIO_3 BI1
X319-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_3 BI1
X319-3 -
X319-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X319-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_3 BI2
X319-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_3 BI3
X319-7 -
X319-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X319-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_3 BI4
X319-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_3 BI5
X319-11 -
X319-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X319-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_3 BI6
X319-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_3 BI7
X319-15 -
X319-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X319-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_3 BI8
X319-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_3 BI9

Table 1200: Binary inputs X324, 4U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X324-1 - for input 1 BIO_4 BI1
X324-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_4 BI1
X324-3 -
X324-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X324-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_4 BI2
X324-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_4 BI3
X324-7 -
X324-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X324-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_4 BI4
X324-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_4 BI5
X324-11 -
X324-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X324-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_4 BI6
X324-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_4 BI7
Table continues on next page

1360 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

Terminal Description ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X324-15 -
X324-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X324-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_4 BI8
X324-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_4 BI9

Table 1201: Binary inputs X324, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X324-1 - for input 1 BIO_3 BI1
X324-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_3 BI1
X324-3 -
X324-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X324-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_3 BI2
X324-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_3 BI3
X324-7 -
X324-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X324-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_3 BI4
X324-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_3 BI5
X324-11 -
X324-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X324-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_3 BI6
X324-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_3 BI7
X324-15 -
X324-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X324-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_3 BI8
X324-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_3 BI9

Table 1202: Binary inputs X329, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-1 - for input 1 BIO_4 BI1
X329-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_4 BI1
X329-3 -
X329-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X329-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_4 BI2
X329-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_4 BI3
X329-7 -
Table continues on next page

630 series 1361

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

Terminal Description ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X329-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_4 BI4
X329-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_4 BI5
X329-11 -
X329-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X329-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_4 BI6
X329-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_4 BI7
X329-15 -
X329-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X329-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_4 BI8
X329-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_4 BI9

Table 1203: Binary inputs X334, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X334-1 - for input 1 BIO_5 BI1
X334-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_5 BI1
X334-3 -
X334-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X334-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_5 BI2
X334-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_5 BI3
X334-7 -
X334-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X334-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_5 BI4
X334-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_5 BI5
X334-11 -
X334-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X334-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_5 BI6
X334-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_5 BI7
X334-15 -
X334-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X334-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_5 BI8
X334-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_5 BI9

1362 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

Table 1204: Binary inputs X339, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X339-1 - for input 1 BIO_6 BI1
X339-2 Binary input 1 + BIO_6 BI1
X339-3 -
X339-4 Common - for inputs 2-3
X339-5 Binary input 2 + BIO_6 BI2
X339-6 Binary input 3 + BIO_6 BI3
X339-7 -
X339-8 Common - for inputs 4-5
X339-9 Binary input 4 + BIO_6 BI4
X339-10 Binary input 5 + BIO_6 BI5
X339-11 -
X339-12 Common - for inputs 6-7
X339-13 Binary input 6 + BIO_6 BI6
X339-14 Binary input 7 + BIO_6 BI7
X339-15 -
X339-16 Common - for inputs 8-9
X339-17 Binary input 8 + BIO_6 BI8
X339-18 Binary input 9 + BIO_6 BI9

13.2.4 RTD inputs

Table 1205: Module inputs, 4U half 19”

Terminal 600RTD01 ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X316 – 1,2,3 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI1
input
X316 - 4 GND
X316 – 5,6,7 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI2
input
X316 – 8,9,10 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI3
input
X316 – 11 GND
X316 – 12,13,14 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI4
input
X316 – 15,16,17 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI5
input
X316 – 18 GND

630 series 1363

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

Table 1206: Module inputs, 4U half 19”

Terminal 600RTD01 ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X319 – 1,2,3 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI1
input
X319 – 4,5,6 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI2
input
X319 – 7 GND
X319 – 8,9,10 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI3
input

Table 1207: Module inputs, 6U half 19”

Terminal 600RTD01 ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X321 – 1,2,3 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI1
input
X321 - 4 GND
X321 – 5,6,7 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI2
input
X321 – 8,9,10 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI3
input
X321 – 11 GND
X321 – 12,13,14 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI4
input
X321 – 15,16,17 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI5
input
X321 – 18 GND

Table 1208: Module inputs, 6U half 19”

Terminal 600RTD01 ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X324 – 1,2,3 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI1
input
X324 – 4,5,6 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI2
input
X324 – 7 GND
X324 – 8,9,10 Sensor/ R/ V/ mA RTD_3 AI3
input

1364 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

13.3 Outputs

13.3.1 Outputs for tripping and controlling

Output contacts PO1, PO2 and PO3 are power output contacts used, for example, for
controlling circuit breakers.

Each signal connector terminal is dimensioned for one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or for two
0.5...1.0 mm2 wires.

Check the DC polarity of the TCS outputs.

Table 1209: Output contacts X307, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
Power output 1, normally open
(TCS)
X307-1 - PSM_102 BO1_PO_TCS
X307-2 +
Power output 2, normally open
(TCS)
X307-3 - PSM_102 BO2_PO_TCS
X307-4 +
Power output 3, normally open
(TCS)
X307-5 - PSM_102 BO3_PO_TCS
X307-6 +
X307-7 Power output 4, normally open PSM_102 BO4_PO
X307-8
X307-9 Power output 5, normally open PSM_102 BO5_PO
X307-10
X307-11 Power output 6, normally open PSM_102 BO6_PO
X307-12

Table 1210: Output contacts X316, 4U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X316-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_3 BO1_PO
X316-2
X316-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_3 BO2_PO
Table continues on next page

630 series 1365

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

Terminal Description ACT info

Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X316-4
X316-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_3 BO3_PO
X316-6

Table 1211: Output contacts X321, 4U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X321-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_4 BO1_PO
X321-2
X321-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_4 BO2_PO
X321-4
X321-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_4 BO3_PO
X321-6

Table 1212: Output contacts X321, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X321-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_3 BO1_PO
X321-2
X321-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_3 BO2_PO
X321-4
X321-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_3 BO3_PO
X321-6

Table 1213: Output contacts X326, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_4 BO1_PO
X326-2
X326-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_4 BO2_PO
X326-4
X326-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_4 BO3_PO
X326-6

1366 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

Table 1214: Output contacts X327, 4U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
Power output 1, normally open (TCS)
X327-1 - PSM_102 BO1_PO_TCS
X327-2 +
Power output 2, normally open (TCS)
X327-3 - PSM_102 BO2_PO_TCS
X327-4 +
Power output 3, normally open (TCS)
X327-5 – PSM_102 BO3_PO_TCS
X327-6 +
X327-7 Power output 4, normally open PSM_102 BO4_PO
X327-8
X327-9 Power output 5, normally open PSM_102 BO5_PO
X327-10
X327-11 Power output 6, normally open PSM_102 BO6_PO
X327-12

Table 1215: Output contacts X331, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X331-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_5 BO1_PO
X331-2
X331-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_5 BO2_PO
X331-4
X331-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_5 BO3_PO
X331-6

Table 1216: Output contacts X336, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X336-1 Power output 1, normally open BIO_6 BO1_PO
X336-2
X336-3 Power output 2, normally open BIO_6 BO2_PO
X336-4
X336-5 Power output 3, normally open BIO_6 BO3_PO
X336-6

630 series 1367

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

13.3.2 Outputs for signalling

Signal output contacts are used for signalling on starting and tripping of the IED. If the
IED is ordered with pre-configuration, the necessary start and alarm signals from used
functions are routed to signalling outputs. See the application manual for more details.

Each signal connector terminal is dimensioned for one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or for two
0.5...1.0 mm2 wires.
Table 1217: Output contacts X307, 6U half 19”
Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X307-13 Signal output 1, normally open PSM_102 BO7_SO
X307-14
X307-15 Signal output 2, normally open PSM_102 BO8_SO
X307-16
X307-17 Signal output 3, normally open PSM_102 BO9_SO
X307-18

Table 1218: Output contacts X316, 4U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware Module Hardware channel
instance
X316-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_3 BO4_SO
X316-8 Signal output 1
X316-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_3 BO5_SO
X316-10 Signal output 2
X316-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_3 BO6_SO
X316-12 Signal output 3
X316-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_3 BO7_SO
X316-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_3 BO8_SO
X316-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X316-16 Signal output 6, normally closed
X316-17 Signal output 6, normally open BIO_3 BO9_SO
X316-18 Signal output 6, common

1368 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

Table 1219: Output contacts X321, 4U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X321-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_4 BO4_SO
X321-8 Signal output 1
X321-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_4 BO5_SO
X321-10 Signal output 2
X321-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_4 BO6_SO
X321-12 Signal output 3
X321-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_4 BO7_SO
X321-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_4 BO8_SO
X321-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X321-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_4 BO9_SO
X321-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X321-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 1220: Output contacts X321, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X321-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_3 BO4_SO
X321-8 Signal output 1
X321-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_3 BO5_SO
X321-10 Signal output 2
X321-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_3 BO6_SO
X321-12 Signal output 3
X321-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_3 BO7_SO
X321-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_3 BO8_SO
X321-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X321-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_3 BO9_SO
X321-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X321-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 1221: Output contacts X326, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_4 BO4_SO
X326-8 Signal output 1
X326-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_4 BO5_SO
X326-10 Signal output 2
Table continues on next page

630 series 1369

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

Terminal Description ACT info

Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X326-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_4 BO6_SO
X326-12 Signal output 3
X326-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_4 BO7_SO
X326-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_4 BO8_SO
X326-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X326-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_4 BO9_SO
X326-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X326-18 Signal output 6, common

Table 1222: Output contacts X327, 4U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X327-13 Signal ouput 1, normally open PSM_102 BO7_SO
X327-14
X327-15 Signal ouput 2, normally open PSM_102 BO8_SO
X327-16
X327-17 Signal ouput 3, normally open PSM_102 BO9_SO
X327-18

Table 1223: Output contacts X331, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X331-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_5 BO4_SO
X331-8 Signal output 1
X331-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_5 BO5_SO
X331-10 Signal output 2
X331-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_5 BO6_SO
X331-12 Signal output 3
X331-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_5 BO7_SO
X331-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_5 BO8_SO
X331-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X331-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_5 BO9_SO
X331-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X331-18 Signal output 6, common

1370 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

Table 1224: Output contacts X336, 6U half 19”

Terminal Description ACT info
Hardware module Hardware channel
instance
X336-7 Signal output 1, normally open BIO_6 BO4_SO
X336-8 Signal output 1
X336-9 Signal output 2, normally open BIO_6 BO5_SO
X336-10 Signal output 2
X336-11 Signal output 3, normally open BIO_6 BO6_SO
X336-12 Signal output 3
X337-13 Signal output 4, normally open BIO_6 BO7_SO
X336-14 Signal output 5, normally open BIO_6 BO8_SO
X336-15 Signal outputs 4 and 5, common
X336-16 Signal output 6, normally closed BIO_6 BO9_SO
X336-17 Signal output 6, normally open
X336-18 Signal output 6, common

13.3.3 mA outputs
Table 1225: Module outputs, 4U half 19”

Terminal 600RTD01 ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X319 – 11,12 mA output RTD_3 AO1
X319 – 13,14 mA output RTD_3 AO2
X319 – 15,16 mA output RTD_3 AO3
X319 – 17,18 mA output RTD_3 AO4

Table 1226: Module outputs, 6U half 19”

Terminal 600RTD01 ACT info

Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X324 – 11,12 mA output RTD_3 AO1
X324 – 13,14 mA output RTD_3 AO2
X324 – 15,16 mA output RTD_3 AO3
X324 – 17,18 mA output RTD_3 AO4

13.3.4 IRF
The IRF contact functions as a change-over output contact for the self-supervision
system of the IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and one
of the two contacts is closed. When a fault is detected by the self-supervision system

630 series 1371

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the closed contact drops off and the other
contact closes.

Each signal connector terminal is dimensioned for one 0.5...2.5 mm2 wire or for two
0.5...1.0 mm2 wires.
Table 1227: IRF contact X309
Case Terminal Description
6U half 19” X309-1 Closed; no IRF, and Uaux connected

X309-2 Closed; IRF, or Uaux disconnected

X309-3 IRF, common

Table 1228: IRF contact X329

Case Terminal Description
4U half 19” X329-1 Closed; no IRF, and Uaux connected

X329-2 Closed; IRF, or Uaux disconnected

X329-3 IRF, common

13.4 Communication connections

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector. The connector is intended for
configuration and setting purposes.

Rear communication via the X1/LAN1 connector uses a communication module with
the galvanic RJ-45 or optical LC Ethernet connection.

The HMI connector X0 is used for connecting an external HMI to the IED. The X0/
HMI connector must not be used for any other purpose. An external HMI can be used
only when the IED has no integrated HMI.

13.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection

The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector designed for point-to-point use.
The connector is intended for configuration and setting purposes. The interface on the
PC side has to be configured in a way that it obtains the IP address automatically.
There is a DHCP server inside IED for the front interface only.

The events and setting values and all input data such as memorized values and
disturbance records can be read via the front communication port.

Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time.

1372 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

• PCM600
• LHMI
• WHMI

The default IP address of the IED through this port is 192.168.0.254.

The front port supports TCP/IP protocol. A standard Ethernet CAT 5 crossover cable
is used with the front port.

If IED is ordered without LHMI then LAN1 port has to be used for
configuration and setting purposes. The default IP address for the
LAN1 port is 192.168.2.10. DHCP is not available from LAN1 port.

13.4.2 Ethernet connection for station communication

The default IP address of the IED through the Ethernet connection is 192.168.2.10.
The physical connector is X1/LAN1. The interface speed is 100 Mbps both for the
100BASE-FX LC alternative and for the 100BASE-TX RJ-45 alternative.

13.4.3 Optical serial rear connection

Serial communication can be used via optical connection in star topology. Connector
type is either glass (ST connector) or plastic (snap-in connector). Connection's idle
state is indicated either with light on or light off. The physical connector is X9/Rx,Tx.

13.4.4 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 1229: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
100BASE-TX Glass fibre (ST Plastic fibre (snap-
100BASE-FX LC
RJ-45 connector) in connector)
IEC 61850–8–1 ● ● - -
DNP3 ● ● - -
IEC 60870-5-103 - - ● ●
● = Supported

13.4.5 Recommended third-party industrial Ethernet switches

• RuggedCom RS900
• RuggedCom RS1600
• RuggedCom RSG2100

630 series 1373

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

13.5 Terminal diagrams

GUID-88CD16F3-27E5-4657-BDAF-46D27B4970D8 V1 EN

Figure 682: REF630 terminal diagram

1374 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

REG630 High Medium 6U: REG630 High Medium 6U:

X101 X430 X430 X410 X101 X430 X430 X410

1 -/ 1 1 1 -/ 1 1
CT U aux 2 2 CT U aux 2 2
2 +/ 2 +/
3 3 3 3
3 3
CT CT
4 X329 X309 4 X329 X309
5 1 5 1
CT IRF 2 CT IRF 2
6 3 6 3
7 7
CT CT
8 X327 X307 8 X327 X307
9 9
CT sens BO1_PO_TCS CT BO1_PO_TCS
10 10
1 1
TCS TCS
2 2
X102 BO2_PO_TCS X102 BO2_PO_TCS
1 3 1 3
TCS CT TCS
2 4 2 4

3 BO3_PO_TCS 3 BO3_PO_TCS
VT 5 CT 5
4 TCS 4 TCS
6 6
5 5
VT VT, CT
6 BO4_PO 6 BO4_PO
7 7
7 7
VT 8 VT 8
8 8
BO5_PO BO5_PO
9 9
VT 9 VT 9
10 10 10 10

X304 BO6_PO X304 BO6_PO

1 11 1 11
12 12
BI1 13 BI1 13
2 BO7_SO 2 BO7_SO
14 14
BI2 BI2
3 15 3 15
BO8_SO BO8_SO
BI3 BI3
4 16 4 16

BI4 17 BI4 17
5 BO9_SO 5 BO9_SO
6 18 6 18

BI5 BI5
7 7

BI6 BI6
8 8

BI7 BI7
9 9

BI8 BI8
10 10
11 11

BI9 BI9
12 12

BI10 BI10
13 13

BI11 BI11
14 14
15 15

BI12 BI12
16 16

BI13 BI13
17 17

BI14 BI14
18 18

X9 X9
(glass) transmitter (glass) transmitter
1) 1)
TX Fiber optic (plastic) transmitter TX Fiber optic (plastic) transmitter
RX Fiber optic (glass) receiver 1)
RX Fiber optic (glass) receiver 1)
(plastic) receiver (plastic) receiver
X4 X4
1 GNDC 1 GNDC
2 NC 2 NC
3 IRIG-B- 3 IRIG-B-
4 IRIG-B+ 4 IRIG-B+

X1 X1
LAN 1 2) LAN 1 2)

X0 X0
LAN / HMI 3) LAN / HMI 3)

1) Optional 1) Optional

2) 100 BaseTx / RJ-45 2) 100 BaseTx / RJ-45

100 BaseFx / LC 100 BaseFx / LC
3) 100 BaseTx / RJ-45 3) 100 BaseTx / RJ-45
Power over Ethernet Power over Ethernet

GUID-78CCF517-A2D8-49C3-9E61-15A6879DA9AE V1 EN

Figure 683: REG630 terminal diagram

630 series 1375

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

GUID-28C73256-8E73-434F-BA71-FE0AF16DBA64 V1 EN

Figure 684: REM630 terminal diagram

1376 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

GUID-3901C29E-BCA6-44AE-B6BC-B2FA10958F19 V1 EN

Figure 685: RET630 terminal diagram

630 series 1377

Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRS756508 F
IED physical connections

GUID-5E27DD50-FD15-4824-BDFB-DD52E29730EA V2 EN

Figure 686: 630 series BIO module option

Table 1230: BIO options

Unit BI/BO
4U X319 + X3161)
X324 + X321
6U X324 + X3211)
X329 + X326
X334 + X331
X339 + X336

1) Occupied by RTD module when ordered

1378 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 13
IED physical connections

GUID-CB7B1CF8-A0E4-42F5-998C-701641515127 V1 EN

Figure 687: 630 series RTD module option

630 series 1379

Technical Manual
1380
1MRS756508 F Section 14
Technical data

Section 14 Technical data

Table 1231: Dimensions of the IED - half 19" rack

Description Value
Width 220 mm
Height 177 mm (4U)
265.9 mm (6U)
Depth 249.5 mm
Weight box 6.2 kg (4U)
5.5 kg (6U)1)
Weight LHMI 1.0 kg (4U)

1) Without LHMI

Table 1232: Power supply

Description 600PSM03 600PSM02
Uauxnominal 100, 110, 120, 220, 240 V AC, 48, 60, 110, 125 V DC
50 and 60 Hz
110, 125, 220, 250 V DC
Uauxvariation 85...110% of Un (85...264 V AC) 80...120% of Un (38.4...150 V
DC)
80...120% of Un (88...300 V DC)

Maximum load of auxiliary 35 W

voltage supply
Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 Hz)
Maximum interruption time in the 50 ms at Uaux
auxiliary DC voltage without
resetting the protection relay
Power supply input must be For example, type S282 UC-K.
protected by an external The rated maximum load of aux voltage which is given as 35 watts.
miniature circuit breaker Depending on the voltage used, select a suitable MCB based on
the respective current. Type S282 UC-K has a rated current of 0.75
A at 400 V AC.

630 series 1381

Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRS756508 F
Technical data

Table 1233: Energizing inputs

Description Value
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Operating range Rated frequency ±5 Hz
Current inputs Rated current, In 0.1/0.5 A1) 1/5 A2)
Thermal withstand capability:
• Continuously 4A 20 A

• For 1 s 100 A 500 A

• For 10 s 25 A 100 A

Dynamic current withstand:

• Half-wave value 250 A 1250 A

Input impedance <100 mΩ <20 mΩ

Voltage inputs Rated voltage, Un 100 V AC/ 110 V AC/ 115 V AC/ 120 V AC

Voltage withstand:
• Continuous 425 V AC

• For 10 s 450 V AC

Burden at rated voltage <0.05 VA

1) Residual current
2) Phase currents or residual current

Table 1234: Binary inputs

Description Value
Operating range Maximum input voltage 300 V DC
Rated voltage 24...250 V DC
Current drain 1.6...1.8 mA
Power consumption/input <0.3 W
Threshold voltage 15...221 V DC (parametrizable in the range in steps
of 1% of the rated voltage)
Threshold voltage accuracy ±3.0%
Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 Hz)

Adjust the binary input threshold voltage correctly. It is recommended

to set the threshold voltage to 70% of the nominal auxiliary voltage.
The factory default is 16 V to ensure the binary inputs’ operation
regardless of the auxiliary voltage used (24, 48, 60, 110, 125, 220 or
250 V DC). However, the default value is not optimal for the higher
auxiliary voltages. The binary input threshold voltage should be set as
high as possible to prevent any inadvertent activation of the binary
inputs due to possible external disturbances. At the same time, the

1382 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 14
Technical data

threshold should be set so that the correct operation is not jeopardized

in case of undervoltage of the auxiliary voltage.

Table 1235: RTD inputs

Description Value
RTD Supported RTD sensor 100 Ω platinum TCR 0.00385 (DIN
inputs 43760)
250 Ω platinum TCR 0.00385
100 Ω nickel TCR 0.00618 (DIN
43760)
120 Ω nickel TCR 0.00618
10 Ω copper TCR 0.00427
Supported resistance range 0…10 kΩ
Maximum leadresistance 100 Ω platinum 25 Ω per lead
(three-wire measurement)
250 Ω platinum 25 Ω per lead
100 Ω nickel 25 Ω per lead
120 Ω nickel 25 Ω per lead
10 Ω copper 2.5 Ω per lead
Resistance 25 Ω per lead
Isolation 4 kV Inputs to all outputs
and protective
earth
RTD / resistance sensing Maximum 0.275 mA rms
current
Operation accuracy / • ±1°C Pt and Ni sensors
temperature for measuring
range -40°C...
200°C and -40°C...
70°C ambient
temperature
• ±2°C CU sensor for
measuring range
-40°C...200°C in
room temperature
• ±4°C CU sensors
-40°C...70°C
ambient
temperature
• ±5°C From
-40°C...-100ºC of
measurement
range
Operation accuracy / ±2.5 Ω 0...400 Ω range
Resistance
±1.25% 400 Ω...10KΩ
ohms range
Response time < Filter time +350 ms
Table continues on next page

630 series 1383

Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRS756508 F
Technical data

Description Value
mA inputs Supported current range -20…+20 mA
Current input impedance 100 Ω ±0.1%
Operation accuracy ±0.1% ±20 ppm per °C of full- Ambient
scale temperature
-40°C...70°C
Voltage Supported voltage range -10 V DC...+10 V DC
inputs
Operation accuracy ±0.1% ±40 ppm per °C of full- Ambient
scale temperature
-40°C...70°C

Table 1236: Signal output and IRF output

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 5A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 10 A
Make and carry 0.5 s 15 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤0.5 A/≤0.1 A/≤0.04 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at U < 48/110/220 V DC
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC

Table 1237: Power output relays without TCS function

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at U< 48/110/220 V DC
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC

Table 1238: Power output relays with TCS function

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time ≤1 A/≤0.3 A/≤0.1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at U < 48/110/220 V DC
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V DC
Table continues on next page

1384 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 14
Technical data

Description Value
Control voltage range 20...250 V DC
Current drain through the supervision circuit ~1.0 mA
Minimum voltage over the TCS contact 20 V DC

Table 1239: mA outputs

Description Value
mA outputs Output range -20 mA…+20 mA
Operation accuracy ±0.2 mA
Maximum load (including wiring 700 Ω
resistance)
Hardware response time ~80 ms
Isolation level 4 kV

Table 1240: Ethernet interfaces

Ethernet interface Protocol Cable Data transfer rate
LAN1 (X1) TCP/IP protocol Fibre-optic cable with 100 MBits/s
LC connector or
shielded twisted pair
CAT 5e cable or better

Table 1241: LAN (X1) fibre-optic communication link

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path Distance
attenuation1)
1300 nm MM 62.5/125 LC <7.5 dB 2 km
μm or MM
50/125 μm
glass fibre
core

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together

Table 1242: X4/IRIG-B interface

Type Protocol Cable
Screw terminal, pin row IRIG-B Shielded twisted pair cable
header Recommended: CAT 5, Belden RS-485 (9841-
9844) or Alpha Wire (Alpha 6222-6230)

Table 1243: X9 Optical serial interface characteristics

Wave length Fibre type Connector Permitted path Distance
attenuation
820 nm MM 62.5/125 ST 4 dB/km 1000 m
820 mm MM 50/125 ST 4 dB/km 400 m
660 mm 1 mm Snap-in 10 m

630 series 1385

Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRS756508 F
Technical data

Table 1244: Degree of protection of flush-mounted protection relay

Description Value
Front side IP 40
Rear side, connection terminals IP 20

Table 1245: Degree of protection of the LHMI

Description Value
Front and side IP 42

Table 1246: Environmental conditions

Description Value
Operating temperature range -25...+55ºC (continuous)
Short-time service temperature range -40...+70ºC (<16h)
Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance
outside the temperature range of -25...+55ºC
Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure 86...106 kPa
Altitude up to 2000 m
Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85ºC

Table 1247: Environmental tests

Description Type test value Reference
Dry heat test (humidity <50%) • 96 h at +55ºC IEC 60068-2-2
• 16 h at +85ºC

Cold test • 96 h at -25ºC IEC 60068-2-1

• 16 h at -40ºC

Damp heat test, cyclic • 6 cycles at +25…55°C, Rh IEC 60068-2-30

>93%

Storage test • 96 h at -40ºC IEC 60068-2-1

• 96 h at +85ºC IEC 60068-2-2

1386 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 15
IED and functionality tests

Section 15 IED and functionality tests

Table 1248: Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Description Type test value Reference
100 kHz and 1 MHz burst IEC 61000-4-18, level 3
disturbance test IEC 60255-22-1
• Common mode 2.5 kV

• Differential mode 1.0 kV

3 MHz, 10 MHz and 30 MHz IEC 61000-4-18

burst disturbance test IEC 60255-22-1, class III
• Common mode 2.5 kV

Electrostatic discharge test IEC 61000-4-2, level 4

IEC 60255-22-2
IEEE C37.90.3.2001
• Contact discharge 8 kV

• Air discharge 15 kV

Radio frequency interference

tests
• Conducted, common 10 V (rms), f=150 kHz...80 MHz IEC 61000-4-6 , level 3
mode IEC 60255-22-6

• Radiated, pulse- 10 V/m (rms), f=900 MHz ENV 50204

modulated IEC 60255-22-3

• Radiated, amplitude- 10 V/m (rms), f=80...2700 MHz IEC 61000-4-3, level 3

modulated IEC 60255-22-3

Fast transient disturbance tests IEC 61000-4-4

IEC 60255-22-4, class A
• All ports 4 kV

Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5, level 3/2

IEC 60255-22-5
• Communication 1 kV line-to-earth

• Binary inputs, voltage 2 kV line-to-earth

inputs 1 kV line-to-line

• Other ports 4 kV line-to-earth, 2 kV line-to-

line
Power frequency (50 Hz) IEC 61000-4-8
magnetic field
Table continues on next page

630 series 1387

Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRS756508 F
IED and functionality tests

Description Type test value Reference

• 1...3 s 1000 A/m

• Continuous 300 A/m

Pulse magnetic field immunity 1000 A/m IEC 61000-4-9

test 6.4/16 µs
Damped oscillatory magnetic IEC 61000-4-10
field immunity test
• 2s 100 A/m

• 1 MHz 400 transients/s

Power frequency immunity test Binary inputs only IEC 60255-22-7, class A
IEC 61000-4-16
• Common mode 300 V rms

• Differential mode 150 V rms

Conducted common mode 15 Hz...150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16

disturbances Test level 3 (10/1/10 V rms)
Voltage dips and short 30%/10 ms IEC 61000-4-11
interruptions 60%/100 ms
60%/1000 ms
>95%/5000 ms
Electromagnetic emission tests EN 55011, class A
IEC 60255-25
• Conducted, RF-emission
(mains terminal)

0.15...0.50 MHz <79 dB(µV) quasi peak

<66 dB(µV) average
0.5...30 MHz <73 dB(µV) quasi peak
<60 dB(µV) average
• Radiated RF-emission

30...230 MHz <40 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,

measured at 10 m distance
230...1000 MHz <47 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,
measured at 10 m distance

Table 1249: Insulation tests

Description Type test value Reference
Dielectric tests IEC 60255-5
IEC 60255-27
• Test voltage 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min,
communication
Impulse voltage test IEC 60255-5
IEC 60255-27
Table continues on next page

1388 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 15
IED and functionality tests

Description Type test value Reference

• Test voltage 5 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J
1 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J,
communication
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-5
measurements IEC 60255-27
• Isolation resistance >100 MΩ, 500 V DC

Protective bonding resistance IEC 60255-27

• Resistance <0.1Ω, 4 A, 60 s

Table 1250: Mechanical tests

Description Reference Requirement
Vibration tests (sinusoidal) IEC 60068-2-6 (test Fc) Class 1
IEC 60255-21-1
Shock and bump test IEC 60068-2-27 (test Ea shock) Class 1
IEC 60068-2-29 (test Eb bump)
IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test IEC 60255-21-3 (method A) Class 1

Table 1251: Product safety

Description Reference
LV directive 2006/95/EC
Standard EN 60255-27 (2005)
EN 60255-1 (2009)

Table 1252: EMC compliance

Description Reference
EMC directive 2004/108/EC
Standard EN 50263 (2000)
EN 60255-26 (2007)

630 series 1389

Technical Manual
1390
1MRS756508 F Section 16
Applicable standards and regulations

Section 16 Applicable standards and regulations

EN 50263
EN 60255-26
EN 60255-27
EMC council directive 2004/108/EC
EU directive 2002/96/EC/175
IEC 60255
Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC

630 series 1391

Technical Manual
1392
1MRS756508 F Section 17
Glossary

Section 17 Glossary

100BASE-FX A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet

standard for local area networks (LANs) that uses fiber
optic cabling
100BASE-TX A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet
standard for local area networks (LANs) that uses
twisted-pair cabling category 5 or higher with RJ-45
connectors
ACT 1. Application Configuration tool in PCM600
2. Trip status in IEC 61850
AIM Analog input module
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AVR Automatic voltage regulator
BIO Binary input and output
CAT 5 A twisted pair cable type designed for high signal
integrity
CAT 5e An enhanced version of CAT 5 that adds specifications
for far end crosstalk
CB Circuit breaker
CBB Cycle building block
CBFP Circuit breaker failure protection
CFG Configuration file
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
COMTRADE Common format for transient data exchange for power
systems. Defined by the IEEE Standard.
Connectivity A collection of software and information related to a
package specific protection and control IED, providing system
products and tools to connect and interact with the IED
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive signal
CS Carrier send signal
CT Current transformer
DAT 1. Data attribute type
2. Data file

630 series 1393

Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRS756508 F
Glossary

Data set The content basis for reporting and logging containing
references to the data and data attribute values
DC 1. Direct current
2. Disconnector
3. Double command
DCB Directional comparison blocking scheme
DCUB Directional comparison unblocking scheme
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DNP3 A distributed network protocol originally developed by
Westronic. The DNP3 Users Group has the ownership
of the protocol and assumes responsibility for its
evolution.
DT Definite time
DUTT Direct underreach transfer trip
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
Ethernet A standard for connecting a family of frame-based
computer networking technologies into a LAN
FIFO First in, first out
FLC Full load current
GDE Graphical Display Editor in PCM600
GFC General fault criteria
GOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event
GPS Global Positioning System
HMI Human-machine interface
HSI Human-system interface
HV High voltage
HW Hardware
I/O Input/output
IDMT Inverse definite minimum time
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC 60870-5-103 1. Communication standard for protective equipment
2. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point
communication
IEC 61850 International standard for substation communication
and modeling

1394 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 17
Glossary

IEC 61850-8-1 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850

standard series
IED Intelligent electronic device
INF Information number
IP Internet protocol
IRF 1. Internal fault
2. Internal relay fault
IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group's time code format
B
LAN Local area network
LC Connector type for glass fiber cable, IEC 61754-20
LDC Line drop compensation
LED Light-emitting diode
LHMI Local human-machine interface
LLDB Live line dead bus
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MicroSCADA Substation automation system
MM 1. Multimode
2. Multimode optical fiber
MMS 1. Manufacturing message specification
2. Metering management system
MTBF Mean time between failures
MV Medium voltage
OPC server A software application that acts as an API or protocol
converter
PC 1. Personal computer
2. Polycarbonate
PCM600 Protection and Control IED Manager
Peak-to-peak 1. The amplitude of a waveform between its maximum
positive value and its maximum negative value
2. A measurement principle where the measurement
quantity is made by calculating the average from the
positive and negative peak values without including the
DC component. The peak-to-peak mode allows
considerable CT saturation without impairing the
performance of the operation.
Peak-to-peak with A measurement principle similar to the peak-to-peak
peak backup mode but with the function starting on two conditions:

630 series 1395

Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRS756508 F
Glossary

the peak-to-peak value is above the set start current or

the peak value is above two times the set start value
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter Setting tool in PCM600
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RCA Also known as MTA or base angle. Characteristic
angle.
REF630 Feeder protection and control relay
REG630 Generator protection and control relay
REM630 Motor protection and control IED
RET630 Transformer protection and control IED
RJ-45 Galvanic connector type
RLS Recursive least squares
RMS Root-mean-square (value)
RS-485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTD Resistance temperature detector
Rx Receive/Received
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCS Station control system
SMAI Signal matrix analog input
SMS 1. Short Message Service
2. Station monitoring system
SMT Signal Matrix tool in PCM600
Snap-in Connector type for plastic fiber cable
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SOTF Switch onto fault
ST Connector type for glass fiber cable
SW Software
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TCS Trip-circuit supervision
TRM Transformer input module
Tx Transmit/Transmitted
UTC Coordinated universal time

1396 630 series

Technical Manual
1MRS756508 F Section 17
Glossary

VDR Voltage-depended resistor

VT Voltage transformer
WAN Wide area network
WEI Weak-end infeed logic
WHMI Web human-machine interface

630 series 1397

Technical Manual
1398
1399
—
ABB Distribution Solutions
Distribution Automation
P.O. Box 699
FI-65101 VAASA, Finland
Phone +358 10 22 11

www.abb.com/mediumvoltage
www.abb.com/relion
1MRS756508 F

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved.